CCNA Certification All In One For Dummies

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

About the Authors Silviu Angelescu is a network and software engineer, consultant and technical trainer, specialized in data networks, storage networks and virtualization. He has worked as network and software engineer, consultant and corporate trainer for more than ten years at various high-tech companies and academic institutions, such as, Network Appliance (NetApp), Computer Associates (CA), CGI, Dawson College, and the University of Montreal. Silviu also ran a consulting business for training organizations, designing, developing, and deploying scheduling software and network services. He graduated in Computer Science at the University of Montreal and is currently an engineer and trainer in the Research Triangle Park, in North Carolina, USA. Andrew Swerczek is a network engineer, computer lab instructor, and technical writer with over twenty years experience in the Information Technology field. He has worked for various governmental agencies and contractors including the US Department of Defense and Wang Laboratories. Andrew has achieved many IT industry certifications such as CCNA, CNE, CNA, CIW, DCSNP, NACA, FCA, IBA, i-Net+, Network+, Server+, and A+. He is a graduate from the London School of Journalism, owns a small business, and currently resides in the Harz Mountains region, in Germany.

www.it-ebooks.info

Author’s Acknowledgments I would like to thank Katie Feltman, Pat O’Brien, John Edwards, and Bruce Tomlin: thanks for your hard work, support and patience. A lot of work goes into publishing and producing a book: I want to thank everyone at Wiley who worked behind the scenes to keep this project on track and make it happen. I also want to thank Andrew Swerczek for his hard work and contribution to this book: Chapters one to five in Book II, Chapters one to four in Book VI, Chapters one to four in Book VII. Thanks also to Ed Tetz for his contribution: Chapters two to five in Book V.

www.it-ebooks.info

Publisher’s Acknowledgments We’re proud of this book; please send us your comments at http://dummies.custhelp.com. For other comments, please contact our Customer Care Department within the U.S. at 877-762-2974, outside the U.S. at 317-572-3993, or fax 317-572-4002. Some of the people who helped bring this book to market include the following: Acquisitions, Editorial, and Media Development

Composition Services Project Coordinator: Katie Crocker

Project Editor: Pat O’Brien Senior Acquisitions Editor: Katie Feltman

Layout and Graphics: Christin Swinford, Christine Williams

Copy Editor: John Edwards

Proofreaders: Jessica Kramer, Toni Settle

Technical Editor: Bruce Tomlin

Indexer: Broccoli Information Mgt.

Editorial Manager: Kevin Kirschner

Special Help: Anne Sullivan

Media Development Project Manager: Laura Moss-Hollister Media Development Assistant Project Manager: Jenny Swisher Media Development Associate Producer: Shawn Patrick Editorial Assistant: Amanda Graham Sr. Editorial Assistant: Cherie Case Cartoons: Rich Tennant (www.the5thwave.com)

Publishing and Editorial for Technology Dummies Richard Swadley, Vice President and Executive Group Publisher Andy Cummings, Vice President and Publisher Mary Bednarek, Executive Acquisitions Director Mary C. Corder, Editorial Director Publishing for Consumer Dummies Diane Graves Steele, Vice President and Publisher Composition Services Debbie Stailey, Director of Composition Services

www.it-ebooks.info

The logo of the CompTIA Authorized Quality Curriculum (CAQC) program and the status of this or other training materials as “Authorized” under the CompTIA Authorized Quality Curriculum program signifies that, in CompTIA’s opinion, such training material covers the content of CompTIA’s related certification exam. The contents of this training material were created for the CompTIA A+ Certification exam covering CompTIA certification objectives that were current as of 2009. CompTIA has not reviewed or approved the accuracy of the contents of this training material and specifically disclaims any warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. CompTIA makes no guarantee concerning the success of persons using any such “Authorized” or other training material in order to prepare for any CompTIA certification exam. How to become CompTIA certified: This training material can help you prepare for and pass a related CompTIA certification exam or exams. In order to achieve CompTIA certification, you must register for and pass a CompTIA certification exam or exams. In order to become CompTIA certified, you must: 1.Select a certification exam provider. For more information please visit http://www.comptia.org/certification/general_information/ exam_locations.aspx. 2. Register for and schedule a time to take the CompTIA certification exam(s) at a convenient location. 3. Read and sign the Candidate Agreement, which will be presented at the time of the exam(s). The text of the Candidate Agreement can be found at http://www.comptia.org/certification/general_ information/candidate_agreement.aspx. 4. Take and pass the CompTIA certification exam(s). For more information about CompTIA’s certifications, such as its industry acceptance, benefits or program news, please visit www.comptia.org/ certification. CompTIA is a not-for-profit information technology (IT) trade association. CompTIA’s certifications are designed by subject matter experts from across the IT industry. Each CompTIA certification is vendor-neutral, covers multiple technologies and requires demonstration of skills and knowledge widely sought after by the IT industry. To contact CompTIA with any questions or comments, please call 1-630-6788300 or email [email protected].

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 4: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ......................................................... 587 Chapter 5: Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP).......................... 607 Chapter 6: Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Protocol .............................................. 625

Book V: Wireless Networks ....................................... 645 Chapter 1: Introducing Wireless Networks ................................................................ 647 Chapter 2: Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Security ...................................... 665 Chapter 3: Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Operation Modes ...................... 675 Chapter 4: Managing Cisco Wireless Local Area Networks ...................................... 691 Chapter 5: Configuring Cisco Wireless Local Area Networks .................................. 701

Book VI: Network Security ....................................... 715 Chapter 1: Network Security Basics ............................................................................ 717 Chapter 2: Introducing IP Access Lists (IP ACLs) ...................................................... 735 Chapter 3: Introducing Network Address Translation (NAT) .................................. 763 Chapter 4: Introducing Virtual Private Networks (VPNs)......................................... 785

Book VII: Wide Area Networks (WAN) ..................... 805 Chapter 1: Wide-Area Networking Basics ................................................................... 807 Chapter 2: HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control) Protocol ...................................... 823 Chapter 3: PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) ................................................................... 831 Chapter 4: Frame Relay ................................................................................................. 855

Appendix A: About the CD ........................................ 881 Appendix B: Cisco CCNA Exam Preperation ................ 885 Index ...................................................................... 897

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

xii

CCNA Certification All-in-One For Dummies

Layer 4: Transport ......................................................................................... 28 Connectionless transport ................................................................... 29 Connection-oriented transport .......................................................... 29 The most common TCP/IP protocols at Layer 4 .............................. 29 TCP flow control .................................................................................. 29 UDP simplicity ...................................................................................... 32 TCP/IP ports ......................................................................................... 32 Layer 3: Network ............................................................................................ 33 Some TCP/IP protocols at Layer 3 ..................................................... 34 Hierarchy of IP addresses ................................................................... 34 Layer 2: Data Link .......................................................................................... 36 Some TCP/IP protocols at Layer 2 ..................................................... 37 Address resolution .............................................................................. 37 Layer 1: Physical ............................................................................................ 37

Chapter 4: Data Encapsulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Introducing Data Encapsulation .................................................................. 41

Chapter 5: Binary, Hexadecimal, and Decimal Numbering Systems . . .49 Decimal Numbers .......................................................................................... 50 Binary Numbers ............................................................................................. 51 Hexadecimal Numbers .................................................................................. 53 Numbering systems notation ............................................................. 56 Bits, nibbles, and bytes ....................................................................... 56 Converting binary to hexadecimal .................................................... 57 Converting hexadecimal to binary .................................................... 58

Chapter 6: Local-Area Networks (LANs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Introduction to Local-Area Networks ......................................................... 63 Ethernet Networking ..................................................................................... 63 CSMA/CD protocol ............................................................................... 64 Duplex communication ....................................................................... 65 Ethernet Standards........................................................................................ 66 10-Mbps Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) ........................................................... 66 Fast Ethernet (100-Mbps) ................................................................... 68 Gigabit Ethernet (1000-Mbps) ............................................................ 70 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10000-Mbps) ..................................................... 73 Ethernet in the OSI Model ............................................................................ 75 Data link layer....................................................................................... 75 Physical layer ....................................................................................... 78

Chapter 7: Introducing Wide-Area Networks (WANs) . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Introducing Wide-Area Networks ................................................................ 85 Dedicated Leased Line Connections ........................................................... 86 Advantages of leased lines ................................................................. 86 Disadvantage of leased lines .............................................................. 86 Dedicated leased line protocols ........................................................ 87

www.it-ebooks.info

Table of Contents

xiii

Circuit-Switched Connections...................................................................... 87 Advantage of circuit-switched connections ..................................... 87 Disadvantages of circuit-switched connections .............................. 87 Circuit-switched connection protocols ............................................ 88 Packet-Switched Connections ...................................................................... 88 Advantages of packet-switched connections ................................... 88 Disadvantage of packet-switched connections ................................ 89 Packet-switched connection protocols............................................. 89 Cell-Switched Connections ........................................................................... 89 Advantages of cell-switched connections ........................................ 89 Disadvantages of cell-switched connections ................................... 90 Cell-switched connection protocols .................................................. 90

Chapter 8: Introducing Wireless Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Wireless LAN (WLAN) ......................................................................... 93 Wireless WAN ....................................................................................... 93 Benefits and Costs of Wireless Networks ................................................... 94 Security Risks ................................................................................................. 94 Service set identifier (SSID) ................................................................ 95 Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) ....................................................... 95 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) ........................................................... 95 MAC address filtering .......................................................................... 96

Chapter 9: Network Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Cisco Hierarchical Network Model.............................................................. 99 Core Layer ...................................................................................................... 99 Highly available core ......................................................................... 100 Distribution Layer ....................................................................................... 103 Access Layer ................................................................................................ 105 Benefits ......................................................................................................... 105 Specialization ..................................................................................... 105 Scalability............................................................................................ 106 Limitation of problem domain ......................................................... 107

Chapter 10: Introducing Cisco Hardware and Software . . . . . . . . . . .111 Introducing Cisco Products ....................................................................... 111 Cisco software .................................................................................... 112 Cisco hardware .................................................................................. 114 Introducing Cisco Device Configurations ................................................. 115 Startup configuration ........................................................................ 115 Running configuration ....................................................................... 115 Meet the Cisco IOS User Interface ............................................................. 116 Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI) ......................................... 116 Cisco IOS graphical user interface (GUI) ........................................ 130

www.it-ebooks.info

xiv


Book II: TCP/IP ........................................................ 165 Chapter 1: Introducing TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 TCP/IP communication ..................................................................... 168 We pioneered this .............................................................................. 168 Components of TCP/IP ................................................................................ 169 Introducing the major TCP/IP layers and protocols ..................... 174 Demystifying data encapsulation..................................................... 180

Chapter 2: TCP/IP Layers and Protocols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Information Exchange through the OSI Layer.......................................... 188 OSI Layers and Protocols ........................................................................... 190 The physical layer: Layer 1............................................................... 190 The data link layer: Layer 2 .............................................................. 193 The network layer: Layer 3 ............................................................... 197 The transport layer: Layer 4 ............................................................. 202 The session layer: Layer 5 ................................................................ 204 The presentation layer: Layer 6 ....................................................... 205 The application layer: Layer 7.......................................................... 205 TCP/IP Layers and Protocols ..................................................................... 207 The network access layer: Layer 1 .................................................. 208 The Internet layer: Layer 2 ............................................................... 208 The host-to-host transport layer: Layer 3....................................... 208 The application layer: Layer 4.......................................................... 208

Chapter 3: IP Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 The Purpose of IP Addresses — It’s All about the Delivery ................... 213 The Hierarchy of IP Addresses — Who’s in Charge? .............................. 214 Network and host addressing .......................................................... 214 Classes of IP addresses ..................................................................... 215 Other reserved addresses ................................................................ 219 Understanding network ID, host ID, and subnet masks ................ 220 Private IP Addresses — We Reserve the Right . . . .................................. 222 Broadcasting — Shouting to the World! ................................................... 223 Data-link Layer 2 broadcasts ............................................................ 223 Address Resolution Protocol — ARP’s on the Case, Sherlock!.............. 225 The purpose of ARP ........................................................................... 226 Proxy ARP ........................................................................................... 226 And what about RARP? ..................................................................... 226

Chapter 4: Subnetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Subnetting Basics ........................................................................................ 231 Purpose of subnetting ....................................................................... 232 Subnet masks...................................................................................... 234 Creating subnets ................................................................................ 235 Subnet mask, network ID, host ID, and broadcast IP .................... 236 Classless interdomain routing (CIDR) ............................................. 236

www.it-ebooks.info

Table of Contents

xv

IP Address Class and Subnet Mask ........................................................... 239 Class C IP address subnets ............................................................... 240 IP subnet zero..................................................................................... 240 Host addressing assignments........................................................... 241 Class B IP address subnets ............................................................... 243 Class A IP address subnets ............................................................... 245 Variable-Length Subnet Masks (VLSMs)................................................... 250 Purpose of VLSM ................................................................................ 250 VLSM design guidelines .................................................................... 252 Optimizing IP addressing with VLSM .............................................. 253 Summarization ............................................................................................. 253 Summarization investigated ............................................................. 254 Summarization and VLSM ................................................................. 255

Chapter 5: Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) ............................................................ 261 The Benefits of IPv6 ..................................................................................... 263 Introducing IPv6 Addressing ...................................................................... 264 IPv6 address notation........................................................................ 266 Configuring IPv6 ........................................................................................... 270 Address autoconfiguration — DHCP who? ..................................... 272 A dynamic approach ......................................................................... 273 ICMPv6 ................................................................................................ 275 Routing with IPv6......................................................................................... 275 Static routing — Gimme some static! .............................................. 275 Introducing IPv6 routing protocols ................................................. 276 Migrating to IPv6.......................................................................................... 279 Migration methods ............................................................................ 280

Book III: Switching with Cisco Switches ..................... 289 Chapter 1: Introducing Layer 2 Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Layer 2 — Data Link Layer Review ............................................................ 291 Purpose of a Layer 2 Switch ....................................................................... 292 Hubs..................................................................................................... 293 Bridges ................................................................................................ 294 Switches .............................................................................................. 295 Basic Switch Functions ............................................................................... 296 Address learning ................................................................................ 296 Flooding, forwarding, and filtering frames ..................................... 299 Avoiding loops ................................................................................... 303 Managing Port Security............................................................................... 306 Filter based on MAC address ........................................................... 306 Filter based on number of devices connected ............................... 307 Filter based on sticky MAC address ................................................ 307 Action triggered by filter................................................................... 307 Transmitting Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast ..................................... 307

www.it-ebooks.info

xvi


Chapter 2: Managing a Switch Using Cisco IOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Best Practice for Using Cisco Switches .................................................... 313 Connecting to a Cisco Switch..................................................................... 315 Connecting locally ............................................................................. 315 Connecting remotely ......................................................................... 318 Cisco Switch Startup Process .................................................................... 321 Configuring a Cisco Switch ......................................................................... 324 Initial switch configuration ............................................................... 325 Managing Cisco switch configuration ............................................. 338 Managing Cisco Switch Authentication .................................................... 352 Console password.............................................................................. 353 Telnet password ................................................................................ 354 Auxiliary password ............................................................................ 355 Privileged password .......................................................................... 356 Encrypting passwords....................................................................... 356 Enabling Secure Shell (SSH) ............................................................. 357 Recovering switch passwords.......................................................... 360

Chapter 3: Controlling Network Traffic with Cisco Switches . . . . . .369 Sending to MAC Addresses in Remote Networks .................................... 369 Sending frames within the LAN ........................................................ 369 Sending frames to a remote network .............................................. 370 Deciding the Fate of Frames ....................................................................... 375 Switching modes ................................................................................ 375 Switching in Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex Modes .................................... 378 Reviewing half-duplex Ethernet ....................................................... 378 Reviewing full-duplex Ethernet ........................................................ 378 Duplex mode best practice ............................................................... 378 Configuring port duplex mode on a Cisco switch.......................... 378 Configuring port speed on a Cisco switch ...................................... 379 Selecting a switch port ...................................................................... 379 Avoiding Loops with Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) .............................. 379

Chapter 4: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Introducing the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) ....................................... 386 STP Operation Flow ..................................................................................... 389 Electing a root bridge ........................................................................ 389 Assigning STP port types .................................................................. 393 Achieving STP convergence ............................................................. 398 Introducing Cisco Options for STP ............................................................ 401 PortFast ............................................................................................... 401 BPDUGuard ......................................................................................... 402 BPDUFilter........................................................................................... 403 UplinkFast ........................................................................................... 403 BackboneFast ..................................................................................... 405

www.it-ebooks.info

Table of Contents

xvii

Introducing Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) ................................ 405 Shorter delay before STP recalculation (max age timer) ............. 405 Alternate port and backup port ....................................................... 406 Enabling RSTP on a Cisco switch ..................................................... 407 EtherChannel................................................................................................ 407 EtherChannel and STP are friends ................................................... 407 EtherChannel versions ...................................................................... 408 Enabling EtherChannel on SW2 and SW5........................................ 409 Monitoring STP ............................................................................................ 410 Monitoring switch STP configuration.............................................. 410 Monitoring port STP configuration.................................................. 410

Chapter 5: Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Introducing Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) ................................. 416 VLANs keep things tidy ..................................................................... 416 VLANs subdivide the broadcast domain ........................................ 417 Benefits of VLANs ........................................................................................ 418 Managing VLANs .......................................................................................... 418 Create VLANs ..................................................................................... 419 Special-purpose VLANs ..................................................................... 419 Static and dynamic VLAN membership .......................................... 419 Identifying VLANs ........................................................................................ 421 Tagging data-link frames with a VLAN ID........................................ 421 VLAN Trunking............................................................................................. 422 EtherChannel and VLANs are friends .............................................. 423 VLAN or EtherChannel trunking? Both?.......................................... 425 Configuring EtherChannel and VLAN trunking .............................. 425 Introducing switch port types.......................................................... 426 Managing VLAN trunk ports ............................................................. 429 VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) ................................................................. 434 VTP creates and manages VLANs .................................................... 434 VTP does not manage VLAN port membership ............................. 434 VTP benefits ....................................................................................... 434 VTP domain ........................................................................................ 434 VTP server .......................................................................................... 435 VTP switch operating mode ............................................................. 435 VTP updates ....................................................................................... 436 VTP pruning ........................................................................................ 436 VLAN ID range .................................................................................... 436 VTP requirements .............................................................................. 437 Enabling VTP ...................................................................................... 437 Monitoring and troubleshooting VTP ............................................. 438 Routing Traffic from One VLAN to Another ............................................. 438 One router per VLAN ......................................................................... 439 One large router with one port per VLAN ...................................... 439 One subinterface per VLAN (router-on-a-stick) ............................. 440 Network (Layer 3) switch ................................................................. 440

www.it-ebooks.info

xviii


Chapter 6: Voice over IP (VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Introducing Voice over IP (VoIP)............................................................... 446 VoIP Requires Quality of Service (QoS) .................................................... 446 Class of service (CoS) (IEEE 802.1p)................................................ 447 Cisco IP Phone ............................................................................................. 447 Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) ................................................................ 450 Negotiating VLAN ............................................................................... 450 Negotiating CoS .................................................................................. 450 Negotiating Cisco IP phone PC port ................................................ 450 Configuring VoIP on Cisco Switches ......................................................... 451 Enabling QoS on the upstream switch ............................................ 451 Configuring switch access port to trust CoS .................................. 451 Enabling VoIP VLAN on the switch access port............................. 452

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting a Switch Using Cisco IOS. . . . . . . . . . . .455 Troubleshooting Cisco Switches ............................................................... 455 Gathering information about the switch......................................... 456 Troubleshooting switch connectivity ............................................. 473 Gather information about your network......................................... 485 Troubleshooting the startup configuration.................................... 494 Troubleshooting the running configuration ................................... 496

Book IV: Routing with Cisco Routers .......................... 503 Chapter 1: Introducing Layer 3 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 Layer 3 — Network Layer Review ............................................................. 505 Purpose of a Layer 3 Router ....................................................................... 508 Basic Router Functions ............................................................................... 511 Managing routing protocols ............................................................. 512 Building routing tables ...................................................................... 513 Routing packets.................................................................................. 513

Chapter 2: Managing a Router Using Cisco IOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Best Practices for Using Cisco Routers .................................................... 517 Connecting to a Cisco Router .................................................................... 519 Connecting locally ............................................................................. 519 Connecting remotely ......................................................................... 522 Cisco Router Startup Process .................................................................... 525 Configuring a Cisco Router......................................................................... 528 Initial router configuration ............................................................... 529 Managing Cisco router configuration .............................................. 540 Managing Cisco Router Authentication .................................................... 554 Console password.............................................................................. 555 Telnet password ................................................................................ 556 Auxiliary password ............................................................................ 557

www.it-ebooks.info

Table of Contents

xix

Privileged password .......................................................................... 558 Encrypting passwords....................................................................... 559 Enabling Secure Shell (SSH) ............................................................. 560 Recovering router passwords .......................................................... 562

Chapter 3: Network Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Introducing Network Routes ...................................................................... 567 Static routes........................................................................................ 568 Default routes ..................................................................................... 570 Dynamic routes .................................................................................. 571 Routing Protocols ........................................................................................ 571 Routed Protocols ......................................................................................... 572 Routing Decision Criteria ........................................................................... 572 Administrative distance .................................................................... 573 Routing protocol metrics .................................................................. 574 Routing Methods ......................................................................................... 576 Distance vector routing .................................................................... 576 Link-state routing ............................................................................... 580 Hybrid routing .................................................................................... 582 Configuring Routing Protocols................................................................... 582

Chapter 4: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Introducing Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ..................................... 588 An interior gateway protocol ........................................................... 588 Routing tables, updates, and hop count ......................................... 590 Routing error mitigation methods ................................................... 590 Split horizon ....................................................................................... 592 Convergence and timers ................................................................... 592 RIPv1 ............................................................................................................. 593 RIPv2 ............................................................................................................. 595 RIPng ............................................................................................................. 597 Configuring RIP ............................................................................................ 598 Verifying RIP ................................................................................................. 601

Chapter 5: Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) . . .607 IGRP — The Foundation of EIGRP ............................................................. 608 EIGRP Benefits.............................................................................................. 608 Characteristics of EIGRP ............................................................................. 609 EIGRP Operation .......................................................................................... 610 Basic components.............................................................................. 610 Routing tables .................................................................................... 610 Neighboring successors .................................................................... 612 EIGRP packet types ............................................................................ 612 Convergence ....................................................................................... 612 Route updates .................................................................................... 613 DUAL — Diffusing Update Algorithm .............................................. 613 Classful and classless routing .......................................................... 614

www.it-ebooks.info

xx


Configuring EIGRP ....................................................................................... 615 Start up EIGRP .................................................................................... 615 Enable EIGRP on router interfaces .................................................. 616 Verifying and Monitoring EIGRP Operation ............................................. 617 Inspect the routing table................................................................... 617 Inspect EIGRP protocol configuration ............................................. 618 Inspect EIGRP topology table configuration .................................. 618 Inspect EIGRP neighbor information ............................................... 619 Troubleshooting EIGRP .............................................................................. 620

Chapter 6: Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Introducing Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) .......................................... 625 Routing tables .................................................................................... 626 Characteristics of OSPF..................................................................... 626 Convergence ....................................................................................... 627 Route updates .................................................................................... 627 Cost metric ......................................................................................... 628 OSPF Routing Hierarchy ............................................................................. 628 OSPF route summarization ............................................................... 630 OSPF designated router (DR) ........................................................... 632 OSPF backup designated router (BDR) ........................................... 634 Configuring OSPF ......................................................................................... 634 Start up OSPF...................................................................................... 634 Enable OSPF on router interfaces .................................................... 635 Configure OSPF options .................................................................... 638 Verifying and Monitoring OSPF Operation ............................................... 639 Inspect the routing table................................................................... 639 Inspect the OSPF protocol configuration........................................ 640 Inspect the OSPF interface configuration ....................................... 640 Inspect the OSPF neighbor information .......................................... 640 Inspect the OSPF routing database ................................................. 640 Troubleshooting OSPF ................................................................................ 641

Book V: Wireless Networks ........................................ 645 Chapter 1: Introducing Wireless Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 Purpose of Wireless Networks ................................................................... 647 Going over the Air, Locally or Globally .................................................... 648 Wireless personal-area network (WPAN) ....................................... 648 Wireless local-area network (WLAN) .............................................. 648 Wireless metropolitan-area network (WMAN) ............................... 648 Wireless wide-area network (WWAN) ............................................. 648 Sharing the Airwaves .................................................................................. 649 Using unlicensed radio bands .......................................................... 649 Modulating the Airwaves ............................................................................ 651 Introducing signals ............................................................................ 651 Modulating signals ............................................................................. 652

www.it-ebooks.info

Table of Contents

xxi

Using RF channels .............................................................................. 653 Introducing RF modulation techniques .......................................... 655 Introducing Wireless Local-Area Network (WLAN) Standards (IEEE 802.11) .......................................................................... 657 2.4-GHz band ....................................................................................... 657 5-GHz band .......................................................................................... 660 2.4-GHz and 5-GHz bands .................................................................. 660

Chapter 2: Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Security . . . . . . .665 Recognizing Security Risks......................................................................... 665 Introducing Security Risk Mitigation Methods ........................................ 666 Authentication and data encryption ............................................... 667 MAC address filtering ........................................................................ 670 Hiding the service set identifier (SSID) ........................................... 670 Intrusion detection and intrusion prevention................................ 671 Changing default passwords ............................................................ 671 Management access........................................................................... 672

Chapter 3: Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 Ad Hoc Mode ................................................................................................ 675 Infrastructure Mode .................................................................................... 679 Autonomous mode ............................................................................ 681 Lightweight mode .............................................................................. 681 Service set ........................................................................................... 683 Basic service set (BSS) ...................................................................... 684 Extended service set (ESS) ............................................................... 684 Network planning and layout ........................................................... 685

Chapter 4: Managing Cisco Wireless Local Area Networks . . . . . . .691 Introducing the Cisco Unified Wireless Network Architecture (CUWN) .............................................................. 691 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller ......................................................... 692 Cisco WLAN Access Point (AP) Devices ......................................... 695 Cisco Wireless Control System (WCS) ............................................ 695 Lightweight Access Point Protocol (LWAPP) .......................................... 695 Adaptive Wireless Path Protocol (AWPP) ................................................ 697

Chapter 5: Configuring Cisco Wireless Local Area Networks. . . . . .701 Configuration Flow ...................................................................................... 701 Set up and verify the wired LAN to which the WLAN will connect....................................................... 701 Set up the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller(s) ................................. 702 Configure WLAN security.................................................................. 704 Set up Cisco access point(s) ............................................................ 705 Configuring backup controllers ....................................................... 707 Web authentication process ............................................................ 708 Example using the Cisco graphical user interface (GUI) .............. 709

www.it-ebooks.info

xxii


Book VI: Network Security ........................................ 715 Chapter 1: Network Security Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717 Network Zoning............................................................................................ 718 Recognizing Security Risks......................................................................... 722 Information collectors ....................................................................... 722 Introducing Security Risk Mitigation Methods ........................................ 725 IP access control lists (ACLs)........................................................... 726 NAT — The great masquerader ....................................................... 727 Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) ..................................................... 728 Cisco IOS Firewall .............................................................................. 728 Cisco IOS Firewall — A sample configuration ................................ 730

Chapter 2: Introducing IP Access Lists (IP ACLs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .735 The Purpose of Access Lists ...................................................................... 735 Types of ACLs .............................................................................................. 738 Managing ACLs — Best Practices .............................................................. 740 Creating ACLs............................................................................................... 742 Wildcard IP masks ............................................................................. 742 Creating and applying the ACL ........................................................ 745 Creating standard ACLs .................................................................... 745 Creating extended ACLs .................................................................... 747 Creating Telnet/SSH ACLs ................................................................. 749 Creating named ACLs ........................................................................ 751 Creating time-oriented ACLs ............................................................ 753 Creating switch port ACLs ................................................................ 754 Managing, Verifying, and Troubleshooting ACLs .................................... 755 Logging ACL IP matches.................................................................... 756 Configuring firewalls and ACLs with Cisco SDM GUI ..................... 757

Chapter 3: Introducing Network Address Translation (NAT). . . . . . .763 Purpose of NAT ............................................................................................ 763 Types of Network Address Translation .......................................... 764 Local and global addresses .............................................................. 766 Operational Flow of NAT ............................................................................ 767 Static NAT ........................................................................................... 767 Dynamic NAT operation.................................................................... 769 How overloading (PAT) operates .................................................... 769 Configuring NAT .......................................................................................... 770 Configuring static NAT ...................................................................... 771 Configuring dynamic NAT ................................................................. 773 Configuring Port Address Translation (PAT) ................................. 776 Managing NAT .............................................................................................. 777 Monitoring and troubleshooting NAT ............................................. 777 Using the CLI commands .................................................................. 778 Configuring NAT with the Cisco SDM GUI....................................... 780

www.it-ebooks.info

Table of Contents

xxiii

Chapter 4: Introducing Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) . . . . . . . . . .785 Purpose of VPNs .......................................................................................... 785 Type of VPNs ................................................................................................ 787 Choosing a VPN Implementation Method ................................................ 787 Using IPsec .......................................................................................... 788 Using Secure Socket Layer (SSL) ..................................................... 790 Using tunneling .................................................................................. 792 Split tunneling .................................................................................... 793 Creating and Managing IPsec VPNs........................................................... 793 Introducing IPsec protocols ............................................................. 794 Choosing transport mode versus tunnel mode ............................. 794 Configuring Cisco Virtual Private Networks ................................... 796 Creating a VPN with the Cisco Security Device Manager (SDM) .................................................................. 799 Enabling quality of service (QoS) in the VPN using Cisco SDM ............................................................................. 800

Book VII: Wide Area Networks (WAN) ...................... 805 Chapter 1: Wide-Area Networking Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .807 Introducing WANs ....................................................................................... 807 Purpose of WANs ............................................................................... 808 Data terminal equipment (DTE) and data communications equipment (DCE).............................................. 808 Cisco serial interfaces ....................................................................... 809 DCE serial interfaces ......................................................................... 810 Connection Types........................................................................................ 811 Encapsulation Types ................................................................................... 812 HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control).............................................. 812 PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol)........................................................... 812 SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol) ................................................. 813 Frame Relay ........................................................................................ 813 ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) ............................................. 813 X.25 ...................................................................................................... 815 Introducing Cable Connections ................................................................. 815 RJ-45 cabling ....................................................................................... 815 DB-25 cabling and adapters .............................................................. 817 Introducing Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Connections......................... 818

Chapter 2: HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control) Protocol . . . . . . . . .823 Introducing the High-Level Data Link Control Protocol ......................... 823 HDLC links........................................................................................... 823 Data framing ....................................................................................... 824 SLARP .................................................................................................. 825 Configuring HDLC ........................................................................................ 826 Monitoring HDLC ......................................................................................... 827

www.it-ebooks.info

xxiv


Chapter 3: PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .831 What Is PPP?................................................................................................. 831 Operational Flow of PPP ............................................................................. 834 Link Control Protocol (LCP)....................................................................... 836 Purpose of LCP ................................................................................... 837 LCP options ........................................................................................ 837 Network Control Protocol (NCP) ............................................................... 838 PAP and CHAP Authentication................................................................... 839 Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) ...................................... 839 Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) ............... 840 Configuring PPP ........................................................................................... 841 Set up router host names used for authentication........................ 842 Configure passwords to authenticate between routers ............... 842 Configure PPP encapsulation on the router interface................... 843 Configure PAP and CHAP authentication on both routers ........... 844 Configuring PPP callback for ISDN Dial on Demand Routing (DDR) ................................................................. 845 Configuring PPP with the Cisco Security Device Manager (SDM) .................................................................. 846 Monitoring and Troubleshooting PPP ...................................................... 847 PPP link quality monitoring .............................................................. 848 PPP debug commands ....................................................................... 848

Chapter 4: Frame Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .855 Introducing Frame Relay ............................................................................ 855 Purpose of Frame Relay WAN connections .................................... 855 Establishing virtual circuits.............................................................. 856 Identifying virtual circuits using data-link connection identifiers (DLCIs) ..................................................... 857 Reserving bandwidth using access rate and CIR guarantee ........ 858 Frame Relay link status control using LMI ..................................... 859 Frame Relay frame structure ............................................................ 860 Frame Relay flow and congestion control using DE, FECN, and BECN ............................................................ 861 Frame Relay address resolution using Inverse ARP ...................... 863 Managing Frame Relay ................................................................................ 863 Frame Relay topologies ..................................................................... 863 Operational flow of Frame Relay ...................................................... 866 Split horizon issues in a Frame Relay WAN .................................... 867 Configuring single interfaces for Frame Relay over a point-to-point link .................................................... 868 Configuring subinterfaces for Frame Relay over multipoint links ........................................................... 870 Configuring Frame Relay with the Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM).................... 873 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Frame Relay ........................................ 873

www.it-ebooks.info

Table of Contents

xxv

Appendix A: About the CD ......................................... 881 System Requirements ................................................................................. 881 Using the CD ................................................................................................. 881 What You Will Find on the CD.................................................................... 882 Prep Test ............................................................................................. 882 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 883

Appendix B: Cisco CCNA Exam Preperation................. 885 CCNA: Foundation of Cisco Certification Pyramid .................................. 885 CCNA Skills ................................................................................................... 885 CCNA Adaptive Testing............................................................................... 886 Using This Book to Prepare for the Exams .............................................. 887 Making Arrangements to Take the Exams ................................................ 888 The Day the Earth Stood Still: Exam Day .................................................. 888 Arriving at the exam location ........................................................... 888 Taking the exam ................................................................................. 889 2009 Examination Objectives ..................................................................... 891

Index ....................................................................... 897

www.it-ebooks.info

Introduction

T

he CCNA certification will serve as a basic foundation for a number of other certifications that you may pursue. The exam tests your knowledge of CCNA hardware and software used in today’s computer world, and the certification is one of the most popular certifications for IT professionals to prove their hardware and software knowledge.

About This Book This book is designed to be a hands-on, practical guide to help you pass the CCNA exam. This book is written in a way that helps you understand complex technical content and prepares you to apply that knowledge to real-world scenarios. I understand the value of a book that covers the points needed to pass the CCNA exams, but I also understand the value of ensuring that the information helps you perform IT-related tasks when you are on the job. That is what this book offers you — key points to pass the exams combined with practical information to help you in the real world, which means that this book can be used in more than one way: ✦ An exam preparation tool: Because my goal is to help you pass the CCNA exams, this book is packed with exam-specific information. You should understand everything that is in this book before taking the exams. ✦ A reference: Rely on my extensive experience in the IT industry not only to study for (and pass) the exams but also to help you perform common computer-related tasks on the job. I hope you find this book a useful tool that you can refer to time and time again in your career.

Foolish Assumptions I make a few assumptions about you as a reader and have written this book with these assumptions in mind: ✦ You are interested in obtaining the CCNA. After all, the focus of this book is helping you pass the exams. ✦ You will study hard and do as much hands-on work as possible. There is a lot of content on the exam, and you will most likely need to read over the information a few times to ensure that you understand the content. You should also experiment as much as possible after you read a particular topic

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Contents at a Glance Chapter 1: Introducing Computer Networks...................................................... 5

Chapter 7: Introducing Wide-Area Networks (WANs) .................................... 85

Purpose of Computer Networks ............. 5 Operation Flow of Computer Networks ............................................... 7 Topologies of Computer Networks ...... 10

Introducing Wide-Area Networks ......... 85 Dedicated Leased Line Connections ... 86 Circuit-Switched Connections .............. 87 Packet-Switched Connections .............. 88 Cell-Switched Connections ................... 89

Chapter 2: The OSI Reference Model ... 15 Introduction to the OSI Reference Model ................................. 15 Seven Layers ........................................... 15 Benefits of the OSI Reference Model ... 19

Chapter 3: Introducing the TCP/IP Protocol Suite............................................ 25 Introduction to the TCP/IP Protocol Suite ..................................... 26 Layer 7: Application ............................... 26 Layer 6: Presentation ............................. 27 Layer 5: Session ...................................... 28 Layer 4: Transport ................................. 28 Layer 3: Network .................................... 33 Layer 2: Data Link................................... 36 Layer 1: Physical .................................... 37

Chapter 4: Data Encapsulation ............... 41 Introducing Data Encapsulation........... 41

Chapter 8: Introducing Wireless Networks.................................................... 93 Benefits and Costs of Wireless Networks ............................................. 94 Security Risks ......................................... 94

Chapter 9: Network Design .................... 99 Cisco Hierarchical Network Model ...... 99 Core Layer ............................................... 99 Distribution Layer ................................ 103 Access Layer ......................................... 105 Benefits .................................................. 105

Chapter 10: Introducing Cisco Hardware and Software ........................................... 111 Introducing Cisco Products ................ 111 Introducing Cisco Device Configurations .................................. 115 Meet the Cisco IOS User Interface ..... 116

Chapter 5: Binary, Hexadecimal, and Decimal Numbering Systems ................... 49 Decimal Numbers ................................... 50 Binary Numbers ..................................... 51 Hexadecimal Numbers .......................... 53

Chapter 6: Local-Area Networks (LANs) ......................................................... 63 Introduction to Local-Area Networks ... 63 Ethernet Networking.............................. 63 Ethernet Standards ................................ 66 Ethernet in the OSI Model ..................... 75

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 1: Introducing Computer Networks Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the purpose and functions of computer networks ✓ Describing common network applications ✓ Describing common networking devices ✓ Describing the operation flow of computer networks and seeing how

networking devices control the operation flow ✓ Describing the impact of applications (Voice over IP and Video over IP)

on a network ✓ Describing the components required for network and Internet

communications ✓ Describing the topologies of computer networks

C

CNA certification not only attests your knowledge about Cisco networking, but it also attests your knowledge about networking technologies in general. This is one of the reasons why CCNA certification is the gold-standard certification in the networking industry.

Purpose of Computer Networks You link computers in a network for the same reason that people network. People networks are necessary to accomplish tasks that cannot be accomplished by a single individual. The same applies to computers. Computer networks were developed to aggregate the computing power of several individual computers into initially local networks, then campus networks, then metropolitan networks, then countrywide networks, and finally, global networks. A computer network is a group of computer host devices that communicate with each other. To enable this communication, the computer host devices are connected using wired or wireless connections. The communication is controlled by network software running on the computer host devices and on network devices.

www.it-ebooks.info

6

Purpose of Computer Networks

Computer host devices can be any other devices used to access the network, including servers, workstations, personal computers, smart phones, and laptops. Network devices can be any devices that stand between computer host devices, including switches, routers, hubs, repeaters, and firewalls Network devices control and optimize communication between host devices.

Network applications What’s the purpose? Here are just a few network application examples: ✦ World Wide Web: Technically, this is a network application that allows the exchange of text pages coded in Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) using the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP). Initially, these HTML pages only supported hyperlinks to jump from one page to another. Now, HTTP and HTML have been augmented with dynamic extensions to allow a much more advanced, rich, multimedia Web experience than just jumping from one page to another. ✦ Electronic mail: I am sure that you have extensively used this one. This is a network application that allows the exchange of messages between two hosts. In fact, studies show that e-mail is by far the most commonly used network application. ✦ File transfer and file sharing: This network application allows the transfer of files from one computer host device to another. Several variations of this application exist, such as File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Secure FTP (SFTP), Network File System (NFS), and Server Message Block (SMB), but all versions serve the same purpose: to transfer files from one network host to another. ✦ Remote control: This network application allows you to control a computer host remotely from another host in the network. As with file transfer, several remote control applications exist, such as Windows Remote Desktop, Virtual Network Computing (VNC), and remote shell (rsh). ✦ Voice over IP (VoIP) and Video over IP: This network application allows the transfer of voice and video signals over the Internet Protocol. Many Web sites stream video over the Internet today. These sites use some VoIP network application to wrap their video content in IP packets and send them over the network to the computer host that requested the streamed video content. Another example of VoIP is Cisco IP phones, which are being adopted today by many organizations to save costs by concentrating their phone and data traffic over the same IP infrastructure.

www.it-ebooks.info

Operation Flow of Computer Networks

7

• Isolated, that is, connecting only to a few computer hosts locally • Connected to other data networks ✦ High availability (HA) and parallel processing: This network application enables computer hosts to act as a single logical host, sometimes also called a computer cluster. The hosts use clustering software that manages the logical “supercomputer.” The clustering software needs to have those physical computers interconnected in a network. Computer clusters are used for the following: • High availability: Several levels of high availability exist, but generally speaking, HA implies that whenever one of the physical computers in the cluster fails, the remaining computer(s) takes over the load of the failed computer. • Parallel processing: In parallel processing, all physical computers in the cluster can process data at the same time, thereby improving processing speed and reliability. Both HA and parallel processing require a network connection between the physical computer hosts involved.

Operation Flow of Computer Networks A simple network can be three hosts connected to a hub. A hub works very much like a multiplexer, or a multiple socket power bar: Hosts connect to the hub, and they can “speak” and “hear” each other. To initiate a communication, a host needs information about another host on the network: ✦ Logical (IP) address, to establish a connection between upper-layer network protocols and applications of the hosts. ✦ NIC physical (MAC) address to establish a connection between his network interface card and John’s to transmit electrical signals between the NICs, over the network. A host’s logical (IP) address can be obtained through a name resolution, to resolve the host name (John) to his IP address. There are several options: ✦ Query a name server, also known as a Domain Name System (DNS) server to obtain the IP address for the name. DNS servers keep tables of

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 1

Introducing Computer Networks

✦ Shared network storage: This network application connects advanced specialized storage devices to a storage network, making them accessible to any computer host connected to that storage network. Storage networks can be either

8

Operation Flow of Computer Networks

host names and their corresponding IP addresses. Whenever they are queried for the IP address of a host, they search the host name in their table, and if they find it, they return the IP address. ✦ Use a hosts file that lists the host and its corresponding IP address. All hosts can have a local hosts file that lists the hosts in the network with their corresponding IP address. This is a simple method to resolve host names to IP addresses, but hosts files need to be maintained manually. Consequently, this method does not scale. DNS servers are typically used instead. The logical IP address can be used to obtain the physical (MAC) address to establish a connection between the NICs. In a small network, a host can simply broadcast a request to obtain another host’s MAC address. The broadcast is sent to the data link layer broadcast address, which is FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF. This is the standard broadcast address to query for MAC addresses. In larger networks, the amount of requests on the data link layer would harm performance. Thus, it is best to limit the size of the network. So, two basic issues are at hand: ✦ “Noise” generated by broadcast queries: One computer sends a broadcast query to every other device in the network to obtain an IP address or a MAC address, and eventually the target computer responds. Meanwhile, all computers in the broadcast domain have “heard” the broadcast request. They were disturbed by a request that does not concern them. If lots of broadcast requests are being sent on the network by hosts that just joined the network, for example, a broadcast storm can occur: Everyone is disturbed by everyone’s broadcast request, and the network performance is considerably impacted. ✦ Message collision: After two computers know about each other and they start to communicate, they send data frames on the link that is shared by all other computers in that network segment. If two computers try to send frames at the same time, on the same wire, the frames collide. In that case, both computers back off: They stop sending frames, they wait a little while, and they try to resend. You have no guarantee that the frames will not collide again when they are resent. Typically, there are few chances that they collide again, because the two computers wait random time periods that are likely different. However, collisions do happen, and they can slow a network considerably. Remember the meeting room example: The more people in the room, the more chances that everyone tries to speak at the same time. It’s the same with computers: The more hosts you add to a network segment, the more chances of having frame collisions. It’s best to keep network segments as small as possible.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

10

Topologies of Computer Networks

Each port of a switch is a collision domain. Switches learn about MAC addresses connected to their ports, and they build an internal table that lists which MAC address is connected to each port. The switch identifies the port where the destination MAC address is connected and forwards the frame only on that port. Other hosts don’t receive it. This dramatically reduces collision chances and thereby improves network performance. Switches limit the collision domain, but they do not limit the broadcast domain. The switch broadcasts requests on all ports. Broadcast domains can be limited by either using virtual local-area networks (VLANs) on a switch or by using routers.

Topologies of Computer Networks Networks can be arranged in various topologies, or layouts. The most common topologies are as follows: ✦ Point-to-point: Two hosts connect directly to each other, as shown in Figure 1-1. The sending end of one host is connected to the receiving end of the other host. In its simplest form, the two hosts are connected with a crossover cable. This is usually the case in serial connections.

Figure 1-1: Pointto-point topology.

Host A

Host B

✦ Star: Hosts connect to a central device, as shown in Figure 1-2. All traffic flows through the central device. The star topology is also known as a hub-and-spoke topology. Ethernet networks using hubs or switches and twisted-pair cabling are star topologies. ✦ Ring: Hosts are connected sequentially in a daisy-chain fashion, as shown in Figure 1-3. Traffic flows around the ring. The last host in the ring is connected to the first host, thereby closing the ring. Token Ring is the typical ring topology example. Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) is also a ring topology. ✦ Bus: As shown in Figure 1-4, hosts are connected through a single cable, usually coaxial cable. Ethernet networks using coaxial cable are bus topologies.

www.it-ebooks.info

Topologies of Computer Networks

Host A

Hub

Host D

Host E

Host F

Host A

Host B

Host C

Figure 1-3: Ring topology.

Host D

Host E

Host A

Introducing Computer Networks

Figure 1-2: Star topology.

Book I Chapter 1

Host B

Host C

Host F

Host B

Host C

Figure 1-4: Bus topology.

www.it-ebooks.info

11

Host D

12

Topologies of Computer Networks ✦ Mesh: Multiple hosts are connected point to point to each other in a mesh topology, as shown in Figure 1-5. These are multiple point-to-point connections that typically link every host in the network with every other host in the network. You find two types of mesh topologies: • Full-mesh topologies provide several connections between hosts in the network, thereby improving reliability. The cost is high, though. • Partial-mesh topologies are a good compromise because they can offer multiple connections for certain mission-critical hosts, yet they present cost savings over full-mesh configurations.

Host A

Host C

Host D

Figure 1-5: Mesh topology.

Host B

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 2: The OSI Reference Model Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the OSI reference model ✓ Describing the purpose and basic operation of each layer in the OSI

reference model ✓ Describing the benefits of the OSI reference model ✓ Describing the purpose and basic operation of the protocols in the OSI

and TCP/IP models ✓ Associating network devices to each layer in the OSI reference model

T

his chapter covers the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) networking reference model. You discover the seven layers, their purpose, and how they relate to each other. The data encapsulation concept is also introduced.

Introduction to the OSI Reference Model The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) defined the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) reference model to standardize networking of devices from different vendors. The OSI reference model is mostly an architecture blueprint that networking and computer device manufacturers implement. The OSI model has never been implemented exactly as defined. The TCP/IP protocol stack is the closest implementation available today.

Seven Layers The OSI reference model is designed in seven functional layers. Each layer has a precise mission, and each layer works fairly independently of the upper and lower layers. Upper layers use the services provided by lower layers, but the internal workings of each layer are not visible to other layers.

www.it-ebooks.info

16

Seven Layers

This independence is achieved through encapsulation and very clearly defined interfaces between layers. Here are the layers in a nutshell: ✦ Top layers build an application data payload that is divided by the lower transport layer into several small data chunks called segments. Each segment is numbered so that the receiving host can reassemble the application data. ✦ The transport segments are then forwarded down to the network layer, which tags each segment with logical source and destination addresses and some control information, and hands over the resulting shippable data packet to the lower data link layer. ✦ The data link layer adds the physical source address of the sender and the physical destination address of the receiver if the receiver is located in the same local network as the sender. If the receiver is not located in the same local network as the sender, the data link layer adds the physical destination address of the gateway in the local network. The gateway of a local network is usually a router that connects the local network to other networks. Here are the basic ideas behind encapsulation: ✦ Each layer encapsulates the data and controls the data of upper layers within its own control data. ✦ The data chunk encapsulated within the control data of each layer travels from the sending host to the receiving host. ✦ The receiving host unwraps the successive control information layers that encapsulate the data. ✦ Top layers on the sending host hand off the data to the transport layer and trust the transport layer (and the layers beneath transport) to ship it to the receiving host. ✦ The data ends up being sliced into smaller chunks. The data is also augmented with control information at each layer. The control information added by each layer is wrapped around by the control data of the lower layers on the sending host. ✦ The data is unwrapped on the receiving host.

Layer 7: Application This layer represents the various network applications such as e-mail reader, Web browser, Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), File Transfer Protocol (FTP), and Network File System (NFS).

www.it-ebooks.info

Seven Layers

17

✦ The application layer provides a user interface and processes network data.

✦ The application layer on the receiving host consumes the network data produced and transmitted by the sender host.

Layer 6: Presentation This layer is mostly concerned with data format. It converts the data between different formats so that both the sender and the receiver can use heterogeneous data. For example, mail messages contain various data formats: text, application attachments, video, audio, and graphical signature. ✦ The presentation layer on the sending host receives the data payload from the application layer. ✦ The presentation layer on the sending host converts the data into a format that is easily transportable over the network. ✦ The presentation layer on the receiving host converts the data from the network format back to its native format that can be easily interpreted, used, and displayed by the application layer above.

Layer 5: Session Some applications need to open logical communication channels between the computer hosts. Logical communication channels (sessions) maintain data about the communication established between the network application running on the sending host and the network application running on the receiving host. The session layer does the following: ✦ Opens and maintains logical communication channels between network applications running on the sending host and network applications running on the receiving host. ✦ Handles authentication: Some network applications use authentication mechanisms before they open a logical communication channel (session) with a remote host.

Layer 4: Transport The transport layer manages the transport of data between two hosts over a network. In a nutshell, the transport layer does the following:

www.it-ebooks.info

The OSI Reference Model

✦ The application layer on the sending host produces the network data to be transmitted from the sender host.

Book I Chapter 2

18

Seven Layers ✦ Slices the data to be transmitted into small chunks called data segments that can be easily sent over the network medium. ✦ Reassembles the data in order on the receiving host: Data segments are not guaranteed to arrive in order at destination since they may use different routes to reach the destination host. The transport layer is responsible to reassemble the data in order on the receiving host..

Layer 3: Network The network layer routes data packets across networks that link the sending and the receiving host. In a nutshell, the network layer does the following: ✦ Chooses the best route to send packets between hosts. ✦ Assigns logical addresses to all devices in the network to be able to identify each source host and each destination host, as well as each network through which packets need to be routed. Logical addresses are assigned at the network protocol level. Physical addresses are assigned on a physical device, such as a network card. ✦ Receives each data segment from the transport layer on the sending host and wraps it in a data packet along with routing data. The packet is sent down to the data link layer to send it over the network physical medium. ✦ On the receiving host, the network layer unwraps the packet received to extract the data segment and sends it up to the transport layer. Several protocols operate at the network layer, such as IP, IPX, AppleTalk, and SNA, but the CCNA test is only concerned with IP. The Internet Protocol (IP) is the TCP/IP implementation of the network layer. IP addresses are logical addresses provided by the IP in TCP/IP. Cisco routers are Layer 3 (network layer) devices. You read more about Cisco routers in Book IV.

Layer 2: Data link The data link layer does the following: ✦ Transmits the data on the physical medium. ✦ Routes the data locally on the physical network medium. The data link layer uses physical addresses assigned to each physical network device in the local network to route data from one physical device to another.

www.it-ebooks.info

Benefits of the OSI Reference Model

19

✦ The data link layer receives each packet from the network layer on the sending host and wraps it in a data frame along with local routing data.

✦ On the receiving host, the data link layer unwraps the data frame received to extract the packet and sends it to the network layer. Cisco switches are Layer 2 (data link layer) devices. You read more about Cisco switches in Book III.

Layer 1: Physical The physical layer provides the electrical, optical, or over-the-air connection between the sending host device and the receiving host device. This typically involves copper or fiber-optic cabling, or wireless radio connections, patch panels, signal repeaters, submarine cables, or satellites. CCNA certification does not require you to be a space science expert. However, you do need to understand that data is always converted into bits that can be transmitted over a medium using electrical current or optical signals that simulate a 1 (signal) or a 0 (no signal). In a nutshell, the physical layer defines mechanical, electrical, optical, radio, procedural, and functional standards to enable the transmission of data-link (Layer 2) frames over a certain transmission medium. These standards define how a physical link is built, activated, maintained, and deactivated to enable transmissions between DTE (data terminal equipment) and DCE (data communications equipment). DTEs are host devices. DCEs are network devices, that is, any device that stands between two host devices. Most hubs amplify the electrical signal; therefore, they are really repeaters with several ports. Hubs and repeaters are Layer 1 (physical layer) devices.

Benefits of the OSI Reference Model A layered network model, such as the OSI reference model, has several advantages: ✦ Independently operating layers with clearly defined interlayer interfaces allow layers to evolve internally without impact on other layers. As long as a layer continues to interact the same way with upper and lower layers, it can change internally to adapt to new technologies and needs.

www.it-ebooks.info

The OSI Reference Model

✦ The data link layer sends each data frame down to the physical layer to code an electrical or optical signal to transmit the data frame over a wire or over the air (wireless transmission).

Book I Chapter 2

20

Benefits of the OSI Reference Model ✦ The network communication problem is divided into smaller problems. By dividing the network communication process into several precise tasks and by assigning a specific layer to each task, it’s easier to manage the whole process. It also allows each layer to specialize to specific network communication contexts. For example, the physical layer constantly changes to support new transmission media. However, other layers do not need to change because the physical layer interacts using the same interfaces with upper layers, even if a new transmission medium is added to the support list. Thus, the network model as a whole can adapt to support new media with localized change at the physical layer only. ✦ A network reference model provides a blueprint for all manufacturers, guaranteeing compatibility of varied devices from various manufacturers.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 3: Introducing the TCP/IP Protocol Suite Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the TCP/IP network protocol family ✓ Describing the purpose and basic operation of each layer in the TCP/IP

network protocol family ✓ Describing the benefits of the TCP/IP network protocol family ✓ Describing the purpose and basic operation of the protocols in the

TCP/IP network protocol family ✓ Associating network devices to each layer in the TCP/IP network

protocol family ✓ Describing how TCP/IP protocols relate to each layer in the OSI

reference model ✓ Describing connection-oriented and connectionless data transport ✓ Demonstrating TCP flow control features, such as sequencing,

acknowledgments, and the TCP sliding window ✓ Demonstrating the TCP three-way handshake process ✓ Describing the purpose and basic operation of TCP ports ✓ Describing the difference and the relationship between MAC addresses

and IP addresses ✓ Demonstrating the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)

R

ead this chapter to find out about the Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) suite. TCP/IP is one of the most important topics on the CCNA test. You first look at a diagram of the TCP/IP protocol suite that illustrates how TCP/IP relates to the OSI network reference model. Next, you review each TCP/IP layer and the most common protocols and applications that operate at each layer.

www.it-ebooks.info

26

Introduction to the TCP/IP Protocol Suite

Introduction to the TCP/IP Protocol Suite The Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) reference model is mostly an architecture blueprint for networking and computer device manufacturers. The OSI model has never been implemented exactly as defined. The TCP/IP protocol family is the closest implementation available today. Read the following sections to get acquainted with the TCP/IP protocol stack. TCP/IP implements almost the same networking layers as the OSI reference model. However, some TCP/IP protocols work at more than one level.

Layer 7: Application The application layer represents the various network applications such as e-mail reader and Web browser. It is important to distinguish between Layer 7 protocols and Layer 7 software applications. For example, you use Web-browsing software to view Web pages that are transferred to your computer using the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP). Web pages are coded in Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) text format. The Web browser is a Layer 7 network application. The HTTP protocol is a Layer 7 protocol.

Some TCP/IP protocols at Layer 7 The following TCP/IP protocols are found at Layer 7: ✦ SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used to transfer, edit, and display e-mail messages. ✦ HTTP: Hypertext Transfer Protocol is used to transfer text in HTML format from one host to another. HTML is the Hypertext Markup Language that marks up text with hyperlinks to allow jumping from one text document to another. The Web is based on HTTP and HTML. ✦ FTP: File Transfer Protocol is used to transfer files between hosts. ✦ NFS: Network File System is used to share file systems over the network. ✦ SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol is used to provide a distributed network management framework to monitor and manage host and network devices over the network. ✦ DNS: Domain Name System is a protocol that helps keep track of host names and logical (IP) addresses in a network. ✦ DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is used to assign dynamic logical addresses (IP addresses) to hosts in a network.

www.it-ebooks.info

Layer 6: Presentation

27

Some TCP/IP software applications at Layer 7 The following TCP/IP software applications are found at Layer 7:

✦ Web browser: A browser is used to view Web pages. Web browsers use HTTP to transfer Web pages to and from your computer. Web browsers also work at the presentation layer because they need to convert and render non-HTML format that may be embedded in an HTML Web page. For instance, when you browse a Web page that contains a video-streaming window, the Web page contains code embedded into the HTML text to instruct the Web browser on how to play that video stream. Remember that Layer 6 is doing the data conversion.

Layer 6: Presentation The presentation layer is mostly concerned with data format. It converts the data between different formats so that both the sender and the receiver can use heterogeneous data. Layer 6 protocols and Layer 6 software applications exist. For example, MIME is a Layer 6 protocol that is used by e-mail software programs and Web browsers (Layer 6 applications) to convert e-mail contents that are not text into a data format that can be viewed, rendered, or otherwise processed on the computer host.

Some TCP/IP protocols at Layer 6 The following TCP/IP protocols are found at Layer 6: ✦ MIME: Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions are used to allow e-mail applications to convert e-mail message contents other than text into a data format that is supported on the receiving host. MIME is also used to code nontext data into an outgoing mail message.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing the TCP/ IP Protocol Suite

✦ E-mail application: This application is used to read, edit, archive, and otherwise manage e-mail messages. E-mail applications typically use SMTP to send and receive e-mails to and from remote hosts. E-mail applications also work at Layer 6, the presentation layer. For example, e-mail applications use the Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) protocol to convert audio, video, picture, graphical, and even software application contents in e-mail messages into a format that can be displayed, rendered, or played on the receiving host. Whenever you send audio or video, your e-mail application also uses MIME to code the audio/video contents within the e-mail message in a format that is easily transferable over the network. Remember that Layer 6 is doing the data conversion.

Book I Chapter 3

28

Layer 5: Session ✦ Unicode: Modern e-mail applications and Web browsers use Unicode at the presentation layer to convert characters between the character set of the sender and the character set of the receiver. Unicode provides a standard way to code characters in different character sets, including multi byte characters for some languages.

Some TCP/IP software applications at Layer 6 The following TCP/IP software applications are found at Layer 6: ✦ E-mail application: E-mail applications use the MIME protocol to convert audio, video, picture, graphical, and even software application contents in e-mail messages. ✦ Web browser: Browsers also use the MIME protocol to convert nonHTML contents in Web pages.

Layer 5: Session The session layer maintains a logical communication channel between a network application running on the sending host and a network application running on the receiving host. Sometimes the session layer also provides authentication services when sessions are established. The following TCP/IP protocols are found at Layer 5: ✦ Telnet: A protocol used to open login sessions on a computer host. ✦ RPC: Remote-procedure call protocol is used to allow the execution of procedures (programs) on remote hosts. ✦ iSCSI: The Internet small computer system interface protocol allows you to send SCSI commands over a TCP/IP network. iSCSI is used to interconnect specialized storage devices and computer hosts using a TCP/IP network.

Layer 4: Transport The transport layer slices up the data to be transmitted into small chunks called data segments that can be easily sent over the network medium. The segments may end up taking different routes to get to their destination. Consequently, they may arrive in different order. The transport layer on the receiving host reorders the data segments. The transport layer also provides some error-detection mechanisms. It also insulates the upper layers from network implementation details below, by providing a generic data transfer protocol to upper layers, no matter how the network is implemented underneath.

www.it-ebooks.info

Layer 4: Transport

29

Connectionless transport Data can be sent between two hosts without establishing a logical connection between sending and receiving hosts. Connectionless transport protocols do not guarantee reliable delivery of data segments. However, they are a bit faster than connection-oriented transport protocols, because they do not need to spend time to establish and maintain connections. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) is a connectionless transport protocol.

Connection-oriented transport A transport protocol that establishes a logical connection between the sending and the receiving hosts is called a connection-oriented transport protocol. Connection-oriented transport protocols usually guarantee reliable delivery of data segments. However, they are a bit slower than connectionless transport protocols, because they need to spend some time to establish and maintain the connection. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is a connectionoriented transport protocol. Connection-oriented transport involves both creating a logical connection between the sending and the receiving hosts, and an exchange of acknowledgments between the hosts. Data segments are sequenced, allowing them to be sent in any order and reassembled on the receiving host. Flow control is also part of connection-oriented reliable data transport. Flow control involves the sender and the receiver coordinating to sustain an optimal data transfer flow: As the receiver processes the data segments, it acknowledges reception to the sender. The sender then sends more segments.

The most common TCP/IP protocols at Layer 4 Common TCP/IP protocols at Layer 4 are as follows: ✦ TCP: Transport Control Protocol is a connection-oriented transport protocol. TCP guarantees reliable transmission. ✦ UDP: User Datagram Protocol is a connectionless transport protocol. UDP does not guarantee reliable transmission.

TCP flow control The TCP transport protocol is a connection-oriented protocol that can control the flow of data transmission to guarantee reliable transmissions.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 3


For example, the network layer can be implemented with the Internet Protocol (IP), the AppleTalk protocol, or the Novell Netware IPX protocol. In all cases, the transport layer presents the same interface up to the session layer while using the appropriate network layer protocol underneath.

30

Layer 4: Transport

TCP on the sending host establishes a logical connection to TCP on the receiving host. This step is called three-way handshake, call setup, or virtual circuit setup. The sending host and the receiving host use this connection, or virtual circuit, to coordinate their data transfer. The connection is terminated when no more data needs to be transferred. Any host can initiate TCP connections. The host that initiates the TCP connection becomes the sending host. The other host is the receiving host. However, TCP connections allow both hosts to send and receive TCP segments. TCP controls the flow of segments in each direction of a connection independently using sender and receiver sequence numbers.

Three-way handshake The first step to establish a TCP connection involves a three-way handshake. You may also hear the term call setup or virtual circuit setup. These are synonyms. Here is how the three-way handshake process works:

1. The host that initiates the network communication sends a TCP “Synchronize” (SYN) message to the receiving host to notify it that it wants to establish a TCP connection. This message contains, among other things, the sender starting sequence number for the TCP transmission.

2. The starting sequence number is the sequence number of the first TCP segment to transfer from sender to receiver. The sending and the receiving host then negotiate connection parameters.

3. The receiving host replies with a TCP “Synchronize” (SYN) message that contains the receiver starting sequence number. This message also sends an acknowledgment (ACK) to the sending host, indicating that the receiving host did receive the first TCP “Synchronize” message.

4. The sending host sends back an acknowledgment (ACK) to the receiving host to let it know that it did receive the receiver starting sequence number and that it is ready to send. At this point, the bidirectional TCP connection is established. TCP connections are bidirectional, because both hosts send SYN and ACK messages to each other to synchronize and guarantee a reliable data transfer.

Sequencing and acknowledgments TCP connections are bidirectional: They allow both hosts to send and receive TCP segments. TCP controls the flow of segments in each direction of a connection independently using sender and receiver sequence numbers. Thus, TCP connections maintain two sets of sequence numbers: sender sequence numbers and receiver sequence numbers. The sender sequence

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

32

Layer 4: Transport ✦ Using acknowledgments to guarantee data delivery ✦ Using bidirectional flow control to coordinate the sending and receiving of segments for optimal data transfer

UDP simplicity The User Datagram Protocol (UDP) is a connectionless transport protocol that does not guarantee reliable transmission. UDP is not as chatty as TCP: Hosts that transfer data using TCP need to exchange many segments just to open a connection during the three-way handshake process. They need to exchange many more segments to acknowledge reception of every single data segment. These flow control data segments add some overhead to TCP transmissions. UDP does not add flow control overhead because ✦ UDP is connectionless, so there’s no need to send segments to do a three-way handshake to establish a connection. ✦ UDP makes no use of sequencing. ✦ UDP does not send acknowledgments. ✦ UDP does not guarantee reception of data segments. Consequently, UDP is faster than TCP and can be good enough in some data-transfer scenarios such as DNS lookups and TFTP transfers. However, despite being chatty, TCP is by far the most widely used transport protocol in TCP/IP networks. It’s nice to have warranty even if it costs a little more.

TCP/IP ports Both TCP and UDP use ports to identify the source and destination network applications that are involved in data transmission. Every host has a logical (IP) address and a physical (MAC) address. On the other hand, more than one network application may be running on each host. For example, you can have an e-mail program and a Web browser open at the same time on your host. So, how does your Web browser connect to a Web server, considering that the Web server host has only one IP address and may also be running an e-mail server application? Answer: By using standard TCP/IP ports. A standard TCP/IP port exists for HTTP (the protocol used by Web browsers), a standard TCP/IP port exists for SMTP (the protocol used by some e-mail readers), and so on. All network applications use a TCP/ IP port to allow the sending application to connect to the receiving application. Hence, even if you run multiple network applications on the same host, as long as each network application has its own TCP/IP port, a TCP or UDP data transmission can be accomplished.

www.it-ebooks.info

Layer 3: Network

33

TCP/IP ports are defined by the IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority). Here are the port number ranges currently defined:

✦ 1024–49151: Registered TCP/IP ports. These ports are reserved for applications that are registered by various corporations. However, many companies today are using the private TCP/IP ports range instead. ✦ 49152–65535: Private TCP/IP ports. These ports are available for anyone to use. Companies that write network applications typically allow the users to configure the TCP/IP ports manually in this port number range. This is a flexible and reliable solution for most network applications. Table 3-1 lists some well-known reserved TCP/IP ports.

Table 3-1

Some Well-Known TCP/IP Ports

TCP

Port

UDP

Port

HTTP

80, 8080

DHCP

67, 68

HTTPS

443

SNMP

161

SMTP

25

BOOTP

67,68

DNS

53

RIP

520, 521

POP

110

NTP

123

Telnet

23

IRC

194

SSH

22

SMB

445

FTP

20, 21

Syslog

514

Layer 3: Network One of the most important functions of network layer devices and protocols is choosing the best route to send packets between hosts. This is called routing. The CCNA certification tests routing knowledge extensively because Cisco routers are the de facto standard today for routing packets at the network level. Consequently, you need to have a good understanding of routing. Routing and Cisco routers are covered in detail in Book IV. The network layer also assigns logical addresses (IP addresses) to all devices in the network to be able to identify each source host, each destination host, and each network through which packets need to be routed. Logical addresses are assigned at the network protocol level as opposed to physical addresses, which are assigned on a physical device, such as network card.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ 0–1023: Well-known TCP/IP ports. These ports are reserved for standard TCP/IP network applications and protocols.

Book I Chapter 3

34

Layer 3: Network

Some TCP/IP protocols at Layer 3 The following TCP/IP protocols are found at Layer 3: ✦ IP: Internet Protocol is used to deliver data packets over a packetswitched network from a source host to a destination host based on their respective IP addresses. IP comes in two versions: IP version 4 (IPv4) and IP version 6 (IPv6). IPv4 is currently the most widely used version. ✦ ICMP: Internet Control Message Protocol is used to send error and status messages about network operations and available services, mostly by host and network devices. The most typical use of ICMP is the ping command, which allows you to verify whether a host or network device is reachable over the IP network from another host or network device. ✦ IPsec: Internet Protocol Security is used to secure IP data packet deliveries. The Internet Protocol (IP) is the most important TCP/IP protocol that operates at the network layer. IP addresses are logical addresses provided by the IP in TCP/IP.

Hierarchy of IP addresses Logical addressing at the network layer is hierarchical: ✦ A limited range of IP addresses identifies a few global networks. ✦ Global networks interconnect large and medium networks that use another specific range of IP addresses. ✦ Large and medium networks interconnect smaller networks that use yet another specific range of IP addresses. The hierarchical IP addressing scheme facilitates routing. To understand this, think about a real street address, which is composed of the following: ✦ Street number ✦ Street name ✦ Neighborhood name for larger cities ✦ City name ✦ State name ✦ Country name

www.it-ebooks.info

Layer 3: Network

35

Routing at the network layer in computer networks works similarly to courier services:

✦ Large-sized networks (think states or provinces) interconnect medium-sized networks (think cities). ✦ Medium-sized networks interconnect smaller networks (think neighborhoods). ✦ Small-size networks interconnect mini-networks (think streets). ✦ Finally, computer hosts are found within each of the mini-networks (think street numbers). Computer hosts embed the sender and receiver IP address in each data packet they send to another computer: ✦ If the receiving computer host is in the same network as the sender (living on the same street), the packet is simply routed locally at the data link layer using the physical address (the MAC address). ✦ If the receiving computer host is not in the same network as the sender, the packet is handed off to a gateway to be routed outside the network. A gateway is a router that links a network to another network. ✦ The gateway looks at the logical address (IP address) of the receiving computer host and determines in which network it is located (on which street). ✦ If the gateway knows about the network of the receiving computer host (it knows the street; it’s in the same city), it sends the data packet to that network. ✦ If the gateway does not know the destination network, it hands the packet to the higher-up gateway. How does the router know where to send the data packet? Routers keep a routing table in memory. Routing tables keep track of the following: ✦ Each network known ✦ Router interface through which each network can be reached ✦ Metrics associated with each route Routers keep one routing table for each protocol, because each protocol has its own addressing scheme and metrics. If you run IP (IPv4), IPv6, and AppleTalk on the same router, that router will keep a routing table for IPv4, a routing table for IPv6, and a routing table for AppleTalk.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ A few extremely large global networks (think countries) interconnect other large networks.

Book I Chapter 3

36

Layer 2: Data Link

Two types of protocols operate at the network layer: routed protocols and routing protocols: ✦ Routed protocols are used to route data packets. For example, IP (IPv4) is a routed protocol, and so are IPv6, AppleTalk, IPX, and SNA. ✦ Routing protocols are used to send route update packets. Route update packets carry information about new networks and new routes. Routers send each other route update packets whenever a new network is created or a new route is enabled. Some of the most common routing protocols are Routing Information Protocol (RIP), RIPv2, Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP), and Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). Different routing protocols use different metrics to decide which routes are better than others. To keep things simple, in the example, I just show one metric in the routing tables: the number of hop counts. The number of hop counts is the number of networks a data packet has to go through before reaching the destination network. In this case, to reach network 67 from network 25, a data packet needs to go through network 51, thus one hop.

Layer 2: Data Link The data link layer transmits data on a physical medium. This layer also routes data locally to the next hop on the physical network medium. The data link layer uses physical addresses (MAC addresses) assigned to each physical network device in the local network to route data from one physical device to another. These addresses are called Media Access Control (MAC) addresses in TCP/IP. MAC addresses uniquely identify a specific network device, such as a switch or a router, or a network interface card (NIC) in a computer host device. The data link layer is defined in TCP/IP by the IEEE 802.X (Ethernet) standard. The data link layer receives each packet from the network layer on the sending host and wraps it up in a data frame along with local routing data. The data frame is sent down to the physical layer to code an electrical or optical signal to transmit it over a wire, or over the air (wireless transmission). On the receiving host, the data link layer unwraps the data frame received to extract the packet and sends it up to the network layer.

www.it-ebooks.info

Layer 1: Physical

37

Some TCP/IP protocols at Layer 2 You find the following TCP/IP protocols at Layer 2:

✦ RARP: Reverse Address Resolution Protocol is used to resolve (find) the logical (IP) address of a host or network device, when only its physical (MAC) address is known. ✦ CSMA/CD: Carrier sense multiple access collision detect protocol is used to allow the host and network device to share the bandwidth of a given interconnection medium. You find out more about CSMA/CD in Book I.

Address resolution The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is used to resolve (find) a physical (MAC) address for a host or network device, when only its logical (IP) address is known. Cisco switches are Layer 2 (data link layer) devices.

Layer 1: Physical The physical layer provides the electrical, optical, or over-the-air connection between the sending host device and the receiving host device. This typically involves copper or fiber-optic cabling, or wireless radio connections, patch panels, signal repeaters, submarine cables, or satellites. The physical layer defines the mechanical, electrical, optical, radio, procedural, and functional standards to enable the transmission of data-link (Layer 2) data frames over a certain transmission medium. The physical layer is defined in TCP/IP by the IEEE 802.X (Ethernet) standard.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ ARP: Address Resolution Protocol is used to resolve (find) the physical (MAC) address of a host or network device, when only its logical (IP) address is known.

Book I Chapter 3

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 4: Data Encapsulation Exam Objectives ✓ Describing data encapsulation ✓ Describing how data encapsulation relates to the OSI network

reference model ✓ Describing how data encapsulation enables the layers of the OSI

network reference model to be independent of each other ✓ Describing protocol data units (PDUs) and showing how they relate to

data encapsulation

R

ead this chapter to find out about data encapsulation: what it is, how it works, and what its purpose is. You also read about protocol data units (PDUs) and see how they relate to data encapsulation. Diagrams illustrate data encapsulation and wrapping and unwrapping of PDUs at each OSI layer.

Introducing Data Encapsulation Network models, including TCP/IP, use encapsulation and very clearly defined interfaces between layers to achieve independence of layer functionality. Independence of layer functionality is crucial because it allows layers to evolve internally without impacting other layers. As long as a layer continues to interact the same way with upper and lower layers, it can change internally to adapt to new technologies and needs. Independence of layer functionality also divides the network communication process into several precise specialized subprocesses. Each network model layer handles a specific subprocess. This eases management of the whole network communication process. It also allows each layer to specialize to specific network communication contexts, even to new unforeseen contexts. For example, the physical layer is constantly updated for new transmission media. However, this does not imply that the upper layers need to change as well. Thus, the network model as a whole can adapt to support new media with localized change at the physical layer. Here’s how encapsulation works: ✦ A computer host device needs to send some data across the network to a remote computer host.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

44

Introducing Data Encapsulation

Observe that network and data link layers on intermediate nodes, which are typically routers, unwrap their PDUs, change the control information, and rebuild new PDUs to reach the next hop in the network. Application, presentation, and session layers are typically called the top or upper layers:

1. The PDU is data at the application layer, such as the text of an e-mail message.

2. The application layer PDU is converted, encrypted, and translated at the presentation layer and encapsulated in control information headers to allow the receiving host to reconvert and unencrypt the data to its original format.

3. The presentation layer PDU that encapsulates the application layer PDU at this point may be further augmented with session layer control information. For example, an authenticated session may be opened between communicating hosts by the session layer. Control information about the authenticated session is added in a session layer header. The presentation layer PDU augmented with the session layer header becomes the session layer PDU. At this point, the session layer PDU encapsulates (contains) the presentation layer PDU, which in turn encapsulates the application layer PDU.

4. The session layer PDU is handed down to the transport layer. The transport layer first divides the session layer PDU into several small data chunks called segments. Each segment is numbered so that the receiving host can reassemble the application data.

5. The transport layer PDUs (the segments) are then forwarded down to the network layer, which tags each segment with logical source and destination addresses and some routing information and hands over the resulting shippable data packet to the lower data link layer.

6. The data link layer builds a data-link frame by adding the physical source address of the sender and the physical destination address of the receiver if the receiver is located in the same local network as the sender. If the receiver is not located in the same local network as the sender, the data link layer adds the physical destination address of the gateway in the local network to the data-link frame. The gateway of a local network is usually a router that connects the local network to other networks. The data link PDU (the data-link frame) is handed down to the physical layer.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Data Encapsulation

45

The physical layer converts each data-link frame into a series of binary signals. The binary signals are then transmitted over a wired or wireless connection to the next physical hop. At the physical and data link layers, only the next hop is considered. The network layer keeps track of the final destination, even if the receiver is hundreds of miles away and several network hops away.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 4

Data Encapsulation

At this point, the data link PDU (data link frame), encapsulates (contains) the network PDU (packet), which encapsulates the transport PDU (segment). The transport PDU in turn contains the session PDU, which encapsulates the presentation PDU, which in turn encapsulates the application layer PDU.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

48

Book I: Networking Basics

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 5: Binary, Hexadecimal, and Decimal Numbering Systems Exam Objectives ✓ Understanding decimal, hexadecimal, and binary numbering systems ✓ Converting numbers between the decimal, hexadecimal, and binary

numbering systems ✓ Memorizing the major powers of 2 and understanding their relationship

to corresponding binary numbers ✓ Differentiating between the bit, byte, and nibble

R

ead this chapter to find out about the binary, hexadecimal, and decimal numbering systems. The chapter covers the following topics:

✦ How numbers are built based on a certain power base ✦ How to convert numbers from one numbering system to another ✦ Major powers of base 2 and their relationship to memory and disk size ✦ Standard numbering systems notation ✦ The first 15 numbers in the binary, hexadecimal, and decimal systems ✦ The relationship between the hexadecimal and binary numbering systems and bits, bytes, and nibbles It is important to read this chapter if you are not familiar with the binary, hexadecimal, and decimal numbering systems. You need to understand numbering systems and know how to convert numbers between the various systems. Don’t worry if you are not familiar with these concepts yet. They sound much more complicated than they really are. Understanding numbering systems helps you not only when dealing with networks but also when dealing with other computer components and systems. Several networking features and protocols rely on binary and hexadecimal numbers to code bit maps, subnet masks, and network addresses, among other things. It is important to understand numbering systems because they have implications on many features and protocols in networking.

www.it-ebooks.info

50

Decimal Numbers

Decimal Numbers You have been using decimal numbers and learning how to count and calculate using decimal numbers since elementary school. So, you know that decimal numbers are built using digits 0 to 9. Ten digits can be used to build a number. That’s why it’s called the decimal system (deci means 10 in Latin). It is also called the base 10 numbering system, because all numbers in the decimal system are based on a power of 10. The position of a digit in a decimal number determines its value. You learned in school that two-digit decimal numbers are worth 10 or more, three-digit numbers are 100 or more, four-digit numbers are 1,000 or more, and so on. For example, 11 and 36 are two-digit numbers, 120 and 250 are three-digit numbers, and 1,492 and 2,009 are four-digit numbers. Have you ever wondered why when you place digit 2 in the third position from the right you mean 200, whereas if you place the digit 2 in the fourth position from the right you mean 2,000? There is a mathematical explanation. All numbering systems are built on a certain base number. In the case of the decimal system, it is built on 10. That’s why the decimal system is also called a 10-based numbering system, or simply base 10. So here’s how it works:

Position of digit from the right

4

Digit you place in that position

a

3

2

b 4

1

c 3

0

d

2

e

1

0

a*10 + b*10 + c*10 + d*10 + e*10

Value of number

The value of each digit is built by multiplying the corresponding base 10 number by the digit placed in that position. For instance, the value of digit 3 is calculated by multiplying the base 103 by the digit placed in position 3. The nice thing about base 10 is that the power tells you how many trailing 0s you need to add after 1. So, 102 is two 0s after 1, which is 100; 103 is three 0s after 1, which 1,000; 104 is four 0s after 1, which 10,000; and so on. The value of the whole number is the sum of the values of each digit. Consider the following example:


4

3

2

1

0


5

0

3

4

5

Value of number

5*104 + 0*103 + 3*102 + 4*101 + 5*100 = 50,345

www.it-ebooks.info

Binary Numbers

51

This is the magic of the decimal numbering system: What you see is what you get.

Binary numbers are quite simple. They only contain 0s and 1s. They are called binary numbers because they can only have two possible digits. You can see that 1 and 0 can easily be represented by “electrical signal,” “no electrical signal.” That’s why all computer systems at their most basic level operate on binary numbers. Everything is converted to 1s and 0s, which are represented electrically by “signal,” “no signal” in electronic circuits. The binary system is similar to the decimal system: ✦ The position of a digit in a binary number determines the value. ✦ The binary system is built on 2, because you only have 2 digits to work with. ✦ The binary system is also called a 2-based numbering system, or simply base 2. So here’s how it works:


4

3

2

1

0


a

b

c

d

e

Value of number

a*24 + b*23 + c*22 + d*21 + e*20

The value of each digit is built by multiplying the corresponding base 2 number by the digit placed in that position. Keep in mind though that whereas you can use digits 0 to 9 in the decimal system, you can only use digits 0 and 1 in the binary system. For instance, the value of digit 3 is calculated by multiplying the base 23 with the digit placed in position 3. The value of the whole number is the sum of the values of each digit. Consider the following example:


4


0

3

2

0 4

3

1 2

1

1

0

0

1

0

0*2 + 0*2 + 1*2 + 0*2 + 1*2 = 5

Value of number

www.it-ebooks.info

Binary, Hexadecimal and Decimal Numbering Systems

Binary Numbers

Book I Chapter 5

52

Binary Numbers

The corresponding decimal value of the binary number 00101 is 5. Consider another example:


4


1

3

2

0 4

3

1 2

1

1

0

0

1

0

1*2 + 0*2 + 1*2 + 0*2 + 1*2 = 21

Value of number

The corresponding decimal value of the binary number 10101 is 21. It is a good idea to become acquainted with a few base 2 numbers, because many measurements in the computer industry are based on base 2 numbers. For example, bandwidth, memory size, and hard drive space are usually expressed in base 2 numbers. Table 5-1 lists the first 16 powers of 2. The table also illustrates the relationship between these numbers and common memory and disk multipliers used in the industry.

Table 5-1

Major Powers of 2

Power of 2

Kilo Multiplier

Mega Multiplier

Giga Multiplier

20 = 1

—

—

—

21 = 2

—

—

—

2 =8

—

—

—

24 = 16

—

—

—

5

—

—

—

6

2 = 64

—

—

—

27 = 128

—

—

3

2 = 32

—

8

1

⁄4 K

1

⁄4 M

1

9

2 = 512

1

⁄2 K

1

⁄2 M

1

210 = 1,024

1K

1M

1G

2 = 256

⁄4 G ⁄2 G

211 = 2,048

2K

1M

1G

212 = 4,096

4K

4M

4G

213 = 8,192

8K

8M

8G

14

2 = 16,384

16 K

16 M

16 G

215 = 32,768

32 K

32 M

32 G

216 = 65,536

65 K

65 M

65 G

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

54

Hexadecimal Numbers

The hexadecimal system is similar to the decimal system: ✦ The position in which a digit is placed in a hexadecimal number determines the value. ✦ The hexadecimal system is built on 16, because you have 16 digits to work with. ✦ The hexadecimal system is also called a 16-based numbering system, or simply base 16. So here’s how it works:


4


a

3

2

b 4

1

c 3

0

d

2

e

1

0

a*16 + b*16 + c*16 + d*16 + e*16

Value of number

The value of each digit is built by multiplying the corresponding base 16 number by the digit placed in that position. Keep in mind though that whereas you can use digits 0 to 9 in the decimal system, you can now also use digits A to F for values above 9 in the hexadecimal system. For instance, the value of digit 3 is calculated by multiplying the base 163 with the digit placed in position 3. The value of the whole number is the sum of the values of each digit. Consider an example:


4

3

2

1


0

0

1

1

4

3

2

1

0 0 0

0*16 + 0*16 + 1*16 + 1*16 + 0*16 = 272

Value of number

The corresponding decimal value of the hexadecimal number 00110 is 272. Consider another example:


4

3

2

1


0

7

3

9

Value of number

4

3

2

1

0 5 0

0*16 + 7*16 + 3*16 + 9*16 + 5*16 = 29,599

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

56

Hexadecimal Numbers

Numbering systems notation So how do you know whether 100 is being expressed in decimal or in hexadecimal notation? The industry uses a standard “0x” prefix to indicate hexadecimal numbers. Another equivalent notation is 10016. In fact, any number in any base can be written like this. For example, 251 in decimal can be written as 25110, and 4 in binary can be written as 1002. However, it is rare to see this type of notation for decimal and binary numbers. Binary numbers are easy to spot because they only contain 0s and 1s, and decimal numbers are assumed to be decimal unless indicated otherwise.

Bits, nibbles, and bytes So now you understand how the numbering systems work and how they relate to each other. One last thing that I want to show you in this chapter is how numbers can be organized in bits, nibbles, and bytes. A bit is one single binary value. So, it is a single-digit binary number that is either 0 or 1. A nibble is a group of 4 bits. A nibble is also a single hexadecimal digit. That is one of the reasons why it is so easy to represent a binary number in hexadecimal: Every group of 4 bits is a hexadecimal digit. A byte is a group of 8 bits. A byte is also 2 nibbles. In many ways, a byte is the basic unit of measure in the computer industry. Most western characters are represented by a byte. Memory size and hard drive space are measured in megabytes (million bytes), gigabytes (billion bytes), and terabytes (trillion bytes). Assume that you want to represent the letter A in binary. The American Standard Code for Information Interchange table, also known as the ASCII table, defines each alphabet letter as 2 bytes. Letter A is coded as 0100 0001. Table 5-3 shows the breakdown of letter A.

Table 5-3

Letter A Notations

Binary

Hexadecimal

Decimal

0100 0001

41

65

Nibble 1 Nibble 2

—

—

Notice how each binary nibble — each group of 4 bits — maps exactly to each hexadecimal digit. This is nice because it makes conversions

www.it-ebooks.info

Hexadecimal Numbers

57

between hexadecimal and binary numbering systems easy. The next section describes this conversion.

You saw in the previous section that ✦ 4 bits comprise • 1 nibble • 1 hexadecimal digit • 1⁄2 byte ✦ 8 bits comprise • 2 nibbles • 2 hexadecimal digits • 1 byte Hence, when converting numbers from binary to hexadecimal, you can ✦ Separate the binary number in groups of 4 bits (nibbles). ✦ Convert each nibble to hexadecimal. ✦ Concatenate the hexadecimal number you obtain: The result is the converted hexadecimal number. Some examples follow. Convert 101012 to hexadecimal:

1. Separate the binary number into nibbles starting from the right. Pad with leading 0s if necessary: 0001 01012.

2. Convert each nibble to its corresponding hexadecimal number: • 00012 = 116 • 01012 = 516

3. Concatenate the hexadecimal digits in the order of the original binary number: • Original number is 0001 01012 • Concatenated hex number is 1516 Answer: 101012 = 1516 Convert 1101012 to hexadecimal:

www.it-ebooks.info


Converting binary to hexadecimal

Book I Chapter 5

58

Hexadecimal Numbers

1. Separate the binary number into nibbles starting from the right. Pad with leading 0s if necessary: 0011 01012.

2. Convert each nibble to its corresponding hexadecimal number: • 00112 = 316 • 01012 = 516

3. Concatenate the hexadecimal digits in the order of the original binary number: • Original number is 0011 01012 • Concatenated hex number is 3516 Answer: 1101012 = 3516 Convert 100111101012 to hexadecimal:

1. Separate the binary number into nibbles starting from the right. Pad with leading 0s if necessary: 0100 1111 01012.

2. Convert each nibble to its corresponding hexadecimal number: • 01002 = 416 • 11112 = F16 • 01012 = 516

3. Concatenate the hexadecimal digits in the order of the original binary number: • Original number is 0100 1111 01012 • Concatenated hex number is 4F516 Answer: 100111101012 = 4F516

Converting hexadecimal to binary The same method can be used to convert hexadecimal numbers to binary notation:

1. Convert each digit of the hexadecimal to a binary nibble, padding the nibble with leading 0s if necessary.

2. Concatenate the binary nibbles you obtain: The result is the converted hexadecimal number. Here are some examples. Convert 1616 to binary:

1. Convert each hexadecimal digit to its corresponding binary nibble:

www.it-ebooks.info

Hexadecimal Numbers • 116 = 00012 (observe how you pad 12 with three leading 0s) • 616 = 01102 number: • Original number is 1616 • Concatenated hex number is 0001 01102 Answer: 1616 = 101102 Convert 16FA16 to binary:

1. Convert each hexadecimal digit to its corresponding binary nibble: • 116 = 00012 • 616 = 01102 • F16 = 11112 • A16 = 10102

2. Concatenate the nibbles in the order of the original hexadecimal number: • Original number is 16FA16 • Concatenated hex number is 0001 0110 1111 10102 Answer: 16FA16 = 1 0110 1111 10102 Convert DC14FA16 to binary:

1. Convert each hexadecimal digit to its corresponding binary nibble: • D16 = 11012 • C16 = 11002 • 116 = 00012 • 416 = 01002 • F16 = 11112 • A16 = 10102

2. Concatenate the nibbles in the order of the original hexadecimal number: • Original number is DC14FA16 • Concatenated hex number is 1101 1100 0001 0100 1111 10102 Answer: DC14FA16 = 1101 1100 0001 0100 1111 10102

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 5


2. Concatenate the nibbles in the order of the original hexadecimal

59

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

66

Ethernet Standards

Using full-duplex twisted-pair connections, you can theoretically achieve full throughput in both directions. Considering the 100BASE-T example, with full-duplex twisted-pair, you should be able to get 100 Mbps sending and 100 Mbps receiving, for a total bandwidth of 200 Mbps. However, you will likely get less than 100 Mbps because of factors that distort the signal, such as electrical noise and crosstalk. Full-duplex twisted-pair is the recommended cabling solution for Ethernet, because it allows full-duplex connections and it improves network throughput and reliability by eliminating frame collisions. Particularly, use full-duplex twisted-pair to connect hosts to switches, interconnect switches, or interconnect hosts using a crossover cable.

Ethernet Standards You find various Ethernet implementations. Ethernet standards specify the following technical implementation details: ✦ Topology ✦ Bandwidth ✦ Transmission mode ✦ Cabling ✦ Maximum range

10-Mbps Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) You find three versions of early 10-Mbps Ethernet implementations: ✦ 10BASE5 (Thicknet) ✦ 10BASE2 (Thinnet) ✦ 10BASE-T Two of them use coaxial cabling. One of them uses unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cabling. All 10-Mbps Ethernet implementations use half-duplex communication.

10BASE5 (Thicknet) This is the original Ethernet standard. A 10BASE5 single thick coaxial cable has to be drilled to connect a host device to the core and to the screen of the cable. This standard (specifically the type of cable and connection) is obsolete.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

68

Ethernet Standards

Fast Ethernet (100-Mbps) You find the following versions of 100-Mbps Fast Ethernet implementations: ✦ Fast Ethernet over twisted-pair ✦ Fast Ethernet over fiber-optic Some versions support only half-duplex transmission mode, but most are full-duplex.

Fast Ethernet over twisted-pair These, the most common versions of Fast Ethernet over UTP cabling, are described in the following sections.

100BASE-T4 (IEEE 802.3u) This is a faster version of 10BASE-T over Cat3 cabling. In this case, all four pairs of conductors in the Cat3 UTP are used. This is half-duplex transmission with the following features: ✦ Cabling: 100BASE-T4 (unshielded twisted-pair: Cat3 UTP) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Bandwidth: 100 Mbps ✦ Transmission mode: Half-duplex ✦ Range: 100 meters

100BASE-T2 (IEEE 802.3y) This is a variation of 100BASE-T4 that uses just two of the four pairs in a Cat3 UTP. 100BASE-T4 supports full-duplex transmissions, because two pairs can be used to transmit and two pairs to receive simultaneously. 100BASE-T2 is equivalent to 100BASE-TX, but it uses Cat3 instead of Cat5 cabling. However, 100BASE-T2 implementations are almost nonexistent. 100BASE-TX is the norm today for Fast Ethernet. 100BASE-T2 has the following features: ✦ Cabling: 100BASE-T2 (unshielded twisted-pair: Cat3 UTP) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Bandwidth: 100 Mbps ✦ Transmission mode: Full-duplex ✦ Range: 100 meters

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

70

Ethernet Standards

100BASE-SX (IEEE 802.3u) This is a cabling variation of the 100BASE-FX standard. Short-wavelength (850-nm) multimode fiber-optic cabling is used in this case, instead of longwavelength (1300-nm) multimode fiber-optic cabling. 100BASE-SX, described as follows, is typically more affordable than 100BASE-FX, but its range is shorter: ✦ Cabling: 100BASE-SX (850-nm multimode fiber-optic) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Bandwidth: 100 Mbps ✦ Transmission mode: Half-duplex and full-duplex ✦ Range: 300 meters

Gigabit Ethernet (1000-Mbps) Gigabit Ethernet, also known as GigE, can be implemented with UTP or fiber-optic cables.

Gigabit Ethernet over twisted-pair The 1000BASE-T and 1000BASE-TX standards are the most common versions of Gigabit Ethernet over twisted-pair cables. The choice between 1000BASE-T and 1000BASE-TX depends on the type of cabling available and on network application requirements. Category 5 and 5e UTP cabling can link 1000BASE-T networks. Category 6 and 7 UTP can link both 1000BASE-T and 1000BASE-TX networks. However, Cat6 and Cat7 cables are more expensive and less common than Cat5 and Cat5e. Hence, 1000BASE-T is currently the norm in Gigabit Ethernet over twisted-pair. Some network applications specifically require two simultaneous 1000Mbps links over the same cable. For these applications, Cat 6 or Cat 7 UTP (1000BASE-TX) is required.

1000BASE-T (IEEE 802.3ab) This is a bandwidth variation of the 100BASE-TX standard. Unlike 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T uses the four pairs in a Cat5, Cat5e, Cat6, or Cat7 UTP cable. 1000BASE-T supports full-duplex transmission with a range of up to 100 meters. The main advantage of 1000BASE-T over 100BASE-TX is obviously the increased bandwidth. Note that although Cat5 UTP supports 1000BASE-T, Cat5e is recommended because the enhanced Cat5e UTP adds specifications for far-end crosstalk. With the following features, this is the most common standard in Gigabit Ethernet implementations:

www.it-ebooks.info

Ethernet Standards

71

✦ Cabling: 1000BASE-T (unshielded twisted-pair Cat5 or Cat5e) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Transmission mode: Full-duplex ✦ Range: 100 meters

1000BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3ab) This is a variation of the 1000BASE-T standard. Unlike 1000BASE-T, 1000BASE-TX uses just two of the four pairs in a Cat6 or Cat7 UTP cable. 1000BASE-TX supports full-duplex transmission with a range of up to 100 meters. Because only two of the four pairs are used, Cat6 and Cat7 UTP can support two 1000BASE-TX links on the same cable. 1000BASE-TX networks connected with Cat6 UTP cabling are used in GigE applications that require larger bandwidth than 1000Mbps, such as multimedia content development and streaming, videoconferencing, highly available data centers, and distribution layer cabling. The 1000BASE-TX standard provides a total bandwidth of 2000Mbps using two 1000BASE-TX links on the same Cat6 or Cat7 UTP cable. If you use network equipment that supports 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GigE) you could use 10GigE instead of GigE over Cat6 UTP. Using 10GigE instead of GigE provides higher bandwidth (10000Mbps instead of just 2000Mbps) over Cat6 UTP cabling. ✦ Cabling: 1000BASE-TX (unshielded twisted-pair Cat6 or better) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Bandwidth: 1000 Mbps ✦ Transmission mode: Full-duplex ✦ Range: 100 meters

Gigabit Ethernet over fiber-optic The following sections describe the most common versions of Gigabit Ethernet over fiber-optic cables. The choice among these versions depends on the type of fiber-optic cable available and on the required range.

1000BASE-LX (IEEE 802.3z) 1000BASE-LX uses long-wavelength laser transmission (1270-nm or 1355-nm) that is typically more expensive than short-wavelength laser or LED optic transmission. 1000BASE-LX supports full-duplex transmission at 1000 Mbps with a range of up to 5 km using single-mode fiber cables, and up to 550 meters using multimode fiber cables. 1000BASE-LX offers the following features:

www.it-ebooks.info

Local-Area Networks (LAN)

✦ Bandwidth: 1000 Mbps

Book I Chapter 6

72

Ethernet Standards ✦ Cabling: 1000BASE-LX (1270nm- or 1355-nm single-mode or multimode fiber-optic) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Bandwidth: 2000 Mbps (two 1000BASE-TX links over Cat6 or Cat7) ✦ Transmission mode: Full-duplex ✦ Range: 550 meters (multimode fiber) or 5 km (single-mode fiber)

1000BASE-SX (IEEE 802.3z) 1000BASE-SX uses short-wavelength laser transmission (770-nm or 860-nm) that is typically more affordable than long-wavelength laser transmission. 1000BASE-SX supports full-duplex transmission at 1000 Mbps with a range of up to 550 meters using 62.5/125 microns with low-modal-bandwidth fiber cables, and up to 220 meters using 50/100 microns with high-modal-bandwidth fiber cables. 1000BASE-SX has the following features: ✦ Cabling: 1000BASE-SX (770nm- to 860-nm single-mode or multimode fiberoptic) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Bandwidth: 1000 Mbps ✦ Transmission mode: Full-duplex ✦ Range: 220 or 550 meters

1000BASE-LH (IEEE 802.3z) This is a variation of 1000BASE-LX that uses higher-quality laser optics. 1000BASE-LH has a longer range than 1000BASE-LX. 1000BASE-LH is not a standard term, but it is commonly accepted in the industry to designate 1000BASE-LX with 1300- or 1310-nm fiber cabling. 1000BASE-LH offers the following features: ✦ Cabling: 1000BASE-LH (1300nm- or 1310-nm single-mode or multimode fiber-optic) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Bandwidth: 1000 Mbps ✦ Transmission mode: Full-duplex ✦ Range: Up to 10 km (single-mode fiber)

www.it-ebooks.info

Ethernet Standards

73

1000BASE-ZX (IEEE 802.3z)

1000 BASE-ZX has the following features: ✦ Cabling: 1000BASE-ZX (1550-nm single-mode or multimode fiber-optic) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Bandwidth: 1000 Mbps ✦ Transmission mode: Full-duplex ✦ Range: 70 km (single-mode fiber)

10 Gigabit Ethernet (10000-Mbps) 10 Gigabit Ethernet, also known as 10GigE, can be implemented with UTP or with fiber-optic cables. 10 Gigabit Ethernet only supports full-duplex transmissions.

10 Gigabit Ethernet over twisted-pair The IEEE 802.3an-2006 standard was introduced in 2006 to connect devices at 10000 Mbps using UTP Cat6 cabling. It is currently the fastest Ethernet standard. 10GBASE-T only supports full-duplex transmission with a range of up to 100 meters. The 10GBASE-T standard, with the following features, is the most common version of 10 Gigabit Ethernet over twisted-pair cables: ✦ Cabling: 10GBASE-T (unshielded twisted-pair Cat6 or Cat6a) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Bandwidth: 10000 Mbps ✦ Transmission mode: Full-duplex ✦ Range: 55 meters with Cat6 or 100 meters with Cat6a

10 Gigabit Ethernet over fiber-optic The 10GBASE-SR, 10GBASE-LR, and 10GBASE-ER standards are the most common versions of 10 Gigabit Ethernet over fiber-optic cabling. The choice among these versions depends on the type of fiber-optic cable available and on the required range. Other standards can reach longer ranges than the ones listed here, but they are beyond the scope of CCNA certification.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 6


This is a variation of 1000BASE-LX that uses 1550-nm-wavelength fiber transmission. 1000BASE-ZX has better range than both 1000BASE-LX and 1000BASE-LH. Keep in mind that 1000BASE-ZX, like 1000BASE-LH, is not a standard term, but it is commonly accepted in the industry. 1000BASE-ZX designates Ethernet transmission over 1550-nm-wavelength fiber cabling.

74

Ethernet Standards

10GBASE-SR (IEEE 802.3 C49 64B/66B) 10GBASE-SR is a standard for short-range (SR) 10GigE connections using MMF (multimode fiber) optic cabling. 10GBASE-SR uses short-wavelength laser transmission (850-nm) that is typically less expensive than longwavelength laser or LED optic transmission. 10GBASE-SR offers the following features: ✦ Cabling: 10GBASE-SR (850-nm multimode fiber-optic) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Bandwidth: 10000 Mbps ✦ Transmission mode: Full-duplex ✦ Range: 82 meters (standard MMF) and up to 300 meters (latest OM3 MMF)

10GBASE-LR (IEEE 802.3 C49 64B/66B) 10GBASE-LR is a standard for long-range (LR) 10GigE connections using SMF (single-mode fiber) optic cabling. 10GBASE-LR uses long-wavelength laser transmission (1310-nm) that is typically more expensive than short-wavelength laser transmission. 10GBASE-LR has the following features: ✦ Cabling: 10GBASE-LR (1310-nm multimode fiber-optic) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Bandwidth: 10000 Mbps ✦ Transmission mode: Full-duplex ✦ Range: 10 km (standard) and up to 25 km (using certain optical modules)

10GBASE-ER (IEEE 802.3 C49 64B/66B) 10GBASE-ER is a standard for extended-range (ER) 10GigE connections using SMF (single-mode fiber) optic cabling. 10GBASE-ER uses long-wavelength laser transmission (1550-nm) that is typically more expensive than shortwavelength laser transmission. 10GBASE-ER offers the following features: ✦ Cabling: 10GBASE-ER (1550-nm multimode fiber-optic) ✦ Topology: Star ✦ Bandwidth: 10000 Mbps ✦ Transmission mode: Full-duplex ✦ Range: 40 km

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

76

Ethernet in the OSI Model

Physical addressing: MAC address Ethernet uses the Media Access Control (MAC) address to route data-link frames locally in a LAN. Host NICs and network devices built to comply with the Ethernet IEEE 802.3 standard have a MAC address assigned by their manufacturer. MAC addresses are unique and theoretically unchangeable. They are also sometimes called hardware or physical addresses because they are physically linked to a specific host NIC or network device. A MAC address is a unique 48-bit number, or 6 bytes, or 12 hexadecimal values, for example, 00-00-0F-F0-EF-AC or 00-AC-03-2B-1F-03. Ethernet uses the MAC address to uniquely identify each host and network device connected to a LAN: ✦ The Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI): Identifies the manufacturer (assigned by the IEEE) ✦ The vendor-assigned part: A unique value that manufacturers assign to each of the devices they produce ✦ The Individual/Group (I/G) bit: • 1 if this is a broadcast or multicast MAC address • 0 if this is an individual MAC address, the MAC address of a specific device ✦ The Global/Local (G/L) bit: • 0 if this is a globally assigned MAC address (a MAC address assigned by the IEEE) • 1 if this is a locally assigned MAC address (a MAC address assigned by the manufacturer)

Data-link frame as implemented by Ethernet The data-link frames encapsulate the data payload received from the network layer into a data unit that contains information about the sender, information about the receiver, and some control data. The sender and receiver information is represented by their respective MAC addresses. These are ✦ Destination MAC address field (D-M) ✦ Source MAC address field (S-M) Figure 6-1 shows the structure of an Ethernet_II data-link frame.

www.it-ebooks.info


Book I Chapter 6

Pre 8 bytes

D-M 6 bytes

S-M 6 bytes

Length 2 bytes

Data

FCS

Figure 6-2 shows the structure of an Ethernet 802.3 data-link frame.

Figure 6-2: Ethernet 802.3 frame (LLC and MAC encapsulation).

Pre 8 bytes

D-M 6 bytes

S-M 6 bytes

T 2 bytes

Data

FCS

Ethernet frames contain the following fields: ✦ The Pre field contains the preamble synchronization bits that help the receiving host device lock on the bit stream. ✦ The D-M (Destination MAC Address) field is the MAC address of the sending host device. The D-M can be an individual MAC address or a broadcast or multicast MAC address. ✦ The S-M (Source MAC Address) field is the MAC address of the receiving host device. The S-M can only be an individual MAC address. ✦ The T (Type) field in the Ethernet_II frame specifies the network layer protocol that created the data payload that is encapsulated in the data field. The Ethernet_II frame format is the most common. ✦ The L (Length) field in the 802.3 Ethernet frame indicates the length of the data stream in the data part of the frame. The Logical Link Control (LLC) header in the 802.3 Ethernet frame is 8 bytes long and contains the following fields: ✦ 1 byte identifying a Source Service Access Point (SSAP) ✦ 1 byte identifying a Destination Service Access Point (DSAP)

www.it-ebooks.info


Figure 6-1: Ethernet_II frame (standard MAC encapsulation).

77

78

Ethernet in the OSI Model ✦ 3 bytes for control ✦ 2 bytes identifying the type of the network layer protocol that created the data payload The 802.3 Ethernet frame uses a Source Service Access Point (SSAP) and a Destination Service Access Point (DSAP) that identify a subnetwork layer protocol service access point that uses the link layer service. The 802.3 Ethernet frame does contain a type field, the last 2 bytes of the LLC header. However, because the maximum size of the data payload is fixed at 1500 bytes, by adding an LLC header, the data-link frame space available for data is decreased. Ethernet_II is the most common implementation. Thus, you see a Type field instead of the Length and LLC fields in most data-link frames today. The Data field is the network layer packet that contains, for example, an IP packet that encapsulates either a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) or a User Datagram Protocol (UDP) segment. The Data field is between 64 and 1500 bytes long, depending on the size of the IP packet. You can set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) from 64 to 1500 bytes to configure the IP packet size. It is best practice to keep the MTU size set to the same value on all devices in a network to avoid unnecessary frame fragmentation and reassembly. The C (Check Sequence) field, also known as the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) field, stores a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) value:

1. The sending host calculates this field based on the contents of the frame it sends.

2. The receiving host recalculates the CRC based on the frame received and checks the CRC field against the calculated CRC.

3. If the two correspond, the frame is deemed valid. Otherwise, the frame is dropped, and the sending host will need to retransmit the frame

Physical layer Ethernet standards specify physical topology, bandwidth, transmission mode, cabling, and maximum range. Thus, Ethernet also operates at the physical layer: Cables, electrical transmission parameters, and topology are physical devices. Many cabling options are available with Ethernet. Some cables offer higher bandwidth, or longer range, but they are more expensive than cables offering lower bandwidth and shorter range.

www.it-ebooks.info


79

Considering bandwidth, it may be nice to have 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GigE) brought to every host in the LAN, but is it really necessary? In some cases, the current cost of 10GigE is too high to implement it up to every host on the LAN. A hybrid approach may be best: Use 10GigE with Cat6 or a cabling UTP to interconnect switches and routers at the core of the LAN, and use Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) with Cat5e UTP — or even Fast Ethernet with Cat5 UTP — for local host access to the access layer switches. The Electronic Industries Alliance and the Telecommunications Industry Association (EIA/TIA) define Ethernet physical specifications. This particularly involves standard cabling and connectors to be used in Ethernet networks.

EIA/TIA-568-B cabling standard The EIA/TIA-568-B cabling standard was developed to define a blueprint for data-communication cabling for commercial buildings as well as for datacommunication cabling between buildings. The standard defines cable system architecture, cable installation requirements, cable termination, cable types, distances, and connectors. EIA/TIA-568-B defines a hierarchical cabling architecture: A main cross-connect (MCC) links to intermediate cross-connects (ICCs) using backbone cabling in a star topology. The ICCs link to horizontal cross-connects (HCCs). The Cisco hierarchical networking model fits nicely in the hierarchical cabling architecture standard defined by EIA/TIA-568-B. You find out about the Cisco Hierarchical Networking Model in Book I, Chapter 9.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 6


When designing a network, the trick is to realize that the number of hosts that you need to connect in a LAN determines the potential size of the collision domain. If you have only about three to five hosts, you may be able to go with a hub and Cat3 UTP LAN; you can forget about coaxial cable altogether. However, because Layer 2 switches and Cat5 UTP have been very affordable for several years, it is best to replace the hub and Cat3 UTP solution with a layer 2 switch and Cat5 or Cat5e UTP. For a reasonable price, you get full-duplex transmission and one collision domain per switch port, using layer 2 switches and Cat5 or better UTP. A LAN connected with layer 2 switches and Cat5 or better UTP is faster, more reliable, and more scalable than a LAN implemented with hubs and Cat3 UTP. On the other hand, if you need to connect hundreds or thousands of hosts into a single LAN, you definitely need to limit the collision domain with layer 2 switches and Cat5, Cat5e, Cat6, or Cat6a UTP. The choice between Cat5, Cat5e, Cat6, or Cat6a UTP cabling depends on bandwidth, range and budget requirements.

80


T568B and T568A UTP termination standards The T568A and T568B termination standards define the pin and conductor pair assignments for 4- or 8-conductor Cat3, Cat5, Cat5e, Cat6, Cat6a, and Cat7 UTP cables. Particularly, T568A and T568B define the pin-out, or wire layout, of the 8 Position 8 Contact (8P8C) connector, also known as RJ45. This connector looks very similar to an RJ11 telephone connector; it’s just a bit larger.

Ethernet cabling All cables are exposed to channel attenuation, also known as inherent attenuation. Channel attenuation is the loss of signal strength as the electrical signal travels through the transmission medium. Cables are also exposed to crosstalk. Crosstalk is signal interference that occurs when two cables run next to each other. Twisting the cables together in pairs almost completely eliminates the crosstalk effect. This is the whole idea behind twisted-pair cables. In fact, as you have already seen, various categories of unshielded twisted-pair cable exist: Cat3, Cat5, Cat5e, Cat6, and Cat7 UTP. The main difference between UTP categories is the number of wire twists per foot in each pair of wires. The more twists, the more chances to cancel out crosstalk and the higher the category. To further protect the cable against electrical interference, shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable can be used. STP is recommended for environments that have high electromagnetic fields, such as industrial environments.

Straight-through cables A UTP cable that is wired as T568A at both ends is a straight-through cable. Straight-through cables are used to ✦ Connect host devices to network devices ✦ Connect routers to switches or hubs Only pins 1, 2, 3, and 6 are used for Ethernet and FastEthernet because Ethernet and FastEthernet (except 100BASE-T4) use only two of the four pairs of wires in a UTP cable. Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) and 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GigE) use all eight pins because GigE and 10GigE standards utilize all four pairs of wires in a UTP cable.

Crossover cables A UTP cable that is wired as T568A at one end and as T568B at the other end is a crossover cable. Crossover cables are used to interconnect switches to switches, hubs to hubs, hosts to hosts, hubs to switches, and routers directly to hosts.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 7: Introducing Wide-Area Networks (WANs) Exam Objectives ✓ Describing wide-area networks (WANs) ✓ Describing the purpose of data communication service providers ✓ Differentiating between LAN and WAN operations and features ✓ Identifying different methods for connecting to a WAN

Y

ou get acquainted with WANs (wide-area networks) in this chapter. You find out about the various types of WAN connections. The pros and cons of each type of connection are reviewed. You discover more about WANs in Book VII.

Introducing Wide-Area Networks Wide-area networks span long distances. They interconnect the following: ✦ MANs (metropolitan-area networks) ✦ CANs (campus-area networks) ✦ LANs (local-area networks) Telecommunication companies build and maintain WANs. Telecom companies lease bandwidth, or dedicated connections, to other companies that need to interconnect their LANs over long distances. The telecom companies that provide shared bandwidth or dedicated connections over their WANs are also called service providers. Data communication service providers invest in telecommunication infrastructure such as terrestrial and submarine cabling, satellites and earth base stations, microwave base stations, and other wireless links to be able to provide a fast, reliable worldwide data communication infrastructure. You find four types of WAN connections: ✦ Dedicated leased line ✦ Circuit-switched

www.it-ebooks.info

86

Dedicated Leased Line Connections ✦ Packet-switched ✦ Cell-switched

Dedicated Leased Line Connections A dedicated leased line is a data communication connection that is used exclusively by one customer. The customer leases the data communication line from a service provider. The service provider installs a data communication link between the customer’s sites. Only that customer uses the data communication link. Sometimes, the communication line may already exist, and the service provider simply reserves it for the customer.

Advantages of leased lines The main advantages of dedicated lease connections are as follows: ✦ Highly available bandwidth: The customer can use all the bandwidth of the connection because no one else shares the same line. Depending on the type of link, maximum bandwidth can reach approximately 45 Mbps: • T1 link: 1.544 Mbps • T2 link: 6.312 Mbps • T3 link: 44.736 Mbps ✦ Privacy: No other users share the leased line. Hence, no other user can disturb the traffic of the customer leasing the line. ✦ Reliability: Fewer chances exist to have traffic spikes, conflicting setups, and conflicting network applications, because only one customer is using the line. ✦ Customization: The connection line can be configured and customized to the particular needs of that customer, including quality of service (QoS), traffic management, and encryption.

Disadvantage of leased lines The main disadvantages of dedicated leased lines are as follows: ✦ Cost: Dedicated leased lines are expensive, and they get more expensive as the distance increases between connected sites. ✦ Multiple PPP links: Whenever more than two sites are connected, a dedicated leased line needs to be configured for each site in a point-topoint topology. This increases costs.

www.it-ebooks.info

Circuit-Switched Connections

87

Dedicated leased line protocols Dedicated leased lines use point-to-point protocols such as the following:

✦ Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) ✦ Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) Read Book VII, Chapters 1, 2, and 3 to find out about these protocols.

Circuit-Switched Connections Circuit-switched connections use the telephone communication infrastructure to send and receive data over telephone lines. Telephone lines are either analog or digital: ✦ Analog: These are standard telephone lines. Digital data needs to be converted to analog signals using a dialup modem before sending the data over analog telephone lines. Analog signals received from a telephone line are converted back to digital signals by a modem. ✦ Digital: These are the newer telephone lines. Two digital circuitswitched connection technologies exist: • ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network): Introduced before ADSL. ISDN was a popular alternative to dialup modems. However, it has been superseded by ADSL today. • ADSL (asymmetric digital subscriber line): Introduced in the mid-1990s. ADSL was initially much more expensive than ISDN, hence ISDN’s initial popularity. As ADSL costs went down, it became the standard for circuit-switched connections.

Advantage of circuit-switched connections The main advantage of this solution is availability: All major telecommunication companies offer ADSL connectivity in areas where they operate.

Disadvantages of circuit-switched connections The main disadvantages of this solution are as follows: ✦ Low speeds (especially with ISDN): • 19.2–128 Kbps (ISDN) • 1.5–3 Mbps (ADSL) ✦ High cost: Costs are typically pay-per-use, so they tend to add up.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing to Wide Area Networks (WAN)

✦ High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) Protocol

Book I Chapter 7

88

Packet-Switched Connections

Circuit-switched connection protocols Similar to dedicated leased lines, circuit-switched connections use point-topoint protocols such as the following: ✦ High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) Protocol ✦ Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) ✦ Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP)

Packet-Switched Connections Packet-switched connections are a shared bandwidth technology: Users connect to a service provider network and share the bandwidth of that service provider and the bandwidth of its external link to other networks.

Advantages of packet-switched connections The main advantages of packet-switched connections are as follows: ✦ Inexpensive: Packet-switched connections are less expensive than dedicated leased lines and circuit-switched connections. Customers connecting through packet-switched links share the infrastructure deployed by the service provider to support their collective connectivity needs. Hence, they also share the costs of that infrastructure. ✦ High speed: Depending on the type of link, maximum bandwidth can reach approximately 45 Mbps. However, several users share the bandwidth. Available speeds are as follows: • T1: 1.544 Mbps • T2: 6.312 Mbps • T3: 44.736 Mbps ✦ QoS: Although several users share the bandwidth, service providers now offer QoS (quality of service) guarantees. This increases reliability and brings the service level of packet-switched connections almost on par with dedicated leased lines. ✦ Easy setup: The customer can connect one of the serial interfaces on his router to his service provider’s network in one location. The customer can also connect serial interfaces from routers at remote locations to the service provider network. This interconnects the customer’s sites through the service provider network, while sharing the bandwidth of the service provider with other users. Consequently, this is a fairly straightforward and cost-effective solution to interconnect remote sites over long distances.

www.it-ebooks.info

Cell-Switched Connections

89

Disadvantage of packet-switched connections

✦ Reliability: More chances exist to have traffic spikes, conflicting setups, and conflicting network applications because several customers are sharing the bandwidth of the service provider. ✦ Limited customization: Customer-specific configurations such as QoS, traffic management, and encryption need to be done without affecting other users’ configurations. ✦ Security: Data exchanged between remote sites goes through the service provider network that also carries other customers’ data.

Packet-switched connection protocols Packet-switched connections use the following packet-switching protocols: ✦ X.25: The initial packet-switching WAN protocol. X.25 is considered to be the grandfather of Frame Relay. ✦ Frame Relay: Newer, improved version of X.25. Frame Relay is the most commonly used packet-switching protocol today. Read Book VII, Chapters 1 and 4 to find out about these protocols.

Cell-Switched Connections Cell-switched connections are very similar to packet-switched connections with the exception that cell-switched frames have a fixed size whereas packet-switched frames vary in size. For this reason, cell-switched connections tend to be faster than packet-switched connections, especially under heavy traffic.

Advantages of cell-switched connections The main advantages of cell-switched connections over packet-switched connections are as follows: ✦ Speed: Cell-switched connections are faster than packet-switched connections. Cell-switched connections use fixed-size frames as opposed to the variable-size frames in packet-switched connections. Hence, there is no delay in finding the length of each data frame in cell-switched connections. Maximum bandwidth can reach 155 Mbps.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing to Wide Area Networks (WAN)

The main disadvantage of packet-switched connections is shared bandwidth. Several users share the bandwidth of the service provider with packetswitched connections. This represents some challenges:

Book I Chapter 7

90

Cell-Switched Connections ✦ Best suited for simultaneous data, voice, and video connections: Voice and video traffic needs to be converted back and forth between analog and digital signals. Coders/decoders (codecs) perform these conversions in real time. Recall that cell-switched connections are faster than packet-switched connections because there is no need to resolve the length of each frame in cellswitched connections. Codecs operate better with fixed-length data frames because these data frames can be processed faster; codecs operate better with cell-switched connections.

Disadvantages of cell-switched connections The main disadvantages of cell-switched connections over packet-switched connections are as follows: ✦ Overhead: Cell-switched connections — the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) protocol — segment variable-length data frames into fixed-length cells of 48 bytes for data plus 5 bytes for the control header: 53 byte cells. The sending router or switch needs to spend some processing power (overhead) to segment the variable-length data frames into fixedlength cells. Similarly, the receiving router or switch needs to spend some processing power (overhead) to reassemble the fixed-length cells into variable-length data frames. ✦ Bandwidth wasted: Some cells are not filled with data. All cells have 48 bytes available for data, but an incoming variable-length frame can be smaller than 48 bytes. In that case, some of the 48 bytes of the ATM cell are empty. Those empty bytes in the ATM cell are wasting bandwidth because they are still transferred over the WAN.

Cell-switched connection protocols Cell-switched connections use the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) protocol. Read Book VII, Chapter 1 to find out about the ATM protocol.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 8: Introducing Wireless Networks Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the purpose and functions of wireless networks ✓ Describing the standards associated with wireless media ✓ Identifying and describing the purpose of the components in wireless

networks ✓ Comparing and contrasting wireless security features and capabilities

W

ireless networks are short- or medium-range networks that connect host devices using airwaves (radio) instead of cables. Wireless connections exist in a large variety of applications both for LAN and WAN connections.

Wireless LAN (WLAN) Probably the most familiar and common wireless networking standard is the IEEE 802.11 wireless fidelity standard for LAN wireless connection. The IEEE 802.11 standard, also known as Wi-Fi, defines a blueprint and implementation specification to implement short-range, high-speed wireless connections. The CCNA exam focuses on LAN wireless connections, so it’s important to understand wireless LANs.

Wireless WAN In terms of WAN applications, wireless connections are used for moderate ranges of up to 20 miles. Several technologies exist, some of which can concentrate the airwave signals into a directional beam, thereby increasing range. Microwave transmission is a form of wireless connection that can span very long distances, either on earth or through telecommunication satellites. Wireless WANs are beyond the scope of the CCNA exam.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

96

Security Risks

manufacturers. The group includes Cisco. One the goals of the WPA program is to provide a more secure alternative to the Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) security protocol previously used in wireless networks. Two versions of WPA wireless security exist today: WPA-1 and WPA-2.

WPA-1 WPA-1 is an improvement over WEP. WPA-1 uses Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). The basic input-output system (BIOS) of most wireless network interface cards, even as old as 1999, can be upgraded to support WPA-1. However, wireless access point (WAP) devices require modification to support WPA-1. Hence, most WAP devices built before 2003 do not support WPA-1. To summarize, most wireless devices, both NICs and WAPs, and host operating systems built after 2003, support WPA-1. The Wi-Fi Alliance tests and certifies wireless NIC and WAP devices to determine whether they comply with the WPA-1 standard. If they do, a WPA-1 logo is visible on the packaging and on the device.

WPA-2 WPA-2 is defined by the IEEE 802.11i standard. This fixes WEP shortcomings as well as some flaws discovered in TKIP used in WPA-1. WPA-2 does not use TKIP. Instead, it uses the Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code Protocol (CCMP) encryption algorithm, which is considered fully secure. WPA-2 is currently the most secure wireless security protocol. Not all wireless NIC and WAP devices support WPA-2. Particularly, devices manufactured before 2004 do not typically comply with the WPA-2 Wi-Fi certification. The Wi-Fi Alliance tests and certifies wireless NIC and WAP devices to determine whether they comply with the WPA-2 standard. If they do, a WPA-2 logo is visible on the packaging and on the device.

MAC address filtering Another way to control devices that are allowed to connect to a wireless network is filtering by MAC address. Most WAP devices allow creating a list of MAC addresses that can connect to the wireless network. The MAC address of each device that needs to connect to the wireless network is added to the list. The WAP then refuses connection to any wireless device that is not in the “allowed MAC address” list. This may be a good solution for small- to medium-size wireless networks. However, it becomes difficult to manage in larger wireless networks when many wireless devices need to connect.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 9: Network Design Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the Cisco hierarchical network model ✓ Describing the characteristics and purpose of each layer in the Cisco

hierarchical network model ✓ Describing the benefits associated with designing networks based on

the Cisco hierarchical network model ✓ Identifying the Cisco devices suited for each layer in the Cisco

hierarchical network model

Y

ou find out about the Cisco hierarchical network design model in this chapter. You see how Cisco conceptually divides networks into three layers: ✦ Core layer ✦ Distribution layer ✦ Access layer

Cisco Hierarchical Network Model Cisco defines a network design model that is hierarchical: Three layers define the type of connectivity needed between devices in the network. The Cisco hierarchical model also defines where specific services should best be offered in a network. For example, you may want to create access control lists at the distribution layer, not at the access layer. On the other hand, you may want to handle segmentation at the access layer.

Core Layer The core layer is the layer that sits at the center of the network. This layer is also called the backbone. Ultimately, traffic from all devices in the network may end up being routed to the core of the network. The core layer is “where networks meet.” Large routers typically interconnect at the core layer. Major global networks are organized around several main backbones to which thousands of core layer routers connect. Backbone links are typically highly available and extremely fast links that provide very high bandwidth.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

102

Core Layer

• Avoid controlling access using access control lists • Avoid filtering packets • Avoid interconnecting LANs ✦ Avoid connecting end devices, such as host devices, at the core layer. The core layer specializes in providing very high-speed, very highly available connectivity between large global networks. This is no place for connecting end devices. The core layer is solely reserved for internetwork connectivity. ✦ Avoid enabling slower routing protocols, such as Routing Information Protocol (RIP), on core routers. ✦ Avoid connecting access layer switches directly at the core layer. Access layer traffic needs to be concentrated in a few distribution layer routers that connect to the core layer. This ensures that core bandwidth is not wasted dealing with traffic that shouldn’t go to the core in the first place. Routing protocols use different metrics and methods to determine the best route for a packet. Some methods are faster than others. It is best practice to use only the fastest routing protocols on core routers, such as the following: ✦ OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) ✦ EIGRP (Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol) ✦ IS-IS (Intermediate System–to–Intermediate System) You read more about routing protocols, metrics, and methods they use to determine routes in Book IV. For example, in Figure 9-1, a host connected to switch A1 may need to send a packet to a host connected to switch A2. The packet should be properly routed at the distribution layer by router A without ever disturbing the core router. The packet does not need to reach network B, so you don’t need to route it to the core layer. If you plugged switch A1 and A2 directly into the core router, instead of using the distribution layer router A, the packet would have to go through the core router, which wastes precious core network bandwidth. Figure 9-1 illustrates how the core layer, the distribution layer, and the access layer interconnect to provide an optimal hierarchical network.

www.it-ebooks.info

Distribution Layer

Core Router

Distribution layer

Distribution Router (A)

Backbone

Book I Chapter 9

Core Router

Distribution Router (B)

Access layer

Host Device Access Switch (B1)

Access Switch (A1)

Figure 9-1: Cisco network layers.

Network Design

Core layer

103

Host Device

Access Switch (A2)

Host Device

Host Device

Host Device

Access Switch (B2)

Host Device

Host Device Host Device

Host Device

Distribution Layer The distribution layer links the core layer to the access layer. The distribution layer is also called the workgroup layer. The distribution layer is involved in routing packets between nodes connected at the access layer. Packets may need to be routed to a different network, which may be located within the same distribution layer network, or through the core layer in a different distribution layer network. Routers typically interconnect at the distribution layer. The main functions performed by switches and routers at the distribution layer are as follows: ✦ Finding the best network route for packets ✦ Filtering packets ✦ Interconnecting LANs ✦ Connecting LANs to WANs

www.it-ebooks.info

104

Distribution Layer ✦ Relaying packets to the core layer as needed ✦ Securing networks Distribution layer switches and routers are best suited for the following: ✦ Routing packets between access and core layer routers: Similar to core routers, you should enable only faster routing protocols (OSPF, EIGRP, IS-IS) on distribution routers. However, if access layer routers have slower routing protocols enabled (such as RIP), you should also enable those protocols on distribution routers. ✦ Managing access lists: You should configure access lists at the distribution layer because this is the entry point into local-area networks (LANs). Use Layer 2 switches to manage access lists because Layer 2 switches are faster than routers. ✦ Filtering packets: Similar to access lists, you should configure packet filtering at the distribution layer because this is the entry point into LANs. ✦ Translating network addresses (NAT — Network Address Translation): Some LANs at the access layer may have their own private addressing scheme. The distribution layer is the entry point into LANs. Hence, you should configure NAT at the distribution layer to translate public WAN IP addresses into private LAN IP addresses. ✦ Managing firewalls: Firewalls isolate the internal private network from the outside public networks (the Internet) to filter IP packets and control access to internal network resources. You should enable and manage firewalls at the distribution layer because most internal networks operate at the access layer and sometimes at the distribution layer. The distribution layer is the entry point in internal networks. ✦ Routing packets between VLANs: Virtual local-area networks (VLANs) are bound to internal networks. As mentioned previously, internal networks operate at the access layer and sometimes at the distribution layer. The distribution layer is the entry point in internal networks. So, distribution layer switches and routers are best suited to manage inter-VLAN routing.

www.it-ebooks.info

Benefits

105

Access Layer

Book I Chapter 9

This layer is also called the desktop layer, because it usually involves interconnecting desktop computers and concentrating their traffic into a distribution layer switch or router. Switches, small routers, and computer host devices typically interconnect at the access layer. Most services that are bound to a particular LAN are typically enabled at the access layer. For example, traffic segmentation is typically configured at the access layer, because traffic is usually segmented on a per-LAN basis, or on a per-VLAN basis. The main functions performed by switches and routers at the access layer are as follows: ✦ Connecting host devices to a LAN ✦ Segmenting network traffic using switched LANs and VLANs ✦ Relaying traffic to switches and routers at the distribution layer

Benefits There are several benefits of designing and implementing networks in such a hierarchical way. You realize the following benefits when you implement the Cisco hierarchical network model: ✦ Specialization ✦ Scalability ✦ Limitation of problem domain

Specialization Each layer offers a specific set of services and interconnectivity type: ✦ Access layer: Host devices and other end-node devices connect only at the access layer, which is optimized for endpoint connections and local network traffic handling.

www.it-ebooks.info

Network Design

The access layer is the layer that interconnects host devices to LANs. The access layer is where workgroup LANs are defined.

106

Benefits ✦ Distribution and core layers: Routers, on the other hand, specialize in efficient and optimal routing of data packets between networks. Hence, they typically operate at the distribution and core layer, which are optimized for bulk and backbone traffic handling. No end-device connections are done at the distribution and core layers.

Scalability It is easy to scale up a hierarchical network. Each layer can expand both l aterally and vertically. Considering Figure 9-1, you can easily add additional host devices to the network by expanding at the access layer. It is important, however, to calculate the bandwidth required for additional nodes and expand the links at the distribution and core layer if necessary. Each layer can be designed with some future capacity growth in mind. For example, you can plan for a certain number of ports and links at the access layer. Not all ports are connected on day 1. However, over time, as you add host devices, these links are used. To support higher bandwidth, you can expand at the distribution and core layers. You can also plan for additional bandwidth capacity at the distribution and core layers without necessarily enabling and using all this potential bandwidth capacity on day 1. For example, you can deploy routers with two or four ports at the distribution layer, even if you only use one port on day 1. This leaves room to increase bandwidth capacity at the distribution layer by using the additional router ports in the future. A fine balance exists between planning for future capacity growth and wasting money. In the example, a two-port router at the distribution layer, with one uplink port being used on day 1, may be a better solution than a four-port router with one uplink port being used on day 1, from a financial perspective. On the other hand, if the network grows fairly fast, and it gets to the point where you need three uplink ports to the core layer, you would wish you had a four-port router instead of a two-port router at the distribution layer, because it is more economical to connect and enable port 3 on a four-port router than to add and connect a new two-port router. It all depends on the future growth forecast, in other words, how quickly the additional bandwidth will be needed. It also depends on high-availability requirements. For example, even if you consider that four uplink ports will be needed fairly soon, you may still decide to implement two two-port routers instead of a single four-port router to be able to continue to provide connectivity to the core layer in case one of the routers fails.

www.it-ebooks.info

Benefits

107

Limitation of problem domain Troubleshooting network problems is simplified in a Cisco hierarchical network, because each layer offers a specific set of services and interconnectivity. Hence, you need to investigate only problems related to that specific set of services and interconnectivity at any particular network layer. For example, if a host device cannot connect to the network, you typically investigate its connectivity at the access layer only. You don’t need to look at the distribution layer if other hosts in the same network can connect to the distribution and core layers.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 9

Network Design

Cisco offers products that allow you to fine-tune the balance between planning for future capacity growth and wasting money up front. Higher-end Cisco switches and routers typically have expansion module slots. This lets you start with a router/switch with a lower number of ports and add ports as your needs increase. Upper limits still exist (as well as models in the same product line with more expansion slots than others), but for a slightly higher initial cost, you can add more interfaces without buying new equipment. The higher initial cost of a modular switch or router is in some cases lower than the cost of a switch/router that provides all the ports you’ll need for future growth over the upcoming months/years. You can also replace an expansion module depending on network changes such as a different type of WAN. Cisco modular products allow considerable flexibility in the way you design and implement your network.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 10: Introducing Cisco Hardware and Software Exam Objectives ✓ Identifying software components in Cisco devices ✓ Describing the characteristics and purpose of the Cisco Internetwork

Operating System (IOS) ✓ Identifying Cisco network management software products and their

purpose ✓ Identifying hardware components in Cisco devices ✓ Reviewing best practices for selecting Cisco hardware and software

products for a specific network design ✓ Describing system memory organization on Cisco devices ✓ Describing device configurations on Cisco switches and routers ✓ Using the Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI) ✓ Use Cisco graphical user interfaces (GUIs)

R

ead this chapter to get acquainted with Cisco hardware and software products. You find out about the main hardware components of Cisco devices. You discover software that runs on Cisco devices, including the Cisco Internetwork Operating System, shortly known as IOS. You read about the characteristics and purpose of Cisco IOS. You see that the same IOS can be used to manage both Layer 2 Cisco switches and Layer 3 Cisco routers. You also see how to use the IOS command-line interface (CLI) as well as the graphical user interface (GUI) to manage Cisco devices. Context-sensitive help is discussed as well.

Introducing Cisco Products You probably know the difference between hardware and software: ✦ Hardware: Physical devices that you install, connect to a power supply, and interconnect with network cables. In the Cisco world and in the context of this book, hardware means a Cisco switch, a Cisco router, cables, computer hosts, or Cisco IP phones.

www.it-ebooks.info

112

Introducing Cisco Products ✦ Software: Computer programs that are installed on a physical device to configure and manage the device, to provide a user interface, to operate the device, and to troubleshoot the device. In the Cisco world and in the context of this book, software means the Cisco Internetwork Operating System (IOS), the Cisco Network Assistant (CNA), the Cisco Security Device Manager (SDM), or the Cisco Device Manager (DM). The following sections describe the Cisco hardware and software products that you need to know for the CCNA test.

Cisco software Cisco provides various software products. You do not need to know about all of them for the CCNA test. However, you will be tested on your knowledge of the Cisco IOS, Cisco CNA, and Cisco SDM. Each of these three software products is described in the following sections.

Cisco IOS The Cisco IOS (Internetwork Operating System) is Cisco’s proprietary switch and router operating system. The Cisco IOS is stored in flash memory on the Cisco device. Cisco IOS operates all major Cisco switch and router series, from the entrylevel Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch series to the top-of-the-line Cisco Catalyst 6500 switch series, and from the entry-level Cisco 1800/2600/2800 router series to the top-of-the-line Cisco 12000 router series. This is good. You can learn the Cisco IOS working with an entry-level Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch series and with an entry-level Cisco 1800/2600/2800 router series and use that knowledge with any Cisco switch or router, even with top-of-the-line Cisco Catalyst 6500 series switches and with top-of-the-line Cisco 12000 router series.

Cisco Device Manager The Cisco Device Manager is a Web-based tool that is installed on all Cisco switches and routers at the factory. To access this tool, you need to browse to the management IP address of the Cisco switch or router from a computer host connected to the network. The Cisco Device Manager Web application is part of the Cisco IOS software package, and it’s stored in the Cisco device flash memory.

Cisco CNA The Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) is a Java-based application used to monitor and manage Cisco switches and routers from a central management console. Cisco CNA is available for Windows, Mac OS X, and Linux. It provides a graphical user interface (GUI) that allows the network administrator to have

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Cisco Products

113

both global and detailed views of the Cisco networking environment. Cisco CNA is stored on the hard drive of the computer host where it’s installed.

The Cisco Security Device Manager (SDM) is a computer application used to monitor and manage Cisco routers from a central management console. Cisco SDM is available for Windows. It provides a graphical user interface (GUI) that allows the network administrator to have both global and detailed views of the Cisco routing environment.

Cisco software in read-only memory (ROM) Four software programs are stored in ROM on Cisco devices. These programs are the first programs that the Cisco device runs upon powering up. They are used to verify and bootstrap the Cisco device, during startup, prior to loading the Cisco IOS and transitioning into normal operation mode. These software programs are as follows: ✦ Power-on self test (POST): This program is used to verify the Cisco device hardware. It is the first program the Cisco device runs when you power it up. ✦ Bootstrap program: This program brings up the Cisco device by loading the Cisco IOS stored in flash memory. The bootstrap program is run right after the POST. ✦ Boot Image (Rx-boot): The Boot Image (Rx-boot) is a subset of the Cisco IOS. The Rx-boot image is used to download the Cisco IOS to the Cisco device from a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server whenever the IOS needs to be upgraded, or whenever the IOS needs to be replaced. The Rx-boot image is accessed from the (boot)> prompt on a Cisco device. ✦ ROM Monitor (ROMMON): The ROM Monitor is used to maintain, test, and troubleshoot the configuration stored in ROM and in the flash memory of the Cisco device. ROMMON is also used to troubleshoot hardware problems. Most management features provided by ROMMON can also be done with Rx-boot. It is best practice to use Rx-boot whenever possible. ROMMON is typically used to change the value stored in the configuration register or as a last resort when booting problems cannot be fixed with Rx-boot. ROMMON is accessed from the rommon> prompt on a Cisco device. To get to the rommon> prompt, you need to break out of the bootstrap process by pressing Ctrl+Break while the Cisco device is booting up. The configuration register is explained in the section “Cisco device memory,” later in this chapter.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Cisco Hardware and Software

Cisco SDM

Book I Chapter 10

114

Introducing Cisco Products

Cisco hardware Cisco provides various hardware products. You do not need to know about all of them for the CCNA test. However, you will be tested on a few things. You need to be able to differentiate Cisco hardware product types. You also need to know best practices for using Cisco hardware products.

Differentiate Cisco hardware products You need to know the difference between various networking devices. You need to know how a switch is different from a hub or a bridge. You also need to know how switches, hubs, and bridges are different from routers.

Best practices for using Cisco hardware products You need to understand best practices for using entry-level and top-of-theline products. For example, you need to know that top-of-the-line switches and routers are best suited for the core layer or for the distribution layer of the network. Entry-level and midrange switches and routers are best suited for the access layer or for the distribution layer. Top-of-the-line switches and routers manage specialized services in a network, such as the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) root bridge role, inter-VLAN routing, and gateway connectivity. These services are used throughout the network. Hence, they need to run on a highly efficient and highly available switch or router.

Cisco device memory Five areas comprise the memory of Cisco devices. These memory areas are used to store static and dynamic device configuration data. These memory areas are as follows: ✦ Read-only memory (ROM): The ROM stores programs and data necessary to start up the Cisco device. This memory keeps its contents even when the Cisco device is powered down. ROM is kept on EPROM (erasable programmable read-only memory) chips. ✦ Flash memory: The flash memory stores the Cisco IOS. Flash memory keeps its contents even when the Cisco device is powered down. Flash memory is kept on EEPROM chips, on PCMCIA cards, or on CompactFlash cards. The PCMCIA and CompactFlash cards can be accessed either internally on the Cisco device motherboard or externally through a PCMCIA or CompactFlash external slot. ✦ Nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM): The NVRAM stores the startup configuration. This is the configuration that Cisco IOS loads when it boots up. NVRAM keeps its contents even when the Cisco device is powered down.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Cisco Device Configurations

115

✦ Configuration register: The configuration register is a 2-byte (16-bit) area of NVRAM that holds a numeric value that defines how the Cisco device starts up. By default, the value stored in the configuration register instructs the bootstrap program to load the Cisco IOS from flash memory and to load the startup configuration from NVRAM. You can change the value of the configuration register from the ROMMON prompt. To get to the rommon> prompt, you need to break out of the bootstrap process by pressing Ctrl+Break while the Cisco device is booting up.

Introducing Cisco Device Configurations You find two configurations on Cisco switches and routers: the startup configuration and the running configuration.

Startup configuration The startup configuration is the configuration that the Cisco IOS loads when it boots up. The startup configuration is stored in NVRAM, which keeps its contents even when the Cisco device is powered down. Cisco switches and routers start in setup mode to allow you to create a startup configuration whenever no startup configuration exists in NVRAM. After you complete the setup mode, you are prompted to save the configuration to NVRAM. If you answer yes, the configuration you created is saved to NVRAM: It becomes the startup configuration. You can also manually save the current configuration to NVRAM by using the copy running-config startupconfig Cisco IOS command. Cisco devices use the startup configuration data to configure the device before normal operation starts. The Cisco IOS loads the startup configuration from NVRAM into RAM. At that point, the startup configuration becomes the running configuration. The switch is up and ready in normal operation mode.

Running configuration The running configuration is the dynamic data that changes while the Cisco device is in normal operation mode. This includes the ARP cache (MAC address tables), routing tables, STP data, VLAN data, EtherChannel

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 10


✦ Random-access memory (RAM): The RAM stores the running configuration. This is the dynamic data that changes while the Cisco device is in normal operation mode. This includes the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache (MAC address tables), routing tables, STP data, VLAN data, EtherChannel configuration data, and temporary buffers. RAM does not keep its contents when the Cisco device is powered down. Upon startup, RAM is initialized with contents from NVRAM.

116

Meet the Cisco IOS User Interface

configuration data, and temporary buffers. The Cisco IOS loads the startup configuration from NVRAM into RAM during the boot process. After it’s in RAM, the startup configuration becomes the running configuration and can change dynamically. You can save the running configuration to NVRAM to replace the startup configuration with updated data. To do this, use the copy running-config startup-config Cisco IOS command. You can also save the running configuration to a file on a computer host.

Meet the Cisco IOS User Interface Read the following sections to find out about the Cisco IOS user interface, including the command-line interface (CLI) and the graphical user interfaces (GUIs) available. It’s important to get familiar with the IOS CLI and GUI interfaces because you will be tested on them in the CCNA exam.

Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI) The Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface that is integrated into the IOS. When a switch or router boots up, the IOS loads the startup configuration from NVRAM and displays the IOS prompt, waiting for commands. The Cisco device is in user EXEC mode at this point: You, the device administrator, can enter IOS commands at the IOS prompt. The Cisco IOS processes your commands and displays results. Next, the IOS displays the prompt again, waiting for more commands.

Command-line operation modes Before you explore the details of the IOS command-line interface, it’s a good idea to understand the various command-line modes of the Cisco IOS. The Cisco IOS CLI operates in one of the following modes: ✦ Setup mode: Initial setup mode ✦ User EXEC mode: Normal operation mode ✦ Privileged EXEC mode: Privileged operation mode ✦ Global configuration mode: Commands that affect the configuration of the whole switch ✦ Specific configuration mode: Commands that affect only a specific part of the switch

www.it-ebooks.info


117

The following sections describe each of these operation modes.

Book I Chapter 10

Setup mode

User EXEC mode The user EXEC mode is the normal operation mode on Cisco switches and routers. The Cisco IOS displays the user EXEC prompt and waits for commands.

User EXEC prompt The Cisco IOS user EXEC prompt is composed of the switch or router host name followed by the character >. Switches are all named “Switch” by default. Routers are all named “Router” by default. You should give a meaningful host name to your switches and routers. You don’t want to use the same name for all your switches, and you don’t want to use the same name for all your routers, right? ✦ This is the user EXEC prompt for a switch with the default host name of “Switch”: Switch>

✦ This is the user EXEC prompt for a switch with the host name of “SW1”: SW1>

✦ This is the user EXEC prompt for a router with the default host name of “Router”: Router>

✦ This is the user EXEC prompt for a switch with the host name of “RT1”: RT1>

Privileged EXEC mode The privileged EXEC mode is the advanced operation mode of Cisco switches and routers. Cisco designed the privileged mode to filter access to IOS commands that can have adverse effects on the Cisco device and its configuration. The idea is to allow only experienced administrators to run commands in privileged mode. You can set different passwords for user EXEC mode and for privileged EXEC mode.

www.it-ebooks.info


Setup mode is the initial configuration mode. Cisco switches and routers start in setup mode whenever no startup configuration exists in NVRAM. The IOS setup mode guides you through the steps to initially configure your switch or router by asking a few questions. You can either complete the setup mode questionnaire or exit out of it before completion. Either way, after you exit from setup mode, the Cisco IOS transitions from setup mode to user EXEC mode.

118


You should have different passwords for user EXEC mode and for privileged EXEC mode, and provide the privileged EXEC mode password only to experienced administrators. To enter privileged mode, execute the enable Cisco IOS command (or just en in its short form). You execute enable or en at the user EXEC prompt. Next, the IOS prompts you for the privileged EXEC mode password if you have configured a different password for privileged EXEC mode. After you enter the privileged EXEC mode password, the Cisco IOS displays the privileged EXEC mode prompt and waits for commands. To exit from privileged EXEC mode back to user EXEC mode, execute the disable Cisco IOS command.

Privileged EXEC prompt The Cisco IOS privileged EXEC prompt is comprised of the switch or router host name followed by the # character. Switches are all named “Switch” by default. Routers are all named “Router” by default. You should give a meaningful host name to your switches and routers. The following example shows how to enable privileged EXEC mode. You are not prompted for a privileged EXEC mode password in this case. Why? No specific password has yet been set for privileged EXEC mode, so the user EXEC mode (Telnet or console) password is accepted. Switch>enable (or en) Switch#

The following is the same example on a switch named “SW1.” Here you also use the disable command to exit to the user EXEC prompt: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#disable SW1>

The same commands work on a router named “RT1”: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#disable RT1>

Global configuration mode The global configuration mode is used for commands that affect the configuration of the whole Cisco device. In other words, if you need to execute some commands that modify the behavior of either the whole switch or the whole router you need to set the IOS in global configuration mode. You can only enable global configuration mode from privileged EXEC mode.

www.it-ebooks.info


119

To set the Cisco IOS in global configuration mode, execute the configure terminal IOS command (or just config t, in its short form). You execute configure terminal or config t at the privileged EXEC prompt.

The Cisco IOS global configuration prompt is comprised of the switch or router host name followed by (config)#. You need to enable privileged mode first by executing enable at the user EXEC prompt and then executing configure terminal. Here is an example where you enter global configuration mode from user EXEC mode: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#

The same commands work on a router named “RT1”: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#configure terminal (or config t) RT1(config)#

If you need to run a command that is not available in global configuration mode, you can prefix the command with do to execute it in privileged EXEC mode. The do prefix allows you to temporarily exit the configuration mode to run just that command. For example: SW1(config)#do show running-config

The show running-config command is not available in configuration mode, only in privileged mode. So, theoretically, you cannot run this command at the (config) prompt. You would have to exit to privileged mode, run show running-config, and come back to configuration mode. Cisco provides the do prefix to allow you to run nonconfiguration commands from the configuration prompt.

Specific configuration mode The specific configuration mode is used for commands that affect the configuration of either just one part or one range of components of the Cisco device. Typically, you need to set the IOS in specific configuration mode when you need to work on a few interfaces (or ports) on your switch or on your router.

www.it-ebooks.info


Global configuration prompt

Book I Chapter 10

120


To set the Cisco IOS in specific configuration mode, you need to select the components you want to work with. You select components from the global configuration prompt. In other words, to transition to the specific configuration mode, you first need to set the IOS in global configuration mode by executing the configure terminal IOS command (or just config t or conf t in its short forms). You execute configure terminal or config t at the privileged EXEC prompt. After you are in global configuration mode, you can select the components you want to work with and thereby transition the IOS to specific configuration mode. For example, if you need to configure interface fastethernet0/1, you need to set the IOS in global configuration mode and then select the fa0/1 interface using the interface IOS command: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#interface fastethernet0/1 (or int fa0/1) SW1(config-if)#

Specific configuration prompt The Cisco IOS specific configuration prompt is comprised of the switch or router host name followed by (config-)#. You need to enable privileged mode first by executing enable at the user EXEC prompt and then execute configure terminal. The previous example showed how to enter interface configuration mode from user EXEC mode. Note that the prompt is SW1(config-if)# in interface configuration mode. The term if is an abbreviation for interface. Here is another example where you select the console access line component: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#line console 0 (or line con 0) SW1(config-line)#

Observe that the specific configuration prompt is different: SW1(configline)#. The part of the specific configuration prompt changes according to which component you select. If you need to run a command that is not available in specific configuration mode, you can prefix the command with do to execute it in privileged EXEC mode. The do prefix allows you to temporarily exit the specific configuration mode to run just that command. For example: SW1(config-if)#do show running-config

www.it-ebooks.info


121

Selecting a component to work with In the previous section, you read that you must select switch or router components to work with before you execute commands that affect only some parts of the switch. Typically this involves selecting switch or router interfaces, or ports, and setting the switch or router in interface configuration mode before configuring the ports. You use the interface Cisco IOS command to select interfaces to work with and to transition the switch or router into interface configuration mode. You can also select other components to configure, such as access lines using the line Cisco IOS command. For example, the following IOS CLI segment selects the console access line to set a console password for that line: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#line console 0 (or line con 0) SW1(config-line)#password my_password SW1(config-line)#login SW1(config-line)#exit SW1(config)#exit SW1#disable SW1>

Observe the configure terminal command that transitions the switch into global configuration mode. Note the line command, which enables the line configuration mode. Observe also the IOS prompt changing from the default SW1> to global configuration SW1(config)# to line configuration SW1(config-line)#. Here is the same example, using the same commands, on router RT1: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#configure terminal (or config t) RT1(config)#line console 0 (or line con 0) RT1(config-line)#password my_password RT1(config-line)#login RT1(config-line)#exit RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 10


The show running-config command is not available in interface configuration mode, only in privileged mode. So, theoretically, you cannot run this command at the (config-if) prompt. You would have to exit to privileged mode, run show running-config, and come back to interface configuration mode. Cisco provides the do prefix to allow you to run nonconfiguration commands from the specific configuration prompt.

122


Selecting a component range to work with You can select a range of components to work with, instead of selecting just one component. This is very useful when you need to configure several similar components with the same settings. For example, the following IOS CLI segment selects the whole range of VTY (Telnet) access lines to set the same Telnet password for all VTY lines on the switch: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#line vty 0? <0-15> last line number SW1(config-line)#line vty 0-15 SW1(config-line)#password my__telnet_password SW1(config-line)#login SW1(config-line)#exit SW1(config)#exit SW1#disable SW1>

Observe the configure terminal command, which transitions the switch into global configuration mode. Note the line vty 0-15 command, which selects lines 0 to 15 and enables line-range configuration mode. Observe also the IOS privileged mode prompt changing from the default SW1# to global configuration SW1(config)# to line configuration SW1(config-line)>. Here is the same example, using the same commands, on router RT1: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#configure terminal (or config t) RT1(config)#line vty 0? <0-15> last line number RT1(config-line)#line vty 0-15 RT1(config-line)#password my__telnet_password RT1(config-line)#login RT1(config-line)#exit RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

Command shortcuts You may have already noticed that many IOS commands can be used in their short form. Both forms are accepted by the Cisco IOS. Both forms are also accepted on the CCNA test. Table 10-1 shows some examples.

Table 10-1

Common Cisco IOS Commands — Short Forms

Command

Short Forms

show

sho, sh

interface

interf, inter, int

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

124


For example, the following IOS CLI segment copies the current running configuration from RAM to the startup configuration file in NVRAM: SW1#copy running-config startup-config (or copy run start) Destination filename [startup-config]? Building configuration... [OK] SW1#

The second line asks where you want to copy the running configuration to. The default destination is the startup-config file in NVRAM. Observe how the Cisco IOS suggests the default destination between brackets — [startup-config] — before the question mark. To keep the default answer, just press Enter.

Enabling and disabling components and services Sometimes you need to enable or disable certain components or services on a Cisco switch or router. You do this by prefixing an IOS command with the no qualifier. For example, the following IOS CLI segment enables authentication prompting on the console access line using the login IOS command: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#line console 0 (or line con 0) SW1(config-line)#password my_password SW1(config-line)#login SW1(config-line)#exit SW1(config)#exit SW1#exit SW1>

To disable authentication prompting on the console access line, you would run the login command prefixed with no: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#line console 0 (or line con 0) SW1(config-line)#no login SW1(config-line)#exit SW1(config)#exit SW1#exit SW1>

Context-sensitive help The Cisco IOS CLI is designed to provide contextual help. You can list available commands along with a brief summary for each command. You can also get help about a particular command by typing the command verb followed by the ? character. This is useful when you are unsure about the arguments of a specific command. Many IOS commands have more than one argument. You

www.it-ebooks.info


125

may want to find out more about a specific argument. You can do this by typing the command along with the arguments you know and a ? character instead of the argument that you want to find out more about.

You can list available commands by typing ? at the IOS prompt. It is important to understand that commands you see in the help list are contextual: The list contains only commands that can be executed in the current IOS commandline operation mode. For example, the password command you used previously can only be executed in privileged EXEC line configuration operation mode. Hence, the Cisco IOS help command (the ? command) only lists the password command if you already executed enable (to transition the IOS to privileged EXEC mode), followed by configure terminal (to transition the IOS to global configuration mode), followed by line console 0 (to transition the IOS to line configuration mode). Here is an example: First you list commands available in user EXEC mode: RT1>? Exec commands: access-enable access-profile clear connect crypto disable disconnect enable exit help lock login logout modemui mrinfo mstat mtrace name-connection pad ping ppp resume rlogin show slip ssh systat tclquit telnet terminal traceroute tunnel udptn voice where

Create a temporary Access-List entry Apply user-profile to interface Reset functions Open a terminal connection Crypto Turn off privileged commands Disconnect an existing network connection Turn on privileged commands Exit from the EXEC Description of the interactive help system Lock the terminal Log in as a particular user Exit from the EXEC Start a modem-like user interface Request neighbor and version information from a multicast router Show statistics after multiple multicast traceroutes Trace reverse multicast path from destination to source Name an existing network connection Open a X.29 PAD connection Send echo messages Start IETF Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) Resume an active network connection Open an rlogin connection Show running system information Start Serial-line IP (SLIP) Open a secure shell client connection Display information about terminal lines Quit Tool Comand Language shell Open a telnet connection Set terminal line parameters Trace route to destination Open a tunnel connection Open an udptn connection Voice Commands List active connections

www.it-ebooks.info


Listing commands

Book I Chapter 10

126


x28 x3

Become an X.28 PAD Set X.3 parameters on PAD

Observe that the password command is not listed, because you cannot execute the password command in user EXEC mode. Next, enable the privileged EXEC mode using the enable command and list the commands available using the ? help command again: RT1>enable RT1#? Exec commands: access-enable access-profile access-template alps archive audio-prompt auto bfe call ccm-manager cd clear clock cns configure connect copy crypto debug delete dir disable disconnect enable erase exit help isdn lock login logout microcode modemui monitor more mrinfo mrm mstat mtrace name-connection ncia no pad ping ppp pwd reload

(or en)

Create a temporary Access-List entry Apply user-profile to interface Create a temporary Access-List entry ALPS exec commands manage archive files load ivr prompt Exec level Automation For manual emergency modes setting Reload IVR call application, accounting template Call Manager Application exec commands Change current directory Reset functions Manage the system clock CNS agents Enter configuration mode Open a terminal connection Copy from one file to another Crypto Debugging functions (see also ‘undebug’) Delete a file List files on a filesystem Turn off privileged commands Disconnect an existing network connection Turn on privileged commands Erase a filesystem Exit from the EXEC Description of the interactive help system Run an ISDN EXEC command on an ISDN interface Lock the terminal Log in as a particular user Exit from the EXEC microcode commands Start a modem-like user interface Monitoring different system events Display the contents of a file Request neighbor and version information from a multicast router IP Multicast Routing Monitor Test Show statistics after multiple multicast traceroutes Trace reverse multicast path from destination to source Name an existing network connection Start/Stop NCIA Server Disable debugging functions Open a X.29 PAD connection Send echo messages Start IETF Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) Display current working directory Halt and perform a cold restart

www.it-ebooks.info


Rename a file Restart Connection Resume an active network connection Open an rlogin connection Execute a remote command Send SDLC test frames Send a message to other tty lines Run the SETUP command facility Show running system information Start Serial-line IP (SLIP) Squeeze a filesystem Open a secure shell client connection Start a chat-script on a line Display information about terminal lines Quit Tool Comand Language shell Tool Comand Language a shell Open a telnet connection Set terminal line parameters Test subsystems, memory, and interfaces Trace route to destination Open a tunnel connection Open an udptn connection Disable debugging functions (see also ‘debug’) Upgrade firmware Verify a file Voice Commands List active connections Write running configuration to memory, network, or terminal Become an X.28 PAD Set X.3 parameters on PAD

Observe that many more commands are available in privileged EXEC mode than in user EXEC mode. However, the password command is still not listed because the IOS is not yet in line configuration mode. So, next you need to execute the configure terminal command to transition the IOS into global configuration mode, run line console 0 to transition the IOS into line configuration mode, and run the ? help command again: RT1#? configure terminal (or config t) Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. RT1(config)#line console 0 RT1(config-line)#? Line configuration commands: absolute-timeout Set absolute timeout for line disconnection access-class Filter connections based on an IP access list activation-character Define the activation character autocommand Automatically execute an EXEC command autocommand-options Autocommand options autohangup Automatically hangup when last connection closes autoselect Set line to autoselect buffer-length Set DMA buffer length data-character-bits Size of characters being handled databits Set number of data bits per character default Set a command to its defaults disconnect-character Define the disconnect character dispatch-character Define the dispatch character dispatch-machine Reference a TCP dispatch state machine dispatch-timeout Set the dispatch timer domain-lookup Enable domain lookups in show commands editing Enable command line editing

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 10


rename restart resume rlogin rsh sdlc send setup show slip squeeze ssh start-chat systat tclquit tclsh telnet terminal test traceroute tunnel udptn undebug upgrade verify voice where write x28 x3

127

128


escape-character exec exec-banner exec-character-bits exec-timeout exit flowcontrol flush-at-activation full-help help history hold-character insecure international ip ipv6 length location lockable logging login logout-warning modem monitor motd-banner no notify ntp padding parity password private privilege refuse-message rotary rxspeed script session-disconnect-warning session-limit session-timeout special-character-bits speed start-character stop-character stopbits telnet terminal-type timeout transport txspeed vacant-message width x25

Change the current line’s escape character Configure EXEC Enable the display of the EXEC banner Size of characters to the command exec Set the EXEC timeout Exit from line configuration mode Set the flow control Clear input stream at activation Provide help to unprivileged user Description of the interactive help system Enable and control the command history function Define the hold character Mark line as ‘insecure’ for LAT Enable international 8-bit character support IP options IPv6 options Set number of lines on a screen Enter terminal location description Allow users to lock a line Modify message logging facilities Enable password checking Set Warning countdown for absolute timeout of line Configure the Modem Control Lines Copy debug output to the current terminal line Enable the display of the MOTD banner Negate a command or set its defaults Inform users of output from concurrent sessions Configure NTP Set padding for a specified output character Set terminal parity Set a password Configuration options that user can set will remain in effect between terminal sessions Change privilege level for line Define a refuse banner Add line to a rotary group Set the receive speed specify event related chat scripts to run on the line Set warning countdown for session-timeout Set maximum number of sessions Set interval for closing connection when there is no input traffic Size of the escape (and other special) characters Set the transmit and receive speeds Define the start character Define the stop character Set async line stop bits Telnet protocol-specific configuration Set the terminal type Timeouts for the line Define transport protocols for line Set the transmit speeds Define a vacant banner Set width of the display terminal X25 protocol-specific configuration

Now the password command shows up in the command listing.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info


131

Cisco Device Manager

To load the Cisco Device Manager, open a Web browser on a computer that has network access to your switch or router and browse to the management IP address of the switch or router, as shown in Figure 10-1.

Figure 10-1: Cisco Device Manager login.

Observe that you may need to log in to your switch or router with level_15_ access (privileged access) to monitor and configure the device, if you already set a privileged mode password. If you did not yet set a privileged mode password on your switch or router, you do not see this login prompt: The device is not yet secure; you can log in without a password. After you are logged in, you are looking at the dashboard. Figure 10-2 illustrates the dashboard view of a Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 10


The Cisco Device Manager is a Web-based tool that is installed on all Cisco switches and routers at the factory. To access this tool, you need to browse to the management IP address of the Cisco switch or router from a computer host connected to the network. The Cisco Device Manager Web application is part of the Cisco IOS software package and is stored in the Cisco device’s flash memory.

132


Figure 10-2: Cisco Device Manager dashboard.

You see a view of your switch. Ports that are up and connected show up in green, as does port FastEthernet0/1, shortly known as fa0/1 (port 1 in Figure 10-2). The dashboard shows information about the switch, switch health, and port utilization data. The left side of the screen is reserved for the Contents menu. The Smartports and Port Settings items allow you to configure the ports of the switch. Figure 10-3 illustrates the Port Settings form. All ports are enabled by default. All ports autonegotiate speed and transmission duplex mode.

www.it-ebooks.info


133 Book I Chapter 10


Figure 10-3: Cisco Device Manager port settings.

The Port Settings Web form allows you to configure the ports on your switch. For each port you can do the following: ✦ Enter a description: This is a short comment that describes the purpose of the port. For example, “Connects to computer host Claire” or “Connects to switch SW2.” ✦ Enable the port: All ports are enabled by default. ✦ Configure the speed: The speed is automatically negotiated by default. You would only need to configure it to a specific value if you connect the port to a device that cannot automatically negotiate the transmission speed. ✦ Configure the duplex mode: The transmission duplex mode is automatically negotiated by default. You would only need to configure it to a specific value if you connect the port to a device that cannot automatically negotiate the transmission duplex mode. Figure 10-4 illustrates the Express Setup menu and the corresponding Express Setup Web form.

www.it-ebooks.info

134


Figure 10-4: Cisco Device Manager Express Setup menu.

The Express Setup Web form allows you to initially configure your switch. Observe that the form already displays values in Figure 10-4. This switch has already been set up. You can use the Express Setup Web form to change the basic setup of the switch. Keep in mind that changing the network settings can affect your ability to connect to the Cisco Device Manager on the switch. You read more about Express Setup in Book III, Chapter 2. Figure 10-5 illustrates the Restart/Reset menu and the corresponding Restart/Reset Web form.

www.it-ebooks.info




Figure 10-5: Cisco Device Manager Restart/ Reset menu.

The Restart/Reset Web form allows you to ✦ Restart the switch: This is restarting the switch with the current configuration. ✦ Reset the switch: This is resetting the switch to the default factory configuration and restarting the switch with the default settings. Figure 10-6 illustrates the Port Status menu and the corresponding Port Status Web form.

www.it-ebooks.info

136


Figure 10-6: Cisco Device Manager Port Status menu.

The Port Status Web form allows you to monitor the current state of the switch ports. You can monitor the following: ✦ Port description: This is a short comment that describes the purpose of the port. ✦ Ports status: This is solid green if the port is up; it is solid grey otherwise. ✦ Port VLAN: The VLAN to which the port belongs. Access ports belong to a single given VLAN (virtual local-area network): They carry traffic only for that VLAN. Trunk ports do not belong to any VLAN: They carry traffic for all VLANs. You find out more about VLANs in Book III, Chapter 5. ✦ Port speed: The maximum bandwidth supported by the port. ✦ Port duplex mode: The current transmission duplex mode of the port. Figure 10-7 illustrates the Telnet menu and the corresponding Telnet Web form.

www.it-ebooks.info




Figure 10-7: Cisco Device Manager Telnet menu.

The Telnet Web form allows you to open a Telnet session to log in at the command-line prompt of your switch using one of the virtual type terminal (VTY) access lines. Clicking the Launch a Telnet Console link launches the default Telnet client application on your computer, opening a Telnet session to the IP address of your switch. Figure 10-8 illustrates the Software Upgrade menu and the corresponding Software Upgrade Web form.

www.it-ebooks.info

138


Figure 10-8: Cisco Device Manager Software Upgrade menu.

The Software Upgrade Web form allows you to upgrade the Cisco Internetwork Operating System (IOS) installed on your switch. Here is the procedure you need to follow to upgrade the IOS on your switch:

1. Click the http://www.cisco.com/public/sw-center/ link to access the latest version of the Cisco IOS on Cisco’s Web site.

2. Download the Cisco IOS image (tar file) to your computer hard drive. 3. Click the Choose File button and browse to the location where you saved the Cisco IOS image (tar file) on your computer hard drive.

4. Select the Cisco IOS image (tar file). 5. Click the Upgrade button to upgrade the Cisco IOS on your switch with the Cisco IOS image file you just downloaded to your computer.

www.it-ebooks.info


139

Cisco Network Assistant (CNA)

Although CNA monitors and manages both Cisco switches and Cisco routers, it is intended more for switches than for routers. Routers are typically monitored and managed using either the Cisco SDM (Security Device Manager) tool or the Cisco SDM Express tool. You download the CNA software package from the Cisco Web site (www. cisco.com). CNA is provided for free by Cisco. The Cisco Device Manager Web application provides a direct link to the CNA software package download site at Cisco.com, as illustrated in Figure 10-9.

Figure 10-9: CNA download link in Cisco Device Manager.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 10


The Cisco Network Assistant, shortly known as CNA, is a Java-based software application used to monitor and manage Cisco switches and routers from a central management console. CNA is available for Windows, Mac OS X, and Linux. It provides a graphical user interface (GUI), allowing the network administrator to have both global and detailed views of the Cisco networking environment. CNA is stored on the hard drive of the computer host where it is installed.

140


Figure 10-10 illustrates the CNA Connect Web form.

Figure 10-10: CNA Connect form.

You need to enter the host name or IP address of the switch or router you want to connect to. Observe that you can specify the HTTP port used for this connection. The HTTP port is configurable on Cisco switches and routers. You can connect only to monitor the configuration of the device (read-only connection) or to monitor and change the configuration of the device (read/ write connection). Figure 10-11 illustrates the CNA login Web form.

Figure 10-11: CNA login form.

You need to enter a username and password that give you level_15_access to the switch or router configuration. Permission level_15_access allows you to run commands in privileged EXEC mode. You can leave the username blank and enter the privileged EXEC password that you set on your switch or router. If you did not set a privileged EXEC password yet on your switch or router, leave both the username and the password blank and click the OK button. Figure 10-12 illustrates the CNA Topology View.

www.it-ebooks.info




Figure 10-12: CNA Topology View.

You see a view of switch SW1 in this example. If the switch were interconnected to other switches, routers, or computer hosts, you would see them as well in the topology view. The topology view is very useful because it provides a global view of your Cisco network. Figure 10-13 illustrates the CNA Configure menu. You use the CNA Configure menu and Web forms to configure any device in your Cisco network. The items on the CNA Configure menu vary according to the device you select in the topology view. Figure 10-14 illustrates the CNA Monitor menu. You use the CNA Monitor menu and Web forms to monitor various items in your Cisco network. The items on the CNA Monitor menu vary according to the device you select in the topology view. You can monitor devices using the Inventory menu. You can view port statistics using the Port Statistics menu. Bandwidth graphs provide a graphical representation of the bandwidth usage on Cisco devices in your network. You can also monitor access control lists (ACL Reports) and the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP).

www.it-ebooks.info

142


Figure 10-13: CNA Configure menu.

Figure 10-14: CNA Monitor menu.

www.it-ebooks.info


143

Figure 10-15 illustrates the CNA Troubleshoot menu.

Book I Chapter 10


Figure 10-15: CNA Troubleshoot menu.

You use the CNA Troubleshoot menu and Web forms to troubleshoot various items in your Cisco network. The items on the CNA Troubleshoot menu vary according to the device you select in the topology view. The most widely used troubleshooting tool in this menu is by far the Ping and Trace tool. Figure 10-16 illustrates the CNA Maintenance menu. You use the CNA Maintenance menu and Web forms to maintain your Cisco network. The items on the CNA Maintenance menu vary according to the device you select in the topology view. Here is a summary of the options available for Cisco switches and routers: ✦ Software Upgrade: Upgrade the Cisco IOS software on Cisco switches and routers in your network. ✦ File Management: Manage the Cisco IOS software image files on Cisco switches and routers in your network.

www.it-ebooks.info

144


Figure 10-16: CNA Maintenance menu.

✦ Configuration Archive: Back up the Cisco IOS software image files of your Cisco switches and routers to a configuration archive. Manage the Cisco configuration archive. ✦ Restart/Reset: Reboot the Cisco device currently selected in the topology view. Restart reboots the Cisco device, keeping the current startup configuration. Reset resets the Cisco device to factory-default configuration and reboots it. ✦ Telnet: Open a Telnet session to the Cisco device currently selected in the topology view.

Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) The Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) is a computer application used to monitor and manage Cisco routers from a central management computer host. Cisco SDM is available for Windows. It provides a graphical user interface (GUI) that allows network administrators to have both global and detailed views of the Cisco routing environment. The Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) is comprised of the following:

www.it-ebooks.info


145

✦ Cisco SDM client: The Cisco SDM client connects and authenticates to the Cisco SDM server on a router from a remote computer host to gather information about the router and to run commands on the router. The Cisco SDM client is a Windows software application. You install the Cisco SDM client on a PC. After it is installed, the Cisco SDM client is stored and loaded from the hard drive of that PC.

Installing the Cisco SDM client on a PC The Cisco SDM client Windows installation package is available in the following ways: ✦ Cisco Router and Security Device Manager CD: This CD is shipped with all recent Cisco routers. ✦ Cisco Web site: You can download the Cisco SDM client software package from Cisco’s Web site (www.cisco.com). To install the Cisco SDM client on your PC, double-click the Cisco SDM client Windows installation package. The Cisco SDM Installation Wizard prompts you whether you want to install Cisco SDM on your computer, on the router, or both on the computer and on the router, as shown in Figure 10-17.

Figure 10-17: SDM installation destination.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 10


✦ Cisco SDM server: The Cisco SDM server is a microapplication stored in flash memory on recent Cisco routers. It provides information about the router to the Cisco SDM client. It also executes commands on the router as requested by the Cisco SDM client.

146


If your router has the Cisco SDM (server) package already installed in flash memory, you do not need to install SDM on the router; you install it only on your computer. Next, if you chose to install the Cisco SDM (server) package on your router, the Installation Wizard prompts you to authenticate to the router. The installation wizard needs to authenticate with a level_15_access (privileged) access level to the router to be able to install the SDM server microapplication in the flash memory of the destination router. You need to enter the router’s IP address, and the username and password of a user that has a level_15_ access (privileged) permission level to the router, as shown in Figure 10-18.

Figure 10-18: SDM server destination router login.

Now, the Cisco SDM Installation Wizard prompts you to specify a default router to which it connects. The SDM client connects and authenticates to the default router to gather information about the router and the network and to run commands on the router. The default target router runs the SDM server microapplication. Figure 10-19 shows the default target router selection.

Figure 10-19: SDM target router selection.

www.it-ebooks.info


147

Figure 10-20 shows the default target router login.

Figure 10-20: SDM target router login.

The Cisco SDM Installation Wizard now displays a progress screen, as shown in Figure 10-21. This screen informs you that SDM is loading and shows the version of SDM (V 2.5 in this case) and the IP address of the default target router (192.168.75.40 in this case). In some cases, Cisco SDM may prompt you to authenticate again to the target router, as shown in Figure 10-22. Similar to Figure 10-20, you need to specify a user that has a level_15_access (privileged) permission level on the default target router. Cisco SDM is supported by most Cisco routers, except older models, such as the Cisco 2600 series. If SDM does not support your router, you see an “Unsupported Router” message, as shown in Figure 10-23.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book I Chapter 10


Next, the Installation Wizard prompts you to authenticate to the target router. You need to specify a user that has a level_15_access (privileged) permission level on the target router. The SDM client authenticates to the target router using the level_15_access (privileged) access level to gather information about the router and the network and to run commands on the router.

148


Figure 10-21: SDM loading.

Figure 10-22: SDM target router second login.

Figure 10-23: SDM unsupported router.

www.it-ebooks.info


149

Launching the Cisco SDM client on a PC To launch the Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) on a Windows computer host, follow these steps:

SDM prompts you to select the target router. Refer to Figure 10-19.

4. Enter the IP address of the target router. 5. Click the Launch button. SDM prompts you twice to authenticate to the target router. You need to specify a user that has a level_15_access (privileged) permission level on the default target router. Refer to Figures 10-20 and 10-22.

6. Enter the username and password of a user that has a level_15_access (privileged) access to your target router.

7. Click the OK button. SDM displays its welcome (Home) screen, as shown in Figure 10-24.

Figure 10-24: SDM Home screen.

www.it-ebooks.info


1. Choose Start. 2. Select All Programs. 3. Choose Cisco Systems➪Cisco SDM➪Cisco SDM.

Book I Chapter 10

150


The SDM Home screen displays basic information about your target router. SDM offers two modes of operation: ✦ Configure: Observe the Configure button on the SDM toolbar. You can configure your target router using the configure operation mode. ✦ Monitor: Observe the Monitor button on the SDM toolbar. You can monitor your target router using the monitor operation mode. Using SDM, you can configure the following features on your target router: ✦ Interfaces and connections ✦ Firewall and ACLs (access control lists) ✦ VPN (Virtual Private Network) ✦ Security audit ✦ Routing ✦ NAT (Network Address Translation) ✦ Intrusion prevention ✦ QoS (quality of service) ✦ NAC (Network Admission Control) You configure these features by clicking the corresponding button in the vertical toolbar shown in Figure 10-25. This opens the corresponding configuration forms and wizards in the right pane of the screen. Figure 10-25 shows the SDM Interfaces and Connections configuration form. Using SDM, you can monitor the following features on your target router: ✦ Overview status of your router ✦ Interface status ✦ Firewall status ✦ VPN status ✦ Traffic status ✦ QoS (quality of service) status ✦ NAC (Network Admission Control) status ✦ Logging status ✦ IPS (intrusion prevention system) status ✦ 802.1x authentication status

www.it-ebooks.info




Figure 10-25: SDM Configure screen.

You monitor these features by clicking the corresponding button in the vertical toolbar shown in Figure 10-26. This opens the corresponding monitoring form in the right pane of the screen. Figure 10-26 shows the SDM Interface Status monitoring form.

Cisco Router and Security Device Manager Express (SDM Express) Cisco replaced the Cisco Device Manager with an Express version of the Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) on more recent routers. When you browse to the management IP address of more recent routers, you launch the Cisco SDM Express software application. The Cisco SDM Express software application is comprised of the following: ✦ Cisco SDM server: The Cisco SDM server is a microapplication stored in flash memory on recent Cisco routers. It provides information about the router to the Cisco SDM client. It also executes commands on the router as requested by the Cisco SDM client. ✦ Cisco SDM Express Web-based client: The Cisco SDM Express Web-based client connects and authenticates to the Cisco SDM server on a router from a Web browser on a remote computer host to gather information about the router and to run commands on the router. The Cisco SDM Express client is a Java-based, Web-based software application. You do

www.it-ebooks.info

152


not need to install the Cisco SDM Express client on your PC. The Web browser on your PC loads the Cisco SDM Express client automatically when you browse to the IP address of a router that supports the Cisco SDM Express client.

Figure 10-26: SDM Monitor screen.

To launch the Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) Express edition on a Windows computer host, browse to the management IP address of the target router and follow these steps:

1. Log in to your router by entering the username and password of a user that has level_15_access (privileged) access to your target router. SDM Express prompts you to authenticate to the target router. You need to specify a user that has a level_15_access (privileged) permission level on the default target router. Cisco provides a level_15_access (privileged) user named cisco, identified by password cisco. You can use this user to log in to your router. This user is intended to be a temporary user: Cisco allows you to log in only once using cisco/cisco. You need to create your own level_15_access (privileged) user for ongoing router management. Refer to Figure 10-27.

2. Click the OK button.

www.it-ebooks.info




Figure 10-27: SDM Express login.

The Cisco SDM Express client displays a progress screen, as shown in Figure 10-28. This screen informs you that SDM Express is loading and shows the version of SDM (V 2.5 in this case) and the IP address of the default target router (192.168.75.70 in this case).

Figure 10-28: SDM Express loading.

www.it-ebooks.info

154


SDM Express displays its welcome (Overview) screen, as shown in Figure 10-29.

Figure 10-29: SDM Express Overview screen.

The SDM Express Overview screen displays basic information about the following: ✦ Your target router ✦ The router’s LAN (local-area network) ✦ The router’s WAN (wide-area network) You can perform the following tasks using the SDM Express router management application: ✦ Basic configuration: Observe the Basic Configuration item on the Tasks menu, as shown in Figure 10-30. The Basic Configuration form is used to • Create a management user (in this example, Admin007) • Set a privileged encrypted password (secret password) • Set the host name of your router • Set the domain name of your router

www.it-ebooks.info




Figure 10-30: SDM Express Basic Configuration form.

✦ LAN configuration: Observe the LAN item on the Tasks menu. The LAN form, shown in Figure 10-31, is used to configure the following: • The IP address of Ethernet interfaces on your router (in this example, interface Vlan1 is configured with IP 102.168.75.70) • The subnet mask of Ethernet interfaces on your router (in this example, interface Vlan1 is configured with subnet mask 255.255.255.0) ✦ WAN configuration: Observe the Internet (WAN) item on the Tasks menu. The Internet (WAN) form, shown in Figure 10-32, is used to configure interfaces to WANs (wide-area networks). Routers typically serve as gateways from a LAN into WANs. You configure your WAN links on this form. In this example, you can configure ATM and ADSL WAN links. ✦ Firewall configuration: Observe the Firewall item on the Tasks menu. The Firewall form is used to configure firewall rules to filter incoming and outgoing IP packets. ✦ DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) configuration: Observe the DHCP item on the Tasks menu. The DHCP form, shown in Figure 10-33, is used to configure the starting and ending IP addresses that can be assigned by your router to DHCP clients. A DHCP client is a computer host device or a network device that does not have an assigned IP address; the device requests an IP address from your router.

www.it-ebooks.info

156


Figure 10-31: SDM Express LAN configuration.

Figure 10-32: SDM Express WAN configuration.

www.it-ebooks.info




Figure 10-33: SDM Express DHCP configuration.

✦ NAT configuration: Observe the NAT item on the Tasks menu. The NAT form is used to configure Network Address Translation to translate public WAN IP addresses into local private LAN IP addresses. ✦ Static routing configuration: Observe the Routing item on the Tasks menu. The Routing form, shown in Figure 10-34, is used to configure default static routes to other networks. Routers exchange information about networks they know; this is dynamic routing. However, you can specify a default route that your router can use to get to other networks. Default routes can be specified over any interface on your router. In other words, you connect that interface to another network, and then you enter the static route information in the Routing form in SDM Express. ✦ Security configuration: Observe the Security item on the Tasks menu, as shown in Figure 10-35. The Security form is used to • Disable services that can pose security risks • Enable services that enhance security on your router • Encrypt passwords • Synchronize your router’s clock to an external reference clock

www.it-ebooks.info

158


Figure 10-34: SDM Express static routing.

Figure 10-35: SDM Express security configuration.

www.it-ebooks.info


159

✦ Reset to factory default: The Reset to Factory Default form allows you to do the following:

• Reset the router to factory default settings. Click the Reset Router button to reset the router. The SDM Express router management application offers the following tools (refer to the lower-left corner of Figure 10-36):

Figure 10-36: SDM Express Reset to Factory Default form.

✦ Verify connectivity to another device in the network (Ping): Observe the Ping item on the Tools menu. The Ping form is used to verify connectivity to other computer host devices and network devices in the network.

www.it-ebooks.info


• Save the current running configuration of your router to a file on your computer host. Before you reset your router to factory default settings, you may want to save the current configuration to a file. You can reload this configuration from the file, later on, if you need to. Think of this as a safety net: It’s risky to reset a router. You may lose valuable configuration data. You should save the current configuration in a file, just in case.

Book I Chapter 10

160

Meet the Cisco IOS User Interface ✦ Open a Telnet session to your router from the computer host (Telnet): Observe the Telnet item on the Tools menu. ✦ Launch the Cisco SDM management application (Cisco SDM): Observe the Cisco SDM item on the Tools menu. You can launch the full version of Cisco SDM from SDM Express using the Cisco SDM tool in SDM Express. ✦ Update the software on your Cisco router (Software Update): You can use this tool to update the software on your router. You can update the software by applying updates to the router memory • From Cisco’s Web site (www.cisco.com) • From your computer host (local PC) • From a CD

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Contents at a Glance Chapter 1: Introducing TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Components of TCP/IP ................................................................................ 169

Chapter 2: TCP/IP Layers and Protocols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Information Exchange through the OSI Layer.......................................... 188 OSI Layers and Protocols ........................................................................... 190 TCP/IP Layers and Protocols ..................................................................... 207

Chapter 3: IP Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 The Purpose of IP Addresses — It’s All about the Delivery ................... 213 The Hierarchy of IP Addresses — Who’s in Charge? .............................. 214 Private IP Addresses — We Reserve the Right . . . .................................. 222 Broadcasting — Shouting to the World! ................................................... 223 Address Resolution Protocol — ARP’s on the Case, Sherlock!.............. 225

Chapter 4: Subnetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Subnetting Basics ........................................................................................ 231 IP Address Class and Subnet Mask ........................................................... 239 Variable-Length Subnet Masks (VLSMs)................................................... 250 Summarization ............................................................................................. 253

Chapter 5: Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) ............................................................ 261 The Benefits of IPv6..................................................................................... 263 Introducing IPv6 Addressing ...................................................................... 264 Configuring IPv6........................................................................................... 270 Routing with IPv6......................................................................................... 275 Migrating to IPv6.......................................................................................... 279

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 1: Introducing TCP/IP Exam Objectives ✓ Understanding the purpose of TCP/IP ✓ Revealing the components of TCP/IP ✓ Exposing the OSI reference model ✓ Understanding the function of each layer in the OSI model ✓ Examining data encapsulation ✓ Comparing differences in the DoD and OSI models

I

n almost every aspect of our daily computing lives, we are communicating, researching, and relying on the Internet, a culmination of some of the finest inventions ever conceived. From the humble beginnings of the telephone and telegraph to radio broadcasts and computers, the Internet has allowed us to “get connected.” From online banking to online dating, more than 1.5 billion users use this great tool for education and entertainment, conducting business, and connecting globally with others. Just as we use speech and more than 6,800 different languages to transmit thoughts and ideas, this interconnected web of networks also needed its own language for communication. This language is TCP/IP. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and Internet Protocol (IP) are a set of protocols — a standard set of rules that control and enable communication among computers — developed to allow data exchange and sharing of resources across a network. All hosts that speak this same language on the network can understand one another and communicate together. This language, or protocol, defines how messages are formatted and how errors are handled. A networking world without these rules and protocols in place would probably resemble the ancient Tower of Babel. You must have a strong understanding of TCP/IP protocols, the OSI reference model and its seven layers, and TCP/IP encapsulation methods to do well on the exam. You will see many questions on the test regarding TCP/IP and its suite of protocols. I briefly examine the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) and DoD (Department of Defense) conceptual models that provide a framework for TCP/IP and other protocols. I also cover the different components of TCP/IP and data encapsulation. For an in-depth review of the TCP/IP layers and protocols, see Book II, Chapter 2.

www.it-ebooks.info

168

Components of TCP/IP

TCP/IP communication TCP/IP allows many different operating systems and computer platforms to interoperate with one another seamlessly over a computer network. A computer network is a collection of computers or devices that communicate together over a shared transmission medium. This transmission medium is the physical cabling and network interfaces that direct and support network traffic. And whether you are running Microsoft Windows, Sun Solaris, Ubuntu Linux, Novell Netware, or MAC OS X, TCP/IP will function regardless of operating system or hardware manufacturer type. This allows all of these different entities to interact and understand one another using one language, a great advantage of TCP/IP. TCP/IP is designed with one major goal in mind; to decentralize network communications. If a single node on the network fails, other devices continue to function independently and are uninfluenced by the failed system. Unlike centralized management, this gives nodes an equal share and priority on the network. This is a key feature of TCP/IP. A decentralized network using TCP/IP is enhanced further by using decentralized features of dynamic routing, which you find out more about in Chapters 2 and 3 of Book II. TCP/IP is based on a defined set of rules for how data communication protocols operate; these rules are defined in the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model. This model examines each function of the protocol stack within TCP/ IP and computer networking. Actually, TCP/IP may be better defined using the four-layer Department of Defense (DoD) model approach I discuss in the section “TCP/IP in the DoD model,” later in this chapter.

We pioneered this In the late 1960s, the Advanced Research Projects Agency (ARPA) was tasked with finding an efficient means of connecting various computer sites for the purpose of sharing research data. It has been rumored that ARPA began investigating ways of creating this reliable interconnection of remote networks with the sole purpose that these networks would continue to function during, and even withstand, a nuclear attack in wartime scenarios. This is, in fact, a myth. Although network survivability during major losses of the network was highly desired, especially by the U.S. government, ARPA’s need for a robust network was more due to unreliable equipment and its connecting links than, say, a nuclear threat. Combined with valuable experimental research on data transfer technology from laboratories in the United States, France, and the United Kingdom, ARPA successfully created a topology-independent, packet-switching network that allowed communication among all types of operating systems and hardware platforms. This open-architectural design of ARPANET would grow over the years to eventually form what we now know as the Internet, an internetworking of networks.

www.it-ebooks.info


169

The goal of this new packet-switching network was to optimize traffic load and ensure delivery of data, increasing robustness of communication. The sending computer would assign each packet with a destination address and sequence number, and each block of data could then be routed independently yet still be reassembled in proper order by the receiving node, allowing multiple packets to travel different paths to the desired destination. Reassembly of these packets in the correct sequence would then be processed by the receiving computer.

Components of TCP/IP The following list describes the components that make up the TCP/IP suite: ✦ Internet Protocol (IP): The most important, underlying protocol of the TCP/IP suite, IP handles data exchange between computers using small data packets called datagrams, determining the best route for delivery. Any available path chosen by the datagram may be taken to reach the destination. IP does not handle delivery verification like TCP does and is only concerned with sending and receiving data. Check out Figure 1-1 for an example of IP and TCP packet headers. ✦ Transmission Control Protocol (TCP): TCP is a connection-oriented protocol responsible for reliable delivery of data between applications, ensuring that data sent by the source machine is received properly by the destination machine. TCP enables the sending of messages from both source and destination machines to communicate connection status and inserts header information into each packet, allowing error-free delivery and checking for unauthorized modification of packet data. ✦ User Datagram Protocol (UDP): A connectionless, best-effort protocol useful for sending datagrams in any order and without delivery guarantee, assuming that other applications or protocols can handle the required error checking and handshaking. Having less data to transmit, UDP datagrams are smaller and delivered faster than TCP packets, but lack the reliable nature that TCP provides. As you can see in Figure 1-2, UDP does not provide error checking and handshaking as does the more reliable TCP.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book II Chapter 1

Introducing TCP/IP

Splitting data into packets would prove to be much more desirable than circuit-switching technology, which transmitted data from source to destination using a dedicated, reserved connection. The inflexible nature of circuit switching would make the line unavailable for other connections until the call was terminated. Messages could be transferred all at once using the entire available bandwidth of the circuit, but the main disadvantage was that no other connection could use the bandwidth until the connection was terminated and a new one established. ARPA would later adopt packet-switching technology as the foundation for ARPANET, with packetswitching proving to be the core method of internetwork communications.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info


173

✦ Internet Protocol Security (IPsec): A security method that uses packet encryption and authentication techniques to secure IP communications. Internet Key Exchange (IKE), Authentication Headers (AHs), and Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) handle negotiation, authentication, protection, and security duties and are some of the protocols used in this suite. ✦ Address Resolution Protocol (ARP): ARP is used to map a host machine’s hardware Ethernet MAC address from the host’s known IP address. The client sends a request to a remote host asking for resolution of a certain address, and the remote host identifies the required address and returns the query to the client. This is useful for identifying and communicating with Ethernet hosts on a local-area network (LAN).

✦ Network Time Protocol (NTP): A protocol that’s used by computer systems over IP networks to time-synchronize with each other using a reference time source. ✦ Open Shortest Path First (OSPF): A dynamic routing protocol used by routers and network devices to exchange routing information. OSPF exchanges routing information between network devices, with the goal of building a routing map of the entire network. OSPF detects changes in data routes automatically, recognizes link failures, and reroutes traffic to build a loop-free environment. ✦ Network File System (NFS): A file-sharing system that allows access to remote data as if it were located on the local host. ✦ Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP): A protocol that provides error and statistic handling for connectivity verification, sending out messages when a datagram is unable to reach its destination. When a gateway or router is unable to forward a datagram, or when a gateway can deliver a datagram on a shorter route, an ICMP message is delivered to the client. This protocol is often used by system administrators who want to verify that routers are sending packets correctly and to the proper destination address. The ICMP ping command is used to test whether another host is available over an IP network. This is accomplished by sending an ICMP “echo request” packet to a target interface and waiting for a reply. ✦ Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3): A standard protocol for e-mail retrieval from a remote server working on TCP port 110. An e-mail server stores electronic mail messages that can be retrieved all at once by remote systems using e-mail client software. A typical connection lasts long enough to download a user’s e-mail and then disconnects while the retrieved e-mail is deleted from the server.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing TCP/IP

✦ Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP): A protocol that provides the reverse method of finding the IP address from a host’s known hardware address.

Book II Chapter 1

174

Components of TCP/IP ✦ Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP): Another protocol used for e-mail retrieval on port 143 by remote clients that support both offline and online modes of operation. Unlike POP3, IMAP provides both connected and disconnect modes of operation and allows simultaneous, multiple user access to the same mailbox. ✦ Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP): A protocol for sending messages reliably and efficiently. (POP3 and IMAP are usually considered e-mail receiving protocols, while SMTP provides e-mail services typically used for sending messages.) Small text commands are used for negotiation and transmission control over a TCP data stream connection.

Introducing the major TCP/IP layers and protocols Computers and networks also follow a structured model that describes how data flows from one source to another. The Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) reference model describes a set of rules for digital communication between hardware and software.

The OSI reference model The OSI reference model, shown in Figure 1-6, was designed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) and defines how data is moved between a source and destination computer’s software applications over a network. Delivering the data using seven conceptual layers defined by the ISO, these layers divide network communications architecture in a top-to-bottom approach. Moving up the OSI model from the bottommost layer to the top, services are provided to the next-uppermost layer (by the layer just below it), while services are received from the topmost layer to each next-lower layer. Each layer is responsible for a specific, exclusive set of functions not handled at any other layer.

Application Presentation Session Transport Network Figure 1-6: The OSI reference model.

Data Link Physical

www.it-ebooks.info


175

The main purposes of this model are to allow compatibility among various computer manufacturers’ network hardware and to provide a structured method for designing network protocols. Equipment from different vendors on the same network would communicate seamlessly together using the OSI model as a reference. Network protocols designed to follow this layered architecture offer a real advantage to networking equipment manufacturers. Each manufacturer can design its equipment using this model as a blueprint, guaranteeing compatibility and functionality. Digital information sent from one machine to another using this model flows from the top of the OSI model (where the user interacts with the computer using software), starting at the application layer of the sending computer and traveling down this theoretical stack into the presentation, session, transport, network, data link, and physical layers.

You may be wondering how the OSI layers communicate with each other. Each layer has a defined set of responsibilities and is independent of the layers above and below it. Communication is possible with layers above and below a given layer on the same system and its peer layer on the other side of the connection. The network layer may prepare and hand data off to either the transport or data link layer, depending on the direction of network traffic. If data is being received, it flows up the stack. Data that is being sent travels down the stack. The network layer on the sending computer also communicates with the network layer on the receiving computer, its peer layer. See Figure 1-8. These layers are not actually moving data through the network and should not be confused with protocols used for communication. Network protocols are tasked with moving the data through a network and follow the rules put in place by the OSI model. Some protocols operate at different layers in the stack than other protocols, depending on function, and implement the layers’ functionality. The seven layers consist of upper and lower layers and are shown from the highest layer to the lowest (refer back to Figure 1-6): ✦ Layer 7: Application layer ✦ Layer 6: Presentation layer ✦ Layer 5: Session layer

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing TCP/IP

Data arrives at the physical layer and is transported by a physical means (such as the LAN cabling and network adapter) to the receiver’s computer. Then the data travels back up the invisible stack to arrive at the destination computer’s application program (possibly a Web browser making an HTTP request). See Figure 1-7.

Book II Chapter 1

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

178

Components of TCP/IP ✦ Application layer: The application layer is responsible for applicationspecific end-user processes and is the closest layer to the actual end user. Typical functions of the application layer include communication synchronization, resource availability determination, and identification of partners for communication. Some examples of application layer protocols include Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), and Telnet. ✦ Presentation layer: The presentation layer, also referred to as the syntax layer, formats and encrypts data over the network. It also provides data to the application layer in a format it can understand. Translation is performed between application and network formats, ensuring that no compatibility issues exist. ✦ Session layer: The last of the upper layers is the session layer. It is responsible for controlling computer connections between local and remote applications. It initiates, controls, and terminates sessions using full-duplex, half-duplex, or simplex operations. The lower layers, shown in Figure 1-10, provide data transportation services using both hardware and software methods for flow control, addressing, and routing over the network and make up the transport, network, data link, and physical layers:

Transport Network Figure 1-10: The OSI model lower layers.

Data Link Physical

✦ Transport layer: The transport layer provides seamless data transfer between computer systems using flow control and end-to-end error recovery, keeping track of datagram delivery and retransmitting lost packets. TCP and the connectionless UDP operate at this level. ✦ Network layer: The network layer is responsible for transporting data between networks and is also called the routing layer. All routed networks connected to the Internet function at this level using the Internet Protocol, and data is transferred in a series of hops. Internetworking, switching, routing, addressing, error handling, congestion control, and packet sequencing are handled here.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

180


The four DoD layers As shown in Figure 1-11, the four major components of the DoD model are the application, transport, Internet, and network access layers. Each layer has a specific responsibility and is listed here from the highest layer to the lowest:

Application Host-to-Host Transport Figure 1-11: The DoD model.

Internet Network Access

✦ Application layer: The top layer in the DoD model roughly combines the functionality of the three upper layers described in the OSI model, namely, the application, presentation, and session layers. This is where user information is handled and packaged for delivery to the transport layer. ✦ Transport layer: The Transmission Control Protocol and User Datagram Protocol reside at the transport, or host-to-host, layer and provide valuable services in data delivery and error correction. TCP is the traffic cop and makes sure that the data gets to its intended destination, while UDP is unconcerned with verifying reliable delivery of packets. ✦ Internet layer: The Internet layer resides between the transport and network access layers and is the foundation of IP networking. The Internet Protocol is associated at this layer and is responsible for delivering packets across interconnected networks. ✦ Network access layer: Like the physical layer in the OSI model, the network access layer is responsible for delivering data across the physical network hardware.

Demystifying data encapsulation Encapsulation in telecommunications is defined as the inclusion of one data structure inside another so that the first data structure is temporarily hidden from view. Data is encapsulated and decapsulated in this way as it travels through the different layers of the OSI and DoD models. Starting from the application layer and moving downward, user information is formed into data and handed to the presentation layer for encapsulation. The presentation layer encapsulates the data provided by the application layer and passes it on to the session layer. The session layer synchronizes

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

182


1. User information is processed by the application, presentation, and session layers and prepares the data for transmission. For example, Robert opens his Web browser application on his laptop and types in the URL http://www.cisco.com.

2. The upper layers present the data to the transport layer, which converts the user data into segments. Continuing with the example, Robert’s data request passes down from the upper layers to the transport layer and a header is added, acknowledging the HTTP request.

3. The network layer receives the segments and converts them into packets. The transport layer passes the data down to the network layer, where source and destination information is added, providing the address to the destination.

4. The data link layer converts the packets into frames. The data link layer frames the packets and adds the Ethernet hardware address of the source computer and the MAC address of the nearest connected device on the remote network.

5. The physical layer receives the data frames and converts them into binary format. Data frames are converted into bits and transmitted over the network, returning Robert’s requested Web page.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 2: TCP/IP Layers and Protocols Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the purpose and function of each TCP/IP layer ✓ Understanding data encapsulation ✓ Identifying and explaining data flow through the OSI layers ✓ Describing the purpose and basic operation of the protocols in the

TCP/IP family ✓ Describing common Ethernet wiring and cabling standards ✓ Examining hardware addressing and bridge segmentation at the data

link layer ✓ Interpreting differences between routing and routed protocols ✓ Identifying distance vector and link-state protocols ✓ Determining TCP transport mechanisms ✓ Describing the protocols used at the application layer for network and

Internet communications ✓ Differentiating between the OSI and TCP layered models

I

t is time to dig a little deeper into the TCP/IP family of protocols and reveal a little more of the OSI and DoD models. I break down each layer inside the OSI model and magnify its inner workings. Protocols that reside at each of these layers are discussed along with the rules and standards for transmitting, sending, and verifying data. Then, the TCP/IP model is compared to the OSI framework, providing required knowledge to pass the CCNA examination. While the CCNA exam will test your knowledge in both areas of the OSI model and the TCP/IP model, you should memorize each layer in each of the models and know all their functionalities. By the time you are done studying and are ready to take the exam, you should be dreaming in layers!

www.it-ebooks.info

188

Information Exchange through the OSI Layer

Information Exchange through the OSI Layer As you can see from Figure 2-1, the OSI model is comprised of seven conceptual layers that deal with application and data transfer functions. The upper and lower layers have different responsibilities and are split accordingly. The upper layers include the application, presentation, and session layers and are tasked with software application communications. The lower layers provide data transportation services using both hardware and software methods for flow control, addressing, and routing over the network and make up the transport, network, data link, and physical layers. Each layer typically communicates with three other layers: the layer above, layer below, and peer to its own layer: ✦ The service provider is the layer offering its services to the adjoining layer, the service user. ✦ The service access point (SAP) is a meeting point where these source and destination requests take place. Application PDU Application SDU

Application Presentation PDU

Presentation

SDU Presentation

SDU

SDU Session PDU

Session

Session

SDU Transport

SDU Transport PDU

SDU Network Figure 2-1: Information exchange through the OSI layer.

SDU Network PDU

SDU Data Link

Network SDU

Data Link PDU

SDU Physical

Transport

Data Link SDU

Physical PDU

www.it-ebooks.info

Physical

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

192

OSI Layers and Protocols

Ethernet wiring standards The Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) and Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) set the standard for U.S. telecommunications networks and LAN cables and have separated them into the following categories: ✦ Category 1: Cat1 (actually Anixter level 1) is untwisted wire used in older telephone wiring installations and is not recognized under the EIA/TIA-586 standard. A cable must be rated as Category 3 or higher to belong in the EIA/TIA grouping. ✦ Category 2: Cat2 (actually Anixter level 2) uses solid wire in twisted pairs formerly used in Apple LocalTalk and Token Ring networks, transmitting data at a maximum of 4 Mbps. Cat2 is also not recognized under the EIA/TIA-586 standard. ✦ Category 3: Cat3 is 24 AWG twisted-pair copper cable used in older 10BASE-T networks and provides 16 MHz of bandwidth. Cat3 supports communications up to 10 Mbps and has been superseded by the more popular Category 5 cable. Cat3 is still found in installations that require telephone and VoIP services. ✦ Category 4: Cat4 supports data speeds up to 16 Mbps and provides 20 MHz of bandwidth. Cat4 is generally found in Token Ring networks and is no longer popular. Like Category 3, it has also been superseded by Category 5 cable. ✦ Category 5: Cat5 consists of four twisted pairs of copper wires insulated from each other in a single cable using 8P8C (RJ-45) connectors. By twisting cable pairs, crosstalk and line noise are minimized. Cat5 cables are either shielded or unshielded. EIA/TIA-568-A specifications state that this cable can transmit data up to 150 Mbps, with a maximum distance of 100 meters (328 feet). Cat5 has been the most popular type of cable over the last several years. Cat5 can be found in many 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T networks today. ✦ Category 5e: First published in 2000, Cat5e is an updated version of Cat5 cable and uses bidirectional and full four-pair transmission for improved performance over Gigabit Ethernet. Cat5 and Cat5e are very similar and maintain the same cable speed and distance limitations. Cat5e is preferred over Cat5 for 1000BASE-T networks because of its improved performance characteristics defined in EIA/TIA-568-B. ✦ Category 6/6a: Like Cat5, Category 6 cable consists of four twisted pairs of copper wires and is typically referred to as the standard for Gigabit Ethernet. Supporting 10 Gigabit Ethernet, or 10GBASE-T, this 22 to 24 AWG cable is also backward compatible with 10/100/1000BASE-T networks and has a maximum distance of 100 meters. When used in 10GBASE-T environments, that distance drops to approximately 50

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

196


Cyclic redundancy check The cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is designed to verify data in a network using a CRC code hash function by comparing the source and destination data values. CRC is responsible for data integrity by detecting errors and discarding corrupted data. This check is performed without CRC repairing the data. If retransmission of bad data is necessary, it is handled by other protocols. The sending source calculates the CRC value and sends the information to the destination machine. The receiving host also performs the calculation, and if they match, the data is deemed error-free by both hosts. If they do not match, the data is discarded.

ARP and RARP Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) determines the unknown data-link (Layer 2) address (the MAC address) of a network device using the known Layer 3 IP address. An ARP command-line example is shown in Figure 2-6 and may include the following command-line parameters: Command

Function

ARP -a

Displays entries in ARP table

ARP -s 192.168.1.101 00-0f-1f-9c-2d-ad

Adds static entry to table

Figure 2-6: ARP commandline screen shot.

Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP) performs the opposite of ARP and determines the network address using the known hardware address.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

204


Transmission Control Protocol

User Datagram Protocol

Reliable

Unreliable

Connection-oriented

Figure 2-10: TCP versus UDP.

Connectionless

Retransmission Flow Control

No Retransmission

Sequencing

No Sequencing

Acknowledgment

No Acknowledgment

The session layer: Layer 5 The session layer provides synchronization and data-exchange features between two applications in the upper-layer stack and manages the link between the nodes. It provides data-checking procedures during communication sessions and can retransmit lost data in the event of a connection failure. The session layer can operate in either half- or full-duplex mode, and known protocols include PPTP, RPC, SSH, and NETBIOS. Application program interfaces (APIs) are known as session layer tools and allow upper-layer communications using a standard set of services. Viewing Figure 2-11, you see an example of session layer communications. Layer 5 characteristics are as follows: ✦ Provides communication sessions between end-user processes ✦ Manages data exchange from peer presentation layers ✦ Provides Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) sockets TCP sockets are the combination of IP addresses and port numbers and are considered bidirectional endpoints that allow the communication process to occur. TCP sockets are paired between a client and server machine. The server is tasked with listening for client requests and then creates a connection on a specific port.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

206


Layer 7 characteristics are as follows: ✦ Is the layer closest to the end user ✦ Provides network services to end-user applications The following are application layer protocols: ✦ Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP): A client/server request/response protocol designed to share resources between a client’s Web browser and a Web server. When a Web user types http:// in the URL address of the Web browser, an HTTP protocol request is made to the Web server. The Web server responds by returning text, graphics, or video to the user. The exchange of information is made possible by using a specific port or socket to transfer the data. The standard port used for HTTP communications is port 80. ✦ File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Allows sharing of files between remote computers in a reliable manner. The TCP/IP protocol provides a commandline FTP utility that enables file- and directory-sharing services between remote systems. FTP operations are processed through TCP port 21. ✦ Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP): Transfers e-mail between IP-based systems on TCP port 25 using a series of text commands to exchange instructions between hosts. A host is either an end user, Mail User Agent (MUA), or Mail Transfer Agent (MTA). A typical computer user receives e-mail from a mail server using POP3 or IMAP and delivers e-mail via SMTP. ✦ Terminal Emulation Protocol, or Telnet: A client-server protocol that allows users to type and execute commands on a remote host as if the user were physically sitting in front of the machine. Telnet provides a mechanism that allows a remote logon to a remote workstation, over a remote network. Telnet is considered a security risk and does not encrypt data or provide authentication services. Telnet operates on TCP port 23. ✦ Network File System (NFS): Offers transparent access to remote resources over the network. Users may access files remotely as if the files were locally stored data. This allows the network administrator to store files in a central location, with users relying on NFS for access. This service is provided to the end user by mounting the available share. ✦ Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): The TCP/IP network management protocol that delivers the state and condition of monitored networking devices. Health status reports of network-attached devices may be delivered to any polling network management consoles. Administrative alerts can be set by the system administrator to issue warnings on critical system failures. SNMP agents monitor the network and return information to requesting SNMP management systems. SNMP uses UDP port 161 for general messages and port 162 for trap messages.

www.it-ebooks.info

TCP/IP Layers and Protocols

207

✦ Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3): Downloads and stores e-mail from SMTP mail servers using TCP port 110. POP3 downloads all messages addressed to the user at one time and does not allow selective downloading of mail. After all messages have been received by the POP3 client, the POP3 client disconnects, and the stored e-mail is deleted from the database on the mail server. ✦ X Windows: A graphical user interface (GUI) used for communicating between X terminals and UNIX workstations.

✦ Domain Name System (DNS): A network service that associates alphanumeric host names to a particular IP address of a network host commonly found on the Internet. DNS names consist of a host name followed by a domain name, which combined create a fully qualified domain name. For example, www.cisco.com (cisco is the host name, and .com is the domain) is much easier for users to remember than IP addresses like 192.168.172.147. This functionality of finding IP addresses from the domain name is called name resolution and is performed by DNS servers. ✦ Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP): The protocol used to assign authorized network clients with an IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS server configuration information. This automates system administration tasks and prevents network administrators from having to perform redundant configuration tasks on every network device. Adding new clients to the network using DHCP is extremely easy and minimizes user intervention. The DHCP client initially sends a broadcast message asking for information from the DHCP server usually found on the local-area network. This request is processed by the DHCP server, and IP information and lease times are returned to the client. After the IP addressing information is received, the client may begin to communicate with other IP-based machines.

TCP/IP Layers and Protocols I now examine how the TCP/IP, or Department of Defense (DoD) data communications, model is structured and define its layers. In Figure 2-12, you can see the key differences between the OSI and DoD models.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book II Chapter 2

TCP/IP Layers and Protocols

✦ Internet Small Computer Systems Interface (iSCSI): Transfers SCSI commands over IP networks. iSCSI is used for remote storage data access across local- and wide-area networks. Clients, or initiators, send SCSI data requests to target SCSI storage devices that are usually storagearea networks (SANs). iSCSI communications allow long-distance file access over the existing network topology.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 3: IP Addressing Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the purpose of IP addressing ✓ Identifying responsible IP address issuing authorities and their

methods ✓ Separating IP addresses using network and host ID bits ✓ Understanding the differences between public and private addressing ✓ Identifying reserved addresses ✓ Describing the three major classes of network addressing ✓ Interpreting subnet masking techniques ✓ Explaining broadcasting ✓ Describing Address Resolution Protocol and its purpose

T

his chapter explores the purpose and hierarchy of IP addressing in detail. I examine the process of logical network and host addressing, subnet masks, and the classes of logical IP addressing. Private and broadcast addresses are clarified, and real-world addressing examples are given so that you will have a clear understanding of how IP addressing works. This is essential information needed to pass the exam. But never fear! Understanding IP addressing is not as difficult as you may think!

The Purpose of IP Addresses — It’s All about the Delivery The major purpose of IP addressing is to exchange data across the network between two hosts using datagrams, or packets. Packets are broken-up independent pieces of data that consist of header and trailer information, and they contain source and delivery addresses, along with various control information. These source and destination addresses allow packets to reach the proper destination; the packets can then be reassembled in the proper sequence by the receiving machine. Three important components are involved in the delivery of IP packets: ✦ The individual IP address is used to identify each host on the network.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 4: Subnetting Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the purpose and function of subnetting ✓ Dividing networks into smaller pieces called subnets ✓ Understanding proper subnetwork planning ✓ Describing classless interdomain routing ✓ Identifying CIDR slash notation ✓ Subnetting Class A, B, and C networks ✓ Using hexadecimal and binary conversion ✓ Understanding subnet zero ✓ Identifying and using variable-length subnet masks (VLSMs) ✓ Explaining summarization ✓ Understanding the ANDing process

T

his chapter examines and provides detailed examples of how subnetting works and why it is used in so many organizations around the world. A proper understanding of subnetting is essential for passing the CCNA exam. I discuss how to create subnets and how to determine the subnet and number of hosts from the IP address. I take a look at classless interdomain routing (CIDR) and its uses and provide you with examples of subnetting from the three major classes, A, B, and C. Variable-length subnet masks (VLSMs) and summarization are also discussed. Before even scheduling your CCNA test, you should know this chapter forward, backward, inside out, and upside down! So now I get right to it . . . Subnetting 101!

Subnetting Basics The IP address is comprised of the network ID and host ID fields, with a logically invisible separating line dividing the two. This dividing line can be shifted, or “moved to the right,” by the network administrator to add configuration flexibility to the local-area network. Logical networks may be added to the configuration of the local infrastructure by reducing the amount of allowed hosts on the network. By subtracting available hosts, the amount of available networks or subnets is increased.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

236

Subnetting Basics

I have already discussed how subnetting improves network performance and divides a network into smaller pieces. A downside to subnetting is that routing complexity is increased as subnets are added. Solid planning and good network documentation are essential. I now take a deeper look into the planning process and subnet creation throughout the remainder of this chapter.

Subnet mask, network ID, host ID, and broadcast IP I first review the relationship among subnet masks, network and host IDs, and the broadcast IP address for a given subnet by examining the following example. Assume that you have a network address of 172.16.0.0 with the default subnet mask of 255.255.0.0. You then “borrow” from the host portion (host portions are the third and fourth octet) or shift over 1 complete byte of the subnet mask, extending the network portion of the subnet mask to cover the entire third octet. The subnet mask would then look like this: 255.255.255.0. Your change looks like this in binary: 11111111.11111111.00000000.00000000 to 11111111.11111111.11111111.00000000 The first 16 bits in both examples define the original network ID. The change comes in the third octet, which has now morphed from a host ID octet to a subnetted one. The fourth octet is now used for hosts using the new mask compared to the third and fourth octets from the standard mask. You have just created an 8-bit subnet by changing the default mask from 255.255.0.0 to 255.255.255.0. What does this give you for choices when planning your organizational subnet structure? Discounting the reserved network segment — or “wire” — dotted-decimal address of 0 and the reserved broadcast decimal address of 255, you can determine that you now have the possibility of assigning 254 unique host addresses on 256 unique subnets. So for instance, subnet 172.16.1.0 has the host range possibilities of 172.16.1.1–172.16.1.254, with 172.16.1.255 reserved as the broadcast address for that subnet. I examine typical examples of Class A, B, and C subnetting in an upcoming section, but for now, I turn my attention to classless interdomain routing.

Classless interdomain routing (CIDR) Classless interdomain routing — pronounced cider for short — was created to solve the problems introduced by the classful (A–E) addressing scheme and to prevent address space depletion. CIDR uses a masking technique (instead of a classful addressing one) to determine the target network,

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

238

Subnetting Basics

180.10.150.0/22 As shown in Figure 4-4, the value 22 after the slash represents 22 “on” or 1 bits of the network ID in binary. The remaining 10 bits are “off” or 0 and represent host bits. Writing 180.10.150.0/22 is just a shortened form of writing out the entire IP and subnet mask together: 180.10.150.0 255.255.252.0 Using CIDR slash notation, there is no need to know or fit the IP address in a certain class. The network ID and host IDs are easily identified from the bit values assigned by the prefix length. Take a look at the CIDR addressing table listed in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5: CIDR addressing table.

Net. bits

Host bits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

# of Equivalent “Classful” Networks

Subnet Mask

CIDR Notation

Number of Hosts

Class A

Class B

Class C

128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0 254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0 255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0 255.248.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0 255.255.224.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.248.0 255.255.252.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252

/1 /2 /3 /4 /5 /6 /7 /8 /9 /10 /11 /12 /13 /14 /15 /16 /17 /18 /19 /20 /21 /22 /23 /24 /25 /26 /27 /28 /29 /30

2,147,483,646 1,073,741,822 536,870,910 268,435,454 134,217,726 67,108,862 33,554,430 16,777,214 8,388,606 4,194,302 2,097,150 1,048,574 524,286 262,142 131,070 65,534 32,766 16,382 8,190 4,094 2,046 1,022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2

128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/32 1/64 1/128 1/256 -

256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/32 1/64 1/128 1/256 -

256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/32 1/64

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

IP Address Class and Subnet Mask

Figure 4-8: Subnet table — Class C.

243

Subnet bits

Subnet Mask

Number of Subnets

Number of Hosts

Broadcast Address

0

255.255.255.0

0

254

N.N.N.255

2

255.255.255.192

4

62

N.N.N.S+63

3

255.255.255.224

8

30

N.N.N.S+31

4

255.255.255.240

16

14

N.N.N.S+15

5

255.255.255.248

32

6

N.N.N.S+7

6

255.255.255.252

64

2

N.N.N.S+3

Table of Class C Subnet Structure

Book II Chapter 4

N=Network, S=Subnet

Now that you have seen exactly how subnets and hosts are determined using a Class C IP address, I take a look at another example using a Class B network. You have been issued a network IP address of 180.10.0.0 with the default mask of 255.255.0.0. This is written as 180.10.0.0/16 in CIDR notation. A total of 100 hosts per network segment on 50 subnets is required, using the 2n binary numbering system to determine the amount of hosts and subnets. How many bits must you borrow from the host field and change into network bits to support 100 hosts on 50 subnets? 26 provides you with an address range of 64 (2*2*2*2*2*2=64) and designates 6 additional network bits for subnetting, moving from a /16 bit mask (255.255.0.0) to a /22 bit mask (255.255.252.0). You now have 22 bits for the network ID and 10 bits left over for host ID addressing, giving you 64 possible networks and 1,022 hosts. This would accommodate your requirements for 100 workstations on 50 subnets but leaves very few options for adding additional future network segments. Because you only require 100 hosts, you can steal 1 more bit from those hosts and add it to the network side of the mask. 180.10.0.0/16 has now changed from 180.10.0.0/22 to 180.10.0.0/23 (255.255.254.0) with 9 bits reserved for hosts, as shown in Figure 4-9. This 1-bit jump has just doubled your possible subnets to 128 and cut your possible hosts in half (from 1,022 to 510). You still can support 100 interfaces per subnet, but you have planned for future network growth by adding additional subnets.

www.it-ebooks.info

Subnetting

Class B IP address subnets

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

IP Address Class and Subnet Mask

249

✦ What are the valid host ranges? The hosts are always located between the subnet and broadcast addresses. With your example block size of 8, valid host ranges would be .1–.6, with a network address of .0 and a broadcast of .7.

Subnet Mask

Number of Subnets

Number of Hosts

Broadcast Address

0

255.0.0.0

0

16,777,214

N.255.255.255

2

255.192.0.0

4

4,194,302

N.S+63.255.255

3

255.224.0.0

8

2,097,150

N.S+31.255.255

4

255.240.0.0

16

1,048,574

N.S+15.255.255

5

255.248.0.0

32

524,286

N.S+7.255.255

6

255.252.0.0

64

262,142

N.S+3.255.255

7

255.254.0.0

128

131,070

N.S+1.255.255

8

255.255.0.0

256

65,534

N.S.255.255

9

255.255.128.0

512

32,766

N.S+127.255

10

255.255.192.0

1,024

16,382

N.S+63.255

11

255.255.224.0

2,048

8,190

N.S+31.255

12

255.255.240.0

4,096

4,094

N.S+15.255

13

255.255.248.0

8,192

2,046

N.S+7.255

14

255.255.252.0

16,384

1,022

N.S+3.255

15

255.255.254.0

32,768

510

N.S+1.255

16

255.255.255.0

65,536

254

N.S.255

17

255.255.255.128

131,072

126

N.S+127

18

255.255.255.192

262,144

62

N.S+63

19

255.255.255.224

524,288

30

N.S+31

20

255.255.255.240

1,048,576

14

N.S+15

21

255.255.255.248

2,097,152

6

N.S+7

22

255.255.255.252

4,194,304

2

N.S+3

Table of Class A Subnet Structure N=Network, S=Subnet

www.it-ebooks.info

Book II Chapter 4

Subnetting

Figure 4-14: Subnet table — Class A.

Subnet bits

www.it-ebooks.info

Variable-Length Subnet Masks (VLSMs)

/27 30 Hosts

/27 30 Hosts

/27 30 Hosts

/27 30 Hosts

204.1.1.0/24

/27 30 Hosts

251

/27 30 Hosts

Book II Chapter 4

/26 62 Hosts

/25 126 Hosts

Figure 4-15: VLSM.

/27 30 Hosts

/28 14 Hosts

204.1.1.0/24

/30 2 Hosts

Subnetting

Six Class C Subnetted Networks Before VLSM

/29 6 Hosts

Six Class C Subnetted Networks After VLSM

Assigning subnets of variable lengths to separate interfaces on the router is possible with VLSM. This allows classless routing protocols such as Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), and Routing Information Protocol version 2 (RIPv2) to function with VLSM, while classful protocols such as RIP and IGRP do not. These classful protocols do not carry separate information for each subnet and assume that all subnets are using the same mask. This limitation is overcome using classless routing and VLSM.

www.it-ebooks.info

252

Variable-Length Subnet Masks (VLSMs)

VLSM design guidelines Although more complex than standard subnetting, VLSM is designed and very similar to CIDR. VLSM enables subnetworking of your internal organizational subnets and can be applied as much as needed throughout the network, as long as enough host bits are available to steal from your network address block. Figure 4-16 shows the process of subnetting a network using VLSM.

Subnet 0 /25 126 Hosts 204.1.1.0/24 (254 hosts)

Split into two subnets. One as Subnet 0 and the other to be subnetted further.

/25 126 Hosts

Subnet 1 /26 62 Hosts

/25 split into two subnets of 62 hosts per subnet

/26 62 Hosts


/26 split further into 30 hosts per subnet

/27 30 Hosts


/27 subnetted once again into two 14 host subnets

/28 14 Hosts

Subnet 4

/28 split further into 6 hosts per subnet

/29 6 Hosts

Figure 4-16: VLSM networking.

/29 6 Hosts Subnet 5

/29 subnetted once again for use as WAN link on Subnet 5

/30 2 Hosts

www.it-ebooks.info

/30 2 Hosts

Summarization

253

Optimizing IP addressing with VLSM You can review the example of a subnetted VLSM network in Figure 4-16 by using the Class C network address of 204.1.1.0/24. You divide this network into two /25 subnetworks by stealing 1 bit from the first available hosts ID bit field. This gives you two subnets, 204.1.1.0/25 and 204.1.1.128/25. The 204.1.1.0/25 network is used for subnet 0 and the other will continue to be manipulated and divided again into two new /26 subnets, 204.1.1.128/26 and 204.1.1.192/26. This is done by stealing the next available host ID bit and gives you a total of 62 hosts per subnet. You then dedicate 204.1.1.128/26 for subnet 1, and the other subnet is used to create two new /27 subnets. The process continues in this fashion until you run out of host ID bits to steal and have defined all your subnets.

Book II Chapter 4

The VLSM subnet table is shown in Figure 4-17.

Address / Mask

Subnet Mask

Number of Hosts

Assignable Range

0

204.1.1.0/25

255.255.255.128

126

204.1.1.1 - 204.1.1.126

1

204.1.1.128/26

255.255.255.192

62

204.1.1.129 - 204.1.1.190

2

204.1.1.192/27

255.255.255.224

30

204.1.1.193 - 204.1.1.222

3

204.1.1.224/28

255.255.255.240

14

204.1.1.225 - 204.1.1.238

4

204.1.1.240/29

255.255.255.248

6

204.1.1.241 - 204.1.1.246

5

204.1.1.248/30

255.255.255.252

2

204.1.1.249 - 204.1.1.250

Summarization VLSM breaks apart network addresses into smaller subnets. Summarization, often called route aggregation or supernetting, is the consolidation of many individual routes into a single route advertisement. This is the reverse process of subnetting, with the network and host ID dividing line moved to the left instead of the right. This supernet is a block of subnets addressed as one complete network and allows multiple network IDs to be combined under one distinct network address. This proves less taxing for bandwidth and hardware requirements and slows the growth of internetworking routing tables. The summarization process allows minimum impact to routing tables by consolidating a group of subnets into one routing table entry. By summarizing routes and having less routing table entries, less of a burden is placed on routing hardware; CPU and memory resource requirements are therefore reduced.

www.it-ebooks.info

Subnetting

Figure 4-17: VLSM subnet table — Class C.

Subnet number

254

Summarization

The main advantages of route summarization are as follows: ✦ Bandwidth requirements reduced ✦ Router CPU and memory resources reduced ✦ Routing table size reduced

Summarization investigated I now focus my attention on how a router views individual routes compared to route summarization. In Figure 4-18, four individual routes are listed: ✦ 204.1.4.0/24 ✦ 204.1.5.0/24 ✦ 204.1.6.0/24 ✦ 204.1.7.0/24

204.1.4.0/24 Router A summarizes the routing table as 204.1.4.0/22 and sends A B to router B

204.1.5.0/24 204.1.4.0/22 204.1.6.0/24 Figure 4-18: Summarization.

Routing Table 204.1.4.0/24 204.1.5.0/24 204.1.6.0/24 204.1.7.0/24

Routing Table 204.1.4.0/22

204.1.7.0/24

These four addresses are then combined, or summarized, into the address 204.1.4.0/22 by using the following procedure:

1. Convert all addresses into binary format. 2. Identify only the common bits from the four addresses, ignoring all other bits.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 5: Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Exam Objectives ✓ Understanding IPv6 ✓ Identifying IPv4 and IPv6 differences ✓ Examining IPv6 addressing ✓ Reviewing IPv6 configuration ✓ Routing with IPv6 ✓ Migrating IPv4 to IPv6 ✓ Implementing dual-stack IPv4/IPv6 protocols ✓ Tunneling through both IP versions

A

rriving at the final chapter on the TCP/IP family, you have surely amassed a wealth of knowledge on the subject by now. I have gone over 32-bit IPv4 addressing, classifying, and subnetting fundamentals and introduced you to the popular protocols and layering methods. Now I turn your attention to a new and improved Internet protocol version, namely IPv6. On the CCNA examination, you will find various test questions regarding the technical requirements and addressing scheme of IPv6. I provide all the knowledge required to answer any IPv6 questions on the test.

Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) IPv4’s 32-bit addressing scheme currently specifies roughly 4 billion hosts on 16 million networks. Considering Network Address Translation (NAT) and private addressing, this sounds like an overwhelmingly large enough number to provide ample address space for the entire networked world. You should not forget that many of these addresses are reserved and not available for host assignment. Also, the A, B, and C address classes have remarkably inflated the internetwork’s routing tables and proven to be a very wasteful method of IP assignment. A new and improved version of the Internet protocol and addressing solution was announced in the mid 1990s (RFC 2460) and was tasked with solving IPv4’s many shortcomings. Enter IPv6!

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

The Benefits of IPv6

263

The Benefits of IPv6 The major benefits and features of IPv6 include the following: ✦ Larger address space: The main limitations with IPv4 are the imposed address space limitations and eventual complete loss of addressing capability. IPv6 was designed to overcome IPv4’s 32-bit limitations by introducing much larger 128-bit addresses and providing an address pool that is virtually inexhaustible. ✦ Stateless autoconfiguration: A feature used to issue and generate an IP address without the need for a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server:

• The second half of the address is generated exclusively by the host and is known as the interface identifier. The interface identifier uses its own MAC address, or it may use a randomly generated number. This allows the host to keep hardware addresses hidden for security reasons and helps an administrator mitigate security risks. ✦ More efficient packet headers: IPv6 uses a simpler header design than IPv4. The enhanced design allows routers to analyze and forward packets faster. Fewer header fields must be read, and header checksums are completely discarded in IPv6. More efficient packet headers improve network performance and save valuable router resources. ✦ Changes in multicast operation: Support for multicasting in IPv6 is now mandatory instead of optional, as with IPv4. The multicasting capabilities in IPv6 completely replace the broadcasting functionality found in IPv4. IPv6 replaces broadcasting with an “all-host” multicasting group. ✦ Increased security: Another optional feature found in IPv4, IP Security (IPsec) measures are now considered mandatory and implemented natively in IPv6. ✦ Additional mobility features: Mobile IPv6 allows a mobile IPv6 node to change links or locations and still maintain one permanent address. ✦ Integrated quality of service (QoS): Integrated QoS in IPv6 packet headers provides improved packet management. Routers are now able to organize, prioritize, and forward packets more efficiently than with previous implementations. Almost all operating systems available today provide support for IPv6. Some operating systems provide “out of the box” support, while others depend on additional installation packages. Host operating systems that support IPv6 include

www.it-ebooks.info

Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6)

• Routers send router advertisements (RAs) to network hosts containing the first half, or first 64 bits, of the 128-bit network address.

Book II Chapter 5

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

266

Introducing IPv6 Addressing

Who’s the assigning authority? IPv6 address assignment is handled similarly to IPv4 address allocation. Management of IPv6 addresses has been delegated from the Internet Corporation Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN) to the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA), which in turn has been handed over to five regional Internet registries (RIRs): ✦ The American Registry for Internet Numbers (ARIN): Serving North America ✦ The Réseaux IP Européens Network Coordination Centre (RIPE NCC): Supporting Europe, the Middle East, and the former Soviet Union ✦ The Asian Pacific Network Information Centre (APNIC): Supporting Asia and Australia ✦ The African Network Information Centre (AfriNIC): Responsible for Africa and the Indian Ocean ✦ The Latin American and Caribbean Internet Addresses Registry (LACNIC): Serving Latin America and the Caribbean These five RIRs delegate addressing responsibilities further to ✦ Local Internet registries (LIRs) ✦ Internet service providers (ISPs)

IPv6 address notation IPv6 128-bit addresses consist of two logical parts: ✦ The top 64 bits represent the global routing prefix (plus the subnet ID). ✦ The remaining 64 bits contain the host interface identifier. The ultimate deciding factor of where the network portion ends and the host portion starts remains the responsibility of the prefix length value (much like IPv4 CIDR notation). This network/host split is not hard-coded into the address and can be configured according to network requirements. The host address functions the same way as the 48-bit hexadecimal MAC address in IPv4, but has now added 16 additional bits. The host address in IPv6 is created using the hardware MAC address from the host interface and is termed a 64-bit Extended Unique Identifier (EUI-64). If privacy is a concern, the host can use a randomly generated number instead of the MAC address to identify itself on the network.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing IPv6 Addressing

269

✦ Multicast: Addresses that are assigned to a specific “multicast group” of interfaces. IPv6 multicasting functions similarly to IPv4 broadcasting and is described as “one-to-many” IP communications. Because no broadcast address exists in IPv6, the “all-nodes” multicast address is used to designate a group of interfaces. Compared to IPv4 broadcasting, IPv6 multicasting provides a much more efficient means of group communications. It is no longer necessary for all interfaces on the subnet to receive the same broadcast message, saving valuable CPU processes and reducing network traffic.

There is an important difference to remember regarding anycast and multicast delivery. Anycast packets are only sent to one host in an anycast group, compared to packets reaching “all hosts” in the multicast group.

IPv6 reserves — The “special”ists IPv6 dedicates a large amount of address space for testing and other special purposes. As shown in Figure 5-5, the special addressing group types are as follows: :: — The unspecified address: Consists of all 0s and is sent by hosts that do not know its own address. A network device sending a DHCP request would be an example of using the unspecified address. The unspecified address is 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0, or written as two double colons. ::1 — The loopback address: As in IPv4, the loopback address is used for testing stack operability on a single interface, and packets are looped back, or returned, to the same sending device. Packets are not transmitted to remote machines. The loopback address is 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1, or written as two double colons followed by the number 1. FE80::/10 — Link-local addresses: The first group of bits starting with FE in hex represent private addresses. These addresses are used much like the private addresses in IPv4 and cannot be routed. Packets that are sent to these private addresses stay on the local network and do not traverse routers to outside organizations. This is analogous to the IPv4 autoconfiguration addresses 169.254.0.0/16.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book II Chapter 5


✦ Anycast: Packets that are sent and received by only one member (interface) per anycast group. This is described as “one-to-one-of-many” communications and delivers packets to the closest interface (in routing distance) in the anycast group. Anycast addresses use the same syntax as unicast addressing, and hosts are unable recognize the difference between unicast and anycast packets.

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuring IPv6

271

• All-nodes multicast group: FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 used for all link-local nodes. • All-routers multicast group: FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 used for all link-local routers.

3. Verify IPv6 addressing and address configuration: IPv6 packet processing verification and proper interface configuration can be viewed by examining the running configuration and interface information. To configure a Cisco interface for IPv6 in the IOS, enter privileged EXEC/ global configuration mode and specify the interface type and number: Router>enable Router#configure terminal Router(config)#interface type number

Router(config-if)#ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix-length eui-64

Configuring site-local and global addresses is done without the eui-64 or link-local prefixes. Using eui-64 configures an interface identifier in the low-order 64 bits of the address. Or, use the following: Router(config-if)#ipv6 address ipv6-address/prefix-length link-local

The link-local identifier allows configuration of a link-local address other than the one automatically configured by default. Link-local addresses only communicate with nodes on the same network. Another alternative is as follows: Router(config-if)#ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix-length anycast

This method specifies an IPv6 anycast address. You may also use the following: Router(config-if)#ipv6 enable

Using the ipv6 enable command automatically configures a link-local address on the interface and enables the interface for IPv6 processing. Now, exit interface configuration mode and enable the interface to forward unicast datagrams: Router(config-if)#exit Router(config)#ipv6 unicast-routing

www.it-ebooks.info


Then designate the IPv6 network or address assigned to the interface and enable IPv6 processing on the interface. The ipv6-prefix/address arguments with the prefix length must be in standard colon hexadecimal notation, such as 2001:0CC8:0:1::/64.

Book II Chapter 5

272

Configuring IPv6

You can now verify that IPv6 is enabled and properly configured to a particular interface by viewing the running configuration: Router#show running-config Building configuration... Current configuration : 22324 bytes ! Last configuration change at 13:34:21 EST Tue Jun 4 2009 ! NVRAM config last updated at 04:14:16 EST Tue Jun 4 2009 by drew hostname dummies ipv6 unicast-routing interface Ethernet0 no ip route-cache no ip mroute-cache no keepalive media-type 10BaseT ipv6 address 3FFE:C00:0:1::/64 eui-64

The running configuration shows that IPv6 unicast-routing is enabled and that you are assigned an IPv6 address. Now you can view the configured Ethernet interface: Router#show ipv6 interface ethernet 0 Ethernet0 is up, line protocol is up IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::260:3EFF:FE11:6770 Global unicast address(es): 3FFE:C00:0:1:260:3EFF:FE11:6770, subnet is 3FFE:C00:0:1::/64 Joined group address(es): FF02::1 FF02::2 FF02::1:FF11:6770 MTU is 1500 bytes ICMP error messages limited to one every 500 milliseconds ND reachable time is 30000 milliseconds ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds ND router advertisements are sent every 200 seconds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds Hosts use stateless autoconfig for addresses

The show command tells you that IPv6 is enabled, gives you the link-local address, informs you of stateless autoconfiguration, and lists the three assigned group addresses.

Address autoconfiguration — DHCP who? Address autoconfiguration allows IPv6 hosts to self-configure themselves with IP addressing and other information without the need for a server. In IPv4, you either specify a static IP address or enable DHCP addressing to provide required stateful information to hosts. Stateful addressing is delivered to clients using a centrally managed server. With stateless IPv6 autoconfiguration, neither a DHCP server nor static IP is necessary. Stateless configuration allows devices to generate their own addresses and adjust according to the state of the network.

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuring IPv6

273

The steps involved in address autoconfiguration are as follows:

1. Generate a link-local address: The device creates a 64-bit host identifier using its own 48-bit hardware address and adds a trailing 16-bit hex value of 0xFFFE. The 48-bit hardware address and the added 16-bit value of 0xFFFE combine to form the host identifier. The universal/local bit of the MAC address is always the seventh bit and gets “flipped” from 0 to 1. This process is called MAC-to-EUI64 conversion and determines the interface ID of the device.

2. Test the uniqueness of the link-local address: The host sends a neighbor solicitation message by employing the Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP). NDP verifies the uniqueness of the link-local address. Because two nodes may not share the same interface ID, the node listens on the network for a neighbor advertisement. If duplicate addresses exist (most likely from using a “token” value instead of the MAC address), a new interface ID must be generated.

3. Assign the link-local address to the interface: The device assigns the newly generated link-local address to its interface. Assigning the linklocal address depends on the previous step and will execute only when the address uniqueness test passes.

4. Host contacts the router on the local network: The host contacts the router in one of two ways. The host may either listen to router advertisements (RAs) or send its own router solicitation message. In either case, the requesting node contacts the router, requesting additional information needed for network address configuration. The router responds and informs the host how to determine its globally unique network address. For networks employing stateful configurations, DHCPv6 contact information is provided to the host.

5. Globally unique network address is formed: The host combines the interface ID with the router-issued network prefix to create the globally unique network address.

A dynamic approach While stateless address autoconfiguration has removed the major reasons for deploying DHCP services in IPv4, DHCPv6 may still be used in IPv6 networks to provide stateful addressing assignment.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book II Chapter 5


Another method can be used to generate the link-local address without using a MAC address. Instead of using the hardware address of an interface, a random “token” value is generated by the device. This can cause problems if two devices on the network randomly generate the same token. The chances are minimal, but testing must be done to eliminate the possibility that this token value is identically generated and used somewhere else on the same local network.

www.it-ebooks.info

Routing with IPv6

275

ICMPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol version 6 (ICMPv6) is an integral part of IPv6 and functions just as it does in IPv4. ICMPv6 is used by nodes for reliability testing (using the ping command) and for reporting errors during packet handling. ICMPv6 messages are divided into two categories: error messages and informational messages. These are defined by their high-order bits in the message type field of each packet: ✦ 0–127 is the range for error messages. ✦ 128–255 are used for informational messages. ICMPv6 packets are used for path MTU discovery, Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP), and the Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Protocol.

Routing with IPv6 The Internet is a collection of IP-based packet-switching networks known individually as autonomous systems (ASs). Each of these subnets may use one or more system administrators to deploy routing protocols inside the organization, known as Interior Gateway Protocols (IGPs). To connect individual networks and to pass routing information between them, an Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP) is enabled. System administrators may either ✦ Manually update routing tables, which is called static routing ✦ Use an automatically configured dynamic routing approach The purpose and goal of routing IPv4 and IPv6 packets remain the same: to forward packets efficiently from sender to receiver interfaces.

Static routing — Gimme some static! Static routing is implemented essentially the same way as in IPv4. Static routes are configured and stored in static routing tables and maintained on the router itself. This may improve routing performance but also increases network management and administrative tasks.

www.it-ebooks.info


MLD is tasked with discovering nodes that want to send/receive multicast packets to specific multicast addresses using IPv6 routers. Neighbor Discovery uses ICMP messages to determine link-layer addresses of hosts that reside on the same network using solicitation messages. Router advertisement (RA) messages are also handled by ICMPv6.

Book II Chapter 5

276

Routing with IPv6

Routers using an IPv6 static configuration have the following benefits over dynamically configured networks: ✦ Less bandwidth requirements ✦ Security and resource efficiency ✦ No CPU usage during route calculations The drawbacks are that static routes must be manually reconfigured by the network administrator if the network topology undergoes any changes. Static routes can provide increased security for certain links on large networks or are optimally used for small networks with only one connection to the outside world. The following code configures an IPv6 static route using the Cisco IOS ipv6 route command: Router>enable Router#configure terminal Router(config)#ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix-length {ipv6-address | interfacetype interface-number [ipv6-address]} [administrative-distance] [administrative-multicast-distance | unicast | multicast][tag tag]

Introducing IPv6 routing protocols IPv6 relies on the same routing protocols as does IPv4, although some modifications and upgrades were made to provide the additional requirements of IPv6. I examine three of the most popular Interior Gateway Protocols modified for IP version 6: ✦ RIPng (RIP next generation) ✦ EIGRPv6 ✦ OSPFv3

RIPng into the next generation Routing Information Protocol next generation (RIPng) is a distance vector protocol based on RIPv2, designed for deployment in medium-sized networks and functioning similarly to RIP in IPv4. RIPng is designed for use with routers only and carries a maximum 15-hop radius, which limits its use in large networking environments. The major purpose of RIPng is to provide route computation between routers every 30 seconds. IPv4 split horizon and poison reverse functionality are still ingrained within RIPng, along with slow convergence after the network topology changes.

www.it-ebooks.info

Routing with IPv6

277

Updated IPv6 features include the following: ✦ Uses IPv6 as the method of transport. ✦ Uses IPv6 prefix/next-hop addressing. ✦ RIP updates via multicast group FF02::9. ✦ Request and response updates are received on UDP port 521. The following code configures or enables RIPng from the IOS interface configuration mode:

1. Enter privileged EXEC/global configuration mode: Router>enable Router#configure terminal

Router(config)#interface type number

3. Enable RIPng on the interface: Router(config-if)#ipv6 rip name enable

EIGRPv6 Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol version 6 (EIGRPv6) is another advanced distance vector protocol that also works similarly to the EIGRP protocol used in IPv4. EIGRPv6 is still easy to configure and uses the Diffusing Update Algorithm (DUAL) for loop-free, fast convergence times. Some highlights of EIGRPv6 are as follows: ✦ Configures EIGRPv6 on an interface without requiring an assigned global IPv6 address. ✦ Uses the router-id configuration command to enable the protocol. ✦ Requires the no shutdown command to be issued before routing is started. ✦ Enabling EIGRPv6 on passive interfaces is not required. ✦ Route filtering is performed using the distribute-list prefixlist command. The network and interface to be used must be enabled from interface configuration mode. To turn on the routing process and enable EIGRPv6, enter router configuration mode. Then follow these steps:

www.it-ebooks.info


2. Select the interface to configure:

Book II Chapter 5

278

Routing with IPv6

To turn on the routing process and enable the EIGRPv6 routing protocol, configure as follows:


2. Enable routing of IPv6 packets: Router(config)#ipv6 unicast-routing

3. Specify the interface to be configured: Router(config)#interface fastethernet 0/0

4. Enable IPv6 processing on the interface: Router(config-if)#ipv6 enable Router(config-if)#ipv6 eigrp as-number

5. Issue the no shutdown command to start the protocol: Router(config-if)#no shutdown

6. Create an EIGRP IPv6 routing process and enter router configuration mode: Router(config-if)#ipv6 router eigrp as-number

7. Assign the unique fixed router ID: Router(config-router)#router-id {ip-address | ipv6address}

8. Issue the no shutdown command again: Router(config-router)#no shutdown

9. Type exit to return to global configuration mode: Router(config-router)#exit

10. Type exit again to return to privileged EXEC mode: Router(config)#exit

11. Copy the running configuration to the startup configuration: Router#copy run start

The autonomous system number and no shutdown commands are required to designate and enable EIGRPv6 on the router. You then select the proper interface for configuration and enable EIGRP on that interface.

www.it-ebooks.info

Migrating to IPv6

279

OSPFv3 Open Shortest Path First version 3 (OSPFv3) is a link-state routing protocol based on OSPFv2 using a hierarchical method of dividing large autonomous systems. OSPF makes routing decisions based on the state of the attached links that connect source to destination. Network link-state information is collected and stored in a database and propagated using a series of link-state advertisements (LSAs). This database is used to create the routing tables used by OSPF. IP addressing information has been removed from OSPF packet headers. OSPFv3 uses multicast addresses FF02::5 and FF02::6 to send updates and acknowledgments. Enhanced features include the following:

✦ IPsec authentication replaces OSPF protocol authentication. ✦ Runs over a link instead of a subnet. ✦ Uses “ships in the night” integrated parallel routing. “Ships in the night” provides simultaneous OSPFv3 and OSPFv2 operation, allowing both IPv4 and IPv6 packets to be forwarded. To configure or enable OSPFv3, you must first enable unicast routing and IPv6 on the interface. Next, you enable and assign OSPF to a p

1. Enter privileged EXEC/global configuration mode and select the particular interface: Router>enable Router#configure terminal Router(config)#interface type number

2. Enable and assign OSPF to the interface on the router: Router(config-if)#ipv6 ospf process-id area area-id [instance instance-id]

Migrating to IPv6 Many organizations realize the eventual necessity of migrating to IPv6, even if they are anticipating a daunting process ahead. They may be comfortable and fully satisfied with IPv4’s functionality and current network configuration. However, the IPv4 comfort level will not last forever. The clock is ticking,

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ Transmits IPv6 prefixes and supports multiple 128-bit addresses per interface.

Book II Chapter 5

280

Migrating to IPv6

and time is running short. But the problem may lie with agencies that don’t realize the budget, planning, and technical expertise requirements needed for migration. In actuality, the migration process is less painful than some may think. Here are a few points to remember when planning a migration to IPv6: ✦ Develop a plan. Start working on a plan now before it is time to migrate. A complete transition to IPv6 can take years, so start planning thoroughly now. Address assignment, routing, DNS, and application support are areas that must be considered for deployment. ✦ Analyze the organization’s network management system. The majority of network management systems currently support IPv4 only. Additional funds may be required to upgrade the existing IPv4 network management system to IPv6, or an entirely new system may be needed to support IPv6. ✦ Evaluate network security. Unauthorized network access is still a major concern with IPv6. Both firewalls and intrusion detection systems are invaluable. ✦ Enable IPv6 on the network. Start activating IPv6 on the network core, or backbone, to the desktop. Applications may then follow suit and be migrated individually, depending on greatest organizational priority.

Migration methods To successfully migrate to IPv6, you must maintain backward compatibility with current IPv4 hosts and networks. The IETF has recommended migration methods to follow that can ease the Internet conversion process to IPv6. A few methods I focus on are as follows: ✦ Dual-stack — IPv4 and IPv6 protocol stacks ✦ Tunneling — IPv6 through IPv4 and vice versa ✦ Translating addresses using NAT-PT

Dual-stack — IPv4 and IPv6 protocol stacks Dual-stack environments allow functionally of both IPv4/IPv6 protocols and applications to coexist on the same network. This approach splits the traffic into two separate networks, so separate security strategies are also required:

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Migrating to IPv6

285

Use the following steps to implement NAT-PT on Cisco routers:


2. Assign an IPv6 prefix as a global NAT-PT prefix: Router#ipv6 nat prefix ipv6-prefix/prefix-length

3. Specify an interface type and number, and place the router in interface configuration mode: Router(config)#interface type number

4. Assign an IPv6 address to the interface and enable IPv6 processing:

5. Enable NAT-PT on the interface and exit interface configuration mode: Router(config-if)#ipv6 nat Router(config-if)#exit

6. Select an interface and place the router in interface configuration mode: Router(config)#interface type number

7. Specify an IP address and mask assigned to the interface, and enable IP processing on the interface: Router(config-if)#ip address ip-address mask [secondary]

8. Enable NAT-PT on the interface: Router(config-if)#ipv6 nat

www.it-ebooks.info


Router(config-if)#ipv6 address ipv6-prefix {/prefixlength | link-local}

Book II Chapter 5

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Contents at a Glance Chapter 1: Introducing Layer 2 Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Layer 2 — Data Link Layer Review ............................................................ 291 Purpose of a Layer 2 Switch ....................................................................... 292 Basic Switch Functions ............................................................................... 296 Managing Port Security............................................................................... 306 Transmitting Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast ..................................... 307

Chapter 2: Managing a Switch Using Cisco IOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Best Practice for Using Cisco Switches .................................................... 313 Connecting to a Cisco Switch..................................................................... 315 Cisco Switch Startup Process .................................................................... 321 Configuring a Cisco Switch ......................................................................... 324 Managing Cisco Switch Authentication .................................................... 352

Chapter 3: Controlling Network Traffic with Cisco Switches . . . . . .369 Sending to MAC Addresses in Remote Networks .................................... 369 Deciding the Fate of Frames ....................................................................... 375 Switching in Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex Modes .................................... 378 Avoiding Loops with Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) .............................. 379

Chapter 4: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Introducing the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) ....................................... 386 STP Operation Flow ..................................................................................... 389 Introducing Cisco Options for STP ............................................................ 401 Introducing Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) ................................ 405 EtherChannel................................................................................................ 407 Monitoring STP ............................................................................................ 410

Chapter 5: Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Introducing Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) ................................. 416 Benefits of VLANs ........................................................................................ 418 Managing VLANs .......................................................................................... 418 Identifying VLANs ........................................................................................ 421 VLAN Trunking............................................................................................. 422 VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) ................................................................. 434 Routing Traffic from One VLAN to Another ............................................. 438

Chapter 6: Voice over IP (VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Introducing Voice over IP (VoIP)............................................................... 446 VoIP Requires Quality of Service (QoS) .................................................... 446 Cisco IP Phone ............................................................................................. 447 Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) ................................................................ 450 Configuring VoIP on Cisco Switches ......................................................... 451

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting a Switch Using Cisco IOS. . . . . . . . . . . .455 Troubleshooting Cisco Switches ............................................................... 455

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 1: Introducing Layer 2 Switches Exam Objectives ✓ Describing data link OSI Layer 2 and how it relates to Layer 2 switches ✓ Describing the purpose of a Layer 2 switch ✓ Differentiating a Layer 2 switch from a hub or a bridge ✓ Describing the basic Layer 2 switch functions ✓ Managing Layer 2 switch port security ✓ Describing how a Layer 2 switch handles unicast, multicast, and broad-

cast transmissions ✓ Describing MAC address table thrashing and broadcast storms

R

ead this chapter to find out about Layer 2 switches.

Layer 2 — Data Link Layer Review Layer 2 in the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) and TCP/IP network models is the data link layer. The data link layer transmits data on the physical medium. The data link layer uses physical addresses assigned to each physical network device in the local network to route data from one physical device to another. These addresses are called Media Access Control (MAC) addresses in TCP/IP. MAC addresses uniquely identify a specific network device, such as a switch or a router, or a network interface card (NIC), in a host device. The data link layer has the following features: ✦ Receives each packet from the network layer on the sending host ✦ Wraps up the packet in a data frame along with local routing data (the physical MAC address)

www.it-ebooks.info

292

Purpose of a Layer 2 Switch ✦ Sends the data frame to the physical layer to code an electrical or optical signal The physical layer transmits the data frame over a wire or over the air (wireless transmission). On the receiving host, the data link layer does the following: ✦ Unwraps the data frame received ✦ Extracts the packet out of the data frame ✦ Sends the packet up to the network layer The Ethernet TCP/IP protocol is used at Layer 2 for data link operations. Ethernet, defined by the IEEE 802.X standards, is the TCP/IP protocol that operates at Layer 2 to handle data link functions. Hence, whenever you consider Layer 2 in TCP/IP, you really need to think about Ethernet and physical MAC addresses. Layer 2, the data link layer, is only concerned with local-area networks (LANs). The mission of the data link layer is to handle data frame transmission locally between two devices connected on a LAN. The data link layer is concerned with LANs, implemented with Ethernet, and addressed using physical MAC addresses. Layer 2 switches use the MAC address of each device that transmits datalink frames through the switch to decide whether to forward that frame on an outbound port. Layer 2 switches also remember MAC addresses of connected devices to decide on which outbound port to send data-link frames.

Purpose of a Layer 2 Switch To understand the purpose of a Layer 2 switch, you need to know a little bit about older computer networks. First-generation LANs were connected using a single coaxial cable. Host devices in the LAN shared the bandwidth of that cable. Figure 1-1 illustrates such a network. Observe that hosts Alex, Claire, and John are connected to the same coaxial cable. The bandwidth is shared. Worse yet, everyone sees all frames sent on the cable: Alex sends a frame to John, but Claire also sees the frame and needs to discard it because it is not addressed to her. You can imagine that Claire needs to spend some time discarding frames, and so do Alex and John whenever they see a frame that is not addressed to them. This is not efficient.

www.it-ebooks.info

Purpose of a Layer 2 Switch

293

Hubs Later, hubs were introduced to interconnect several host devices using one cable for each device. This greatly simplified connections because each host was connected individually to the hub. It is very easy to connect or disconnect a host to a hub by simply plugging or unplugging the network cable linking the host to the hub. Hub networks were typically deployed using twisted-pair cable instead of coaxial cable. RJ-45 connectors were used, which greatly simplified connections.

D: John

D: John

D: John

D: John

Alex Figure 1-1: Flat bus network with single collision domain.

D: John

Claire

John

Claire: Discard this frame since it’s not addressed to me.

John: Oh, this frame is mine. Let me get it

Host devices share the bandwidth of the medium both when connected using coaxial cables and when connected using hubs. Because hosts share the same cable or the same hub, hosts can potentially send data frames at the same time on the medium. Hence, data frames can collide. Ethernet uses carrier sense multiple access collision detect (CSMA/CD) to control data frame collisions. This works well to work around collisions, but it does consume bandwidth. The CSMA/CD collision-detection and back-off algorithms can consume a lot of bandwidth. This is why in older networks, only 50–60 percent of the bandwidth was really usable for data frame transmission. The rest was wasted dealing with data frame collisions. The solution to this problem is to limit the collision domain, to make it as small as possible. This decreases or eliminates the risk of collision. That’s where Layer 2 bridges and Layer 2 switches come into play.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Layer 2 Switches

A hub works very much like a multiplexer or a multiple socket power bar: Data sent into a hub is sent out to all host devices connected to that hub except to the host that sent the data in. In other words, a hub forwards a data frame on all outbound ports, except on the port through which the frame came in.

Book III Chapter 1

www.it-ebooks.info

Purpose of a Layer 2 Switch

295

A bridge is slower than a switch because it uses software instead of hardware application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs) to learn about MAC addresses and to decide whether to forward a data frame. Otherwise, a bridge works like a switch.

Switches A Layer 2 switch is a network device that creates one collision domain per port and forwards data frames only on the outbound port that reaches the destination of the frame. Switch characteristics are as follows: ✦ Switches are faster than bridges because they use hardware ASICs instead of software to perform their operations. ✦ Switches are typically faster than routers because they do not need to look at the network layer (Layer 3) IP packet header. They only inspect the data-link (Layer 2) frame to look at the source and destination MAC address of the frame. This is why they are called Layer 2 switches: They only operate on the data-link (Layer 2) frame. Figure 1-3 shows a switched network. This solution has several advantages: ✦ It provides an easier way to connect the hosts. ✦ The hosts work in their own isolated collision domain (one per port). Hence, frames do not collide.

Alex

Claire

D: John

Switch Switch: this frame is addressed to John. Let me send it out on the port where John connects.

D: John Figure 1-3: Switched network with one collision domain per port.

John

John: Oh, this frame is mine. Let me get it.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ The switch filters the frames and forwards them only to the outbound port connected to the destination host. This is much more efficient than flooding the frame out on all ports, as hubs do.

Book III Chapter 1

296

Basic Switch Functions

The features of hubs, bridges, and switches are outlined in Table 1-1.

Table 1-1

Hubs, Bridges, and Switches

Feature

Hubs

Bridges

Switches

Technology

Port multiplexing

Software switching

ASIC switching

Duplex

Half

Half

Half/Full

Speed

Turtle

Bear

Leopard

VLAN support

No

No

Yes

Collision domain

Whole hub

1 per port

1 per VLAN

Broadcast domain

Whole hub

Whole bridge

1 per VLAN

Basic Switch Functions A Layer 2 switch must accomplish three tasks: ✦ Learn about the MAC addresses of devices connected to the switch ✦ Decide whether to forward frames it receives from host devices or other switches ✦ Avoid creating any Layer 2 loops The following sections explain each of these functions in detail.

Address learning Layer 2 switches learn the MAC addresses of devices connected to the switch as follows: ✦ The switch inspects each data frame that enters the switch. It saves the port number where the frame entered along with the source MAC address of that frame. The MAC address and the corresponding port number are saved in a MAC address table. ✦ As devices send frames into the switch, the switch slowly builds a complete MAC address table that contains • The MAC address of each device connected • The port number through which that device is sending frames into the switch Figure 1-4 illustrates hosts Alex, Claire, and John interconnected in a Layer 2 switch. The MAC address table is empty at this point because none of the hosts have sent frames into the switch.

www.it-ebooks.info


297

Figure 1-5 illustrates hosts Alex, Claire, and John interconnected in a Layer 2 switch. Here, Alex sends a frame to Claire. The switch inspects the data-link (Ethernet) frame and registers the source MAC address in the MAC address table along with the switch port through which the frame came in. Hence, the switch knows about Alex at this point.

MAC address table MAC

Alex

fa0/0

fa0/1

Claire

Switch

MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f Figure 1-4: Empty MAC address table.

Port

MAC: 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f

fa0/2 John MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2

Book III Chapter 1


2: Switch registers Alex’s MAC address 1: Alex sends frame MAC address table MAC

Port

01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f fa0/0

Alex MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f

fa0/0

fa0/1 Switch fa0/2 John

Figure 1-5: Learning a MAC address.

MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2 Ethernet frame S-MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f D-MAC: 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f

www.it-ebooks.info

Claire MAC: 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f

298


Next, suppose that Claire responds to Alex: Claire sends a frame back to Alex. The switch inspects the data-link (Ethernet) frame and registers the source MAC address in the MAC address table along with the switch port through which the frame came in. Hence, the switch also learns about Claire at this point. Figure 1-6 illustrates the state of the MAC address table when the switch knows about Alex and Claire.

2: Switch registers Claire’s MAC address


1: Claire sends frame

Port

01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f fa0/0 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f fa0/1

fa0/0

Alex

fa0/1 Switch

MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f

fa0/2


John Figure 1-6: Learning another MAC address.

MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2 Ethernet frame S-MAC: 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f D-MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f

Eventually, John will also send a frame into the switch. At that point, the switch would register John’s MAC address along with the switch port where John sent the frame in. Figure 1-7 shows the complete MAC address table that stores the MAC address of each host and the switch port where they connect. This is the state of the MAC address table after each host has sent at least one frame through the switch. The switch keeps the MAC address table in its flash memory as long as the switch is powered on. However, if a host sends no frames for a certain amount of time, its MAC address is removed from the MAC address table to keep the table clean and current.

www.it-ebooks.info


299


Port

01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f fa0/0 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f fa0/1 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2 fa0/2

fa0/0

Alex Figure 1-7: Complete MAC address table.

fa0/1 Switch

MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f

fa0/2


John MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2

Flooding, forwarding, and filtering frames Layer 2 switches need to decide whether to forward frames they receive. They also need to figure out over which outbound port they forward the frame. To do this, switches use the MAC address table:

1. The switch inspects each frame that enters on an inbound port: It looks 2. The switch searches for the destination MAC address of the frame in the MAC address table: • If the switch finds the destination, the switch forwards the frame on the outbound port saved in the MAC address table for that destination MAC address. • If the switch does not find the destination MAC address in its MAC address table, it forwards the frame out on all outbound ports except on the one through which that frame come in.

Flooding a frame Recall from an earlier section that initially, the MAC address table is empty, as shown in Figure 1-4. When Alex sends a frame to Claire, the switch learns about Alex, but it still does not know about Claire at this point. How does the switch know where to send Alex’s frame? It doesn’t. So the switch floods the frame out on all ports except the port through which it came in, that is, the port where Alex connects. Figure 1-8 illustrates this.

www.it-ebooks.info


at the source and destination MAC address of the frame.

Book III Chapter 1

300


2: Switch registers Alex’s MAC address 1: Alex sends frame MAC address table MAC

Port

01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f fa0/0

fa0/0

Alex

fa0/1 Switch

MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f

fa0/2


John MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2 Ethernet frame Figure 1-8: Flooding a frame.

3: Switch does not know Claire’s MAC address, so it floods out the frame.

S-MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f D-MAC: 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f

Forwarding a frame Claire responds to Alex: Claire sends a frame back to Alex. In this case, the switch knows about Alex because it has just registered his MAC address in the MAC address table when Alex sent the initial frame. So, the switch forwards the frame only out on the port where Alex connects. Figure 1-9 illustrates this.

Filtering a frame Assume that the network has been changed, as shown in Figure 1-10. Host Monica was added to the network. Observe that John and Monica are interconnected with a hub, and the hub connects to the switch. Assume that John sends a frame to Monica. First, John’s frame enters the hub. The hub floods the frame out on all ports except the sending port, that is, except the port where John connects. So, the frame goes out to Monica and to the switch. At this point, Monica receives the frame.

www.it-ebooks.info


2: Switch registers Claire’s MAC address


301

1: Claire sends frame

Port

01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f fa0/0 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f fa0/1


fa0/0

fa0/1 Switch fa0/2


John

Figure 1-9: Forwarding a frame.

3: Switch knows Alex’s MAC address and port, so it forwards the frame on that port only.

MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2 Ethernet frame S-MAC: 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f D-MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f

Next, assume that Monica sends a frame back to John. First, Monica’s frame enters the hub. The hub floods it out on all ports except on the sending port, that is, except on Monica’s port. So, the frame goes out to John and to the switch. At this point, John receives the frame. Figure 1-11 illustrates this situation. The switch uses the frame to learn about Monica’s MAC address, and filters the frame. So here it goes. The switch first registers Monica’s MAC address in the MAC address table. Observe that it registers it to the same outgoing switch port as John’s MAC address. This is normal, because from the switch’s perspective, both John and Monica come in on the same port: e0/2. That’s the port where the hub connects.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 1


Now, the switch looks at the destination MAC address and searches it in the MAC address table. It does not find it. Hence, the switch would normally flood the frame out on all ports except on the incoming port, that is, except on e0/2. However, the switch does have MAC addresses registered for ports e0/0 and e0/1 that are different from the destination MAC address (D-MAC) of John’s frame. So, the switch filters the frame because it is not for any of the hosts plugged in to its outgoing ports. Filtering a frame basically means discarding it without sending it out on any ports.

302


3: Switch registers John’s MAC address


Port

4: Switch filters frame since ports fa0/0 and fa0/1 are NOT registered for D-MAC

01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f fa0/0 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f fa0/1 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2 fa0/2

fa0/0

Alex

fa0/1 Switch

MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f

fa0/2

1: John sends frame

Hub


2: Hub floods out of the frame

Monica John

MAC: 1d-cb-3f-fd-f5-5e

MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2

Figure 1-10: Filtering a frame.

Ethernet frame S-MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2 D-MAC: 1d-cb-3f-fd-f5-5e

Next, the switch looks at the source MAC address and at the destination MAC address: They are both connected to the same switch port. Hence, the switch simply discards the frame because there is no point in sending it back to where it came from. In this case, the switch also filters the frame: It does not forward it out on any ports. Basically, the switch assumes that if the sender and the receiver are connected to the same switch port, this is either ✦ A host sending a frame to itself ✦ A host sending a frame to another host connected locally into a hub In both cases, the destination host should have already received the frame, so there is no need to forward it back to the same port.

www.it-ebooks.info


3: Switch registers Monica’s MAC address


2: Hub floods out the frame


Port

01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2 1d-cb-3f-fd-f5-5e

fa0/0 fa0/1 fa0/2 fa0/2

fa0/0

fa0/1 Switch fa0/2

Hub

303

4: Switch filters frame since it came in on port e0/2 and D-MAC is also registered for fa0/2


1: Monica sends frame

Monica John

MAC: 1d-cb-3f-fd-f5-5e Ethernet frame


S-MAC: 1d-cb-3f-fd-f5-5e D-MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2

Avoiding loops Data-link (Ethernet) frames do not expire. An Ethernet frame sent to an unknown MAC address can bounce forever in the network. This is not good because it wastes bandwidth. This problem is exacerbated when several switches are interconnected with redundant links. It is best practice to use redundant links to interconnect Layer 2 switches to mitigate interswitch link failure risks. However, this amplifies the risk to have frames bouncing back and forth between switches. Figure 1-12 shows two switches interconnecting hosts Alex, Claire, John, and Monica. Suppose that the MAC address tables are empty on both switches because none of the hosts has sent any frames yet. Here’s an example:

1. Assume that Alex sends a frame to Claire. Recall from Figure 1-8 that the first time Alex sends a frame to Claire, the switch learns about Alex, but it still does not know about Claire. So, switch S1 needs to flood the frame out on all ports except the port through which it came in, that is, the port where Alex connects to S1.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 1


Figure 1-11: Filtering another frame.

304


S1 MAC address table 1: Alex sends frame to Claire

MAC

Port

01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f fa0/0 01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f fa0/2 01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f fa0/3

fa0/0


fa0/3

fa0/2

fa0/3

fa0/0

Switch SW2

fa0/1

Port

01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f fa0/3 01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f fa0/2

Figure 1-12: Broadcast loop.

Claire

Monica

S2 MAC address table MAC

2: Switch S1 does not know Claire’s MAC address, so it floods out the frame.

MAC: 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f

fa0/2

John MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2

fa0/1 Switch SW1

4: Same as 2

MAC: 1d-cb-3f-fd-f5-5e

3: Switch S2 does not know Claire’s MAC address, so it floods out the frame. 5: Same as 3

2. Switch S1 floods the frame out on all ports except the port through which it came in. The frame reaches switch S2. Switch S2 does not know about Claire either, so it also needs to flood the frame out on all ports except the port through which it came in.

3. Switch S2 floods the frame out on all ports except the port through which it came in. Because two links are connecting the S1 and S2 switches, the frame that came in through fa0/2 on S2 is flooded out on fa0/3, and the frame that came in through fa0/3 on S2 is flooded out on fa0/2. Hence, switch S1 gets the frame back, twice: on fa0/2 and on fa0/3.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Transmitting Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast

307

Filter based on number of devices connected You can set the port to only support a certain maximum number of devices connected using the switchport port-security maximum command.

Filter based on sticky MAC address The most interesting port security option is the sticky option. The sticky option basically allows you to specify that the MAC address of the first device to send through that port will stick to the port. You can even specify how many devices stick to the port. The command is switchport portsecurity mac-address sticky. Next, you specify how many MAC addresses you allow to stick to the port using the switchport portsecurity maximum command. In other words, if you replace with 2 in this command, you have the first two MAC addresses stick to that port. This is a more flexible alternative to filtering on actual MAC addresses.

Action triggered by filter

Before you run any of the switchport commands, you first need to enter the Cisco switch configuration terminal using the configure terminal command. You can also use the short form of this command: config t. Next, you need to select a port to work with using the interface command. Again you can use the short form: int . For example, to work with the first Fast Ethernet interface on your switch, you can run int fastethernet 0/0 or the even shorter form int fa 0/0. Then, you can execute the previous commands. Read more about Cisco commands in Book III, Chapter 2.

Transmitting Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast So far in this chapter, you’ve seen how Layer 2 switches behave during unicast transmissions. A unicast transmission involves one device sending frames to a single target device. Only two devices are involved in unicast transmissions: the sending device and the target device. The device can be a host or a network device, such as a switch or a router.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 1


You can choose what action the switch needs to take should the filter or the limit be broken. You can use the switchport port-security violation command to do this. For example, to have the port shut down upon a policy violation, you can run the switchport portsecurity violation shutdown command.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 2: Managing a Switch Using Cisco IOS Exam Objectives ✓ Connecting to a Cisco switch ✓ Understanding the startup process of a Cisco switch ✓ Configuring a Cisco switch ✓ Managing Cisco switch configurations ✓ Managing Cisco switch authentication

M

anaging a Cisco switch is very similar to managing a Cisco router. Most IOS commands are the same for switches and routers, but the output differs in some cases. Most IOS commands and GUI tools are available for both switches and routers. Some GUI tools are only available for routers, such as the Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) and SDM Express. Other GUI tools are only available for switches, such as the Cisco Device Manager. You find out about switch management IOS commands and GUI tools in this chapter.

Best Practice for Using Cisco Switches When designing networks, the key point to remember is that top-of-the-line switches are best suited for either the core layer or the distribution layer of the network. Entry-level and midrange switches are best suited for either the access layer or the distribution layer. Cisco defines three layers in a network: the core layer, distribution layer, and access layer. Top-of-the-line switches manage specialized services in a network, such as STP root bridge role, VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS), VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) domain control, Inter-VLAN routing, and LAN gateway connectivity. These services are used throughout the network. Hence, they need to run on a highly efficient and highly available switch.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Cisco Switch Startup Process

321

Cisco Switch Startup Process A Cisco switch always follows the same process when it is powered up:

1. Run the POST: The Cisco switch runs the power-on self test. The POST is a microprogram, stored in ROM, that is used to verify basic functionality of the Cisco switch hardware.

2. Boot up: The Cisco switch runs the bootstrap program, also known as the boot loader software. The boot loader is a microprogram, stored in ROM, that is used to bring up the switch and transition it to normal operation mode by loading the Cisco IOS from flash memory. If the boot loader does not find a valid Cisco IOS in flash memory, it tries to load the IOS from either • A TFTP server • ROM On switches, the bootstrap program also initializes the central processing unit (CPU) registers. CPU registers control where physical memory is mapped, how much memory is mapped, memory speed, and a few parameters that are beyond the scope of CCNA.

3. Load the IOS: The Cisco IOS loads into RAM.

If no TFTP server is configured, or if no valid IOS is on the TFTP server, the bootstrap program loads the Rx-boot image from ROM. (The Rx-boot image is a subset of the Cisco IOS operating system.) The Rx-boot image is used to manage the boot process. The Rx-boot image comes up with the (boot)> prompt, where you can run various commands to manage the boot process. For instance, you can manually specify a location from which to load the IOS image.

4. Load the startup configuration. After the Cisco switch loads the IOS in RAM, the IOS loads the device startup configuration from NVRAM. The startup configuration is loaded into RAM and becomes the running configuration, the configuration that changes dynamically while the Cisco device is running. At this point, the Cisco device is in normal operation mode, ready for business.

www.it-ebooks.info

Managing a Switch Using Cisco IOS

By default, the Cisco IOS is loaded from flash memory. However, if the bootstrap program does not find a valid IOS in flash memory, it tries to load it from a TFTP server, if one is configured.

Book III Chapter 2

322


The following IOS CLI segment shows a Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch starting up for the first time. Using driver version 1 for media type 1 Base ethernet MAC Address: [ ... output cut ... ] Xmodem file system is available. The password-recovery mechanism is enabled. Initializing Flash... mifs[2]: 0 files, 1 directories mifs[2]: Total bytes : 3870720 mifs[2]: Bytes used : 1024 mifs[2]: Bytes available : 3869696 mifs[2]: mifs fsck took 0 seconds. mifs[3]: 516 files, 19 directories mifs[3]: Total bytes : 27998208 mifs[3]: Bytes used : 8684544 mifs[3]: Bytes available : 19313664 mifs[3]: mifs fsck took 6 seconds. ...done Initializing Flash. done.

The first part of the preceding example shows output from the bootstrap program. It shows the media driver version being used on the switch and the MAC address of the switch. It also shows that Xmodem connectivity is enabled. The password recovery mechanism is enabled. Finally, the CPU registers are initialized to map flash memory structures. The output of the preceding example starts at the second step in the process (bootup). You do not see the output from the first step of the process (POST) here. The first part of the POST only displays messages upon test failures. Loading “flash:c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY/c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY.bin”...@@@@@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ File “flash:c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY/c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY.bin” uncompressed and installed, entry point: 0x3000 executing...

This part loads the Cisco IOS from flash memory and executes it in RAM. The bootstrap program loads the c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY/c2960lanlite-mz.122-37.EY.bin IOS image located in the flash: memory structure. Restricted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at FAR sec. 52.227-19 and subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS sec. 252.227-7013. Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, California 95134-1706

www.it-ebooks.info


323

Cisco IOS Software, C2960 Software (C2960-LANLITE-M), Version 12.2(37)EY, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc2) Copyright (c) 1986-2007 by Cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Thu 28-Jun-07 18:07 by antonino Image text-base: 0x00003000, data-base: 0x00D00000 Initializing flashfs... Using driver version 1 for media type 1 mifs[3]: 0 files, 1 directories mifs[3]: Total bytes : 3870720 mifs[3]: Bytes used : 1024 mifs[3]: Bytes available : 3869696 mifs[3]: mifs fsck took 0 seconds. mifs[3]: Initialization complete. mifs[4]: mifs[4]: mifs[4]: mifs[4]: mifs[4]: mifs[4]:

516 files, 19 directories Total bytes : 27998208 Bytes used : 8684544 Bytes available : 19313664 mifs fsck took 1 seconds. Initialization complete.

...done Initializing flashfs.

This part shows the name and version of the Cisco IOS. The flash memory file system is initialized. POST: CPU MIC register Tests : Begin POST: CPU MIC register Tests : End, Status Passed POST: PortASIC Memory Tests : Begin POST: PortASIC Memory Tests : End, Status Passed

POST: PortASIC RingLoopback Tests : Begin POST: PortASIC RingLoopback Tests : End, Status Passed POST: PortASIC CAM Subsystem Tests : Begin POST: PortASIC CAM Subsystem Tests : End, Status Passed POST: PortASIC Port Loopback Tests : Begin POST: PortASIC Port Loopback Tests : End, Status Passed Waiting for Port download...Complete cisco WS-C2960-24-S (PowerPC405) processor (revision C0) with 61440K/4088K bytes of memory. Last reset from power-on 1 Virtual Ethernet interface 24 FastEthernet interfaces The password-recovery mechanism is enabled. 64K bytes of flash-simulated non-volatile configuration memory. [ ... Some Serial, Assembly, Revision numbers cut ... ] Model number: WS-C2960-24-S

www.it-ebooks.info


POST: CPU MIC interface Loopback Tests : Begin POST: CPU MIC interface Loopback Tests : End, Status Passed

Book III Chapter 2

324

Configuring a Cisco Switch

[ ... More Serial, Assembly, and Revision numbers cut ... ] Switch -----* 1

Ports ----24

Model ----WS-C2960-24-S

SW Version ---------12.2(37)EY

SW Image ---------C2960-LANLITE-M

Press RETURN to get started!

This part shows the results of the second part of the POST and lists information about hardware components of this switch. This is a 24-port switch. All ports are compliant to the Fast Ethernet standard. The maximum bandwidth supported by Fast Ethernet is 100 Mbps. This switch has 64K in nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM). [ ... Some status messages cut ... ] Cisco IOS Software, C2960 Software (C2960-LANLITE-M), Version 12.2(37)EY, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc2) Copyright (c) 1986-2007 by Cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Thu 28-Jun-07 18:07 by antonino Would you like to terminate autoinstall? [yes]: yes --- System Configuration Dialog --Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes/no]: no Switch>

This part shows the final stage of the boot process (load startup configuration). Because this is a new switch, no startup configuration exists. The IOS asks whether you would like to enter the initial configuration dialog. This dialog allows you to quickly configure the switch as follows: ✦ IP address ✦ Default gateway (router) ✦ Subnet mask ✦ Console password ✦ Host name ✦ Telnet password

Configuring a Cisco Switch Cisco switches ship with several items: ✦ Console rollover cable: This is the cable you need to connect to the console port on the switch. ✦ AC power cord.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

326


You should verify the switch and create a startup configuration before you start using the switch, even if you use the switch only to interconnect computer hosts locally in an isolated network comprised of the switch itself and some computer hosts. If you ever decide to expand this small network by adding another switch and more computer hosts, or if you decide to connect this small network to a gateway to reach the Internet, you definitely need a startup configuration in NVRAM. You can create a startup configuration using one of the following methods: ✦ Filling in the Express Setup Web form ✦ Using the switch Autoinstall feature ✦ Using the initial configuration dialog ✦ Using the Cisco IOS setup mode commands

Express Setup mode Cisco provides a utility, named Express Setup, that allows you to initially configure the switch. You run Express Setup when you power on the switch the first time to configure the following settings on the switch: ✦ IP address ✦ Default gateway (router) ✦ Subnet mask ✦ Console password ✦ Host name ✦ Telnet password To set the switch in Express Setup mode, press and hold the Mode button for 3 seconds. Release the button when all LEDs are green. Next, browse to the IP address of the switch. This loads the Express Setup form, as illustrated in Figure 2-9.

Initializing the switch using the initial configuration dialog The CCNA test expects you to know how to initialize the switch using the Cisco IOS setup mode.

www.it-ebooks.info


327

Figure 2-9: Cisco Catalyst 2960 Express Setup Web form.

The first time you power on a Cisco switch, it has no startup configuration in NVRAM. You can connect to the console of the switch to get access to the IOS prompt. The switch will be in setup mode, because no startup configuration exists. In setup mode, the IOS asks you to configure the following: ✦ IP address ✦ Default gateway (router) ✦ Subnet mask ✦ Host name ✦ Telnet password If choose not to configure the switch and use it without a startup configuration, you can avoid or abort setup mode using one the following methods: ✦ Exit setup mode by pressing Ctrl+C. ✦ Answer no when setup mode asks whether you want to configure the switch. ✦ Answer no when setup mode asks whether you want to save the configuration at the end of the series of setup questions. You should verify the switch and create a startup configuration before you start using the switch, even if you use the switch only to interconnect computer hosts locally in an isolated network comprised of the switch itself and some computer hosts.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ Enable and Enable secret password

Book III Chapter 2

328


Here is an example of the initial setup mode dialog: Using driver version 1 for media type 1 Base ethernet MAC Address: 00:25:b4:10:58:80 Xmodem file system is available. The password-recovery mechanism is enabled. [ ... some boot messages cut ... ] Loading “flash:c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY/c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY.bin”...@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@File “flash:c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY/c2960lanlite-mz.122-37.EY.bin” uncompressed and installed, entry point: 0x3000 executing... Restricted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at FAR sec. 52.227-19 and subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS sec. 252.227-7013. Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, California 95134-1706 Cisco IOS Software, C2960 Software (C2960-LANLITE-M), Version 12.2(37)EY, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc2) Copyright (c) 1986-2007 by Cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Thu 28-Jun-07 18:07 by antonino Image text-base: 0x00003000, data-base: 0x00D00000 [ ... some boot messages cut ... ] Press RETURN to get started! [ ... some boot messages cut ... ]

The first part of the output, shown in the preceding example, displays various boot messages. The switch is now up and running. Because no startup configuration exists in NVRAM, the IOS first asks whether you would like to let the switch run the Autoinstall feature to automatically configure the switch with a baseline configuration: ✦ If you answer yes to this question, or if you just press Enter to keep the default answer, the switch automatically configures itself with a baseline configuration to allow minimum functionality. After the autoinstall process completes, your switch is operational. ✦ If you answer no to the autoinstall question, the IOS next asks whether you want to run the initial configuration dialog. You type yes as follows to run the initial configuration dialog.

www.it-ebooks.info


329

Would you like to terminate autoinstall? [yes]: no --- System Configuration Dialog --Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes/no]: yes At any point you may enter a question mark ‘?’ for help. Use ctrl-c to abort configuration dialog at any prompt. Default settings are in square brackets ‘[]’. Basic management setup configures only enough connectivity for management of the system, extended setup will ask you to configure each interface on the system Would you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]: yes Configuring global parameters: Enter host name [Switch]: SW1 The enable secret is a password used to protect access to privileged EXEC and configuration modes. This password, after entered, becomes encrypted in the configuration. Enter enable secret: my_priv_encrypt_password The enable password is used when you do not specify an enable secret password, with some older software versions, and some boot images. Enter enable password: my_priv_password The virtual terminal password is used to protect access to the router over a network interface. Enter virtual terminal password: my_telnet_password Configure SNMP Network Management? [no]:

✦ Name the switch SW1. ✦ Set the encrypted privileged mode password to my_priv_encrypt_ password. ✦ Set the unencrypted privileged mode password to my_priv_password. ✦ Set the VTY access line password to my_telnet_password. The next section of the initial configuration dialog, shown in the following example, displays a summary of the Ethernet interfaces (ports) available on your switch. Current interface summary Any interface listed with OK? value “NO” does not have a valid configuration Interface Vlan1 FastEthernet0/1 FastEthernet0/2

IP-Address unassigned unassigned unassigned

OK? YES YES YES

Method unset unset unset

Status down down down

www.it-ebooks.info

Protocol down down down


The second part of the output, shown in the preceding example, prompts you to set a host name and passwords on your switch. In this example

Book III Chapter 2

www.it-ebooks.info


331

interface FastEthernet0/22 ! interface FastEthernet0/23 ! interface FastEthernet0/24 ! end

The last section of the initial configuration dialog, shown in the following example, prompts you to do one of the following: ✦ Save the configuration you just created to NVRAM. ✦ Return to the setup without saving the configuration you just created. ✦ Go straight to the IOS prompt without saving the configuration you just created. You choose “2” to save the configuration you just created to NVRAM. This configuration becomes the startup configuration. [0] Go to the IOS command prompt without saving this config. [1] Return back to the setup without saving this config. [2] Save this configuration to nvram and exit. Enter your selection [2]: Building configuration... [OK] Use the enabled mode ‘configure’ command to modify this configuration.

Initializing the switch using Cisco IOS setup mode commands You can configure the switch settings manually using Cisco IOS setup mode commands at any time. The following sections show you a few basic Cisco IOS configuration commands that you can use at any time to configure your Cisco device.

Naming the switch You can name your switch using the hostname Cisco IOS command. You should name all your switches using meaningful names to ease identification and management of each switch. To configure the host name of the switch, run the following commands: Switch>enable (or en) Switch#configure terminal (or config t) Switch(config)#hostname SW1 SW1(config)#exit SW1#disable SW1>

www.it-ebooks.info


SW1>

Book III Chapter 2

332


Configuring management IP address for the switch You can configure an IP address and an IP gateway for your switch using the ip address and ip default-gateway Cisco IOS commands. This allows you to connect to the switch from remote locations using either Telnet or HTTP. To configure the management IP address and default gateway on your switch, run the following commands: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#interface vlan1 (or int vlan1) SW1(config-if)#ip address 192.168.75.10 255.255.255.0 SW1(config-if)#no shutdown SW1(config-if)#exit SW1(config)#ip default-gateway 192.168.75.1 SW1(config)#exit SW1#disable SW1>

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global switch settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole switch. The interface vlan1 command selects an interface to work with. In this example, you select vlan1. Cisco switches support several virtual LANs (VLANs). They are numbered from 1 to 4094. The first VLAN, VLAN 1, is reserved for switch management. It is called the management (or administrative) VLAN. This is the VLAN on which you want to set the management IP address and the management default IP gateway. The ip address 192.168.75.10 255.255.255.0 command sets the IP address and the subnet mask on the interface that you selected previously. Observe that the IOS prompt now shows SW1(config-if)#. Config-if means that you are configuring an interface (if) right now. The no shutdown command starts up the VLAN 1 interface. Recall that you enable components and services on a Cisco switch using the component or service name. You disable components and services on a Cisco switch using the component or service name prefixed with the no keyword. Here, shutdown is actually a state, not a component or service. An interface is either shut down or not shut down (started up). To summarize: ✦ To shut down an interface, select it and execute shutdown. ✦ To start an interface, select it and execute no shutdown. The ip default-gateway 192.168.75.1 command sets the default gateway for the switch. Observe that you first exit from the interface configuration mode (SW1(config-if)# exit) because the default gate-

www.it-ebooks.info


333

way applies to the whole switch, not just to an interface. Now, you are back in global configuration mode (SW1(config)#). The Cisco IOS prompt is designed to show you the configuration mode that you’re in: ✦ (config): You are in global configuration mode. In this mode, you can execute commands that configure global switch settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole switch. ✦ (config-if): You are in interface configuration mode. In this mode, you can execute commands that configure switch interface settings, that is, settings that apply to just one interface of the switch. You select the interface to work with using the interface command. ✦ (config-if-range): You are in interface range configuration mode. In this mode, you can execute commands that configure a range of switch interfaces, that is, settings that apply to a range of interfaces on the switch. You select the range of interfaces to work with using the interface range command.

Configuring passwords

You can configure several passwords for different types of access: ✦ Console password: Used for console access through the console port or through a Console Terminal Server. ✦ Auxiliary password: Used for console access through the auxiliary port using a modem. ✦ VTY lines password: Virtual type terminal (VTY) lines are used for Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH) access. They are called virtual type terminal (VTY) lines because no physical terminal is connected to the switch. You connect a computer host to the network and access the switch remotely using the switch management IP address. A terminal emulation program on the computer host emulates a physical terminal (TTY). ✦ Privileged password: Used for privileged mode access. Privileged mode is an “expert” management operation mode used to run some Cisco IOS commands. The console port and the auxiliary port are enabled by default, even if no password is specified for them. This is a security risk. It is best practice to specify at least a console password on new Cisco devices.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 2


You can configure authentication passwords for your switch using the password and login Cisco IOS commands. By default, new Cisco devices do not have a password configured.

334


The VTY lines (Telnet and Secure Shell) are disabled by default. You need to specify a password for the VTY lines to enable them. To configure passwords, you need to instruct the Cisco device to prompt for authentication. You use the login Cisco IOS command to do this.

Best practice At a minimum, you should set passwords for console and VTY access to secure access through the console port and to enable and secure remote access through Telnet or SSH. The following sections describe how to configure passwords for console and VTY access using Cisco IOS commands.

Console password To configure the console password, run the following commands: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#line console 0 (or line con 0) SW1(config-line)#password my_password SW1(config-line)#login SW1(config-line)#exit SW1(config)#exit SW1#disable SW1>

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global switch settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole switch. The line console 0 command selects the console line. Cisco devices have only one console line: console 0. The password my_password command sets the my_password password on the console access line. Finally, you instruct the Cisco device to prompt for authentication by entering the login Cisco IOS command. From now on, anytime you connect to the console line, you will be prompted to provide a password. The password you provide must be my_password. To disable the authentication prompt, issue line console 0 again and enter the no login command. You use the exit commands to exit the config-line mode and to exit the (config) global configuration mode.

www.it-ebooks.info


335

Telnet password To configure a password for the VTY lines, run the following commands: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#line vty 0 ? <0-15> last line number SW1(config-line)#line vty 0-15 SW1(config-line)#password my__telnet_password SW1(config-line)#login SW1(config-line)#exit SW1(config)#exit SW1#disable SW1>

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global switch settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole switch. The line vty 0 ? command asks the Cisco IOS how many VTY lines are available. The response (<0-15> last line number) shows that 16 VTY lines are available on this particular switch (you can have 16 simultaneous Telnet sessions opened to this switch). Now, you can configure a password either on one of the VTY lines (by selecting that particular line) or on all VTY lines (by selecting the whole 0–15 line range).

You have two main reasons to have several VTY access lines on a Cisco device: ✦ Allowing you to connect to the switch and connect to another device from the switch: Two VTY lines are needed in this case: one line to connect into the switch and another line to connect out of the switch to another device. ✦ Allowing several administrators to work on the switch: In large networks, more than one administrator may manage the network. More than one administrator may need to connect from a remote location to the same switch using Telnet or SSH. This is typical with large core switches. The password my_telnet_password command sets the my_telnet_ password password on the VTY access lines. You can set a different password on each line. However, this is not recommended. You don’t know which VTY line you are on when you log in, so you wouldn’t know which password to enter. Best practice is to select the whole range of VTY lines and set the same password on all of them.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 2


The line vty 0-15 command selects the whole 0–15 VTY line range. Cisco devices have several VTY access lines. Older switches used to have only four VTY lines. Newer switches have as many as 1,180 VTY lines. It is best practice to query the Cisco IOS about how many VTY lines are available.

336


Finally, you instruct the Cisco device to prompt for authentication by entering the login Cisco IOS command. From now on, anytime you connect to any of the VTY lines, you will be prompted to provide a password. The password you provide must be my_telnet_password. To disable the authentication prompt, issue line vty 0-15 again and enter the no login command. After you run the initial setup IOS commands, the switch has a startup configuration saved in NVRAM. The switch is reachable on the IP network. You can now connect to the switch either locally to its console or auxiliary port, or remotely to its IP address, as explained previously in the “Connecting to a Cisco Switch” section.

Configuring banners You can configure a banner for your switch using the banner Cisco IOS command. The purpose of a banner is to display a brief message about the switch when you log in. This is useful when you have many switches spread out across multiple sites. It helps identifying the switch you log in to and its configuration and usage guidelines. Banners are also useful for legal reasons: You can add a security warning in the banner message to warn users against unauthorized logins to the switch. Although this does not prevent the user from logging in to the switch, it does provide grounds for legal action in the case of unauthorized logins. Always use passwords to secure your switches. Four types of banners are available: ✦ Message of the day (MOTD) banner: This is the first banner to display when a user connects to a switch, regardless of the type of connection. This banner is used to display a message for all users connecting to the switch, before they log in. This is typically used for an unauthorized access warning. ✦ Login banner: This banner is displayed on TTY or VTY terminals after the MOTD banner. This banner is typically used to display information about the switch and to provide guidelines on how to log in and use the switch. ✦ Incoming terminal connection banner: This banner is displayed on reverse TTY or VTY terminals after the MOTD banner. This banner is used for the same reasons as the login banner. The only difference is the type of terminal connection: You can specify additional information in this banner for users connecting with reverse TTY or VTY terminals.

www.it-ebooks.info


337

✦ EXEC process creation banner: This banner is displayed whenever an EXEC process is created, after the user is logged in. An EXEC process is created for each user EXEC prompt. User EXEC prompts are established for each user connected to the switch, after they log in successfully. Hence, the EXEC process creation banner is displayed after the login/incoming banners, and after the MOTD banner. To configure an MOTD banner on your switch, run the following commands: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (config t) SW1(config)#banner motd Enter TEXT message. End with character ‘-’. $This switch is property of silange.com networks. Unauthorized access is prohibited. Please disconnect if you are not a silange.com employee, customer, or business partner. SW1(config)#

Resetting a Cisco switch Express Setup and IOS setup mode run whenever no startup configuration exists in NVRAM. In other words, the switch reverts to setup mode anytime no startup configuration exists in NVRAM. Normally, this only happens when the switch is new and not yet configured. However, you may want to clear the current configuration in NVRAM and start a new configuration from scratch. This is typically a last-resort troubleshooting method: When problems affect the switch and no troubleshooting method fixes the problems, your last resort is to reset the switch and reconfigure it. If you need to run Express Setup or the IOS setup again, you need to reset the switch. Resetting the switch clears the configuration of the switch. After it is reset, the switch is in the state it was when you purchased it: ✦ No IP address ✦ No host name

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 2


The banner motd - command starts the banner text editor using ‘-’ as the delimiting character. The delimiting character is used by the IOS to determine when you are done typing the banner text. You enter the banner text of your choice and end by typing the delimiting character (‘-’ in this case) and pressing Enter. The delimiting character can be any character, but it is important to understand that you cannot use that character within the text of the banner. Cisco IOS would interpret that as the end of the banner text.

338

Configuring a Cisco Switch ✦ No default gateway (router) ✦ No subnet mask ✦ No console password ✦ No Telnet password ✦ No startup configuration You should back up the startup configuration of a switch to a backup computer host before resetting the switch. You learn how to backup the startup configuration file to a backup computer host in the “Managing Cisco Switch Configuration” section in this chapter. To reset the switch and clear its startup configuration from NVRAM using the Mode button, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the Mode button. The switch LEDs begin blinking after a few seconds.

2. Continue to hold the Mode button. The LEDs stop blinking after about 7 seconds. The switch reboots.

3. Release the Mode button after the LEDs stop blinking and the switch starts rebooting. The switch comes back up in setup mode without a startup configuration in NVRAM.

Managing Cisco switch configuration Ongoing, you can manage your switch using the following: ✦ Cisco IOS commands ✦ The Cisco Device Manager Web tool ✦ The Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) tool The Cisco Device Manager and the Cisco Network Assistant are two graphical user interface (GUI)–based tools that allow you to manage your switch and its startup and running configurations from a remote location using a computer host. Their GUI is much easier to use and more intuitive than Cisco IOS commands. You find out about Cisco IOS switch configuration management commands in the following sections.

Managing the switch boot process Cisco switches always follow the same boot process when they are powered up. This process involves four stages:

www.it-ebooks.info


339

1. Run the POST: The Cisco switch runs the power-on self test to verify basic functionality of the Cisco switch hardware.

2. Boot up: The Cisco switch runs the bootstrap program to bring up the switch and transition it to normal operation mode by loading up the first Cisco IOS image from flash memory.

3. Load the IOS: The Cisco IOS loads into RAM from flash memory. 4. Load the startup configuration: After the Cisco switch loads the IOS in RAM, the IOS loads the device startup configuration from NVRAM. The startup configuration is loaded into RAM and becomes the running configuration, the configuration that changes dynamically while the Cisco device is running. At this point, the Cisco device is in normal operation mode, ready for business. This process is also called the automatic boot process. The switch automatically boots up with current options and loads the startup configuration.

Boot command

The boot command allows you to configure the boot process of a Cisco switch. You can do the following: ✦ Control which Cisco IOS image file is loaded ✦ Control which startup configuration file is loaded ✦ Enable Ctrl+Break during booting ✦ Enable manual booting ✦ Change the size of the NVRAM area that is formatted in Cisco IFS format You can use the Cisco IOS contextual help to see the options available with the boot command: SW1> SW1>enable (or en) Password: my_priv_encrypt_password SW1#configure terminal (or config t, or conf t) SW1(config)# SW1(config)#boot ? boothlpr Boot Helper System Image buffersize Specify the size for filesystem-simulated NVRAM

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 2


By default, the Cisco bootstrap program loads the first Cisco IOS image file from flash memory when the switch is powered up. In some cases, you may need to boot a specific IOS image file from flash memory. For example, suppose that you download a new Cisco IOS image file that contains additional features, but you would like to test it on your switch before you remove the original IOS image file. You can configure the switch to boot with the new IOS image file using the boot command.

340


config-file enable-break helper helper-config-file manual private-config-file system SW1(config)#exit SW1#disable SW1>

Configuration File Enable Break while booting Helper Image(s) Helper Configuration File Manual Boot Private Configuration File System Image

Observe that you need to be in privileged global configuration mode to execute the boot command. The boothlpr option is beyond the scope of the CCNA test. The buffersize option allows you to specify the size of the NVRAM buffer (memory area) that is formatted in Cisco IOS File System (IFS). You may need to increase the size of the IFS buffer if you need to store additional Cisco IOS images in flash memory. The config-file option allows you to specify which configuration file is loaded during the boot process. This is useful when you need to test alternate configurations stored in different startup configuration files. The enable-break option enables the Ctrl+Break key-combination option during the boot process. This allows you to interrupt the startup of the switch by pressing Ctrl+Break. The helper and helper-config-file options are beyond the scope of the CCNA test. The manual option enables manual booting. This allows you to boot the switch manually: The automatic boot process interrupts and displays the switch: manual boot prompt. You can manually boot the switch from the switch: manual boot prompt, controlling which IOS image is loaded and which configuration file is loaded. You can also use the switch: manual boot prompt to troubleshoot startup problems on your switch. The private-config-file option allows you to specify which private configuration file is loaded during the boot process. This is useful when you need to test alternate private configurations stored in different startup configuration files. Private configuration files are used to store secured configuration data such as cryptographic encryption keys used for SSH. The system option allows you to boot a specific Cisco IOS image file. This is useful in cases when, for example, you download a new Cisco IOS image file, containing additional features, and you would like to test it on your switch.

www.it-ebooks.info


341

Here is an example in which you set your switch to boot with a specific Cisco IOS image file stored in flash memory: SW1> SW1>enable (or en) Password:my_priv_encrypt_password SW1#configure terminal (or config t, or conf t) SW1(config)# SW1(config)#boot system flash:/c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY SW1(config)#exit SW1#disable SW1>

Observe that you need to be in privileged global configuration mode to execute the boot command. You can use the show boot command to verify the current boot options on a switch:

Observe that you need to be in privileged EXEC mode to execute the show boot command. This command shows the current boot options. All options can be changed with the corresponding boot command, as explained earlier. After you change a boot option, you need to reboot your switch using the reload command in privileged EXEC mode.

Interrupting the boot process In some cases, you may need to interrupt the automatic boot process to control some of the boot options. For example, you may have lost or forgotten the passwords on your switch. In this case, you do not want to boot the switch automatically, because you will be locked out of the switch by a password you do not have or do not remember. You need to break out of the boot process to reset the password.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 2


SW1> SW1>enable (or en) Password: my_priv_encrypt_password SW1#show boot BOOT path-list : flash:/c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY Config file : flash:/config.text Private Config file : flash:/private-config.text Enable Break : no Manual Boot : no HELPER path-list : Auto upgrade : yes Auto upgrade path : NVRAM/Config file buffer size: 65536 SW1#disable SW1>

342


You have three methods of interrupting the boot process on a Cisco switch: ✦ Press the Mode button during the boot process. This is the simplest and default method to interrupt the boot process of a Cisco switch. ✦ Change the boot process from automatic to manual and reboot the switch. ✦ Enable the boot break option, reboot the switch, and press Ctrl+Break during the boot process.

Interrupting the boot process with the Mode button Follow these steps to interrupt the boot process of a Cisco switch using the Mode button on the front panel of the switch:

1. Reboot the switch using the reload command in privileged EXEC mode. 2. Press the Mode button while the System LED (SYST) is flashing green within the first 15 seconds of the switch boot process.

3. Continue to press the Mode button until the System LED (SYST) flashes briefly amber and then turns solid green.

4. Release the Mode button when the System LED (SYST) becomes solid green.

Interrupting the boot process by enabling the manual boot option Follow these steps to interrupt the boot process of a Cisco switch using the manual boot option:

1. Enable the manual boot option. 2. Reboot the switch using the reload command in privileged EXEC mode. You have the following options to control the manual boot option on a Cisco switch: ✦ To enable the manual boot option, run boot manual at the privileged global configuration prompt. ✦ To disable the manual boot option, run no boot manual at the privileged global configuration prompt. The manual boot option is off by default. The switch boots up automatically without showing the switch: manual boot prompt. Here is an example of how you enable manual boot: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) Enter configuration commands, one per line. SW1(config)#boot manual

www.it-ebooks.info

End with CNTL/Z.


SW1(config)# SW1(config)#do show BOOT path-list EY.bin Config file Private Config file Enable Break Manual Boot HELPER path-list Auto upgrade Auto upgrade path NVRAM/Config file buffer size:

343

boot (or do sh boot) : flash:c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY/c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37. : : : : : : :

flash:/config.text flash:/private-config.text no yes yes

65536

SW1(config)#exit SW1#reload System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n Proceed with reload? [confirm] 00:20:51: %SYS-5-RELOAD: Reload requested by console. Reload Reason: Reload command. [... reboot output cut ...] The system is not configured to boot automatically. The following command will finish loading the operating system software: boot

Book III Chapter 2

switch:

Next, enable the manual boot process using the boot manual IOS command. Then, look at the current boot options using the show boot command. Observe that you use the do prefix because the show command does not run in configuration mode; you need to run it at the privileged EXEC prompt. Recall that the “do” Cisco IOS prefix allows you to run nonconfiguration commands in configuration mode. Think of the “do” Cisco IOS prefix as an override option that allows you to momentarily exit configuration mode, run the command that follows the “do” prefix and come back into configuration mode. Note that the manual boot option is enabled now (Manual Boot: yes). The next few commands reboot the switch. After the switch comes back up again, the bootstrap program interrupts the boot process and waits for commands at the switch: manual boot prompt.

www.it-ebooks.info


The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global router settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole router.

344


Interrupting the boot process with Ctrl+Break Follow these steps to interrupt the boot process of a Cisco switch using the Ctrl+Break key combination:

1. Enable the boot process break option. 2. Reboot the switch using the reload command in privileged EXEC mode.

3. Press Ctrl and Break simultaneously while the System LED (SYST) is flashing green within the first 15 seconds of the switch boot process. The following options allow you to control the boot process break option on a Cisco switch: ✦ To enable the boot process break option, run boot enable-break at the privileged global configuration prompt. ✦ To disable the boot process break option, run no boot enable-break at the privileged global configuration prompt. The boot process break option is disabled by default. Here is an example of how you enable the boot process break option: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. SW1(config)#boot enable-break SW1(config)# SW1(config)#do show boot (or do sh boot) BOOT path-list : flash:c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY/c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37. EY.bin Config file : flash:/config.text Private Config file : flash:/private-config.text Enable Break : yes Manual Boot : no HELPER path-list : Auto upgrade : yes Auto upgrade path : NVRAM/Config file buffer size: 65536 SW1(config)#exit SW1#reload System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n Proceed with reload? [confirm] 00:20:51: %SYS-5-RELOAD: Reload requested by console. Reload Reason: Reload command. [... reboot output cut ...] [... Press CTRL-BREAK simultaneously ...]

www.it-ebooks.info


345

The system boot process was interrupted. The following command will finish loading the operating system software: boot switch:

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global router settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole router. Next, enable the boot process break option using the boot enable-break IOS command. Then, look at the current boot options using the show boot command. Note that the enable break option is on now. The next few commands reboot the switch. After the switch comes back up again, press Ctrl and Break simultaneously to interrupt the boot process. After it is interrupted, the bootstrap program waits for commands at the switch: manual boot prompt.

Introducing the switch manual boot prompt No matter how you interrupt the boot process, you end up at the switch: manual boot prompt. The manual boot prompt allows you to control the boot process of the switch.

The IOS has not yet loaded the startup configuration at this point. In fact, the bootstrap program has not even loaded the IOS at this point.

Managing configurations Two configurations are available on any Cisco switch: the startup configuration and the running configuration. The following sections review the characteristics of startup and running configurations and describe how to manage them on a Cisco switch.

Startup configuration The startup configuration is the configuration that the Cisco IOS loads when it boots up. The startup configuration is stored in NVRAM, which keeps its contents even when the Cisco device is powered down.

www.it-ebooks.info


The bootstrap program displays a message informing you that you can enter the boot command to continue booting up the switch. You can use the help command (?) at the switch: boot prompt to see the manual boot commands and options available.

Book III Chapter 2

346


Whenever no startup configuration exists in NVRAM, the switch starts in setup mode to allow you to create a startup configuration. After you complete the setup mode, you are prompted to save the configuration to NVRAM. If you answer yes, the configuration you created is saved to NVRAM; it becomes the startup configuration. You can also manually save the current configuration to NVRAM by using the copy running-config startup-config Cisco IOS command. Cisco devices use the startup configuration data to configure the device before normal operation starts. The Cisco IOS loads the startup configuration from NVRAM into RAM. At that point, the startup configuration becomes the running configuration. The switch is up and ready in normal operation mode.

Running configuration The running configuration is the dynamic data that changes while the Cisco device is in normal operation mode. This includes the following: ✦ ARP cache (MAC address tables) ✦ Routing tables ✦ STP data ✦ VLAN data ✦ EtherChannel configuration data ✦ Temporary buffers The Cisco IOS loads the startup configuration from NVRAM into RAM during the boot process. After it is in RAM, the startup configuration becomes the running configuration and can change dynamically. You can save the running configuration to NVRAM to replace the startup configuration with updated data. To do this, use the copy runningconfig startup-config Cisco IOS command. You can also save the running configuration to a file on a computer host.

Saving the running configuration to NVRAM To save the running configuration to NVRAM, run the following commands: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#copy running-config startup-config (or copy run start) Destination filename [startup-config]? Building configuration… [OK] SW1#

The first line shows the copy command. You can also use the short form of this command (copy run start).

www.it-ebooks.info


347

The second line asks where you want to copy the running configuration to. You have several possible destinations: ✦ startup-config: Use this keyword to copy the current running configuration over the startup configuration in NVRAM. ✦ flash: Use this keyword to copy the current running configuration to a file in flash memory, alongside the Cisco IOS. ✦ ftp: Use this keyword to copy the current running configuration to an FTP server. This option is useful for backing up the switch configuration to a remote computer host. ✦ archive: This is similar to the ftp option, except that you archive to a tape- or disk-based backup system directly, instead of passing through a computer host. Many more possible copy destinations exist. You can use the Cisco IOS contextual help system to find out more about the other possible copy destinations by running the following command: SW1#copy running-config ? (or copy run ?)

The ? sign instructs the Cisco IOS to show you all the possible values that you can provide for the second argument of the copy command.

Monitoring the running configuration To monitor the running configuration, run the following command: SW1#show running-config (or sh run)

Monitoring the startup configuration To monitor the startup configuration, run the following command: SW1#show startup-config (or sh start)

Deleting the startup configuration Resetting the switch erases the startup configuration from NVRAM and reboots the switch. Upon reboot, the switch starts in setup mode because no startup configuration exists in NVRAM. This allows you to clear the current configuration in NVRAM and build a new configuration from scratch.

www.it-ebooks.info


The default destination is the startup-config file in NVRAM. To keep the default answer, just press Enter. Sometimes the Cisco IOS prompts you to enter a value, and it shows the default answer in between brackets [ ]. To keep the default answer, just press Enter.

Book III Chapter 2

348


This is typically a last-resort troubleshooting method: When problems affect the switch and no troubleshooting method fixes the problems, your last resort is to reset the switch and reconfigure it. You can also reset the switch using the erase startup-config Cisco IOS command. You should back up the startup configuration to a backup computer host before deleting it. You find out how to back up the configuration to a backup computer host later in this chapter. To delete the startup configuration, run the following commands: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#erase startup-config Erasing the nvram filesystem removes all configuration files! Continue? [confirm] [OK] Erase of nvram: complete SW1#

Observe that the erase command warns you that the NVRAM contents will be reinitialized and prompts you to confirm. The default answer is confirm. To confirm, just press Enter.

Switch configuration backup and recovery best practice It is best practice to save the running configuration to both ✦ The startup configuration file in NVRAM on the switch itself ✦ A computer host This protects you against a total failure of the switch. If the switch fails and you need to replace it with a new one, you don’t want to have to re-create the startup configuration from scratch. If you have that configuration saved on a computer host, you can load the startup configuration from the computer host onto the new switch; you’re now ready to go in production with the new switch.

Back up the switch running configuration to a computer host To back up the running configuration to a computer host, run the following commands: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#copy running-config tftp (or copy run tftp) Address or name of remote host []? 192.168.75.5 Destination filename [SW1-config]? 812 bytes copied in 0.910 secs (892 bytes/sec) SW1#

www.it-ebooks.info


349

The copy running-config tftp Cisco IOS command on the second line initiates copying the switch running configuration to a TFTP server. The third line prompts you for the IP address or host name of the remote host destination. Observe that, in this example, the IOS does not suggest any destination IP address or hostname “[]”. You can configure a default TFTP server on your switch. The IP address or hostname of that default TFTP server will then show up suggested between the square brackets. The fourth line prompts you for the filename of the configuration file to be saved on the remote host. The switch name followed by -config is suggested by default. Simply press Enter to accept the suggested filename. Now your running configuration is saved in a file named SW1-config on the remote computer host with IP address 192.168.75.5.

Recover a switch configuration from a computer host Suppose that you need to load a configuration from a remote host to your switch. The same copy Cisco IOS command allows you to recover a configuration from a remote host:

The copy tftp running-config Cisco IOS command on the second line copies the switch running configuration from a TFTP server. The third line prompts you for the IP address or host name of the remote host destination. Observe that, in this example, the IOS does not suggest any source IP address or hostname “[]”. You can configure a default TFTP server on your switch. The IP address or hostname of that default TFTP server will then show up suggested between the square brackets. The fourth line prompts you for the source filename of the configuration file that you want to load from the remote host. Enter the name of a configuration file that you saved previously on the TFTP server. In this example, you enter the name of the configuration that you just copied to the TFTP server in the previous example (“SW1-config”). The fifth line prompts you for the destination filename. The runningconfig filename is suggested. This means that the configuration you load

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 2


SW1>enable (or en) SW1#copy tftp running-config (or copy tftp run) Address or name of remote host []? 192.168.75.5 Source filename []? SW1-config Destination filename [running-config]? Accessing tftp://192.168.75.5/SW1-config... Loading SW1-config from 192.168.75.5 [OK - 812 bytes] 812 bytes copied in 10.120 secs (80 bytes/sec) SW1#

350


from the TFTP server will replace the current running configuration. Press Enter to accept the suggested choice. Next, the copy command displays a few status messages. At this point, your running configuration has been loaded from a file named SW1-config from a remote TFTP server host with IP address 192.168.75.5.

Managing switch configurations using Cisco IOS File System (IFS) You saw in the previous two sections how to back up a switch configuration to a file on a computer host and how to restore a switch configuration from a backup file on a computer host. You used the copy Cisco IOS command to do this. This section shows you a new trick: how to manage the memory of a Cisco switch using Cisco IOS File System (IFS) commands. You can manage the memory of a Cisco switch like a file system on a computer host. The Cisco IFS presents the memory of a Cisco switch as directories (or folders) and files within those directories, just like Microsoft Windows, Apple Mac OS X, Linux, or any other computer operating system presents the hard drive of a computer host as directories (or folders) and files. The Cisco IFS commands are only available in privileged mode. So, you need to run the enable command first (or en in its short form). First, verify the current directory: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#pwd flash:

You are currently in the flash memory main directory, as shown by the pwd command. Next, run the Cisco IFS command dir to see the contents of flash memory on your switch: SW1#dir Directory of flash:/ 1 -rw- 15572992 c2960-ik9o3s3-mz.123-1a.bin 16777216 bytes total (1204160 bytes free)

This shows that the flash memory on your switch contains a single Cisco IOS image named c2960-ik9o3s3-mz.123-1a.bin. So, what other directories and files exist on your switch? You can easily find that using the dir all-filesystems Cisco IFS command: SW1#dir all-filesystems Directory of nvram:/ 27 28

-rw----

0 0

startup-config private-config

www.it-ebooks.info


351

29688 bytes total (29636 bytes free) Directory of system:/ 10 2 1 9

drwx dr-x -rwdr-x

0 0 582 0

date> date> date> date>

its memory running-config vfiles

No space information available Directory of flash:/ 1

-rw-

15572992

c2600-ik9o3s3-mz.123-1a.bin

16777216 bytes total (1204160 bytes free)

Observe that you have three main directories (file systems) on your Cisco switch: ✦ nvram: Stores the startup-config and private-config files. ✦ system: This is the RAM, which contains the running-config file. ✦ flash: This is the flash memory, which contains the Cisco IOS operating system image. This is the Cisco IOS image that the bootstrap program loads in RAM when the switch boots up.

For example, issue the following command to list the contents of NVRAM: SW1#dir nvram: Directory of nvram:/ 27 -rw- 0 startup-config 28 ---- 0 private-config 29688 bytes total (29636 bytes free)

Now, change the directory to the RAM directory (system) and look at the files and directories available there: SW1#cd system: SW1#dir Directory of system:/ 10 drwx 0


Observe the running-config file. This is the current running configuration. You can copy a configuration file from a computer host to system:/ running-config to load a configuration on the switch from a configuration backup file on a computer host.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 2


You can list the contents of any of these main directories (file systems) individually using the dir and cd Cisco IFS commands. You can change your working directory from flash: to any of the main directories using the cd Cisco IFS command.

352

Managing Cisco Switch Authentication

To load a configuration on the switch from a configuration backup file on a computer host, run the following Cisco IFS commands: SW1#copy tftp://192.168.75.5/SW1-confg system:/running-config Destination filename [running-config]? Accessing tftp://192.168.75.5/SW1-confg... Loading SW1-confg from 192.168.75.5 [OK - 812 bytes] 812 bytes copied in 10.120 secs (80 bytes/sec) SW1#

The copy tftp://192.168.75.5/SW1-confg system:/runningconfig command you use here is very similar to the copy tftp running-config command that you used in the previous section. The only difference is that you specify the path to the source and the path to the destination when you use the Cisco IFS version of the copy command. You can also use this command to copy a configuration from a configuration backup file on a computer host to the startup-config file in NVRAM. Here is an example: SW1#copy tftp://192.168.75.5/SW1-confg nvram:/startup-config Destination filename [startup-config]? Accessing tftp://192.168.75.5/SW1-confg... Loading SW1-confg from 192.168.75.5 [OK - 812 bytes] 812 bytes copied in 10.120 secs (80 bytes/sec)

Managing Cisco Switch Authentication You can configure several passwords for different types of access to your switch: ✦ Console password: Used for console access through the console port or through a Console Terminal Server. ✦ Auxiliary password: Used for console access through the auxiliary port using a modem. ✦ VTY lines password: Virtual type terminal (VTY) lines are used for Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH) access. They are called virtual type terminal lines because no physical terminal is connected to the switch. Instead, you connect a computer host to the network and access the switch remotely using the switch management IP address. A terminal emulation program on the computer host emulates a physical terminal (TTY). ✦ Privileged password: Used for privileged mode access. Privileged mode is an “expert” management operation mode used to run some Cisco IOS commands.

www.it-ebooks.info


353

The console port and the auxiliary port are enabled by default, even if no password is specified for them. This is a security risk. It is best practice to specify at least a console password on new Cisco devices. Privileged EXEC mode is not secured with a password by default on Cisco switches. By default, you can access privileged mode by executing the enable IOS command at the user EXEC prompt. It is best practice to configure a privileged mode password to secure access to advanced IOS commands that can adversely affect the functionality of the switch if misused. The VTY lines (Telnet and Secure Shell) are disabled by default. You need to specify a password for the VTY lines to enable them. To configure passwords, you need to instruct the Cisco device to prompt for authentication. You use the login Cisco IOS command to do this.

Console password This section reviews how to configure a console password. To configure the console password, run the following commands:

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global switch settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole switch. The line console 0 command selects the console line. Cisco devices have only one console line: console 0. The password my_password command sets the my_password password on the console access line. Finally, you instruct the Cisco device to prompt for authentication by entering the login Cisco IOS command. From now on, anytime you connect to the console line, you will be prompted to provide a password. The password you provide must be my_password. To disable the authentication prompt, issue line console 0 again and enter the no login command.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 2


SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#line console 0 (or line con 0) SW1(config-line)#password my_password SW1(config-line)#login SW1(config-line)#exit SW1(config)#exit SW1#disable SW1>

354


You use the exit commands to exit the config-line mode and to exit the (config) global configuration mode.

Telnet password This section reviews how to configure a password for the VTY access lines. To configure a password for the VTY lines, run the following commands: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)# line vty 0 ? <0-15> last line number SW1(config-line)# line vty 0-15 SW1(config-line)# password my_telnet_password SW1(config-line)# login SW1(config-line)# exit SW1(config)# exit SW1#disable SW1>

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global switch settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole switch. The line vty 0 ? command asks the Cisco IOS how many VTY lines are available. The response (<0-15> last line number) shows that 16 VTY lines exist on this particular switch. Now, you can configure a password either on one of the VTY lines (by selecting that particular line) or on all VTY lines (by selecting the whole 0–15 line range). The line vty 0-15 command selects the whole 0–15 VTY line range. Cisco switches have several VTY access lines. Older switches used to have only four VTY lines. Newer switches have as many as 1,180 VTY lines. It is best practice to query the Cisco IOS about how many VTY lines are available. Two main reasons exist to have several VTY access lines on a Cisco switch: ✦ Allowing you to connect to the switch and connect to another device from the switch: Two VTY lines are needed in this case: one to connect into the switch and another one to connect out of the switch to another device. ✦ Allowing several administrators to work on the switch: In large networks, more than one administrator may manage the network. More than one administrator may need to connect from a remote location to the same switch using Telnet or SSH. This is typical with large core switches. The password my_telnet_password command sets the my_telnet_ password password on the VTY access lines. You can set a different password on each line. However, this is not recommended because you don’t

www.it-ebooks.info


355

know which VTY line you are on when you log in, so you wouldn’t know which password to enter. Best practice is to select the whole range of VTY lines and to set the same password on all of them. Finally, instruct the Cisco switch to prompt for authentication by entering the login Cisco IOS command. From now on, anytime you connect to any of the VTY lines, you will be prompted to provide a password. The password you provide must be my_telnet_password. To disable the authentication prompt, issue line vty 0-15 again and enter the no login command.

Auxiliary password If your switch has an auxiliary port, it is best practice to secure access to the auxiliary port using a password. To configure the auxiliary password, run the following commands: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#line auxiliary 0 (or line aux 0) SW1(config-line)#password my_aux_password SW1(config-line)#login SW1(config-line)#exit SW1(config)#exit SW1#disable SW1>

The line console 0 command selects the console line. Cisco switches have only one console line: console 0. The password my_password command sets the my_password password on the console access line. Finally, you instruct the Cisco switch to prompt for authentication by entering the login Cisco IOS command. From now on, anytime you connect to the console line, you will be prompted to provide a password. The password you provide must be my_password. To disable the authentication prompt, issue line console 0 again and enter the no login command. You use the exit commands to exit the config-line mode and to exit the (config) global configuration mode.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 2


The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global switch settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole switch.

356


Privileged password It is best practice to set up a privileged password to secure access to advanced IOS commands that can adversely affect the functionality of the switch if misused. You can use two different commands to configure a privileged password: ✦ enable password my_priv_password: This command sets my_ priv_password as the privileged password. This password is not encrypted by default. This command is supported in all IOS versions. ✦ enable secret my_priv_encrypt_password: This command sets my_priv_ encrypt_password as the privileged password. This password is encrypted. This command is supported in newer IOS versions. Using the enable secret or the enable password commands, you configure a privileged password that is stored locally on your switch. The only difference between the two commands is that enable secret stores the password on the switch in encrypted form. This is more secure than enable password, which stores the password on the switch in unencrypted form. Always use the Cisco IOS help to determine whether the enable secret command is available. If it is, use it to set the privileged password. It is best practice to encrypt the privileged password using the enable secret command whenever this command is available. You can also configure your privileged password to be stored on a Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS) server. This is a good option in larger networks with many switches when it is better to configure the privileged password once, centrally, on a TACACS server, instead of configuring passwords on each of your switches. To configure an encrypted privileged mode password, run the following commands: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#enable secret my_priv_encrypt_password SW1(config)#exit SW1#disable SW1>

Encrypting passwords By default, passwords are stored in plain text in the running configuration in RAM and in the startup configuration file in NVRAM. You can view the passwords on your switch in plain text, using either the show running-config or the show startup-config command. This is a security risk. It is best practice to encrypt all passwords on your switch.

www.it-ebooks.info


357

The privileged password is encrypted if you use the enable secret command. It is best practice to set a privileged password using the enable secret command to make sure that it is encrypted. So, if you use enable secret instead of enable password to set a privileged password, your privileged password is encrypted. How about other passwords? Console, auxiliary, and Telnet (VTY) passwords are not encrypted, even if you use the enable secret command for the privileged password. You need to encrypt them using the service password-encryption command. To encrypt passwords on your switch, run the following commands: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#service password-encryption SW1(config)#exit SW1#disable SW1>

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global switch settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole switch. The service password-encryption command asks the Cisco IOS to encrypt all passwords except the privileged password that is already encrypted if the enable secret command was used.

Secure Shell (SSH) is similar to Telnet: It allows remote users to connect to the switch by using the switch IP address. SSH is more secure than Telnet, because it encrypts data exchanged between the remote management computer and the switch. You should encrypt data exchanged between the remote management computer and the switch. Consider this example: You need to change the passwords on a switch located in a remote data center. The data center is too far to walk to, so you need to connect to the switch remotely from your computer. While changing the passwords, you enter the passwords on the keyboard of your computer. If you are connected to the switch using Telnet, the data exchanged between your computer and the switch is in clear text. That data includes the new passwords that you type at your computer keyboard. Hence, passwords are sent over the Internet in clear text. This is a security risk. SSH avoids this security risk by encrypting data exchanged between your computer and the switch.

www.it-ebooks.info


Enabling Secure Shell (SSH)

Book III Chapter 2

358


SSH uses encryption keys to encrypt the data exchanged in an SSH session. Cisco supports both SSH version 1.0 (also known as SSH v1 or SSH.1) and SSH version 2.0 (also known as SSH v2 or SSH.2). Cisco started to support SSH v2 beginning with IOS Release 12.1(19)E on some switch and router models. If you get a %Invalid input error when you execute the crypto key generate rsa command, the Cisco IOS version on your switch does not support SSH. You may need to download the cryptographic software image from Cisco. To download the cryptographic IOS software image for your switch, log in to www.cisco.com/public/sw-center/index.shtml. (You need to register at Cisco.com before downloading. Some software export limitations may apply.) Four packages are available for each release: ✦ LAN LITE w/o crypto: This is the Cisco IOS image without cryptographic services. This IOS image does not support SSH. ✦ LAN LITE w/o crypto with web-based DEV MGR: This is the Cisco IOS image without cryptographic services, but it includes the Cisco Device Manager GUI. This IOS image does not support SSH. ✦ LAN LITE: This is the Cisco IOS image with cryptographic services. This IOS image supports SSH. ✦ LAN LITE with web-based DEV MGR: This is the Cisco IOS image with cryptographic services and with the Cisco Device Manager GUI. This IOS image supports SSH. * To enable SSH, you need to do the following: ✦ Ensure that the Cisco IOS image on your switch supports SSH. ✦ Ensure that you assigned a host name to your switch: SSH needs the host name to generate the encryption keys. ✦ Ensure that you assigned an IP domain name to your switch: SSH needs the IP domain name to generate the encryption keys. ✦ Create a local or TACACS administrator user and assign it a password: SSH cannot use the Telnet password that you assigned to the VTY access lines. You need to create a specific user that will be used to authenticate SSH sessions. ✦ Create the encryption keys. ✦ Configure SSH options such as session timeout and number of login retries. ✦ Enable SSH on the VTY lines of your switch.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info


361

the passwords for some switches you have in your network. This happens quite often, unfortunately. Theoretically, you would have to wipe out the configuration of the switches and start from scratch. This is not productive. The Cisco IOS provides a mechanism to recover passwords in case you lose them or you do not remember them. You need to have physical access to the switch to connect to its console port. This is a good thing, because you don’t want anyone else connecting from a remote location through Telnet to be able to reset the passwords on your switches. The key point of the password recovery process is to boot up the Cisco switch ignoring its current startup configuration, which contains the current passwords. To do this, you need to interrupt the boot process of the switch before the startup configuration is loaded from NVRAM to RAM.

Reviewing the switch manual boot process You have three ways to interrupt the boot process on a Cisco switch.

Interrupting the boot process with the Mode button Follow these steps to interrupt the boot process of a Cisco switch using the Mode button on the front panel of the switch:

within the first 15 seconds of the switch boot process.

3. Continue to press the Mode button until the System LED (SYST) flashes briefly amber and then turns solid green.

4. Release the Mode button when the System LED (SYST) becomes solid green.

Enabling the manual boot option Follow these steps to interrupt the boot process of a Cisco switch using the manual boot option:

1. Enable the manual boot option. 2. Reboot the switch using the reload command in privileged EXEC mode. The following options allow you to control the manual boot option on a Cisco switch: ✦ To enable the manual boot option, run boot manual at the privileged global configuration prompt.

www.it-ebooks.info


1. Reboot the switch using the reload command in privileged EXEC mode. 2. Press the Mode button while the System LED (SYST) is flashing green

Book III Chapter 2

www.it-ebooks.info


363

still be reset, but the switch configuration is reset as well. This prevents an unauthorized user from resetting the password and gaining access to a configured switch. You control the password recovery feature availability using the service password-recovery IOS command. The service password-recovery IOS command needs to be run in privileged global configuration mode. You have the following options to control the password recovery feature on a Cisco switch: ✦ To enable password recovery, run service password-recovery at the privileged global configuration prompt. ✦ To disable password recovery, run no service password-recovery at the privileged global configuration prompt.

Password recovery process with password recovery enabled The password recovery feature is enabled if you see the message The password-recovery mechanism is enabled during the boot process. Follow these steps to recover the password on a switch with the password recovery option enabled:

1. Interrupt the normal boot process using one of the methods previously described.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Hide the startup configuration file to prevent the IOS from loading it. Boot the switch manually and wait for the IOS to finish loading in RAM. Unhide the startup configuration file. Manually load the startup configuration file from NVRAM to RAM. Reset the password. Save the running configuration over the startup configuration. Revert the boot process to its default options. Reboot the switch.

Password recovery process with password recovery disabled The password recovery feature is disabled if you see the message The password-recovery mechanism is disabled during the boot process. In this case, you need to reset the whole configuration of the switch to be able to reset the password. This basically resets the switch to its default outof-factory configuration. You need to ensure that you do not lose any valuable information about your network configuration when you do this. It is best practice to save the configuration of the switch before resetting it.

www.it-ebooks.info


2. Manually initialize the flash file system.

Book III Chapter 2

364


Follow these steps to recover the password on a switch with the password recovery option disabled:

1. Interrupt the normal boot process using one of the methods described previously.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Accept to reset the switch to its default configuration. Boot the switch manually and wait for the IOS to finish loading in RAM. Reset the password. Save the running configuration over the startup configuration. Revert the boot process to its default options. Reboot the switch.

Here is an example: !Lines starting with ”!” in this example are comments that !explain certain commands within the example. Cisco IOS !does not interpret lines starting with the “!” character. !The IOS interprets these lines as comments, not as commands. !The first few lines below restart the switch using the !reload IOS command after the manual boot option was enabled. SW1>en SW1#reload Proceed with reload? [confirm] 00:01:35: %SYS-5-RELOAD: Reload requested by console. Reload Reason: Reload command. !The switch is now starting up. Observe the message in bold !below, showing that password recovery is enabled. Using driver version 1 for media type 1 Base ethernet MAC Address: 00:25:b4:10:58:80 Xmodem file system is available. The password-recovery mechanism is disabled. The password-recovery mechanism has been triggered, but is currently disabled. Access to the boot loader prompt through the password-recovery mechanism is disallowed at this point. However, if you agree to let the system be reset back to the default system configuration, access to the boot loader prompt can still be allowed. !here the IOS prompts you to reset the configuration of the !switch to be able to reset its password. Would you like to reset the system back to the default configuration (y/n)? y !next line manually boots the switch switch:boot

www.it-ebooks.info


365

Loading “flash:c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY/c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY.bin”...@@@@@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ [... boot output cut ...] SW1>en SW1#configure terminal (or config t) !next line sets the new password SW1(config)#enable secret my_priv_encrypt_password SW1(config)#exit !next line replaces the startup-config file ! in NVRAM (flash:config.text) with the current ! running-config file in RAM (system:running-config) SW1#copy running-config startup-config !next line reboots the switch SW1#reload System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: yes Proceed with reload? [confirm] 00:15:05: %SYS-5-RELOAD: Reload requested by console. Reload Reason: Reload command. [... reboot output cut ...]

Next, manually boot the switch and wait for the IOS to finish loading in RAM. You know that the IOS is finished loading when it displays the SW1> user EXEC prompt. Now it’s time to set the new password. This basically resets the password to a new one. Finally, replace the startup-config file in NVRAM (flash:config. text) with the current running-config file in RAM (system:runningconfig) and reboot the switch. Upon reboot, the switch is reset to its default out-of-factory configuration. The password of the switch is set to my_priv_encrypt_password. This is the password that you just set with the enable secret command during the password recovery procedure.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 2


Observe that the password recovery feature is disabled on this switch. You are prompted to reset the switch to its default out-of-factory configuration to reset the password. You answer y to the prompt.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 3: Controlling Network Traffic with Cisco Switches Exam Objectives ✓ Describing how MAC addresses are handled in local and remote

transmissions ✓ Describing Layer 2 switch modes ✓ Setting the duplex mode of a Layer 2 switch ✓ Reviewing MAC address table thrashing and broadcast storms and

seeing how STP fixes these two issues

R

ead this chapter to find out how Cisco Layer 2 switches control and optimize traffic in a local-area network (LAN).

Sending to MAC Addresses in Remote Networks In the following sections, you discover how a sending host device interacts with a Layer 2 switch and with a gateway (a router) to send frames to a target device located in a remote network. Most data transfers involve sending and receiving devices that are not located in the same LAN. Data frames need to be sent to the LAN gateway first. Next, the LAN gateway routes the data frames wrapped in packets through a wide-area network (WAN) to the destination LAN.

Sending frames within the LAN A host determines the MAC address of a target device in the local network by first looking into its Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table, searching for the MAC address that corresponds to the IP address of the target device: ✦ If the sending host finds an entry in its ARP table corresponding to the IP address of the target device, it simply writes that MAC address in the destination MAC address field in the Ethernet frame. ✦ If the sending host does not find an entry in its ARP table corresponding to the IP address of the target device, it broadcasts an ARP request. In other words, it sends an ARP request packaged in a frame with the destination MAC address set to the broadcast address: FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF. All devices in the LAN see the ARP request.

www.it-ebooks.info

370

Sending to MAC Addresses in Remote Networks

The target device eventually responds with its MAC address. The sending host saves the target’s MAC address in its ARP table. The next time the sending host will find the target’s MAC address in its ARP table. Figure 3-1 illustrates how Alex, the sending host, interacts with the Layer 2 switch and with Claire, the target host, to find Claire’s MAC address and to send her frames:

1. Alex looks up his ARP table to see whether he already has Claire’s MAC address. He doesn’t, so he needs to broadcast an ARP request.

2. Alex broadcasts an ARP request. The Ethernet frame contains Alex’s MAC address in the S-MAC (source) field and the standard broadcast MAC address (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) in the D-MAC (destination) field.

3. The switch receives this frame, and upon inspection of the D-MAC field, it floods the frame out on all ports except the one through which it came in.

4. The frame reaches both John and Claire. John discards it, because it’s not for him. Claire recognizes her own IP address in the ARP request, so she responds with her MAC address. The Ethernet frame contains Claire’s MAC address in the S-MAC field and Alex’s MAC address in the D-MAC field.

5. Alex receives Claire’s frame that basically answers his ARP request. Alex now has Claire’s IP address and her MAC address. He saves them both in his ARP table. So, the next time he needs to send something to Claire, he doesn’t need to broadcast an ARP request again.

6. Now, Alex can send frames directly to Claire because he knows her MAC address. He reads Claire’s MAC address from his ARP table and builds the Ethernet frame, putting his own MAC address in the S-MAC field and Claire’s MAC address in the D-MAC field.

Sending frames to a remote network What happens when the target device is not in the local network? It starts the same way as when the device is in the local network. The sending host first looks up its Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table, searching for the MAC address that corresponds to the IP address of the target device: ✦ If the sending host finds an entry in its ARP table corresponding to the IP address of the target device, it simply writes that MAC address in the destination MAC address field in the Ethernet frame.

www.it-ebooks.info


371

5: Alex saves Claire’s MAC and IP address in his ARP table

Alex’s ARP table

3: This is a broadcast frame so switch floods it out on all ports

IP MAC 192.168.71.6 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f

Alex IP: 192.168.72.5 MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f

John IP: 192.168.72.7 MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2

6: Now, Alex can send a frame directly to Clare’s MAC address

2: Alex broadcasts ARP request for Claire’s MAC address Ethernet frame S-MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f D-MAC: ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff (Broadcast) Figure 3-1: Sending frames within the LAN.

Ethernet frame S-MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f D-MAC: 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f

ARP request Looking for MAC address for IP: 192.168.72.6

www.it-ebooks.info

Claire IP: 192.168.72.6 MAC: 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f

Ethernet frame S-MAC: 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f D-MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f

Book III Chapter 3

Controlling Network Traffic with Cisco Switches

1: Alex needs Claire’s MAC address to send her a frame. He looks up his ARP table: no MAC address for Claire

Switch

4: Claire responds to the ARP request sending her MAC address

372

Sending to MAC Addresses in Remote Networks ✦ If the destination device is located in a remote network, the host will never find the MAC address of the target host in its ARP table, but rather, it will find the MAC address of the LAN gateway. The LAN gateway is the router device that routes data frames wrapped in IP packets from the LAN to a WAN and from the WAN back into the LAN. The sending host will never find the MAC address of the target host in its ARP table, but rather, it will eventually find the MAC address of the LAN gateway. If the sending host does not find an entry in its ARP table corresponding to the IP address of the target device, it broadcasts an ARP request. In other words, it sends an ARP request packaged in a frame with the destination MAC address set to the broadcast address: FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF. All devices in the LAN see the ARP request, but the target device is not in the local network. So, it does not see the ARP request. However, the LAN gateway (that is, the router), like all devices in the LAN, does see the ARP request. It recognizes that the ARP request is for an IP address that is located in a remote network. The router responds to the sending host with its own MAC address. In other words, the router tells the sending host: Anytime you need to send frames to this target device, send the frames to me, and I’ll route the frames to the remote LAN where this target device is located. The sending host saves the gateway’s MAC address in its ARP table. The next time the sending host needs to send to this same target device in a remote network, it will find the MAC address of the gateway in its ARP table. Hence, the sending host will send the frame to the router, directly, without broadcasting an ARP request. Figure 3-2 illustrates how Alex, the sending host, interacts with the Layer 2 switch and with the gateway router, to find the gateway’s MAC address and to send frames to Mitch, the target host, in a remote network:

1. Alex looks up his ARP table to see whether he already has Monica’s MAC address. He doesn’t, so he needs to broadcast an ARP request.

2. Alex broadcasts an ARP request. The Ethernet frame contains Alex’s MAC address in the S-MAC (source) field and the standard broadcast MAC address (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) in the D-MAC (destination) field.

3. The switch receives this frame, and upon inspection of the D-MAC field, it floods the frame out on all ports except the one through which it came in.

www.it-ebooks.info


Alex’s ARP table IP 206.45.31.5

MAC 07-a1-3f-df-f3-4c

Alex IP: 192.168.72.5 MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f

5: Alex saves Gateway’s MAC and target IP address in his ARP table 3: This is a broadcast frame so switch floods it out on all ports

Switch

1: Alex needs Monica’s MAC address to send her a frame. He looks up his ARP table: no MAC address for Monica

Router (Gateway) IP: 192.168.72.1 MAC: 07-a1-3f-df-f3-4c

4: Gateway router recognizes that this IP is in a different network. So, it sends back his MAC address

Ethernet frame S-MAC: 07-a1-3f-df-f3-4c D-MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f

Book III Chapter 3

IP packet S-IP: 192.168.72.5 D-IP: 206.45.31.5

Router (Gateway) IP: 206.45.31.1 MAC: a5-31-5f-f2-00-d2

Switch

Figure 3-2: Sending frames to a remote network.

Ethernet frame S-MAC: a5-31-5f-f2-00-d2 D-MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f

Isabelle IP: 206.45.31.6 MAC: 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f

7: Router in remote network sets S-MAC to his own MAC address and D-MAC to the targets MAC address

www.it-ebooks.info


Ethernet frame S-MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f D-MAC: 07-a1-3f-df-f3-4c

Ethernet frame S-MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f D-MAC: ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff (Broadcast)

Monica IP: 206.45.31.5 MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f


6: Now, Alex can send a frame directly to the gateway MAC address whenever he needs to send to 205.45.31.5 (Monica)

2: Alex broadcasts ARP request for Monica’s MAC address

ARP request Looking for MAC address for IP: 206.45.31.5

373

374


4. The frame reaches both Claire and the router that links this LAN to a WAN: • Claire discards the frame, because it’s not for her. • The router recognizes that the IP address requested in the ARP is in a different network, so it sends back its MAC address. This enables Alex to send the frame to the router, and the router handles it from there. The Ethernet frame contains the router’s MAC address in the S-MAC field and Alex’s MAC address in the D-MAC field.

5. Alex receives the router’s frame that basically answers his ARP request. Alex now saves Monica’s IP address and the router’s MAC address in his ARP table. The next time he needs to send something to Monica, he doesn’t need to broadcast an ARP request again. He simply sends the frame to the router, and the router handles it from there.

6. Now, Alex can send frames to Monica without broadcasting an ARP request. He looks up Monica’s IP address in his ARP table and builds the Ethernet frame, putting his own MAC address in the S-MAC field and the router’s MAC address in the D-MAC field. Thus, the frame bound for Monica goes directly to the router now. The router sends the frame over the WAN to the gateway of the remote network where Monica is located.

7. The remote router encapsulates the IP packet in a new Ethernet frame that contains his MAC address in the S-MAC field and Monica’s MAC address in the D-MAC field. Ethernet frames are always bound to a given LAN. The Ethernet frame in Alex’s network involved Alex and his local gateway. The Ethernet frame in Monica’s network involved Monica and the remote router (Monica’s gateway). Ethernet frames always identify the next hop in a LAN: The source and destination MAC addresses change at each hop. In contrast, IP packets identify the sender and the receiver of the data payload. The source and destination IP addresses remain the same throughout the journey of a packet through networks linking the sender and the receiver. Sending frames within a LAN: The destination MAC address of the frame is set to the MAC address of the target host device. Sending frames to a remote network: The destination MAC address of the frame is set to the MAC address of the LAN gateway. The LAN gateway is a router that links the LAN to a WAN. The destination MAC address of a Layer 2 data-link (Ethernet) frame is never set to the MAC address of a Layer 2 switch. A Layer 2 switch is merely a conduit that provides an optimized point-to-point link between the sending device and the target device.

www.it-ebooks.info

Deciding the Fate of Frames

375

The sending device is usually a host in the LAN. Hence, the source MAC address in the Ethernet frame is the MAC address of sending host device. The target device is either another host in the LAN or the LAN gateway. Hence, the destination MAC address in the Ethernet frame is either the MAC address of a target host device within the LAN or the MAC address of the LAN gateway.

Deciding the Fate of Frames In the following sections, you find out about switching modes and how they control the fate of each frame: filtering, forwarding, or flooding the frame. One of the most important functions of a Layer 2 switch is to decide what to do with a frame it receives. The switch either ✦ Filters (that is, discards) the frame ✦ Forwards the frame out on a specific port ✦ Sends the frame out on all ports except the port through which it came in The following sections describe how the switch decides the fate of a frame.

Switching modes Store-and-forward The store-and-forward switching mode follows this process:

1. The switch stores the entire frame in the switch buffer (temporary) memory.

2. FCS (frame check sequence) is run to ensure that the frame is valid. 3. The switch inspects the source MAC address and destination MAC address of the frame.

4. The switch saves the source MAC address along with the incoming port in the MAC address table.

5. The switch looks up the MAC address table for the destination MAC address: • If it finds the destination MAC address in the MAC address table, it forwards the frame only on the outgoing port registered in the MAC address table.

www.it-ebooks.info


Layer 2 switches support three switching modes: Store-and-forward, Cutthrough, and Fragment-free

Book III Chapter 3

376


• If it does not find the destination MAC address in the MAC address table, it floods the frame on all ports, except the port where the frame came in.

Cut-through The cut-through switching mode is faster than the store-and-forward mode. In cut-through mode, the switch does not store the whole frame in its buffer memory. Instead, it processes the frame as soon as it receives the first 6 bytes of the frame:

1. The switch inspects the first 6 bytes of the Ethernet frame, looking at the destination MAC address.

2. The switch searches an entry for the destination MAC address in its MAC address table.

3. Assuming that the destination MAC address has already been catalogued in the MAC address table, the switch forwards the bytes of the frame right away on the corresponding outgoing port, even before the rest of the frame has been completely received. The switch does not calculate the FCS before it forwards the frame. The cut-through mode speeds frame forwarding considerably, but at a price: Because the FCS is not calculated, both valid and invalid frames are forwarded. Normally, the receiving device can handle this. However, in networks with high traffic volume, by forwarding both valid and invalid frames, the switch unnecessarily overloads the network segment between the switch and the receiving device, which is not good. This is why some switch models still calculate the FCS and keep track of invalid frames. When the number of invalid frames passes a certain threshold, the switch reverts to store-andforward mode.

Fragment-free The fragment-free switching mode combines the advantages of both the store-and-forward mode and the cut-through mode. Valid Ethernet frames are normally at least 64 bytes in length. Fragment-free considers any frame that is at least 64 bytes to be valid. A switch in fragment-free mode acts as follows:

1. The switch stores the first 64 bytes of a frame in the switch buffer. 2. It inspects the source MAC address and destination MAC address of the frame.

3. It saves the source MAC address along with the incoming port in the MAC address table.

www.it-ebooks.info


377

4. The switch looks up the MAC address table for the destination MAC address: • If it finds the destination MAC address in the MAC address table, it forwards the frame only on the outgoing port registered in the MAC address table. • If it does not find the destination MAC address in the MAC address table, it floods the frame on all ports, except the port where the frame came in. Fragment-free starts forwarding the frame as soon as its first 64 bytes have been received, as opposed to store-and-forward, which stores the whole frame before forwarding it. Hence, fragment-free is faster than store-andforward. However, fragment-free is slower than cut-through, because cutthrough forwards the frame as soon as the first 6 bytes have been received. A switch in fragment-free mode discards any frame that is shorter than 64 bytes. Because frames shorter than 64 bytes are typically invalid frames, this lowers the risk of forwarding invalid frames. This is similar to the store-andforward mode, which does not forward invalid frames. Fragment-free mode does not calculate the FCS. This is similar to the cutthrough mode. As in cut-through mode, some switches calculate the FCS anyway and revert to store-and-forward when the number of invalid frames passes a certain threshold.

✦ Store-and-forward is reliable, forwarding only valid frames, but slower because it always calculates the FCS. ✦ Cut-through is faster because it doesn’t store the whole Ethernet frame before forwarding it, but is potentially unreliable because it may forward invalid frames. ✦ Fragment-free relies on the minimum valid Ethernet frame size to determine whether a frame is valid without calculating the FCS: • Because most invalid frames are smaller than 64 bytes, fragment-free is quite reliable. • Because fragment-free does not store more than 64 bytes of the frame in the switch buffer, it is quite efficient as well.

www.it-ebooks.info


Fragment-free is a good compromise between store-and-forward and cutthrough switching modes:

Book III Chapter 3

378

Switching in Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex Modes

Switching in Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex Modes The first few iterations of the Ethernet standard supported only half-duplex transmissions. Current Ethernet standards support both half-duplex and fullduplex transmission modes.

Reviewing half-duplex Ethernet Half-duplex Ethernet uses a single pair of wires for both sending and receiving frames. Frame collisions occur and need to be mitigated with carrier sense multiple access collision detect (CSMA/CD), so half-duplex throughput is usually 30–40 percent of theoretical throughput. This means that in a typical 100BASE-T Ethernet network, although theoretical throughput is 100 Mbps, half-duplex only provides 40 to 50 Mbps. All hubs, bridges, and switches support half-duplex transmission mode. However, half-duplex Ethernet should only be used with older devices that do not support fullduplex Ethernet. In all other cases, it is best to use full-duplex Ethernet.

Reviewing full-duplex Ethernet Full-duplex Ethernet uses two pairs of wires, or even four pairs of wires, to send and receive frames at the same time on several connection paths using one connection path per pair. Full-duplex twisted-pair connections provide a point-to-point connection between the transmitter on the sending host and the receiver on the receiving host. This eliminates frame collisions and speeds data transfer. Using full-duplex twisted-pair connections, you can theoretically achieve full throughput in both directions. Considering the 100BASE-T example, using full-duplex twisted-pair, you should be able to get 100 Mbps sending and 100 Mbps receiving, for a total bandwidth of 200 Mbps. However, in reality, you will likely get less than 100 Mbps due to potential electrical noise, crosstalk, and other factors that may distort the signal. Most Layer 2 switches support full-duplex transmission mode.

Duplex mode best practice It is best practice to use full-duplex transmission mode because it improves network throughput and reliability by eliminating frame collisions. Particularly, always use full-duplex transmission mode to connect hosts to switches, and interconnect switches using full-duplex twisted-pair.

Configuring port duplex mode on a Cisco switch You configure the transmission mode on a Cisco switch using the duplex IOS command. For example, to set the transmission mode of a switch interface in full-duplex mode, execute the following command: SW1(config-if)#duplex full

www.it-ebooks.info

Avoiding Loops with Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

379

To set the transmission mode of a switch interface in half-duplex mode, execute the following command: SW1(config-if)#duplex half

By default, all switch ports are set to autonegotiate the duplex mode with the device that connects to the port. To manually set the duplex mode to autonegotiate, execute the following command: SW1(config-if)#duplex auto

Configuring port speed on a Cisco switch You can follow the duplex IOS command with the speed IOS command to set the speed of the interface. The speed command can configure the interface to run at various speeds: 10, 100, 1000, and auto. Some interfaces are limited in the speeds they support. For example, a Fast Ethernet switch interface supports speeds only up to 100 Mbps. In this case, you can only set the Fast Ethernet interface speed to 10, 100, or auto.

Selecting a switch port Before you run any of the duplex and speed commands, you need to select the port you want to configure:

SW1>enable (or en)

2. Enable the Cisco switch configuration terminal: SW1#configure terminal (or config t or conf t)

3. Select a port to work with using the interface command. Again, you can use the short form: int . For example, to work with the first Fast Ethernet interface on your switch (0/0), you can run the following: SW1(config)#int fastethernet 0/0 (or int fa 0/0) SW1(config-if)#

Avoiding Loops with Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) This section introduces the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that is used by Layer 2 switches to avoid loops in topologies with redundant interswitch links. The next chapter is devoted to a more detailed discussion of STP.

www.it-ebooks.info


1. Transition the IOS to privileged EXEC mode:

Book III Chapter 3

380

Avoiding Loops with Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

Whenever two Layer 2 switches are interconnected with redundant links, transmission loops may occur. Frames are continuously retransmitted on alternate links between switches, effectively causing frames to loop, or bounce, between switches. This can cause broadcast storms and MAC address table thrashing. A broadcast frame that bounces forever between switches interconnected with redundant links causes a broadcast storm. Because each switch floods broadcast frames out on all ports, they continuously send the frame to each other on alternate links. Data-link (Ethernet) frames do not expire, so they can bounce forever between Layer 2 switches. The Spanning Tree Protocol helps avoiding these broadcast storms. MAC address tables can be thrashed when a MAC address is registered for more than one switch port. This may happen when the same Ethernet frame is received through more than one port on a given switch. It is common to get thrashed MAC address tables when loops exist in a network because frames are sent between switches on alternate ports. Hence, the same source MAC address in the frame is registered for each alternate port. So, how exactly does STP eliminate loops in LANs? STP basically monitors the network and catalogs each link, particularly redundant links. Next, STP disables redundant links, setting up preferred, optimized links between switches. The preferred, optimized links are used under normal circumstances. Should any of the preferred links fail, one of the nonpreferred redundant links is enabled and used instead. STP assigns a root bridge that acts sort of like the decision maker in the network. The term root bridge typically refers to a Layer 2 switch. It can also really be a bridge, but more commonly it is a switch. The root bridge decides which routes are preferred and which routes are nonpreferred. The root bridge interacts with nonroot bridges: other switches in the LAN. STP is enabled on all switches in the LAN. The root bridge and the nonroot bridges have specific roles within STP. Switch ports are categorized by whether they forward frames and whether they are the endpoints of a preferred, optimized link within the LAN. STP operation, management, and optimization are covered in Book III, Chapter 4.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

384

Book III: Switching with Cisco Switches

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 4: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Exam Objectives ✓ Describing problems related to switching loops and seeing how STP

fixes them ✓ Describing STP operation flow, root bridge, and nonroot bridge

functions ✓ Managing STP root bridge selection ✓ Managing STP port type assignment ✓ Describing the STP convergence process ✓ Describing the STP port states ✓ Understanding best practices to decrease STP convergence duration ✓ Managing Cisco switch and port configuration options for STP ✓ Describing Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) improvements

over STP ✓ Describing and managing EtherChannel

Y

ou found out in previous chapters that switches are very often interconnected using redundant links to improve reliability of interswitch links. You also discovered that redundant links can create transmission loops, causing broadcast storms and MAC address table thrashing. Switches need to avoid transmissions loops when they are interconnected using redundant links. Read this chapter to see how the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (IEEE 802.1d) can be used to help Layer 2 switches avoid loops. You see how to configure and manage STP. You are also introduced to STP port types. The convergence process flow is explained, along with some parameters you can set to control STP convergence. Finally, you see how the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) (IEEE 802.1w) improves STP convergence speed.

www.it-ebooks.info

386

Introducing the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

Introducing the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Layer 2 switches need to avoid switching loops. Here you see how switches can avoid switching loops using STP. The STP protocol is defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard. Before I look at STP, I review the problem that STP resolves: data-link frames being continuously sent back and forth between Layer 2 switches interconnected with redundant links. Data-link (Ethernet) frames do not expire. An Ethernet frame sent to an unknown MAC address can bounce around forever in the network. This is not good because it wastes bandwidth. This problem is exacerbated when several switches are interconnected with redundant links. It is best practice to use redundant links to interconnect Layer 2 switches to mitigate interswitch link failure risks. However, this amplifies the risk of having frames bouncing back and forth between switches. Figure 4-1 shows a typical dual-switch LAN with two interswitch links. Hosts Alex, Claire, John, and Monica are interconnected in a LAN using two switches connected with redundant interswitch links. Suppose that the MAC address tables are empty on both switches because none of the hosts have sent any frames yet. Assume that Alex sends a frame to Claire:

1. The first time Alex sends a frame to Claire, the switch learns about Alex, but it still does not know about Claire. So, switch SW1 needs to flood the frame out on all ports except the port through which it came in, that is, the port where Alex connects to SW1.

2. Switch SW1 floods the frame out on all ports except the port through which it came in. The frame reaches switch SW2. Switch SW2 does not know about Claire either, so it also needs to flood the frame out on all ports except the port through which it came in.

3. Switch SW2 floods the frame out on all ports except the port through which it came in. Because you have two links connecting the SW1 and SW2 switches, the frame that came in through fa0/2 on SW2 is flooded out on fa0/3, and the frame that came in through fa0/3 on SW2 is flooded out on fa0/2. Hence, switch SW1 gets the frame back, twice: on fa0/2 and on fa0/3.

4. Because SW1 still does not know Claire’s MAC address, it floods the frame again on both fa0/2 and fa0/3. SW2 receives the frame again, twice, on fa0/2 and on fa0/3.

www.it-ebooks.info


387

5. Because SW2 still does not know Claire’s MAC address, it floods the frame out again on all ports, including fa0/2 and fa0/3, and so on. This is a typical example of a broadcast storm: a broadcast frame that bounces forever between switches interconnected with redundant links. Observe another problem in Figure 4-1. Because switches SW1 and SW2 receive the same frame on two different ports, they register the source MAC address (S-MAC) of host Alex for both ports. This is a problem because the switch will not know over which port it needs to send frames out to Alex whenever D-MAC is set to Alex’s MAC address in a frame. This is a typical example of MAC address table thrashing.

S1 MAC address table 1: Alex sends frame to Claire

MAC 01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f 01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f 01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f


fa0/0 Switch fa0/1 SW1 fa0/3

fa0/2

fa0/3


fa0/0

Switch SW2


Monica MAC: 1d-cb-3f-fd-f5-5e

fa0/1

S2 MAC address table

Figure 4-1: Layer 2 transmission loop.

2: Switch S1 does not know Claire’s MAC address, so it floods out the frame.

MAC 01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f 01-23-0f-ac-2e-1f

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 4

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

fa0/2

John

4: Same as 2

Port fa0/0 fa0/2 fa0/3

Port fa0/3 fa0/2

3: Switch S2 does not know Claire’s MAC address, so it floods out the frame. 5: Same as 3

388


Layer 2 transmission loops cause the following: ✦ Broadcast storms: A broadcast frame that bounces forever between switches interconnected with redundant links is called a broadcast storm. Broadcast storms waste bandwidth and may thrash the MAC address table. ✦ MAC address table thrashing: The MAC address table gets thrashed when multiple ports are attached to the same MAC address. The switch does not know on which outgoing port it can reach that MAC address. To avoid loops and bouncing frames, enable the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) on Layer 2 switches. So, how exactly does STP eliminate Layer 2 loops in LANs? STP basically monitors the network and catalogs every link, particularly redundant links. Next, STP disables redundant links, setting up preferred, optimized links between switches: ✦ The preferred, optimized links are used under normal circumstances. ✦ Should any of the preferred links fail, one of the nonpreferred redundant links is enabled and used instead. STP assigns a root bridge that acts sort of like the decision maker in the network. The term root bridge refers typically to a Layer 2 switch. It can also really be a bridge, but more commonly it is a switch. The root bridge decides which routes are preferred and which routes are nonpreferred. The root bridge interacts with nonroot bridges: other switches in the LAN. STP is enabled on all switches in the LAN. The root bridge and the nonroot bridges have specific roles within STP. Switch ports are categorized depending on whether they forward frames and depending on whether they are the endpoints of a preferred, optimized link within the LAN. Root bridge: A Layer 2 switch (or bridge) that decides which routes are preferred and which routes are nonpreferred. Nonroot bridge: A Layer 2 switch (or bridge) that is not a root bridge. Nonroot bridges coordinate with the root bridge to assist in the determination of preferred and nonpreferred routes from each nonroot bridge to the root bridge in the LAN.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

STP Operation Flow

391

The STP priority is set lower on the faster SW2 Cisco Catalyst 3560 switch: SW2 is eleted ROOT BRIDGE

SW1 Model: Cisco 2960 MAC: 0a-00-00-0c-10-11 STP Priority: 32768 fa0/1

fa0/2

fa0/1

Figure 4-3: Electing the STP root bridge with STP priority control.

SW2 fa0/2 Model: Cisco 3560 MAC: 0a-00-00-0c-20-22 STP Priority: 4096

fa0/3

fa0/1 SW3 Model: Cisco 2960 MAC: 0a-00-00-0c-30-33 STP Priority: 32768

fa0/2


ROOT BRIDGE

Book III Chapter 4

Cisco networks are designed using a hierarchical architecture. Three layers make up the Cisco hierarchical network architecture: ✦ Core layer ✦ Distribution layer ✦ Access layer The core layer is the layer that sits at the center of the network. This layer is also called the backbone. Ultimately, traffic from all devices in the network may end up being routed to the core of the network. The core layer is “where networks meet.” The distribution layer links the core layer to the access layer. This layer is also called the workgroup layer. The distribution layer is involved in routing packets between nodes connected at the access layer. Packets may need to be routed to a different network, which may be located within the same distribution layer network or up through the core layer in a different distribution layer network.

www.it-ebooks.info


STP priority related to the Cisco hierarchical network architecture

392

STP Operation Flow

The access layer is the layer that interconnects host devices to LANs. The access layer is where workgroup LANs are defined. This layer is also called the desktop layer, because it usually involves interconnecting desktop computers and concentrating their traffic into a distribution layer switch or router. Switches, small routers, and computer host devices typically interconnect at the access layer. Layer 2 switches are typically used at the access layer and at the distribution layer. It is important to understand that the larger the LAN, the more choices are available for a root bridge. As mentioned earlier, it is best practice to assign STP priorities to ensure that the fastest switch in the LAN becomes the root bridge. Figure 4-4 shows a very large Cisco LAN that spans both the distribution and the access layers.

SW1 Cisco Catalyst 6513 STP Priority: 4096

SW2 Model: Cisco 4510 STP Priority: 8192

Core Layer



Distribution Layer SW5 Model: Cisco 3560 STP Priority: 16384

...

Figure 4-4: STP priority in a large LAN.





...




Access Layer

www.it-ebooks.info

STP Operation Flow

393

Observe that you set the STP priority values in a hierarchical way to ensure that the fastest Cisco Catalyst 6500 series switch is elected the root bridge. One of the Cisco Catalyst 4500 series would be next in line for becoming the root bridge, should the 6500 series ever fail. You set the STP priority in a hierarchical way to ensure that one of the next-fastest switches is elected, if the root bridge ever fails or is unavailable. If you set the STP priorities all equal below the 6500 series, any of those switches could become the root bridge. Do you remember which one would, in that case? If you answered the one with the lowest MAC address because all STP priorities would be equal, you are right. Note also that within the same level, faster switches have lower STP priorities to ensure that they would be the first ones to become the root bridge, if necessary.

Assigning STP port types The second step in the STP operation flow is assigning port types to every port in the network. STP assigns port types according the cost of each path between the root switch and a nonroot switch.

STP path cost Switches are typically interconnected using redundant links to increase resilience, should one of the links fail. Each of these links provides a connection path. Each path has a certain cost associated with it. The cost is defined according to the bandwidth of the link. Table 4-1 lists the costs associated with each Ethernet bandwidth.

STP Path Cost for Each Ethernet Bandwidth

Bandwidth

STP Cost

10 Mbps

100

100 Mbps

19

1 Gbps

4

10 Gbps

2

STP prefers paths with lower costs. Looking at Table 4-1, you can see that STP prefers faster bandwidths. Consider a switch that has a 100-Mbps link and a 1-Gbps link connecting it to the root bridge. STP will designate the port that connects to the 1-Gbps link to be root port, the port that connects to the root bridge. The port connecting to the slower 100-Mbps link will be either a designated port or a blocking port. A designated port is a port that forwards data-link frames. A blocking port is a port that does not forward data-link frames. You read more about designated and blocking ports a bit later in this chapter.

www.it-ebooks.info


Table 4-1

Book III Chapter 4

394

STP Operation Flow

Setting root ports After switches have elected a root bridge, nonroot switches assign one of their ports to be their root port. The STP root port is the port that connects a switch to the STP root bridge. The port that is elected to be the root port is either ✦ A port that connects the nonroot switch directly to the root bridge ✦ A port that connects to the least expensive path (STP cost) to the root bridge Switches communicate between themselves using STP to calculate the cost of each path to the root bridge. Each switch adds the cost of its own path to the cost received from the neighboring switches to determine the total cost of a given path to the root. After the costs of all paths to the root have been calculated, each switch assigns the root port to the port connecting to the path with the lowest cost. Figure 4-5 illustrates a simple LAN with a root bridge switch and three nonroot switches. Each nonroot switch sets one of its ports to be the root port.

ROOT BRIDGE

SW1 Model: Cisco 2960 MAC: 0a-00-00-0c-10-11 STP Priority: 32768

Designated

fa0/1

fa0/2

Designated

fa0/3 100 Mbps Cost: 19

100 Mbps Cost: 19

100 Mbps Cost: 19

Root Port

Figure 4-5: Setting the root port.

Root Port

fa0/1 SW2 fa0/2 Model: Cisco 2960 MAC: 0a-00-00-0c-20-22 STP Priority: 32768


100 Mbps Cost: 19

www.it-ebooks.info

Root Port fa0/1 SW4 Model: Cisco 2960 MAC: 0a-00-00-0c-40-44 STP Priority: 32768

STP Operation Flow

395

Observe that each of the three nonroot switches chooses a root port that connects directly to the root bridge. Note also that switch SW4 only has one link connecting it to the SW1 root bridge. In this case, there isn’t a choice for the root port: It is the one port that connects SW4 to SW1, the root bridge. The SW2 switch chooses the direct path to the root bridge because it is less costly than the path going through the SW3 switch. Similarly, the same is true for the SW3 switch. The SW1 switch, the root bridge, has no root ports because it is the root bridge itself. SW1 only has designated ports.

Setting designated ports After each switch assigned one of its ports to be the root port, connecting to the root bridge, the remaining ports are either designated or blocking: ✦ An STP designated port is a port that forwards data-link frames. Each LAN segment needs to have a designated port, a port that forwards traffic in and out of that LAN segment. ✦ An STP blocking port is a port that does not forward data-link frames.

Observe the link between switch SW2 and SW3. Switches SW2 and SW3 need to decide which port is designated and which port is blocking on the link that interconnects them. Because both SW2 and SW3 connect to SW1, the root bridge, through a path with an STP cost of 19 (100 Mbps), the total STP cost to the root is the same in both directions on the SW2/SW3 link: The SW2 to SW3 to SW1 STP cost is 19 + 19, and SW3 to SW2 to SW1 is also 19 + 19. So, SW2 and SW3 cannot set their designated and blocking ports relying solely on the STP path cost. SW2 and SW3 need to look at other criteria to decide which port is designated and which port is blocking on the link that interconnects them. In this case, SW2 and SW3 look at their bridge ID: The switch with the lower bridge ID sets its port to be designated, while the switch with the higher bridge ID sets its port to be blocking. Recall that the bridge ID is a number composed of the switch’s MAC address and its STP priority. Both SW2 and SW3 have the same STP priority, so SW2 wins because its MAC address is lower than SW3’s MAC address. Switches look at other criteria anytime a tie exists in the STP path cost. The following sections describe the criteria that switches analyze to decide which of their ports is the root port, which of their ports are designated ports, and which of their ports are blocking ports.

www.it-ebooks.info


Figure 4-6 shows the same four switches, this time with root ports, with designated ports, and with blocking ports.

Book III Chapter 4

396

STP Operation Flow

ROOT BRIDGE


Designated

fa0/1

fa0/2

Designated


100 Mbps Cost: 19

Figure 4-6: Setting designated and blocking ports based on STP path cost.

100 Mbps Cost: 19

Root Port

Root Port


Designated


100 Mbps Cost: 19

Root Port fa0/1 SW4 Model: Cisco 2960 MAC: 0a-00-00-0c-40-44 STP Priority: 32768

Blocking

Choosing ports according to STP path cost The port that connects to the path reaching the root bridge with the lowest cumulative STP cost becomes either the root port or a designated port. For example, SW2 connects to SW1, the root bridge, through port fa0/1. The STP cost of that path is 19. SW2 also connects to SW1, the root bridge, through port fa0/2, via SW3. The total STP cost of that path is 19 + 19 = 38. Because the fa0/2 STP cost of 38 is greater than the fa0/1 STP cost of 19, SW2 will set fa0/1 to be its root port.

Choosing ports according to bridge ID If the switch has multiple ports and the STP path cost is the same for all ports, the port that connects to the path reaching the switch with the lowest bridge ID becomes either the root port or a designated port. For example, Figure 4-7 adds a new switch, SW5 to the network. SW5 is connected to both SW2 and SW3, but it is not directly connected to SW1, the

www.it-ebooks.info

STP Operation Flow

397

root bridge. Several routes exist from SW5 to SW1. One route is SW5 to SW2 to SW1. Similarly, another route is SW5 to SW3 to SW1. You can see that the STP cost is equal for these two routes: 19 + 19 = 38. In this case, SW5 will choose port fa0/1 that connects to SW2 to be its root port because SW2 has a lower bridge ID than SW3.

ROOT BRIDGE


Designated

fa0/1

fa0/2

Designated


100 Mbps Cost: 19

Root Port

100 Mbps Cost: 19

Root Port

100 Mbps Cost: 19


fa0/3

fa0/3

Designated

100 Mbps Cost: 19

Blocking

100 Mbps Cost: 19

Root Port


Designated

fa0/1

Designated

Figure 4-7: Setting the designated and blocking ports based on bridge ID.


SW2 STP cost: 19 SW5 STP cost: 38 Result: SW2 wins

www.it-ebooks.info

Blocking

SW3 STP cost: 19 SW5 STP cost: 38 Result: SW3 wins

Book III Chapter 4



Root Port

398

STP Operation Flow

Observe that the second port on SW5 connecting to SW3 ends up blocking. Here is why: After SW5 has chosen its root port, SW5 and SW3 communicate to decide how they assign the ports that interconnect them. Which port will be designated on that segment, and which port will be blocking? As usual, the STP path cost is analyzed first: The STP path cost from SW3 to the root bridge is 19. The STP path cost from SW5 to the root bridge is 19 + 19 = 38, because the root port on SW5 connects to SW2 and then SW2 connects to SW1. The STP path cost is greater on SW5 than on SW3, so SW3 wins. The port on SW3 becomes designated for the SW5-to-SW3 link. The port on SW5 becomes blocking for the SW5-to-SW3 link.

Choosing ports according to port number If the switch has multiple ports, the STP path cost is the same for all ports, and the bridge ID is the same (that is, two links interconnecting the same two switches), the port with the lowest port number becomes either the root port or a designated port.

Setting blocking ports Earlier you read that each LAN segment needs to have a designated port, a port that forwards traffic in and out of that LAN segment. The port at the other end of the link becomes a blocking port. An STP blocking port is a port that does not forward data-link frames, thereby closing the loop. A blocking port still receives data frames, but it sends no data frames out on the link. In other words, the link becomes one-way, from the designated port to the blocking port.

Achieving STP convergence After switches have assigned a forwarding type or a blocking type to all ports that interconnect them, STP achieves a stable, loop-free LAN. This is a converged network. Convergence is the result of assigning port types to eliminate loops in the LAN.

Introducing bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) Switches communicate by sending each other bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). A BPDU is a special-purpose data-link frame that is multicast every 2 seconds. BPDUs contain information about STP path costs, bridge IDs, port IDs, and some other parameters that help switches to elect the root bridge and to decide how to assign port types to their respective ports. Figure 4-8 illustrates the structure of IEEE 802.1d BPDU data-link frames.

www.it-ebooks.info

STP Operation Flow

399

Protocol ID Version BPDU Type Flags (TCN, ACK) Root Priority Root ID STP Root Path Cost Bridge Priority Bridge ID Figure 4-8: Bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) structure.

Port ID Message Age Max Age Hello Time Forward Delay

Topology change notification (TCN) BPDUs

A TCN is a specialized BPDU that informs every switch in the LAN that the topology has changed. At that point, switches need to go through the convergence process again: They need to reelect a root if the root bridge was affected by the topology change. Next, they need to decide how they set up their ports. Finally, they achieve a converged state.

STP port states Ports on switches running STP are in one of the following states: ✦ Blocking: Ports start in the blocking state. A blocking port forwards no data-link frames. It listens to what’s happening in the LAN: It receives and analyzes BPDUs. Having all ports blocking when a switch is powered up prevents the switch from creating and using transmission loops while STP is converging. A port that is an endpoint to an interswitch link stays in the blocking state unless it becomes a root port or a designated port during the STP convergence process.

www.it-ebooks.info


What if the topology of the LAN changes? What if you add or remove a link between two switches, or if you add or remove a switch? In that case, the switches involved send a topology change notification (TCN) BPDU.

Book III Chapter 4

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Cisco Options for STP

401

How long must the hosts wait before they get network access? Look at portstate default durations listed previously: ✦ 20 seconds in the blocking state (max age timer) ✦ 15 seconds in listening state (forward delay — part 1) ✦ 15 seconds in the learning state (forward delay — part 2) The total time is 50 seconds. Hence, hosts need to wait up to 50 seconds before they get network access anytime a switch is rebooted, or a link becomes unavailable. In other words, the network becomes unavailable for up to 50 seconds every time a change in topology occurs. This is not good. This is why Cisco and the IEEE improved STP to decrease STP convergence delays. These improvements are explained in the following sections.

Best practices to decrease STP convergence duration It is best practice to set the STP priority to a low value (smaller than the default 32768 STP priority) on the fastest switch in your LAN. This causes STP to choose the fastest switch in your LAN as the root bridge. Also, in larger LANs, when using several switches with various performance levels, it is best practice to set STP priority values in a hierarchical way according to the performance level of each group of switches to ensure that one of the next-fastest switches is elected the root bridge, if the root bridge ever fails or becomes unavailable.

Even when best practices are followed, the STP convergence delays may still be too long. You can use the following Cisco configuration options for STP to decrease STP convergence delays.

PortFast The Cisco PortFast port option is used on ports that do not need to participate in STP. These are typically ports that do not interconnect switches, bridges, or hubs. For example, a switch port that connects directly to a host device using a single link does not need to participate in STP because there are no chances that that port will ever create a switching loop. Enabling PortFast on a switch port basically turns off STP for that particular port. The advantage is that the port does not need to wait for the STP convergence to complete (up to 50 seconds) before it is active.

www.it-ebooks.info



Book III Chapter 4

402


To configure PortFast on interface fa0/1, run the following commands: SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>interface fastethernet 0/1 (or int fa0/1) SW1(config-if)>spanning-tree portfast

To configure PortFast on interfaces fa0/1 to fa0/4, run the following commands: SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>interface range fastethernet 0/1 - 4 SW1(config-if-range)>spanning-tree portfast

BPDUGuard The BPDUGuard Cisco option is used in conjunction with the PortFast option on access layer switches. The PortFast option is dangerous if it is enabled by mistake on a port that interconnects switches: Enabling PortFast turns off STP on that port. This can potentially create a switching loop. The BPDUGuard option monitors the frames received on the PortFast-enabled port. If the port ever receives a BPDU, it means that it is connected to a switch. In this case, BPDUGuard sets the port into an error-disabled state. This generates an error message on the switch console to inform the switch administrator that the port should not be PortFast-enabled. This situation can happen, for example, when an administrator mistakenly connects a switch to a port that was previously connected to a host. The port was PortFastenabled because a host cannot create a switching loop. But now a switch connects to the port, so PortFast needs to be disabled. The BPDUGuard option ensures that an error is raised and that the port is disabled whenever this happens. To configure BPDUGuard on interface fa0/1, run the following commands: SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>interface fastethernet 0/1 (or int fa0/1) SW1(config-if)>spanning-tree bpduguard enable

To configure BPDUGuard on interfaces fa0/1 to fa0/4, run the following commands: SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>interface range fastethernet 0/1 - 4 SW1(config-if-range)>spanning-tree bpduguard enable

www.it-ebooks.info


403

BPDUFilter The BPDUFilter option does not allow BPDU frames to enter or exit a PortFast-enabled port. Without BPDUFilter enabled, a port that is PortFast enabled still receives BPDU frames. BPDUs are only useful in the context of STP. So, it makes sense to enable BPDUFilter to fence off the BPDUs on a port that is PortFast enabled because that port does not participate in STP. If a BPDU reaches the PortFast-enabled port with BPDUFilter option set, the PortFast option is disabled and the port starts to participate in STP. This is different from BPDUGuard: When a PortFast-enabled port with BPDUGuard option set receives a BPDU, the port is turned off and an error is logged. BPDUFilter leaves the port on but turns off the PortFast option, thereby enabling STP on the port. You can use either the BPDUGuard option, the BPDUFilter option, or both on a PortFast-enabled port. Best practice is to use at least one of these options along with PortFast for ports that do not need to participate in STP. To configure BPDUFilter on interface fa0/1, run the following commands: SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>interface fastethernet 0/1 (or int fa0/1) SW1(config-if)>spanning-tree bpdufilter enable

To configure BPDUFilter on interfaces fa0/1 to fa0/4, run the following commands:

UplinkFast The UplinkFast Cisco option speeds STP convergence when at least one alternate or backup root port exists on the switch. This option should only be enabled if an alternate root port exists. The alternate root port would be blocked in normal operation. If the root port fails or the link starting at the root port fails, UplinkFast switches right away to the use the alternate root port without waiting for the STP convergence process to complete. This results in quicker failover time whenever the root port/ link fails. This option is typically enabled on access layer switches that have redundant links to distribution layer switches. Figure 4-9 illustrates the network shown in Figure 4-7 with an additional link between SW2 and SW5.

www.it-ebooks.info


SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>interface range fastethernet 0/1 - 4 SW1(config-if-range)>spanning-tree bpdufilter enable

Book III Chapter 4

404


ROOT BRIDGE


Designated

fa0/1

fa0/2

Designated


100 Mbps Cost: 19

Root Port

Root Port

100 Mbps Cost: 19

fa0/1 SW2 fa0/2 Model: Cisco 2960 MAC: 0a-00-00-0c-20-22 STP Priority: 32768 fa0/4

100 Mbps Cost: 19



fa0/3

fa0/3

Des Des

Blk

Root Port

100 Mbps Cost: 19

100 Mbps Cost: 19

Blk

Des

100 Mbps Cost: 19

Root fa0/1

Figure 4-9: STP UplinkFast topology.

fa0/3

Alternate


Blk

In this setup, you can enable STP UplinkFast on switch SW5 because it has an alternate root port connecting it to switch SW2. Port fa0/3 on SW5 is now blocked. By enabling STP UplinkFast on SW5, port fa0/3, the alternate root port on SW5, would become root if the current root port, fa0/1, ever becomes unavailable, or if the link starting at fa0/1 on SW5 ever becomes unavailable.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

405

To configure UplinkFast on switch SW1, run the following commands: SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>spanning-tree uplinkfast

BackboneFast The BackboneFast Cisco option allows a switch to detect failures on links that are not connected directly to the switch. This option can be set on any switch including the root switch to allow all switches in the LAN to detect indirect link failures before TCN BPDUs are sent. This speeds STP convergence. To configure BackboneFast on switch SW1, run the following commands: SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>spanning-tree backbonefast


The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) resolves this problem. The RSTP protocol is defined in the IEEE 802.1w standard. RSTP integrates the STP Cisco options described previously and adds more port types to decrease the time required to achieve STP convergence.

Shorter delay before STP recalculation (max age timer) Remember that ports start in the blocking state whenever a switch is powered up. Switch ports also transition to the blocking state whenever a change in topology occurs (that is, whenever they receive a TCN BPDU). Switches wait for 20 seconds before they start the STP recalculation process. This 20-second wait time is called the max age timer. Considering that BPDUs are sent every 2 seconds, STP switches wait for 10 BPDUs before they start the STP recalculation process.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 4


Layer 2 switches need to avoid switching loops. However, STP convergence delays are a problem. Following STP best practices increases the chances to have a quick STP convergence after a topology change, but you have no guarantee that it will be any quicker than 50 seconds. Cisco-specific STP options also increase the chances to have a quick STP convergence after a topology change, but still, there is no guarantee that it will be any quicker than 50 seconds.

406


RSTP reduces this 20-second delay. RSTP waits for just three BPDUs before it starts the STP convergence process. This considerably speeds the STP convergence process: a 6 max age timer delay in RSTP instead of the 20-second max age timer delay in STP.

Alternate port and backup port RSTP adds two port types to the mix: alternate ports and backup ports. The purpose of these additional ports is to reduce STP convergence time by allowing switches in the LAN to have failover plans in the event that their root port or designated port fails. The BPDUs in RSTP are extended to contain details not just about root, designated, and blocking ports, but also information about alternate and backup ports.

Alternate port An alternate port is a port that becomes the root port in the event that the root port or the link starting at the root port fails or becomes unavailable. The idea is to allow the switch to quickly use the alternate port as a root failover port without the need to go through the lengthy STP convergence process to find an alternate root port. The switch basically keeps in mind a “plan B” (alternate port) for the root port in the event that the current root port fails.

Backup port A backup port is a port that becomes the designated port in the event that the designated port or the link starting at the designated port fails or becomes unavailable. The idea is to allow the switch to quickly use the backup port as a designated failover port without the need to go through the lengthy STP convergence process to find an alternate designated port. The switch basically keeps in mind a “plan B” (backup port) for the designated port in the event that the current designated port fails.

Rapid Transitioning to Forwarding (RTF) The IEEE 802.1w standard that defines RSTP adopted the Cisco PortFast port configuration option and named it Rapid Transitioning to Forwarding (RTF). The same as the Cisco PortFast port configuration option, RTF speeds the STP convergence by transitioning edge ports very quickly to a forwarding state. A switch edge port is a port that connects to the edge of the network: a port that connects to an end device, such as a computer host, instead of connecting to another switch. These ports do not need to participate in

www.it-ebooks.info

EtherChannel

407

STP, so they can transition to forwarding mode before STP convergence is achieved.

Enabling RSTP on a Cisco switch RTF (PortFast) and other Cisco switch and port options for STP need to be enabled manually for RSTP as for STP. After Cisco switch and port options for STP have been set, you can turn on RSTP. To enable RSTP on switch SW1, run the following commands: SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>spanning-tree mode rapid-pvst

EtherChannel The STP convergence process assigns STP port types to all switches in the LAN, setting the ports in either the forwarding mode or blocking mode. On any given LAN segment, you only have one forwarding port. All other ports are blocking. The blocking ports would only be used if the current forwarding port fails.

EtherChannel allows you to group several physical links into a single logical link. This is also called port trunking because you put several ports in a logical trunk. Cisco calls it link aggregation because you group several physical links together to create a single logical (aggregated) link. Both terms are valid because you group several ports in a trunk, thereby grouping several physical links in a single logical link. You can group up to eight ports in a same trunk using EtherChannel.

EtherChannel and STP are friends It is best practice to enable EtherChannel on redundant interswitch links when using STP. This groups redundant physical ports into a single logical port trunk. STP considers the whole port trunk to be a single link, so it will configure it to be forwarding (either a root port or designated port).

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 4


Why would you have redundant links between switches if STP effectively shuts them down? Why would you spend extra money to have redundant links if you cannot use them? The additional links are only used for failover. Wouldn’t it be nice if you could use these extra links to send data, thereby increasing the throughput of your LAN? That’s exactly what EtherChannel does.

408

EtherChannel

Although STP sees the port trunk as a single port, you still have several physical links between your switches. So, STP is happy because only one (logical trunk) port exists between the switches: You have no danger of creating a switching loop, so you don’t need to block any ports. On the other hand, you still have several physical links between your switches to provide the desired redundancy. Enabling EtherChannel on your redundant links provides three main advantages: ✦ By grouping up to eight physical ports into a single logical port trunk, you add the bandwidth of each port to provide an increased bandwidth in the port trunk. For example, if you group eight Fast Ethernet ports into a port trunk, your total bandwidth in the port trunk would be 8 × 100 Mbps = 800 Mbps. ✦ EtherChannel uses load-balancing algorithms to spread the network traffic across all ports in the port trunk. If one of the ports becomes overloaded, traffic is distributed across the remaining ports. ✦ EtherChannel has built-in fault tolerance: If one port or link fails, EtherChannel sends traffic across the remaining ports in the trunk. Network applications consider the whole EtherChannel port trunk as a single network link, so they are not affected by a single port failure within the EtherChannel trunk. Better yet, STP also considers the whole EtherChannel port trunk as a single link, so STP recalculation is not necessary when a port fails within the EtherChannel trunk. STP recalculation would only be necessary if the whole EtherChannel port trunk fails. The EtherChannel port trunk would only fail when all the ports in the EtherChannel trunk fail.

EtherChannel versions EtherChannel was initially developed by Cisco — actually, a company that Cisco acquired. Later, IEEE released the 8023.3ad standard, which defines an open-standard version of EtherChannel. You can use either version on Cisco switches.

Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) The Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) is the Cisco-proprietary protocol that can only be used on Cisco switches to manage EtherChannel.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) The Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is a protocol defined by the IEEE 802.3ad standard to manage EtherChannel. LACP can be used on any switch brands.

www.it-ebooks.info

EtherChannel

409

Enabling EtherChannel on SW2 and SW5 To use link aggregation on a redundant link between two switches, you need to enable EtherChannel on both switches. You can enable EtherChannel using the interface port-channel Cisco IOS command. To configure EtherChannel on switch SW2 and assign interfaces fa0/3 to fa0/4 to the EtherChannel, run the following commands: SW2>en SW2>configure terminal (or config t) SW2(config)>interface port-channel 1 (or int port-channel 1) SW2(config)>interface range fastethernet 0/3 – 4 SW2(config-if-range)>channel-group 1 mode on SW2(config-if-range)>exit SW2(config)>

You need to run the previous commands on SW5 as well. The interface port-channel 1 command creates the port channel no. 1, also known as EtherChannel 1. The interface range fastethernet 0/3 – 4 command selects a range of physical interfaces to work with. The channel-group 1 mode on command assigns the selected interface, or the selected interface range, to port channel group (EtherChannel) no. 1.

Table 4-2

Choosing a Port (Link) Aggregation Protocol

Channel-group command

Protocol

Behavior

channel-group mode on

LACP

Sends LACP frames to neighbor switch

channel-group mode off

None

Port aggregation is off

channel-group mode auto

PAgP passive

Waits for neighbor switch to send PAgP frames (continued)

www.it-ebooks.info


The channel-group mode command has a few options that control which port aggregation protocol is used to aggregate the physical ports in the EtherChannel you create. Recall that you can choose between two port (or link) aggregation protocols: Cisco’s proprietary Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) and IEEE’s 802.3ad standard named Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). Table 4-2 summarizes the options available with the channel-group mode Cisco IOS command.

Book III Chapter 4

410

Monitoring STP

Table 4-2 (continued) Channel-group command

Protocol

Behavior

channel-group mode passive

LACP passive

Waits for neighbor switch to send LACP frame

channel-group mode desirable

PAgP active

Sends PAgP frames to neighbor switch

channel-group mode active

LACP active

Sends LACP frames to neighbor switch

Monitoring STP By default, STP is enabled on Cisco switches. However, you need to set port options and switch-wide STP options manually. Also, RSTP needs to be enabled manually. The following sections show how to look at the current STP configuration on a switch. To monitor STP configuration on a switch, run the ubiquitous Cisco IOS show command with the spanning-tree option.

Monitoring switch STP configuration You need to be in the configuration terminal mode (using the configure terminal IOS command) for switch-bound configuration monitoring: ✦ Displaying general STP configuration: SW1>show spanning-tree

✦ Displaying UplinkFast configuration: SW1>show spanning-tree uplinkfast

✦ Displaying BackboneFast configuration: SW1>show spanning-tree backbonefast

Monitoring port STP configuration You need to be in the interface configuration terminal mode (configure terminal IOS command and interface selection IOS command) for switch-bound configuration monitoring:

www.it-ebooks.info

Monitoring STP

411

✦ To display PortFast on interface fa0/1, run the following command: SW1>show spanning-tree interface fastethernet 0/1 portfast

✦ To display BPDUGuard on interface fa0/1, run the following command: SW1>show spanning-tree interface fastethernet 0/1 bpduguard

✦ To display BPDUFilter on interface fa0/1, run the following command: SW1>show spanning-tree interface fastethernet 0/1 bpdufilter

Book III Chapter 4


www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 5: Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the purpose and implications of VLANs ✓ Describing the benefits of using VLANs ✓ Creating and managing VLANs ✓ Identifying VLANs using Cisco ISL and IEEE 802.1q frame tagging ✓ Creating and managing VLAN port trunks ✓ Creating and managing EtherChannel logical ports ✓ Understanding the difference between Port Aggregation Protocol

(PAgP) and Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) ✓ Understanding the difference between a VLAN port trunk and an

EtherChannel logical port ✓ Creating and managing VLAN port trunk over EtherChannel logical port ✓ Managing switch port types: access ports and trunk ports ✓ Managing VLAN port trunks using the Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) ✓ Managing the VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) ✓ Managing inter-VLAN routing

V

LANs are an important feature that allows you to subdivide a LAN into several logical (virtual) LANs (VLANs) using the same physical equipment. In other words, you could have some devices communicate within one virtual LAN and other devices communicate within another virtual LAN on the same cables, switches, and routers. You can identify and separate network traffic for different purposes on any given network using VLANs. The nice thing about VLANs is that you don’t need to have separate physical networks to separate traffic within the LAN. VLANs also limit the broadcast domain. Switches do not limit broadcast domains. A broadcast frame sent on a Layer 2 switch will reach every host and network device within that LAN. This may be a problem in a large LAN. VLANs fix this problem: Each VLAN is a broadcast domain. In other words, broadcast frames only reach host and network devices within the VLAN where the broadcast frame is sent. This dramatically improves the performance and reliability of LANs.

www.it-ebooks.info

416

Introducing Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs)

Introducing Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) A VLAN is a logical grouping of network resources and host devices based on the ports where those hosts connect to the switch, or based on the MAC address of those hosts. A VLAN is basically a logical grouping of switch ports or MAC addresses. A VLAN can span more than one physical switch. This is interesting because you could have a VLAN that groups network and host devices across many switches in a network. Data-link frames can be tagged with a VLAN identifier to indicate that they are part of a certain VLAN. Figure 5-1 illustrates three VLANs that group the computer hosts by business department.

Sales VLAN

Engineering VLAN

Marketing VLAN

192.168.72.0/24

192.168.82.0/24

192.168.92.0/24

Claire IP: 192.168.82.6 MAC: 01-09-3c-dc-e1-1f Monica IP: 192.168.92.8 MAC: 01-05-0f-ee-ad-03

Alex IP: 192.168.72.5 MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f Switch SW1 John IP: 192.168.72.7 MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2

Figure 5-1: VLAN segmenting a LAN by business department.

Matthew IP: 192.168.92.10 MAC: ac-25-0f-ac-2e-1f Olivia IP: 192.168.82.9 MAC: ac-15-0f-ac-2e-1f

VLANs keep things tidy The most apparent benefit of using VLANs is keeping things well organized by logically grouping your network along business departments and functions. You can even group network and host devices in VLANs by project. For example, if Engineering starts a new project and it needs to experiment with network connectivity, new hardware, and new software, it is a good idea to group the resources needed for that project into a specific VLAN.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs)

417

This avoids running into a situation where the engineers run a test that would bring down the whole network.

VLANs subdivide the broadcast domain Another benefit is not as apparent as keeping traffic separate along business functions. VLANs break up the broadcast domain: ✦ A collision domain is a logical network space where frames can collide because several hosts are sharing the bandwidth of the network medium and they can potentially send frames on the wire at the same time. It is best to segment networks into several smaller collision domains to lower the chances of having frame collisions. Layer 2 switches break up the collision domain by providing point-to-point links between devices connected to the switch. ✦ A broadcast domain is a logical network space where broadcast frames are sent. A broadcast frame is a data-link frame that is sent to all devices in the network. Broadcast frames are typically used to locate a device in the network. Layer 2 switches forward a broadcast frame out on all their ports except on the port where the broadcast frame entered the switch. This may become a problem in large networks. That’s where VLANs enter the scene. VLANs basically subdivide the LAN into several virtual LANs. Broadcast frames are sent within a LAN. So, if you subdivide the LAN into several smaller VLANs, broadcast frames are only sent within each VLAN. That’s the beauty of VLANs: They break up the broadcast domain.

Referring to Figure 5-1, a computer in the Marketing group VLAN needs to access Marketing servers and computers most of the time. Only rarely does it need to communicate with a computer in the Engineering or Sales department. Subdividing the network in the Marketing, Engineering, and Sales VLANs breaks up the broadcast domain into three subdomains: Marketing, Engineering, and Sales. So, a computer in Marketing broadcasts a frame that only reaches computers in Marketing whenever it needs to find the IP and MAC address of a server in Marketing to connect to it. What if a computer in Marketing needs to find the IP and MAC address of a server in Sales or Engineering? In that case, routing needs to be enabled among those three VLANs. By default, data-link frames do not cross over from one VLAN to another. You need to specifically configure routing between VLANs to allow that. You see how to enable inter-VLAN routing later in this chapter.

www.it-ebooks.info

Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs)

This works quite nicely because most of the time, hosts need to communicate within their own VLAN. They need to communicate with hosts outside of their own VLAN more rarely. That’s why it is best practice to organize VLANs along business departments and functions and/or along projects.

Book III Chapter 5

www.it-ebooks.info

Managing VLANs

419

Create VLANs To create a VLAN on a Cisco switch, you first use the vlan Cisco IOS command with the number that you want to assign to the new VLAN. You can assign a VLAN number between 2 and 4094. Then, you can name that VLAN using a name that identifies the purpose of the VLAN.

Create VLAN example To create the Sales VLAN on switch SW1, run the following commands: SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>vlan 2 SW1(config-vlan)>name Sales SW1(config-vlan)>exit SW1(config)>

To create the other two VLANs shown in Figure 5-1, run the following commands: SW1(config)>vlan 3 SW1(config-vlan)>name Engineering SW1(config)>vlan 4 SW1(config-vlan)>name Marketing SW1(config-vlan)>exit SW1(config)>

Looking at the previous example, you can see that you chose numbers 2, 3, and 4, respectively, for the Sales, Engineering, and Marketing VLANs. Why did you not choose VLAN 1 for the Sales VLAN? VLAN 1 is a specialpurpose VLAN. VLAN 1 is the administrative VLAN. Although you can assign ports to VLAN 1, Cisco recommends reserving that VLAN for switch and network management purposes only. VLAN 1 is the only VLAN that is precreated on a Cisco switch, and you cannot delete it. By default, all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1. Whenever you assign a port to a VLAN, you basically move the port out of VLAN 1 and into a new VLAN that you created.

Static and dynamic VLAN membership How you assign ports to a VLAN depends on whether you’re using static or dynamic VLAN membership.

www.it-ebooks.info


Special-purpose VLANs

Book III Chapter 5

420

Managing VLANs

A switch can have some ports configured with static VLAN membership and some ports configured with dynamic VLAN membership. Static and dynamic VLAN membership modes can coexist on the same switch. However, you should ensure that ports configured with dynamic VLAN membership connect to end devices, not to another switch.

Static VLAN membership With static VLAN membership, you assign a specific port to a specific VLAN using the switchport access vlan Cisco IOS command. Static VLAN membership is also called port-based VLAN membership because you control VLAN membership based on the port where the computer host connects to the switch. This works quite well in small networks. However, if you need to move the computer host to a different port, you need to make sure that the new port is also configured in the correct VLAN. You may also need to change the VLAN membership of the port where the computer host used to connect, to disable access to the VLAN from that port, if that port remains unoccupied, for instance. Port management and port-based (static) VLAN membership can become a daunting management task in larger networks. In that case, you may want to use dynamic VLAN membership instead.

Static VLAN membership port assignment example To assign port 2 on switch SW1 to VLAN 2 (Sales), run the following commands: SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>interface fa0/2 (int fa0/2) SW1(config-if)>switchport access vlan 2 SW1(config-if)>exit SW1(config)>

Dynamic VLAN membership With dynamic VLAN membership, you enable a service called VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) on your switches. The VMPS keeps a table of the MAC addresses of all devices connected to your switch. You can assign each MAC address to a specific VLAN. This is great because, no matter where that device connects to your network, it will always be assigned to the correct VLAN. The MAC address of the device does not change, even if you connect the device to a different port on the switch, or even to a different switch. That MAC address is assigned to a specific VLAN on the VMPS. So, the device will always operate in the correct VLAN, no matter where it connects from.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

422

VLAN Trunking

Some Cisco switch models do not support the Cisco ISL frame-tagging method anymore. For example, the Cisco Catalyst 2960 series switches support only the IEEE 802.1q frame-tagging standard. The Cisco Catalyst 3560 series switches, on the other hand, support both the Cisco ISL frame-tagging method and the IEEE 802.1q frame-tagging standard.

IEEE 802.1q frame tagging (a.k.a. dot1q) The IEEE 802.1q frame-tagging standard changes the data-link frame header: It adds an “802.1q tag” that identifies the VLAN to which the modified datalink frame belongs. The 802.1q tag is 4 bytes long. Hence, the data-link frame size may be a bit larger than a normal Ethernet frame. However, this is not a problem, because all network devices, even computer host network interface cards (NICs), understand the IEEE 802.1q standard. Whenever they see an 802.1q tag in the Ethernet frame, they can simply extract it and process the rest of the data-link (Ethernet) frame. The IEEE 802.1q standard is also known as the dot1q encapsulation method. In fact, you use the switchport trunk encap dot1q Cisco IOS command to set a trunk port to use the IEEE 802.1q VLAN ID frame-tagging standard.

VLAN Trunking Connecting group hosts and network resources by using a single switch may be an efficient setup in a small network, but it does not scale very well. What happens if you need to add more computer hosts into that network but no more ports are available on the SW1 switch? What if one of the computer hosts needs to be moved to a different location? In both cases, you would need to add a second switch, SW2, to the network. But then, how do you interconnect the two switches, SW1 and SW2, and more importantly, how do you manage the three VLANs across two switches? This is when you need VLAN trunking. VLAN trunking allows switches to send VLAN information across interswitch links that are configured as a trunk port. By using trunk ports, VLANs can span more than one switch. You can now add new computer hosts to the second switch, SW2, and have them operate in their corresponding VLAN that now spans SW1 and SW2. Figure 5-2 illustrates an expanded network: You now have two switches, SW1 and SW2, that are interconnected by a trunk port. The three VLANs, Sales, Engineering, and Marketing, now span both switches SW1 and SW2. You can add computer hosts to either SW1 or SW2 and assign them to one of the three VLANs that span the whole network.

www.it-ebooks.info

VLAN Trunking

Alex IP: 192.168.72.5 MAC: 01-05-0f-ac-2e-1f


Monica IP: 192.168.92.8 MAC: 01-05-0f-ee-ad-03

Switch SW1

Matthew IP: 192.168.92.10 MAC: ac-25-0f-de-2e-1a

Switch SW2

Olivia IP: 192.168.82.9 MAC: ac-15-0f-ac-2e-1f

Traffic for Marketing VLAN 192.168.92.0


VLAN trunk ports Carrying data frames for 3 VLANs between switches SW1 and SW2

Traffic for Engineering VLAN 192.168.82.0

Traffic for Engineering VLAN 192.168.72.0

If you also use dynamic VLAN membership, you can move a computer host from SW1 to SW2, because that computer VLAN membership depends on the MAC address of the computer host, not on the SW1 switch port where it used to connect.

EtherChannel and VLANs are friends It is best practice to enable EtherChannel on redundant interswitch links when using STP. It is also best practice to enable EtherChannel on redundant interswitch links when using VLANs. This groups redundant physical ports into a single logical port trunk. This is also called port trunking because you put several ports in a logical trunk. Cisco calls it link aggregation because you group several physical links together to create a single logical (aggregated) link. Both terms are valid because you group several ports in a trunk, thereby grouping several physical links in a single logical link.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 5


Figure 5-2: VLANs spanning two switches interconnected with a VLAN trunk port.

423

424

VLAN Trunking

You can group up to eight ports in a same trunk using EtherChannel. Although switches see the EtherChannel port trunk as a single port, you still have several physical links between your switches. So, only one logical EtherChannel trunk port exists between the switches backed by several physical interswitch links to provide the desired redundancy. Using EtherChannel with VLANs provides the same advantages as using EtherChannel with STP: increased bandwidth, load balancing, and fault tolerance.

Increasing bandwidth with EtherChannel By grouping up to eight physical ports into a single logical port trunk, you add the bandwidth of each port to provide an increased bandwidth in the port trunk. For example, if you group eight Fast Ethernet ports into a port trunk, your total bandwidth in the port trunk would be 8 × 100 Mbps = 800 Mbps.

Balancing the load with EtherChannel EtherChannel uses load-balancing algorithms to spread the network traffic across all ports in the port trunk. If one of the ports becomes overloaded, traffic is distributed across the remaining ports.

Tolerating faults with EtherChannel EtherChannel has built-in fault-tolerance: If one port or link fails, EtherChannel sends traffic across the remaining ports in the trunk. Network applications consider the whole port trunk as a single network link, so they are not affected by a single port failure within the trunk. Better yet, STP also considers the whole port trunk as a single link, so STP recalculation is not necessary when a port fails within the trunk. STP recalculation would only be necessary if the whole port trunk fails. The port trunk would only fail when all the ports in the trunk failed.

EtherChannel versions EtherChannel was initially developed by Cisco — actually, a company that Cisco acquired. Later, IEEE released the 8023.3ad standard, which defines an open version of EtherChannel. You can use either version on Cisco switches.

Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) The Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) is the Cisco-proprietary protocol that can only be used on Cisco switches to manage EtherChannel.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) The Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is a protocol defined by the IEEE 802.3ad standard to manage EtherChannel. LACP can be used on any switch brands.

www.it-ebooks.info

VLAN Trunking

425

VLAN or EtherChannel trunking? Both? VLAN port trunks and EtherChannel port trunks are different. However, switch ports can be configured to be both an EtherChannel port trunk and a VLAN port trunk. It is best practice to configure VLAN port trunks over EtherChannel port trunks whenever redundant interswitch links are available.

VLAN port trunk You create a VLAN port trunk by configuring a switch port to be a trunk port interconnecting two switches. The key point here is that this port may be just a single physical connection, a single link, interconnecting the switches. It is still called a VLAN port trunk because that port carries data for all VLANs in the network. So, it is a port trunk in the sense that it carries data for more than one VLAN. It is not a port trunk in the sense that you group several physical links in a single logical link. So, by default, if you set a single physical or logical port to be a port trunk interconnecting two switches, that port is a VLAN port trunk. The main purpose of a VLAN port trunk is to carry data for several VLANs over a single physical or logical link interconnecting two switches.

You create an EtherChannel port trunk by grouping together several physical ports interconnecting two switches in a single logical port. The key point here is that you group several physical links into a single logical link. So, an EtherChannel port trunk is a port trunk in the sense that you group several physical links into a single logical link. The main purpose of an EtherChannel port trunk is to provide a single logical interswitch link backed by several physical interswitch links to provide increased bandwidth, load balancing, and fault tolerance on that interswitch link.

Configuring EtherChannel and VLAN trunking You can configure ports to be both an EtherChannel port trunk and a VLAN port trunk. Follow these steps: ✦ Create an EtherChannel port trunk: 1. Use the interface port-channel Cisco IOS command to create the EtherChannel port trunk.

www.it-ebooks.info


EtherChannel port trunk

Book III Chapter 5

426

VLAN Trunking

2. Use the interface range Cisco IOS command to select the physical interfaces to assign to the EtherChannel port trunk. 3. Use the channel-group <#> mode command to assign the selected interfaces to the EtherChannel port trunk. ✦ Configure a VLAN trunk over an EtherChannel logical port trunk: 1. Use the interface port-channel Cisco IOS command to select the EtherChannel port. 2. Use the switchport mode trunk Cisco IOS command to set the EtherChannel port as a trunk port. It is best practice to configure VLAN port trunks over EtherChannel port trunks whenever redundant interswitch links are available. Figure 5-3 illustrates two switches that are interconnected with two physical links. Those links are grouped into an EtherChannel. The EtherChannel is configured as a VLAN trunk. The VLAN trunk carries frames for all VLANs in the network. A VLAN trunk over EtherChannel is a bit like a freeway overpass: ✦ The physical Ethernet connections are like the support beams of the overpass. ✦ The EtherChannel logical port supported by the physical Ethernet connections is like the overpass flatbed held up by the support beams. ✦ The VLAN trunk carrying VLAN data frames is like the smooth asphalt surface that carries vehicles on top of the overpass flatbed. The section “Managing VLAN trunk ports,” later in this chapter, shows an example of how to configure a few physical ports in an EtherChannel port trunk. The example then shows how to configure a VLAN port trunk over the EtherChannel port trunk.

Introducing switch port types Switch ports can be used either as access ports or as trunk ports: ✦ You can configure a switch port to be an access port or to be a trunk port manually, using the switchport mode Cisco IOS command. ✦ You can also use the Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) to set the switch port operation mode automatically: • DTP sets a switch port to be a trunk port if the port connects to another switch. • DTP sets the port to be an access port if the port connects to an end device, such as a computer host or an IP telephone.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

428

VLAN Trunking

Access ports can only be members of one VLAN, and they only carry traffic for that VLAN. Access ports always carry traffic in native Ethernet format. The switch removes the VLAN ID tag from the Ethernet frame before it hands off the frame out on an access port. Similarly, the switch adds the VLAN ID tag to Ethernet frames it receives through an access port from an end device. If the switch receives an Ethernet frame tagged with a VLAN ID from an access port, it drops the frame because it considers it invalid. This is a “free” security feature: It prevents connecting a switch to a port that should be used by a single end device. It is “free” because the switch does not have to do anything special to provide this security feature: Switches simply do not look at the source field of an Ethernet frame when that frame comes in on an access port. Recall that tagging an Ethernet frame with a VLAN ID increases the size of the frame over the normal Ethernet frame size. So, the switch sees an oversized frame coming in on an access port: It drops it as invalid because it is oversized. The VLAN assigned to an access port is also called the configured VLAN. There is an exception to the rule that an access port can only be a member of one VLAN and that it can only carry traffic for that VLAN. Access ports can be part of a single data VLAN and carry data frames only for that VLAN. However, access ports can simultaneously be part of a VLAN reserved for Voice over IP (VoIP) and carry VoIP frames for that VLAN. In other words, access ports on newer switches can be configured with two VLANs: one VLAN for data and one VLAN for VoIP. This allows you to connect both a computer host and an IP telephone to the same access port.

Trunk ports Trunk ports are ports that connect a switch to another switch. By default, switch ports are not configured as trunk ports. You need to configure trunk ports either manually, using the switchport mode Cisco IOS command, or automatically, using Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP). Before you configure trunk ports you need to ensure the following: ✦ You have Fast Ethernet (100-Mbps) or Gigabit Ethernet (1-Gbps) ports on your switch. Trunk ports cannot be configured on normal Ethernet ports (10-Mbps) because they are not fast enough to carry the additional traffic load generated by several VLANs. ✦ You interconnect your switches using crossover cables. Switches are always interconnected using crossover cables, not straight-through cables. Newer Cisco switches have a feature called SmartPort. SmartPort adapts connection parameters according to the type of cable that is plugged in to the port and according to the device at the other end of the cable. Hence, using the Cisco SmartPort feature, you could theoretically use any cable. However, for the CCNA test purposes, switches are always connected using crossover cables.

www.it-ebooks.info

VLAN Trunking

429

To configure trunk ports, you can do either of the following: ✦ Use the switchport mode Cisco IOS command. ✦ Use the Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP). DTP sets a switch port to be a trunk port if the port connects to another switch. DTP sets the port to be an access port if the port connects to an end device, such as a computer host or an IP telephone. Trunk ports are members of all VLANs, and they carry traffic for all VLANs. Trunk ports carry traffic in Ethernet frames that are tagged with VLAN ID information. When you create a trunk port, you need to choose one of the frame-tagging methods discussed earlier: the Cisco ISL proprietary tagging method or the IEEE 802.1q tagging standard. You can use the switchport trunk encapsulation Cisco IOS command to choose a frame-tagging method. Switches look at the source field of an Ethernet frame when the frame comes in on a trunk port, and they process the frame. The switch extracts the VLAN ID from the Cisco ISL tag or from the IEEE 802.1q tag: ✦ If the frame destination is an end device on the switch, the switch rebuilds the Ethernet frame without the VLAN ID tag and forwards the frame out on the access port connecting to the end device.

Managing VLAN trunk ports Read the following sections to find out more about DTP and to see a complete example of how to configure a few physical ports in an EtherChannel port trunk. The example then shows how to configure a VLAN port trunk over the EtherChannel port trunk.

Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) The Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) is used to configure VLAN port trunks automatically. DTP sets a switch port to be a trunk port if the port connects to another switch. It sets the port to be an access port if the port connects to an end device, such as a computer host or an IP telephone. DTP can also set the VLAN ID tag encapsulation method. Two VLAN ID tag encapsulation methods are available on Cisco switches: ✦ The Cisco ISL proprietary VLAN ID tag encapsulation method ✦ The IEEE 802.1q VLAN ID tagging standard, also known as the dot1q encapsulation method

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 5


✦ If the frame destination is an end device on another switch, the switch forwards the tagged Ethernet frame on an outgoing trunk port that reaches that destination switch.

430

VLAN Trunking

DTP helps two switches negotiate the choice of one of these VLAN ID tagging methods. Whenever DTP determines that a switch port connects to another switch, it communicates with DTP on the remote switch to set up a VLAN port trunk according to the mode of the ports on each switch.

Configuring switch port DTP operation mode Switch ports are either ready to set up a trunk with another switch port or not ready to set up a trunk with another switch port. Five operation modes determine whether a switch port becomes a trunk port. You can configure these five modes on each physical port on a switch. Switch ports can be operating in any of the following five modes.

Access A port in access mode is a port that is not available to set up a VLAN port trunk, even if DTP on the neighbor switch port tries to set up a VLAN port trunk. You set a port in access operating mode if it connects to end devices, such as computer hosts. A port in access operating mode is a member of a single VLAN, and it carries data only for that VLAN. Access ports do not send or receive any DTP frames: DTP is disabled on these ports. You can use the switchport mode access Cisco IOS command to set up a port in access operating mode.

Trunk A port in trunk mode is a port that is available to set up a VLAN port trunk, even if DTP on the neighbor switch port does not try to set up a VLAN port trunk. In other words, no matter what the neighbor switch is doing, this port, in trunk operating mode, will try to set up a port trunk. It will succeed if the port on the remote switch is in any operating mode other than access. You can use the switchport mode trunk Cisco IOS command to set up a port in trunk operating mode.

Nonegotiate A port in nonegotiate mode is a port that does not send or receive any DTP frames: DTP is disabled on these ports. You can set a trunk port or an access port in nonegotiate operating mode. Anytime you set a port in nonegotiate mode, you are expected to set the operating mode of the port manually, instead of relying on DTP to do that. You can use the switchport nonegotiate Cisco IOS command to set up a port in nonegotiate operating mode.

www.it-ebooks.info

VLAN Trunking

431

Dynamic desirable A port in dynamic desirable mode is actively ready to become a trunk port. It sends and receives DTP frames. It actively seeks to set up a trunk with its neighbor port. It sets up a trunk port with its neighbor if the port at the other end of the link is a trunk port, a dynamic desirable port, or a dynamic auto port. You can use the switchport mode dynamic desirable Cisco IOS command to set up a port in dynamic desirable operating mode.

Dynamic auto A port in dynamic auto mode is passively ready to become a trunk port. It receives DTP frames but does not send any. It sets up a trunk port with its neighbor port if the port at the other end of the link is either a trunk port or a dynamic desirable port. Cisco switch ports operate by default in dynamic auto mode. You can use the switchport mode dynamic auto Cisco IOS command to set up a port in dynamic auto operating mode.

Enabling EtherChannel and port trunking In the previous chapter, you discovered how to set up an EtherChannel. Here you review how to set up an EtherChannel and you see how to create a VLAN port trunk over that EtherChannel.

To use link aggregation on a redundant link between two switches, you need to enable EtherChannel on both switches. You can enable EtherChannel using the interface port-channel Cisco IOS command. To configure EtherChannel on switch SW2 and on switch SW5 and to assign interfaces fa0/3 to fa0/4 to the EtherChannel, run the following commands on SW2 and SW5: SW2>en SW2>configure terminal (or config t) SW2(config)>interface port-channel 1 (or int port-channel 1) SW2(config)>interface range fastethernet 0/3 – 4 SW2(config-if-range)>channel-group 1 mode on SW2(config-if-range)>exit SW2(config)>

Here are the details of the preceding commands: ✦ The interface port-channel 1 command creates the port channel no. 1, also known as EtherChannel 1.

www.it-ebooks.info


Creating port channel (EtherChannel) 1

Book III Chapter 5

432

VLAN Trunking ✦ The interface range fastethernet 0/3 - 4 command selects a range of physical interfaces to work with. ✦ The channel-group 1 mode on command assigns the selected interface, or the selected interface range, to port channel group (EtherChannel) 1. ✦ The channel-group mode command has a few options that control which port aggregation protocol is used to aggregate the physical ports in the EtherChannel you create. You can choose between two-port (or link) aggregation protocols: • Cisco’s proprietary Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) • IEEE’s 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) standard Table 5-1 summarizes the options available with the channel-group mode Cisco IOS command.

Table 5-1

Choosing a Port (Link) Aggregation Protocol

Channel-group command

Protocol

Behavior

channel-group mode on

LACP

Sends LACP frames to the neighbor switch

channel-group mode off

None

Port (link) aggregation is off

channel-group mode auto

PAgP passive

Waits for the neighbor switch to send PAgP frames

channel-group mode passive

LACP passive

Waits for the neighbor switch to send LACP frames

channel-group mode desirable

PAgP active

Sends PAgP frames to the neighbor switch

channel-group mode active

LACP active

Sends LACP frames to the neighbor switch

Configuring a VLAN port trunk over port channel (EtherChannel) 1 To manually configure port trunking over EtherChannel 1, run the following commands on SW2 and SW5: SW2>en SW2>configure terminal (or config t) SW2(config)>interface port-channel 1 (or int port-channel 1) SW2(config-if)>switchport trunk encap dot1q

www.it-ebooks.info

VLAN Trunking

433

SW2(config-if)>switchport mode trunk SW2(config-if)>switchport nonegotiate SW2(config-if)>exit SW2(config)>

Here are the details of the preceding commands: ✦ The switchport trunk encap dot1q command sets the IEEE 802.1q VLAN ID tagging standard on the VLAN port trunk. ✦ The switchport mode trunk command enables port trunking over the selected port channel group. ✦ The switchport nonegotiate command disables automatic port negotiation on the trunk port that you just created over the port channel group (EtherChannel) 1. You did everything manually here: ✦ You used the switchport nonegotiate command to disable DTP negotiation. ✦ You set the operating mode of the EtherChannel port manually, using the switchport mode trunk command. Alternately, you can use DTP to automatically create the VLAN port trunk over the EtherChannel and to automatically negotiate the VLAN ID tagging method used by SW2 and SW5. To do this, you would need to

✦ Set the other port to either dynamic auto or dynamic desirable To let DTP automatically configure port trunking over EtherChannel 1, run the following commands: SW2>en SW2>configure terminal (or config t) SW2(config)>interface port-channel 1 (or int port-channel 1) SW2(config-if)>switchport mode dynamic desirable SW2(config-if)>exit SW2(config)>

You need to run the previous commands on SW5 as well. However, you can leave the SW5 port in dynamic auto operating mode because the SW2 port is dynamic desirable: SW2 initiates the DTP negotiation (dynamic desirable) while SW5 can just wait (dynamic auto).

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ Set at least one of the EtherChannel ports to dynamic desirable

Book III Chapter 5

434

VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP)

VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) You previously discovered how to create VLANs manually, using the vlan Cisco IOS command. Read the following sections to see how you can use the VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) to create and manage VLANs automatically.

VTP creates and manages VLANs VTP is a data-link (Layer 2) protocol that facilitates the management of VLANs across several switches in a network. Using VTP, you do not need to log in to each switch to create and name each VLAN manually. Managing VLANs manually on each switch in your network works well for a few switches. VTP is a better solution in large enterprise networks.

VTP does not manage VLAN port membership You still need to assign ports to each VLAN either manually or automatically: ✦ Manually: You can assign ports to each VLAN on each switch, using the switchport access vlan Cisco IOS command. ✦ Automatically: You can let VMPS (VLAN Membership Policy Server) assign ports to each VLAN across your network according to the MAC address of each device connecting to the LAN.

VTP benefits Here are the advantages of using VTP to manage VLANs in your network: ✦ Simplified VLAN management: Managing VLANs manually on each switch in a large network can become a management nightmare. VTP solves this problem by centralizing VLAN management on a single switch, or a few switches, and keeping all other switches in sync, automatically. ✦ Flexible VLAN management: VTP keeps track of any VLAN change. Whenever a VLAN is created or removed, VTP notifies all switches in the network about the change with no intervention of the network administrator.

VTP domain VTP works with VTP domains: group of switches that have the same VTP domain name. VTP domains allow a network administrator to have different VLAN management policies for different parts of the network. VTP manages switches within each VTP domain. So, you can set certain management rules for one VTP domain that includes switches at the head office, for example. You can set different management rules for VTP domains that include

www.it-ebooks.info


435

switches at branch offices. A switch can only be in one VTP domain at a time.

VTP server VTP manages VLANs using a switch that acts as the VLAN manager in the VTP domain. This switch is called the VTP server or VTP domain controller.

VTP switch operating mode A switch can operate in three modes in VTP: server, client, and transparent.

Server mode A switch in server mode is the VLAN manager in the domain, the VTP domain controller. The VTP server can create, change, and delete VLANs in the VTP domain and propagate VLAN changes to the other switches in the VTP domain. You can use the vtp mode server Cisco IOS command to configure a switch to be a VTP server. VLAN configurations are saved in NVRAM. This is the default mode for all Cisco switches.

A switch in client mode gets VLAN configuration information from the VTP server and sends and receives updates to/from other switches. A VTP client cannot create, change, or delete VLANs. You can use the vtp mode client Cisco IOS command to configure a switch to be a VTP server. VLAN configuration is not saved in NVRAM.

Transparent mode A switch in transparent mode does not take into account VLAN configuration information pushed by the VTP server. It maintains its own isolated list of VLANs. A VTP transparent switch sends updates to other switches about its own VLANs. However, it does not accept VLANs pushed by the VTP server. A VTP transparent switch can create, change, or delete its own local VLANs. You can use the vtp mode transparent Cisco IOS command to configure a switch to be a VTP server. VLAN configuration is saved in NVRAM.

www.it-ebooks.info


Client mode

Book III Chapter 5

436


Best practice for VTP switch operating mode It is best practice to configure a core switch as a VTP server and configure all other switches as VTP clients. Core switches are faster, more resilient, and more easily accessed by all switches in the network. Always configure the VTP server on a core switch or on the fastest switch in your network. Cisco switches are by default configured to be a VTP server. Anytime a new switch is added to the network, configure it as a VTP client before connecting it to the network. This is to avoid the new switch pushing out its empty VLAN configuration before it gets the current VLAN configuration from the VTP server in the network. If the new switch pushes out its empty VLAN configuration before it gets the current VLAN configuration from the VTP server, it can erase all VLAN information in the network.

VTP updates The VTP server distributes information about new VLANs defined in the VTP domain using a VTP notification. VTP notifications are sent to all switches in the domain. VTP client switches forward the VTP notification on their downstream trunk ports. Each VTP client switch updates its VLAN database when it receives a VTP update notification. Each VTP notification frame has a VTP revision number. Every time the VTP server sends new information, it increases the VTP revision number. VTP client switches keep track of the VTP revision number to make sure that they update their VLAN information with each VTP revision.

VTP pruning VTP pruning saves some bandwidth on trunk ports and on switches by limiting the number of VTP-update transmissions. When the VTP pruning option is enabled in a VTP domain, VTP client switches only receive VTP-update frames for VLANs that are enabled on each switch. In other words, if a VTP client switch has ports in the Sales VLAN and in the Marketing VLAN, but has no ports in the Engineering VLAN, that switch will only receive VTP updates for the Sales and Marketing VLANs. The VTP pruning option is disabled by default, but it’s a very useful option, so it is best practice to enable it.

VLAN ID range Two ranges of VLAN IDs are available: ✦ The normal VLAN range is comprised of VLANs with IDs of 1 to 1005. ✦ The extended VLAN range is comprised of VLANs with IDs of 1006 to 4094.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

438

Routing Traffic from One VLAN to Another

VTP server switch SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>vtp mode server SW1(config)>vtp domain my_vtp_domain SW1(config)>vtp password my_password

VTP client switches SW1>en SW1>configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)>vtp mode client SW1(config)>vtp domain my_vtp_domain SW1(config)>vtp password my_password

Monitoring and troubleshooting VTP To monitor your VTP configuration, you can use the show vtp Cisco IOS commands on switches in your network. Here is an example: SW1>show vtp status

The most common source of problems with VTP is having different VTP domain names or different VTP passwords on your switches. Make sure that the show vtp status command reports the same VTP domain name and the same VTP password on all switches in your network. Another source of problems with VTP is having mismatches between the VTP switch operating modes. Make sure that only one of your switches is set to operate in VTP server mode. Set the other switches to operate in VTP client mode or in VTP transparent mode. Remember that Cisco switches are set to operate in VTP server mode by default, so you need to keep your fastest switch in the default VTP server operating mode and set the other switches to operate in VTP client mode or in VTP transparent mode.

Routing Traffic from One VLAN to Another At the beginning of this chapter, you read that data-link frames do not cross over from one VLAN to another, by default. VLANs break up broadcast domains at the data-link layer (Layer 2). You need to specifically configure routing between VLANs to allow data-link frames to travel from one VLAN to another.

www.it-ebooks.info


439

This section describes how to configure inter-VLAN routing and discusses the various options available to implement inter-VLAN routing using routers, network (Layer 3) switches, or both. Each VLAN represents it own isolated LAN (virtual LAN). Imagine that you have 15 computers in three different business departments, five computers in each department. You create three networks of five computers. The five computers are interconnected with each other in each network. But, the three networks are not connected. To interconnect the networks, you need a router or a network (Layer 3) switch. It’s the same with VLANs: You have three virtual LANs, isolated logically. They are interconnected physically, but the network is logically divided along three departments just like in the previous example. As in this example, each five computer sets can communicate within their department VLAN, but they cannot communicate with a computer in another department VLAN. To enable inter-VLAN communication, you need to interconnect the VLANs with a router or a network (Layer 3) switch.

One router per VLAN

✦ Advantages: Easy to set up and can use inexpensive routers. ✦ Disadvantages: • Cost: Even if you use inexpensive routers, the cost still adds up pretty quickly. • Speed: Routers are slower than switches. It is best to do as much as possible with switches. • Latency: Routers have much higher latency than switches. Also, interconnecting several routers, each handling just one VLAN, is a waste of routing capability.

One large router with one port per VLAN This method requires one large router that has enough ports to connect to each VLAN. Router prices tend to increase proportionately with the number of ports. So, although this solution may be fairly easy to set up and administer, it is more expensive.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 5


This method requires one router for each VLAN. You interconnect the routers. You can choose inexpensive routers because you only need one port to connect to the VLAN and one port to connect to another router. However, routers, especially inexpensive ones, are typically slower than switches. So, this solution does not offer the best performance.

440

Routing Traffic from One VLAN to Another ✦ Advantages: Easy to set up, easy to maintain, and good performance. ✦ Disadvantages: • Cost: More router ports means higher cost. • Speed: Although performance is good, routers are slower than switches. You may find that you can get a network (Layer 3) switch for less money than a large router and have the same or better performance.

One subinterface per VLAN (router-on-a-stick) This method has a funny name, but it is an interesting inter-VLAN routing option. Router-on-a-stick leverages the capability to configure trunk ports on a router. It requires at minimum one router with one Fast Ethernet physical interface that can be trunked. You configure subinterfaces on one physical router interface and have each subinterface connect to each VLAN. You use the router to route between subinterfaces. This method provides better performance, and it’s cheaper than having one router per VLAN. It’s also cheaper than having one large router with enough ports to connect to each VLAN. ✦ Advantages: • Cost: Cheaper than one router per VLAN or one large router. • Good performance: Much better latency than one router per VLAN. ✦ Disadvantages: • Need to configure subinterfaces on the router. • Physical interface is a single point of failure.

Network (Layer 3) switch This method is similar to router-on-a-stick, except that the virtual interfaces connecting to each VLAN are created internally on a network (Layer 3) switch, not on an external router. This provides better performance than router-on-a-stick. The network (Layer 3) switch must also support routing traffic between the virtual interfaces. Some Cisco switches do not support this feature. For example, Cisco Catalyst 2960 series do not support routing traffic between the virtual interfaces. However, Cisco Catalyst 3550 and 3560 series do. It is best practice to use a core switch such a Cisco Catalyst 6500 series to handle inter-VLAN routing. This method provides the best performance, and it may be cheaper than using routers for inter-VLAN data frame routing. The choice depends on The number of VLANs in the network, the budget available, and performance expectations

www.it-ebooks.info


441

In most combinations of these criteria, network (Layer 3) switches are the best choice. The advantages and disadvantages of using a network switch are as follows: ✦ Advantages: • Cost: Cheaper than routing inter-VLAN data frames with routers. • Best performance: Switches are faster than routers. ✦ Disadvantages: • Not supported on all Cisco switches. • Need to configure virtual interfaces and routing between virtual interfaces.

Book III Chapter 5


www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 6: Voice over IP (VoIP) Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the purpose and implications of VoIP ✓ Describing the quality of service (QoS) used with VoIP ✓ Differentiating between IP priority at network Layer 3 and class of ser-

vice (CoS) at data link Layer 2 ✓ Describing how a Cisco IP phone produces VoIP packets ✓ Describing how a Cisco IP phone interacts with a Cisco switch ✓ Describing how a Cisco IP phone interacts with a computer host con-

nected to its PC port ✓ Describing Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) ✓ Differentiating between trusting and nontrusting switch access ports ✓ Configure switch access ports for VoIP traffic

R

ead this chapter to find out about Voice over IP (VoIP). VoIP defines a group of network applications, network protocols, and network devices that carry voice signals over the Internet Protocol (IP). More organizations are choosing to use IP telephony to save costs by concentrating their phone and data traffic over the same IP infrastructure. Using industry standards, Cisco IP phones, Cisco VoIP gateways, Cisco switches, and Cisco routers can provide IP telephony over the same IP network that is used to provide data connectivity. Cisco IP telephony solution is now part of the Cisco Unified Communications solution framework that provides a very large array of data, storage, and telephony networking solutions. Cisco IP telephony provides advanced features such as voice mail, contact centers, fax services, advanced call routing and call forwarding, caller ID, and global corporate calling extension numbers. Cisco IP telephony offers all the communications features one has come to expect from a major telephony solutions provider, yet without the cost of a dedicated corporate phone line network.

www.it-ebooks.info

446

Introducing Voice over IP (VoIP)

Introducing Voice over IP (VoIP) VoIP protocols and network applications digitize the audio signal received from an IP phone handset microphone. Next, VoIP protocols and network applications cut the digital signal into small pieces and wrap those signal bits in IP packets. The IP packets are sent over the network to an IP telephony gateway that forwards those packets to the destination IP telephone. The destination IP telephone unwraps the IP packets, extracts the digital audio bits, reassembles them in order, converts them to analog sound, and sends the analog sound signal out on the handset speaker. Several networking products and networking protocols work together to provide the link between two IP phones. However, those networking products, networking standards, and networking protocols are beyond the scope of the CCNA test. You need to know though that an IP phone typically connects to an access port on a Layer 2 switch. That access port needs to be configured for VoIP by enabling the VoIP VLAN and configuring quality of service on the switch and on the access port itself.

VoIP Requires Quality of Service (QoS) Have you ever noticed sound breaking off at times, or poor sound quality, when using audio instant-messaging programs or IP telephony products and services? This is typically due to VoIP without QoS or VoIP with poor QoS configuration. Without proper QoS configuration, IP packets carrying sound bits are not sent with high priority. They may get sent behind other packets. This causes the sound to break off or be delayed, or be “scratchy.” Voice traffic sent over IP networks requires quality of service (QoS) because sound deteriorates if VoIP packets are not transmitted in an orderly and efficient manner. Consider the following example. When you send an e-mail, the text is cut into smaller pieces and sent over IP. The receiving e-mail application can simply reorder the text before it displays it, if the text arrives out of order. Also, the receiving e-mail application can request a retransmit and wait to receive the whole text before it displays it, if an IP packet got lost in the transmission. IP phones are more sensitive to IP packet transmission errors and delays. If an IP packet carrying part of a sound gets lost, the IP phone can either render the conversation without that sound, in which case the sound breaks off, or the IP phone can request a retransmit of that packet, in which case you hear a pause in the conversation. In both cases, the sound quality is poor. This is why IP telephony packets are always sent with the highest priority. This is also why you need to configure your switch and your access port to support the VoIP VLAN and to enable QoS on the switch and on the access port.

www.it-ebooks.info

Cisco IP Phone

447

VoIP uses QoS at two OSI layers: ✦ IP priority at the network layer (Layer 3) ✦ Class of service (CoS) at the data link layer (Layer 2) Both values are set by default to 0. VoIP sets them to 5: higher priority.

Class of service (CoS) (IEEE 802.1p) Data-link (Layer 2) frames can be configured with a certain class of service (CoS). By default, CoS is set to 0. Data-link frames carrying VoIP traffic are usually configured with CoS 5 (higher priority). A switch always processes and sends a VoIP data-link frame with CoS 5 before a regular data-link frame with CoS 0. The class of service (CoS) data-link (Layer 2) option is defined in the IEEE 802.1p standard. Data-link frames are tagged with the VLAN ID, either by the Cisco ISL VLAN ID tagging method or by the IEEE 802.1q (dot1q) VLAN ID tagging standard to identify the VLAN each data link belongs to. The CoS value is the priority field in the 802.1q (do1q) VLAN tag field. Hence, every data-link frame carries a VLAN ID and a CoS value in the VLAN ID 802.1q tag. Book III Chapter 6

Cisco IP Phone

The Cisco IP phone looks and behaves like a normal phone. It has all the features of a typical business-class phone set, such as a large display, handsfree communication, dual or multiple lines, call waiting, call forwarding, caller ID display, and an illuminated keyboard. The Cisco IP phone is also a three-port Layer 2 switch. Here are the three ports and their usage: ✦ Uplink (10/100 SW) connection: This port is reserved to connect upstream to the network switch access port. ✦ PC (10/100 PC) connection: This port can be used to connect a computer host to the phone. ✦ Internal connection: The third port is an internal port that connects to the IP phone’s central processing unit (CPU). Figure 6-2 illustrates the ports available on a Cisco IP phone.

www.it-ebooks.info

Voice over IP (VoIP)

The Cisco IP phone is an end device that connects to a switch access port configured for VoIP. You see how to configure the switch access port for VoIP later in this chapter. Here you discover a bit about the Cisco IP phone device. Figure 6-1 illustrates a Cisco IP phone.

448

Cisco IP Phone

Figure 6-1: Cisco IP phone.

Figure 6-2: Cisco IP phone ports.

www.it-ebooks.info

Cisco IP Phone

449

You connect the uplink port on the Cisco IP phone to the upstream switch access port. The Cisco IP phone operates in the VoIP VLAN. You can connect a computer host to the PC port on the Cisco IP phone. The computer host operates in the data VLAN configured on the upstream switch access port. Now, you realize that the uplink port that connects the Cisco IP phone to the upstream switch access port operates like a VLAN trunk port: It interconnects two switches, the upstream network switch and the Cisco IP phone mini-switch, and carries data for two VLANs — the data VLAN and the VoIP VLAN. In the previous chapter, you read that a Cisco switch access port can carry data for two VLANs: a data VLAN and a VoIP VLAN. Figure 6-3 illustrates a configuration where you have ✦ A Cisco IP phone connected to an upstream switch access port ✦ A computer host connected to the Cisco IP phone

Switch SW3

fa0/24

Cisco IP Phone 7960 IP: 192.168.75.6 MAC: 07-a1-3f-ee-f5-c2 PC port


The Cisco IP phone builds data-link frames carrying VoIP and sets the CoS at 5 (high priority). It tags the VoIP data-link frames with the VoIP VLAN ID. Next, the Cisco IP phone sends the VoIP frames out on the uplink port to the upstream switch access port. You would think that the upstream switch processes the VoIP frames with high priority and forwards them to the Cisco VoIP gateway as quickly as possible. Unfortunately, by default, this is not the case. You must specifically configure the upstream switch to trust the IP priority (5) and CoS level (5) set by the Cisco IP phone in the VoIP packets. By default, in untrusted mode, switches override IP priority and CoS values they receive, with the default low priority value (0). You see how to configure the upstream switch in the section “Configuring VoIP on Cisco Switches,” later in this chapter.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 6


Figure 6-3: Cisco IP phone and computer connected to a single upstream access port.

Uplink port

450

Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP)

The Cisco IP phone may receive data frames from the PC port if a computer host is connected. The Cisco IP phone leaves the CoS at 0, the default lowpriority value. The Cisco IP phone tags these frames with the data VLAN ID. Next, it sends the data frames on the uplink port to the upstream switch access port. The upstream switch processes the data frames with normal (low) priority and forwards them to the appropriate outgoing switch port. This is the typical operation flow. You can change the typical operation flow by changing the following: ✦ The default configuration of the upstream switch ✦ The default configuration of the Cisco IP phone These configuration options are beyond the scope of the CCNA test, but you do need to know how to configure the upstream switch to trust the IP priority and CoS level set by the Cisco IP phone in the VoIP packets.

Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) Cisco created the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), which allows a Cisco switch to discover the devices connected to its ports. CDP is enabled by default on Cisco switches. CDP is also enabled by default on Cisco IP phones. This protocol is useful in VoIP environments. CDP allows the upstream switch to discover the Cisco IP phone and to negotiate interconnection parameters that are optimum for VoIP.

Negotiating VLAN The upstream switch communicates with the Cisco IP phone using CDP to set up an interconnection link that allows the Cisco IP phone to send VoIP packets on its uplink port back to the upstream switch, either in the VoIP VLAN or in the data VLAN.

Negotiating CoS The upstream switch also communicates with the Cisco IP phone using CDP to set up an interconnection link that allows the Cisco IP phone to send VoIP packets on its uplink port back to the upstream switch, either with default CoS level 0 or with high-priority CoS level 5.

Negotiating Cisco IP phone PC port You can connect a computer host to the PC port on the Cisco IP phone. The computer host operates in the data VLAN configured on the upstream switch access port. By default, the Cisco IP phone leaves the CoS at 0 on data frames received from the PC port. This default option can be changed

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuring VoIP on Cisco Switches

451

on the Cisco IP phone. It can also by changed by the upstream switch. The upstream switch can communicate with the Cisco IP phone using CDP to set up the PC port to be trusting or nontrusting: ✦ A trusting PC port on the Cisco IP phone trusts the IP priority and CoS level set on incoming IP packets by the computer host connected to the PC port. If, for example, the computer host connected in the Cisco IP phone PC port sets the IP priority and the CoS level at 3, and the Cisco IP phone PC port is trusting, it will keep the IP priority and the CoS level at 3. ✦ A nontrusting PC port on the Cisco IP phone does not trust the IP priority and CoS level set on incoming IP packets by the computer host connected to the PC port. If, for example, the computer host connected in the Cisco IP phone PC port sets the IP priority and the CoS level at 3, and the Cisco IP phone PC port is nontrusting, the Cisco IP phone will reset the IP priority and the CoS level at 0, the default value for IP data packets.


The following sections describe how you configure an access port to support both data and voice VLANs. You also find out how to enable QoS on the switch and on the access port to support high IP priority and high CoS required by VoIP traffic.

Enabling QoS on the upstream switch To configure VoIP support on the upstream switch, you first need to enable quality of service (QoS) on the switch. To do this, you use the mls Cisco IOS command. For example, to enable QoS on the switch, run the following commands: SW3>en SW3>configure terminal (or config t) SW3>mls qos

Configuring switch access port to trust CoS Next, you need to configure the upstream switch access port to trust the IP priority and class of service (CoS) settings of incoming packets from the Cisco IP phone.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 6


Switch access ports can operate in two VLANs: a data VLAN and a VoIP VLAN. This allows you to connect both a computer host and an IP telephone to the same upstream access port. This setup is illustrated in Figure 6-2.

452


For example, to configure the upstream switch access port to trust the CoS level set by the Cisco IP phone on its IP packets, run the following commands: SW3>en SW3>configure terminal (or config t) SW3(config)>interface f0/24 SW3(config-if)>mls qos trust cos SW3(config-if)>switchport priority extend trust

Enabling VoIP VLAN on the switch access port To complete the configuration of VoIP support on the upstream switch, you need to enable the VoIP VLAN on the upstream switch access port. You also configure the VoIP VLAN to use the IEEE 802.1p (CoS) class of service setting to decide the priority of IP packets coming in through the port. For example, to configure the upstream switch access port to trust the CoS level set by the Cisco IP phone on its IP packets, run the following commands: SW3>en SW3>configure terminal (or config t) SW3(config)>interface f0/24 SW3(config-if)>switchport voice vlan dot1p SW3(config-if)>switchport mode access SW3(config-if)>switchport access vlan 7 SW3(config-if)>switchport voice vlan 5

Here, you configure the upstream switch access port to use CoS to determine the priority of incoming IP packets. You also set the port to be an access port, and you enable two VLANs on the access port: a VoIP VLAN with VLAN ID 5 and a data VLAN with VLAN ID 7.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting a Switch Using Cisco IOS Exam Objectives ✓ Describing Cisco hardware and software products and their purposes ✓ Gathering troubleshooting information about a Cisco switch ✓ Inspecting Cisco switch memory contents ✓ Using the show tech-support and the debug commands to inspect a

Cisco switch ✓ Troubleshooting switch connectivity ✓ Gathering troubleshooting information about your network ✓ Discovering your network using Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) ✓ Troubleshooting the startup configuration ✓ Troubleshooting the running configuration

T

roubleshooting a Cisco switch is very similar to troubleshooting a Cisco router. Most IOS troubleshooting commands, such as the debug command, are the same for switches and routers, but the output differs in some cases. Most troubleshooting tools are available for both switches and routers, such as the ping and trace route tools, or the Cisco Network Assistant (CNA). Some troubleshooting tools are only available for routers, such as the Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) and SDM Express. Other troubleshooting tools are only available for switches, such as the Cisco Device Manager. You learn about switch troubleshooting tools and IOS commands in this chapter.

Troubleshooting Cisco Switches Read this section to find out how to troubleshoot your Cisco switch using IOS commands and graphical user interface tools, such as the Cisco Device Manager and the Cisco Network Assistant (CNA).

www.it-ebooks.info

456

Troubleshooting Cisco Switches

Gathering information about the switch There are several commands that allow you to gather information about your switch. You review information gathering and troubleshooting commands in this section and find out about some additional commands. You can also use the IOS graphical user interfaces (GUI tools) to gather information about your switch.

Obtaining the IOS version The first step of the troubleshooting process is finding the particular version of the Cisco IOS that operates your switch. There are several ways to find out the IOS version on your switch: ✦ The boot process output messages display the IOS version. ✦ The IOS image file name contains the IOS version. ✦ The show version IOS command displays the IOS version. ✦ GUI tools display the IOS version.

Obtaining IOS version from boot output The Cisco IOS version and release numbers are displayed during the startup process. Here is an example of the boot loader output displayed on the console of a Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch. The lines in bold font show the version and release numbers of the IOS installed on this switch. Loading “flash:c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY/c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY.bin”...@@@@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ File “flash:c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY/c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY.bin” uncompressed and installed, entry point: 0x3000 executing... Restricted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at FAR sec. 52.227-19 and subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS sec. 252.227-7013. cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, California 95134-1706 Cisco IOS Software, C2960 Software (C2960-LANLITE-M), Version 12.2(37)EY, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc2) Copyright (c) 1986-2007 by Cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Thu 28-Jun-07 18:07 by antonino Image text-base: 0x00003000, data-base: 0x00D00000

www.it-ebooks.info


457

Obtaining IOS version from the IOS image file name Observe that the Cisco IOS c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY.bin image file is loaded in the preceding example. You can see the Cisco IOS version and release numbers in the filename of the Cisco IOS image file. The image file is named according to the: ✦ Model of the Cisco switch: Catalyst 2960 (c2960) ✦ Edition of the IOS (lanlite) ✦ Version, release of the IOS: Version 12.2 release 37.EY (122-37.EY)

Obtaining IOS version using the Show version command You can use the show version IOS command to verify the IOS version and release numbers of the IOS running on a Cisco switch. You run the show version IOS command in privileged EXEC mode, as shown in the following example. The lines in bold show: ✦ The version of the Cisco IOS ✦ The version of the Boot loader (bootstrap) program ✦ The Cisco IOS image file that was loaded

ROM: Bootstrap program is C2960 boot loader BOOTLDR: C2960 Boot Loader (C2960-HBOOT-M) Version 12.2(44r)SE1, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc2) SW1 uptime is 13 minutes System returned to ROM by power-on System image file is „flash:c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY/c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37. EY.bin“ cisco WS-C2960-24-S (PowerPC405) processor (revision C0) with 61440K/4088K bytes of memory. [... some output cut ...] 1 Virtual Ethernet interface 24 FastEthernet interfaces The password-recovery mechanism is enabled. 64K bytes of flash-simulated non-volatile configuration memory. [... some output cut ...]

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 7

Troubleshooting a Switch Using Cisco IOS

SW1>en Password: SW1#sh version Cisco IOS Software, C2960 Software (C2960-LANLITE-M), Version 12.2(37)EY, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc2) Copyright (c) 1986-2007 by Cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Thu 28-Jun-07 18:07 by antonino Image text-base: 0x00003000, data-base: 0x00D00000

458


Switch -----* 1

Ports ----24

Model ----WS-C2960-24-S

SW Version ---------12.2(37)EY

SW Image ---------C2960-LANLITE-M

Configuration register is 0xF

Obtaining IOS version using the GUI tools Cisco GUI tools also display the IOS version. The Cisco Device Manager and the Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) show the version of the IOS operating system running on your switch. Figure 7-1 illustrates the Cisco Device Manager Dashboard screen showing the version of the IOS running on a Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch. The IOS version shows in the Switch Information frame.

Figure 7-1: Cisco Device Manager Dashboard.

Figure 7-2 illustrates the Cisco Device Manager Software Upgrade screen showing the version of the IOS running on a Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch. The Software Upgrade Web form allows you to upgrade the Cisco Internetworking Operating System (IOS) installed on your switch. Here is the procedure you need to follow to upgrade the IOS on your switch:

www.it-ebooks.info


459

✦ Click on the www.cisco.com/public/sw-center/ URL link to access the latest version of the Cisco IOS on Cisco’s Web site. ✦ Download the Cisco IOS image (tar file) to your computer hard drive. ✦ Click on Choose File and browse to the location where you saved the Cisco IOS image (tar file) on your computer hard drive. ✦ Select the Cisco IOS image (tar file) on your computer hard drive. ✦ Click Upgrade to upgrade the Cisco IOS on your switch with the Cisco IOS image file you just downloaded to your computer hard drive.

Book III Chapter 7


Figure 7-2: Cisco Device Manager Software Upgrade.

Figure 7-3 illustrates a screenshot of the Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) Device Properties showing the version of the IOS running on a Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch. You access the Device Properties in CNA by right-clicking the device in the Topology View or in Front Panel View and selecting the Properties… menu item.

www.it-ebooks.info

460


Figure 7-3: Cisco Network Assistant Device Properties.

Inspect Cisco switch configuration and memory contents During the troubleshooting process you need to know the particular configuration of your switch. You also need to know the configuration data stored in the memory of the switch. There are several methods to inspect the configuration of your switch and the data stored in the switch memory: ✦ Use the show flash command to inspect flash memory contents. ✦ Use the show running-config command to inspect the current running configuration in RAM. ✦ Use the show startup-config command to inspect the startup configurations in NVRAM. ✦ Use the show tech-support command to inspect all technical parameters on your switch. ✦ Use the Cisco IOS File System (IFS) commands to inspect RAM, NVRAM and flash contents. Let’s review each of these tools.

www.it-ebooks.info


461

Inspecting Cisco switch memory contents using the show flash command You can verify the following technical aspects of your switch using the show flash IOS command: ✦ Presence of a Cisco IOS image file: You should have at least one Cisco IOS image file in flash memory on your switch. ✦ Presence of config.text: This is the startup-configuration file. When the switch is started up, the flash memory area that stores config. text is mapped as NVRAM and the config.text file is mapped as the nvram:startup-config file by the Cisco IOS File System (IFS). Hence, if you do not have a config.text file in flash memory, the switch does not have a startup configuration: It starts in Setup mode. ✦ Presence of private-config.text: This file is used to store secured configuration data such as cryptographic encryption keys used for SSH. This file should be there in flash memory when config.text is there. ✦ Presence of config.text.renamed: This file is created whenever you, or the switch IOS, erase the startup configuration file. Recall that you can erase the startup configuration file using the erase startupconfig IOS command. The switch erases the startup configuration file whenever you reset the switch using the Mode button. In both cases, the startup configuration file is not really removed from flash memory, but rather, renamed to config.text.renamed. This ensures that the switch IOS will not find config.text when it reboots, but it provides a safety net in case you erase the startup configuration file by mistake.

✦ Presence of vlan.dat: This file stores VLAN data on your switch. The IOS creates some default VLANs that do not require the presence of the vlan.dat file. However, if you create additional VLANs, the vlan.dat file should be there. ✦ Free space available in flash memory: The show flash IOS command displays the free space available in flash memory. It is useful to know how much free space you have in flash memory whenever you want to upload several Cisco IOS image files to the flash memory of your switch. For example, you may want to upload a Cisco IOS image that supports encryption to enable SSH access on your switch. Before you do that, you need to verify that you have enough room in flash memory for both the current Cisco IOS image file and the new one.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ Presence of private-config.text.renamed: This file is a hidden version of the private-config.text file. The file private-config. text is renamed to private-config.text.renamed whenever you, or the switch, remove the startup configuration file.

Book III Chapter 7

462


You can run the show flash IOS command both in user EXEC mode and in privileged EXEC mode. The following example shows the contents in flash memory of a Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch. SW1>show flash Directory of flash:/ 2 -rwx 1993 Mar 1 1993 00:30:29 +00:00 private-config.text.renamed 3 -rwx 1398 Mar 1 1993 00:30:29 +00:00 config.text.renamed 4 -rwx 1398 Mar 1 1993 00:30:29 +00:00 config.text 5 drwx 512 Mar 1 1993 00:11:25 +00:00 c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY 539 –rwx Mar 1 1993 00:30:29 +00:00 private-config.text 27998208 bytes total (19307520 bytes free)

Observe the Cisco IOS image file named c2960-lanlite-mz.122-37.EY. This is the IOS image file that is loaded by default when the switch is started up. Note that you have both a config.text file and a config.text.private file in flash memory on this switch. This shows that the switch was reset at some point: This is when the .renamed files where created. At that point there was no config.text file and no private-config.text file in flash memory, just the .renamed files. Then, a new startup configuration was created. At that point the config.text and the private-config.text files were created. However, the .renamed files were not removed. This is why you see both the config.text, private-config.text files and the corresponding .renamed files in flash memory.

Inspecting Cisco switch current configuration using show running-config You can use the show running-config IOS command to verify the current running configuration on your switch. You run the show running-config command in privileged EXEC mode. The example shows the running configuration of a Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch. SW1>enable Password: SW1#show running-config Building configuration... Current configuration : 1398 bytes ! version 12.2 no service pad service timestamps debug uptime service timestamps log datetime no service password-encryption service sequence-numbers ! hostname SW1 ! enable secret 5 $1$/nQO$AJ.w7nP4fVgH44NU4gzkZ1

www.it-ebooks.info


463

enable password my_priv_password ! no aaa new-model system mtu routing 1500 ip subnet-zero ! ! ! no file verify auto spanning-tree mode pvst spanning-tree extend system-id ! vlan internal allocation policy ascending ! interface FastEthernet0/1 ! [... some output cut ...]

Inspecting Cisco switch startup configuration using show startup-config You can use the show startup-config IOS command to verify the startup configuration on your switch. You run the show startup-config command in privileged EXEC mode. The following example shows the startup configuration of a Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch. SW1>enable Password: SW1#show startup-config Using 1398 out of 65536 bytes ! version 12.2 no service pad service timestamps debug uptime

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 7


interface FastEthernet0/24 ! interface Vlan1 ip address 192.168.75.10 255.255.255.0 no ip route-cache ! ip default-gateway 192.168.75.1 ip http server ! control-plane ! ! line con 0 exec-timeout 0 0 line vty 0 4 password my_telnet_password login line vty 5 15 password my_telnet_password login ! end SW1#disable SW1>

464


service timestamps log datetime no service password-encryption service sequence-numbers ! hostname SW1 ! enable secret 5 $1$/nQO$AJ.w7nP4fVgH44NU4gzkZ1 enable password my_priv_password ! no aaa new-model system mtu routing 1500 ip subnet-zero ! ! ! no file verify auto spanning-tree mode pvst spanning-tree extend system-id ! vlan internal allocation policy ascending ! interface FastEthernet0/1 ! [... some output cut ...] interface FastEthernet0/24 ! interface Vlan1 ip address 192.168.75.10 255.255.255.0 no ip route-cache ! ip default-gateway 192.168.75.1 ip http server ! control-plane ! ! line con 0 exec-timeout 0 0 line vty 0 4 password my_telnet_password login line vty 5 15 password my_telnet_password login ! end SW1#disable SW1>

Inspecting RAM, NVRAM and flash memory contents using the Cisco IFS You can use Cisco IOS File System (IFS) commands to verify the contents of the RAM, NVRAM, and flash memory areas on your switch. You run Cisco IFS command in privileged EXEC mode.

www.it-ebooks.info


465

To see the Cisco IFS directories available on your switch, execute the dir all file-systems Cisco IFS command, as shown in the following example: SW1>enable Password: SW1# dir all-filesystems Directory of nvram:/ 27 28

-rw----

0 0


29688 bytes total (29636 bytes free) Directory of system:/ 10 2 1 9

drwx dr-x -rwdr-x

0 0 582 0



No space information available Directory of flash:/ 1

-rw-

15572992


16777216 bytes total (1204160 bytes free) SW1#disable SW1>

Observe the three main directories on your Cisco switch:

✦ system: This is the Random Access Memory (RAM), containing the running-config file. ✦ flash: This is the flash memory containing the Cisco IOS operating system image. This is the Cisco IOS image that the bootstrap program loads in RAM when the switch boots up. Observe how the Cisco IFS maps a portion of flash memory as NVRAM during the switch boot process. When you run the show flash command, you see the config.text and the private-config.text files in the listing. These files correspond to the nvram:startup-config file and to the nvram:private-config, respectively. The dir all-filesystems IFS command only lists the Cisco IOS image file in flash, because the other files stored in flash memory are mapped to the nvram: directory. You can list the contents of any of these main directories (file systems) individually using the dir Cisco IFS command. You can change your current working directory to any of the main directories using the cd Cisco IFS command.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ nvram: This is the Non-Volatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM), storing the startup-config file, and the private-config file.

Book III Chapter 7

466


For example, to list the contents of NVRAM specifically, execute the following command: SW1# dir nvram: Directory of nvram:/ 27 -rw0 28 ---0 29688 bytes total (29636 bytes free)


Now, change directory to the RAM directory (system) and look at the files and directories available there: SW1# cd system: SW1# dir Directory of system:/ 10 drwx 0 its 2 dr-x 0 memory 1 -rw582 running-config 9 dr-x 0 vfiles

Finally, to list the contents of flash memory, as seen by IFS, execute the following command: SW1# dir flash: Directory of flash:/ 1 -rw- 15572992 c2600-ik9o3s3-mz.123-1a.bin 16777216 bytes total (1204160 bytes free)

Inspecting all technical parameters on your switch using show tech-support The show tech-support IOS command collects and displays information about all technical parameters on a switch. You run the show tech-support command in privileged EXEC mode. The show tech-support command executes IOS commands to collect and display as much troubleshooting data as possible on your switch, such as these: ✦ show clock: Displays the switch system date and time. ✦ show interfaces: Displays configuration data about interfaces on your switch. This command displays IP configuration data, duplex mode, speed, media type, queue configuration and input and output rates. This data is different from the data returned by the next command (show controllers). Here is the difference: The show interfaces command shows configuration data, whereas the show controllers command shows real time operating statistics collected and summarized by the IOS. Also, note that show interfaces shows configuration data about both the VLAN (port trunk) logical interfaces and the underlying physical interfaces (ports on the switch). The show controllers command only shows statistics about physical interfaces (ports on the switch).

www.it-ebooks.info


467

✦ show logging: Displays messages logged in the switch system log file. This command is very useful, because it shows what happened since the switch powered up. ✦ show env all: Displays environment data about your switch, such as temperature, fan status, and power supply status. ✦ show interfaces status: Displays the state of interfaces on your switch. ✦ show interfaces status err-disabled: Displays the state of interfaces that transitioned to err-disabled state. An interface transitions to err-disabled state if it was configured to be up and connected, but something prevented it from transitioning to the “up” state. ✦ show interfaces switchport: Displays VLAN and port trunk data about the interfaces on your switch. ✦ show interfaces trunk: Displays data about port trunks on your switch, if you created any. ✦ show vlan: Displays data about VLANs on your switch.

✦ show spanning-tree: Displays data about STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) on your switch. ✦ show etherchannel summary: Displays data about EtherChannels on your switch. Some commands do not return any output, because the technical aspect they would normally show does not apply to the switch being inspected.

Inspect Cisco switch logs and system messages System messages and log files are the most useful troubleshooting tools. Cisco switches register events and errors in the system log files as they happen. Each event or error message is logged with a timestamp. Hence, you can look at the log files to know what happened since the switch started. Cisco provides several methods to inspect system event messages and alerts in log files:

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 7


✦ show mac-address-table: Displays data about the MAC address table on your switch. This is a good place to look if you see an excessive number of Multicast and Broadcast frames reported by the show controllers command. The MAC address table should contain the MAC addresses of all computer hosts in your LAN. If it doesn’t, then, nodes that need to send frames to computers that are not known by your switch, need to send multicast or broadcast frames in the network to find the MAC address of the target. You can ping target hosts from the switch to manually help the switch complete its MAC address table. This would cause the switch to register in its MAC address table the MAC address of the hosts you ping.

468

Troubleshooting Cisco Switches ✦ Using the show logging IOS command ✦ Using the Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) Let’s review each of these tools.

Inspecting the switch logs and system messages with show logging You can run the show logging IOS command both in user EXEC mode and in privileged EXEC mode. The following example shows the results returned by show logging on a Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch. SW1>show logging Syslog logging: enabled (0 messages dropped, 0 messages rate-limited, 0 flushes, 0 overruns, xml disabled, filtering disabled) Console logging: level debugging, 7 messages logged, xml disabled, filtering disabled Monitor logging: level debugging, 0 messages logged, xml disabled, filtering disabled Buffer logging: level debugging, 7 messages logged, xml disabled, filtering disabled Exception Logging: size (4096 bytes) Count and timestamp logging messages: disabled File logging: disabled Trap logging: level informational, 10 message lines logged Log Buffer (4096 bytes): 00:00:29: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Vlan1, changed state to down 00:00:29: %SPANTREE-5-EXTENDED_SYSID: Extended SysId enabled for type vlan 000003: *Mar 1 00:00:31: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from memory by console 000004: *Mar 1 00:00:31: %SYS-5-RESTART: System restarted -Cisco IOS Software, C2960 Software (C2960-LANLITE-M), Version 12.2(37)EY, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc2) Copyright (c) 1986-2007 by Cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Thu 28-Jun-07 18:07 by antonino 000005: *Mar 1 00:00:33: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface FastEthernet0/1, changed state to up 000006: *Mar 1 00:00:34: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface FastEthernet0/1, changed state to up 000007: *Mar 1 00:01:04: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Vlan1, changed state to up

Observe log messages 5 and 6 in bold font type. These messages show that the first physical interface (FastEthernet0/1) was started up (connected). Message 7 shows that the VLAN1 logical interface also started up.

Managing the logging system Cisco switches enable logging by default. All log messages are sent to the console and to the internal log buffer by default. You can use the logging IOS command in privileged EXEC configuration mode to control logging settings on a Cisco switch. For example: ✦ logging on: Enables logging ✦ no logging on: Disables logging

www.it-ebooks.info


469

The logging command also allows you to control where system event messages and alerts are logged. Log messages can be sent to the: ✦ Console: All system event messages and alerts are displayed on the switch console by default. The logging console [] command enables logging to the console and sets the logging level. The logging level defines which messages are logged. Logging levels are explained further in this section. The no logging console command disables logging to the console. ✦ Internal log buffer: All system event messages and alerts are written to the internal log buffer by default. The logging buffered [] command enables logging to the internal log buffer. The no logging buffered command disables logging to the internal log buffer. ✦ VTY session (Telnet/SSH): System event messages and alerts are not displayed in virtual terminal (VTY) sessions by default. The logging monitor [] command enables logging to Telnet/SSH sessions. The no logging monitor command disables logging to Telnet/SSH sessions. ✦ File in flash memory: As mentioned earlier, system event messages and alerts are written to the internal log buffer by default. You can configure the logging system to write system event messages and alerts to a specific file in flash memory using the logging file [flash:] command. The no logging file command disables logging to a specific file in flash memory.

Cisco logging levels are designed to control the verbosity of the logs. Table 7-1 illustrates the seven log levels.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ Syslog server: You can configure the SYSLOG protocol on Cisco switches to log system events and alerts to an external computer system. As mentioned earlier, system event messages and alerts are written to the internal log buffer by default. However, this buffer can contain only a limited number of messages, due to the limited amount of memory on a Cisco switch. Configuring a Syslog server allows you to leverage larger hard drive storage available on a management computer system and to centralize system events and alerts logging from several switches onto that single computer host. The logging trap [] command enables logging to a Syslog server. The no logging trap command disables logging to a Syslog server. The logging [] command identifies the IP address of the destination Syslog server where system events and alerts are logged. You also need to configure the SYSLOG protocol on the Syslog server computer. You can log system events and alerts to more than one Syslog server by executing the logging [] command with the IP address of each destination Syslog server. To remove a Syslog server from the logging destination list, execute no logging [] with the IP address of the Syslog server to be removed from the list.

Book III Chapter 7

470


Table 7-1 Level

Logging Levels Description

Syslog Type

Emergencies

Severity 0

Switch is unusable

LOG_EMERG

Alerts

1

Switch requires immediate attention

LOG_ALERT

Critical

2

Switch experienced critical condition

LOG_CRITICAL

Errors

3

Switch experienced error condition

LOG_ERROR

Warnings

4

Switch experienced warning condition

LOG_WARNING

Notifications

5

Switch experienced normal significant condition

LOG_NOTICE

Informational

6

Information message

LOG_INFO

Debugging

7

Debugging message

LOG_DEBUG

Lower severity number means higher severity. This is a bit confusing. Think of it this way: ✦ Severity 0: You have 0 functionality: Switch is unusable due to fatal condition. ✦ Severity 7: You have maximum functionality and log verbosity. So, for example, if you set logging level 3 (Errors) on the virtual terminal lines (Telnet/SSH sessions) using the command, logging monitor 3 or logging monitor errors the switch only logs messages with severity 3, 2, 1 or 0 out on the virtual terminal lines (Telnet/SSH sessions). It only logs errors, critical events, alerts, and emergency events.

Understanding the output of the show logging command Observe the first lines of output of the show logging command: SW1>show logging Syslog logging: enabled (0 messages dropped, 0 messages rate-limited, 0 flushes, 0 overruns, xml disabled, filtering disabled) Console logging: level debugging, 7 messages logged, xml disabled, filtering disabled Monitor logging: level debugging, 0 messages logged, xml disabled, filtering disabled Buffer logging: level debugging, 7 messages logged, xml disabled, filtering disabled Exception Logging: size (4096 bytes) Count and timestamp logging messages: disabled File logging: disabled Trap logging: level informational, 10 message lines logged

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

472


You can distinguish between the two meanings of syslog based on the context of the discussion.

Inspecting the switch logs and system messages with CNA You learned so far how to inspect system messages in log files using the show logging Cisco IOS command. Read this section to find out how to inspect system messages in log files using the Cisco Network Assistant (CNA). Figure 7-4 illustrates the System Messages Monitoring tool in the Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) GUI.

Figure 7-4: Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) – System Messages.

To access the System Messages of a particular switch you need to: ✦ Select the switch you want to inspect in Topology or Front Panel view. ✦ Select the Monitoring tab in the menu. ✦ Click System Messages…

www.it-ebooks.info


473

Observe that each message line displays: ✦ Severity of the message: One of the 7 severity levels indicating whether this is warning, an error, a critical condition, or just and informational message, or a debugging message. ✦ Timestamp of the event: Data and time when event occurred. ✦ Event description: Short description of what happened. ✦ Device: Host name of device where the event occurred. If you click any message line, CNA displays event details in the message details text box, under the message list: ✦ Description: This is the event description displayed on each message line. ✦ Explanation: This explains the event providing more details about what happened. ✦ Recommended Action: This displays a recommended action for events that require the network administrator to remediate a situation that caused the event. Note that in Figure 7-4, the recommended action for the selected message line is LOG_STD_NO_ACTION. This is normal, because the message selected is simply a notification.

To troubleshoot connectivity problems on a Cisco switch you need to: ✦ Verify cables and patch panels involved in the link. ✦ Verify the status of ports on your switch. ✦ Test connectivity using ping and traceroute tools.

Verify cables and patch panels To verify connectivity between your switch and another device in the network, you first need to verify that you have a valid physical connection between the switch and that device. You need to: ✦ Ensure cable connectors are not physically damaged. Pay close attention to the clip securing the connector in the switch port. Look also at the contact lids of the connector to ensure they are not physically damaged and to ensure that they are clean. ✦ Ensure the contact lids of the switch port are not physically damaged and that they are clean.

www.it-ebooks.info


Troubleshooting switch connectivity

Book III Chapter 7

www.it-ebooks.info


475

✦ show interfaces trunk: Displays data about port trunks on your switch, if you created any. ✦ show vlan: Displays data about VLANs on your switch. ✦ show ip interface: Displays IP information about interfaces on your switch. ✦ show logging: Displays system messages logged in the system log since the switch started up. These system messages include port transitions from down state to up state and vice versa. In some cases, you can also see a port transition to err-disabled state if there were any errors preventing the port to open up. Here is an example of show logging command: SW1>enable Password: SW1#show logging Syslog logging: enabled (0 messages dropped, 0 messages rate-limited, 0 flushes, 0 overruns, xml disabled, filtering disabled) Console logging: level debugging, 7 messages logged, xml disabled, filtering disabled Monitor logging: level debugging, 0 messages logged, xml disabled, filtering disabled Buffer logging: level debugging, 7 messages logged, xml disabled, filtering disabled Exception Logging: size (4096 bytes) Count and timestamp logging messages: disabled File logging: disabled Trap logging: level informational, 10 message lines logged

00:00:29: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Vlan1, changed state to down 00:00:29: %SPANTREE-5-EXTENDED_SYSID: Extended SysId enabled for type vlan 000003: *Mar 1 00:00:31: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from memory by console 000004: *Mar 1 00:00:31: %SYS-5-RESTART: System restarted -Cisco IOS Software, C2960 Software (C2960-LANLITE-M), Version 12.2(37)EY, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc2) Copyright (c) 1986-2007 by Cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Thu 28-Jun-07 18:07 by antonino 000005: *Mar 1 00:00:33: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface FastEthernet0/1, changed state to up 000006: *Mar 1 00:00:34: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface FastEthernet0/1, changed state to up 000007: *Mar 1 00:01:04: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Vlan1, changed state to up SW1#disable SW1>

Observe log messages 5 and 6 in bold font type. These messages show that the first physical interface (FastEthernet0/1) was started up (connected). Message 7 shows that the VLAN1 logical interface also started up.

www.it-ebooks.info


Log Buffer (4096 bytes):

Book III Chapter 7

476


Since physical interface FastEthernet0/1 (fa0/1) is “powering” logical interface VLAN 1, as soon as physical interface fa0/1 starts up, logical interface VLAN 1 also automatically starts. If physical interface fa0/1 was shut down, logical interface VLAN 1 also would shut down, unless there are other physical interfaces “powering” it up. Here is an example of the show interface status command: SW1>enable Password: SW1#show interfaces status Port Name Status Vlan Fa0/1 connected 1 Fa0/2 notconnect 1 Fa0/3 notconnect 1

Duplex a-full auto auto

Speed a-100 auto auto

Type 10/100BaseTX 10/100BaseTX 10/100BaseTX

[... some output cut ...] Fa0/24 notconnect SW1#disable SW1>

1

auto

auto 10/100BaseTX

Observe physical interface (port) FastEthernet0/1 (fa0/1) is: ✦ Connected ✦ Member of VLAN 1 ✦ Running in Full Duplex Mode ✦ Running at 100Mbps (maximum bandwidth for FastEthernet) ✦ Type: 10/100BaseTx (compliant to FastEthernet standard) All other ports are currently in notconnect state: Ports 2 to 24 are not connected right now. Here is an example of the show interface switchport command: SW1>enable Password: SW1#show interfaces switchport Name: Fa0/1 Switchport: Enabled Administrative Mode: dynamic auto Operational Mode: static access Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: dot1q Operational Trunking Encapsulation: native Negotiation of Trunking: On Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default) Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default) Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled Voice VLAN: none Administrative private-vlan host-association: none

www.it-ebooks.info


477

Administrative private-vlan mapping: none Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: none [... some output cut ...] Name: Fa0/24 Switchport: Enabled Administrative Mode: dynamic auto Operational Mode: down Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: dot1q Negotiation of Trunking: On Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default) Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default) Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled Voice VLAN: none Administrative private-vlan host-association: none Administrative private-vlan mapping: none Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: none [... some output cut ...] SW1#disable SW1>

Compare the text in bold font type between physical interface FastEthernet0/1 (fa0/1) and physical interface FastEthernet0/24 (fa0/24): Both physical interfaces are enabled: If you plug a network cable in the corresponding fa0/1 or fa0/24 port, you get connectivity through that interface.

The Operational mode of physical interface fa0/1 is static access. This means that the physical interface (port) fa0/1 is currently connected with a network cable to another device. You see static (or dynamic) access operational mode, as soon as you connect a cable into a physical interface (port) that is enabled and member of a VLAN that is configured for IP networks. The Operational mode of physical interface fa0/24 is down. This means that the physical interface (port) fa0/24 is currently not connected with a network cable to another device. When troubleshooting connectivity, the interface (port) should show up as fa0/1, not as fa0/24. If the operational mode is down, as with fa0/24, either there is no cable connected, or there is a connectivity problem with the cable or patch panels. If you know for sure that a cable is connected in the fa0/24 port and that there are no connectivity problems within the cable or the patch panels, you need to verify the IP configuration of the VLAN where

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 7


Both physical interfaces are member of VLAN 1 (Access Mode VLAN). Out of factory, all Cisco switches have a few VLANs pre-created. VLAN 1 is one of them. These pre-created VLANs are reserved for special purposes. VLAN 1 contains all switch ports by default.

478


physical interface (port) fa0/24 is assigned. In this case, fa0/24 is assigned to VLAN 1. Note that, in this case, you know for sure that VLAN 1 is configured properly for IP, because physical interface (port) fa01/1 is also assigned to VLAN 1: If there was a problem with VLAN 1, the operational state of fa0/1 would also be down, and you wouldn’t have any connectivity over fa0/1, either. This tells you for sure that fa0/24 is down, because there is no cable connected into that port. Here is an example of the show vlan command: SW1>enable Password: SW1#show vlan VLAN Name ---- -----------1 default

1002 1003 1004 1005 [...

Status Ports ------- ---------------------------active Fa0/1, Fa0/2, Fa0/3, Fa0/4 Fa0/5, Fa0/6, Fa0/7, Fa0/8 Fa0/9, Fa0/10, Fa0/11, Fa0/12 Fa0/13, Fa0/14, Fa0/15, Fa0/16 Fa0/17, Fa0/18, Fa0/19, Fa0/20 Fa0/21, Fa0/22, Fa0/23, Fa0/24 fddi-default act/unsup token-ring-default act/unsup fddinet-default act/unsup trnet-default act/unsup some output cut ...]

SW1#disable SW1>

This switch has 24 ports, all members of VLAN 1, the default VLAN on Cisco switches. Observe that VLAN 1 status is active. This command helps you verify that: ✦ The physical interface (Fa0/1) was assigned to a VLAN on the switch. ✦ The VLAN status is active for the VLAN powered by the interface. If you created additional VLANs, they would appear in this list. Now, you need to verify that the VLAN powered by this interface has a valid IP address. You can do this by using the show ip interface IOS command: SW1>show ip interface Vlan1 is up, line protocol is up Internet address is 192.168.75.10/24 Broadcast address is 255.255.255.255 Address determined by non-volatile memory MTU is 1500 bytes [... some output cut ...] FastEthernet0/1 is up, line protocol is up Inbound access list is not set

www.it-ebooks.info


479

FastEthernet0/2 is down, line protocol is down Inbound access list is not set [... some output cut ...] FastEthernet0/24 is down, line protocol is down Inbound access list is not set

The lines in bold font type show that VLAN 1 is assigned a valid IP address (192.168.75.10) and that the underlying physical interface (port Fa0/1) is up.

Verify the ports status on your switch with Cisco Device Manager You can use the Cisco Device Manager Graphical User Interface to verify port status on your switch. You need to: ✦ Browse to the IP address of the switch. ✦ Expand the Monitor tab in the Contents section. ✦ Select Port Status in the Monitor tab. Figure 7-5 illustrates the Port Status screen in the Cisco Device Manager.

Book III Chapter 7


Figure 7-5: Cisco Device Manager – Port Status.

www.it-ebooks.info

480


Verify the ports status on your switch with Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) You can use the Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) Graphical User Interface to verify port status on your switch. First, you can verify the port is enabled and that its speed and media type are set to auto-negotiate: ✦ Start CNA and Logon to the switch using level_15_access (privileged EXEC mode). ✦ Select the Configure tab. ✦ Expand the Ports tab. ✦ Select Port Settings… Figure 7-6 illustrates the Port Settings screen in CNA.

Figure 7-6: Cisco Network Assistant – Port Settings.

Next, you verify that the physical interface was assigned to a VLAN on the switch and that the status of that VLAN is active.

www.it-ebooks.info


481

✦ Start CNA and Logon to the switch using level_15_access (privileged EXEC mode). ✦ Select the Configure tab. ✦ Expand the Switching tab. ✦ Select VLANs… Figure 7-7 illustrates the VLANs screen in CNA.

Book III Chapter 7


Figure 7-7: Cisco Network Assistant – VLANs.

Now, you verify that the VLAN powered by the physical interface has a valid IP address. ✦ Start CNA and Logon to the switch using level_15_access (privileged EXEC mode) ✦ Select the Configure tab. ✦ Expand the Device Properties tab. ✦ Select IP Addresses… Figure 7-8 illustrates the IP Addresses screen in CNA.

www.it-ebooks.info

482


Figure 7-8: Cisco Network Assistant – IP Addresses.

You can look at Port Statistics to get some performance data about your physical interface. Note that this not only tells you whether you have connectivity over a particular physical interface, it also tells you how fast that interface is. ✦ Start CNA and Logon to the switch using level_15_access (privileged EXEC mode). ✦ Select the Monitor tab. ✦ Expand the Reports tab. ✦ Select Port Statistics… Figure 7-9 illustrates the Port Statistics screen in CNA.

Testing connectivity with ping and trace route tools Finally, you verify that the switch can reach a particular device over the TCP/IP network using the ping and traceroute IOS commands. Let’s look at each of these tools.

www.it-ebooks.info


483

Figure 7-9: Cisco Network Assistant – Port Statistics. Book III Chapter 7

Ping tool

✦ Before the troubleshooting process to confirm that there is a connectivity problem. If the ping tool reports failure to send and receive IP packets, you need to troubleshoot connectivity as explained in the Troubleshooting Switch Connectivity section. ✦ After the troubleshooting process to confirm that connectivity has been restored and that you can send and receive IP packets between your switch and the remote node. If the ping tool successfully sends and receives IP packets between your switch and the remote node, you successfully restored connectivity.

www.it-ebooks.info


The Ping tool is an IOS command and CNA tool allowing you to send IP packets to an IP address to test end-to-end connectivity. This is very often the first command that you use to test connectivity between two nodes on a network when you suspect connectivity problems. The nodes can be network devices (switches, routers), computer hosts, IP phones, or any other device that supports TCP/IP network connectivity. Note that the target device must have a valid IP address to use the ping tool. You use the ping in two situations:

484


Here is an example of the ping IOS command: SW1>ping 192.168.75.100 Type escape sequence to abort. Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 192.168.75.100, timeout is 2 seconds: !!!!! Success rate is 100 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/8 ms

To use the ping tool in CNA: ✦ Start CNA and Logon to the switch using level_15_access (privileged EXEC mode). ✦ Select the Troubleshooting tab. ✦ Select Ping and Trace… ✦ Select Ping tool in the Ping and Trace screen. ✦ Enter the Destination (IP Address/Hostname). ✦ Click Start. Figure 7-10 illustrates the Ping screen in CNA.

Figure 7-10: Cisco Network Assistant – Ping.

www.it-ebooks.info


485

Trace route tool The Trace Route tool is an IOS command (traceroute) allowing you to trace the IP route between two nodes on a TCP/IP network. The nodes can be network devices (switches, routers), computer hosts, IP phones, or any other device that supports TCP/IP network connectivity. Note that the target device must have a valid IP address to use the Layer 3 (Network) traceroute tool. You can also use the Layer 2 (data link) traceroute mac tool to trace the Layer 2 (data link) route between two nodes on an Ethernet network. The Layer 2 (data link) traceroute mac tool requires that: ✦ Both nodes have valid MAC addresses. ✦ CDP is configured properly and running on your switch. ✦ You execute the traceroute mac IOS command in privileged EXEC mode. The Trace Route tool is exposed in the CNA Graphical User Interface (GUI). To use the Layer 3 (network) traceroute tool in CNA: ✦ Start CNA and Logon to the switch using level_15_access (privileged EXEC mode). ✦ Select the Troubleshooting tab. ✦ Select Layer 3 Trace tool in the Ping and Trace screen. ✦ Enter the Destination (IP Address/Hostname) ✦ Click Start. Figure 7-11 illustrates the Layer 3 Trace Route screen in CNA.

Gather information about your network So far, you learned how to gather information about your switch and how to troubleshoot connectivity on a Cisco switch. In this section, you find out how to gather information about the network where your switch connects. There are several methods allowing you to gather information about your network. You have already seen some of them in previous sections in this chapter. You review information gathering and troubleshooting commands in this section and find out about some additional commands. You can use both IOS commands and graphical user interfaces (GUI tools) to gather information about your network.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ Select Ping and Trace…

Book III Chapter 7

486


Figure 7-11: Cisco Network Assistant – Layer 3 Trace Route.

Using ICMP The Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is designed to send control and test IP packets on IP networks. ICMP is a Layer 3 (Network) TCP/IP protocol. Think of an ICMP packet as a specialized IP packet used to discover and control IP network services. Any device that supports IP connectivity also supports ICMP. However, ICMP, or parts of ICMP, can be disabled on a network for security reasons. Both the Ping tool and the Trace Route tool are using the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). If ICMP is disabled, the Ping tool and the Trace Route tool fail. This doesn’t mean that there is no connectivity. It is just not possible to verify connectivity using ping and traceroute on a network where ICMP is disabled. Typically, ICMP is: ✦ Enabled inside the firewall, within the internal network: ICMP is useful to troubleshoot IP connectivity and performance problems using the Ping and Trace Route tools. So, it makes sense to enable these tools within a local, firewall-protected network.

www.it-ebooks.info


487

✦ Disabled for incoming requests through the firewall: The Ping and Trace Route tools can be used to find out about the nodes and configuration of a network. Hence, hackers can use these tools to build a “map” of your network. If the firewall allows outside ping and traceroute requests to flow into your network and if the firewall allows ping and traceroute results to be returned out of your network, hackers can use the Ping and Trace Route tools to discover your network. The Ping and Trace Route tools can be used on most devices that support TCP/IP connectivity. All UNIX, Linux, Mac OS X, and Windows-based computers provide the Ping and Trace Route tools. Hence, you can test connectivity and discover your network using these tools both ways between a Cisco switch and a computer host. Here is an example of the ping command executed on a Mac OS X computer host to test connectivity to the SW1 (192.168.75.10) switch. Macintosh-8:~ silange$ ping 192.168.75.10 PING 192.168.75.10 (192.168.75.10): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 192.168.75.10: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=0.546 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.75.10: icmp_seq=1 ttl=255 time=0.532 ms [... some output cut ...]

Here is another example of the ping command this time executed on a Cisco switch to test connectivity to the Dummies Web site (www.dummies.com): SW1>ping www.dummies.com Translating “www.dummies.com”...domain server (255.255.255.255) [OK] Type escape sequence to abort. Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 208.215.179.139, timeout is 2 seconds: ..... Success rate is 0 percent (0/5)

The ping output shows that switch SW1 cannot reach the Dummies Web site (Success rate is 0 percent (0/5)). This is bizarre, because I can browse to www.dummies.com from SW1’s network. Any ideas why ping reports no connectivity? If you answer because incoming ping (ICMP echo) requests are disabled through the firewall of the www.dummies.com network, you are right.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 7


The ping output shows computer host Macintosh-8 can reach switch SW1 within approximately 0.5 milliseconds (time=0.546 ms, time=0.532 ms). Observe that ping sends each ICMP packet from the Macintosh-8 computer host to the SW1 switch with a sequence number (icmp_seq=0, icmp_ seq=1, …)

488


Here is an example of the traceroute command executed on a Cisco switch to trace the IP route to the Dummies Web site (www.dummies.com): SW1>traceroute www.dummies.com Translating “www.dummies.com”...domain server (255.255.255.255) [OK] Type escape sequence to abort. Tracing the route to dummies.com (208.215.179.139) 1 192.168.75.1 1007 msec 0 msec 0 msec 2 cpe-174-099-120-001.nc.res.rr.com (174.99.120.1) 9 msec 8 msec 8 msec 3 ten13-0-0-202.rlghnca-rtr1.nc.rr.com (66.26.32.65) 17 msec 8 msec 17 msec [... some output cut ...] 9 ae-2-79.edge1.Washington3.Level3.net (4.68.17.75) 25 msec ae-4-99.edge1.Washington3.Level3.net (4.68.17.203) 25 msec ae-1-69.edge1.Washington3.Level3.net (4.68.17.11) 42 msec [... some output cut ...] 13 gar3.nw2nj.ip.att.net (12.122.130.109) 25 msec 34 msec 50 msec 14 12.88.61.178 34 msec 34 msec 33 msec 15 * * *

The results returned by the Trace Tool show that the SW1 switch reached the www.dummies.com site server through several network routers through the rr.com, Level3.net, and att.net networks. This helps you define where your network sits within the larger global networks. You can see that: ✦ Switch SW1 connects into Local Area Network (LAN) 192.168.75.0. ✦ The LAN 192.168.75.0 connects to the rr.com network through gateway (router) 192.168.75.1. ✦ The rr.com network connects to the Level3.net global network. ✦ The Level3.net global network is interconnected with the att.net global network. ✦ The www.dummies.com site server connects into the att.net global network. Here is an example of the traceroute command executed on a Mac OS X computer host to trace the IP route from computer host Macintosh-8 to router RT1 (192.168.75.40): Macintosh-8:~ silange$ traceroute 192.168.75.40 traceroute to 192.168.75.40 (192.168.75.40), 64 hops max, 40 byte packets 1 192.168.75.40 (192.168.75.40) 1.661 ms * 1.227 ms

www.it-ebooks.info


489

Here is an example of the traceroute command executed on a Mac OS X computer host to trace the IP route from computer host Macintosh-8 to switch SW1: Macintosh-8:~ silange$ traceroute 192.168.75.10 traceroute to 192.168.75.10 (192.168.75.10), 64 hops max, 40 byte packets 1 192.168.75.10 (192.168.75.10) 0.990 ms * 0.826 ms

Observe the preceding performance figures in bold font type. Why are switch SW1 times faster than router RT1 times? If you answer, because a switch is typically faster than a router, because it doesn’t need to process IP packets, just data-link frames, you are right. Here is an example of the traceroute command executed on a Mac OS X computer host to trace the IP route to the Dummies Web site (www.dummies.com): Macintosh-8:~ silange$ traceroute dummies.com traceroute to dummies.com (208.215.179.139), 64 hops max, 40 byte packets 1 192.168.75.1 (192.168.75.1) 2.454 ms 1.891 ms 1.686 ms 2 cpe-174-099-120-001.nc.res.rr.com (174.99.120.1) 9.994 ms 11.131 ms 10.260 ms 3 ten13-0-0-202.rlghnca-rtr1.nc.rr.com (66.26.32.65) 26.870 ms 13.329 ms 13.247 ms [... some output cut ...] 9

[... some output cut ...] 13 14 15

gar3.nw2nj.ip.att.net (12.122.130.109) 12.88.61.178 (12.88.61.178) 34.915 ms * * *

32.668 ms 32.394 ms

31.946 ms 31.880 ms

31.588 ms

The output of traceroute dummies.com on the Mac OS X computer host is very similar to the output of traceroute dummies.com on the SW1 switch. The traceroute command on Windows is actually named tracert. So, you execute tracert instead of traceroute on Windows-based computer hosts. Here is an example of the tracert command executed on a Windows computer host to trace the IP route to the eTips Dummies Web site (etips. dummies.com): C:\> tracert etips.dummies.com Tracing route to etips.dummies.com [12.165.240.180] over a maximum of 30 hops: 1

2.200 ms

1.649 ms

1.726 ms 192.168.75.1 [192.168.75.1]

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 7


ae-2-79.edge1.Washington3.Level3.net (4.68.17.75) 25.284 ms ae-4-99.edge1. Washington3.Level3.net (4.68.17.203) 26.751 ms ae-3-89.edge1.Washington3. Level3.net (4.68.17.139) 37.998 ms

490


2 3

9.315 ms 8.800 ms 9.282 ms cpe-174-099-120-001.nc.res.rr.com [174.99.120.1] 13.422 ms 15.031 ms 13.974 ms ten13-0-0-202.rlghnca-rtr1.nc.rr.com [66.26.32.65]

[... some output cut ...] 9

32.835 ms 31.070 ms (4.69.134.129)

36.398 ms ae-61-61.ebr1.Washington1.Level3.net

[... some output cut ...] 16 17 18

72.789 ms 62.420 ms * * *

59.959 ms 59.553 ms

60.742 ms gar1.ipsin.ip.att.net [12.122.133.109] 61.310 ms 12.86.112.170 [12.86.112.170]

Observe that Windows writes the performance statistics before the hop host name and IP address. Note also that Windows writes the IP addresses between square brackets instead of curved brackets. Otherwise, the Trace Route tool results are similar on all platforms.

Using CNA You can use the Cisco Network Assistant to discover the network surrounding your switch. CNA provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) allowing the network administrator to have both a global and detailed views of the Cisco networking environment. Although CNA monitors and manages both Cisco switches and Cisco routers, it is intended more for switches than for routers. Routers are typically monitored and managed using either the Cisco SDM (Security and Device Manager) tool, or the Cisco SDM Express tool. You download the CNA software package from Cisco Web site (cisco.com). CNA is provided for free by Cisco. Here are the features of CNA that allow you to discover the network surrounding your switch: ✦ Topology View: The topology view provides a global view of your Cisco network. You see both the switch you connect to and network devices that are connected to the switch. Figure 7-12 shows the SW1 switch and its neighbor router RT1. Observe that router RT1 is not supported by CNA. RT1 is an older Cisco 2621 series router that is unsupported by CNA version 2.5. ✦ Ping and Trace tools: The Ping and Trace tools are used to verify connectivity to neighboring devices from your switch. The topology view provides you a quick overview of your network. The ping and trace route tools allow you to verify connectivity to those devices. You learned previously how to use the Ping and Trace tools in the section “Using ICMP to Discover Network,” and in the section “Testing connectivity using ping and traceroute tools.”

www.it-ebooks.info


491

Figure 7-12: Cisco Network Assistant – Topology View.

Using CDP The Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) is a proprietary Cisco Layer 2 (data link) protocol. CDP is enabled by default on most Cisco switches and routers.

CDP is very useful to discover the landscape of your network. Assume that you know the IP address of only one switch or only one router in your network. To discover other devices in your network, you can: ✦ Connect to the IP address of the switch or router you know. ✦ Use CDP IOS commands to discover: • CDP configuration • Devices in the network

Configure CDP For example, to view the CDP configuration on your switch, execute the show cdp IOS command: SW1>show cdp Global CDP information: Sending CDP packets every 60 seconds Sending a holdtime value of 180 seconds Sending CDPv2 advertisements is enabled

www.it-ebooks.info


CDP is designed to enable Cisco networking devices to discover each other. The CDP protocol is used, for example, to build the topology view in CNA. Recall that the CNA topology view shows the neighbors of a Cisco switch or router.

Book III Chapter 7

492


If the CDP protocol is not enabled on your switch or router, the show cdp command reports “% CDP is not enabled”. You can enable CDP using the cdp run IOS command like this: SW1> enable (or en) Password: my_priv_encrypt_password SW1# configure terminal (or config t, or conf t) SW1(config)# cdp run SW1(config)# exit SW1# copy running-configuration startup-configuration Destination filename [startup-config]? Building configuration... [OK] SW1# disable SW1>

To see available CDP IOS commands, use the contextual help system: SW1> enable (or en) Password: my_priv_encrypt_password SW1# configure terminal (or config t, or conf t) SW1(config)# cdp ? advertise-v2 CDP sends version-2 advertisements holdtime Specify the holdtime to be sent in packets run Enable CDP timer Specify the rate at which CDP packets are sent

Observe that you need to be in privileged EXEC global configuration mode to execute CDP configuration commands. There are two CDP parameters that you can control with the cdp command: ✦ holdtime: CDP packets have a hold time value (in seconds) that determines how long the receiver keeps packets. This helps receivers that keep CDP information about their neighbors, even if CDP momentarily stops sending updates. ✦ timer: CDP packets are constantly exchanged between CDP-enabled switches and routers to keep track of changes in the network. The timer parameter determines the frequency (in seconds) at which these packets are sent. You can enable or disable CDP individually on each interface. To do so, you: ✦ Select the interface on which you want to enable or disable CDP. ✦ Execute cdp enable to enable CDP on that interface. ✦ Execute no cdp enable to disable CDP on that interface. By default, CDP is enabled globally on Cisco devices: CDP is enabled on all interfaces on Cisco devices. CDP consumes some bandwidth sending packets about networking devices in the LAN. You may choose to disable CDP on certain interfaces if, for example, you need those interfaces to perform at top speed.

www.it-ebooks.info


493

Discover your network using CDP When CDP is enabled and configured, you can use it to discover the landscape of your network. There are several discovery options for the show cdp command. Read on to find out about each of these CDP network discovery commands.

Discover neighbor devices To discover the neighbors of switch SW1, use the show cdp neighbors IOS command: SW1>sh cdp neighbors Capability Codes: R-Router, T-Trans Bridge, B-Source Route Bridge S-Switch, H-Host, I-IGMP, r - Repeater, P - Phone Device ID Local RT2.silange.com RT2.silange.com RT1

Intrfce Fas 0/7 Fas 0/5 Fas 0/1

Holdtme 175 175 146

Capability R S I R S I R I

Platform 1801 1801 2621

Port ID Fas 7 Fas 1 Fas 0/0

The output shows that switch SW1 is connected to: ✦ Router RT2 using two interfaces: • SW1 interface 7 (Fas 0/7) connects to RT2 interface 7 (Fas7) • SW1 interface 5 (Fas 0/5) connects to RT2 interface 1 (Fas1)

• SW1 interface 1 (Fas 0/1) connects to RT2 interface 0 (Fas 0/0) Observe that you see both the local interface on SW1 (Local Intrfce) and the remote interface on RT2 (Port ID) in the output of show cdp neighbors. The show cdp neighbors IOS command reports the platform and capabilities of each remote device: ✦ RT2 is reported to be an 1801 series router with router (R), switch (S) and ICMP (I) capabilities. ✦ RT1 is reported to be a 2621 series router with router (R) and ICMP (I) capabilities. To get more details about the remote RT2 router, use the detail argument with the show cdp neighbors command.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ Router RT1 using one interface:

Book III Chapter 7

www.it-ebooks.info


495

✦ Boot the switch without loading the startup configuration file. If the switch starts up fine when you do not load the startup configuration, chances are there is something wrong in the startup configuration, or the startup configuration file is corrupted. To boot the switch without loading the startup configuration file, you need to interrupt the automatic boot process using one of these methods: ✦ Use the boot command to enable manual booting. ✦ Press the Mode button during the boot process. ✦ Press Ctrl-Break during the boot process. Either of these methods brings you at the switch: manual boot prompt. The manual boot prompt allows you to control the boot process of the switch. Here are the steps to boot up the switch manually, without loading the startup configuration file from NVRAM: ✦ Manually initialize the flash file system: switch: flash_init

✦ Hide the startup configuration file to prevent the IOS from loading it. switch: rename flash:config.text flash:config.text.old

✦ Boot the switch manually and wait for IOS to finish loading in RAM. switch: boot

If the switch starts up fine, you need to rebuild a new, valid startup configuration file, using the setup utility: ✦ Execute the setup utility to setup your switch. SW1>enable (or en) SW1# setup --- System Configuration Dialog --Continue with configuration dialog? [yes/no]: yes [… some output cut …]

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 7


Initializing Flash... mifs[2]: 0 files, 1 directories mifs[2]: Total bytes : 3870720 mifs[2]: Bytes used : 1024 mifs[2]: Bytes available : 3869696 mifs[2]: mifs fsck took 0 seconds. mifs[3]: 518 files, 19 directories mifs[3]: Total bytes : 27998208 mifs[3]: Bytes used : 8687616 mifs[3]: Bytes available : 19310592 mifs[3]: mifs fsck took 5 seconds. ...done Initializing Flash.

496

Troubleshooting Cisco Switches ✦ Save the current running-configuration over the startup configuration file in NVRAM. SW1#copy running-config startup-config Destination filename [startup-config]? Building configuration... [OK]

✦ Reboot your switch. SW1# reload

Troubleshooting the running configuration If your switch reports errors, alerts, or warnings during normal operation, there may be something wrong with the running configuration. To verify whether the running configuration is causing problems, you can: ✦ Boot the switch loading a known good startup configuration file, if you have one. You should have one if you followed the best practice to backup your startup configuration file to a backup computer host. • If the switch operates fine when you load the known good startup configuration file, you can simply replace the faulty startup configuration file with the known good one. • If the switch still reports errors, alerts, or warnings when you load the known good startup configuration file, the problem may not be related to the running configuration. Read on. ✦ If problems persist even after you start the switch with a known good startup configuration, boot the switch without loading a startup configuration at all. • If the switch starts up and operates fine without a startup configuration, chances are there is something wrong in the startup configuration, or the startup configuration file is corrupted. You need to fix the startup configuration. Refer to the section “Troubleshooting the startup configuration” to see how to fix the startup configuration. • If the switch still reports errors, alerts, or warnings, even without a startup configuration, the problem may not be related to the startup configuration. Read on. If problems persist when you start the switch without a startup configuration, the startup and the running configurations are not the cause of the problems. You need to use other troubleshooting tools to find out the culprit: ✦ Inspect the logs and system messages: First, look at the logs and system messages, searching for any error messages, fatal exceptions, alerts, and warnings. Refer to the section “Inspect Cisco switch logs and system messages” earlier in this chapter to see how to manage and inspect the logs and system messages.

www.it-ebooks.info


497

• If you notice any error message, fatal exception, alert, or warning in the logs or in the system messages, you need to correct that issue. • If you do not notice error messages, fatal exceptions, alerts, and warnings in the logs or in the system messages, read on. ✦ Use the show tech-support command: You can use this command to inspect many technical aspects on your switch. Look out for any error messages, fatal exceptions, alerts, or warnings in the output of the show tech-support command. Refer to the section “Inspect Cisco Switch Configuration and Memory Contents” earlier in this chapter to see how to use the show tech-support command and how to interpret its output. ✦ Use the debug command: This command provides a wealth of technical information about the operation of your switch.

Using the Debug command The debug command is a very useful troubleshooting tool. This command enables debug mode on the switch. In debug mode, the switch displays and logs detailed information about ongoing operations, including any error messages, fatal exceptions, alerts, and warnings.

Best practice

You execute the debug command in privileged EXEC mode. To enable debug mode on a specific component, feature, or protocol, execute the debug command suffixed by the component, feature, or protocol name. Many components, features and protocols have various items that can be monitored in debug mode. For example, there are several aspects of STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) that you can debug: SW1#debug spanning-tree ? all All Spanning Tree debugging messages backbonefast BackboneFast events bpdu Spanning tree BPDU bpdu-opt Optimized BPDU handling config Spanning tree config changes csuf/csrt STP CSUF/CSRT etherchannel EtherChannel support events Spanning tree topology events exceptions Spanning tree exceptions general Spanning tree general

www.it-ebooks.info

Book III Chapter 7


You can enable debug mode using the debug command on specific components and protocols. It is best practice to enable debug mode selectively on certain components or protocols that you suspect are troublesome. It is not recommended to enable debug mode on all components, features and protocols, because the debug process has priority over all other processes on your switch. This may severely impact the performance of your switch, to the point of rendering it unusable.

498


mstp MSTP debug commands pvst+ PVST+ events root Spanning tree root events snmp Spanning Tree SNMP handling switch Switch Shim debug commands synchronization STP state sync events uplinkfast UplinkFast events SW1# SW1# debug spanning-tree general Spanning Tree general debugging is on SW1#

You just enabled general debugging for STP. Now, you will see the following messages displayed on the switch console and logged in the system logs whenever connected switch ports return STP statistics: SW1# 000012: 000013: 000014: 000015: 000016: 000017:

00:18:35: 00:18:35: 00:18:35: 00:19:35: 00:19:35: 00:19:35:

Returning Returning Returning Returning Returning Returning

spanning spanning spanning spanning spanning spanning

tree tree tree tree tree tree

port port port port port port

stats: stats: stats: stats: stats: stats:

FastEthernet0/1 FastEthernet0/5 FastEthernet0/7 FastEthernet0/1 FastEthernet0/5 FastEthernet0/7

(1A32264) (1A2E790) (1A330B0) (1A32264) (1A2E790) (1A330B0)

To disable debugging of a specific component, feature, or protocol, execute the no debug command followed by the component, feature, or protocol. For example, to disable general STP debugging, execute: SW1# no debug spanning-tree general Spanning Tree general debugging is off SW1#

To disable all debugging, execute: SW1# no debug all All possible debugging has been turned off SW1#

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Contents at a Glance Chapter 1: Introducing Layer 3 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 Layer 3 — Network Layer Review ............................................................. 505 Purpose of a Layer 3 Router ....................................................................... 508 Basic Router Functions ............................................................................... 511

Chapter 2: Managing a Router Using Cisco IOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Best Practices for Using Cisco Routers .................................................... 517 Connecting to a Cisco Router .................................................................... 519 Cisco Router Startup Process .................................................................... 525 Configuring a Cisco Router......................................................................... 528 Managing Cisco Router Authentication .................................................... 554

Chapter 3: Network Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Introducing Network Routes ...................................................................... 567 Routing Protocols ........................................................................................ 571 Routed Protocols ......................................................................................... 572 Routing Decision Criteria ........................................................................... 572 Routing Methods ......................................................................................... 576 Configuring Routing Protocols................................................................... 582

Chapter 4: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Introducing Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ..................................... 588 RIPv1 ............................................................................................................. 593 RIPv2 ............................................................................................................. 595 RIPng ............................................................................................................. 597 Configuring RIP ............................................................................................ 598 Verifying RIP ................................................................................................. 601

Chapter 5: Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) . . .607 IGRP — The Foundation of EIGRP ............................................................. 608 EIGRP Benefits.............................................................................................. 608 Characteristics of EIGRP ............................................................................. 609 EIGRP Operation .......................................................................................... 610 Configuring EIGRP ....................................................................................... 615 Verifying and Monitoring EIGRP Operation ............................................. 617 Troubleshooting EIGRP .............................................................................. 620

Chapter 6: Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Introducing Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) .......................................... 625 OSPF Routing Hierarchy ............................................................................. 628 Configuring OSPF ......................................................................................... 634 Verifying and Monitoring OSPF Operation ............................................... 639 Troubleshooting OSPF ................................................................................ 641

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 1: Introducing Layer 3 Routers Exam Objectives ✓ Describing network OSI Layer 3 and how it relates to Layer 3 routers ✓ Describing the purpose of a Layer 3 router ✓ Differentiating a Layer 3 router from a Layer 2 switch ✓ Describing basic Layer 3 router functions

R

ecall that Layer 3 in the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) and TCP/ IP network models is the network layer. The main function of network layer devices and protocols is to route data packets between hosts. Routing means choosing the best route to send packets between two hosts. The hosts can be next to each other or across the globe. Whereas the data link layer (Layer 2) routes data frames locally between two devices in the same LAN, the network layer (Layer 3) routes data packets between two devices in separate LANs. In other words, the data link layer sends data within the same LAN, whereas the network layer routes data between LANs.

Layer 3 — Network Layer Review The network layer assigns logical addresses (IP addresses) to all devices in the network to be able to identify each source host, each destination host, as well as each network through which packets need to be routed. Logical addresses are assigned at the network protocol level as opposed to physical addresses, which are assigned on a physical device, such as a network card. The network layer does the following: ✦ Receives each data segment from the transport layer on the sending host ✦ Wraps up the segment in a data packet along with global routing data (source and destination logical IP addresses) ✦ Sends the data packet down to the data link layer to prepare it to be sent over the LAN connection

www.it-ebooks.info

506

Layer 3 — Network Layer Review

The data link layer does the following: ✦ Receives each packet from the network layer on the sending host ✦ Wraps up the packet in a data frame along with local routing data (source and destination physical MAC addresses) ✦ Sends the data frame down to the physical layer to code an electrical or optical signal The physical layer transmits the data frame over a wire or over the air in wireless networks. On the receiving host, the data link layer does the following: ✦ Unwraps the data frame received ✦ Extracts the packet out of the data frame ✦ Sends the packet up to the network layer On the receiving host, the network layer does the following: ✦ Unwraps the data packet received ✦ Extracts the data segment from the data packet ✦ Sends the data segment up to the transport layer The Internet Protocol (IP) is the TCP/IP protocol that operates at Layer 3 to handle network functions. Hence, whenever you consider Layer 3 in TCP/IP, you need to think about IP and logical IP addresses. Also, keep in mind that Layer 3, the network layer, is concerned with routing data between LANs interconnected in global networks. The mission of the network layer is to handle the routing of data packets between two devices connected in different local-area networks (LANs) that are interconnected by global wide-area networks (WANs). The network layer does the following: ✦ Routes data packets between LANs ✦ Uses the Internet Protocol (IP) ✦ Identifies hosts using logical IP addresses Logical addressing at the network layer is hierarchical: ✦ A limited range of IP addresses identifies a few global networks. ✦ Global networks interconnect large- and medium-size networks that use another specific range of IP addresses. ✦ Large- and medium-size networks interconnect smaller networks that use yet another specific range of IP addresses.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Purpose of a Layer 3 Router

509

Figure 1-1 illustrates how data packets are processed by an intermediary node (a router) on their journey between two hosts in different LANs. The router needs to inspect the packet that it extracts from the data-link frame.

Sender

Receiver

Application

Application

Presentation

Presentation

Session

Session

Transport

Transport

Network

Network Packet

Data Link Figure 1-1: Intermediary router (Layer 3) node.

Frame Physical Signal

Network Packet

Data Link Data Link In Out Physical Physical In Out

Data Link Frame Physical Signal

Intermediary Router Node

By contrast, a switch only needs to look at the data frame, as shown in Figure 1-2. Switches do not analyze the IP packet that is encapsulated in the Layer 2 data frame. The purpose of a router is to route data packets between networks:

✦ The router extracts the destination IP address and inspects the address to determine the destination network of the data packet. ✦ If the router knows the destination network, it sends the data packet to that destination network.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Layer 3 Routers

✦ The router inspects the IP header of each data packet that passes through it.

Book IV Chapter 1

510

Purpose of a Layer 3 Router

Sender

Receiver

Application

Application

Presentation

Presentation

Session

Session

Transport

Transport

Network

Network

Data Link Figure 1-2: Intermediary switch (Layer 2) node.

Data Link

Data Link Frame

Physical Signal

Frame Physical Physical In Out

Physical Signal

Intermediary Switch Node

✦ If the router does not know the destination network, it sends the packet to the outbound gateway of the router: • The outbound gateway is also a router. Hence, when the outbound gateway receives the data packet, it goes through the same process to determine where to send the packet. • The outbound gateway extracts the destination IP address and inspects the address to determine the destination network of the data packet. • If the outbound gateway knows the destination network, it sends the data packet to that destination network. • If the outbound gateway does not know the destination network, it sends the packet to the higher-up outbound gateway. Eventually, an outbound gateway that is high enough in the network hierarchy knows the destination network. So, how does a router know about a network? By keeping routing tables in memory.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

512

Basic Router Functions

IP addresses are hierarchical. They have ✦ A part that identifies the network ✦ A part that identifies the host device For example, a network may be identified by network IP address 192.168.25.0 (subnet mask 255.255.255.0). All hosts in this network have an IP address that starts with 192.168.25. Another network may be identified by network IP address 192.168.67.0 (subnet mask 255.255.255.0). All hosts in this network have an IP address that starts with 192.168.67. In these two small networks, the first three numbers (192.168.25 and 192.168.67) identify the network. The last number identifies each host within its network. Layer 2 switches interconnect hosts locally in networks 192.168.25.0 and 192.168.67.0.

Managing routing protocols How can hosts on different networks send a data packet toeach other? The routers for the two networksneed to learn about each other’s network. But even before that happens, they need to set up their routing protocols. Think of it in human communication terms: Before you can speak with someone in a foreign language, you need to “set up your language”: learn the foreign language. Setting up a routing protocol on a router typically involves the following: ✦ Starting up the routing protocol on each router ✦ Enabling the routing protocol on interfaces on each router ✦ Configuring routing protocol options You need to execute these setup steps manually on each router. Some routing protocols can automatically negotiate certain configuration options. You read about some of these options later in this book.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 2: Managing a Router Using Cisco IOS Exam Objectives ✓ Connecting to a Cisco router ✓ Understanding the startup process of a Cisco router ✓ Configuring a Cisco router ✓ Managing Cisco router configurations ✓ Managing Cisco router authentication

R

ead this chapter to find out how to use the Cisco Internetwork Operating System (IOS) to manage Cisco routers. The following topics are covered: ✦ Local and remote router connectivity options ✦ How to use the IOS command-line interface (CLI) as well as the graphical user interface (GUI) to manage Cisco routers ✦ How to secure access to Cisco routers using passwords ✦ How to manage configurations on Cisco routers

Managing a Cisco router is very similar to managing a Cisco switch. Most IOS commands are the same for switches and routers, but the output differs in some cases. Most IOS commands and GUI tools are available for both switches and routers. Some GUI tools are only available for routers, such as the Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) and SDM Express. Other GUI tools are only available for switches, such as the Cisco Device Manager. You find out about router management IOS commands and GUI tools in this chapter. You can skip over or skim through sections covering tools that you already read about in Book III, Chapter 2.

Best Practices for Using Cisco Routers You need to understand best practices for using entry-level and top-of-theline products. For example, top-of-the-line routers are best suited for the

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Cisco Router Startup Process

525

Cisco Router Startup Process A Cisco router always follows the same process when it is powered up. The steps of this process are:

1. Run the POST: The Cisco router runs the power-on self test. The POST is a microprogram, stored in ROM, that is used to verify basic functionality of the Cisco router hardware.

2. Boot up: The Cisco router runs the bootstrap program, also known as the boot loader software. The boot loader is a microprogram, stored in ROM, that is used to bring up the router and transition it to normal operation mode by loading the Cisco IOS from flash memory. If the boot loader does not find a valid Cisco IOS in flash memory, it tries to load the IOS from a TFTP server or from ROM.

3. Load the IOS: The Cisco IOS loads into RAM. By default, the Cisco IOS is loaded from flash memory. However, as mentioned earlier, if the bootstrap program does not find a valid IOS in flash memory, it tries to load from a TFTP server, if one is configured. If no TFTP server is configured, or if no valid IOS is on the TFTP server, the bootstrap program loads the Rx-boot image from ROM. Recall that the Rx-boot image is a subset of the Cisco IOS operating system. The Rx-boot image is used to manage the boot process. The Rx-boot image comes up with the (boot)> prompt, where you can run various commands to manage the boot process. For instance, you can manually specify a location from which to load the IOS image.

4. Load the startup configuration: After the Cisco router loads the IOS in RAM, the IOS loads the device startup-configuration file from NVRAM. The startup configuration is loaded into RAM and becomes the running configuration, the configuration that changes dynamically while the Cisco device is running.

The following IOS CLI segment shows a Cisco 2621 router starting up for the first time. System Bootstrap, Version 11.3(2)XA4, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1) Copyright (c) 1999 by Cisco Systems, Inc. TAC:Home:SW:IOS:Specials for info C2600 platform with 65536 Kbytes of main memory program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xed9ee4 Self decompressing the image : ############################################### [OK]

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 2

Managing a Router Using Cisco IOS

At this point, the Cisco device is in normal operation mode, ready for business.

526


The first part of the preceding example shows the following output from the bootstrap program: ✦ The version of the bootstrap program: 11.3(2)XA4 ✦ The router platform: C2600 platform with 65K of system memory ✦ The IOS image size: 0xed9ee4 ✦ The IOS image loading: Self decompressing the image : ####### … The output you see in the preceding example starts at the second step in the process (bootup). You do not see the output from the first step of the process (POST) here. The first part of the POST only displays messages upon test failures. Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) C2600 Software (C2600-IK9O3S3-M), Version 12.3(1a), RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1) Copyright (c) 1986-2003 by Cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Fri 06-Jun-03 22:08 by dchih Image text-base: 0x80008098, data-base: 0x819BD990

This part loads the Cisco IOS from flash memory and executes it in RAM. The bootstrap program loads the C2600-IK9O3S3-M Cisco IOS image. cisco 2621 (MPC860) processor (revision 0x102) with 60416K/5120K bytes of memory. Processor board ID JAD04410AGK (901795976) M860 processor: part number 0, mask 49 Bridging software X.25 software, Version 3.0.0. 2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s) 32K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory. 16384K bytes of processor board System flash (Read/Write)

This part shows some information about the router hardware and software installed: ✦ This is a Cisco 2621 router with an MPC860 CPU. ✦ It has 65K of system memory. ✦ It has bridging software installed. ✦ It supports the X.25 WAN protocol. ✦ It has two Fast Ethernet interfaces. ✦ It has 32K of system memory configured as NVRAM. ✦ It has 16K of system memory configured as flash memory.

www.it-ebooks.info


527

Next, the IOS prompts you to start the initial configuration dialog: --- System Configuration Dialog --Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes/no]: no Press RETURN to get started! Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) C2600 Software (C2600-IK9O3S3-M), Version 12.3(1a), RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1) Copyright (c) 1986-2003 by Cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Fri 06-Jun-03 22:08 by dchih Router>

This part shows the final stage of the boot process (load startup configuration). Because this is a new router, no startup configuration exists. The IOS asks whether you would like to enter the initial configuration dialog. This dialog allows you to quickly configure the router: ✦ IP address ✦ Default gateway (router) ✦ Subnet mask ✦ Console password ✦ Host name ✦ Telnet password If you choose not to run the initial configuration dialog at this time, you can press Enter to access the Router> prompt. When you’re at the Router> prompt, you can run IOS commands to monitor and manage the router.

------------------------------------------------------------Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) is installed on this device. This feature requires the one-time use of the username “cisco” with the password “cisco”. The default username and password have a privilege level of 15. Please change these publicly known initial credentials using SDM or the IOS CLI.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 2


Routers that have Cisco SDM (Router and Security Device Manager) preinstalled, such as the 1800 series, require that you create an administrator user before you are allowed to run the initial configuration dialog. These routers provide a default administrator user named “cisco,” identified by password “cisco,” that can only be used one time to create your personalized administrator user. Here is the last part of the boot process on a Cisco 1801 router that has SDM preinstalled:

528

Configuring a Cisco Router

Here are the Cisco IOS commands. username

privilege 15 secret 0

no username cisco Replace and with the username and password you want to use. For more information about SDM please follow the instructions in the QUICK START GUIDE for your router or go to http://www.cisco.com/go/sdm -----------------------------------------------------------User Access Verification Username: cisco Password: cisco

The router informs you about the “cisco” default temporary administrator user and prompts you to create a new personalized administrator user. To create the new personalized administrator user, use the username command: Router> configure terminal Router(config)# username Admin007 privilege 15 secret 0 Admin007Password

This command creates a new user named Admin007, identified by password Admin007Pasword, with level_15_privilege access permission. From now on, you can log in to your router using this new administrator user. You are ready to set up your router at this point. The next section describes how to configure a Cisco router.

Configuring a Cisco Router Read this section to find out how to initially set up a Cisco router. You also see how to manage startup and running configurations. Cisco routers ship with several items, as shown in Figure 2-8: ✦ Console rollover cable: This is the cable you need to connect to the console port on the router. ✦ AC power cord. ✦ 19-inch rack mounting brackets. ✦ Getting Started documentation CD. ✦ Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) CD.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

530


Initializing the router using the initial configuration dialog The first time you power on a Cisco router, it has no startup configuration in NVRAM. You can connect to the console of the router to get access to the IOS prompt. The router will be in setup mode because no startup configuration exists. In setup mode, the IOS asks you to configure the following: ✦ IP address ✦ Default gateway (router) ✦ Subnet mask ✦ Enable and enable secret password ✦ Host name ✦ Telnet password If choose not to configure the router and use it without a startup configuration, you can avoid or abort setup mode using one the following methods: ✦ Exit setup mode by pressing Ctrl+C ✦ Answer no when setup mode asks whether you want to configure the router ✦ Answer no when setup mode asks whether you want to save the configuration at the end of the series of setup questions Although you can use a router without creating a startup configuration, it is best practice to verify the router and to create a startup configuration before you start using the router. Using the router without a startup configuration allows you to initially test the basic functionality of the router. However, you should always have a startup configuration and, specifically, console, auxiliary, and privileged mode passwords configured before you start using the router in a production environment. Here is an example of the initial setup mode dialog on a Cisco 2621 router: System Bootstrap, Version 11.3(2)XA4, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1) Copyright (c) 1999 by Cisco Systems, Inc. TAC:Home:SW:IOS:Specials for info C2600 platform with 65536 Kbytes of main memory program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xed9ee4 Self decompressing the image : ############################################### [OK] [ ... some boot messages cut ... ]

www.it-ebooks.info


531

The first part of the output shown in the preceding example displays various boot messages. The router is now up and running. Because no startup configuration exists in NVRAM, the IOS asks whether you want to run the initial configuration dialog. You type yes as follows to run the initial configuration dialog: --- System Configuration Dialog --Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes/no]: yes At any point you may enter a question mark ‘?’ for help. Use ctrl-c to abort configuration dialog at any prompt. Default settings are in square brackets ‘[]’. Basic management setup configures only enough connectivity for management of the system, extended setup will ask you to configure each interface on the system Would you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]: yes Configuring global parameters: Enter host name [Router]: RT1 The enable secret is a password used to protect access to privileged EXEC and configuration modes. This password, after entered, becomes encrypted in the configuration. Enter enable secret: my_priv_encrypt_password The enable password is used when you do not specify an enable secret password, with some older software versions, and some boot images. Enter enable password: my_priv_password The virtual terminal password is used to protect access to the router over a network interface. Enter virtual terminal password: my_telnet_password Configure SNMP Network Management? [no]:

The second part of the output shown in the preceding example prompts you to set a host name and passwords on your router. In this example ✦ You name the router RT1.

✦ You set the unencrypted privileged mode password to my_priv_ password. ✦ You set the VTY access lines password to my_telnet_password.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ You set the encrypted privileged mode password to my_priv_ encrypt_password.

Book IV Chapter 2

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

534


RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

Configuring the management IP address for the router You can configure an IP address and an IP gateway for your router using the ip address and ip default-gateway Cisco IOS commands. This allows you to connect to the router from remote locations using either Telnet or HTTP. To configure the management IP address and default gateway on your router, run the following commands: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#configure terminal (or config t) RT1(config)#interface fastethernet0/0 (or int fe0/0) RT1(config-if)#ip address 192.168.75.40 255.255.255.0 RT1(config-if)#no shutdown RT1(config-if)#exit RT1(config)#ip default-gateway 192.168.75.1 RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global router settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole router. The interface fastethernet0/0 command selects an interface to work with. In this example, you select the first Ethernet interface of the router (Fast Ethernet 0/0). The ip address 192.168.75.40 255.255.255.0 command sets the IP address and the subnet mask on the interface that you selected previously. Observe that the IOS prompt now shows RT1(config-if)#. Config-if means that you are configuring an interface (if) now. The no shutdown command starts up the Fast Ethernet 0/0 interface. Recall that you enable components and services on a Cisco router using the component or service name. You disable components and services on a Cisco router using the component or service name prefixed with the no keyword. Here, shutdown is actually a state, not a component or service. An interface is either shut down or not shut down (started up). To summarize: ✦ To shut down an interface, select it and execute shutdown. ✦ To start up an interface, select it and execute no shutdown.

www.it-ebooks.info


535

The ip default-gateway 192.168.75.1 command sets the default gateway for the router. Observe that you first exit from interface configuration mode (RT1(config-if)#exit) because the default gateway applies to the whole router, not just to an interface. Now, you are back in global configuration mode (RT1(config)#). The Cisco IOS prompt is designed to show you the configuration mode you’re in: ✦ (config): You are in global configuration mode. In this mode, you can execute commands that configure global router settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole router. ✦ (config-if): You are in interface configuration mode. In this mode, you can execute commands that configure router interface settings, that is, settings that apply to just one interface of the router. You select the interface to work with using the interface command. ✦ (config-if-range): You are in interface range configuration mode. In this mode, you can execute commands that configure a range of router interfaces, that is, settings that apply to a range of interfaces on the router. You select the range of interfaces to work with using the interface range command.

Configuring passwords You can configure authentication passwords for your router using the password and login Cisco IOS commands. By default, new Cisco devices do not have a password configured. You can configure several passwords for different types of access: ✦ Console password: Used for console access through the console port or through a Console Terminal Server. ✦ Auxiliary password: Used for console access through the auxiliary port using a modem.

✦ Privileged password: Used for privileged mode access. Privileged mode is an “expert” management operation mode used to run some Cisco IOS commands.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ VTY lines password: Virtual type terminal (VTY) lines are used for Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH) access. They are called virtual type terminal lines because no physical terminal is connected to the router. Rather, you connect a computer host to the network and access the router remotely using the router management IP address. A terminal emulation program on the computer host emulates a physical terminal (TTY).

Book IV Chapter 2

536


The console port and the auxiliary port are enabled by default, even if no password is specified for them. This is a security risk. It is best practice to specify at least a console password on new Cisco devices. The VTY lines (Telnet and Secure Shell) are disabled by default. You need to specify a password for the VTY lines to enable them. To configure passwords, you need to instruct the Cisco device to prompt for authentication. You use the login Cisco IOS command to do this.

Best practice You should at least set passwords for console and VTY access to secure access through the console port and to enable and secure remote access through Telnet or SSH. The following sections describe how to configure passwords for console and VTY access using Cisco IOS commands.

Console password To configure the console password, run the following commands: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#configure terminal (or config t) RT1(config)#line console 0 (or line con 0) RT1(config-line)#password my_password RT1(config-line)#login RT1(config-line)#exit RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global router settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole router. The line console 0 command selects the console line. Cisco devices have only one console line: console 0. The password my_password command sets the my_password password on the console access line. Finally, instruct the Cisco device to prompt for authentication by entering the login Cisco IOS command. From now on, anytime you connect to the console line you will be prompted to provide a password. The password you provide must be my_password. To disable the authentication prompt, issue line console 0 again and enter the no login command.

www.it-ebooks.info


537

You use the exit commands to exit the config-line mode and to exit the config global configuration mode.

Telnet password To configure a password for the VTY lines, run the following commands: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#configure terminal (or config t) RT1(config)#line vty 0 ? <0-4> last line number RT1(config-line)#line vty 0-4 RT1(config-line)#password my__telnet_password RT1(config-line)#login RT1(config-line)#exit RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global router settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole router. The line vty 0 ? command asks the Cisco IOS how many VTY lines are available. The response (<0-4> last line number) shows that five VTY lines exist on this particular router (you can have five simultaneous Telnet sessions opened to this router). Now, you can configure a password either on one of the VTY lines, by selecting that particular line, or on all VTY lines, by selecting the whole 0–4 line range. The line vty 0-4 command selects the whole 0–4 VTY line range. Cisco devices have several VTY access lines. Older routers have only five VTY lines. Newer routers have as many as 1,180 VTY lines. It is best practice to query the Cisco IOS about how many VTY lines are available. Two main reasons exist to have several VTY access lines on a Cisco device:

✦ Allowing several administrators to work on the router: In large networks, more than one administrator may manage the network. More than one administrator may need to connect from a remote location to the same router using Telnet or SSH. This is typical with large core routers. The password my_telnet_password command sets the my_telnet_ password password on the VTY access lines. You can set a different password on each line. However, this is not recommended, because you don’t

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 2


✦ Allowing you to connect to the router and connect to another device from the router: Two VTY lines are needed in this case: one to connect into the router and another one to connect out of the router to another device.

538


know which VTY line you on are when you log in, so you wouldn’t know which password to enter. Best practice is to select the whole range of VTY lines and to set the same password on all of them. Finally, instruct the Cisco router to prompt for authentication by entering the login Cisco IOS command. From now on, anytime you connect to any of the VTY lines, you will be prompted to provide a password. The password you provide must be my_telnet_password. To disable the authentication prompt, issue line vty 0-4 again and enter the no login command. After you run the initial setup IOS commands, the router has a startup configuration saved in NVRAM. The router is reachable on the IP network. You can now connect to the router either locally to its console or auxiliary port, or remotely to its IP address, as explained previously in the section “Connecting to a Cisco Router.”

Configuring banners You can optionally configure a banner for your router using the banner Cisco IOS command. The purpose of a banner is to display a brief message about the router when you log in. This is useful when you have many routers spread out across multiple sites. It helps identify the router you log in to and see its configuration and usage guidelines. Banners are also useful for legal reasons: You can add a security warning in the banner message to warn users against unauthorized logins to the router. Although this does not prevent the user from logging in to the router, it does provide ground for legal action in the case of unauthorized logins. Always use passwords to secure your routers. Four types of banners are available: ✦ Message of the day (MOTD) banner: This is the first banner to display when a user connects to a router, regardless of the type of connection. This banner is used to display a message for all users that connect to the router, before they log in. This is typically used for an unauthorized access warning. ✦ Login banner: This banner is displayed on TTY or VTY terminals after the MOTD banner. This banner is typically used to display information about the router and to provide guidelines on how to log in and use the router. ✦ Incoming terminal connection banner: This banner is displayed on reverse TTY or VTY terminals after the MOTD banner. This banner is used for the same reasons as the login banner. The only difference is the type of terminal connection: You can specify additional information in this banner for users that connect with reverse TTY or VTY terminals.

www.it-ebooks.info


539

✦ EXEC process creation banner: This banner is displayed whenever an EXEC process is created, after the user is logged in. An EXEC process is created for each user EXEC prompt. User EXEC prompts are established for each user connected to the router, after the user logs in successfully. Hence, the EXEC process creation banner is displayed after the login/ incoming banners and after the MOTD banner. To configure an MOTD banner on your router, run the following commands: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#configure terminal (config t) RT1(config)#banner motd Enter TEXT message. End with character ‘-’. $This router is property of silange.com networks. Unauthorized access is prohibited. Please disconnect if you are not a silange.com employee, customer, or business partner. RT1(config)#

The banner motd - command starts the banner text editor using ‘-’ as the delimiting character. The delimiting character is used by the IOS to determine when you are done typing the banner text. You enter the banner text of your choice and finish by typing the delimiting character (‘-’ in this case) and pressing Enter. The delimiting character can be any character, but you cannot use that character within the text of the banner. Cisco IOS would interpret that as the end of the banner text.

Resetting a Cisco router Cisco routers revert to setup mode anytime no startup configuration exists in NVRAM. Normally, this only happens when the router is new and not yet configured. However, you may want to clear the current configuration in NVRAM and start a new configuration from scratch. This is typically a last-resort troubleshooting method: When problems affect the router and no troubleshooting method fixes the problems, your last resort is to reset the router and reconfigure it.

After it is reset, the router is in the state it was when you purchased it: ✦ No IP address ✦ No host name ✦ No default gateway (router)

www.it-ebooks.info


Resetting the router clears the configuration of the router.

Book IV Chapter 2

540

Configuring a Cisco Router ✦ No subnet mask ✦ No console password ✦ No Telnet password ✦ No startup configuration It is best practice to back up the startup configuration of a router to a backup computer host before resetting the router. To reset a router, you need to clear its startup configuration from NVRAM: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#erase startup-config Erasing the nvram filesystem removes all configuration files! Continue? [confirm] [OK] Erase of nvram: complete RT1#

Observe that the erase command warns you that the NVRAM contents will be reinitialized and prompts you to confirm. The default answer is confirm. To confirm, just press Enter.

Managing Cisco router configuration Ongoing, you can manage your router using the following: ✦ Cisco IOS commands ✦ The Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) GUI tool ✦ The Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) GUI tool ✦ The Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) Express Web tool The Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) tool, the Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) tool, and the Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) Express tool are graphical user interface (GUI)–based tools that allow you to manage your router and its startup and running configurations from a remote location using a computer host. Their GUI interfaces are much easier to use and more intuitive than Cisco IOS commands. Recall that although the Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) tool can monitor and manage both switches and routers, it is typically used with Cisco switches, rather than with Cisco routers. The Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) and the Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) Express are the preferred router monitoring and management tools.

www.it-ebooks.info


541

You read about the Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) tool, the Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) tool, and the Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) Express in Book I, Chapter 10. You find out about Cisco IOS router configuration management commands in the following sections.

Managing the router boot process Cisco routers always follow the same boot process when they are powered up. This process contains four stages:

1. Run the POST: The Cisco router runs the power-on self test to verify basic functionality of the Cisco router hardware.

2. Boot up: The Cisco router runs the bootstrap program to bring up the router and transition it to normal operation mode by loading the first Cisco IOS image from flash memory.

3. Load the IOS: The Cisco IOS loads into RAM from flash memory. 4. Load the startup configuration: After the Cisco router loads the IOS in RAM, the IOS loads the device startup configuration from NVRAM. The startup configuration is loaded into RAM and becomes the running configuration, the configuration that changes dynamically while the Cisco router is running. At this point, the Cisco router is in normal operation mode, ready for business. This process is also called the automatic boot process: The router automatically boots up with current options and loads the startup configuration.

Boot command Recall that the Cisco bootstrap program loads the first Cisco IOS image file from flash memory, by default, when the router is powered up. In some cases, you may need to boot a specific IOS image file from flash memory. For example, suppose that you download a new Cisco IOS image file that contains additional features, but you would like to test it on your router before you remove the original IOS image file. You can configure the router to boot with the new IOS image file using the boot command.

✦ Which Cisco IOS image file is loaded ✦ Which startup configuration file is loaded

www.it-ebooks.info


The boot command allows you to configure the boot process of a Cisco router. You can control the following:

Book IV Chapter 2

542


You can use the Cisco IOS contextual help to see the options available with the boot command: RT1>enable (or en) Password: my_priv_encrypt_password RT1#configure terminal (or config t, or conf t) RT1(config)# RT1(config)#boot ? bootstrap Bootstrap image file host Router-specific config file network Network-wide config file system System image file RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

Observe that you need to be in privileged global configuration mode to execute the boot command. The bootstrap, host, and network options are beyond the scope of the CCNA test. The service-config command enables loading of router startup configuration files from remote servers. If loading of configuration files from remote servers is not enabled with the service-config command, the router ignores the boot host and boot network options and looks for a startup configuration file in its NVRAM instead. Loading startup configuration files from remote servers is done in two phases: 1. The IOS loads the network configuration file. The network configuration file contains configuration settings that apply to all routers in your network that are loading their startup configuration from a network configuration server. You would typically have only one network configuration file for all your routers. The network configuration file name is network-config by default. 2. The IOS loads the host configuration file. The host configuration file contains configuration settings that apply to a specific router. You may have as many host configuration files as you have routers in your network, if each router needs specific settings. The host configuration file name is -config by default. It is comprised of the router host name (in lowercase characters) and the -config suffix. The boot host option sets the location of the host configuration file of the router.

www.it-ebooks.info


543

The boot network option sets the location of the network configuration file of the router. Using the host and network boot options in conjunction with the serviceconfig command is useful in large environments where you have a lot of routers to manage. It’s more efficient to manage the routers’ network and host startup configuration files on a central management computer than to keep track of the files on each router. It is best practice to back up the configuration server host to avoid losing the configuration files. The system option allows you to boot a specific Cisco IOS image file. This is useful in cases when, for example, you download a new Cisco IOS image file, containing additional features, and you would like to test it on your router. The system option allows you to boot a specific Cisco IOS image file either from local flash memory on the router or from a remote server. Here is an example in which you set the router to boot with a specific Cisco IOS image file stored in flash memory: RT1>enable (or en) Password: my_priv_encrypt_password RT1#configure terminal (or config t, or conf t) RT1(config)# RT1(config)#boot system flash:/c2600-ik9o3s3-mz.123-1a.bin RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

Observe that you need to be in privileged global configuration mode to execute the boot command. You can use the show running-configuration command to verify the current boot options on a router:

Observe that you need to be in privileged EXEC mode to execute the show running-configuration boot command. Note also that you filter the output to display only lines that contain the word boot using the | include boot suffix.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 2


RT1>enable (or en) Password:my_priv_encrypt_password RT1#show running-configuration | include boot boot-start-marker boot system flash c2600-ik9o3s3-mz.123-1a.bin boot-end-marker RT1#disable RT1>

544


This command shows the current boot options. All options can be changed with the corresponding boot command, as explained earlier. After you change a boot option, you need to reboot your router using the reload command in privileged EXEC mode.

Managing the router boot process with the configuration register In Book I, Chapter 10, you read that the configuration register is a 2-byte (16bit) area of NVRAM that holds a numeric value defining how the Cisco router starts up. By default, the value stored in the configuration register instructs the bootstrap program to load the Cisco IOS from flash memory and to load the startup configuration from NVRAM. You can change the value of the configuration register from the ROMMON prompt. To get to the rommon > prompt, you need to break out of the bootstrap process by pressing Ctrl+Break while the Cisco router is booting up. The configuration register can be set to various values, but the following three values are important to remember: ✦ 0x2100: This value instructs the bootstrap program to boot to the ROMMON prompt. This is equivalent to pressing Ctrl+Break while the Cisco router is booting up to break out of the bootstrap process and exit to the rommon> prompt. ✦ 0x2101: This value instructs the bootstrap program to boot to the (boot)> Rx-boot prompt. ✦ 0x2102 to 0x210F: These values instruct the bootstrap program to boot the Cisco IOS from flash memory. Observe that there are 14 possible values (2 to F). The value that you specify determines which copy of the IOS is loaded. You can have up to 14 different copies (versions) of the Cisco IOS in flash memory. The value that you set in the configuration register determines which copy is loaded. The configuration register is set to 0x2102 by default. The bootstrap program loads the first copy of the Cisco IOS from flash memory. So, what are the other configuration register values that you can set? The configuration register is comprised of 2 bytes or 16 bits, which means 216 (65,536) possible values. This is a lot of possible configuration variations, but in reality, only a small number of these values are used. Table 2-1 illustrates the default value of the configuration register (0x2102) in binary and hexadecimal values.

www.it-ebooks.info


Table 2-1

545

Configuration Register

Nibble 1

Nibble 2

Nibble 3

Nibble 4

Bit

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Bin

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

Hex

2

1

0

2

Each binary nibble (each group of 4 bits) is a digit in hexadecimal. You read this table by nibble: ✦ The value of nibble 1 is 00102, which is 216. ✦ The value of nibble 2 is 00012, which is 116. ✦ The value of nibble 3 is 00002, which is 016. ✦ The value of nibble 4 is 00102, which is 216. Next, you put the value of each nibble side by side to obtain the hexadecimal number: 0x2102. Now, how would you express 0x2102 in binary? Each digit is a nibble in binary: ✦ The value of nibble 1 is 216, which is 00102. ✦ The value of nibble 2 is 116, which is 00012. ✦ The value of nibble 3 is 016, which is 02. ✦ The value of nibble 4 is 216, which is 00102. Next, you put the value of each nibble side by side to obtain the binary number: 0010 0001 0000 00102.

Table 2-2 lists the purpose of some of the bits of the configuration register.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 2


By turning bits on and off in the configuration register, you configure the behavior of the bootstrap program. Each bit-set combination corresponds to a number in hexadecimal. You set the configuration register to that bit set by initializing the configuration register with the corresponding hexadecimal number.

546


Table 2-2

Configuration Register Bit Purpose

Bit

Hexadecimal Value

Purpose

0–3

0x0000–0x000F

Boot option

6

0x0040

Do not load startup configuration from NVRAM

8

0x0100

Disable break

11,12

0x0800, 0x1000

Set console line speed

13

0x2000

Boot from ROM if TFTP boot fails

15

0x8000

Enable diagnostic messages

Bit 0 instructs the bootstrap program to load a specific operating system. The default value of bit 0 (0x0002) instructs the bootstrap program to load the first copy (version) of the Cisco IOS from flash memory. Recall that you can have 14 different copies (versions) of the Cisco IOS in flash memory. Table 2-3 summarizes the values of bit 0 and their purpose.

Table 2-3

Configuration Register: Bit 0 — Boot Option

Bit 0 Value

Hex

Purpose

0

0x0000

Boot to rommon> prompt

1

0x0001

Boot to (boot)> prompt

2

0x0002

Boot first copy of Cisco IOS from flash memory

3

0x0003

Boot second copy of Cisco IOS from flash memory

4

0x0004

Boot third copy of Cisco IOS from flash memory

F

0x000F

Boot 14th copy of Cisco IOS from flash memory

Bit 6 is important for recovering lost passwords. Bit 6 instructs the bootstrap program to avoid reading the startup configuration from NVRAM. This allows you to recover lost or forgotten passwords. You find out how to do this in the section “Recovering router passwords,” later in this chapter. Bit 8 instructs the bootstrap program to disable the break key (Ctrl+Break) during normal operation. Note that you can always break out of the boot process to the rommon> prompt if you press Ctrl+Break during the first 60 seconds while the router boots up, regardless of this setting. Setting bit 8 to 1 really means that Ctrl+Break is disabled during normal operation. Bit 8 is set by default.

www.it-ebooks.info


547

Bits 11 and 12 instruct the bootstrap program to use a certain speed for the console line. By default, these two bits are not set: Bit 11 is 0 and bit 12 is also 0. Here are the values and meanings for bits 11 and 12: ✦ 00: Speed is 9600 baud ✦ 01: Speed is 4800 baud ✦ 10: Speed is 1200 baud ✦ 11: Speed is 2400 baud The console line speed is 9600 baud by default; both bits are 0 by default. There is no reason to change the speed unless you use a computer host that cannot connect at 9600 baud to the console line. You can set a lower speed in that case. Bit 13 instructs the bootstrap program to boot the default Cisco IOS from ROM if booting from flash memory fails and if booting from a TFTP network boot server also fails. Bit 15 instructs the bootstrap program to enable diagnostic messages and to ignore the contents of NVRAM. This option is useful for troubleshooting the router. These values can be combined. For example, the configuration register is set by default to 0x2102. Referring to Table 2-2, bits 13 and 8 are set to 1. Referring to Table 2-3, bit 0 is set to 2. This means the following: ✦ Bit 13: 0x2000 instructs the bootstrap program to boot the default Cisco IOS from ROM if booting from flash memory fails and if booting from a TFTP network boot server also fails. ✦ Bit 8: 0x0100 instructs the bootstrap program to disable the break key (Ctrl+Break) during normal operation. Note that you can always break out of the boot process to the rommon> prompt if you press Ctrl+Break during the first 60 seconds while the router boots up, regardless of this setting. Setting bit 8 to 1 means that Ctrl+Break is disabled during normal operation.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ Bit 0: 0x0002 instructs the bootstrap program to load the first copy (version) of the Cisco IOS from flash memory. Recall that you can have 14 different copies (versions) of the Cisco IOS in flash memory. The value you set in bit 0 in the configuration register determines which copy is loaded. Table 2-3 summarizes the values of bit 0 and their meaning.

Book IV Chapter 2

548


You can change the value of the configuration register using the configregister Cisco IOS command. You need to reboot the router for the change to take effect. Here is an example: SW1>enable (or en) SW1#configure terminal (or config t) SW1(config)#config-register 0x2100 SW1(config)#exit SW1#show version (or sh ver) … Configuration register is 0x2102 (will be 0x2100 at next reload)

Here you set the configuration register to 0x2100 to boot to the ROM Monitor rommon> prompt at next reboot. Observe that the show version Cisco IOS command shows you the current value of the configuration register and the future value at next reboot, if you change it.

Managing configurations Two configurations exist on any Cisco router: the startup configuration and the running configuration. The following sections review the characteristics of startup and running configurations and describe how to manage them on a Cisco router.

Startup configuration The startup configuration is the configuration that the Cisco IOS loads when it boots up. The startup configuration is stored in NVRAM, which keeps its contents even when the Cisco device is powered down. Recall that whenever no startup configuration exists in NVRAM, the router starts in setup mode to allow you to create a startup configuration. After you complete the setup mode, you are prompted to save the configuration to NVRAM. If you answer yes, the configuration you created is saved to NVRAM; it becomes the startup configuration. You can also manually save the current configuration to NVRAM by using the copy running-config startup-config Cisco IOS command. Cisco devices use the startup configuration data to configure the device before normal operation starts. The Cisco IOS loads the startup configuration from NVRAM into RAM. At that point, the startup configuration becomes the running configuration. The router is up and ready in normal operation mode.

www.it-ebooks.info


549

Running configuration The running configuration is the dynamic data that changes while the Cisco device is in normal operation mode. This includes the following: ✦ Routing tables ✦ VLAN data ✦ Routing protocol configuration data ✦ Temporary buffers The Cisco IOS loads the startup configuration from NVRAM into RAM during the boot process. After it is in RAM, the startup configuration becomes the running configuration and can change dynamically. You can save the running configuration into NVRAM to replace the startup configuration with updated data. To do this, use the copy running-config startup-config Cisco IOS command. You can also save the running configuration to a file on a computer host.

Saving the running configuration to NVRAM To save the running configuration to NVRAM, run the following command: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#copy running-config startup-config (or copy run start) Destination filename [startup-config]? Building configuration . . . [OK] RT1#

The second line shows the copy command. You can also use the short form of this command (copy run start). The third line asks where you want to copy the running configuration to. You have several possible destinations: ✦ startup-config: Use this keyword to copy the current running configuration over the startup configuration in NVRAM.

✦ ftp: Use this keyword to copy the current running configuration to an FTP server. This option is useful to back up the router configuration to a remote computer host. ✦ archive: This is similar to the ftp option, except that you archive to a tape- or disk-based backup system directly, instead of passing through a computer host.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ flash: Use this keyword to copy the current running configuration to a file in flash memory, alongside the Cisco IOS.

Book IV Chapter 2

550


The default destination is the startup-config file in NVRAM. To keep the default answer, just press Enter. Sometimes, the Cisco IOS prompts you to enter a value, and it shows the default answer in between brackets [ ]. To keep the default answer, just press Enter.

Monitoring the running configuration To monitor the running configuration, run the following command: RT1#show running-config (or sh run)

Monitoring the startup configuration To monitor the startup configuration, run the following command: RT1#show startup-config (or sh start)

Deleting the startup configuration Upon reboot, a router starts in setup mode if no startup configuration exists in NVRAM. You can manually delete the startup configuration from NVRAM. This allows you to start a new configuration from scratch. This is typically a last-resort troubleshooting method: When problems affect the router and no troubleshooting method fixes the problems, your last resort is to reset the router and reconfigure it. It is best practice to back up the startup configuration to a backup computer host before deleting it. You find out how to back up the configuration to a backup computer host in the section “Back up the router running configuration to a computer host,” later in this chapter. To delete the startup configuration, run the following command: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#erase startup-config Erasing the nvram filesystem removes all configuration files! Continue? [confirm] [OK] Erase of nvram: complete RT1#

Observe that the erase command warns you that the NVRAM contents will be reinitialized and prompts you to confirm. The default answer is confirm. To confirm, simply press Enter.

Router configuration backup and recovery best practice It is best practice to save the running configuration to both ✦ The startup configuration file in NVRAM on the router itself ✦ To a computer host

www.it-ebooks.info


551

This protects you against a total failure of the router. If the router fails and you need to replace it with a new one, you don’t want to have to re-create the startup configuration from scratch. If you have that configuration saved on a computer host, you can load the startup configuration from the computer host and onto the new router, and you’re ready to go in production with the new router.

Back up the router running configuration to a computer host To back up the running configuration to a computer host, run the following command: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#copy running-config tftp (or copy run tftp) Address or name of remote host []? 192.168.75.5 Destination filename [RT1-config]? 812 bytes copied in 0.910 secs (892 bytes/sec) RT1#

The copy running-config tftp Cisco IOS command on the second line initiates the copy process of the router running configuration to a TFTP server. The third line prompts you for the IP address or host name of the remote host destination. Observe that the IOS does offer a suggested IP address or host name. You can configure a default TFTP server. The IP address or host name of that default TFTP server then shows up as a suggestion in line 3. The fourth line prompts you for the filename you want to give to the configuration file saved on the remote host. The router name, followed by the suffix -config, is suggested by default. You simply press Enter to accept the suggested filename. Now your running configuration is saved in a file named RT1-config on the remote computer host with IP address 192.168.75.5.

Recover a router configuration from a computer host

RT1>enable (or en) RT1#copy tftp running-config (or copy tftp run) Address or name of remote host []? 192.168.75.5 Source filename []? RT1-config Destination filename [running-config]? Accessing tftp://192.168.75.5/RT1-config... Loading RT1-config from 192.168.75.5 [OK - 812 bytes] 812 bytes copied in 10.120 secs (80 bytes/sec) RT1#

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 2


Suppose that you need to load a configuration from a remote host to your router. The same copy Cisco IOS command allows you to recover a configuration from a remote host:

552


The copy tftp running-config Cisco IOS command on the second line initiates the copy process of the router running configuration from a TFTP server. The third line prompts you for the IP address or host name of the remote host destination. Observe that, in this example, the IOS does not suggest any source IP address or hostname “[]”. You can configure a default TFTP server on your router. The IP address or hostname of that default TFTP server will then show up suggested between the square brackets. The fourth line prompts you for the source filename of the configuration file that you want to load from the remote host. Enter the name of a configuration file that you saved previously on the TFTP server. In this example, you enter the name of the configuration you just copied to the TFTP server in the previous example (“RT1-config”). The fifth line prompts you for the destination filename. The running-config filename is suggested. This means that the configuration you load from the TFTP server will replace the current running configuration. Press Enter to accept the suggested choice. Next, the copy command displays a few status messages. At this point, your running configuration has been loaded from a file named RT1-config from a remote TFTP server host with IP address 192.168.75.5.

Managing router configurations using the Cisco IOS File System (IFS) This section shows how to manage the memory of a Cisco router using Cisco IOS File System (IFS) commands. Know that you can manage the memory of a Cisco router like a file system on a computer host. The Cisco IFS presents the memory of a Cisco router as directories (or folders) and files within those directories, just like Microsoft Windows, Apple Mac OS X, Linux, or any other computer operating system presents the hard drive of a computer host as directories (or folders) and files. The Cisco IFS commands are only available in privileged mode. So, you need to run the enable command first (or en in its short form). First, verify the current directory: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#pwd flash:

You are currently in the flash main memory directory, as shown by the pwd command. Next, run the dir Cisco IFS command to see the contents of flash memory on your router:

www.it-ebooks.info


553

RT1#dir Directory of flash:/ 1 -rw- 15572992 c2600-ik9o3s3-mz.123-1a.bin 16777216 bytes total (1204160 bytes free)

This shows that the flash memory on your router contains a single Cisco IOS image named c2600-ik9o3s3-mz.123-1a.bin. You can easily find other directories and files by using the dir allfilesystems Cisco IFS command: RT1#dir all-filesystems Directory of nvram:/ 27 -rw0 28 ---0


29688 bytes total (29636 bytes free) Directory of system:/ 10 drwx 0 2 dr-x 0 1 -rw582 9 dr-x 0


No space information available Directory of flash:/ 1 -rw15572992



16777216 bytes total (1204160 bytes free)

Observe that you have three main directories (file systems) on your Cisco router: ✦ nvram: Stores the startup-config and the private-config files. ✦ system: This is the RAM, which contains the running-config file. ✦ flash: This is the flash memory, which contains the Cisco IOS operating system image. This is the Cisco IOS image that the bootstrap program loads in RAM when the router boots up.

For example, list the contents of NVRAM: RT1#dir nvram: Directory of nvram:/ 27 -rw0 startup-config 28 ---0 private-config 29688 bytes total (29636 bytes free)

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 2


You can list the contents of any of these main directories (file systems) individually using the dir and cd Cisco IFS commands. You can change your working directory from flash: to any of the main directories using the cd Cisco IFS command.

554

Managing Cisco Router Authentication

Now, change to the RAM directory (system) and look at the files and directories available there: RT1#cd system: RT1#dir Directory of system:/ 10 drwx 0


Observe the running-config file. This is the current running configuration. You can copy a configuration file from a computer host to system:/ running-config to load a configuration on the router from a configuration backup file on a computer host. To load a configuration on the router from a configuration backup file on a computer host, run the following Cisco IFS commands: RT1#copy tftp://192.168.75.5/RT1-confg system:/running-config Destination filename [running-config]? Accessing tftp://192.168.75.5/RT1-confg... Loading RT1-confg from 192.168.75.5 [OK - 812 bytes] 812 bytes copied in 10.120 secs (80 bytes/sec) RT1#

The copy tftp://192.168.75.5/RT1-confg system:/runningconfig command you use here is very similar to the copy tftp runningconfig command that you used in the previous section. The only difference is that you specify the path to the source and the path to the destination when you use the Cisco IFS version of the copy command. You can also use this command to copy a configuration from a configuration backup file on a computer host to the startup-config file in NVRAM. Here is an example: RT1#copy tftp://192.168.75.5/RT1-confg nvram:/startup-config Destination filename [startup-config]? Accessing tftp://192.168.75.5/RT1-confg... Loading RT1-confg from 192.168.75.5 [OK - 812 bytes] 812 bytes copied in 10.120 secs (80 bytes/sec)

Managing Cisco Router Authentication You can configure several passwords for different types of access to your router:

www.it-ebooks.info


555

✦ Console password: Used for console access through the console port or through a Console Terminal Server. ✦ Auxiliary password: Used for console access through the auxiliary port using a modem. ✦ VTY lines password: Virtual type terminal (VTY) lines are used for Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH) access. They are called virtual type terminal lines because no physical terminal is connected to the router. Instead, you connect a computer host to the network and access the router remotely using the router management IP address. A terminal emulation program on the computer host emulates a physical terminal (TTY). ✦ Privileged password: Used for privileged mode access. Privileged mode is an “expert” management operation mode used to run some Cisco IOS commands. The console port and the auxiliary port are enabled by default, even if no password is specified for them. This is a security risk. It is best practice to specify at least a console password on new Cisco devices. Privileged EXEC mode is not secured with a password by default on Cisco routers. By default, you can access privileged mode by executing the enable IOS command at the user EXEC prompt. It is best practice to configure a privileged mode password to secure access to advanced IOS commands that can adversely affect the functionality of the router, if misused. The VTY lines (Telnet and Secure Shell) are disabled by default. You need to specify a password for the VTY lines to enable them. To configure passwords, you need to instruct the Cisco device to prompt for authentication. You use the login Cisco IOS command to do this.

Console password This section reviews how to configure a console password. To configure the console password, run the following commands:

www.it-ebooks.info


RT1>enable (or en) RT1#configure terminal (or config t) RT1(config)#line console 0 (or line con 0) RT1(config-line)#password my_password RT1(config-line)#login RT1(config-line)#exit RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

Book IV Chapter 2

556


The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global router settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole router. The line console 0 command selects the console line. Cisco devices have only one console line: console 0. The password my_password command sets the my_password password on the console access line. Finally, you instruct the Cisco router to prompt for authentication by entering the login Cisco IOS command. From now on, anytime you connect to the console line, you will be prompted to provide a password. The password you provide must be my_password. To disable the authentication prompt, issue line console 0 again and enter the no login command. You use the exit commands to exit the config-line mode and to exit the config global configuration mode.

Telnet password This section reviews how to configure a password for the VTY access lines. To configure a password for the VTY lines, run the following commands: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#configure terminal (or config t) RT1(config)# line vty 0 ? <0-4> last line number RT1(config-line)#line vty 0-4 RT1(config-line)#password my_telnet_password RT1(config-line)#login RT1(config-line)#exit RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global router settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole router. The line vty 0 ? command asks the Cisco IOS how many VTY lines are available. The response (<0-4> last line number) shows that five VTY lines are available on this particular router. Now you can configure a password on any one of the VTY lines (by selecting that particular line) or on all VTY lines (by selecting the whole 0–15 line range). The line vty 0-4 command selects the whole 0–4 VTY line range. Cisco routers have several VTY access lines. Older routers have only five VTY

www.it-ebooks.info


557

lines. Newer routers have as many as 1,180 VTY lines. It is best practice to query the Cisco IOS about how many VTY lines are available. Two main reasons exist to have several VTY access lines on a Cisco router: ✦ Allowing you to connect to the router and connect to another device from the router. Two VTY lines are needed in this case: one to connect into the router and another one to connect out of the router to another device. ✦ Allowing several administrators to work on the router. In large networks, more than one administrator may manage the network. More than one administrator may need to connect from a remote location to the same router using Telnet or SSH. This is typical with large core routers. The password my_telnet_password command sets my_telnet_ password password on the VTY access lines. You can set a different password on each line. However, this is not recommended. You don’t know which VTY line you are on when you log in, so you wouldn’t know which password to enter. Best practice is to select the whole range of VTY lines and to set the same password on all of them. Finally, instruct the Cisco router to prompt for authentication by entering the login Cisco IOS command. From now on, anytime you connect to any of the VTY lines, you will be prompted to provide a password. The password you provide must be my_telnet_password. To disable the authentication prompt, issue line vty 0-15 again and enter the no login command.

Auxiliary password If your router has an auxiliary port, it is best practice to secure access to the auxiliary port using a password. To configure the auxiliary password, run the following commands:

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global router settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole router.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 2


RT1>enable (or en) RT1#configure terminal (or config t) RT1(config)#line auxiliary 0 (or line aux 0) RT1(config-line)#password my_aux_password RT1(config-line)#login RT1(config-line)#exit RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

558


The line console 0 command selects the console line. Cisco routers have only one console line: console 0. The password my_password command sets the my_password password on the console access line. Finally, instruct the Cisco router to prompt for authentication by entering the login Cisco IOS command. From now on, anytime you connect to the console line, you will be prompted to provide a password. The password you provide must be my_password. To disable the authentication prompt, issue line console 0 again and enter the no login command. You use the exit commands to exit the config-line mode and to exit the config global configuration mode.

Privileged password It is best practice to set up a privileged password to secure access to advanced IOS commands that can adversely affect the functionality of the router if misused. You can use two different commands to configure a privileged password: ✦ enable password my_priv_password: This command sets my_ priv_password as the privileged password. This password is not encrypted by default. This command is supported in all IOS versions. ✦ enable secret my_priv_encrypt_password: This command sets my_priv_ encrypt_password as the privileged password. This password is encrypted. This command is supported in newer IOS versions. Using the enable secret or the enable password commands, you configure a privileged password that is stored locally on your router. The only difference between the two commands is that enable secret stores the password on the router in encrypted form, which is more secure than enable password, which stores the password on the router in unencrypted form. Always use the Cisco IOS help to determine whether the enable secret command is available. If it is, use it to set the privileged password. It is best practice to encrypt the privileged password using the enable secret command whenever this command is available. You can also configure your privileged password to be stored on a Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS) server. This is a good option in larger networks with many routers when it is better to configure

www.it-ebooks.info


559

the privileged password once, centrally, on a TACACS server, instead of configuring passwords on each of your routers. To configure an encrypted privileged mode password, run the following commands: RT1>enable (or en) RT1#configure terminal (or config t) RT1(config)#enable secret my_priv_encrypt_password RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

Encrypting passwords By default, passwords are stored in plain text in the running configuration in RAM and in the startup configuration file in NVRAM. You can view the passwords on your router in plain text, using either the show running-config command or the show startup-config command. This is a security risk. It is best practice to encrypt all passwords on your router. The privileged password is encrypted if you use the enable secret command. It is best practice to set a privileged password using the enable secret command to make sure that it is encrypted. So, if you use enable secret instead of enable password to set a privileged password, your privileged password is encrypted. How about other passwords? Console, auxiliary, and Telnet (VTY) passwords are not encrypted, even if you use the enable secret command for the privileged password. You need to encrypt them using the service password-encryption command. To encrypt passwords on your router, run the following commands:

The first two commands (enable and configure terminal) set the IOS in privileged global configuration mode. You can now run commands that configure global router settings, that is, settings that apply to the whole router. The service password-encryption command asks the Cisco IOS to encrypt all passwords except the privileged password that is already encrypted if the enable secret command was used.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 2


RT1>enable (or en) RT1#configure terminal (or config t) RT1(config)#service password-encryption RT1(config)#exit RT1#disable RT1>

560


Enabling Secure Shell (SSH) Secure Shell (SSH) is similar to Telnet: It allows remote users to connect to the router by using the router IP address. SSH is more secure than Telnet, because it encrypts data exchanged between the remote management computer and the router. It is best practice to encrypt data exchanged between the remote management computer and the router. Consider this example: You need to change the passwords on a router located in a remote data center. The data center is too far to walk to, so you need to connect to the router remotely from your computer. While changing the passwords, you enter the passwords on the keyboard of your computer. If you are connected to the router using Telnet, the data exchanged between your computer and the router is in clear text. That data includes the new passwords that you type at your computer keyboard. Hence, passwords are sent over the Internet in clear text. This is a security risk. SSH avoids this security risk by encrypting data exchanged between your computer and the router. SSH uses encryption keys to encrypt the data exchanged in an SSH session. Cisco supports both SSH version 1.0 (also known as SSH v1 or SSH.1) and SSH version 2.0 (also known as SSH v2 or SSH.2). Cisco started to support SSH v2 with IOS Release 12.1(19)E on some router models. If you get a %Invalid input error when you execute the crypto key generate rsa command, the Cisco IOS version on your router does not support SSH. You may need to download the cryptographic software image from Cisco. To download the cryptographic IOS software image for your router, log in to www.cisco.com/public/sw-center/index.shtml. Note that you need to register at Cisco.com before downloading. Some software export limitations may apply. Figure 2-9 shows the Cisco 2621 series router software download section at Cisco.com. Observe that various packages are available for each release. Each package enables certain features for typical usages of the router. You choose the IOS image that corresponds to your needs. For example: ✦ IP/IPX/APPLETALK: You choose this Cisco IOS image if you use your 2621 router to route data for IP, IPX, or AppleTalk network protocols. If you do not have any computer hosts using the NetWare IPX protocol and if you do not have any hosts using the AppleTalk protocol, it wouldn’t make sense to use this image, because enabling support for more protocols than necessary slows your router.

www.it-ebooks.info


561

Figure 2-9: Downloading Cisco 2621 router IOS images.

✦ IP: You choose this Cisco IOS image if all computer hosts in your network are using the Internet Protocol. Contrary to the previous IOS image, which enabled support for IP, IPX, and AppleTalk, this image only enables IP. If all your hosts are using IP, this is the image you want. Scrolling down the list, you find images that enable encryption. You need to download and install one of those encryption-enabled IOS images.

✦ Ensure that the Cisco IOS image on your router supports SSH. ✦ Ensure that you assigned a host name to your router: SSH needs the host name to generate the encryption keys. ✦ Ensure that you assigned an IP domain name to you router: SSH needs the IP domain name to generate the encryption keys. ✦ Create a local or TACACS administrator user and assign it a password: SSH cannot use the Telnet password that you assigned to the VTY

www.it-ebooks.info


To enable SSH, you need to

Book IV Chapter 2

562


access lines. You need to create a specific user that will be used to authenticate SSH sessions. ✦ Create the encryption keys. ✦ Configure SSH options such as session timeout and number of login retries. ✦ Enable SSH on the VTY lines of your router.

Recovering router passwords The Cisco IOS provides a mechanism to recover passwords, in case you lost them or you do not remember them. You need to have physical access to the router to connect to its console port. This is a good thing, because you don’t want anyone else connecting from a remote location through Telnet to be able to reset the passwords on your routers. The key point of the password recovery process is to boot up the Cisco router ignoring its current startup configuration, which contains the current passwords. To boot up the Cisco router ignoring its current startup configuration you need to change the value in the configuration register. You can set bit 6 in the configuration register to instruct the bootstrap program to avoid reading the startup configuration from NVRAM. By doing this, you boot up the router as if it had no startup configuration — as if the router were new, coming out of the box.

Password recovery process Follow these steps to recover passwords on a Cisco router:

1. Change the configuration register to 0x2142. 2. Reboot the router. 3. Upon reboot, exit from setup mode. The router ignores the startup configuration in NVRAM, so it automatically starts in setup mode. You need to exit setup mode because your router is already set up. You just want to reset the passwords in the current startup configuration, not to reset the whole configuration.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Enable privileged EXEC mode. Load the startup configuration manually from NVRAM to RAM. Enable global configuration mode. Change the passwords. Save the running configuration over the startup configuration in NVRAM. Change the configuration register back to the default value of 0x2102. Reboot the router.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 3: Network Routing Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the types of network routes and knowing when to use them ✓ Describing routing and routed protocols, their characteristics, and

purpose ✓ Describing routing decision criteria ✓ Distinguishing distance vector routing from link-state routing ✓ Describing route updates and convergence ✓ Describing routing administrative distance ✓ Describing common routing protocol metrics ✓ Describing the general process to enable and configure a routing

protocol

R

ead this chapter to find out about Layer 3 routing. Routers route data packets between networks. Routers do the following:

✦ Manage routing protocols ✦ Build routing tables using routing protocols ✦ Route packets using routed protocols and routing tables ✦ Maintain routing tables

Introducing Network Routes A network route is a data transmission path through one or more networks between two end nodes. The end nodes can be any computer device that supports IP connectivity, such as computer hosts, IP phones, digital video consoles, and smartphones. More than one route can exist between two end nodes. The main purpose of a router is to find the best route to reach a destination node. The best route is calculated according to route metrics: the cost in time and resources to send a data packet over that route. More than one router can exist in the data transmission path between the sending and the receiving nodes. For example, when you connect to an

www.it-ebooks.info

568

Introducing Network Routes

Internet Web site from your home computer, your computer sends data packets to your home router. Your home router routes those packets to the default outbound gateway of your Internet service provider. The default outbound gateway of your Internet service provider, also a router, sends your data packets to the network of the Internet Web site. In this example, at least three routers are involved: ✦ Your home router ✦ Your Internet service provider’s router ✦ The inbound router of the Internet Web site You find three types of network routes: ✦ Static routes ✦ Default routes ✦ Dynamic routes

Static routes You define static routes manually on a router. Static routes are best suited for small networks, such as LANs, where routes rarely change. If routes change, you need to update your routes to reflect the new data transmission paths.

Advantages Some of the advantages of using static routes are as follows: ✦ Routing efficiency: By defining static routes, you can leave the routing protocols disabled on your router. This saves some bandwidth. Dynamic routing requires routing protocols to be enabled. Routing protocols consume some bandwidth because they constantly send route update packets between routers. ✦ Security: In some cases, you may want to define static routes to control the data transmission paths used by your data. This may be useful in highly secure environments. Keep the following in mind though: • You can filter routing data using firewalls at the network perimeter. • You can use Virtual Private Networking (VPN) to secure your data transmissions, no matter which data path they travel on. Hence, you can mitigate security risks involving dynamic routes using either firewalls or VPN or both. You read about firewalls and VPN in Book VI.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

570

Introducing Network Routes

In this example, you define a static route on router RT6751 to network 192.168.25.0 through serial interface 0/1.

Default routes Default routes are static routes that you define for packets bound to a destination network that is not found in any of the routing tables on the router. Whenever the router receives packets bound to a network the router doesn’t know, it sends the packet out on the default route. It is best practice to define a default route to ensure that data packets bound for networks unknown to your router are forwarded to a default gateway. Default routes are related to default gateways: A default route is a data transmission path to the default outbound gateway in a network. For example, in a LAN with network IP address 192.168.25.0, the default gateway is typically 192.168.25.1. The default route is the data transmission path that reaches 192.168.25.1, the default gateway.

Configuring default routes You configure default routes using the same ip route Cisco IOS command in global configuration mode. However, the IP address and the subnet mask of the destination network are 0.0.0.0. Here is an example: RT6751>enable (or en) RT6751#configure terminal (or config t) RT6751 (config)#ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 serial 0/0 RT6751 (config)#exit RT6751#disable RT6751>

In this example, you define a default route on router RT6751 to outbound serial interface 0/0. Router RT6751 now sends data packets bound for unknown networks out on serial interface 0/0. You can also use the IP address of the default gateway to configure a default route, as shown here: RT6751>enable (or en) RT6751#configure terminal (or config t) RT6751 (config)#ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.67.1 RT6751 (config)#exit RT6751#disable RT6751>

In this example, you define a default route on router RT6751 to outbound IP address 192.168.67.1. Router RT6751 now sends data packets bound for unknown networks out to the default gateway of network 192.168.67.0.

www.it-ebooks.info

Routing Protocols

571

Dynamic routes Dynamic routes are routes that change over time. Routing protocols define and maintain dynamic routes. Routes change due to the following: ✦ Network topology updates ✦ Network traffic updates ✦ Available bandwidth ✦ Link state Some of the advantages of using dynamic routes are as follows: ✦ Low maintenance: You do not need to update your routes whenever data transmission paths change when using dynamic routing. Routes are automatically updated by routing protocols that exchange route update packets. All you need to do is to configure routing protocols on your router. ✦ Accuracy: Routing protocols keep track of network changes. This improves routing accuracy because routers send packets over the best routes available at any time. ✦ Scalability: Large networks have hundreds, even thousands, of alternate routes to reach other networks. It is practically impossible to define all these routes statically. Even if you define all alternate routes statically, as soon as a change occurs in the overall network topology, you would need to update the static routes. This is a maintenance nightmare. Dynamic routing avoids this problem by using routing protocols to allow routers to communicate about routes they know, new routes they discover, and routes that became unavailable or overloaded. Thus, networks using dynamic routing can scale out much better than networks that solely use static routes.

Disadvantages Overhead is a disadvantage of using static routes. Dynamic routing protocols consume some bandwidth because they constantly send route update packets between routers.

You configure dynamic routes using routing protocols.

Routing Protocols Routing protocols exchange network, routes, and metric information between routers to help find optimal routes as fast as possible. Routers use the information provided by routing protocols to build their routing tables for each

www.it-ebooks.info

Network Routing

Configuring dynamic routes

Book IV Chapter 3

572

Routed Protocols

routed protocol to keep track of networks, paths to networks, and metrics associated with each route. Several routing protocols exist. Most routers support more than one routing protocol. Several routing protocols can be simultaneously enabled on a router. Routing protocols do not interfere and do not communicate with each other. The most widely used routing protocols, and the ones you need to know for the test, are as follows: ✦ Routing Information Protocol (RIP); see Chapter 4 ✦ Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP); see Chapter 5 ✦ Open Shortest Path First (OSPF); see Chapter 6

Routed Protocols Routed protocols tag each data packet with source and destination hierarchical addresses to allow the routing of data packets through networks as needed. Routed protocols also assign a unique logical address to each node in the network to identify each source and each destination in the network. Here are some routed protocols that you may encounter in the field: ✦ Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4, commonly referred to as just IP) ✦ Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) ✦ AppleTalk ✦ Novell Netware Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX)

Routing Decision Criteria Routers may pick different network routes to a destination for a given packet depending on various decision criteria. Some routes may be deemed faster than by others by different routing protocols. Routers keep separate routing tables for each protocol. A route that is best now may not be best in a few minutes, depending on various criteria such as traffic, available bandwidth, and link state. Routers adapt to changes in traffic, available bandwidth, and link state by constantly monitoring the state of each route they know. Routing tables keep track of networks, paths to networks, and metrics associated with each route.

www.it-ebooks.info

Routing Decision Criteria

573

Routers consider two aspects when deciding which network routes are best at a given moment: ✦ Administrative distance: How reliable is the information source that provided the data about the network route? ✦ Routing protocol metrics: What are the costs associated with each network route?

Administrative distance The administrative distance determines the reliability of the information source that provided the data about the network route. Routers learn about network routes using various methods: ✦ Router connects directly to a network. The router learns about the network firsthand, because it connects to it. ✦ Router does not connect to the network, but a static route exists to that network. The router does not “see” the network, but it’s been informed about its existence by a fairly reliable source (the static route). ✦ Router is connected indirectly, through other router(s), to a network. The router does not “see” the network, but it “heard” about it from another router. Routers trust routes according to how reliable the source of information is. A router always prefers routes learned from reliable information sources. Cisco defined the concept of administrative distance to measure this trust. Various sources get different administrative distance values, as shown in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1

Administrative Distances Administrative Distance

Directly connected

0

Static route

1

EIGRP (internal)

90

OSPF

110

RIP (v1 and v2)

120

EIGRP (external)

170

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 3

Network Routing

Routing Information Source

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

576

Routing Methods

EIGRP considers the load metric to pick network routes. EIGRP prefers routes with lower load.

Maximum transmission unit (MTU) MTU is the size, in bytes, of each data packet. Each network route has a certain MTU value. The higher the MTU, the more data can be transferred at once. EIGRP considers the MTU metric to pick network routes. EIGRP prefers routes with higher MTU.

Cost Cost is calculated based on the bandwidth of a network route. Cost is 108/bandwidth. The OSPF protocol considers the cost metric to pick network routes. OSPF prefers routes with lower cost.

Routing Methods Routing protocols exchange network, route, and metric information between routers to help routers build their routing tables. Earlier you saw that routing protocols use different metrics to evaluate the quality of a route. Routing protocols also use different methods to exchange information about network routes.

Distance vector routing Some routing protocols use the distance to a network to evaluate the quality of a network route. Shorter routes (routes with fewer hops) are considered better than longer routes. Routers using these protocols build their routing tables based on route distance, and they exchange and combine their routing table with their neighbors. Neighbor routers trust each other’s route information, and they relay the combined information farther. These protocols are using distance vector routing. Distance vector routing is also known as rumor routing, because routers “hear” about routes from their neighbors and they relay this information to other neighbor routers. Routing tables are combined and relayed to all routers in the network.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

578

Routing Methods

Route updates send the combined routing table to all routers at predefined intervals. However, routers do not send their route updates at the same time. Hence, variations may exist in the knowledge about routes among the routers in the network. For example, if a network route becomes unreachable, the router that links to that route knows about it. However, a router that is farther from the failed route still thinks that the route is up. It takes some time before all routers in the network know about the failed route. Distance vector routing protocols use some tricks to avoid these routing loops: ✦ Maximum hop count ✦ Split horizon ✦ Route poisoning ✦ Poison reverse ✦ Hold-down timer ✦ Triggered update

Maximum hop count The maximum hop count feature ensures that a data packet never takes a route that counts more than a predefined maximum number of hops. In the example shown previously, the packet will loop indefinitely, which means that it will traverse an infinite number of hops. The maximum number of hops feature attempts to stop this infinite loop. Each protocol has a predefined maximum number of hops. Routers consider a destination network to be unreachable if the number of hops associated with the route to that network exceeds the maximum number of hops allowed by the routing protocol. Table 3-2 lists the predefined maximum hop count for each routing protocol.

Table 3-2

Maximum Hop Count

Routing Protocol

Maximum Number of Hops

RIP

15

EIGRP

255 (can be configured between 1 and 255; default is 100)

OSPF

Unlimited, because this is a link-state protocol

www.it-ebooks.info

Routing Methods

579

Split horizon The split horizon feature prevents a route from being advertised back to its advertiser. Here is how this works: Consider two routers, 67<>51 and 51-2. Router 67<>51 advertises the existence of network 67 to router 51-2. Next, router 51-2 advertises network 67 to other routers: router 51-1 and router 25<>51. Without the split horizon feature, router 51-2 would also advertise network 67 back to router 67<>51. This would confuse router 67<>51 because it would think that there is an alternate route back to network 67 through router 51-2. If you assume that the split horizon feature does not exist, this can cause a routing loop: ✦ This would cause router 67<>51 to think that an alternate route exists back to network 67 through router 51-2. ✦ Router 51-2 knows about network 67 from router 67<>51. ✦ Assume that router 67<>51 lost its connection to network 67. ✦ Router 67<>51 thinks that an alternate route exists back to network 67 through router 51-2, because router 51-2 advertised network 67 back to router 67<>51 (no split horizon feature). ✦ Now, router 67<>51 sends packets bound for network 67 to the alternate route to network 67 through router 51-2. ✦ Router 51-2 knows about network 67 from router 67<>51, so it sends packets bound for network 67 back to router 67<>51. ✦ And so on. The data packets bound for network 67 bounce infinitely between routers 67<>51 and 51-2. You see now how the split horizon feature allows routers to avoid this situation by preventing router 51-2 from advertising “network 67 reachable through router 51-2” back to router 67<>51.

Route poisoning

In the preceding example, when network 67 becomes unreachable, router 67<>51 sends a packet to router 51-2 advertising network 67 with a hop count of MaxHopCount+1. Right away, router 51-2 considers network 67 unreachable. This prevents router 51-2 from getting confused by router 25<>51 when it advertises “network 67 up” right after router 67<>51 advertises “network 67

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 3

Network Routing

The route poisoning feature changes the hop count associated with a route that becomes unreachable: It sets the hop count to the maximum hop count plus 1. This effectively tells all routers in the network that the route is unreachable because the hop count exceeds the maximum hop count allowed by the routing protocol. It is a method of disabling an unavailable route in the routing tables as quickly as possible.

580

Routing Methods

down”: Even if router 51-2 thinks that network 67 is up and reachable through router 25<>51 now, the hop count is larger than the maximum hop count allowed by the routing protocol, so 51-2 would never send to network 67.

Poison reverse The poison reverse feature is similar to router poisoning but in the reverse direction. In the preceding example, when router 67<>51 sends a packet to router 51-2 advertising network 67 with a hop count of MaxHopCount+1, router 51-2 sends back a packet to router 67<>51 advertising network 67 with a hop count of MaxHopCount+1. This basically breaks the split horizon rule, but that’s okay, because the whole purpose of all of these rules is to prevent routing loops from happening. By using poison reverse, the routers ensure that all neighbors know as quickly as possible that network 67 is down.

Hold-down timer The hold-down timer prevents a router from accepting updates about a route for a certain time if that route was advertised as unavailable. This prevents routing loops by ensuring that when a route has been advertised as being unreachable, it is not readvertised as being back up by a router that did not receive the “route down” message yet. For example, router 51-2 is confused by router 25<>51 when 25<>51 advertises “network 67 up” right after router 67<>51 advertises “network 67 down.” The hold-down timer feature avoids this confusion by preventing router 51-2 from accepting the “network 67 up” update sent by router 25<>51, right after router 67<>51 sent a “network 67 down” update.

Triggered update The triggered update feature allows routers to update each other as soon as a change occurs in the network, as opposed to waiting until the scheduled route updates to be exchanged. By default, distance vector routing protocols combine and exchange the routing tables of all routers at predefined time intervals. If a network fails right after the router sent its scheduled route update, the other routers won’t know about the failed network until the next route update sent by the router that connects to the failed network. This opens a large window of time when routers in the network think that a route is up when in fact it is down. Triggered updates fix this by causing the router to send its update to neighbors as soon as it detects that the route is down.

Link-state routing Link-state routing protocols build their routing tables independently based on route updates they receive from their neighbors. Link-state protocols do not merge the routing tables of neighbor routers. Rather, they enable routers

www.it-ebooks.info

Routing Methods

581

to have a clear image of their neighbors, network topology, and routes to their neighbors and beyond. Here are the main characteristics of link-state protocols: ✦ Route updates are only sent when routes change, as opposed to distance vector protocols, which send route updates periodically. ✦ Route updates contain information about the route that changed only, as opposed to distance vector protocols, which send route updates that contain the whole combined routing table. ✦ Routers first exchange “Hello” messages to get acquainted with their neighbors, as opposed to distance vector protocols, which exchange and combine their routing tables from the get-go. ✦ Routers maintain neighbor and topology tables in addition to routing tables to help routers keep track not only of routes but also of the topology of the network and of their neighbor routers.

Convergence Routers execute an initial exchange of routing information when they power up and join the network. This initial exchange is called the convergence process. When routers finish exchanging data about networks and routes they know, the routers have converged. Because link-state routing protocols only exchange “Hello” messages initially and because link-state protocols do not merge their routing tables, they converge faster than distance vector protocols. It is best practice to use link-state routing protocols or hybrid protocols on core layer routers. Distance vector routing is best suited for access or distribution layer routers.

Route updates

Because link-state route updates are relatively infrequent and contain only a small advertisement about the route that changed, they consume fewer resources on routers and less bandwidth than distance vector routing protocols, which send the whole routing table to neighbor routers regularly, at predefined time intervals.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 3

Network Routing

Similar to distance vector protocols, link-state routing protocols continue to update routers about available routes after they have converged. These route updates keep track of route changes. Contrary to distance vector routing protocols, link-state protocols do not send regular updates that contain the whole routing table. Link-state routing protocols send route updates that contain only information about the route that changed.

582

Configuring Routing Protocols

Link-state routing protocols The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol uses link state routing.

Hybrid routing Hybrid protocols have both distance vector and link-state characteristics: ✦ Like distance vector protocols, hybrid protocols use distance to evaluate the quality of routes. ✦ Like link-state protocols, hybrid protocols use other metrics in addition to distance to evaluate the quality of routes, such as available bandwidth, delay, reliability, load, and MTU.

Convergence Similar to link-state routing protocols, hybrid protocols only exchange “Hello” messages initially. Hence, they converge faster than distance vector protocols. Hybrid protocols are well suited for core layer, distribution layer, and even access layer routers.

Route updates Similar to distance vector protocols, hybrid routing protocols send route updates that contain the whole routing table. However, unlike distance vector protocols, hybrid protocols do not send route updates regularly at predefined time intervals. They only send updates when routes change, like link-state protocols.

Hybrid routing protocols Enhanced IGRP (EIGRP) is considered a hybrid routing protocol.

Configuring Routing Protocols The procedure to configure routing protocols on Cisco routers is the same for all protocols. Follow these steps to enable any given routing protocol on a Cisco router:

1. Start up the routing protocol on each router. 2. Enable the routing protocol on interfaces on each router. 3. Configure routing protocol options. You need to execute these setup steps manually on each router. Some routing protocols can automatically negotiate certain configuration options.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 4: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Exam Objectives ✓ Defining distance vector and interior gateway protocols ✓ Examining routing updates and convergence ✓ Understanding hop-count metrics, routing loops, and split horizon ✓ Comparing RIPv1 and RIPv2 ✓ Detailing RIP packet structures ✓ Defining autonomous systems ✓ Configuring RIP ✓ Verifying RIP installations

T

he Routing Information Protocol, or RIP for short, is a dynamic localand wide-area network distance vector, interior gateway protocol. The distance vector routing algorithm on which RIP is based has been in use since the mid-1950s. Known originally as the Bellman-Ford algorithm, it was first used for the ARPANET computer networks in 1968. This distance vector algorithm is used in packet-switched networks to calculate paths and distances to target networks by mathematically comparing multiple routes to the same destination. RIP uses these calculations to determine the best path to the target network. Distance vector protocols such as RIP are required to periodically announce any known network topology changes to other neighboring routing devices. Because distance vector protocols do not have knowledge of the entire network topology, these updates are repeated at regular intervals on User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port 520. Also, during network topology configuration changes, these updates are recorded in the routing table of each connected network router. Routing updates continue between network routers with the goal of having all routing tables in complete agreement with one another, or matching. This is known as convergence. Without convergence, it is impossible for distance vector protocols to function properly.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

590

Introducing Routing Information Protocol (RIP)

Routing tables, updates, and hop count RIP relies heavily on a metric hop count to determine the path and distance to the destination network. The optimal route to a destination is decided by RIP’s calculated number of hops it must make to deliver data to the target network. To RIP, less hops means less stops and shorter distances to the destination. The lowest metric value is considered by RIP to be the best route available. For example, a route with five hops to a target network will be preferred over a different six-hop route leading to the same destination. This method of route determination by RIP may also prove dramatically inefficient. For example, the speed of both links has not been taken into consideration. RIP considers the five-hop route closer in distance than the six-hop route and chooses the shortest metric for delivery. This would prove to be a poor choice if the six-hop route were established over high-speed connections while the five-hop route used much slower WAN links. RIP limits the hop count to eliminate the condition known as “counting to infinity.” By assigning each IP packet a starting default Time-To-Live (TTL) value of 15, a packet “life span” is established. Every packet must reach its final destination in 15 hops or less. As a packet progresses through a gateway, a hop is recorded, and the TTL value is reduced by 1. Each router along the path to the destination is considered a hop and decreases the TTL value inside the IP packet by 1. If the packet’s TTL value equals 0 and still has not reached its final destination, it is discarded. This eliminates routing loops and prevents undeliverable packets from remaining on the internetwork indefinitely. When a routing table update is received, the router checks for changes by comparing the update to the currently existing routing table. If a new route is announced in an update, it is added to the existing routing table. This increases the metric value by a factor of 1, and the sender’s IP address is assigned as the next-hop address. To ensure proper convergence, the router then sends this new update to all neighboring routers right away and separately from any other regularly scheduled routing updates. If an identical route exists in both the update and current routing table (but includes a lower metric for the route), the lower metric is used by replacing the existing routing table entry with the updated route (smaller metric value).

Routing error mitigation methods RIP depends on neighboring routing devices and gateways to announce routing table updates (every 30 seconds) and uses the best route to a destination. Problems arise when a gateway or router along the destination path fails. In such cases, these newly unreachable gateways are unable to announce their “downed” status:

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

594

RIPv1

As shown in Figure 4-4, RIPv1 is known as a classful routing protocol. You cannot use RIPv1 in a classless routing environment. Because all subnets must be of the same size, creating unequal-sized subnets with variablelength subnet masking (VLSM) is not possible using RIPv1. RIPv1 also supports no method to authenticate router updates, which leaves the network vulnerable to malicious attacks.

Figure 4-4: RIPv1 classful internetwork.

204.218.210.0/24

204.218.209.0/24

204.218.211.0/24

Router Bravo

Router Alpha

204.218.212.0/24

Router Charlie

RIPv1 transports routing table updates in IP packets reaching 512K in size. The structure of these individual packets is shown in Figure 4-5. Following are the descriptions of the various fields that comprise a RIPv1 packet:

Command (8-bit)

Version (8-bit)

AFI (16-bit)

Zero Field/Not Used (16-bit)

Zero Field/Not Used (16-bit) IP Address (32-bit)


Figure 4-5: RIPv1 packet structure.

Zero Field/Not Used (32-bit) Metric (32-bit)

✦ Command: Field distinguishing the type of packet being transmitted. Request packets are used to poll other routers for routing table updates. Response packets are either generated due to a request packet or as a normally scheduled routing table update.

www.it-ebooks.info

RIPv2

595

✦ Version Number: Field displaying the RIP version number currently in use. For RIPv1, this value is set to 1. A value of 2 indicates RIPv2. The version number field may be used in troubleshooting scenarios, allowing administrators to pinpoint potential incompatibility problems between RIP versions. ✦ Zero/Unused: Unused field holding a default value of 0. ✦ Address-Family Identifier (AFI): Because RIP is able to transport routing information for multiple protocols, this field is used to designate the address family, or advertised protocol, used by RIP. Each AFI number identifies the address being used by its value, with 2 representing IP addressing. ✦ Address: Field holding the IP address. ✦ Metric: The number of hops encountered along the way to a particular destination. A reachable route always uses a metric of 15 hops or less. Any destination requiring more than 15 hops is considered unreachable.

RIPv2 RIPv2 builds on the existing structure of RIPv1 by adding the following features: ✦ Enhanced security measures: Provides support for message digest algorithm 5 (MD5) and plain-text password authentication. ✦ Support for classless addressing schemes: Classless interdomain routing (CIDR) and VLSM are supported by adding a subnet mask field to the RIPv2 packet structure. ✦ Route Tag field: Separator for internal and external RIP routes. ✦ Next Hop field: Allows packet forwarding to the immediate next-hop address. ✦ Multitasking: RIPv2 supports multitasking using IP address 224.0.0.9.

The changes to the packet structure allow RIPv2 to provide authentication security and VLSM/CIDR support, which are not available in RIPv1. The RIPv2 packet structure is shown in Figure 4-6, and the following descriptions explain the various fields that comprise a RIPv2 packet:

www.it-ebooks.info

Routing Information Protocol (RIP)

The RIPv2 packet structure is similar in size to the RIPv1 packet but replaces the zero fields with router tag, subnet mask, and next-hop addressing information.

Book IV Chapter 4

596

RIPv2

Command (8-bit)

Version (8-bit)


AFI (16-bit)

Route Tag (16-bit) IP Address (32-bit) Subnet Mask (32-bit)

Figure 4-6: RIPv2 packet structure.

Next Hop (32-bit) Metric (32-bit)

✦ Command: As with RIPv1, this field is used to distinguish the type of packet being transmitted. Request packets are used to poll other routers for routing table updates. Response packets are either generated due to a request packet or as a normally scheduled routing table update. ✦ Version: Denotes the RIP version used. For RIPv2, this value is set to 2. ✦ Zero/Unused: Unused field holding a default value of 0 and implemented only for backward compatibility with nonstandard (outdated) RIP versions. ✦ Address-Family Identifier (AFI): Shows the address family used by RIP. The AFI field of RIPv2 functions similarly to RIPv1. One difference between RIPv1 and RIPv2 is the use of authentication. If the AFI hex message entry in the first message equals 0xFFFF, the remaining entries will contain authentication information consisting of a simple password. ✦ Route Tag: Field used to show whether the route is an internal or external route. Internal routes are discovered by RIP alone, whereas external routes are discovered via non-RIP protocols. ✦ IP Address: Field used for IP address information. ✦ Subnet Mask: Field used for subnet mask information.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

598

Configuring RIP

RIP IPv4 Packet Header Command (8-bit)

Version (8-bit)

RIPng IPv6 Packet Header


AFI (16-bit)

Route Tag (16-bit)

Command (8-bit)


IPv6 Prefix (128 bit)

RTE #1 (20 bytes) Route Tag (16-bit)

IP Address (32-bit)

Figure 4-7: RIP IPv4 versus IPv6 packet structure.

Version (8-bit)

Prefix Length (8-bit)

Subnet Mask (32-bit)

RTE #2 (20 bytes)

Next Hop (32-bit)

RTE #3 (20 bytes)

Metric (32-bit)

RTE #4 (20 bytes)

Metric (8-bit)

RTE #5 (20 bytes)

✦ Route Table Entries: A 20-byte routing table entry field containing information regarding reachable routes. Each RIPng packet contains a variable amount of routing table entries (RTEs). RTE subfields include the following: • IPv6 prefix: The 128-bit network address. • Route Tag: Distinguishes between internal and external routes. • Prefix Length: An 8-bit prefix length field analogous to an IPv4 subnet mask. The prefix length is used to separate the network and host portion of the address. • Metric: A value of 15 or less, designating a valid route. Invalid routes are marked with an unreachable value of 16, or infinity.

Configuring RIP Matching the simplistic characteristics of the protocol, RIP configuration is also simple and easy to implement. There are two main requirements when configuring RIP on a Cisco router: ✦ The router rip command is used to enable RIP on the router. ✦ The network command is issued to designate the networks that allow RIP traffic.

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuring RIP

599

Execute the following IOS commands to enable RIP on a Cisco router:

1. In global configuration mode, assign IP addresses to the router interfaces (if not already configured): Router>enable Router#config t Router(config)#interface ethernet 0 Router(config-if)#ip address 192.168.10.1 Router(config-if)#interface ethernet 0 Router(config-if)#ip address 192.168.11.1 Router(config-if)#no shutdown Router(config-if)#exit

2. Enable RIP: Router(config)#router rip

3. Specify a network to associate with RIP routing (from Step 1): Router(config-router)#network 192.168.10.0 Router(config-router)#network 192.168.11.0 Router(config-router)#exit

Although not mandatory, quite a few additional configuration options are available for RIP. The following options may be used after RIP has been enabled on the Cisco router: ✦ Permit unicast updates: RIP is considered a broadcast protocol. To allow the exchange of routing updates between broadcast and nonbroadcast networks, issue the following command in router configuration mode: Router(config-router)#neighbor 192.168.10.1

RIP router table updates will now be sent to the nonbroadcast neighboring router (192.168.10.1).

Router(config-router)#passive interface s1

✦ Routing metric offsets: Allows increasing incoming and outgoing metric values learned by RIP. In the following example, an incoming offset of 10 is established to any routes learned from the Ethernet 0 interface (using access-list number 50): Router(config-router)#offset-list 50 in 10 ethernet 0

www.it-ebooks.info

Book IV Chapter 4


✦ Prevent updates on a specified interface: In certain cases, limiting router updates from reaching certain interfaces may be warranted. For example, preventing the advertisement of local routes from Ethernet (LAN) interfaces to be sent to serial (WAN) interfaces may be required, thus regulating advertised routes. To disable RIP updates to a specified interface, use the following command in router configuration mode:

600

Configuring RIP ✦ Timer adjustments: Interval settings may be adjusted for the frequency of outgoing routing updates, specified time period until a route becomes invalid, and the elapsed time until a dead route is removed from the routing table. To adjust timers, use the timers basic command in router configuration mode: Router(config-router)#timers basic 30 90 180 270 0

Listed here are the default timer interval settings: • Update (30 seconds): Time interval between routing table updates • Invalid (90 seconds): Time interval during which a route is considered invalid • Holddown (180 seconds): Time interval during which routing information regarding better paths is ignored, or suppressed • Flush (270 seconds): Amount of time elapsed before a route is removed from the routing table • Sleeptime (0 milliseconds): Amount of time in which routing updates will be postponed ✦ RIP version: Specifies the sending and receiving of RIPv1 or RIPv2 updates. By default, Cisco routers receive incoming RIPv1 and RIPv2 router table updates, but send outgoing RIPv1 updates only. To specify the required RIP version, use the ip rip send version and ip rip receive version IOS commands in interface configuration mode: • To send and receive RIPv1 packets only: Router(config-if)#ip rip send version 1 Router(config-if)#ip rip receive version 1

• To send and receive RIPv2 packets only: Router(config-if)#ip rip send version 2 Router(config-if)#ip rip receive version 2

• To send and receive both RIPv1 and RIPv2 packets: Router(config-if)#ip rip send version 1 2 Router(config-if)#ip rip receive version 1 2

✦ Enable RIP authentication: Because RIP authentication is not possible in version 1, sending and receiving of RIPv2 packets must be enabled to use this option. RIP authentication only applies to RIPv2. Plain text (used by default and is a security risk) and message digest algorithm 5 (MD5) are the two types of authentication methods.

www.it-ebooks.info

Verifying RIP

601

MD5 authentication is enabled in interface configuration mode as follows: Router(config-if)#ip rip authentication mode md5 keychain NAMEOFCHAIN

✦ Disable route summarization: When disabled, subnet and host routing information is transmitted across classful network boundaries. RIPv2 supports route summarization by default. To disable this feature, use the no auto-summary command in router configuration mode: Router(config-router)#version 2 Router(config-router)#no auto-summary

✦ Disable source IP address validation: By default on Cisco routers, incoming RIP routing updates are validated by source IP address. This allows verification of the sender’s address. If the IP address is determined to be from an unauthorized source (mismatching IP), the update is discarded. To disable this feature (not recommended), enter the following in router configuration mode: Router(config-router)#no validate-update-source

✦ Split horizon: Used to prevent routing loops. The rule of split horizon specifies that no received inbound routing updates may be sent back outbound on the same interface. This feature improves network communications and is enabled by default for all encapsulation types other than nonbroadcast networks such as Frame Relay. In the case of nonbroadcast network types, it may be advantageous to disable split horizon in interface configuration mode as follows: Router(config-router)#no ip split horizon

To enable split horizon, enter the following: Router(config-router)#ip split horizon Book IV Chapter 4

A few methods exist to verify the functionality of RIP on Cisco devices. Basic IOS commands such as ping and traceroute are invaluable troubleshooting aids regarding connectivity issues and the routes packets take to reach a destination. Many additional and helpful clues may be learned from various show and debug commands. Listed here are the most helpful IOS commands when troubleshooting RIP:

www.it-ebooks.info


Verifying RIP

602

Verifying RIP ✦ show ip protocols: Used in EXEC mode to display the state and parameters of the active routing protocols. This allows a network administrator to verify that RIP (or other IP protocols) is actively running on a router and to view the configured timers and networks, as shown here: Router#show ip protocols Routing Protocol is “rip” Sending updates every 30 seconds, next due in 5 seconds Invalid after 180 seconds, hold down 180, flushed after 240 Outgoing update filter list for all interfaces is not set Incoming update filter list for all interfaces is not set Redistributing: rip Default version control: send version 2, receive version 2 Interface Send Recv Key-chain Ethernet0 2 2 trees Fddi0 2 2 Routing for Networks: 10.0.0.0 Routing Information Sources: Gateway Distance Last Update 10.1.2.1 120 00:00:13 10.1.5.2 120 00:00:07 Distance: (default is 120)

Quite a bit of information is given from the sample output shown here regarding RIP (because RIP is the only configured protocol in the example). The first line states that the routing protocol is RIP. Routing updates are being sent every 30 seconds (default), with the next update arriving in 5 seconds. The intervals for invalid, hold-down, and flush timers are 180, 180, and 240 (nondefault), respectively. Incoming and outgoing filter lists specify whether filters have been set, and the default version control displays that sending and receiving of RIPv2 packets are active. Routing for networks displays the IP addresses of networks into which the routing process is currently injecting routes. Routing information sources shows any address, distance, and last update of routing sources used in compiling the routing table. ✦ show ip route: Displays the routing table. A sample output is shown here: Router#show ip route Codes: C - connected, S - static, I - IGRP, R - RIP, M - mobile, B - BGP D - EIGRP, EX - EIGRP external, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, E - EGP i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, * - candidate default U - per-user static route, o - ODR Gateway of last resort is not set

C C

172.16.0.0/24 is subnetted, 2 subnets 172.16.1.0 is directly connected, Ethernet0 172.16.2.0 is directly connected, Ethernet1

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 5: Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the features and characteristics of EIGRP ✓ Distinguishing EIGRP from IGRP ✓ Describing EIGRP routing decision criteria ✓ Describing EIGRP route updates and convergence ✓ Describing EIGRP routing tables and operation ✓ Understanding the Diffusing Update Algorithm (DUAL) ✓ Deploying EIGRP ✓ Verifying and troubleshooting EIGRP on a Cisco router

A

s the name implies, the Cisco-proprietary Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) is an interior gateway protocol that contains many advantages over Routing Information Protocol (RIP) and its superseded predecessor, the Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (IGRP). EIGRP is the enhanced version of IGRP. Like RIP, IGRP is known as a distance vector protocol, but it uses a dramatically improved distance vector algorithm to determine the best path to a particular destination. IGRP relies more heavily on the bandwidth and delay metrics of a route as opposed to RIP, which relies on the distance of a route. EIGRP includes features commonly found in more advanced link-state protocols. EIGRP also uses a more advanced method of loop mitigation than both RIP and IGRP, providing a 100-percent loop-free environment. Other benefits of EIGRP include high scalability with minimal network overhead and very fast convergence speeds. To fully understand the capabilities of EIGRP, it is beneficial to first take a look at the protocol on which it is based, namely IGRP.

www.it-ebooks.info

608

IGRP — The Foundation of EIGRP

IGRP — The Foundation of EIGRP The Interior Gateway Routing Protocol was originally developed in the mid1980s by Cisco Systems to exchange routing information between IP-based networks. A major reason for the development of IGRP was to overcome the limitations of RIP. A protocol was needed that would support larger-scale networks not limited by the 15-hop-count metric of RIP. By introducing a complex formula for route calculations, IGRP replaced the single routing metric employed by RIP, and combined multiple metrics (such as bandwidth, delay, load, MTU, and reliability) into a single unit. IGRP uses the following metrics: ✦ Default metrics: Bandwidth, delay ✦ Optional metrics: Load, reliability, MTU IGRP still imposed limitations on network topologies by limiting routing to classful networks. Because IGRP did not contain a field for the subnet mask inside the packet, support for variable-length subnet masks (VLSMs) and classless networking was not available. These classful protocols, such as IGRP and RIP, assume that all networks are using the same subnet mask. This imposes a huge waste of IP addresses and proves highly inefficient, considering the constant depletion of IPv4 address space. Enhanced IGRP replaced IGRP. IGRP is no longer supported by Cisco Systems. RIP also has many disadvantages compared to the more powerful EIGRP. Here are some of the limitations of both RIP and IGRP: ✦ Slow convergence ✦ No CIDR/VLSM support ✦ Hop-count limitation of 15 (RIP) ✦ Not 100-percent loop-free ✦ Broadcasts complete routing table during updates

EIGRP Benefits Cisco developed EIGRP to overcome IGRP limitations, so EIGRP: ✦ Converges quickly ✦ Supports CIDR and VLSM ✦ Hop count can be configured between 1 and 255, with a default of 100

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

610

EIGRP Operation

EIGRP Operation To understand EIGRP operation, you need to understand its components.

Basic components EIGRP consists of four basic components: ✦ Neighbor discovery/recovery: Technology used by Cisco routers to discover the presence of neighboring routers on direct-attached networks. The discovery process allows Cisco routers to use small-sized, low-overhead hello packets to contact other routers. The sending and receiving of these efficient hello packets determine whether a neighbor is functioning properly or whether a routing device has become unreachable. Routers acknowledge their presence to other networks with these packets, and after they are exchanged, communications may begin. If no hello packet is received from a neighboring router, it is considered unreachable. ✦ Reliable Transport Protocol (RTP): Provides reliable and guaranteed delivery of EIGRP multicast or unicast packets to all neighboring routers. To maintain protocol efficiency, RTP only transmits packets reliably when required. Certain multicast-capable networks such as Ethernet do not require guaranteed delivery or acknowledgment of hello packets to and from neighbors, and is indicated as such inside the packet header. Packets that contain routing table updates do require acknowledgment. ✦ DUAL finite-state machine: Routing algorithm used by EIGRP to compute, select, and track loop-free routes. DUAL uses a metric to determine least-cost routes based on feasible successors. Feasible successors are considered guaranteed, loop-free routing neighbors that will be used to forward packets reliably to the end destination. ✦ Protocol-dependent modules: Independent modules used by a particular protocol at the OSI network layer for sending and receiving packets. The IP protocol-dependent module for EIGRP is called IP-EIGRP and is tasked with delivering and receiving EIGRP packets encapsulated using IP. IP-EIGRP communicates with DUAL to compute routes that are then stored in the routing table.

Routing tables Information regarding neighboring routers and the topology of the network is collected by EIGRP and is stored in a series of tables. Three main types of tables are used by EIGRP:

www.it-ebooks.info

EIGRP Operation

611

✦ Neighbor table: Contains information regarding neighboring routers that are accessible through directly connected interfaces. All collected information is added to the neighbor table, to include interface and addressing values. Each router running EIGRP maintains its own neighbor table. Thus: • Each router has a clear picture of its peer routers. • Each router has a clear picture of the network topology in its immediate vicinity. ✦ Topology table: A collection of EIGRP routing tables received from routing neighbors. The topology table lists EIGRP-routable destination networks and their metric calculations. If available, a successor and feasible successor are also listed for each destination in the topology table. Each destination is marked either in an active or passive state. A passive state means that the router knows the route to the destination, while an active state denotes a topology change in which the router is currently updating its routing information for a particular route. Each router running OSPF maintains its own link-state table. Thus: • Each router has a clear picture of the topology in the immediate vicinity of its neighbors. • Using the neighbor table and the link state, each router has a twolevel knowledge of the network topology: the topology in its immediate vicinity and the topology in the vicinity of its neighbors. For each destination network, the topology table keeps track of the following: • The successor route: This is the best route to the destination as evaluated by DUAL. • The feasible successor route: This is the next best route to the destination as evaluated by DUAL. ✦ Routing table: A map of all known destination routes. The routing table is built using information collected from the topology table. Whereas the neighbor and link-state tables are used to quantify routes, the routing table is used to qualify each route:

• Whenever the successor route is down, the feasible successor route is copied from the topology table to the routing table and is used as the alternate route.

www.it-ebooks.info

Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP)

• Only the successor route is copied from the topology table to the routing table, and this route is used as long as it’s available.

Book IV Chapter 5

612

EIGRP Operation

Neighboring successors There are two main types of neighboring devices (next-hop routers) are used in EIGRP-based networks. Both types guarantee that they will not be part of a routing loop: ✦ Successor: A next-hop router that provides the shortest distance to a destination network. In other words, this neighbor provides the best route to the destination network. ✦ Feasible successor: A next-hop router that provides the next shortest distance to a destination network. In other words, this neighbor provides the next best route to the destination network.

EIGRP packet types EIGRP uses five types of packets: ✦ Hello/ACKs: Unacknowledged, multicast hello packets used in the process of neighbor discovery and recovery. Any hello packet empty of data is considered an acknowledgment, or ACK. ACKs are unicast addressed packets specified by a nonzero acknowledgment number. ✦ Updates: Reliable unicast packets that contain routing advertisements that are received by neighboring devices to build and maintain a map (routing table) of the network topology. If an update contains a cost change for a particular link, the update will be included in a multicast packet. ✦ Queries: Multicast packet queries transmitted when the destination node enters an active state. If the query is sent in response to a received query, it is formatted as a unicast packet. ✦ Replies: Reliable unicast packets transmitted in response to queries. Replies indicate to the originator that feasible successors are available and should not enter an active state. ✦ Requests: Unreliable multicast or unicast packets used to gather information from neighboring devices.

Convergence EIGRP converges much faster than RIP and IGRP because neighbor routers only exchange “Hello” messages initially as opposed to typical distance vector routing protocols, which need to merge and distribute their routing tables among them during the convergence process.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

614

EIGRP Operation

DUAL improves the efficiency of EIGRP over IGRP, most notably avoiding routing loops altogether. Here are some of the characteristics of DUAL: ✦ For each destination network, it calculates a successor route (the best route to the destination s evaluated by DUAL) and a feasible successor route (the next best route to the destination as evaluated by DUAL). ✦ DUAL supports variable-length subnet masking (VLSM), allowing EIGRP to route across networks with different subnets. ✦ DUAL provides alternate routes very quickly in case the best route to a destination is down. DUAL provides two features that enable a very quick alternate route calculation: • The successor and feasible successor routes: For each route, an alternate route is already available and ready to kick in. • If both the successor and the feasible successor routes are down, DUAL enables routers to communicate with their neighbors to find an alternate route. Because neighbors also have a successor and a feasible successor route to each destination, an alternate route borrowed from a neighbor can be readily used to reach the destination network.

Classful and classless routing EIGRP supports both classful and classless routing. By default, like RIPv1 and IGRP, EIGRP is a classful routing protocol: ✦ It does not send subnet information in the route updates. ✦ It automatically summarizes routes on boundary routers based on the IP address class that each network belongs to. For example, if a router sends an update for network 172.16.50.0, EIGRP summarizes this route to 172.16.0.0. This works if the router that receives the update is also in the 172.16.0.0 IP address class. Intermediary routers also need to be in the same IP address class. EIGRP can be configured to run in classless mode by executing the no auto-summary Cisco IOS command in router configuration mode. Classless routing protocols have the following features: ✦ Send subnet information in the route updates. ✦ Do not automatically summarize routes on boundary routers based on the IP address class each network belongs to. For example, if a router sends an update for network 172.16.50.0, EIGRP does not summarize the route in classless mode; it really sends 172.16.50.0. This works even if

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuring EIGRP

615

the router that receives the update, or the intermediary routers, are not in the 172.16.0.0 IP address class. Networks that contain multiple subnets in different IP address classes are called discontiguous networks. Discontiguous networks require classless routing (that is, with RIPv2 and with EIGRP, you need to execute the no auto-summary command). You can still summarize routes manually. You find out about manual route summarization in Book IV, Chapter 6. The OSPF protocol does not automatically summarize routes: OSPF is a classless routing protocol.

Configuring EIGRP You configure EIGRP on a Cisco router similarly to RIP: ✦ Start up EIGRP on each router ✦ Enable EIGRP on interfaces on each router ✦ Configure EIGRP options Figure 5-1 shows an example of a network that you will configure with EIGRP. This network spans three subnets: ✦ 192.168.25.0/24 ✦ 192.168.67.0/24 ✦ 51.10.1.0/24 Observe that these networks are in different IP address classes. Hence, this is a discontiguous network. You need to disable autosummarization of routes in this setup to set EIGRP in classless routing mode. Book IV Chapter 5

Start up EIGRP The as_id is the autonomous system (AS) number, also known as the routing domain ID. You need to set a common autonomous system number on all routers that will exchange EIGRP routing data. EIGRP routing data can only be exchanged between routers with the same autonomous system number. The EIGRP AS is a number between 1 and 65535.

www.it-ebooks.info


To start EIGRP, you run the router eigrp as_id Cisco IOS command in global configuration mode.

616

Configuring EIGRP

Network 51.10.1.0/24

Router 51-1

Router 51-2 s1: 51.10.1.1

s1: 51.10.1.4

s0: 51.10.1.2

s0: 51.10.1.5

Network 192.168.25.0/24

Network 192.168.67.0/24

Router 25<>51

Router 67<>51 s0: 51.10.1.3

Figure 5-1: EIGRP routing configuration.

e0: 192.168.25.1

s0: 51.10.1.6

e0: 192.168.67.1

...

...

e1: 192.168.67.2

...

Enable EIGRP on router interfaces To enable EIGRP on interfaces on your router, you run the network int_ IP Cisco IOS command in global configuration mode. The int_IP is the IP address that identifies the interface on which you enable OSPF.

Configuring EIGRP on Router 2551 R251>enable (or en) R2551#configure terminal (or config t) R2551(config)#router eigrp 1 R2551(config-router)#network 192.168.25.0 R2551(config-router)#network 51.0.0.0 R2551(config-router)#no auto-summary R2551(config-router)#exit R2551(config)#exit R2551#disable R2551>

www.it-ebooks.info

Verifying and Monitoring EIGRP Operation

617

Configuring EIGRP on Router 6751 R6751>enable (or en) R6751#configure terminal (or config t) R6751(config)#router eigrp 1 R6751(config-router)#network 192.168.67.0 R6751(config-router)#network 51.0.0.0 R6751(config-router)#no auto-summary R6751(config-router)#exit R6751(config)#exit R6751#disable R6751>

Configuring EIGRP on Router 51-1 R51-1>enable (or en) R51-1#configure terminal (or config t) R51-1(config)#router eigrp 1 R51-1(config-router)#network 51.0.0.0 R51-1(config-router)#no auto-summary R51-1(config-router)#exit R51-1(config)#exit R51-1#disable R51-1>

Configuring EIGRP on Router 51-2 R51-2>enable (or en) R51-2#configure terminal (or config t) R51-2(config)#router eigrp 1 R51-2(config-router)#network 51.0.0.0 R51-2(config-router)#no auto-summary R51-2(config-router)#exit R51-2(config)#exit R51-2#disable R51-2>

Verifying and Monitoring EIGRP Operation You can verify a few elements to monitor EIGRP operation and ensure optimum routing.

You look at the routing tables on a Cisco router using the show ip route Cisco IOS command in privileged EXEC mode. The output includes the following: ✦ Network IP information ✦ Available subnets

www.it-ebooks.info


Inspect the routing table

Book IV Chapter 5

618

Verifying and Monitoring EIGRP Operation ✦ Routes currently stored in the routing table. For each route, the command displays the following: • The IP address of the destination network reached by that route • The word connected, if the router you run the command on is directly connected to the destination network of that route • The IP address of the gateway (router) to the destination network of that route if the router you run the command on is not directly connected to the destination network of that route • The router interface that connects either to the destination network or to the gateway that reaches the destination network

Inspect EIGRP protocol configuration You use the show ip protocols Cisco IOS command in privileged EXEC mode to look at the IP routing protocol configuration on a Cisco router. The output displays one section for each IP routing protocol enabled on your router. For EIGRP, it shows the following: ✦ EIGRP process ID ✦ Whether an outgoing update filter is set ✦ Whether an incoming update filter is set ✦ Whether automatic network summarization is active ✦ Destination networks ✦ Information sources about destination networks ✦ Current administrative distances: internal and external

Inspect EIGRP topology table configuration You use the show ip eigrp topology Cisco IOS command in privileged EXEC mode to look at the EIGRP topology table. The command displays the following: ✦ Destination networks and for each destination network: • The successor route: Shows the interface name and its IP address to reach that route • The feasible successor route: Shows the interface name and its IP address to reach that route ✦ Whether the destination network is A (active) or P (passive) Passive destination networks are networks that converged. In other words, the successor and the feasible successor routes to that network have

www.it-ebooks.info

Verifying and Monitoring EIGRP Operation

619

converged. All routers know those routes; they are not exchanging route updates about them. After the routers have converged, destination networks show up as passive. Active destination networks are networks that have not converged yet (the successor and the feasible successor routes to that network have not converged). Routers are still exchanging route updates about them. A destination network would show up as active, after routers have converged, if either the successor or the feasible successor route becomes unavailable and the router needs to exchange data with its neighbors about alternate routes to the destination network.

Inspect EIGRP neighbor information You use the show ip eigrp neighbors Cisco IOS command in privileged EXEC mode to look at information about the EIGRP neighbors of your router. The command shows the following information: ✦ EIGRP process ID. ✦ Order of discovery of each neighbor. ✦ IP address of each neighbor. ✦ Interface reaching each neighbor. ✦ Hold time, also known as the Hello timer: This determines how long the router waits for a Hello message from its neighbor. ✦ SRTT — Smooth Round-Trip Timer: This is the time it takes for a packet to make a round trip from the router to the neighbor and back to the router. This used to determine how long the router should wait for replies from its neighbor: It should wait at least as long as it takes a packet to do a round trip. ✦ RTO — Retransmission Timeout: This timeout value determines how long the router waits before retransmitting a packet for which it received no acknowledgment from its neighbor.

If the queue count is consistently high, it shows that some communication problems exist between the router and its neighbor. One of the following is occurring: • The router is sending too much to its neighbor. • Its neighbor is not fast enough. • Something is wrong with the link between the router and its neighbor.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ Q Cnt — Queue Count: This shows how many packets are waiting to be sent in the router’s queue.

Book IV Chapter 5

620

Troubleshooting EIGRP

Troubleshooting EIGRP Whenever you notice EIGRP routing malfunctions, you use the debug eigrp Cisco IOS command in privileged EXEC mode to look at information about EIGRP operation on your router. The debug command enables debug mode on specific components and protocols. In this case, you enable debug mode on EIGRP to capture detailed troubleshooting data about EIGRP. You execute the debug eigrp command in privileged EXEC mode. To disable debugging, execute the no debug eigrp command in privileged EXEC mode.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 6: Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Protocol Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the features and characteristics of OSPF ✓ Describing OSPF routing decision criteria ✓ Describing OSPF route updates and convergence ✓ Distinguishing OSPF designated and backup designated routers ✓ Understanding the Dijkstra shortest path first (SPF) routing algorithm ✓ Describing OSPF route summarization ✓ Configuring OSPF on a Cisco router ✓ Verifying and troubleshooting OSPF on a Cisco router

O

SPF is a link-state routing protocol. OSPF was developed based on an open standard and is supported by several router manufacturers. OSPF is widely used as an interior gateway protocol (IGP), especially in large network environments. Interior gateway protocols, including OSPF, route within a single routing domain. A single routing domain, also known as an autonomous system (AS), is a group of routers and network addresses that use a common routing system. For example, a network that uses OSPF on all routers is an autonomous system. This network can be connected to a large service provider network that is using another routing protocol such as IS-IS (Intermediate System–to–Intermediate System). The service provider’s IS-IS network is another autonomous system. The protocol used to route between autonomous systems and between large Internet service providers is called Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). It is not necessary to know all the details about IGPs and BGPs, but it is important to know that OSPF is classified as an interior gateway protocol.

Introducing Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Link-state routing protocols build their routing tables independently based on route updates they receive from their neighbors. Link-state protocols do not merge the routing tables of neighbor routers. Link-state protocols enable routers to have a clear image of neighbors, network topology, and routes to their neighbors and beyond by maintaining not just routing tables

www.it-ebooks.info

626

Introducing Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)

but also topology and neighbor tables. OSPF complies with all these linkstate routing protocol characteristics.

Routing tables OSPF maintains these routing tables: ✦ Neighbor table: This table keeps track of the neighbors of a router. Each router running OSPF maintains its own neighbor table. Thus, each router has a clear picture of its peer routers, and each router has a clear picture of the network topology in its immediate vicinity. ✦ Link-state table: This table keeps track of the state of the links on neighbor routers. In other words, this table keeps track of the state of the routes on neighbor routers. Each router running OSPF maintains its own link-state table. Thus: • Each router has a clear picture of the topology in the immediate vicinity of its neighbors. • Using the neighbor table and the link state, each router has a twolevel knowledge of the network topology: the topology in its immediate vicinity and the topology in the vicinity of its neighbors. ✦ Routing table: This table keeps track of the metrics of each link tracked by the link-state table. Hence, whereas the neighbor and link-state tables are used to quantify routes, the routing table is used to qualify each route.

Characteristics of OSPF Here are the main characteristics of the OPSF protocol: ✦ Route updates are only sent when routes change. Each router sends a link-state advertisement (LSA) whenever a change occurs in one of the routes known to the router. ✦ LSAs contain information about the route that changed only. ✦ Routers exchange “Hello” messages during the convergence process to build their neighbor tables. ✦ OSPF, like RIP, is supported on non-Cisco routers. ✦ OSPF supports variable-length subnet masking (VLSM). ✦ OSPF supports an unlimited number of network hops. ✦ OSPF scales out very well because • It divides the routing domain (autonomous system) into areas. • It classifies routers hierarchically.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)

627

• It converges very quickly. • It sends routes updates (LSAs) only when routes change, minimizing route change traffic. • LSA packets have a small footprint. • LSA traffic is consolidated to the designated router. • LSA traffic is minimized when routes are summarized.

Convergence The OSPF routing protocol converges within seconds because neighbor routers only exchange “Hello” messages initially. During the convergence process, routers get to know each other, exchanging communication parameters and setting up their neighbor table. Routers can only become neighbors if the following things occur: ✦ They have successfully exchanged “Hello” messages ✦ They have interfaces in the same routing domain (that is, in the same autonomous system) ✦ They have their hello timers set to the same values. Hello timers define the following: • The frequency at which routers send each “Hello” message to each other • How long neighbors wait before they consider a router out of network Hello messages are not only sent during the convergence process but also afterward to keep track of which routers are still in the network. If a router becomes unavailable and stops sending Hello messages, one of the hello timers defines how long neighbor routers wait for a Hello message before they consider the unavailable router out of the network. Book IV Chapter 6

Route updates

✦ Their neighbors ✦ The network topology in their immediate vicinity ✦ The network topology in the vicinity of their neighbors

www.it-ebooks.info

Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Protocol

OSPF continues to update routers about available routes after they have converged. These route updates are sent in the form of link-state advertisement (LSA) packets. Routers exchange LSA packets to maintain their linkstate tables. After they have built their neighbor and link-state tables, routers know the following:

628

OSPF Routing Hierarchy

Next, each router evaluates the quality of each route registered in the linkstate table.

Cost metric OSPF uses the cost metric to evaluate the quality of each link. Route cost is a metric calculated based on the bandwidth of each link. Cisco routers calculate the cost by dividing a default bandwidth of 100 Mbps (100 million bits per second) by the actual bandwidth of the link. For example, the following list illustrates the default OSPF cost calculated by Cisco routers for various bandwidths: ✦ 64-Kbps (64,536-bits-per-second) link: 100,000,000 / 64,536 = 1,562 ✦ 1.544-Mbps (T1) link: 100,000,000 / 1,544,000 = 64 ✦ 10-Mbps link: 100,000,000 / 10,000,000 = 10 ✦ 100-Mbps link: 100,000,000 / 100,000,000 = 1 ✦ 1-Gbps link: 100,000,000 / 1,000,000,000 = 0.1 ✦ 10-Gbps link: 100,000,000 / 10,000,000,000 = 0.01 OSPF chooses the route with the lowest cost. You can modify the default reference bandwidth used to calculate the OSPF cost using the auto-cost reference-bandwidth Cisco IOS command in global configuration mode. It is very important to set the same reference bandwidth on all routers in your network. For example, if most links in your network are 1 Gbps, you set the reference bandwidth to 1 Gbps instead of 100 Mbps using the following commands: RT6751>enable (or en) RT6751#configure terminal (or config t) RT6751(config)#auto-cost reference-bandwidth 1000000000 RT6751(config)#exit RT6751#disable RT6751>

OSPF Routing Hierarchy OSPF uses the Dijkstra shortest path first (SPF) routing algorithm to calculate the shortest path from a router to each destination network.

www.it-ebooks.info


629

The Dijkstra SPF routing algorithm does the following: ✦ Considers the router to be the root of a tree ✦ Considers each destination network (router) to be a branch or a leaf in that tree ✦ Calculates the shortest route from the root of the tree (the router) to each branch and to each leaf (to each destination network) Effectively, the Dijkstra SPF algorithm calculates the shortest route from each router to each network in the OSPF routing domain (or autonomous system), because each router is the root of its own tree. This creates a shortestpath tree for each router. However, OSPF does not need to calculate the shortest path from each router to each destination if the network is designed in a hierarchical fashion. Router trees overlap in a hierarchical design. This improves the efficiency of OSPF because after the Dijkstra SPF algorithm calculates the shortest routes for a branch of the tree, it doesn’t need to recalculate those routes as you move up the tree to the root router. Figure 6-1 shows the recommended network topology for OSPF. Observe the following: ✦ One router is the root of the OSPF tree (although you can configure more than one root router). ✦ The OSPF routing domain (or autonomous system) is divided into areas with at least one designated router (DR) in each area. It is best practice to have a backup designated router (BDR) in each area as well. In this example, the tree that starts at router 10-1, going down, is ✦ Part of the DR-10 router tree in area 10 ✦ Part of the BDR-10 router tree in area 10

This is good, because after OSPF (the Dijkstra SPF algorithm) calculates the shortest route from router 10-1 to each destination underneath, the DR-10 router, the BDR-10 router, and the root router can readily use those shortest routes to destinations under the 10-1 router.

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ Part of the root tree in the area 0

Book IV Chapter 6

630


Area 0 (Backbone) Root Router

Area 10

Area 20

DR-10 Router

Router 10-1

Figure 6-1: OSPF routing hierarchy.

...

DR-20 Router

BDR-10 Router

Router 20-2

Router 10-2 Router 20-1

...

...

...

...

OSPF route summarization The reuse of previously calculated shortest routes is leveraged by route summarization. Route summarization allows routers to identify common network IP address spaces and create a summarized route for the IP address space as opposed to creating a route for each IP address individually. This improves network throughput because routers sharing a summarized route send LSA packets upstream only when the summarized route changes, as opposed to sending LSA packets upstream for each of their (internal, or downstream) routes. For example, in Figure 6-1: ✦ The tree underneath router DR-10 is one IP address space (subnet). ✦ The tree underneath router BDR-10 is another IP address space (subnet). ✦ The tree underneath router 10-1 is one IP address space (subnet). ✦ The tree underneath router 10-2 is another IP address space (subnet).

www.it-ebooks.info


631

However, the DR-10 tree includes the 10-1 and the 10-2 trees. Similarly, the BDR-10 tree includes the 10-1 and the 10-2 trees. Suppose that networks in area 10 have the following IP addresses: ✦ Router DR-10: 172.10.75.0 ✦ Router BDR-10: 172.10.76.0 ✦ Router 10-1: 172.10.77.0 ✦ Router 10-2: 172.10.78.0 The first 2 bytes are the same for all subnets in area 10: 172.10. The third byte is different. Table 6-1 examines these IP addresses in binary.

Table 6-1

Route Summarization

IP Address

Byte 1 (172)

Byte 2 (10)

Byte 3 (75, 76, 77, 78)

Byte 4 (0)

172.10.75.0

1100 0000

0000 1010

0100 1011

0000 0000

172.10.76.0

1100 0000

0000 1010

0100 1100

0000 0000

172.10.77.0

1100 0000

0000 1010

0100 1101

0000 0000

172.10.78.0

1100 0000

0000 1010

0100 1110

0000 0000

Observe that the IP address of these networks is almost the same except for byte 3. Now from the perspective of the root router in area 0, this difference is irrelevant because the DR-10 and BDR-10 trees both include the 10-1 and the 10-2 trees. Hence, if the root router in area 0 knows how to get to DR-10 and to BDR-10, it knows how to get to everyone underneath. So, it makes sense to expose only one route up to the root router instead of exposing all four. That is exactly what route summarization accomplishes.

The subnet mask changes from 255.255.255.0 (/24) to 255.255.240.0 (/20), because the variable part of the IP address now includes 4 more bits in byte 3. Table 6-2 details the following:

www.it-ebooks.info


So how do you summarize these routes? Table 6-1 shows that only byte 3 varies. Specifically, only the second nibble in byte 3 varies. Assume that nibble 2 in byte 3 would be the same for all routers (for example, 0100 1011, which is 75). You would have IP address 172.10.75.0 for all networks. However, you can only do this if you modify the subnet mask.

Book IV Chapter 6

632

OSPF Routing Hierarchy ✦ The original subnet mask, where bytes 1 and 2 represent the network IP address and bytes 3 and 4 are used for variable intranetwork addresses. ✦ The new subnet mask for the summarized route, where byte 1 and the first nibble in byte 2 represent the network IP address. The second nibble of byte 2 and bytes 3 and 4 represent the variable intranetwork IP addresses.

Table 6-2

Subnet Mask for Summarized Route

Mask

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

255.255.255.0

1111 1111

1111 1111

1111 1111

0000 0000

255.255.240.0

1111 1111

1111 1111

1111 0000

0000 0000

Now you can expose route 172.10.75.0/20 up to the root router in area 0. You are telling the root router in area 0 to keep track of route 172.10.75.0/20 to get to any of the networks in area 10. In fact, you can have two summarized routes in this example, because both DR-10 and BDR-10 connect to the root router in area 0: ✦ One route to reach the tree under router DR-10: 172.10.75.0/20 ✦ One route to reach the tree under router BDR-10: 172.10.76.0/20 Now instead of exposing four routes up to the root router in area 0, you only expose one (or two) summarized routes. This improves the efficiency of the root router because it needs to maintain only one (or two) route(s) for area 10 instead of maintaining four routes.

OSPF designated router (DR) The OSPF protocol elects a designated router that is responsible for keeping all routers updated on shortest routes. Instead of exchanging route information with ever other router in the network, routers only communicate their routes to the designated router. The designated router then updates everyone on the routes available. Consolidating the exchange of information about routes to the designated router improves the efficiency of the network because less bandwidth is consumed by having each router communicate its routes only to the designated router, instead of communicating with every other router in their area. Routers send their LSA packets to a multicast address (224.0.0.6). The DR listens to this multicast IP address. The DR relays routing information back to

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

634

Configuring OSPF

To create a loopback interface on your router, use the int loopback Cisco IOS command in global configuration mode. You need to assign an IP address to your loopback interface. However, the IP address you assign is not really important: ✦ The loopback interface is local to your router: The IP interface is not visible to other routers, switches, or hosts on the network as a normal physical interface is. ✦ Even if the IP address is lower than another IP address on your router, the router always uses a loopback interface, if available, to set its RID before the IP addresses of any physical interface are compared.

OSPF backup designated router (BDR) The backup designated router becomes the designated router in case the designated router is down. The BDR receives the route updates (LSA packets) that routers send to the DR. In fact, routers send their LSA packets to a multicast address (224.0.0.6). Both the DR and the BDR listen to the multicast address 224.0.0.6. Hence, both the DR and the BDR receive the LSA packets. The routing information is in sync on the DR and on the BDR. The router with the second-highest OSPF priority becomes the backup designated router.

Configuring OSPF You configure OSPF on a Cisco router similarly to RIP and EIGRP. Follow these steps:

1. Start up OSPF on each router. 2. Enable OSPF on interfaces on each router. 3. Configure OSPF options. The following sections outline the details of these steps.

Start up OSPF To start OSPF, run the router ospf process_id Cisco IOS command in global configuration mode. The process_id is a number between 1 and 65536 that identifies the OSPF routing process on the router. The OSPF process ID can be a different number on routers that communicate using OSPF.

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuring OSPF

635

Enable OSPF on router interfaces To enable OSPF on the interfaces of your router, run the network int_IP wildcard_mask area area_id Cisco IOS command in global configuration mode: ✦ The int_IP portion is the IP address that identifies the interface on which you enable OSPF. ✦ The wildcard_mask portion identifies which IP addresses are part of this network. In other words, OSPF exposes to a certain network area all interfaces identified by the IP addresses represented by the wildcard mask. For example, the 172.10.75.0 0.0.0.255 int_IP wildcard_mask combination configures the router to expose all addresses in the space 172.10.75: any router interface in the 172.10.75 network. ✦ The area area_id portion is the OSPF operation area. Recall that OSPF divides the routing domain (or autonomous system) into areas.

Understanding wildcards The 172.10.75.0 0.0.0.255 int_IP/wildcard_mask combination configures the router to expose all addresses in the space 172.10.75: any router interface in the 172.10.75 network. Read on to find out more about wildcards. Wildcards are essentially bit masks. A bit mask is a set of bits that are either 0 or 1. In this case, OSPF wildcard bits have the following meaning: ✦ Number 0 means to match exactly the corresponding bit in the IP address. ✦ Number 1 means that the corresponding bit in the IP address can be any number. If you look at the IP address as a whole, divided into 4 bytes (8 bits each), you can specify wildcards between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255 with the network command:

✦ Number 255 means that the corresponding byte in the IP address can be any number. Here, 255 in decimal represents eight 1s in binary. For example, wildcard 0.0.0.0 matches exactly the IP address specified in the network command. In other words, if you use 172.10.75.0 0.0.0.0, only address 172.10.75.0 is exposed as a route. This may be what you want in some cases. However, usually you want to match a range of addresses as

www.it-ebooks.info


✦ Number 0 means to match exactly the corresponding byte in the IP address. Here, a 0 in decimal represents eight 0s in binary.

Book IV Chapter 6

636

Configuring OSPF

opposed to a specific address when using the network command. In other words, you tell OSPF to expose all router interfaces that match the wildcard. Referring to Figure 6-1, recall the IP addresses of each router: ✦ Router DR-10: 172.10.75.0 ✦ Router BDR-10: 172.10.76.0 ✦ Router 10-1: 172.10.77.0 ✦ Router 10-2: 172.10.78.0 The following sections describe configuring OSPF on router interfaces in area 10.

Enable and configure OSPF on router DR-10 DR-10>enable (or en) DR-10#configure terminal (or config t) DR-10(config)#router ospf 1 DR-10(config-router)#network 172.10.75.0 0.0.0.255 area 10 DR-10(config-router)#network 172.10.75.0 0.0.15.255 area 0 DR-10(config-router)#exit DR-10(config)#exit DR-10#disable DR-10>

You configure the DR-10 router to expose interfaces to area 10 and to area 0: ✦ Area 10: DR-10 exposes to area 10 any address in the IP space 172.10.75: any router interface in the 172.10.75 network using the 172.10.75.0 0.0.0.255 IP/wildcard_mask combination. ✦ Area 0: DR-10 exposes to area 0 any address in the IP space 172.10.7_: any IP address that starts with 172.10.7. In other words, you expose to area 0 a summary route that reaches area 10. You use the 172.10.75.0 0.0.15.255 IP/wildcard_mask combination. So, why did you use a 0.0.15.255 wildcard here? Consider the subnet mask of the summary route that you determined earlier (255.255.240.0), which is shown in binary in Table 6-3.

Table 6-3

Subnet Mask for Summarized Route

Subnet Mask

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

255.255.240.0

1111 1111

1111 1111

1111 0000

0000 0000

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuring OSPF

637

This subnet mask tells the router that this summarized route represents an IP address space with ✦ Byte 1 constant: 172 ✦ Byte 2 constant: 10 ✦ Byte 3, nibble 1 constant: 7 ✦ Byte 3, nibble 2 variable: 5 to 8 ✦ Byte 4 variable: any number (0 to 254) To represent the same filter with a wildcard mask, you need to replace all 0s with 1s and all 1s with 0s, because in a wildcard, 0 means “match exactly” and 1 means “could be anything.” The wildcard value is shown in Table 6-4.

Table 6-4

Wildcard Mask for Summarized Route

Wildcard Mask

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

0.0.15.255

0000 0000

0000 0000

0000 1111

1111 1111

Next, you need to run similar configuration commands on routers BDR-10, 10-1, and 10-2.

Enable and configure OSPF on router BDR-10 BDR-10>enable (or en) BDR-10#configure terminal (or BDR-10(config)#router ospf 1 BDR-10(config-router)#network BDR-10(config-router)#network BDR-10(config-router)#network BDR-10(config-router)#exit BDR-10(config)#exit BDR-10#disable BDR-10>

config t) 172.10.76.0 0.0.0.255 area 10 172.10.75.0 0.0.15.255 area 0 172.10.75.0 0.0.0.255 area 10

Enable and configure OSPF on router 10-1 10-1>enable (or en) 10-1#configure terminal (or config t) 10-1(config)#router ospf 1 10-1(config-router)#network 172.10.77.0 0.0.0.255 area 10

www.it-ebooks.info


Router BDR-10, like router DR-10, exposes interfaces to area 10 and to area 0, because it connects both to area 10 and to area 0. Router BDR-10 also defines a route to router DR-10 (172.10.75.0) by registering a route with the 172.10.75.0 0.0.0.255 IP/wildcard_mask combination.

Book IV Chapter 6

638

Configuring OSPF

10-1(config-router)#network 172.10.75.0 0.0.0.255 area 10 10-1(config-router)#network 172.10.76.0 0.0.0.255 area 10 10-1(config-router)#exit 10-1(config)#exit 10-1#disable 10-1>

Router 10-1 exposes interfaces to area 10 only because it doesn’t connect to area 0. Router 10-1 also defines routes to router DR-10 (172.10.75.0) and to router BDR-10 (172.10.76.0) using the 172.10.75.0 0.0.0.255 and the 172.10.76.0 0.0.0.255 IP/wildcard_mask combinations, respectively.

Enable and configure OSPF on router 10-2 10-2>enable (or en) 10-2#configure terminal (or 10-2(config)#router ospf 1 10-2(config-router)#network 10-2(config-router)#network 10-2(config-router)#network 10-2(config-router)#exit 10-2(config)#exit 10-2#disable 10-2>

config t) 172.10.78.0 0.0.0.255 area 10 172.10.75.0 0.0.0.255 area 10 172.10.76.0 0.0.0.255 area 10

In this configuration, router 10-2, like router 10-1, does the following: ✦ Exposes interfaces to area 10 only, because it doesn’t connect to area 0. ✦ Defines a route to router DR-10 (172.10.75.0) using the 172.10.75.0 0.0.0.255 IP/wildcard_mask combination ✦ Defines a route to router BDR-10 (172.10.76.0) using the 172.10.76.0 0.0.0.255 IP/wildcard_mask combination

Configure OSPF options Now you can configure optional parameters to customize the operation of OSPF on your routers.

OSPF priority You can manually set the OSPF priority of a router interface using the ip ospf priority value Cisco IOS command in global configuration mode. Changing the OSPF priority allows you to control the OSPF DR (designated router) and BDR (backup designated router) election process. OSPF elects the DR and the BDR based on the OSPF priority of the router interface.

www.it-ebooks.info

Verifying and Monitoring OSPF Operation

639

OSPF cost You can manually set the OSPF cost of an interface on your router using the ip ospf cost value Cisco IOS command in global configuration mode.

Verifying and Monitoring OSPF Operation You can verify the following elements to monitor OSPF operation and ensure optimum routing: ✦ Inspect the routing table ✦ Inspect the OSPF protocol configuration ✦ Inspect the OSPF interface configuration ✦ Inspect the OSPF neighbor information ✦ Inspect the OSPF routing database

Inspect the routing table This is not an OSPF-specific technique: Inspecting the routing table shows you all IP routing protocols enabled on your router and the state of their routing tables. You look at the routing tables on a Cisco router using the show ip route Cisco IOS command in privileged EXEC mode. The output includes the following: ✦ Network IP information ✦ Available subnets ✦ Routes currently stored in the routing table For each route, the command displays these items: • The IP address of the destination network reached by that route • The word connected, if the router you run the command on is directly connected to the destination network of that route

• The router interface that connects either to the destination network or to the gateway that reaches the destination network

www.it-ebooks.info


• The IP address of the gateway (router) to the destination network of that route if the router you run the command on is not directly connected to the destination network of that route

Book IV Chapter 6

640

Verifying and Monitoring OSPF Operation

Inspect the OSPF protocol configuration This is not an OSPF-specific technique: Inspecting the IP routing protocols shows you all IP routing protocols enabled on your router and their configuration. You use the show ip protocols Cisco IOS command in privileged EXEC mode to look at the IP routing protocol configuration on a Cisco router. The output displays one section for each IP routing protocol enabled on your router. For OSPF, it shows these items: ✦ OSPF process ID ✦ Whether an outgoing update filter is set ✦ Whether an incoming update filter is set ✦ RID (router ID) ✦ Number of OSPF areas active on the router where you run the command ✦ IP and OSPF area of networks registered for OSPF routing ✦ Reference bandwidth used to calculate the cost of each route ✦ Routing information sources: neighbor routers that exchange OSPF LSA packets with the router where you run the command ✦ Current administrative distance

Inspect the OSPF interface configuration You use the show ip ospf interface Cisco IOS command in privileged EXEC mode to look at interface-specific OSPF configuration: ✦ If you run the command specifying a particular interface, it shows data only about that interface. ✦ Otherwise, the command displays one section for each interface enabled for OSPF on your router.

Inspect the OSPF neighbor information You use the show ip ospf neighbor Cisco IOS command in privileged EXEC mode to look at information about the OSPF neighbors of your router.

Inspect the OSPF routing database You use the show ip ospf database Cisco IOS command in privileged EXEC mode to inspect data stored in the OSPF routing database. The command displays information about neighboring routers and the state of the links to them.

www.it-ebooks.info

Troubleshooting OSPF

641

Troubleshooting OSPF Whenever you notice routing malfunctions that are related to OSPF, you use the debug ip ospf Cisco IOS command in privileged EXEC mode to look at information about the OSPF operation on your router. The debug command enables debug mode on specific components and protocols. In this case, you enable debug mode on the OSPF protocol to capture detailed troubleshooting data about OSPF. You execute the debug ip ospf command in privileged EXEC mode. To disable debugging, execute the no debug ip ospf command in privileged EXEC mode.

Book IV Chapter 6


www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Contents at a Glance Chapter 1: Introducing Wireless Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 Purpose of Wireless Networks ................................................................... 647 Going over the Air, Locally or Globally .................................................... 648 Sharing the Airwaves .................................................................................. 649 Modulating the Airwaves ............................................................................ 651 Introducing Wireless Local-Area Network (WLAN) Standards (IEEE 802.11) .......................................................................... 657

Chapter 2: Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Security . . . . . . .665 Recognizing Security Risks......................................................................... 665 Introducing Security Risk Mitigation Methods ........................................ 666

Chapter 3: Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 Ad Hoc Mode ................................................................................................ 675 Infrastructure Mode .................................................................................... 679

Chapter 4: Managing Cisco Wireless Local Area Networks . . . . . . .691 Introducing the Cisco Unified Wireless Network Architecture (CUWN) .............................................................. 691 Lightweight Access Point Protocol (LWAPP) .......................................... 695 Adaptive Wireless Path Protocol (AWPP) ................................................ 697

Chapter 5: Configuring Cisco Wireless Local Area Networks . . . . .701 Configuration Flow ...................................................................................... 701

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 1: Introducing Wireless Networks Exam Objectives ✓ Describing standards associated with wireless media ✓ Identifying some of the governing bodies that are involved with

WLANs, such as the IEEE Wi-Fi Alliance and the ITU/FCC

I

t would be rare for a networking specialist in the current networking environment to not have to work with wireless devices or wireless networking. This mobile technology has gone way beyond the brick-like phones of the 1980s and has invaded all aspects of our society. This chapter reviews where this technology stands today and where it has come from. Wireless technologies have been around for more than a hundred years, with the beginnings of commercial wireless technologies starting with Nikola Tesla and Guglielmo Marconi around the beginning of the 20th century. With each major increase in technology through the 20th century, many of these technologies were used to improve wireless communications. Just as early wireless was used to transmit traditional telegraph signals wirelessly, current wireless is used to transmit traditional networking signals wirelessly.

Purpose of Wireless Networks The main goal of wireless networking is to provide mobility to network users, regardless of where their network access devices may be. Within an office, this may mean that moving users from one office to another becomes easier, or when planning to move into new offices, you can avoid the costly and manual job of running cables through the ceilings and walls. Outside your office, wireless networks give you access to the Internet or even to corporate resources on an as-needed, where-needed basis. With the wide variety of networking devices that are in use in the world today, from smart phones to netbooks to media players, as well as people’s reliance on getting data directly from the Internet using high-speed connections, we have become a world of users who do not download and store information, but rather grab it from where it is and use it where we are. As a result of this, an ever-increasing desire exists to be able to access this information in more and more locations, wherever we may be.

www.it-ebooks.info

648

Going over the Air, Locally or Globally

Going over the Air, Locally or Globally When wireless networks first emerged onto the market, the technologies were only good for limited distances. As the technologies have improved, so has the range where they can be used. Four main classes of wireless networks exist based on range and geographical areas: ✦ Wireless personal-area network (WPAN) ✦ Wireless local-area network (WLAN) ✦ Wireless metropolitan-area network (WMAN) ✦ Wireless wide-area network (WWAN)

Wireless personal-area network (WPAN) The WPAN makes use of short-range wireless technologies, usually less than 10 meters, or 11 yards. These technologies include IrDA, Bluetooth, and ZigBee. Bluetooth has replaced IrDA as the main WPAN technology in use today, while ZigBee is an up-and-comer in that arena. Personal-area networks join devices such as cell phones to computers to sync data and wireless earpieces to phones.

Wireless local-area network (WLAN) WLANs make use of LAN technologies and cover a larger area than that of the WPAN. A WLAN typically provides network connectivity throughout an office, building, or several buildings within a small geographical area, with all the networking components connected with LAN technologies. The technology used for a WLAN is short range and typically includes, but is not limited to, 802.11 networking components.

Wireless metropolitan-area network (WMAN) With another increase in the geographical area, you deal with the WMAN. The technologies used in a WMAN allow wireless connections over longer ranges than the WLAN, which are limited to several hundred meters or yards. The WMAN uses technologies such as WiMAX, which can cover several kilometers or miles. The distinction between the WLAN and WMAN is made primarily by the types of technology used.

Wireless wide-area network (WWAN) The largest area covered is the WWAN, which uses public carriers rather than private equipment. They may make use of WiMAX but most often make use of other cellular network technologies such as GPRS, HSDPA, and 3G to communicate. When using a device on a WWAN, the user can connect to his

www.it-ebooks.info

Sharing the Airwaves

649

office network via a secured connection or connect two offices within the area of the cellular network provider.

When you move into a new neighborhood, sometimes you have good neighbors who respect your property boundaries, while other times, your neighbors encroach on your property and are a general nuisance; the same is true when your property is your wireless network. When working with wireless networks, your neighbors may interfere with your network by generating traffic on the same frequencies as you are, or by using devices that encroach on the frequencies that you are using. This is especially true when using unlicensed radio bands, but it is easier to deal with when using the limited licensed radio bands.

Using unlicensed radio bands When hearing a term like unlicensed, you may think there are no laws or that it is like the “wild west” and people can do as they like; but that is not completely the case, as you must follow several regulations that cover the use the unlicensed radio bands. The big difference between licensed and unlicensed bands is that the licensed bands are only allowed to be used by the company that licensed them, while the unlicensed bands are used by anyone who wants to use them. Wireless phone companies, such as Sprint or Rogers, have specific frequencies that only they are allowed to use by leasing them from the government; IEEE 802.11 networks have several choices of wireless bands that are available to them to use, without the requirement to lease the frequencies from the government. The downside of the unlicensed frequencies or bands is that anyone else can use the same frequency ranges; which can cause interference for the signals you are trying to transmit. Users of both licensed and unlicensed bands are required to follow a series of government regulations, but the unlicensed bands may be used by anyone who follows the guidelines and regulations. These guidelines cover issues like encroaching on neighboring frequencies and causing interference; so if everyone follows these rules they will all be good neighbors, which is not always the case. Some groups have helped to develop standards so that all users can be good neighbors with others that use those radio bands. These groups and standards bodies include the following: ✦ FCC (Federal Communications Commission): Manages and sets standards with regard to the spectrum use ✦ IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers): A leading standards organization which publishes standards that are adopted across industries

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Wireless Networks

Sharing the Airwaves

Book V Chapter 1

650

Sharing the Airwaves ✦ Wi-Fi Alliance: An organization that attempts to create a single standard for WLANs, thereby ensuring interoperability ✦ ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute): Another standards organization that has contributed many worldwide standards ✦ ITU-R (International Telecommunication Union, Radiocommunication Sector): With the FCC, defines how WLANs should operate from a regulatory perspective, such as operating frequencies, antenna gain, and transmission power ✦ WLANA (WLAN Association): Provides information resources related to WLANs with regard to industry trends and usage

Licensed radio bands To use licensed radio bands, a license must be obtained from a government agency. This is true of all users of these radio spectrums. A few of the uses of licensed radio bands are as follows: ✦ AM broadcast ✦ FM broadcast ✦ Cellular phones (840 MHz) In the larger electromagnetic spectrum, which includes the radio spectrum, the licensing of infrared and X-ray spectrums also exists.

Unlicensed radio bands Unlicensed radio bands have been allocated to certain users by the government, but to be able to use and broadcast on these bands, you do not need to have a license; you only need to create compliant devices that are to be used. Regulations exist around these bands, so it is not a free-for-all. In the United States, the FCC regulates all the electromagnetic spectrum, but it has set aside several ranges for public use. Some of the types of unlicensed radio bands are as follows: ✦ Industrial, Scientific, Medical (ISM): This includes several medical monitors and other devices that operate in the 900-MHZ, 2.4-GHz, and 5-GHz bands. ✦ Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (U-NII): This defines the specifications for the use of wireless devices such as WLAN access points and routers in the 5-GHz band. ✦ Unlicensed Personal Communications Services (UPCS): This defines the specifications for devices operating in the 1.9-GHz band, where DECT6 cordless phones operate.

www.it-ebooks.info

Modulating the Airwaves

651

Modulating the Airwaves ✦ A lot of other traffic is out there, as well as natural phenomena that can cause interference with these signals, either by sending data on the same frequencies or by blocking the signals. ✦ You need to modify a standard signal to transmit data. There are many standard methods to perform this task. ✦ RF bands are only so wide, and therefore can only handle so many discrete sessions or channels at a time. It is not necessary to understand all the details of signal processing for the CCNA certification test, but you need to know a few things about signals and their characteristics.

Introducing signals When referring to a signal when discussing wireless communications, I am talking about an electromagnetic field with specific characteristics. If I were working with a different medium, the signal could be comprised of light (an optical signal), sound (an airwave signal), or electricity (an electrical signal). When working with computer data, copper wires are used to send electrical signals; fiber-optic cables can send optical signals. If you want to send wireless signals, you use light for line-of-sight technologies such as IrDA or RF for non-line-of-sight technologies. You surely have listened to a radio station in your local area. This radio station broadcasts its content over a radio-wave signal that operates at a base waveform. This wave can be modified through one of the modulation techniques to change its form, and thereby transmit information. The two modulation techniques that you have heard the most about are likely amplitude modulation (AM) and frequency modulation (FM). The base waveform to which data will be added is referred to as the carrier signal. In the case of broadcasting a radio show, the added information is voices or music, while in the case of computer data, it is a series of 1s and 0s that represent binary data. All signal waves have the same common characteristics, as shown in Figure 1-1. These are as follows: ✦ Amplitude, or height of the wave ✦ Period, or length of the wave to repeat one cycle ✦ Phase, or the offset of the wave from zero, or how far a wave is through its cycle

www.it-ebooks.info


When sending data over radio frequencies (RF), there are several things to remember:

Book V Chapter 1

652


Amplitude

Phase

Period Figure 1-1: Wave characteristics.

Many ways exist to measure the amplitude of the wave. Some people measure from either peak (which is peak-to-peak), while others measure from the center of the wave to the peak (which is peak or semiamplitude). The frequency of the wave is the number of times it repeats over a given time frame.

Modulating signals Because you can now identify a waveform at a frequency, modulation allows you to add data to that waveform by changing its basic form. The changes that you can make include the amplitude, the frequency, and the phase. In all cases, what you do to the wave prior to transmitting it (modulating) can then be undone by the receiver (demodulating), assuming that it knows what type of modification you are performing. When dealing with computers, which are composed of circuits that are either open or closed, you only deal with two states, so as long as you can create two distinct states in the waveform, you can identify them as open or closed, on or off, or 0 or 1. This then allows you to transmit binary data over RF. Figure 1-2 shows two basic types of modification of the initial carrier wave, which could be used to show binary number patterns.

www.it-ebooks.info


653 Book V Chapter 1

Modulated Amplitude Added to Base Wave Form

Modulated Frequency Added to Base Wave Form

Figure 1-2: Modulation techniques.

Using RF channels When a national regulatory body (such as the FCC in the United States) allocates a frequency range to be used for a function, it can also specify how it is used or shared. So, in the case of the 5-GHz range that is used by cordless phones and 802.11a wireless devices, the frequency band is defined as 5.170 GHz–5.835 GHz, but is then divided into 24 channels, each 20 MHz wide. This allows 24 unique conversations or communications to take place in that frequency range in the same physical area. If you are using 802.11a wireless networking, in a single room, you can operate 24 access points without interference between devices (not that you would likely want to do that).

Transmission channels in the 2.4-GHz radio frequency range When working with the 2.4-GHz portion of the RF spectrum, the actual range that you are working with is 2.4000–2.4835 GHz. This range is broken up into 14 unique channels, with each one 22 MHz wide, but the center of each of these channels is only 5 MHz apart. This means that an overlap exists between consecutive channels, which would result in interference and prevent proper communication. In the United States, the FCC has only allowed 11 of these channels to be used. Due to the overlapping of channels, if you are using multiple devices in a small geographical area where the devices’ RF may come in contact with

www.it-ebooks.info


Base Wave Form

www.it-ebooks.info


655

Transmission channels in 5-GHz radio frequency

For an IEEE 802.11a wireless network, the list of channels has been reduced to 12, which are only channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 149, 153, 157, 161, and 165. Now this gets more confusing when dealing with IEEE 802.11n, because the specifications for the standard allow the use of either 20-MHz channels or 40-MHz channels; this increases the amount of data that can sent over the channel. The biggest benefits of the 5-GHz portion of the spectrum are the nonoverlapping channels and the lack of competition for channel space. As in addition to IEEE 802.11a/n networking, this RF band is primarily only used by cordless phones.

Introducing RF modulation techniques In preparation for your CCNA exam, you should know something about the different RF modulation techniques that are implemented in IEEE 802.11 networking. Do not worry about knowing everything about them; just be familiar with the terminology that is used in the following sections.

Frequency-hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) This modulation technique uses the available channels to transmit and receive data, but rather than staying on any one channel, it rapidly switches between channels using a pseudorandom pattern that is based on an initial key; this key is shared between the participants of the communication session. If interference affects only a few of the channels, this interference is minimized because each channel is only used briefly. If the interference is broad, it can still affect all the channels that are in use. This modulation technique requires that the initial seed or key be shared, but after that has happened, it is very difficult to eavesdrop on. IEEE 802.11 wireless networks use this technique for modulation, while Bluetooth uses an adaptive version of this technique that stops using channels where interference or weak signals exist.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book V Chapter 1


When working with the 5-GHz portion of the RF spectrum, you are primarily working with the range of 5.170–5.835 GHz. This range is broken up into 24 unique channels, with each one being 20 MHz wide and the center of each channel is at least 20 MHz apart. Most countries use 20-MHz wide channels but often authorize different frequencies to be used for the channels that can go as low as 4.905 GHz. For simplicity, I limit my discussion to the authorized channels in the United States.

656


Direct-sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) Rather than rapidly swapping between several channels, DSSS spreads the carrier signal across the entire 22-MHz frequency range of its channel. For example, a device sending over channel 1 would spread the carrier signal across the 2.401- to 2.423-GHz frequencies (the full 22-MHz range of channel 1). At the same time it is transmitting the data over this channel, it also, at a faster rate, generates a noise signal in a pseudorandom pattern. This noise signal is known to the receiver, which can reverse or subtract this signal from the data signal. This process allows the carrier signal to be spread over the entire spectrum. With the entire spectrum being used, the effect of narrow-spectrum interference is reduced. Also, if the channel is being used by other devices, the effect of their signal is reduced because they will not be using the same pseudorandom noise pattern. DSSS has an advantage over FHSS in that it has better resistance to interference. It is used primarily by IEEE 802.11b networks and cordless phones operating in the 900-MHz, 2.4-GHz, and 5-GHz spectrums. It is also sometimes used by IEEE 802.11g/n networks, but these newer networks tend to prefer OFDM.

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) The slower that data is transmitted, the less likely that interference or line noise will cause a problem with the transmission. Multiplexing allows you to take several pieces of data and combine them into a single unit that can then be sent over the communication channel. In this case, OFDM takes the data that needs to be transmitted and breaks it into a large number of subcarrier streams (up to 52 subcarriers) that can then all be multiplexed into a single data stream. Because 52 subcarriers exist, the final data stream can be sent at a slower rate, while still delivering more data than other methods in the same time period. This multiplexing process gives OFDM an advantage over DSSS because it allows higher throughput (54 Mbps instead of 11 Mbps) and it can be used both in the 2.4-GHz frequency range and in the 5-GHz frequency range. Multiplexing has many uses, and OFDM is used in any technology that needs to send large amounts of data over slower transmission lines or standards. You will find that OFDM is used with IEEE 802.11g/a/n networking as well as with ASDL and digital radio.

Multiple-in, multiple-out (MIMO) MIMO allows multiple antennas to be used when sending and receiving data. The concept of spatial multiplexing allows these multiple signals to be multiplexed or aggregated, thereby increasing the throughput of data. To improve the reliability of the data stream, MIMO is usually combined with OFDM.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Standards (IEEE 802.11)

657

When using multiple antennas, you can achieve higher transmission speeds — more than 100 Mbps.

Book V Chapter 1

MIMO is used in both WiMAX and IEEE 802.11n networks, allowing these networks to achieve their high speeds.


Introducing Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Standards (IEEE 802.11) Early in WLAN development, many people were trying different technologies to achieve the goal of wireless LAN communication. As some clear winners started to emerge, a need existed for interoperation among these technologies. This desire for interoperation led to the development of standards around WLAN communications. As with all other standards in communications, standards allow all companies involved to build equipment to a level that allows their equipment to be used with equipment made by other vendors. This was not necessarily true in the beginning, but by the time IEEE 802.11a and IEEE 802.11b emerged, the standards were set, and all hardware vendors were able to build to a level that allowed interoperability.

2.4-GHz band Many of the wireless standards that emerged were designed to operate in the already crowded 2.4-GHz band. Whether this was a good idea does not matter; it is what happened. The following sections take a closer look at the standards in this category.

IEEE 802.11 As with the early days of any technologies, a number of players in the industry were looking at different methods of transferring LAN data without wires. As things moved along, a few groups emerged at the top of the pile. These groups used technologies that were not compatible with each other, and the most popular of these was collectively called 802.11-1997 or 802.11 Legacy. It is odd that these were referred to as collective, because they were not compatible with each other. The common factors of this standard were the communication rates and base technology components that are common to all IEEE 802.11 networks. Terminology that arose from this specification applies to all IEEE 802.11 networks. This includes the following: ✦ Access point (AP) ✦ Basic Service Set (BSS)

www.it-ebooks.info

658

Introducing Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Standards (IEEE 802.11) ✦ Distribution System (DS) ✦ Extended Service Set (ESS) ✦ Service set identifier (SSID) ✦ Frame structure (defining MAC and physical layers) ✦ Distributed Coordination Function, which is carrier sense multiple access collision avoidance (CSMA/CA) ✦ Dynamic rate shifting (DRS) ✦ Beacon frames ✦ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) ✦ Ad hoc networking ✦ Infrastructure networking These terms are fully described in the later chapters of this book, but you should be aware that they date back to the first IEEE 802.11 wireless networks. The specifications for IEEE 802.11 define three possible physical layer systems that can be used: ✦ Frequency-hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) in the 2.4-GHz band ✦ Direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) in the 2.4-GHz band ✦ InfraRed (which is in the specification but was not adopted by the industry) In addition to defining the physical layer protocols, the specification defines the communication speed as 1or 2 Mbps. The main benefit of IEEE 802.11 was that it offered RF wireless networks with greater range and throughput than other wireless technologies at the time, which were primarily infrared-based and thereby line-of-sight. Because this networking was based in the crowded 2.4-GHz spectrum, a great deal of interference existed, which was only partly minimized by FHSS and DSSS. All the IEEE 802.11 networking standards use carrier sense multiple access collision avoidance (CSMA/CA). This is different from the Ethernet LAN standard, which uses carrier sense multiple access collision detect (CSMA/CD). In both cases, carrier sense means that all devices can sense or see other traffic that is transmitting, and multiple access means that multiple (or all) devices can access the media at the same time, but only one computer is allowed to send data at a time.

www.it-ebooks.info


659

When working with WLAN technologies, the frame is sent on the network, which has no mechanism to allow a signal to bounce, and as such, it relies on collision avoidance. The method of sending data still starts with listening to the network to see whether anyone is using the media, and if no frames are detected for a specified period of time (known as the distributed interframe space [DIFS]), it is allowed to send its frame. The receiving station performs the CRC (cyclic redundancy check) of the received packet and sends back an ACK (acknowledgment) frame when the media is free. After the sending station receives its ACK frame, it knows that the data was sent correctly. This collision-avoidance process generates more network frames to send data, but it follows a more orderly process than collision detection. When the network is under high utilization, the collision-detection process tends to move more data than collision avoidance; this is likely due to mandatory wait states that occur by devices honoring the DIFS. Dynamic rate shifting (DRS) allows an AP to rate-shift to a lower bandwidth when the signal weakens. The signal becomes weaker proportionally to the distance between the AP and the target wireless device. In other words, the farther you go from the AP, the weaker the wireless signal becomes and the lower the transmission speed becomes because DRS automatically rateshifts to a lower speed when the signal weakens.

IEEE 802.11b In the 2.4-GHz spectrum, the first major upgrade to the WLAN specification is IEEE 802.11b, which raised the maximum bandwidth to 11 Mbps. This standard also relied primarily on Complementary Code Keying (CCK) as its modulation technique, which was a modified form of DSSS, while it would use DSSS when using slower connection speeds via DRS. The typical range for IEEE 802.11b is about 100 feet (30 meters) when operating at 11 Mbps.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book V Chapter 1


The difference starts there. With LAN technologies, when a computer wants to send a frame on the network, it uses its carrier sense to see whether anyone is using the network. If not, it then sends a network frame onto the wire, and the signal goes to the end of the wire, where it bounces and returns to the sending computer. The maximum length of an Ethernet cable is set to require the bounce signal to return within a specified time limit. When the computer sees what it sent, it knows that it was sent without a collision. But if what it sees is garbled, it knows that a collision occurred, and it then waits a random period of time and repeats the process. This system of collision detection works because the physical media allows the sending computer to verify that its data was correctly sent on the media.

www.it-ebooks.info


661

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE 802.11n uses both OFDM and multiple-in, multiple-out (MIMO) RF modulation techniques. While ranges are comparable with the IEEE 802.11 network specifications, it allows a maximum throughput of 600 Mbps when using four MIMO streams, or 150 Mbps for a single stream. IEEE 802.11n offers nothing but advantages over the previous IEEE 802.11 network specifications because it operates in both major RF bands, is backward compatible with other standards, and operates at higher data speeds. Because it has only recently been ratified, many of the existing devices on the market conform to draft specifications, but you can expect that these will be upgraded through 2010. If you are using a device that supports IEEE 802.11n that you purchased before September 2009 when the standard was ratified, make sure to update the device firmware to bring it up to the final IEEE 802.11n specification.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book V Chapter 1


In early versions of the draft specifications, this standard was only to use the 2.4-GHz RF spectrum. However, the final specification was ratified in September 2009 and allowed operating in the 5-GHz RF spectrum as well. By allowing both of the previous RF spectrums to be used, it allows IEEE 802.11n devices to be backward compatible with both IEEE 802.11b/g and IEEE 802.11a devices and maximizes its possible acceptance.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 2: Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Security Exam Objective ✓ Comparing and contrasting wireless security features and capabilities

of WPA security (including open, WEP, WPA, and WPA2)

N

ow that you are interested in working with wireless networking, you need to know how to secure the wireless network that you are working with. Many options are available to you to secure various aspects of your wireless network. This chapter examines some of the main methods and options that are available to you when securing wireless networks. Securing a wireless network, like any network, would be done to ensure that your data and private information remain private. The difference is that with wireless networks, you can never be sure where the users may be. I review some of the risks that you have to deal with as well as discuss the steps that you can take to reduce your risks.

Recognizing Security Risks As with any wired network, any number of attacks can be perpetrated on you if an unauthorized computer is allowed to connect to your network. This is why on secure networks, all unauthorized ports of network switches are disabled or disconnected. However, this is not possible when dealing with wireless networks, where the access point (AP) radio is either on or off. When a computer is on your network, it is capable of sniffing packets, perpetrating man-in-middle attacks, spoofing valid network packets, capturing passwords and other sensitive information, and causing a denial of service. If you are able to control which computers are allowed to connect to your network, you can reduce your exposure to these security issues. Most networks have removed all their network hubs and replaced them with switches, which are more secure. A switch treats each network switch port as a separate collision domain (in the carrier sense multiple access collision detect [CSMA/CD] sense), which means that when a device on port 1 sends frames to a device on port 2, and both MAC addresses are known to the switch, those frames only travel along the cables connected to port 1 and port 2. However, when a hub is

www.it-ebooks.info

666

Introducing Security Risk Mitigation Methods

used, the frame travels to every device connected to every port on the hub. When dealing with wireless networks, an AP operates in the same manner as a hub, so all devices that are connected wirelessly to a single AP radio can see all traffic that is sent on that radio. If a device is allowed to join a wireless network, it can perpetrate any number of attacks on the devices connected to the same AP, as well as other attacks that only require it to be on the same network segment.

Introducing Security Risk Mitigation Methods Although there are inherent security risks with everything that we do in life, steps can be taken to reduce the risks. If you are going for a walk in a strange town, you may stay on well-lit roads, carry only a limited amount of cash and credit cards, walk with other people, and stay aware of your surroundings. All these things may limit what might happen to you on your walk, while not going at all is also an option. In the computer world, if you don’t network your computers, you reduce or all but eliminate the risk of what can happen to your computer by undesirable elements, but you also reduce its functionality. So to increase its functionality, you add a modem or a network card and attach your computer to other computers to share data and perform remote operations. You then mitigate the risk of having these computers connected to each other, and possibly the Internet, by using antivirus software, software and hardware firewalls, intrusion detection hardware and software firewalls and hardware, and other security and monitoring devices. When you decide to add a wireless network to this mix, you have many of the same issues, but these are now compounded because people can have local access to the network without actually being in your building or offices. This added functionality of mobility needs to be weighed against the added risks of remote users exploiting security holes and getting to your private data. When working with most wireless networking equipment, you have the following ways to protect your network data: ✦ Authentication and data encryption ✦ MAC address filtering ✦ Intrusion detection and intrusion prevention ✦ Hiding the service set identifier (SSID) The following sections examine each of these in detail.

www.it-ebooks.info


667

Authentication and data encryption

WEP, WPA, and WPA2 One of the first major complaints that arose from wireless networking was from the security community. Quite rightly, the complaint was that with RF signals being broadcast over the air, nothing can stop someone from reaching out and grabbing them. At least with wired networking, a person had to physically be connected to the same hubs or switches to be able to eavesdrop on a network conversation. To deal with this issue, Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) was introduced. The goal of WEP is to provide the same level of privacy that you would have if you were still connected to a wired network. The goal was good, but as with a better-built mousetrap, you end up with smarter mice. The basis of WEP involved two sets of mechanisms: ✦ Authentication: You need to prove your identity before participating in the network. ✦ Encryption: You want everything you send over the airwaves to be encrypted. The basis of WEP encryption is tied to an encryption key; today you typically see either 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP encryption keys. With 64-bit WEP, you use a 40-bit key that is joined with a 24-bit initialization vector (IV) to generate an RC4 (Rivest Cipher 4) stream cipher. A 128-bit WEP uses a 104bit encryption key, which is then joined with the 24-bit IV to create the RC4 cipher. While this gives you a quick and efficient way to encrypt and decrypt traffic at high speed, it has some serious flaws. Even if you cannot read the data, you can still capture data packets off a wireless network, because they are just traveling over the air. One of the issues is that the IV must be unique for every packet that is sent over a time period, and because it is only 24 bits long, it can start repeating in as little as 5,000 packets, making it not as random or secure as it can be. WEP has consistently been proven to be broken in as little as 1 minute and can be broken with readily available software. Given this, it is not considered to be reliably secure for networks. Payment Card Industry (PCI), which sets standards for credit and debit card transactions, prohibits the use of WEP in any part of a credit card transaction.

www.it-ebooks.info

Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Security

Authentication and data encryption comprise a large topic. I start by taking a look at the most common techniques and then move on to other techniques that are equally good, but used less frequently.

Book V Chapter 2

668


The authentication part of WEP can be a configured as an open system, which does not require authentication but rather starts a conversation with any device. That device still would be required to know the WEP key if encryption is enabled. If shared key authentication is being used, all devices start their communication with the AP with a four-way handshake process that starts with the client sending an authentication request. The AP would send a challenge (a random piece of data) that the client then encrypts by using the WEP key and returns to the AP. The AP decrypts the data it receives and does a comparison with the data it sent in the initial challenge. If the data matches, the device is sent an acknowledgment; if it does not match, it is sent a refusal. If the client is authenticated, it can start sending data to the AP, likely encrypting it using its WEP key. Due to the limitations of WEP, Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) was developed. WPA makes use of most of the recommendations that are included in the IEEE 802.11i specification, which lays out security standards for wireless networks. WPA2 followed later, implementing all the IEEE 802.11i mandatory elements. Rather than using a static encryption key, as is used with WEP, WPA makes use of Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), which can easily be implemented because it is a minor but effective upgrade to WEP. Rather than using a plain text IV, it combines the IV with a secret root key. It also implements a sequence counter, so all packets must arrive at the AP in the correct order, or they are rejected. Finally, it provides a method of rekeying or updating the encryption key, neutralizing people trying to break the key. There are still many documented attacks that can be successfully carried out on a WPA network using TKIP, and as such, it required additional updating. The implementation of AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) increased the level of encryption to a level that is still considered to be the safest on the market, while the initial key was set with either certificate-based authentication or a shared secret. When security is initialized with a shared secret, entrance to the secured network provides a breach point, while certificate-based authentication provides a less vulnerable option. Certificate-based authentication is available when using enterprise-mode authentication, while shared secret or Pre-Shared Key (PSK) is used for personal-mode authentication.

Virtual Private Network (VPN) Many companies or organizations operate a VPN to allow their users to securely gain access to network resources when operating their mobile computers on a remote and unsecured network. This allows them to isolate their computers from the local network that they are on and connect them to their corporate network. Using this same mentality, they can operate

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

670


TLS is the replacement for SSL is the standard method of encrypting client/ server data that starts with a key exchange, authentication, and the implementation of standard ciphers. Many IP-based protocols support the use of TLS to encrypt data, such as HTTP (HTTPS), SMTP, POP3, FTP, and NNTP. Because most major protocols support this method of encryption, when using these protocols over wireless, TLS should be used if the server supports it.

MAC address filtering When attempting to secure a wireless network, in addition to encryption and authentication of WEP and WPA, you can also filter users from connecting to your WLAN if they do not have a registered or authorized MAC address associated with their network card. In addition to adding a list of authorized MAC addresses to the individual APs that make up your wireless network, you can centrally maintain a list of authorized MAC addresses via a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) or authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server on your network. Because many operating systems allow you to locally set your MAC address on your network card, this security should only be considered as light security, like WEP. If an intruder knows a valid MAC address on your network, either by social engineering or by capturing wireless network frames, he can use that to gain access to your network by manipulating his own MAC address.

Hiding the service set identifier (SSID) Each WLAN AP sends out regular broadcasts that include the name of the network, or SSID. Knowing the SSID of a network allows you to connect to the network. Most APs allow you to disable the broadcasting of the SSID, which prevents people from knowing your network name and makes it difficult for them to connect to your network. Tools like Network Stumbler are designed to monitor RF WLAN signals and can easily identify whether WLAN networks exist in your area; this is shown in Figure 2-2. Other tools, such as AirCrack, can help you identify the SSID. As with MAC address filtering, disabling the broadcasting of the SSID does not provide you with strong security; it only keeps the casual passerby from connecting to your WLAN.

www.it-ebooks.info



Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Security

Figure 2-2: Network Stumbler showing missing SSIDs for active radios.

Intrusion detection and intrusion prevention Intrusion detection systems (IDSs) and intrusion prevention systems (IPSs) monitor network traffic and traffic to these systems to locate devices on your network that may be attempting infiltrate your network. When people are attempting to gather information about your network, they will run tools that leave a signature on your network or will send specific types of traffic to devices on the network. Having devices for intrusion detection allows them to see who is scanning, which allows you to locate them and block them. When the intrusion detection system reacts to the intrusion and attempts to block the attempt automatically, the system is usually referred to as an IPS. Most network providers like Cisco have a full range of IDSs and IPSs that run either on a network gateway or inside the network. These systems range in price based on the features they offer and how they integrate into the network.

Changing default passwords All network devices — be they switches, routers, wireless LAN controllers, or access points — all ship with a default system configuration that includes IP address configuration, SSID, users, and administration password. Because this information is documented in the devices owner’s manual and on the manufacturer’s Web site, you should change these items prior to deploying these devices on your network; otherwise, unknown people will be able change your device configurations. Years ago, this was not identified as a major concern. It caused many APs to be deployed with default SSIDs, allowing the manufacturer of that AP to be identified and the default username and password to then be known. This

www.it-ebooks.info

672


would then lead to security breaches for those networks. Most manufacturers now promote the fact that security is important and, in some cases, require all configuration to be manually set up before the AP or network devices can be used.

Management access When dealing with a residential-grade AP, you usually only have one networking interface that is used for both data access as well as for management. When dealing with commercial- or enterprise-grade access points, you usually have the option of supporting virtual local-area networks (VLANs) right at the AP. This allows you to support multiple SSIDs over a single radio, which are then assigned to separate VLANs to isolate the traffic for each SSID. With VLAN support comes the ability to assign the management network interface to a separate VLAN. If the management interface is on a separate VLAN, security can be assigned at routers or firewalls to restrict which network devices can connect to the management interface. Some wireless devices also allow you to prevent management access through their own radios so that a user on the wireless network cannot manage that AP.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 3: Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Operation Modes Exam Objectives ✓ Identifying the basic parameters to configure on a wireless network ✓ Identifying and describing the purpose of the components in a small

wireless network — including SSID, BSS, ESS ✓ Identifying common issues with implementing wireless networks

W

hen working with wireless LANs, you need to know their operating modes as well as how to lay out access points (APs) to allow maximum coverage while reducing internal conflicts. This chapter examines the basic options for WLAN operation and describes how to lay out a basic wireless network. If you focus on these key facts, you should breeze through the related questions on the exam. When you are working with a traditional wired network, you connect your computer to a network switch to interconnect all devices on your network. Or, you use crossover network cables to directly connect two computers. In the case of wireless networking, you still have two choices: You can connect two devices directly or you can connect your devices using a central device, mainly an access point. These two methods are referred to as ad hoc mode when the devices are directly connected or infrastructure mode when using an AP. This chapter takes a look at both of these options.

Ad Hoc Mode When working with networking in ad hoc mode, you are connecting to another device that has the same wireless settings as the settings on your own device. The benefit of this networking is that you do not need to preconfigure your network infrastructure to support a temporary group of users, while these users (or rather their devices) are able to share information among themselves. A sample ad hoc wireless network is shown in Figure 3-1. This networking required very little configuration to get it started.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Ad Hoc Mode


Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Operation Modes

Figure 3-2: Wireless settings for each network connection are found in the network connection’s Properties dialog box.

7. In the Wireless Network Properties dialog box, provide a name for your new ad hoc network or type the name of an existing network.

8. At the bottom of the dialog box, select the This Is a Computer-toComputer (Ad Hoc) Network check box.

9. Choose the Network Authentication and Data Encryption settings that you would like to use. If the WEP key is not provided for you automatically, deselect the The Key Is Provided for Me Automatically check box and type the WEP key into the Network Key and Confirm Network Key fields. A completed dialog box with these settings is shown in Figure 3-3.

10. Click the OK button to save your changes and close the Wireless Network Properties dialog box.

11. If this is the first device that you have set up for this network, repeat the steps for your second device. The second computer will see the network show up in its list of available wireless networks. By default, the TCP/IP settings for each network card will be set to use Automatic Private IP Addressing (APIPA), so since there will not be a DHCP server on your ad hoc network, both of your devices will choose a random address in the 169.254.0.0/16 network. This should be fine, as you will be able to then connect to the devices by either their computer name or IP address.

www.it-ebooks.info

678

Ad Hoc Mode

Figure 3-3: Only a few pieces of information are required to set up an ad hoc network.

To activate at your new ad hoc network, you need to let Windows know that you want to use it now. It is set up as an on-demand wireless connection. To do this, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Choose Start➪Control Panel. Select Network and Internet Connections. Choose Network Connections. In the Wireless Network Connection Properties dialog box, click the View Wireless Networks button. The Choose a Wireless Network dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4: Connecting to an on-demand wireless connection.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Infrastructure Mode



Figure 3-6: This dialog box displays all networks that are broadcasting their SSIDs.

5. Select a wireless network from the list and click the Connect button. If the network uses WEP or WPA, you will be prompted to enter the network key; then click the OK button. Infrastructure mode wireless networking is the mode that you most often encounter in your work as a CCNA supporting networks for clients or in a corporate environment.

Autonomous mode When 802.11 networking began, all APs were autonomous mode, which means that each AP worked as a stand-alone unit, with no knowledge of or interaction among other APs. This was fine in the beginning when wireless networking was often limited to providing network access in common areas or boardrooms, and continuous roaming was not a requirement. This meant that a typical network might deploy from one to ten access points across the network environment, and an environment of that size is still easily managed. Figure 3-5 showed an example of an autonomous mode wireless network.

Lightweight mode Rather than using autonomous mode APs, you can also use lightweight mode APs if you have a network component that offers wireless LAN controller services. Cisco offers the lightweight mode option on most of its APs, so they can be purchased with either a controller-based software image (using Lightweight Access Point Protocol [LWAPP]) or a stand-alone software image (Cisco IOS software image). A sample of how this fits together in your

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Infrastructure Mode

683

the processing work that would normally be done at the AP can be offloaded to the WLC, leaving more CPU cycles available on the AP.

Service set refers to all the wireless devices that participate in a specific wireless LAN. This wireless LAN may be a local WLAN or an enterprise WLAN, spanning several buildings or areas. Each service set is identified by a service set identifier, or SSID. The SSID should directly relate to the network that the WLAN or AP will connect the wireless device to: ✦ If you have multiple networks within an enterprise environment, multiple SSIDs can exist. ✦ If you only have one network, you should only have one SSID. Figure 3-8 shows multiple access points hosting connections to multiple networks. This means that in a single area, you will likely have multiple APs using the same SSID. Network Switches Figure 3-8: Each SSID should identify a different Access or unique Points physical network that is allowing connections. WLAN1 SSID

WLAN1

WLAN2

WLAN3

While the SSID can be up to 32 characters long, it is usually made up of human-readable ASCII characters, but it could contain any of the possible 256 values in those 32 digits. When users connect to the WLAN identified by the SSID, they can make the connection automatically or manually. In addition to multiple access points broadcasting or using the same SSID, an option also exists for a single access point to use multiple SSIDs. This only makes sense if the AP allows you to map each of these SSIDs to a different network connection. This would typically be accomplished through the use of VLAN tagging, as shown in Figure 3-9. If the user associates with a particular SSID, this traffic is then passed to the network switch destined

www.it-ebooks.info


Service set

Book V Chapter 3

www.it-ebooks.info

Infrastructure Mode

685

Network planning and layout

RF signal factors Many things influence RF signals. You may get signal loss from building materials that usually comes from three main sources that are based on the types of materials used. These three sources are as follows: ✦ Absorption: Absorption occurs when RF waves are absorbed by the materials that they are attempting to pass through. Absorption typically occurs when the waves pass through walls or dense materials. Water and concrete have high RF absorption properties. ✦ Reflection: Reflection occurs when RF waves cannot penetrate a surface and are returned or bounced off the surface. This is common with metal and glass surfaces. ✦ Scattering: Scattering occurs when the reflective surface is uneven, which causes many random bounces. A reflective signal may still have enough of its original properties to be used, but a scattered signal will not. The more issues you have with your signal between the client and the AP, the higher the noise level of the signal. Other sources of noise include other devices that operate in the same wireless band as your AP and devices that may cause broad-spectrum interference. Some level of noise always exists, but if the level is too high, the signal-to-noise ratio will be too low to sustain a proper connection. Due to unexpected signal loss, a site survey is standard practice prior to deploying access points. A site survey allows you to ✦ Identify other wireless networks in the area that may conflict with your network ✦ Place a temporary AP and measure the signal strength from different areas This predeployment step can answer many of the unknowns and allow you to have a successful deployment.

AP layout The simplest wireless network would contain only one AP. The issues that you need to deal with for one AP are generally placement and signal loss. Figure 3-10 shows a centrally located AP in an office with a few obstructions that may cause signal loss in the areas specified.

www.it-ebooks.info


You have many factors to consider when planning a wireless network, from external sources of broad-spectrum interference to the characteristics of building materials that are in use to channel selection and range.

Book V Chapter 3

686

Infrastructure Mode

Figure 3-10: Signal loss in a single AP WLAN deployment.

Ignoring signal loss from building materials, if you have three APs in your layout and no outside interference, you should use all three of the nonoverlapping channels (1, 6, and 11). The only exception to this would be if you had a more linear layout, where the APs at either end of the line were isolated by the middle AP. A typical pattern may give you a layout that resembles what is shown in Figure 3-11. Cisco recommends a 10–15 percent overlap between APs to allow complete coverage in the interim area.

Figure 3-11: Three APs on your wireless network usually require that all three nonoverlapping channels be used.

www.it-ebooks.info

Infrastructure Mode

687

Figure 3-12: Isolating reused channels by using stronger AP signals in between.

Now if the area gets even more crowded, in an attempt to provide better coverage or to support higher client density, you may need to take additional steps. In Figure 3-13, notice that an AP on channel 6 separates the two channel 1 APs, allowing that channel to be reused, while all three channel 6 APs are primarily separated by the channel 11 AP. In addition to the physical placement, the power levels on the channel 6 APs have been reduced to provide a lower radius of coverage, thus preventing these APs from touching each other. Having been involved in some large wireless rollouts, I can tell you that this gets even more complicated when you have to do this type of RF management across a three-story building. In that case, you not only have to keep your channels separated per floor but also between floors.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book V Chapter 3


This deployment would be more complex if you had to provide coverage using four APs. In that case, you would have to reuse at least one of the nonoverlapping channels to complete the deployment. You can do this by isolating the reused channel from the other AP on that channel by stronger signals from the intermediary APs. Staggering these AP channels allows you to provide coverage on all your network APs. An example of this is shown in Figure 3-12.

688

Infrastructure Mode

Figure 3-13: Tuning radio strength or power can also isolate duplicate channels.

Automatic tuning Some APs on the market support automatic tuning, but in challenging environments, you may need to actively manage them. Systems like Cisco’s Wireless LAN Controller, which knows about all internal network APs and can detect external APs, give you a good option for automatic tuning of channels and signal strength. Each AP goes off-channel for a short period of time to allow it to scan all channels to look for interference. Because the Wireless LAN Controller also knows about all other APs that exist on the network, it can determine the strength and visibility of the surrounding APs. This allows it to recalculate the channel selection and radio strength of all APs on the network, thereby optimizing coverage over the whole network.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 4: Managing Cisco Wireless Local Area Networks Exam Objective ✓ Understanding the infrastructure of a Cisco Wireless Local Area

Network

S

o as a CCNA, you will need to understand which components make up a standard Cisco wireless network. This chapter will prepare you for the exam by providing you an overview of the components and let you know how they work together. With this information you should be able to meet the challenges of the exam. This chapter will review all of the components that make up a standard Cisco wireless network and provide you with necessary information you will need in order to know how all of these components function in order to provide wireless network services to your entire network.

Introducing the Cisco Unified Wireless Network Architecture (CUWN) In today’s market, the driving force behind mobile computing is actually mobile computer users. These users have been finding it more and more convenient to be able to use their computing devices wherever they need to. The more places that they are able to use them, the more places they want to be able to use them. This gives corporate IT staff a challenge in that they are typically concerned with the integrity, safety, and security of corporate data; allowing users in an ever widening geographical area to have access to this data goes against the goals of corporate IT staff. To alleviate some of this concern, Cisco released information on the Cisco Unified Wireless Network. The unified part of this solution is that it incorporates a standard management methodology and goal across all the products that Cisco provides for both wired and wireless data communication, with data security in the front of all development thoughts. So the Cisco Unified Wireless Network takes data from a client, through wireless access points, through the wired infrastructure, to the servers or devices that will ultimately hold the data. As such, this makes use of networking devices at all levels of the process, and Cisco has released tools

www.it-ebooks.info

692

Introducing the Cisco Unified Wireless Network Architecture (CUWN)

to allow for central management of all of these devices through a series of management tools. The Cisco Unified Wireless Network uses some or all of the following components: ✦ Cisco Wireless Control System (WCS) ✦ Cisco WCS Navigator ✦ Cisco Wireless LAN Controller ✦ Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Module (WLCM) ✦ Cisco Wireless Service Module (WiSM) ✦ Cisco Catalyst 2750G Integrated Wireless LAN Controller ✦ Cisco Lightweight Access Points ✦ Cisco Aironet Wireless Bridge ✦ Cisco Aironet 1500 Series Lightweight Outdoor Mesh Access Points ✦ Cisco Client Devices So now we can take a look at some of these components in more detail.

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Management of wireless LAN can be challenging today with the widespread deployment of access points (AP). In networks where there is currently no wireless, there is pressure to deploy a wireless solution; in established networks, the pressure is usually to increase coverage in the current solution. To have Wireless LAN Controller (WLC) services on your network, you can use any of the following: ✦ Cisco 2100 series controller ✦ Cisco 4400 series controller ✦ Catalyst 6500 Series Wireless Services Module (WiSM) ✦ Cisco 7600 Series Router Wireless Services Module (WiSM) ✦ Cisco 28/37/38xx Series Integrated Services Router with Controller Network Module ✦ Catalyst 3750G Integrated Wireless LAN Controller Switch

www.it-ebooks.info


693

The Cisco Wireless LAN Controller is used to manage all aspects of multiple APs and can also take care of all your Radio Resource Management.

Book V Chapter 4

The two WLC devices that you will likely encounter most often are the Cisco 2100 series controller or the Cisco 4400 series controller.

Managing Cisco Wireless Local Area Networks

The Cisco 2100 series controller has eight network ports on it; two ports support POE to power APs, while the other ports can be assigned as management interfaces, or assigned to support various VLAN and network connections that you may be using to isolate traffic for your SSIDs. This WLC can manage up to six APs. Depending on the model of the Cisco 4400 series controller you look at, you can manage up to 100 APs through up to four network ports, which are used as distribution system ports. This series of controller is typically connected to a network switch, which would provide network services for your APs. Most of these WLC support the following features: ✦ Distribution System Ports used to connect the WLC to a network switch and act as a path for data. ✦ Service Port used as a management or console port. This port is active during the boot mode of the WLC. ✦ Management Interface, which is used for in-band management and provides connectivity to network devices (such as DHCP servers or Radius servers). If you want to connect to the controller’s web management interface, it would be through this interface. The management interface is assigned an IP address and is the initial point of contact for LWAPP communication and registration. ✦ AP-Manager Interface is used to control and manage all Layer 3 communications between the WLC and lightweight APs. For the best AP association results, it is recommended that the AP-Manager Interface be assigned to the same IP subnet as the Management Interface. ✦ Virtual Interface is used to support mobility management features, such as DHCP relay and Guest Web Authentication. ✦ Service-Port Interface is used to communicate to the Service Port and must have an IP Address that belongs to a different IP Subnet than that of the AP-Manager Interface and any other dynamic interface. ✦ Dynamic Interfaces are VLAN interfaces created by you to allow for communication to various VLANs.

www.it-ebooks.info

694


Some features that are available to you when working with the WLC and LWAP include: ✦ Controller port mirroring allows you to copy data on one port of your controller to another port for diagnostics. ✦ Controller link aggregation (LAG) allows you to bond multiple ports together on your controller to allow multiple physical ports to be treated as a single logical port. With LAG enabled, you can support 100 APs on a single 4404 WLC, which still follows the recommendation of 48 APs per port. ✦ DHPC Proxy allows you to forward DHCP requests to the normal DHCP servers existing on your network. ✦ Aggressive load balancing distributes wireless clients between APs, rather than waiting for clients to naturally migrate between APs. This provides better performance on the overall WLAN. ✦ Client roaming support between AP on the same ESS, and also between controllers and subnets, as well as Voice-over-IP Telephone Roaming. ✦ Integrated security solutions built around 802.1x and AAA or Radius servers. ✦ Rogue device management. ✦ Cisco IDS and IPS support. ✦ Internal DHCP server support, as well as requiring all clients on the network to have DHCP assigned IP addresses for additional security. ✦ MAC filtering for WLAN access, which can be managed through AAA servers. ✦ Dynamic transmit power control allows the radio strength to be tuned to allow for maximum coverage with minimal interference between APs. ✦ Dynamic channel assignment allows for regular checks of RF channels in use in the area, and assigning channels that provide the least amount of interference or noise. ✦ Coverage hole detection and correction allows for clients that detected to be getting weak coverage to trigger a process that will re-evaluate the overall channel and signal strength on the network to correct the holes. ✦ Rogue AP detection allows you to identify non-managed APs in your area, and determine whether they are actually on your local network. If they are found to be on your local network, then remedial action may be taken.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

696

Lightweight Access Point Protocol (LWAPP)

APs on your network, you can assign primary, secondary, and tertiary controllers for your network. If the primary controller is unavailable, the backup controller will be used until the primary becomes available on the network again. The controller and APs run protocols that route packets in and out of the WLAN and LAN, using optimum path through the wireless mesh network and through the wired network linking the WLAN controller to other WLAN controller, or to L2 or to L3 routers. When working with the WLC and APs, a function called Split MAC is used to determine which functions are performed by the AP and which functions are performed by the WLC. The WLC usually performs these functions: ✦ 802.11 authentication ✦ 802.11 association ✦ 802.11 frame translation and bridging ✦ 802.1x/EAP/RADIUS processing ✦ Termination of 802.11 traffic on a wired interface The AP usually performs time sensitive operations, such as: ✦ Frame exchange handshake between a client and AP ✦ Transmission of beacon frames ✦ Buffering and transmission of frames for clients in power save mode ✦ Response to probe request frames from clients ✦ Provision of real-time signal quality information to the switch with every received frame ✦ Monitoring each of the radio channels for noise, interference, and other WLANs ✦ Monitoring for the presence of other APs ✦ Encryption and decryption of 802.11 frames If you have already purchased all of your access points and they are autonomous, but you now wish to roll out a WLC, then you are able to convert your APs to lightweight mode by running a Cisco-supplied upgrade tool on your compatible Cisco AP. This process can be reversed by reapplying the latest Cisco ISO for that Cisco AP.

www.it-ebooks.info

Adaptive Wireless Path Protocol (AWPP)

697

Adaptive Wireless Path Protocol (AWPP)

www.it-ebooks.info

Managing Cisco Wireless Local Area Networks

When dealing with Cisco Wireless Mesh APs, you require a method to allow you to pass data through the mesh. In the case of Cisco, the method that is used is AWPP, which runs on Mesh Access Points (MAP) and Rooftop Mesh Access Points (RAP). AWPP routes data packets through the wireless mesh between MAPs, RAPs, and the wired data network.

Book V Chapter 4

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 5: Configuring Cisco Wireless Local Area Networks Exam Objective ✓ Performing a basic configuration of a Cisco wireless network

I

n preparation for your CCNA exam, you should know how to do some of the basic configurations for a wireless network. This chapter focuses on the management and configuration of a wireless network based on the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller. If you review the information found in this chapter, you shouldn’t have issues with these topics on the exam.

Configuration Flow The following sections give you an overview of the basic process for setting up your wireless LAN. In this case, I focus on a WLAN that will be functioning with a Cisco Wireless LAN Controller (WLC).

Set up and verify the wired LAN to which the WLAN will connect This process assumes the following: ✦ You have already planned the number and type of service set identifiers (SSIDs) that you will be supporting. ✦ You have the VLANs that are required to support them. ✦ You have security parameters around the VLANs. ✦ You have conducted a site survey so that you know where each AP will be mounted. Knowing all of these items ahead of time can ease and speed the deployment of your wireless infrastructure.

www.it-ebooks.info

702

Configuration Flow

Set up the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller(s) After unpacking your WLC, connect the console cable to the service port and set your computer’s terminal settings to the following: ✦ 9600 baud ✦ 8 data bits ✦ 1 stop bit ✦ No parity ✦ No hardware flow control When powering up your WLC, you need to perform some configuration. You are presented with the Startup Wizard, which prompts you for the following information and verifies its accuracy: ✦ Ensures that the controller has a system name, up to 32 characters. ✦ Adds an administrative username and password, each up to 24 characters. ✦ Ensures that the controller can communicate with the GUI, CLI, or Cisco WCS through the service port by accepting a valid Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) configuration or manual IP address and netmask. Entering 0.0.0.0 for the IP address and netmask disables the service port. ✦ Ensures that the controller can communicate with the network (802.11 distribution system) through the management interface, having you assign a static IP address, netmask, default router IP address, VLAN identifier, and physical port assignment. ✦ Prompts for the IP address of the DHCP server used to supply IP addresses to clients and the controller management interface. ✦ Asks for the Lightweight Access Point Protocol (LWAPP) transport mode. ✦ Collects the virtual gateway IP address — any fictitious, unassigned IP address (such as 1.1.1.1) to be used by Layer 3 security and mobility managers. ✦ Allows you to enter the mobility group (RF group) name. ✦ Collects the wireless LAN 802.11 SSID, or network name. ✦ Asks you to indicate whether clients can use static IP addresses. Allowing this is more convenient for some users but offers less security. Disallowing this requires that all devices get their IP configuration from a DHCP server.

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuration Flow

703

✦ Collects the country code to ensure that it configures the radios for the local region. ✦ Enables or disables the 802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n lightweight access point networks. ✦ Enables or disables Radio Resource Management (RRM).

Verify connectivity to the wired LAN At this point, you should have the WLC configured and supporting at least one SSID that will be valid for your network. If you choose to, you would be able to perform configuration changes from a remote terminal or via the Web-based GUI. The following sections allow you to configure additional SSIDs.

Enable the 802.11 bands Using the command-line interface (CLI), you can enable or disable the supported radios with the following commands: config config config config config

802.11a disable network 802.11b disable network 802.11a enable network 802.11b enable network {802.11a | 802.11b} 11nsupport {enable | disable}

To save and view your configuration changes, use the following commands: save config show {802.11a | 802.11b}

You then see output that looks something like this: 802.11a Network............................... Enabled 11nSupport.................................... Enabled 802.11a Low Band........................... Enabled 802.11a Mid Band........................... Enabled 802.11a High Band.......................... Enabled 802.11a Operational Rates 802.11a 6M Rate.............................. Mandatory 802.11a 9M Rate.............................. Supported 802.11a 12M Rate............................. Mandatory 802.11a 18M Rate............................. Supported 802.11a 24M Rate............................. Mandatory 802.11a 36M Rate............................. Supported 802.11a 48M Rate............................. Supported 802.11a 54M Rate............................. Supported ...

www.it-ebooks.info

Book V Chapter 5

Configuring Cisco Wireless Local Area Networks

✦ Asks whether you want to configure a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server from the Startup Wizard, the RADIUS server IP address, communication port, and secret.

704

Configuration Flow

Configure the SSID In the case of Cisco Wireless LAN Controllers, an SSID is configured as part of a WLAN, so each WLAN maps to an SSID. Within the WLAN settings, you can configure security, quality of service (QoS), radio policies, and other wireless network settings. Each controller supports up to 16 WLANs. The following commands allow you to configure an additional SSID: show wlan summary config wlan create wlan_id profile_name ssid

When the WLAN is created, it is automatically disabled for security. After you have completed all your security settings, you can enable the WLAN with the following commands: config wlan enable wlan_id save config

Configure WLAN security Configuring security settings on WLAN sets is for all your associated access points. You can configure either static WEP or WPA for wireless security. To configure static WEP keys, follow these steps based on a specific WLAN ID:

1. Disable 802.1x encryption: config wlan security 802.1X disable wlan_id

2. Configure the WEP key as 40/64-, 104/128-, or 128/152-bit: config wlan security static-wep-key encryption wlan_id {40 | 104 | 128} {hex | ascii} key key_index

The default key level is 104, which requires you to enter 26 hexadecimal or 13 ASCII characters for the key.

3. To configure WPA1 or WPA2, use the following commands: config wlan disable wlan_id config wlan security wpa {enable | disable} wlan_id config wlan security wpa wpa1 {enable | disable} wlan_ id

4. To enable WPA2, use the following command: config wlan security wpa wpa2 {enable | disable} wlan_ id

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuration Flow

705

5. Choose Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) or Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for data encryption:

The default values are TKIP for WPA1 and AES for WPA2.

6. Choose a system for authenticated key management, which would be 802.1X, Pre-Shared Key (PSK), or Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM): config wlan security wpa akm {802.1X | psk | cckm} {enable | disable} wlan_id

The default value is 802.1X.

7. When using PSK, set a preshared key: config wlan security wpa akm psk set-key {ascii | hex} psk-key wlan_id

WPA preshared keys must be 8 to 63 ASCII text characters or 64 hexadecimal characters long.

8. Enable the WLAN: config wlan enable wlan_id

9. Save your settings: save config

Set up Cisco access point(s) If you are using a Cisco lightweight AP, this process takes you through the setup of the WLC to accept registration of APs. This is all part of the controller discovery process. As previously mentioned, Cisco’s lightweight access points (LWAPs) use the Lightweight Access Point Protocol (LWAPP) to communicate between the components of the wireless network infrastructure. In this environment, your access point needs to be associated or linked with a controller to properly function. The discovery process allows this association to occur. After an access point is associated with a WLC, its full potential can be reached. This process starts with the lightweight access point sending a join request to the controller. The controller acknowledges this request by sending a join response to the lightweight access point, which then gives the lightweight access point permission to become associated with the controller. After this process is complete, the controller can manage all aspects of the lightweight

www.it-ebooks.info


config wlan security wpa wpa1 ciphers {aes | tkip} {enable | disable} wlan_id config wlan security wpa wpa2 ciphers {aes | tkip} {enable | disable} wlan_id

Book V Chapter 5

706

Configuration Flow

access point, such as its configuration, firmware, control transactions, and data transactions. A lightweight access point can be discovered in the following ways: ✦ Layer 3 LWAPP discovery: This occurs when the LWAP is on a different subnet from the WLC and the AP uses the IP address rather than the Layer 2 MAC address. ✦ Layer 2 LWAPP discovery: This occurs when the LWAP and WLC are on the same subnet and the discovery data is placed in Ethernet frames that contain the MAC addresses of the two devices. Layer 2 LWAPP discovery cannot be used in Layer 3 environments. ✦ Over-the-air provisioning (OTAP): This option is only supported by Cisco 4400 and Cisco 2100 series WLCs. If the option is enabled, all associated access points send neighbor messages. This then allows new LWAP devices to receive the WLC’s IP address, where they can conduct the rest of the discovery process. After this process has been completed, the option on the controller should be disabled. ✦ Locally stored controller IP address discovery: After a discovery has been completed, the AP stores the addresses for its controllers in nonvolatile memory so that for later deployment, it has all the necessary controller information. This process is called priming the access point. ✦ DHCP server discovery: This option allows the DHCP option 43 to provide controller IP addresses to the access points. ✦ DNS discovery: Domain Name System (DNS) information for the controller can be stored in your DNS zone. The record should be called CISCOLWAPP-CONTROLLER.localdomain, where localdomain is the access point domain name. After the AP knows the IP address of the controller, it can connect to the controller to complete the registration process. From time to time, you may need to locate a specific lightweight access point on your network. The easiest way to do this is to configure the access point to flash its LEDs. This feature is supported on any controller software Release 4.0 or later and all lightweight access points. To flash an access point’s LEDs, issue the following command: debug ap enable Cisco_AP

To cause a specific access point to flash its LEDs for a specified number of seconds, issue this command: debug ap command “led flash seconds” Cisco_AP

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuration Flow

707

You can enter a value between 1 and 3600 for the seconds parameter. To disable LED flashing for a specific access point, use the following command:

Book V Chapter 5

debug ap command “led flash disable” Cisco_AP


Configuring backup controllers Due the importance of having an active controller on your network to support your wireless network, you should not rely on only having a single controller on your network. Controllers may be distributed between a central site and regional sites and still manage all APs anywhere on the network. Controllers at the central site and regional sites do not need to be in the same mobility group, and using the CLI on the controller, you can specify a primary, secondary, and tertiary controller for your lightweight access points. Starting with controller software Release 5.0, you can configure timers for the primary and secondary backup controllers so that the time taken to discover a failed primary controller is reduced. If, during that timed interval, a controller has not received any data packets from the other controller, it then sends an echo request to the controller. If there are no results from the echo, the controller considers the other controller to be failed. From the lightweight access point’s perspective, if a controller fails two consecutive discovery requests, it is considered to be failed. In all failure cases, the secondary and then the tertiary controllers are attempted to be contacted. When the primary controller comes back on line, the access points automatically fail back over to the primary controller. To configure backup controllers, follow these steps:

1. Configure a primary controller for a specific access point: config ap primary-base controller_name Cisco_AP [controller_ip_address]

2. Configure a secondary controller for a specific access point: config ap secondary-base controller_name Cisco_AP [controller_ip_address]

3. Configure a tertiary controller for a specific access point: config ap tertiary-base controller_name Cisco_AP [controller_ip_address]

4. Configure a primary backup controller for a specific controller: config advanced backup-controller primary backup_ controller_name backup_controller_ip_address

www.it-ebooks.info

708

Configuration Flow

5. Configure a secondary backup controller for a specific controller: config advanced backup-controller secondary backup_ controller_name backup_controller_ip_address

6. Configure the fast heartbeat timer for local, hybrid-REAP, or all access points: config advanced timers ap-fast-heartbeat {local | hreap | all} {enable | disable} interval

7. Configure the access point primary discovery request timer: config advanced timers ap-primary-discovery-timeout interval

8. Save your changes: save config

9. Verify the configuration changes that you made by using these commands: show ap config general Cisco_AP show advanced backup-controller show advanced timers

Web authentication process The Web authentication process is a Layer 3 security function that allows the controller to block all client IP traffic with the exception of DHCP traffic. After the client has obtained an IP address, the only action that is open to the user is to attempt to connect to a Web site. Any HTTP-related traffic is then captured. The user’s Web browser session is redirected to a default or custom login page, where the user is prompted for authentication information in the form of a username and password. Because this system includes a self-signed certification, the first time that this process takes place, the user is prompted with a security alert, which should be accepted. You have a few options for the login page: The basic controller administration page allows some simple modification of the page text and the presentation of the Cisco logo. The following options are available as login pages: ✦ The default login page ✦ A modified version of the default login page (as shown in Figure 5-1) ✦ A customized login page that you configure on an external Web server ✦ A customized login page that you download to the controller

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuration Flow



Figure 5-1: The default Web authentication page.

After the user successfully logs in, he is presented with a successful login page and then automatically redirected to the originally requested URL.

Example using the Cisco graphical user interface (GUI) For both the wireless LAN controller and autonomous APs, you also have an option of using the GUI to perform your configuration. This GUI is Web based and can be configured to operate over HTTP or HTTPS. In some cases, some devices also support the use of Cisco’s Security Device Manager (SDM) or Adaptive Security Device Manager (ASDM). The SDM can be launched from the Web management interface of Cisco’s Integrated Services Router (ISR), while the ASDM is the main management interface for Cisco’s Adaptive Security Appliance (ASA) firewalls and is also launched through the Web management interface. Figure 5-2 shows a sample of the Web interface used for managing the Cisco 2106 WLC; the interface for the 4400 series WLC would be similar. Figure 5-3 shows the management interface for the autonomous mode Cisco 1250 Series Access Point. Note that its interface appears quite different from that of the WLC, which can be seen from the list of menu items. In this case, the SSID management is found in the SSID Manager on the Security menu (located in the left hand menu), while the WLC has SSID settings on the WLAN menu.

www.it-ebooks.info

710

Configuration Flow

Figure 5-2: The administration GUI on the Cisco 2106 WLC.

Figure 5-3: The administration GUI on the Cisco 1250 Series Access Point.

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuration Flow

711

Figure 5-4: The administration GUI on the Cisco ASA 5505 firewall.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book V Chapter 5


The other interface that is quite different is that of the Cisco ASA firewalls using the ASDM, which is shown in Figure 5-4. This is shown only to illustrate the differences in Cisco’s management tools, because the company has a wide set of tools for its appliances.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Contents at a Glance Chapter 1: Network Security Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717 Network Zoning............................................................................................ 718 Recognizing Security Risks......................................................................... 722 Introducing Security Risk Mitigation Methods ........................................ 725

Chapter 2: Introducing IP Access Lists (IP ACLs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .735 The Purpose of Access Lists ...................................................................... 735 Types of ACLs .............................................................................................. 738 Managing ACLs — Best Practices .............................................................. 740 Creating ACLs............................................................................................... 742 Managing, Verifying, and Troubleshooting ACLs .................................... 755

Chapter 3: Introducing Network Address Translation (NAT). . . . . . .763 Purpose of NAT ............................................................................................ 763 Operational Flow of NAT ............................................................................ 767 Configuring NAT .......................................................................................... 770 Managing NAT .............................................................................................. 777

Chapter 4: Introducing Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) . . . . . . . . . .785 Purpose of VPNs .......................................................................................... 785 Type of VPNs ................................................................................................ 787 Choosing a VPN Implementation Method ................................................ 787 Creating and Managing IPsec VPNs........................................................... 793

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 1: Network Security Basics Exam Objectives ✓ Identifying security threats ✓ Recognizing the need to implement comprehensive security policies ✓ Understanding network zones ✓ Describing common security appliances and applications ✓ Differentiating between internal and external networks ✓ Understanding firewalls, access control lists (ACLs), Network Address

Translation (NAT), and Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) ✓ Mitigating security threats ✓ Taking steps to secure network devices

A

structured threat targeting a vulnerable organization’s computer network is likely taking place as you read this. Due to the rapid growth of the Internet, many forms of security threats have emerged. Viruses, Trojan horse attacks, malicious hackers, and even an organization’s own employees are potential security hazards to corporate networks. These threats have the potential to steal and destroy sensitive corporate data, tie up valuable resources, and inflict major damage due to network downtime. This may lead to a cost crisis and cripple the company financially. Security breaches are also encountered more frequently in home or private networks these days. We all have a reason to be concerned. A crucial component of protecting internetworks is identifying and understanding the need to implement strong security measures. By preventing security breaches generating from outside users and mitigating unauthorized access to the physical networking equipment — and the digital data it transmits — from inside users, steps are taken to ensure the safety of electronic information. Network security is a culmination of many different preventive measures all working together to protect valuable data from intruders. I examine these steps and their implementation methods in this chapter.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Network Zoning

719

that provide only internal services should be zoned separately. Other highly visible servers that offer services to the outside world carry an even higher risk of attack, and therefore are also placed in separate zones. Access can be controlled to these zones using authentication methods and defined rules implemented on firewalls, routers, or other security appliances such as the following:

✦ Internal routers: Interconnect segments of the private network and filter traffic between locally segregated subnets. Internal routers are always placed behind perimeter routers in an organization’s network topology and can further define access permissions. Internal routers may be set up to perform the functionality of a firewall device. ✦ Firewall routers: Provide a secure boundary that filters network traffic between untrusted and trusted networks. Firewall routers are zone separators and are usually placed behind perimeter routers. Firewall routers are used for filtering traffic based on access policies between subnets. These policies may state who is allowed or denied access to the demilitarized zone (DMZ), locally protected file servers, or other LAN resources. Firewall routers not only protect access from public networks into the private network, but they also can be used to deny unauthorized internal corporate access. ✦ Demilitarized zone (DMZ): Resides between the internal and external network and offers external services for outside access through one or more firewalls. The DMZ is less secure than the internal network but more secure than the external network. Higher-risk nodes such as HTTP Web servers and FTP servers are placed in the DMZ. For additional protection, each server can be placed in its own zone based on functionality. If one server is compromised, the security breach will not impact the other zoned servers. All connectivity allowed to the DMZ ends at the DMZ also. You have the following approaches to setting up a DMZ:

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VI Chapter 1

Network Security Basics

✦ Perimeter routers: The first line of defense against external attacks and reside closest to untrusted networks. Any traffic denied at the perimeter router never arrives inside the organization’s private network. This is accomplished by screening and controlling the flow of incoming traffic based on information contained inside each packet and then comparing each packet to a specified set of rules. These rules define who is allowed or denied access into the router’s interface. Or course, you may want or need certain kinds of public access into your network. Maybe access to the corporate Web or e-mail server is needed. Beware that any traffic that passes through the perimeter router is a potential security hazard. Strategically placed internal routers and firewalls, along with additional hardened security appliances, can provide added protection from traffic allowed inside the perimeter.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Recognizing Security Risks

723

A typical reconnaissance attack is known as a ping sweep and attempts to contact each node on the network, creating a detailed map of every live system (responding to the ping request). This map lists each network host and all available services, ports, operating systems, and applications currently running. Port scans are performed to identify all running programs on each host. Domain Name System (DNS) lookup queries may also be done to discover the domain owner and assigned IP addresses. This gives the attacker a detailed blueprint on how to proceed with the attack.

Access attacks

✦ Password attacks: Attempts to crack the users’ passwords to gain access to network resources: • The most common type of password attack is password guessing, which attempts to manually or automatically find at least one weak password in a network. • Hardware- and software-based utilities called keyloggers attempt to intercept typed passwords input by the user (from the keyboard) and return them to the malicious attacker. The user is unaware of the logging activity unless antispyware or other keylogging-detection methods are used. ✦ Brute-force attacks: A trial-and-error method of decoding passwords and encryption keys that will always succeed, given enough time. A brute-force utility or cracking application uses a sequential order to try every possible combination of characters until all possible key combinations are exhausted. A dictionary attack is a common form of these types of attacks and relies on the weakness of users’ passwords for success by trying every known word in the dictionary. ✦ Trojan horse attacks: Malicious code disguised as a dormant or inactive program. A digital Trojan horse is often disguised by a fake identity and resembles a harmless program. After it is executed, the malicious intent may go undetected and unknown for a long time. Preventing Trojan horse attacks is as simple as not executing or running programs from untrusted or unknown origins.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VI Chapter 1

Network Security Basics

An access attack is any attempt to gain information from the organization’s network by unauthorized personnel. These attacks exploit vulnerabilities in services and applications that rely on authentication methods for network security. Access attacks may also include authorized personnel inside the organization attempting to increase their network privileges for higher-level access to unauthorized data. Some methods of access attacks are as follows:

724

Recognizing Security Risks ✦ Trust exploitation attacks: Uses trust relationships established between two computer systems or trusting networks to implement an attack. Because communication between hosts in a network topology depends on trust, an attacker will attempt to appear to other hosts as a trusted member of the network. For example, if an unauthorized user gains access to a trusted machine, he may forge his identity and appear just as the trusted machine does on the network. All traffic originating from the attacker will seem to come from the trusted host.

Denial of service (DoS) attacks A DoS attack attempts to crash or render a system, service, network resource, or the entire network infrastructure unstable by systematically and repeatedly attacking the target with large volumes of traffic. This form of attack is designed to be highly devastating and grind the system to a halt, denying services to its users. DoS attacks use a simple form of establishing the maximum amount of available connections with a Web or network server. By stealing all open connections, no connections are made available for legitimate hosts. Denial of service attacks are usually performed by running an automated script or program that pings the target host until its resources are rendered unavailable. This is widely known as The Ping of Death. Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets overrun and flood the target while the target machine attempts to respond to these requests. IP header manipulation is another form of DoS attack that deceives the target machine into believing that packets are much larger than they really are. This causes system instability and eventually results in a system crash. Another attack method that is even more severe than a DoS attack is known as a distributed denial of service (DDoS) attack. DDoS recruits comprised systems to conduct a synchronized, hierarchical attack on the target node. These breached machines generate the traffic used to attack the target and are described as handlers and agents. The attacking client node infiltrates the master or handler machines and executes a program that controls additional recruited slave machines. These agents, or zombies, are then used as the malicious foot soldiers and march into battle.

IP spoofing IP spoofing is a tactic employed by a malicious user that tricks the target host into believing it is actually a trusted host on the network, thereby gaining unauthorized access. For this type of attack to be successful, the attacker must have collected prior reconnaissance information such as the trusted host’s IP address. The hacker then modifies the IP header information

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

726


IP access control lists (ACLs) ACLs are one of the most important and highly used features in the Cisco IOS. The main purpose of IP access control lists is to allow or deny network traffic by packet or protocol type. ACLs function in Layers 2, 3, and 4 of the OSI reference model and perform similarly to a network firewall. ACLs are used as a packet-filtering firewall when applied to a router’s interface. ACLs perform this traffic filtering based on a defined set of rules specified by the network administrator. You find many different types of ACLs, but for now, I briefly focus on IP’s two major types, standard and extended access control lists: ✦ Standard ACL: Permits or denies incoming packets that match the specifically stated source IP addresses only. Each newly defined standard IP ACL is given a number for system identification, ranging from 1 to 99 and 1300 to 1999. Routers process access control lists starting at the top of the list and working downward. Implement a standard ACL using the following code: Router(config)#access-list 1 permit 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255

In this example, a standard access list is created (defined by the number 1), allowing all traffic from the 192.168.1.0 network. The value 0.0.0.255 is called an inverse subnet mask, or wildcard mask, and determines the IP traffic allowed or denied, based on which bits of the IP address are read and which bits are ignored. The 0 bits in the inverse subnet mask specify that the bit will be read. A value of 1 in the wildcard mask is ignored and skipped. Matching the binary IP address and the inverse mask, you can determine the traffic rules. This means that any wildcard mask value of 0 tells the ACL to consider and process this portion of the address. ACLs do not care about the 1 bits, and they are not filtered. New entries to ACLs are always added to the end of the list. Another important issue to remember is that ACLs always end with an implicit deny statement. The IOS inserts this statement by default. You can see how this works by viewing the previously created access list: Router#show access-list 1 Standard IP access list 1 1 permit 192.168.1.0 1 deny any

The first permit statement allows all traffic from the 192.168.1.0 network. The second line denies, or blocks, all other traffic.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

728


To receive packets into the private network, this process is reversed. Using a stateful translation table, NAT can keep track of which traffic is originating from and destined to which private address. You find out more about Network Address Translation in Book VI, Chapter 3.

Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) Virtual Private Networks are wide-area networks constructed by connecting private networks and/or remote users using a public network, such as the Internet. Cost savings gives VPN technology a huge advantage over expensive long-distance leased circuits. Instead of using a permanently established circuit, such as a dedicated point-to-point leased line, a virtual connection is established over an existing public infrastructure. This flexibility is called tunneling, and it allows private network connectivity to exist over huge distances, which would be otherwise impossible. VPNs provide major scalability at minor costs to an organization. Security is a major concern using this type of technology. VPN security measures such as content encryption and authentication are used to protect data and ensure privacy. Content encryption takes standard, readable data and renders the information unreadable to unauthorized users. The most popular authentication methods used with VPNs are typically user password authentication and biometric input. In Book VI, Chapter 4, I examine VPNs in greater detail.

Cisco IOS Firewall The Cisco IOS Firewall is an extra feature set available and built in to many Cisco routers today. When enabled, this IOS option incorporates a fully functional, connection-aware firewall operating at the upper OSI layers. Standard ACLs provide a good measure of security and operate at the lower OSI layers. The Cisco IOS Firewall adds extra security features at the application layer by using stateful inspection techniques to track TCP and UDP connections. Unlike stateless packet inspection, which operates at the network layer (and only looks at the IP packet header), the stateful functionality of the Cisco IOS allows TCP connections to remain open and tracked. The IOS monitors outgoing traffic and opens inbound ports for the return traffic automatically. This is a major difference from stateless or static packet filtering, which provides less security than stateful inspection. Stateless IP filtering allows direct external host–to–internal host connections, and is vulnerable to IP spoofing attacks. Static filtering can also be more difficult to maintain and offers no method of authentication. As you have

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

734

Book VI: Network Security

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 2: Introducing IP Access Lists (IP ACLs) Exam Objectives ✓ Describing the purpose and different types of access lists ✓ Understanding traffic filtering using security appliances ✓ Investigating the Cisco SDM ✓ ACL inbound and outbound configurations ✓ Managing ACLs ✓ Monitoring and verifying ACLs in a network environment ✓ Troubleshooting ACL issues

M

anaging and troubleshooting enterprise networks can be a real challenge. Besides delivering data, a router is one tool that can provide additional benefits to network administrators, such as isolating broadcast messages and subnet traffic. You can break a single organization’s network into logical segments, which helps in isolating problems and confining misbehaving hosts. Integration of security mitigation methods into this topology planning and design should be a major concern for every organization. Routers should not only transfer and segment data traffic but also provide some reliable measure of protection against all forms of attack. The router is the first line of defense against network intruders, and properly configured, it can provide a strong method of security mitigation. A router needs a way to identify traffic that is wanted — or allowed to pass through the router’s interface — and which data is undesirable, or rejected by the router. Network administrators can achieve basic traffic management control and high network availability by defining a list of networks that are allowed or denied access to the organization’s private network.

The Purpose of Access Lists Access control lists (ACLs), also called access lists, take data management a step further by filtering inbound and/or outbound packets based on a specified set of rules put in place by the network administrator. Although not as sophisticated as a dedicated security appliance, ACLs provide

www.it-ebooks.info

736

The Purpose of Access Lists

powerful protection when properly configured and applied to a router’s interface. ACLs can prevent traffic from entering and leaving the networks, limit the amount of traffic on the network, and prevent IP spoofing or denial of service (DoS) attacks. By not using an ACL on a router, a malicious attack is inevitable, allowing all types of traffic to reach any part of the network infrastructure. ✦ ACLs should always be implemented on border (perimeter) routers to provide a minimum measure of protection from outside threat. Every enabled protocol on each interface of the router should have its own inbound and outbound access list. ✦ Another good location for ACLs is on firewall routers located between internal and external networks. This funnels control of traffic even further and provides an additional layer of security inside the network. The major ACL duties and benefits are as follows: ✦ Filtering IP packets: Blocking or allowing network traffic with inbound or outbound destinations is possible by filtering methods based on source IP address, destination IP address, type of traffic, protocol, or interface used. For security reasons, an administrator may wish to permit only one specified remote terminal access to an inbound VTY session (Telnet) and disallow all other Telnet traffic entering or leaving the network. ✦ Reducing routing table updates: Routers send and receive periodic routing table updates. This can saturate and cause performance issues if allowed to enter into your private networks. You can specify how to limit or deny these updates from propagating uncontrollably. ACLs can be used to control which networks are to be advertised by dynamic routing protocols. The ACL is applied to a protocol instead of an interface and is called a distribute list. A distribute list is then applied to a routing protocol to control the content of the traffic. ✦ Prioritizing traffic: ACLs are a series of IF/THEN statements evaluated sequentially: • Routing traffic can be prioritized, allowing certain types of specified data to be processed by the router before other traffic is analyzed. This is called priority queuing and ensures that high-priority packets are given attention first. • A network administrator may also want to prioritize traffic based on the type, protocol, or purpose of the data. Custom queuing allows balancing of traffic in this way.

www.it-ebooks.info

The Purpose of Access Lists

737

✦ Controlling traffic: Applying an ACL on a slow link allows a network administrator more control over traffic on that link. This improves performance and decreases excess traffic. An ACL may also specify which addresses are serviced by Network Address Translation (NAT) or which type of data triggers a Dial on Demand (DDR) session to a remote network. This ensures that only certain types of traffic initiate a WAN link connection. ACLs identify interesting traffic for DDR sessions.

✦ Authentication: Incoming remote shell (RSH) and remote copy (RCP) protocols may be allowed into the router using a configured database for authentication. This database is set up by the network administrator and is used by ACLs to control router access. Each ACL is defined by a name or number, and is processed in an orderly, top-down, first-come, first-served fashion. For ACL processing to occur, each ACL must be applied to either an inbound or outbound interface. After it is applied, an ACL is processed in the following way:

1. The Cisco IOS receives an inbound or outbound IP packet on one of its configured interfaces and examines the packet header information.

2. The packet is compared to each condition in the ACL, one condition at a time, starting at the top and working downward. If a packet does not match the first ACL statement, examination begins again at the next sequential statement in the list. This continues until a match is found or the list ends.

3. If both packet information and ACL statement match, the packet is either permitted or denied based on the matching statement, and processing halts. The ACL is not aware of multiple matches for the same packet. It only examines conditions until the first match is found and goes no further. If a match is found before the list ends and the traffic is permitted, the packet is allowed to pass through the router’s interface.

4. If an ACL specifically denies a packet, the IOS drops the packet and issues an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Host Unreachable message, and processing stops. If a list ends and no match is found, the implicit deny statement always rejects the packet. By default, an implicit deny all entry is created automatically by the IOS at the end of an access list. To make an access list useful, there must be at least one permit statement; otherwise the deny all entry will prohibit all traffic.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VI Chapter 2

Introducing IP Access Lists (IP ACLs)

✦ Mitigating security risks: You can block denial of service and IP spoofing attacks. ACLs can be used to prevent connection flooding by controlling the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Intercept feature. When enabled, TCP Intercept analyzes SYN packets between two host interfaces, determined by an extended ACL. The software then establishes a transparent connection between client and server machine, and it forwards packets between the two until the connection ends, removing the possibility of establishing unauthorized connections.

www.it-ebooks.info

Types of ACLs

739

• Port: Filters traffic based on TCP or UDP port name or number. Filtering traffic by port number allows simple configuration for blocking common HTTP, FTP, or Telnet access. • TTL: Specifies permitted or denied traffic based on the hop count of the source in relation to the ACL-configured interface. ✦ Named ACLs: These access lists are functionally similar to extended ACLs but are identified by a name rather than a number. Named ACLs are supported in Cisco IOS version 11.2 or later and use slightly different command syntax than numbered access lists. Using a specified, practical name assigned by the network administrator, named ACLs become easier to remember and identify. Some benefits of named ACLs over numbered ACLs are as follows:

• IP options: Filter data based on specific IP options, which may help prevent bogus packets from flooding the network. • Reflexive access lists: Dynamically created ACL entries that are temporarily stored in extended ACLs. These work similarly to the established ACL operator, which allows packets back into the network from already-established connections. The established command does not work with applications that change the source port dynamically or with UDP/ICMP traffic. Reflexive ACLs support both ICMP and UDP packets, and work with programs that automatically change ports. • Noncontiguous ports: Allow support for noncontiguous port assignment using one access control entry (ACE). This reduces the size of the ACL and eliminates the need for multiple entries of the same source, destination, or protocol. • Delete ACL entries: With named ACLs, specific entries may be removed using the no permit or no deny commands without having to delete and re-create the entire ACL. This is not possible with numbered ACLs using older IOS versions. Cisco IOS versions 12.2(14) S and later allow addition, deletion, and modification of individual statements in named or numbered ACLs using sequence numbers. For the exam, remember that individual ACE entries may be manipulated on named lists but not on numbered lists. ✦ Inbound ACLs: Apply to data traffic entering a router’s interface. An inbound ACL is implemented to allow or deny external (public) network traffic into the private (internal) network.

www.it-ebooks.info


• TCP flags: Read and filter traffic based on flags set in TCP header information. TCP flags may be used to eliminate false synchronization packets from entering the configured interface. TCP flags are used in named ACLs.

Book VI Chapter 2

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

742

Creating ACLs

6. Reapply the ACL to the interface by using the ip access-group command in interface configuration mode. ✦ Delete ACL entries. Entries belonging to numbered access lists cannot be individually deleted in IOS versions prior to 12.2(14)S. The entire numbered access list must be deleted and re-created from scratch. Deleting single entries on named ACLs is possible using the no permit and no deny commands. In IOS versions supporting ACL sequence numbers, all types of access lists may be edited. ✦ Use the remark command. Using this command, nonexecuted remarks can be added before or after any command in an ACL. ✦ Deny all inbound IP packets from the Internet that contain reserved private IP addresses. Private IP addresses are not routable and should not be allowed as inbound network traffic. Some examples of IPs that should be blocked using ACLs are 0.0.0.0/8, 10.0.0.0/8, 169.254.0.0/16, 172.16.0.0/20, and 192.168.0.0/16. Packets attempting to enter the network using 127.0.0.0/8 (loopback) should also be denied access. ✦ Deny all inbound IP packets from the Internet that contain IP multicast addresses. Block unnecessary multicast traffic from entering and possibly flooding the network. Also block unwanted broadcast traffic from crossing perimeter border routers. ✦ Deny all inbound IP packets from the Internet that contain source addresses of internal networks or hosts. An intruder may initiate an IP spoofing or TCP sequence number guessing attack using the same private IP addresses (in packet headers) that are in use on the trusted private network. This protection should be applied to interfaces facing untrusted networks.

Creating ACLs Creating ACLs is not difficult if you understand the many ACL rules and know how to apply them. When creating access lists, be sure to keep in mind the tips from the previous section. The other important concept to understand is that of inverse subnet masks, or wildcard IP masks.

Wildcard IP masks The ACL filtering process relies on wildcard IP masks to identify which IP address bits of the filtered packet should be read or ignored by the IOS. This process compares the address bits of the filtered packet to the address bits specified in the ACL. Wildcard masks use 0 and 1 bits to determine which bits of the IP address are to be processed or ignored, as follows: ✦ 0 bits are read and specify to the IOS that the corresponding IP address bits must match. The filtering process is activated for 0 bits.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Creating ACLs

747

To view the newly created access list, execute the following command: Router#show ip access-list 1 Standard IP access list 1 permit 172.210.1.5 deny 194.168.10.3 permit 194.168.10.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255

Creating extended ACLs To properly configure extended ACLs, you must first understand the terminology used. Refer to the Extended ACL command syntax box for clarification of the parameters used in the next example. Following is a sample of how an extended ACL may be designed to protect and block certain kinds of traffic on a perimeter, or border, router. The following is an example for blocking some reserved and private IP addresses:

and special-use IPs: Router>en Router#conf t Router(config)#access-list and private addresses Router(config)#access-list 0.255.255.255 any log Router(config)#access-list 0.255.255.255 any log Router(config)#access-list 7.255.255.255 any log Router(config)#access-list log Router(config)#access-list 0.255.255.255 any Router(config)#access-list 0.15.255.255 any Router(config)#access-list 0.0.255.255 any Router(config)#access-list address] any

100 remark Block special use 100 deny ip 127.0.0.0 100 deny ip 255.0.0.0 100 deny ip 224.0.0.0 100 deny ip host 0.0.0.0 any 100 deny ip 10.0.0.0 100 deny ip 172.16.0.0 100 deny ip 192.168.0.0 100 deny ip [your network IP

2. Permit established traffic: Router(config)#access-list 100 remark Permit established traffic Router(config)#access-list 100 permit ip any [your network IP address][your network mask] est Router(config)#access-list 100 remark Permit FTP data connection Router(config)#access-list 100 permit tcp any eq 20 host [host IP address] gt 1023

www.it-ebooks.info


1. Enter privileged EXEC/global configuration mode and block private

Book VI Chapter 2

www.it-ebooks.info

Creating ACLs

749

ACL commands show access-lists: Displays all access lists configured on the router. Does not specify which interface the ACL is assigned to.

show running-config: Displays the access lists and indicates which interfaces are assigned ACLs.

show access-list [list #]: Shows only the parameters for the specified access list.

clear access-list counter [list#]: Clears extended access lists counters of the number of matches per line in an ACL.

show ip access-list: Displays all IP access lists configured on the router. show ip interface: Shows which interfaces have IP access lists applied.

ip access-group: Applies an IP access list to an interface.

This type of ACL blocks access and enforces security on the router itself. Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH) access lists are used to specify who is allowed to establish these types of connections and from where. In this case, a standard ACL is created and applied to the virtual type terminal (VTY) lines:

1. Enter privileged EXEC/global configuration mode and specify the IP address to permit for Telnet and SSH access: Router>en Router#conf t Router(config)#access-list 5 remark Permit Telnet/SSH session for hosts 192.168.10.100, 192.168.10.101, and 192.168.10.102 Router(config)#access-list 5 permit 192.168.10.100 Router(config)#access-list 5 permit 192.168.10.101 0.0.0.0 Router(config)#access-list 5 permit host 192.168.10.102

2. Deny all other access and log any access attempts: Router(config)#deny any log

3. Specify the line and access class: Router(config)#line vty 0 4 Router(config-line)#access-class 5 in

www.it-ebooks.info


Creating Telnet/SSH ACLs

Book VI Chapter 2

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

756

Managing, Verifying, and Troubleshooting ACLs ✦ show ip access-list: Displays IP ACLs only. ✦ show running-config access-list: Displays the running configuration access list. This is beneficial for verifying and changing ACLs before saving them to the startup config file using the copy running-config startup-config command. ✦ show access-list ACL_name detail: Provides details of the specified ACL to include all ACE entries, hit count, and MD5 hashes, which help with troubleshooting issues. ✦ show ip interface: Displays the direction and particular interface the ACL is assigned to. ✦ show resource usage: Verifies that sufficient resources are allocated for the configured ACLs.

Logging ACL IP matches The log keyword after a permit or deny statement provides message-logging capability and informs the administrator about packets that match the access list rules. This causes an informational logging message about the packet to be sent to the console. The number of messages logged to the console is specified by the logging console global configuration command. The first packet triggers an instantaneous logging message. Each additional logging message is gathered in a logging buffer over a 5-minute interval and then displayed collectively to the console. Each logging message includes the ACL number, source IP address, whether the packet was allowed or denied, and the total number of packets received in the 5-minute interval. The show logging EXEC command displays statistics and the level of logging configured. Specifying a certain level allows messages at that level and all lower levels to be sent to the console. Each level is listed here from most significant to least significant: ✦ Level 0: Emergencies: System unusable ✦ Level 1: Alerts: Immediate action needed ✦ Level 2: Critical: Critical conditions ✦ Level 3: Errors: Error conditions ✦ Level 4: Warnings: Warning conditions ✦ Level 5: Notifications: Normal but significant conditions ✦ Level 6: Informational: Informational messages only ✦ Level 7: Debugging: Debugging messages

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

758

Managing, Verifying, and Troubleshooting ACLs

10. Name the security policy, then click the Next button. The Firewall Configuration Summary box appears.

11. Review the summary box to ensure that all inbound and outbound configuration parameters are correct. Click the Finish button. The configuration is processed and delivered to the router. The SDM returns to the Edit Firewall Policy/ACL tab.

Access control lists — Rules to guide you! ✓ Use one ACL per direction, per protocol, per

interface. ✓ There is an unwritten, implicit deny state-

ment at the end of every ACL. ✓ Every ACL must have at least one permit

statement. If not, the implicit deny will reject all traffic. ✓ ACLs filter incoming and outgoing traffic.

ACLs cannot filter traffic originating at the router itself. ✓ Standard ACLs and extended ACLs must

have unique, nonmatching names. ✓ An empty ACL applied to an interface

permits all traffic. ✓ If an ACL is specified by name but it does

not exist, all traffic is allowed. ✓ The sequence order in the ACL is critical

for successful filtering. The same allow or deny statements in a different order can cause completely different results. This means that when a match is found, ACLs cease to process that specified traffic, and it is either allowed or denied based on the first condition.

✓ Inbound ACLs filter packets arriving on an

inbound interface first and then forward them to an outbound interface. This happens only if the packet filtering conditions are met, which saves CPU and memory resources on the router, by only forwarding permitted traffic to the outbound interface. ✓ Outbound ACLs filter packets prior to

sending them out a router’s interface. This means that incoming packets destined for outside networks are routed to the outbound interface of the router, where packets are then inspected by the outbound ACL. ✓ Don’t rely on ACLs to provide a complete

security mitigation method. Packet filtering is only one method of reducing the threat of network attack. A comprehensive antivirus plan is required to detect and eradicate viruses. Also, ACLs should not be confused with intrusion prevention systems, which are active devices that intercept incoming traffic and shut down any real-time detected threats.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 3: Introducing Network Address Translation (NAT) Exam Objectives ✓ Identifying the purpose of Network Address Translation ✓ Describing the different types of NAT ✓ Explaining the basic operation of NAT ✓ Configuring NAT ✓ Describing NAT management ✓ Troubleshooting NAT issues

T

he short supply and high demand of IPv4 address space have led to the development of IPv6, which now provides more address space than we will ever need. Implementing IPv6 is not without hurdles of its own. Migrating to IPv6 has proven to be a slow, time-consuming process. It can take years to finally realize a new Internet infrastructure based solely on IPv6. Until then, certain tools can minimize the limitations brought on by the IPv4 address space. One of these tools, developed by Cisco, is Network Address Translation (NAT), sometimes referred to as the Network Address Translator. Think of NAT as a “middleman” that resides on a device (typically a router, firewall, or computer) between internal and external internetworks, translating private, nonroutable IP addresses into publicly registered IP addresses allocated by the IANA. This creates a binding between a public and private IP address. Only one routable IP address is required to provide an entire NAT-enabled network with access to publicly held resources.

Purpose of NAT There is more to Network Address Translation than just the benefits of saving IPv4 address space. Security and administration features are also benefits of NAT. The three main purposes of NAT are as follows: ✦ Minimize IPv4 address shortage: Network address translation is implemented on a private network when a network administrator does not have enough publicly registered IP addresses available for each host on the internal network. This shortage of publicly registered IP addresses could prevent some hosts from accessing outside resources such as the Internet. Dynamic NAT and port address translation allow all configured

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

768

Operational Flow of NAT

to local network (nonroutable) hosts by maintaining a static map of nonroutable-to-registered IP addresses. Communications can be initiated from either the inside or outside network. Here’s how basic Network Address Translation works:

1. The internal private network, also known as the stub domain, consists of a series of computer hosts using either non-routable private IP addresses (inside local addresses) or globally routable IP addresses (inside global addresses). Only hosts with non-routable private IP addresses (inside local addresses) need to have their IP address translated if they need to communicate outside the stub domain. Hosts with inside global addresses do not require NAT when they need to communicate outside the stub domain because their IP address is globally routable.

2. Packets from inside interfaces on the stub domain destined for outside public hosts are delivered to the default gateway.

3. The NAT router maintains a translation table that keeps track of each inside local address and their corresponding inside global address. When the NAT router receives an outbound packet from the stub domain, it tries to match its destination address to a destination in its routing table. If a match is found the packet is dropped. If a match is found, NAT examines the address translation table looking for a matching inside local address and its corresponding inside global address.

4. Inside local to inside global address translation occurs. Any static NAT packets not having an address translation entry is forwarded along without any translation services being rendered. The packet is forwarded to the destination network using an inside global source address.

5. The packet is received by the NAT-enabled gateway on the outside network and is checked against the routing and address translation tables to find the destination address.

6. The destination computer receives the data and returns a packet for the originating stub host. The source address of the packet is an outside global address with a destination address of the inside global address.

7. The router using NAT services on the inside network receives the packet and consults the address translation table for a match on the inside global address. The inside global address is matched to the stub computer’s inside local address, and the packet is delivered. The routing table is checked before it sends it to the destination computer. If an entry is not found in the address translation table, no translation is processed. The routing table is then checked for the destination address. If no route is found in the routing table for the destination address, the packet is discarded.

www.it-ebooks.info

Operational Flow of NAT

769

Dynamic NAT operation Here is how dynamic NAT operates in a stub domain using inside local addresses connected to a NAT-enabled router:

1. The local router is configured with a pool of publicly registered IP addresses provided by the IANA or other issuing authority.

2. A stub domain computer requests contact with an outside host. 3. The local router receives a packet from the stub domain host. 4. The local router consults its routing table and verifies that the host is

5. The packet is then sent to the external network using the publicly registered IP address as the source address. The destination host is not aware of the originating inside local address.

6. The destination host transmits a reply packet to the router on the source network. The packet is inspected, and the destination IP address is read. The address translation table is consulted to find the previously saved inside local address of the originating stub domain host. If no match is found in the lookup table, the packet is discarded. If the lookup results in a match, the destination address is then changed from the inside global address back to the inside local address and the packet is delivered.

7. This process continues until communications between the two systems terminate. After communication is finalized, the inside global address is returned to the IP address pool for reissue.

How overloading (PAT) operates PAT implements two important changes not found with dynamic NAT: ✦ The address pool allocation employed with dynamic NAT is not used. Instead, the pool of IP addresses is replaced with a single routable IP address. All inside local addresses share one inside global address for external data communications. ✦ Multiplexing is implemented to allow each local host separate communications using a unique TCP or UDP port address.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VI Chapter 3

Introducing Network Address Translation (NAT)

allowed access to translation services. The inside local IP address is saved to the address translation table and then replaced (in the packet header) with the first available publicly registered IP address (from the address pool). This routable IP address (inside global address) is then mapped to the nonroutable IP address of the host in the NAT translation table.

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuring NAT

771

✦ Define inside and outside interfaces: Decide which interfaces need to be configured for NAT. Find out on which interfaces the stub hosts are located, and whether multiple interfaces require configuration. Generally, inside interfaces are considered internal networks, and outside interfaces are thought of as external networks. NAT uses the ip nat inside and the ip nat outside commands to configure the router’s interfaces.

✦ Choose the method: Review the purpose of NAT deployment. Select one address translation method, or a combination approach of static, dynamic, and/or NAT overloading. ✦ Implement NAT: Proper configuration and verification procedures must be followed to ensure correct operation of NAT. The procedures to implement and manage NAT are discussed in the following sections.

Configuring static NAT Determining inside and outside interfaces is the most important part of any NAT deployment. The configuration differs depending on the type of deployment selected. For static NAT, entries are created manually by the administrator in the address translation table. Here is an example of adding static NAT entries in the IOS:

1. Configure the inside interface: Router(config)#int fastethernet0/0 Router(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 Router(config-if)#ip nat inside

Assign an internal private IP address to an interface, and designate it as the NAT inside interface. This interface will be used by hosts on the stub domain to access external resources made possible by the outside interface.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VI Chapter 3


✦ Define the purpose: Figure out which stub hosts require access to which external resources. Decide which traffic will be allowed access to which resources back inside the private network. Maybe TCP traffic redirection to an alternate port or IP address is required. For example, a Web server may have been reconfigured with a new IP address. NAT can be deployed to allow nonupdated clients continued access using the old IP address until they are reconfigured by the system administrator. This can allow uninterrupted network services to continue during network redesign phases.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuring NAT

775

Executing this command, all hosts specified in ACL 1 now have access to the publicly registered pool of IP addresses and are enabled for address translation services.

6. Add a static route: Router(config)#ip route 0.0.0.0. 0.0.0.0 serial0

Using the ip route command, a static route is established to send any traffic not destined for the local network to the serial interface. Using another example, I now want to limit the number of hosts allowed access to the Internet. I have chosen to allow a limited number of hosts from each stub domain access to the dynamic address pool. Here’s how I configure this access:

Router(config)#int fastethernet0/0 Router(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 Router(config-if)#ip nat inside Router(config)#int fastethernet1/0 Router(config-if)#ip address 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0 Router(config-if)#ip nat inside Router(config)#int serial0/0 Router(config-if)#ip address 204.218.10.1 255.255.255.0 Router(config-if)#ip nat outside

2. Configure the NAT address pool for a specified range: Router(config)#ip nat pool DYN_POOL 204.218.10.101 204.218.10.135 prefixlength /24

Again, the ip nat pool command defines the pool name (DYN_ POOL), but in this example, the IP address pool range (204.218.10.101– 204.218.10.130) has been reduced. I only have 30 available IP addresses to issue to requesting hosts. I can now choose which hosts to grant NAT services to by configuring the ACL.

3. Create the ACL: Router(config)#ip access-list 1 permit 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.15 Router(config)#ip access-list 1 permit 192.168.2.0 0.0.0.15

This standard ACL permits NAT services to the first 15 hosts on each of the private 192.168.1.0 and 192.168.2.0 networks. All other hosts on the two private networks are denied NAT services.

4. Assign the ACL to the NAT address pool and add the static route: Router(config)#ip nat inside source list 1 pool DYN_POOL Router(config)#ip route 0.0.0.0. 0.0.0.0 serial0

www.it-ebooks.info


1. Configure the inside and outside interfaces:

Book VI Chapter 3

776

Configuring NAT

Configuring Port Address Translation (PAT) Another popular method of NAT configuration is Port Address Translation. This method is usually implemented when only one routable IP address is available for use. PAT allows all inside local hosts to use one inside global address and separate ports. With overloading, each address can theoretically support up to 65,536 ports. Here’s how to configure NAT overloading on a Cisco router:

1. Configure the inside interface: Router(config)#int fastethernet0/0 Router(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 Router(config-if)#ip nat inside

An internal private IP address is assigned to the Fast Ethernet interface and designated as the NAT inside interface.

2. Configure the outside interface: Router(config)#int serial0/0 Router(config-if)#ip address 204.218.10.1 255.255.255.0 Router(config-if)#ip nat outside

The inside global IP address is assigned to the serial interface and designated as the NAT outside interface.

3. Configure the NAT address pool: Router(config)#ip nat pool PATOVLD 204.218.10.254 204.218.10.254 netmask 255.255.255.0

The pool name (PATOVLD) and single IP address pool range (204.218.10.254) is specified. This means that all private network hosts will use the same IP address to communicate with any external networks. Each host is provided multiplexing capabilities and uses different ports to separate network traffic. This is achieved by appending different port numbers to the end of the IP address, creating a unique connection.

4. Create the ACL: Router(config)#ip access-list 1 permit 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255

This standard ACL permits NAT services to all hosts on the private 192.168.1.0 network.

5. Assign the ACL to the NAT address pool: Router(config)#ip nat inside source list 1 pool PATOVLD overload

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

778

Managing NAT

2. Review the translation table. Make sure address translation is working by consulting the NAT address translation table for translation entries. This verification process of actual table entries tells the administrator that translation is occurring.

3. Use CLI commands. Use the show and debug commands to verify that NAT is executing translations. Some of these popular commands are: • debug ip nat: Used to troubleshoot NAT and to verify NAT is operating correctly. The display output of this command contains IP packet translation information. • show ip nat statistics: Displays statistics and a general overview associated with NAT translation. Information provided by the show ip nat statistics command includes ACL packet matches, ACL packet mismatches, and inside and outside interface information. • show ip nat translations: Allows the administrator to view the contents of the address translation table. The type of protocol in use, along with inside local, inside global, outside local, and outside global addresses are given for all. • show ip route: Gives a listing of the IP routing table. • clear ip nat translation: Erases dynamic NAT translations from the translation table. Keep in mind that static entries must be removed manually.

4. Follow the packet. Analyze the path that the packet takes and verify the functionality of established routes to ensure proper traffic flow.

Using the CLI commands Earlier in the chapter, you configured static NAT, dynamic NAT, and Port Address Translation. Now I take a look at the commands used to verify and troubleshoot the NAT implementation. First, use the show ip nat translations command to verify whether NAT is functioning properly: Router#show ip nat translations Pro Inside global Inside local --204.218.10.1 192.168.1.1

Outside local ---

Outside global ---

The results of the show command indicate that a one-to-one mapping exists. Now you see how this same command displays the results for Port Address Translation (PAT): Router#show ip nat translations Pro Inside global Inside local tcp 204.218.10.1:5000 192.168.1.14:5000 tcp 204.218.10.1:2320 192.168.1.15:2320

www.it-ebooks.info

Outside local 200.200.200.5:25 200.200.200.5:25

Outside global 200.200.200.5:25 200.200.200.5:25

www.it-ebooks.info

780

Managing NAT

Next, verify that the router has the properly assigned routes to reach all outside interfaces: Router#show ip route Codes: C - connected, S - static, I - IGRP, R - RIP, M - mobile, B - BGP D - EIGRP, EX - EIGRP external, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, E - EGP i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, ia - IS-IS inter area * - candidate default, U - per-user static route, o - ODR P - periodic downloaded static route Gateway of last resort is not set

C C C C

204.218.10.0/24 is subnetted, 4 subnets 204.218.11.0 is directly connected, Serial0.4 204.218.9.0 is directly connected, Serial0.5 204.218.10.0is directly connected, Serial0.6 204.218.17.0 is directly connected, Ethernet0

Another useful command is the debug ip nat or debug ip nat detailed option. The debug command should be run as a last resort and uses a large amount of router resources. This can prove disastrous to network performance in a production environment, so use it only when absolutely necessary.

Configuring NAT with the Cisco SDM GUI The Cisco Router and Security Device Manager (SDM) GUI provides an easy-to-use method of configuring various key router components such as Network Address Translation. Using the SDM NAT Configuration Wizard, you can: ✦ View and manage NAT rules and address pools ✦ Designate interfaces as inside or outside ✦ Set translation timeouts

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 4: Introducing Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) Exam Objectives ✓ Understanding Virtual Private Networks ✓ Identifying VPN types ✓ Understanding VPN implementation methods ✓ Creating Virtual Private Networks using Cisco SDM ✓ Examining SDM quality of service features ✓ Reviewing VPN Management

M

obile users and telecommuters today make up an increasingly larger part of the corporate workforce. To provide corporate intranet resources to mobile employees, organizations are requiring more flexible, elaborate, and wider connectivity options. At the same time, companies attempt to remain cost conscious, eliminating any unnecessary and wasteful forms of communications. This balancing act between flexibility and cost has turned corporate attention away from expensive leased lines and Frame Relay circuits to more cost-effective and dynamic alternatives. Rather than implementing dedicated lines that prove to be a huge financial burden, Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) provide companies with a secure connectivity solution between corporate sites. A VPN is a private network established using a public network infrastructure, such as the Internet. Remote users may access corporate LAN resources by connecting directly to local ISPs, thereby reducing long-distance telephone charges. By dismissing cost-intensive and highly inflexible communications methods for cheaper, more robust, and manageable solutions, the need for VPNs soon becomes very clear.

Purpose of VPNs The main purpose of Virtual Private Networks is to provide a cost-effective, secure, and highly scalable means of connecting remote sites, while maintaining an acceptable level of performance. VPNs use the existing Internet infrastructure to establish links between corporate sites, placing the burden of data delivery on local and remote ISPs. Because the Internet is

www.it-ebooks.info

786

Purpose of VPNs

an open, public resource, sensitive corporate data must be protected. VPNs provide methods to ensure that data is protected from eavesdropping, manipulation, and outright theft. VPNs prove to be more dynamic and flexible than dedicated leased lines by not requiring permanent links between corporate network endpoints. Establishing this virtual connection between two endpoints is known as tunneling. This dynamic, or virtual, tunneling method allows VPN connections to be established as they are needed, and then terminated after data transmission is complete, thus saving corporate bandwidth. While implementing VPN security does provide valuable safeguards against attack, it does not necessarily mitigate all network risks. The effectiveness of the security relies on the strength of the implementation. By attacking a misconfigured VPN gateway or flaws in encryption algorithms and software, malicious users may intercept and decode encrypted keys or data traffic, or forge the identity of a legitimate user. VPNs offer a wide variety of configuration options and must be designed and implemented with a meticulous eye for security. The most critical requirement when implementing corporate site-to-site connectivity using public infrastructures is security mitigation. Methods must be enforced to derail malicious users from accessing confidential data. To be effective, VPNs must provide secure lines of communications by implementing the following security measures: ✦ Access control: Denying unauthorized user access to the corporate network. Connections may be controlled and verified by maintaining a user accounts database on a VPN server. This method is susceptible to keylogging, password cracking, and other attacks and should not be relied on as a sole source of security. ✦ Data origin authentication: Method of verifying sender identity to prevent spoofing or other attacks. Data origin authentication uses IP Security (IPsec), certificates, or the exchange of pre-shared keys. ✦ Data confidentiality: Because VPNs transfer private data over public networks, enforcing data encryption and encapsulation techniques is essential for data confidentiality. Encryption allows encoding and decoding of data transmissions by the sending and receiving machines only, which ensures that sensitive corporate data is not copied or read by unauthorized users. Data tunneling may be used to hide the originator of the source packet. Popular encryption protocols include IPsec, PPTP, and L2TP. ✦ Data integrity: Ensuring that source data reaches the proper destination unaltered while in transit over public infrastructures. IPsec provides security mechanisms to ensure that data packets are not tampered with or changed. If any changes to the data or packet are detected, the packet is discarded.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

790

Choosing a VPN Implementation Method

IPsec VPN best practices ✓ Establish an IPsec deployment plan. Create

and test each policy thoroughly before deploying in a production environment.

provide VPN security mitigation. 56-bit standard DES is vulnerable to attack and is generally not recommended.

✓ Encryption must be enabled to provide con-

✓ Do not allow unsecured communications

fidentiality protection for traffic traversing VPNs.

from public, remote-site VPNs. Make sure that security policies are tightened as much as possible.

✓ For stronger authentication, use certifi-

cates instead of pre-shared keys. ✓ VPNs should always provide data integrity

protection by implementing a data integrity algorithm such as HMAC-SHA-1 or HMAC-MD5. ✓ A VPN must use an encryption algorithm

such as 128-bit AES or 168-bit 3DES to

✓ A VPN should feature replay protection,

which allows each transaction (or packet) to be processed only once, regardless of the number of times it is received. ✓ The maximum value for IKE lifetime security

associations (SAs) settings should be 24 hours. Maximum IPsec SA values should be 8 hours.

✦ Complexity: The vast configuration options of IPsec make it very flexible, but also overly complex. Configuration errors can expose the corporate network to unnecessary security risks and introduce weaknesses in the VPN. ✦ Firewall restrictions: Connecting to an organization’s own network from an off-site location may not be possible due to corporate firewall restrictions (blocking IPsec-specific UDP ports). ✦ Management: IPsec employs digital signature authentication, which relies on a public key infrastructure (PKI). PKI requires considerable implementation planning and administrative management. The majority of IPsec VPN solutions have third-party hardware and software installation requirements. IPsec client software is required on each computer that needs access to an IPsec-enabled VPN. This is both an advantage (increased security) and a disadvantage (financial cost and extra VPN management).

Using Secure Socket Layer (SSL) SSL operates at Layer 4 (transport) of the OSI model to authenticate and encrypt Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) traffic. By allowing secure VPN communications from any Web-based browser between the internal corporate network and the remote user, SSL eliminates the IPsec installation requirement of third-party VPN client software. Some advantages and disadvantages compared to IPsec are listed here.

www.it-ebooks.info


791

SSL advantages are as follows: ✦ Interoperability: Part of TCP/IP de facto standard. SSL is supported by a variety of device and software manufacturers and allows operability between different vendors and applications. ✦ Management: SSL makes deployment, management, and administration tasks extremely simple and effective. No additional client software installation is required, which saves corporate dollars. Certificate management may also be reduced by installing certificates only on required servers. ✦ Cost: The clientless architecture of SSL allows a cheaper deployment alternative than IPsec-based VPNs. No special client software licenses or other expensive hardware is needed.

✦ Firewall and NAT operation: SSL uses TCP port 443 (HTTPS), which is open on most networks, allowing SSL VPNs to operate without extra administrative overhead. ✦ Security: By only allowing access to certain applications, security mitigation is increased, and the threat of attack is minimized. ✦ Application layer functionality: Unlike IPsec, which operates at the OSI network layer, SSL eliminates IP-based address management problems by operating at the transport layer and provides services to the upper layers. SSL disadvantages are as follows: ✦ Web-based: Works best with HTTP, although in theory, SSL can support any application layer protocol because SSL operates at the transport layer below. ✦ Security: SSL user authentication is optional, which can introduce major network security breaches. Also, standard SSL encryption is 56-bit DES. IPsec uses DES, 3DES, or AES encryption. SSL provides access to the VPN gateway from any Web-enabled host, which introduces additional intruder vulnerabilities. ✦ Performance: Under extremely high loads, SSL VPNs may overtax the corporate VPN gateway. High CPU overhead may result from public key operations. ✦ Additional software downloads: Access to non-Web-enabled applications may require Java and Active X software downloads to function properly. This can cause a problem if a firewall is set to block access to these types of applications.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Virtual Private Networks (VPNs)

✦ Granular structure: Provides finely detailed client access policies based on user identity and profile. This allows an administrator to be very specific when defining the corporate VPN. SSL allows narrowing down authenticated user access to specific data, applications, and servers.

Book VI Chapter 4

792


Using tunneling Tunneling protocols provide secure paths between insecure networks and are used to transport multiple, dissimilar network protocols using the same transport mechanism. Tunneling enables VPN endpoints to transmit encrypted traffic between one another by encapsulating packets at peer layers or below. Tunneling is based on three primary components: ✦ The passenger protocol is the protocol being encapsulated, such as IP or IPX. ✦ The transport protocol is used to encapsulate the passenger protocol. ✦ The carrier protocol is the means of transporting both protocols. Two popular types of point-to-point tunneling (carrier) protocols are L2TP and GRE: ✦ Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP): Tunneling protocol created by Cisco and Microsoft that is derived from two older proprietary tunneling protocols, namely, Microsoft’s Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) and Cisco’s Layer 2 Forwarding (L2F) technology. L2TP is a mechanism to tunnel Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) traffic over non-PPP-enabled links using UDP port 1701. PPP is used for POTS and ISDN remote dialup access. Primarily used for remote-access VPNs, L2TP allows an L2TPenabled client remote access into the corporate network. L2TP does not provide its own method of encryption and may rely on IPsec for security. Commonly called L2TP over IPsec, IPsec security is provided over the tunneling functionality of L2TP. ✦ Generic routing encapsulation (GRE): Tunneling protocol developed by Cisco that is used to transport data packets from one network through another network. This transport is accomplished by allowing other protocols to be encapsulated in IP tunnels. GRE is used with IPsec to transmit routing protocol data between gateways that IPsec does not natively support. For example, GRE encapsulates a clear text packet. Then IPsec encrypts the packet using either transport or tunnel mode. IPsec over GRE allows routing updates, which are generally multicast, to be passed over an encrypted link. IPsec cannot provide this functionality alone because it does not support multicast. Valid uses of GRE include transporting multiprotocol and IP multicast traffic between two sites that have only IP unicast connectivity. Because IPsec encryption only works on IP unicast frames, tunneling is a crucial VPN element. Tunneling allows the encryption and transportation of multiprotocol traffic across the VPN. Packets traversing between tunnel endpoints appear to the IP network as an IP unicast frame.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Creating and Managing IPsec VPNs

797

4. Configure remote users. Defines the users who are allowed remote access.

5. Create a transform set. A combined authentication and encryption method agreed on by peers used to protect data transmission.

6. Define the tunnel group. A group of records that define connection policies. Two default tunnel groups exist: • DefaultRAGroup: The default IPsec remote-access tunnel group • DefaultL2Lgroup: The default IPsec LAN-to-LAN tunnel group

• Set the connection type to IPsec remote access. • Configure the address assignment method. • Configure an authentication method.

7. Define the crypto map. Allows the security appliance to receive connections from peers that have unknown IP addresses, such as remote-access clients. Dynamic crypto map entries identify the connection’s transform set. By enabling reverse routing, routing information may be discovered for connected clients and advertised with Routing Information Protocol (RIP) or Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).

8. Save changes. Here is an example of a VPN configuration:

1. In global configuration mode, configure the inside (private) and outside (public) interfaces: Router(config)#interface ethernet0 Router(config-if)#ip address 10.10.4.200 255.255.0.0 Router(config-if)#nameif outside Router(config)#no shutdown

First, specify the interface, IP address, and subnet mask. The nameif command assigns a name to the interface. The no shutdown command enables the interface. Repeat the same process to configure the inside interface.

2. To verify peer identity, specify the authentication method to use: Router(config)#isakmp policy 1 authentication pre-share

The isakmp policy command specifies the terms of IKE negotiation. The priority value is set at 1, and the authentication method will use the pre-shared key.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VI Chapter 4


These two groups are used during tunnel negotiation to configure default tunnel parameters for remote access and LAN-to-LAN tunnel groups when no specific tunnel group is identified. Three tunnel group attributes are required to establish a remote connection:

798


3. Specify the encryption type (3DES): Router(config)#isakmp policy 1 encryption 3des

4. Specify the HMAC method (SHA-1): Router(config)#isakmp policy 1 hash sha

5. Specify the Diffie-Hellman group number: Router(config)#isakmp policy 1 group 2

6. Set the encryption key lifetime value in seconds: Router(config)#isakmp policy 1 lifetime 43200

7. Apply ISAKMP to the interface (named “outside”): Router(config)#isakmp enable outside

8. Specify the address pool: Router(config)#ip local pool dummypool 192.168.1.100-192.168.0.110

9. Configure usernames and passwords to identify remote users: Router(config)#username Dummy password 12345678

Repeat this step for each user requiring access.

10. Specify a transform set to protect data flow, which combines the encryption method and the authentication method: Router(config)#crypto ipsec transform set DummySet esp-3des esp-md5-hmac

The name of the transform set is DummySet. The encryption method is ESP-3DES, and the authentication method is ESP-MD5-HMAC.

11. Define the tunnel group to establish tunnel connection policies: Router(config)#tunnel-group dummygroup type ipsec-ra Router(config)#tunnel-group dummygroup general-attributes Router(config-general)#address-pool dummypool Router(config)#tunnel-group dummygroup ipsec-attributes Router(config-ipsec)#pre-shared-key 21acbn524896fxxf

The first tunnel-group command sets the group name to dummygroup and the connection type to IPsec remote access. The next command sets the authentication method for the dummygroup and enters generalattributes mode. Next, the address pool is created. The last two statements enter ip-sec attributes mode and define the pre-shared key of 21acbn524896fxxf.

www.it-ebooks.info


799

12. Define the crypto map entries: Router(config)#crypto Router(config)#crypto Router(config)#crypto Router(config)#crypto

dynamic-map dyn1 1 set transform-set DummySet dynamic-map dyn1 1 set reverse-route map dummymap 1 ipsec-isakmp dynamic dyn1 map dummymap interface outside

The first crypto dynamic map entry is named (dyn1) and identifies the transform set (DummySet). The dynamic map set reverse-route command enables reverse route injection (RRI) for the connection. RRI is used to populate the routing table for remote VPN clients. Next, the crypto map command is used to create a dynamic crypto map called dummymap, with a sequence number of 1. Finally, the dummymap is applied to the outside interface.

13. Save changes:

Creating a VPN with the Cisco Security Device Manager (SDM) The Cisco SDM simplifies router and security configuration by assisting the administrator using several intelligent setup wizards. These wizards allow easy and efficient configuration of key router components such as Virtual Private Networks. Using the SDM Easy VPN Server Wizard, you can: ✦ Choose the router interface to configure as VPN server. ✦ Choose the preferred authentication method. ✦ Select the encryption and authentication algorithms. ✦ Select a method to exchange encryption keys. ✦ Choose the type of data protection in the VPN tunnel.

Enabling quality of service (QoS) in the VPN using Cisco SDM QoS manages network resources to guarantee high quality data communication. QoS for VPNs examines packet headers and distinguishes the identity of packets before IPsec encryption, allowing more effective packet tunneling. QoS provides the means to prioritize network traffic based on the type of data and set bandwidth allocation limitations. The SDM QoS Wizard provides

www.it-ebooks.info


Router(config)#write memory

Book VI Chapter 4

800


simple configuration flexibility for implementing QoS policies to prioritize outgoing traffic. Using the SDM QoS Wizard, you can: ✦ Select the outgoing interface on which you wish to apply a QoS policy.Here you want to enable QoS in your VPN: the interface you select is the same interface that you configured for VPN. ✦ Prioritize traffic based on its type. ✦ Set bandwidth allocation limits. ✦ Classify protocols in real time and business critical categories. You may enable more than one protocol on each router interface. This option allows you to prioritize your protocols based on business needs and service level agreements (SLAs). ✦ Enable Network-Based Application Recognition (NBAR) Protocol discovery for the interface.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Contents at a Glance Chapter 1: Wide-Area Networking Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .807 Introducing WANs ....................................................................................... 807 Connection Types........................................................................................ 811 Encapsulation Types ................................................................................... 812 Introducing Cable Connections ................................................................. 815 Introducing Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Connections......................... 817

Chapter 2: HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control) Protocol . . . . . . . . .823 Introducing the High-Level Data Link Control Protocol ......................... 823 Configuring HDLC ........................................................................................ 826 Monitoring HDLC ......................................................................................... 827

Chapter 3: PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .831 What Is PPP?................................................................................................. 831 Operational Flow of PPP ............................................................................. 834 Link Control Protocol (LCP)....................................................................... 836 Network Control Protocol (NCP) ............................................................... 838 PAP and CHAP Authentication................................................................... 839 Configuring PPP ........................................................................................... 841 Monitoring and Troubleshooting PPP ...................................................... 847

Chapter 4: Frame Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .855 Introducing Frame Relay ............................................................................ 855 Managing Frame Relay ................................................................................ 863 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Frame Relay ........................................ 873

Appendix A: About the CD ......................................... 881 System Requirements ................................................................................. 881 Using the CD ................................................................................................. 881 What You Will Find on the CD.................................................................... 882 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 883

Appendix B: Cisco CCNA Exam Preperation................. 885 CCNA: Foundation of Cisco Certification Pyramid .................................. 885 CCNA Skills ................................................................................................... 885 CCNA Adaptive Testing............................................................................... 886 Using This Book to Prepare for the Exams .............................................. 887 Making Arrangements to Take the Exams ................................................ 888 The Day the Earth Stood Still: Exam Day .................................................. 888 Arriving at the exam location ........................................................... 888 Taking the exam ................................................................................. 889 2009 Examination Objectives ..................................................................... 891

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 1: Wide-Area Networking Basics Exam Objectives ✓ Defining wide-area networking ✓ Explaining WAN connection types ✓ Describing WAN protocol encapsulation methods ✓ Introducing Cisco router cabling standards ✓ Identifying AUX and COM port connectors ✓ Understanding popular DSL technologies ✓ Recognizing the differences between DCE and DTE devices

Introducing WANs

A

wide-area network (WAN) is a connection between two or more local-area networks (LANs) spanning across a large, spread-out geographical area. A single LAN is usually considered to be confined to the same building or office that does not communicate over public transportation methods. A metropolitan-area network (MAN) limits its communications to a specific city function or campus area, while a WAN uses dedicated leased lines from telephone companies to establish links between geographically dispersed LANs and/or MANs. WAN technologies are generally represented by the three lower layers of the OSI model, namely, the network, data link, and physical layers. The Internet is the best example of a WAN and is the largest public network on the planet. As you can see in Figure 1-1, private WANs are used to establish permanent communications links between company sites and branch offices. Using routers, traffic is managed and sent to the proper destination LAN. The traffic is then transferred to LAN switching devices until the data reaches the intended recipient. Private WANs may use a number of methods to connect to remote sites, such as dedicated telephone lines, ATM, Frame Relay, and satellite links. Private WANs may also use public networks to communicate. Setting up an encrypted VPN over a local ISP’s DSL service or dialup connection is another cost-friendly alternative for secure communications.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

810

Introducing WANs

60-pin serial cable may be EIA/TIA-530, EIA/TIA-449, EIA/TIA-232, V.35, or X.21 standard connectors, which I examine in the following section. ✦ High-Speed Serial Interface (HSSI): A proprietary smart-serial DTE/DCE interface developed by Cisco Systems and T3plus Networking for use in high-speed WAN link communications. HSSI operates at the physical layer of the OSI model and uses a male, subminiature 50-pin connector with a maximum cable length of 50 feet. HSSI provides data transmission rates approaching 52 Mbps by employing differential emitter-coupled logic (ECL). ECL technology enables low noise and high-speed data communications. HSSI uses a series of four loopback tests and two control signals to validate the communications process. These communication checks provide handshaking, internal self testing, and high reliability features.

DCE serial interfaces Several types of serial interface standards for WAN communications have been defined by the Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry Association (EIA/TIA). The following connectors may be used to connect to a router’s serial port: ✦ EIA/TIA-530: The standard for synchronous balanced and unbalanced serial interfaces using inexpensive DB-25 connectors. EIA/TIA-530 defines a cabling interface standard between a DTE and DCE device. Differential signaling is used to send high-speed data over long cable using a combination of send, receive, clocking, control, and handshaking signals to send high-speed data over long cabling. Even though the EIA/TIA-530 standard reduces the amount of signal pins used from a 37-pin connector to a 25-pin connector, the most critical electrical signals are carried over and maintained on the 25-pin connector. ✦ EIA/TIA-449: A synchronous serial interface standard used for data networking communications that uses a smaller and less expensive connector than V.35 types. EIA/TIA-449 signals may travel greater distances than the EIA/TIA-232 standard and support data transfer rates up to 2Mbit/s. The Cisco CAB449MT cable uses a male DB-60-pin connector (Cisco end) to a male DB-37-pin connector (network end). ✦ EIA/TIA-232: An asynchronous serial interface that uses 9-pin (DB-9) and 25-pin (DB-25) connectors popular on all types of DCE/DTE equipment, personal computers, modems, terminals, and older printers. The EIA/TIA-232 standard is used to transfer binary data between a DCE and DTE device. Generally, computer serial ports use DTE male pins and DCE devices (such as modems and other networking equipment) employ female connectors. Male-to-female and female-to-male gender changers are available. EIA/TIA232 cable lengths are restricted to 50 feet (15 meters).

www.it-ebooks.info

Connection Types

811

✦ V.35: The OSI physical layer ITU partially balanced standard that supports high-speed data rates up to 2.048 Mbps (but used mostly for 56kbps and 64kbps communications). V.35 is a standard for synchronous serial interfaces that has become obsolete in favor of EIA/TIA-449, but it continues to be used and remains popular today. V.35 eliminates line noise by separately twisting the individual wires carrying data and clock information.

Connection Types Various connection types are available when designing a WAN connection. Each type provides advantages and disadvantages that must be understood prior to implementation. Defining an organization’s WAN traffic flow requirements is crucial to the success of the WAN design. The four common types of WAN connections available are as follows: ✦ Dedicated leased line connection: An individual, point-to-point serial connection that uses a permanently established link to provide guaranteed bandwidth between remote networks. These dedicated circuits provide up to 44.736-Mbps speeds over a public carrier’s T-1 or T-3 lines.

✦ Circuit-switched connection: The most popular type of WAN connection in which a physical circuit is established “as needed” between two endpoints for the duration of the connection. This type of connection requires call setup of the link to occur before any communications may begin. The physical lines remain unavailable for other users until the connection is dropped. The two types of serial circuit-switched connections are • Asynchronous plain old telephone system (POTS) dialup • Synchronous Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) ✦ Packet-switched connection: A point-to-point virtual circuit connection established using a public carrier’s network, allowing multiple customers to share carrier resources. The sharing of packet-switched connections between customers remains transparent to the end user. Packet-switched connections provide high bandwidth and reduced cost compared to dedicated leased lines, but are more expensive than ISDN and dialup connections. Frame Relay and X.25 are known as packet-switched technologies.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VII Chapter 1

Wide-Area Networking Basics

These types of high-speed connections are “always on” and have the advantage of minimum overhead compared to other connection types. Also, this persistent connection does not require continuous setup and tear down between communication phases. The disadvantage of dedicated leased lines is cost (factored by distance between links and the amount of bandwidth assigned to the single link), because they are more expensive that other connection types.

812

Encapsulation Types ✦ Cell-switched connection: A type of point-to-point packet-switched connection that uses digital circuits to transmit 53-byte packets called cells. Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is an example of a cell-switched WAN.

Encapsulation Types Encapsulation is the wrapping of data in a particular protocol header to successfully transport the data. Because IP is a network layer protocol, it must be encapsulated when traversing a WAN (data link/physical layer) link. Cisco devices support many WAN encapsulation types. Each encapsulation type must be manually assigned to a router’s serial interface, while identically matching the corresponding point-to-point link on the other end of the connection. The configured encapsulation type must be identical between both endpoints on a single link; otherwise, communications will not be possible. The following sections describe the most popular encapsulation types used on Cisco devices.

HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control) Cisco’s default encapsulation type for serial interfaces, HDLC is used to encapsulate packets into frames over established, dedicated, point-to-point leased lines. HDLC packets are small and use low overhead, thus making them quite efficient. HDLC also verifies link integrity and communications by implementing keepalives and sequence numbering. A downside of HDLC is that it provides no means for authentication. The original HDLC specification outlined by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) did not provide simultaneous support for multiple network layer protocols. Independent vendors took it upon themselves to make improvements to the HDLC protocol, which introduced new functionality and incorporated the use of multiple Layer 3 protocols. Cisco’s proprietary version of HDLC (known as cHDLC) is a synchronous, bit-oriented protocol which adds a new frame field in the packet header to allow for multi-protocol support. cHDLC uses a link keepalive method called Serial Line Address resolution Protocol (SLARP ) to verify connection availability and integrity. HDLC encapsulation is the default assignment for serial interfaces. If a nonHDLC encapsulation type is required for link establishment, it must be manually configured by the network administrator on both sides of the link.

PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) PPP encapsulates network layer packets and transmits frames over Layer 2 connections used by point-to-point dedicated circuits and asynchronous

www.it-ebooks.info

Encapsulation Types

813

dialup and ISDN links. PPP features include connection authentication, encryption, and compression. Two basic PPP sublayers are as follows: ✦ Network Control Protocol (NCP): Encapsulates heterogeneous network layer protocols over PPP. This allows multiple, dissimilar protocols to be transmitted by NCP over the PPP link. ✦ Link Control Protocol (LCP): Manages initial link setup, handshake negotiations, and ongoing connections during PPP communications. LCP also manages the termination of point-to-point links.

SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol) SLIP is a very simplistic, nonstandard protocol used to frame and transmit IP datagrams over serial connections. Due to its inflexible design, SLIP does not provide additional features such as encryption, authentication, or error detection and has been widely replaced by PPP.

Frame Relay

Frame Relay is an OSI Layer 2 protocol that relies on the upper-layer protocols to handle flow control and error correction responsibilities. Frame Relay uses virtual circuits to multiplex multiple connections over a single transmission link between DTE and DCE devices. Service providers assign connection i dentifiers to customer DTE devices and map them to outgoing ports.

ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) ATM is packet-switching digital transmission technology that sends voice, video, and data signals using 53-byte, fixed-length cell relay between end points over a virtual circuit. An ATM cell contains a 5-byte header and a 48-byte payload (user data), which is processed individually (asynchronously). ATM cells are queued before being multiplexed over the connection-oriented transmission path. Packaging data into smaller fixed-size cell units allows jitter reduction and prevents data-queuing delays known as contention. By preventing contention in applications where timely delivery of data is crucial — such as voice and video applications — jitter is reduced and overall performance is improved.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VII Chapter 1


Frame Relay is a high-performance packet-switching WAN protocol originally designed for use with ISDN, which has superseded X.25. Frame Relay uses HDLC encapsulation between connected devices at T-1 (1.544-Mbps) and T-3 (45-Mbps) speeds, but is relatively inexpensive compared to ATM or dedicated leased lines.

814

Encapsulation Types

ATM is a popular Layer 2 WAN protocol that establishes data-link layer communications over physical Layer 1 circuits. The link between endpoints must be established before data transmission may begin. Data bit rates of 155 Mbps over CAT5 cable and 622 Mbps using fiber-optic cable are possible, with ATM network speeds approaching 10 Gbps. ATM is more expensive compared to Frame Relay technology. An ATM network is comprised of multiple ATM switches interconnected by point-to-point links, which transmits data cells to destination ATM network interface adapters (known as the ATM endpoints). Examples of ATM endpoints include CSUs, routers, switches, computers, and video coder-decoders (codecs). Two types of ATM switch interfaces are known as either UNI or NNI. UNI interfaces interconnect ATM end systems to ATM switches. NNI interfaces connect ATM switches. UNI and NNI interfaces are also classified by the owner of the interface. The telephone company is assigned publicly owned interfaces, with private equipment being assigned to the end user and is known as customer premises equipment (CPE). The ATM cell headers are defined in either UNI or NNI format, depending on the type of interface used. Some of the ATM cell header fields are as follows: ✦ Generic Flow Control (GFC): Field used to identify two or more devices on an ATM network that are using the same ATM interface (multiplexing). ✦ Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI): Fields used in determining the ATM cell destination while in transit through an ATM switched network. Cells are tagged with VPI and VCI values. A local translation table determines the port address of a particular destination based on the VPI and VCI values. ✦ Payload Type (PT): Field used to show the type of data carried. Data may be either user data or control data. If the cell is transporting user data, the first bit is always set to 0. The bit value changes to 1 when control data is used. The second bit in the payload type is assigned for congestion. A 0-bit value represents no congestion, and a 1 bit is used to register network congestion. If the third bit is on (a 1 bit), the cell is marked as the last cell in a frame. ✦ Cell Loss Priority (CLP): Field responsible for management of buffering. If the CLP bit equals 1, the cell will be dropped when congestion on the network is discovered. ✦ Header Error Control (HEC): Field used in checksum calculations to determine whether problems exist in the header. WAN circuits are categorized into two kinds of connection types: ✦ Permanent virtual circuits (PVCs): PVCs establish direct connections between sites and function similarly to a dedicated leased line. The

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

816

Introducing Cable Connections ✦ Straight-through: Standard network cable used to connect source and destination interfaces between hubs and switches. The eight individual wires on both ends of the 8-pin connector are identical. Pins 1 and 2 are used for sending data, and pins 3 and 6 are used for receiving data. Pins 4, 5, 7, and 8 are not used. ✦ Crossover: RJ-45 cable used to connect a source and destination interface directly to one another without the need for a hub or switch. The crossover cable cross-connects two pairs of wires, meaning that each end of the cable is wired differently. The white/orange and orange solid set of wires is swapped with the white/green and green solid set of wires on one end of the cable. Pin 1 crosses over to pin 3 and pin 2 crosses to pin 6. This means that one end of the cable is defined as T568A, the other specified as T568B. A crossover cable may be used to connect pairs of computers, hubs, switches, or routers to one another. ✦ Rollover: Cisco-proprietary cables used to connect into the console port of a router or a network switch. In an RJ-45 rollover cable, the colored wiring on one end of the cable becomes reversed on the other end. Pin 1 on one end of the cable connects to pin 8 at the other end of the cable. Similarly, pin 2 is wired to pin 7 at the other end, and so on. ✦ RJ-45–to–DB-9 female: Management cable provided with Cisco 600, 800, 1600, and 1700 series routers. Some common uses for unshielded twisted-pair cabling in a Cisco wide-area networking environment include the following: ✦ Serial transmission: A WAN serial transmission over a single channel consisting of a single 1-bit data transmission. Each bit is transmitted one bit at a time (compared to the multiple 8-bit transmission nature of parallel communications). Even though serial communications may seem to have a disadvantage compared to parallel transmissions, serial communications methods are often faster than parallel communications. Cisco uses a 60-pin serial connector for one end of the serial transmission cable, while the other end of the cable may be EIA/TIA-232, EIA/TIA-449, EIA/TIA-530, V.35, or X.21. ✦ ISDN connections: Digital technology that transmits integrated voice and data over a publicly switched network. ISDN was originally designed to provide private customers and small businesses with high-speed Internet access over existing communications infrastructures. ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) is a service that uses two 64-Kbps bearer channels (2B) plus one 16-Kbps data channel (D) used for clocking, and is called “out-of-band” signaling. This basically means that two encapsulation methods are used between the signaling and data channels. ✦ Console connections: A DTE terminal session is established and used to deliver commands to the router via a console connection. A rollover cable with an RJ-45 connector is used to connect the PC or terminal to the console port of the Cisco device.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Cable Connections

817

Connecting Cisco routers using a DCE-to-DTE crossover cable Although Cisco routers are considered DTE devices (Cisco serial interfaces are DTE by default), you can create a simulated lab DCE-to-DTE WAN environment using two Cisco routers and a DCE-to-DTE crossover cable. Because channel service unit/data service unit (CSU/DSU) devices (DCEs) control the timing (clocking) for synchronous serial interfaces, one Cisco router must be configured as a DCE device. Each router’s serial interface should be configured depending on which end of the DB-60 cable is plugged in: One interface configured as a DCE and the other end as the DTE device. Make sure that both routers’ serial interfaces are configured with the no shutdown command and the proper IP addressing information, and then configure clocking on the DCE device:

RouterDTE(config-if)#clock rate 64000 %Error: This command applies only to DCE interfaces

The show controllers command display output allows an administrator to view which interfaces are set up for DCE or DTE operation: RouterDTE#show controllers serial 0 HD unit 1, idb = 0x711CD0, driver structure at 0x124140 buffer size 1524 HD unit 1, V.35 DTE cable

Before connecting a terminal to the console port, configure the terminal to match the router console port settings, typically 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, and either 1 or 2 stop bits (depending on the router model).

DB-25 cabling and adapters The types of cabling and adapters used for Cisco routers are categorized into these main types: ✦ RS-232 straight-through cable: Standard serial cable known as CAB-R23. This Cisco router cable uses a female DB-25 connector on one end and a male DB-25 connector on the other end. Either end may be used by the network or Cisco device, depending on DCE or DTE device designation and assignment. If the Cisco router is designated as a DCE device, the female DB-25 connector is the Cisco end of the cable. If the router is designated as a DTE device, the male DB-25 connector is the Cisco end. ✦ RJ-45–to–DB-9 adapter: Connects a router to a PC through a 9-pin COM port.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VII Chapter 1


RouterDCE(config-if)#clock rate 64000

This command sets the clock rate to 64,000 bits per second. Because no error message was generated by the router, the command executed successfully. What would happen if the same clocking command was mistakenly executed on the DTE device?

818

Introducing Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Connections ✦ RJ-45–to–DB-25 adapter: Connects a router to a PC through a 25-pin serial port.

Introducing Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Connections Digital subscriber line (DSL) data transfer is the high-speed transmission of digital data over standard telephone lines. The digital data is transmitted over analog carrier signals using copper wiring. DSL technology enables home and small business customers to use the same phone line for both high-speed Internet access and telephone services. This combination of new DSL technology with older analog signaling (POTS) allows high-speed Internet access without requiring the installation of newer and more expensive communications methods. The most popular types of DSL connections are as follows: ✦ Asymmetric digital subscriber line (ADSL): The most common method of DSL communication that transfers both analog and digital information over a pair of copper wires, using either POTS or ISDN signals. Since a typical home user requires less upstream bandwidth than downstream bandwidth, ADSL allocates the majority of the telephone line frequencies to downstream traffic. This provides a much larger capacity for Internet downloading, while restricting a users’ upload bandwidth considerably. This means data downloads to the end user will occur much faster than data being uploaded from the user to the Internet. ADSL line speeds may approach 24 Mbps downstream and 3.5 Mbps upstream, with data transmission rates fluctuating based on the Internet service provider (ISP) and line quality of the link. Distance also plays a factor in data rates. By using a splitter, an ADSL subscriber may simultaneously access both the public switched telephone network (PSTN) and the Internet on the same twisted-pair copper cabling. The splitter provides a means to filter between high and low frequencies. Two DSL modems or ADSL transceiver units (ATUs) are used to establish a link. One unit, located at the service provider’s central office, is called the ATU-C; the remote transceiver unit located at the home or business customer is called the ATU-R. The location where the telephone company’s copper wires terminate is called the main distribution frame (MDF). The MDF connects incoming public or private lines to the internal telephone company’s network inside a wire rack. The digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM) is connected to the line at the telephone service provider via the MDF, and is used to connect multiple customer DSL connections to the Internet backbone using multiplexing. The DSLAM acts as a Layer 2 switch that collects multiple customer DSL streams and multiplexes the data into a single signal. This multiplexed traffic is then sent over the Internet backbone switch called the Network Service Provider (NSP) at speeds up to 10 Gbps. Figure 1-3 shows an example of a typical ADSL setup.

www.it-ebooks.info

Introducing Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Connections

819

✦ PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet): An OSI Layer 2 protocol used to encapsulate PPP frames inside Ethernet frames. PPPoE is typically used by Internet service providers (ISPs) to allow customers to log on to DSL services using broadband modems. Based on the older Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), ISPs use PPPoE to track an IP address to a specific customer’s authenticated username and password. This allows users to establish a virtual point-to-point WAN “dialup” session over Ethernet networks and securely transmit data between endpoints. PPPoE uses tunneling for security purposes and is similar to the Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) found in virtual private networks. For this reason, PPPoE consumes additional bandwidth and resources. ✦ Cisco Long Range Ethernet (LRE): A proprietary broadband Ethernet protocol developed by Cisco Systems that connects LANs or individual computers to LRE-enabled switches over POTS. LRE is based on VDSL technology and supports distances up to 1.5 kilometers over standard phone lines, enabling simultaneous voice, video, and data transfers. Cisco LRE products are designed to share lines with analog, Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN), and digital private branch exchange (PBX) switch telephones using the 0- to 700-kHz frequency range, delivering data rates of 5–15 Mbps. This allows Cisco LRE to offer Ethernet-like performance using lower quality and older Category 1/2/3 cabling. LRE is considered a metropolitan-area network protocol and is easy to install and manage. Cisco LRE also provides huge speed advantage over standard Internet dialup connections.


Router

60-pin serial port connector

CSU/DSU or other DCE

Serial transition cable

Figure 1-3: ADSL setup.

EIA/TIA-232, EIA/TIA-449, V.35, X.21, or EIA-530 connector

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VII Chapter 1

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 2: HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control) Protocol Exam Objectives ✓ Understanding the HDLC Protocol ✓ HDLC framing ✓ Configuring HDLC ✓ Keepalives and SLARP ✓ Monitoring HDLC

Introducing the High-Level Data Link Control Protocol

H

DLC is a common WAN protocol that operates at the data-link layer and transmits data between network endpoints. HDLC is based on IBM’s SDLC protocol and was developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). HDLC data is packed into frames and sent across the network using delivery-verification procedures. HDLC encapsulates data over synchronous point-to-point serial links using framing characters and checksums. These features provide synchronous framing and error detection without windowing or retransmission. HDLC is the default encapsulation type on Cisco router serial interfaces. Cisco HDLC, also known as cHDLC, is a proprietary extension of the HDLC protocol. cHDLC maintains connections by sending a series of keepalive messages between peers. Serial Link Address Resolution Protocol, or SLARP, is another feature used by cHDLC to discover the IP addresses of neighboring routing devices.

HDLC links HDLC links are set up using two main types of network configurations: ✦ Point-to-point: Network setup consisting of two nodes. One node is the controller node, or primary node. The primary node is responsible for setting up and terminating the link, along with link management and control of a peer node, called the secondary node. Secondary nodes must wait for permission from primary nodes before communication is allowed.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Monitoring HDLC

827

Monitoring HDLC HDLC is a simple protocol that relies on simple commands to monitor functionality. Verifying that HDLC is enabled and running on a serial interface is quite straightforward using the following show and debug commands: ✦ show interface: Displays the operational status of an interface. The key fields to monitor are the interface line [up | down] and the line protocol [up | down]. An output example of the show interface command is listed here:

✦ show controllers: Displays physical layer information about a serial controller. This information also helps identify the controller’s DCE or DTE cable types. A command-line interface (CLI) output example of the show controllers command is listed here: Router#show controllers serial 1 HD unit 1, idb = 0xC6B24, driver structure at 0xCD7B4 buffer size 1524 HD unit 1, V.35 DCE cable, clockrate 56000 cpb = 0x43, eda = 0x2140, cda = 0x2000 RX ring with 16 entries at 0x222000 00 bd_ptr=0x2000 pak=0x0DF384 ds=0x22C468 status=80 pak_size=0 01 bd_ptr=0x2014 pak=0x0DF1B4 ds=0x22BDB0 status=80 pak_size=0 02 bd_ptr=0x2028 pak=0x0DEFE4 ds=0x22B6F8 status=80 pak_size=0 03 bd_ptr=0x203C pak=0x0DEE14 ds=0x22B040 status=80 pak_size=0 04 bd_ptr=0x2050 pak=0x0DEC44 ds=0x22A988 status=80 pak_size=0 05 bd_ptr=0x2064 pak=0x0DEA74 ds=0x22A2D0 status=80 pak_size=0 06 bd_ptr=0x2078 pak=0x0DE8A4 ds=0x229C18 status=80 pak_size=0

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VII Chapter 2

HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control) Protocol

Router#show interface serial 1 Serial5 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is CD2430 in sync mode Internet address is 192.168.10.5/24 MTU 1500 bytes, BW 115 Kbit, DLY 20000 usec, rely 255/255, load 1/255 Encapsulation HDLC, loopback not set, keepalive set (10 sec) Last input 00:00:01, output 00:00:00, output hang never Last clearing of “show interface” counters never Input queue: 0/75/0 (size/max/drops); Total output drops: 0 Queuing strategy: weighted fair Output queue: 0/1000/64/0 (size/max total/threshold/drops) Conversations 0/1/256 (active/max active/max total) Reserved Conversations 0/0 (allocated/max allocated) 5 minute input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec 5 minute output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec 4471 packets input, 245871 bytes, 0 no buffer Received 2415 broadcasts, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 ignored, 0 abort 2204 packets output, 204505 bytes, 0 underruns 0 output errors, 0 collisions, 21 interface resets 0 output buffer failures, 0 output buffers swapped out 12 carrier transitions DCD=up DSR=up DTR=up RTS=up CTS=up

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 3: PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Exam Objectives ✓ Understanding PPP ✓ Seeing the operational flow of PPP ✓ Examining the Link Control Protocol and Network Control Protocol ✓ Revealing PAP and CHAP authentication methods ✓ Understanding PPP configuration using the CLI ✓ Examining the Cisco SDM GUI configuration with PPP ✓ Setting up PAP and CHAP authentication ✓ Monitoring and troubleshooting PPP

What Is PPP?

T

he Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) is a standard WAN encapsulation method that transports multiprotocol frames between peer connections across full-duplex, bidirectional links. PPP may be used over dedicated serial point-to-point links, Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN), or asynchronous dialup connections and has superseded the Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) for synchronous and asynchronous communications As shown in Figure 3-1, PPP operates at the physical and data link layers of the OSI model to provide data connectivity between endpoints using encapsulation, multiplexing, load balancing, error detection, data compression, and authentication features. Based on the original HDLC specification, PPP adds features such as the Link Control Protocol (LCP) and the Network Control Protocol (NCP). NCP and LCP are key components of PPP and are responsible for proper setup and operation of the Point-to-Point Protocol link between DCE and DTE devices.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Operational Flow of PPP

835

✦ Link authentication phase (optional): Authenticates link partners using Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) or Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) for additional security. To enter the next phase (network), the authentication process must complete successfully: • If peer authentication is required, a request is issued and configuration options are negotiated right after the link establishment phase. • If authentication fails, the link will move to the termination phase. Only LCP and link quality determinations are read and executed during the authentication phase. All other frames are logged and then dropped. ✦ Link quality determination phase (optional): Link quality determination may also occur during the authentication phase and before the network phase. The integrity of the link is checked to decide whether the line quality is reliable enough to support the network layer protocols. ✦ Link Network Layer Protocol (NLP) phase: By reaching this phase, the main setup of the link is established and LCP relinquishes control to the network layer protocol. NLP is tasked with network layer session establishment over PPP using Network Control Protocol (NCP) services. NLPs are data-carrying protocols that may use different NCP services depending on the network protocol requiring encapsulation. Available network layer protocols include

Book VII Chapter 3

• Internet Protocol Control Protocol (IPCP)

• Novell IPX Control Protocol (IPXCP) After LCP has finished the link quality determination test, NCPs take over and network layer protocol configuration negotiation occurs. NCPs may be initiated or terminated at any time. When LCP begins the process of terminating an active link, NCP and the network layer protocols are given ample warning prior to link deactivation. ✦ Link termination phase: The Link Control Protocol is responsible for terminating the active link by sending and receiving LCP terminate frames between link end points. These frames may be generated and issued due to a number of different reasons. LCP terminate frames may be triggered because of poor link quality, authentication failure, noncarrier detection, or manual user intervention. PPP informs upper network layer protocols (NLPs such as IP) regarding the status of link termination. After terminate frames have been exchanged between end points, the physical link connection is dropped. Terminate frames consist of Terminate-Requests and Terminate-ACKs, which can be seen in Figure 3-4, along with the entire PPP configuration sequence.

www.it-ebooks.info

PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol)

• AppleTalk Control Protocol (ATCP)

www.it-ebooks.info

Link Control Protocol (LCP)

837

Purpose of LCP As seen from the functional types of LCP frames, LCP is responsible for link establishment, configuration and negotiation of optional settings, link management, and link termination. LCP helps routers negotiate and agree upon a specific set of link options. That is why LCP is known as the link negotiator because it helps routers negotiate the options of a link. As previously shown in Figure 3-4, LCP link and option negotiation is a series of LCP frames exchanged between PPP peers during data transmission. The LCP negotiation process consists of two separate communications dialogs between PPP peers. To ensure proper communications between end points, both peers must agree upon a set of standards which will be used during link establishment, although peers are not required to use the exact same set of LCP options. Peer A requests, negotiates, and receives confirmation for the set of LCP options to be used for data transmission with peer B. Communication begins with peer A sending a Configure-Request message and ends when peer B sends a Configure-ACK message. Peer B may likewise negotiate the LCP options used for communication with peer A. Peer B initiates communication by sending a Configure-Request message and terminates when peer A sends a Configure-ACK message. Some common responses to a peer Configure-Request message include the following:

Book VII Chapter 3

✦ Configure-ACK: A positive acknowledgment sent between peers when options received on a link are agreed upon. These values indicate that both parties acknowledge and are in agreement with the configuration options specified. The peer device may transmit data after receiving Configure-ACK acknowledgments.


✦ Configure-NAK: Peers send Configure-NAK messages when they do not agree on one or more options. Configure-NAKs trigger peers to resend new Configure-Request messages that offer new link configuration options. ✦ Configure-Reject: A rejection acknowledgment. A Configure-Reject is sent when non-negotiable options are received. Options that are unknown to a peer will trigger a new Configure-Request message that contains updated options.

LCP options An LCP Configure-Request message may contain various options offered by the peer initiator. This allows one peer to let the other peer know what options are requested during link setup. If no value is specified for a particular option, the initiator has no preference on that particular option, and default values are assumed.

www.it-ebooks.info

838

Network Control Protocol (NCP)

LCP negotiable options include the following: ✦ Compression: Eliminates redundant data in the protocol field by using compression. This shrinks the 16-bit field inside each PPP frame to 8 bits, saving 1 byte of data in the PPP frame. Compression applied to the address and control fields inside the frame saves additional bandwidth. ✦ PPP call back: 8-bit field indicating callback determination. ✦ Multilink: Bonding of multiple links using the PPP multilink protocol (MP) creates one virtual link. LCP handles multiple links in a virtual circuit as a single entity. The benefits of bonding include performance improvement and increased bandwidth availability. ✦ Authentication: Option used on PPP links for enabling CHAP or PAP authentication. ✦ Maximum-Receive-Unit (MRU): Defines the maximum size of a datagram sent over the PPP link. By default, PPP sends datagrams that contain 1500 bytes. ✦ Quality-Protocol: Option used for link quality monitoring. This option is disabled by default. ✦ Magic-Number: Enables loop and error detection on the link. LCP messages include a magic number that identifies each peer in a PPP link. Whenever a link is in an actively looped state, the node receives an LCP message with its own magic number, instead of receiving a message with the magic number of the peer node. The magic number field allows the sending node to detect the loop and take corrective action.

Network Control Protocol (NCP) The modular design of PPP allows simultaneous encapsulation and transmission of multiple network layer protocols inside data frames over a WAN link. PPP uses Network Control Protocol (NCP) datagrams to define and configure the network layer protocols to be transferred over the WAN. After the network layer protocols are configured, datagrams are prepared for transmission over the LCP-established link. NCP is designed as a “packager” that encapsulates multiple network layer protocols and allows simultaneous communications over one active LCP link. LCP does not have to understand nor is concerned with each Layer 3 protocol being transmitted. LCP establishes the link and turns over all network layer encapsulation responsibility to NCP. NCP acts as an interface between the data link layer and the network layer. Although multiple NCPs may be transmitted over a single LCP link, they must be sent during the Network Layer Protocol (NLP) phase of PPP communications.

www.it-ebooks.info

PAP and CHAP Authentication

839

The Network Control Protocol (NCP) phase is responsible for establishing and configuring network layer protocols such as IP, IPX, and AppleTalk. The Internet Protocol Control Protocol (IPCP) and Internet Protocol Control Protocol version 6 (IPCPv6) are network layer protocols responsible for enabling, configuring, and terminating the Internet Protocol (IP) modules on both ends of the point-to-point link. During the opened state, NCP carries the corresponding network layer protocol packets across the link. During IP encapsulation, normal traffic transfer in the opened state consists of LCP, NCP, and IPCP (or IPCPv6) packets. Network layer protocol packets received when the corresponding NCP is not in the opened state are dropped. The link remains active until LCP or NCP packets specifically terminate the link, or until some other external process shuts down the link.

PAP and CHAP Authentication

Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) PAP uses a simple authentication method using Authentication-Request and Authentication-Reply messages to validate the identity of a remote client:

1. The initiator (possibly a remote dialup user) sends an AuthenticationRequest message consisting of a username and password to a peer device (possibly an ISP).

2. The receiving device validates the username and password, and sends back an Authenticate-ACK approving the connection. If the Authentication-Request is disapproved, an Authenticate-NAK message is transmitted back to the source, and link establishment is terminated. Although the PAP authentication process is simple and efficient, a couple of major security problems exist with PAP:

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VII Chapter 3


To improve security mitigation, the PPP protocol suite was designed to offer the optional feature of user authentication. Devices that initiate a PPP session must pass strict identity verification before link establishment is approved. The link is activated only after the proper credentials have been given and accepted. If PPP authentication fails for any reason, access is denied and the link is promptly terminated. Although proprietary authentication methods may be configured to work with PPP, the two main types of PPP authentication methods are Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) and Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP). CHAP is the preferred authentication method and is considered superior to PAP.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

844

Configuring PPP

Configure PAP and CHAP authentication on both routers By setting up the router host name, IP address, authentication passwords, and encapsulation, PPP is now initialized and enabled on the serial interface. The next step (if required) is to enable the preferred authentication method, either PAP or CHAP. PPP authentication is optional and should only be configured after the circuit is tested and IP connectivity has been established. Delaying the implementation of PPP authentication allows an administrator to verify that PPP is functioning properly before introducing authentication issues, which can matters during troubleshooting and PPP problem resolution. You have three options: ✦ Enable PAP at the Cisco CLI: RT1(config)#int s0/0 RT1(config-if)#ppp authentication pap

✦ Choose the more secure and recommended CHAP authentication method: RT1(config)#int s0/0 RT1(config-if)#ppp authentication chap

✦ Enable both CHAP and PAP authentication: RT1(config-if)#ppp authentication chap pap

A remote Cisco router may establish connection to an Internet service provider (ISP) using multiple central routers for authentication purposes. In certain cases, you must set up additional username authentication that is different from the router’s host name. The ISP-assigned username and password may not match the host name of the remote router. Depending on authentication method, the ppp chap hostname or ppp pap sentusername command is used to specify an alternate username that will be used for authentication. Using CHAP as an example, multiple remote dialup devices connect to a central site. Each remote device must have its own host name and shared secret password configured and stored on the central router, which provides a management burden for the administrator. By allowing the remote devices to all use usernames other than their host name, only one single user account and password is required, and administrative management is simplified.

www.it-ebooks.info

Configuring PPP

845

The following defines the username and password that the central router will use to authenticate connections with the remote devices: ✦ For PAP authentication, use the following command in interface configuration mode: CENTRAL1(config-if)#ppp pap sent-username PAPUSER password PAPPWD

✦ For CHAP, issue these commands separately: RT1(config-if)#ppp chap hostname CHAPUSER RT1(config-if)#ppp chap password CHAPPASS

Configuring PPP callback for ISDN Dial on Demand Routing (DDR) PPP callback allows a router to establish a WAN connection with a peer router and request that a dialup peer router return the call. The callback feature can be used to control access and communications costs between routers. One router must be configured as the PPP callback client issuing requests, while the other router is configured as the PPP callback server, accepting requests and providing the callback functionality. Here is an example of a client and server callback configuration:

1. Specify the interface, IP address, and encapsulation type:

2. Enable callback security and the timeout period: RT1(config-if)#dialer callback-secure RT1(config-if)#dialer enable-timeout 5

3. Specify the dialer map parameters and assign the dialer group: RT1(config-if)#dialer map ip 10.1.1.11 name NYC class DIALGRP 2121234567 RT1(config-if)#dialer-group 1

4. Configure PPP callback: RT1(config-if)#ppp callback accept

5. Enable CHAP authentication: RT1(config-if)#ppp authentication chap

6. Specify the dialer class name and callback client name: RT1(config)#map-class dialer DIALGRP RT1(config-map-class)#dialer callback-server username

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VII Chapter 3


RT1(config)#interface bri 0 RT1(config-if)#ip address 10.1.1.10 255.255.255.0 RT1(config-if)#encapsulation ppp

www.it-ebooks.info

Monitoring and Troubleshooting PPP

847

Monitoring and Troubleshooting PPP The Cisco IOS provides tools to monitor and troubleshoot PPP links. Some of the most useful troubleshooting aids to resolve PPP problems are the show and debug CLI commands. (See the sidebar “Common PPP troubleshooting and monitoring IOS commands,” later in this chapter.) The major difference between show and debug commands is that debug commands operate in real time, while show commands do not. After PPP is set up, you should verify PPP link functionality. Good troubleshooting methods start from the physical layer and work upward through the OSI model:

1. Verify that all hardware is operating normally. 2. Check for configuration errors and use Cisco IOS commands to monitor communications over specific interfaces. To verify PPP encapsulation, issue the show interfaces command on the configured PPP interface as follows:

The show interfaces command output gives important information regarding the status of PPP: ✦ Both the serial interface and the line protocol must be in the “up” state in order to forward traffic. If the line is in the “up” state but the protocol is “down,” a clocking (keepalive) or framing problem exists. Check that the keepalives, clock rate, and encapsulation types between links match exactly. One end of the link may be set for PPP encapsulation, and the other end may be configured for HDLC. ✦ The configured encapsulation method is set for PPP, and LCP is in an open state. This means that the Layer 2 link establishment phase of LCP is successful. ✦ You can see that NCP Layer 3 IPCP packets are also functioning properly, and in an open state.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VII Chapter 3


RT1#show interfaces serial0 Serial0 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is HD64570 Internet address is 192.168.10.5/24 MTU 1500 bytes, BW 64 Kbit, DLY 20000 usec, rely 255/255, load 1/255 Encapsulation PPP, loopback not set, keepalive set (10 sec) LCP Open Open: IPCP

848


Now verify connectivity between link peers (in both directions) using the ping command: RT1#ping 10.10.10.6 Type escape sequence to abort. Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 10.10.10.6, timeout is 5 seconds: !!!!! Success rate is 100 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 70/70/82 ms

PPP link quality monitoring To monitor the quality of the serial link that is using PPP, enable link quality monitoring (LQM) by issuing the following command on the PPP interface: RT1(config-if)#ppp quality 75

Use the no form of this command to disable LQM: RT1(config-if)#no ppp quality

The number 75 represents the minimum accepted link quality in both incoming and outgoing directions: ✦ The outgoing quality is calculated by comparing the total number of packets and bytes sent to the total number of packets and bytes received by the destination node. ✦ The incoming quality is calculated by comparing the total number of packets and bytes received to the total number of packets and bytes sent by the destination node. If the link quality drops below 75 percent, the link is considered unusable and will be shut down. LQM uses a time lag to prevent frame looping, so the link does not go up and down continuously.

PPP debug commands A number of debug commands may be used to show the active PPP process on an interface. These commands assist the network administrator with troubleshooting link problems. The most useful PPP debug commands are as follows: ✦ debug ppp authentication: Outputs CHAP and PAP authentication exchange messages to the console and is used in troubleshooting scenarios to verify that authentication is actually taking place. An example of the debug ppp authentication command is as follows and is a subset of the debug ppp negotiation command:

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

850


The rlqr failure message in the second line indicates that the request to negotiate the Link Quality Protocol option is not accepted. The PPP threshold is set at 25, which is the interface’s maximum acceptable error percentage. A threshold value of 25 allows the router to maintain a minimum non-error percentage of 75. Anything over the minimum value will render the PPP link to a downed state, and the link will be considered unusable. ✦ debug ppp negotiation: Lists PPP negotiation processes between link end points and allows a network administrator to pinpoint where PPP errors are coming from. The following is an example output of the debug ppp negotiation command, with some important areas (which help verify connectivity) highlighted: Router#debug ppp negotiation 08:36:21: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Serial1/1, changed state to up 08:36:21: Se1/1 PPP: Treating connection as a dedicated line 08:36:21: Se1/1 PPP: Phase is ESTABLISHING, Active Open 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: O CONFREQ [Closed] id 5 len 15 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: AuthProto CHAP (0x0305C22305) 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: MagicNumber 0x444DB72C (0x0506444DB72C) 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: I CONFREQ [REQsent] id 39 len 15 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: AuthProto CHAP (0x0305C22305) 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: MagicNumber 0x5056251B (0x05034145611A) 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: O CONFACK [REQsent] id 39 len 15 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: AuthProto CHAP (0x0305C22305) 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: MagicNumber 0x5056251B (0x05034145611A) 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: I CONFACK [ACKsent] id 5 len 15 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: AuthProto CHAP (0x0305C22305) 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: MagicNumber 0x444DB72C (0x0506444DB72C) 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: State is Open 08:36:21: Se1/1 PPP: Phase is AUTHENTICATING, by both 08:36:21: Se1/1 CHAP: O CHALLENGE id 2 len 25 from “RT1” 08:36:21: Se1/1 CHAP: I CHALLENGE id 3 len 25 from “RT2” 08:36:21: Se1/1 CHAP: O RESPONSE id 3 len 25 from “RT1” 08:36:21: Se1/1 CHAP: I RESPONSE id 2 len 25 from “RT2” 08:36:21: Se1/1 CHAP: O SUCCESS id 2 len 4 08:36:21: Se1/1 CHAP: I SUCCESS id 3 len 4 08:36:21: Se1/1 PPP: Phase is UP 08:36:21: Se1/1 CDPCP: O CONFREQ [Closed] id 3 len 4 08:36:21: Se1/1 IPCP: I CONFREQ [Not negotiated] id 3 len 10 08:36:21: Se1/1 IPCP: Address 192.168.10.5 (0x0306C8A84410) 08:36:21: Se1/1 LCP: O PROTREJ [Open] id 6 len 16 protocol IPCP (0x80210103000A0306C8A84410) 08:36:21: Se1/1 CDPCP: I CONFREQ [REQsent] id 3 len 4 08:36:21: Se1/1 CDPCP: O CONFACK [REQsent] id 3 len 4 08:36:21: Se1/1 CDPCP: I CONFACK [ACKsent] id 3 len 4 08:36:21: Se1/1 CDPCP: State is Open 08:36:22: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Serial1/1, changed state to up

✦ debug ppp packet: Shows the sending and receiving of PPP packets.

www.it-ebooks.info


851

Common PPP troubleshooting and monitoring IOS commands show interfaces: Provides information regarding configured interfaces. Shows line status, encapsulation type, and the state of LCP and NCP. show interfaces serial: Displays interface configuration for serial interfaces. show ip route: Verifies whether an IP network route exits.

debug ppp: Allows an administrator to view and analyze the exchange of PPP frames. Use caution when running debug commands in a live production environment. A performance penalty may occur, impacting the router’s CPU and memory resources, and can cause slowdowns and other problems on the network.

show running-config: Displays the router’s active, running configuration.

debug ppp chap: Useful in determining the cause of unsuccessful CHAP authentications.

show dialer: Shows diagnostic information for Dial on Demand Routing (DDR)–configured interfaces.

debug ppp compression: Displays useful information regarding PPP packet compression.

show ppp multilink: Allows an administrator to verify PPP multilink functionality.

debug dialer: Shows packet statistics received on a dialer interface.

ppp quality: Denotes the PPP link quality in percentage form. The link is shut down when the line quality drops below the determined acceptable percent value.

debug ppp error: Displays connection and operational errors on a PPP link.

ppp callback accept: Enables PPP server callback requests from clients. The dialer interface is set up to function as the PPP callback server and accept client requests for callbacks. ppp callback request: Enables PPP clients to request callbacks from servers. The dialer interface is set up to function as the PPP callback client and request PPP callbacks from the server. ppp compress: Enables compression of payload encapsulated in PPP frames. ppp multilink: Enables multilink aggregation into a single virtual circuit on a specific interface used for PPP.

debug ppp multilink events: Shows packet event information regarding a multilink virtual circuit. debug ppp negotiation: Displays packets used during the initial setup and negotiation process of the PPP link. debug ppp packet: Displays incoming and outgoing PPP packets. debug ppp pap: Useful in determining the cause of unsuccessful PAP authentications. debug serial interface: Shows whether a serial interface has failed. Useful for troubleshooting connection and timing issues and knowing whether serial keepalive counters are incrementing.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VII Chapter 3


show controllers: Shows the interface cable type (DCE or DTE) and clock rate, if available.

debug ppp authentication: Useful in debugging CHAP and PAP errors by analyzing the packet transfer pertaining to PPP authentication.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Chapter 4: Frame Relay Exam Objectives ✓ Understanding Frame Relay WAN connections ✓ Examining permanent and switched virtual circuits ✓ Defining link status control and LMI ✓ Controlling congestion using DE, FECN, and BECN ✓ Introducing Frame Relay address resolution using Inverse ARP ✓ Managing Frame Relay ✓ Configuring Cisco interfaces using Frame Relay ✓ Monitoring and troubleshooting Frame Relay ✓ Configuring Frame Relay using the Cisco SDM GUI

Introducing Frame Relay

F

rame Relay is an efficient, high-performance, Layer 2 packet-switched WAN technology that shares available bandwidth among users on a packet-switched network medium. Like Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) and High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC), Frame Relay operates at the physical and data link layers of the OSI model and relies on upper-layer protocols to provide the mechanism for data error correction and flow control. For instance, TCP — not Frame Relay — is responsible for providing the errorchecking functionality for IP-based packets. The Frame Relay protocol is also considered to be a replacement for network layer X.25 technology and was originally designed for use with Integrated Services Digital Networks (ISDNs). Today, Frame Relay is a widely popular standard used over a variety of network interfaces and is preferred to X.25 technology. It is a more streamlined, bandwidth-efficient method of connecting local-area networks (LANs) together via wide-area networks (WANs). Frame Relay also provides virtual circuit multiplexing over a single physical link.

Purpose of Frame Relay WAN connections Frame Relay interconnects several remote sites over a WAN using one or more interfaces from each sites gateway router. Frame Relay devices are categorized as either data terminal equipment (DTE) or data communications equipment (DCE). DTE devices reside at the customer’s location where DTE communications originate from. Data terminal equipment consists of

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info


857

PVCs are used to transfer data between DTE devices across the Frame Relay network. PVCs function in one of two operational states: • Data transfer: Data traffic is flowing between DTE devices using the permanent virtual circuit as the transport mechanism. • Idle: No data transfers are occurring on the active link. However, the connection between DTE devices remains up, ready to transmit data. Although the link is idle, the connection is established, waiting to transfer data. Data may be transmitted at any time without requiring connection reestablishment. ✦ Switched virtual circuits (SVCs): SVCs are connections that are maintained on a temporary basis. SVCs are setup to transfer data for a specific time only. Once data is no longer being transmitted over the link, the SVC is closed. After link termination occurs, a new SVC must be re-established to send additional data. SVCs help reduce communications costs to an organization (compared to PVCs) by limiting the lifespan of the link. However, SVCs are not as efficient as PVCs since a connection must be established before data is transmitted. The four operational phases used to establish and terminate a switched virtual circuit are as follows: • Call setup: During this first phase, a logical circuit is implemented between customer DTE devices.

• Idle: Idle connection status indicates no data is currently exchanged on the link. With PVCs, DTE devices remain active and are not terminated. SVCs are temporary connections and will be terminated if they remain in an idle state longer than specified. • Call termination: During this final phase, the SVC virtual circuit is shut down. If additional data must be sent between DTE devices after call termination has already taken place, a completely new SVC must be generated. Only then will the additional data be transferred.

Identifying virtual circuits using data-link connection identifiers (DLCIs) Frame Relay requires a method to identify single virtual circuits located between customer premises equipment and the service provider’s Frame Relay switches. DLCIs are unique numeric values assigned by the service provider to identify individual links. These numbers refer to logical paths through the Frame Relay network, where each segment of the virtual circuit may be assigned different DLCI values for identification and data transmission purposes.

www.it-ebooks.info

Frame Relay

• Data transfer: Once a virtual circuit has been established, data is transfer between the DTE devices may begin.

Book VII Chapter 4

www.it-ebooks.info


859

✦ Access rate: This is the maximum data transfer speed between two DCEs. The access rate is defined on a per port basis on each DCE device. The data transfer speed sets the clock speed of the link between the DCEs and determines how many data frames enter or leave each DCE per second. ✦ Committed information rate (CIR): This is the maximum bandwidth size guaranteed by the service provider to the customer for data transmission over the WAN link. The CIR is in theory “guaranteed,” but in reality it is actually a fluctuating value (in bits per second) and cannot be relied upon at 100 percent. The CIR is measured over a period of time. The average measured CIR is called the Committed Rate Measurement Interval (Tc). There may be times when the actual data rate exceeds, or Bursts (Be), over the defined CIR. The Committed Burst (Bc) rate is the maximum number of bits sent during the measured CIR (that is, during the Committed Rate Measurement Interval).

Frame Relay link status control using LMI Frame Relay uses a signaling control protocol between the customer’s DTE device and the provider’s DCE device to manage the connection and monitor the device status across the link.

✦ Multicasting: Conserves bandwidth by delivering routing and address resolution updates to specific multicast groups using DLCIs in the 1019–1022 range. ✦ Global addressing: Specifies that local DLCIs are uniquely assigned to devices on a global network scale. Each uniquely assigned DLCI represents the DTE address on the Frame Relay network. Global addressing allows one router to be reached by all other remote routers using the same DLCI. ✦ Virtual circuit status messages: Provide continuous communication, synchronization, and status monitoring on DLCIs connected from the customer’s site’s DTE devices to the service provider’s DCE devices. ✦ Keepalive: A 10-second interval (by default) that determines the time value to wait before declaring the link between the DCE and DTE down or unusable. Data must be received between DTE and DCE devices during this time; otherwise the connection will terminate.

www.it-ebooks.info

Book VII Chapter 4

Frame Relay

This signaling standard is known as the Local Management Interface (LMI) and was designed by Cisco and a consortium of developers to provide extensions and enhancements to the original Frame Relay protocol. LMI adds the following features:

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

874

Monitoring and Troubleshooting Frame Relay

the router’s hardware resources and may negatively impact network performance, these commands should only be used in troubleshooting instances, not during normal network operation. The show commands may be used whenever needed to display and verify proper Frame Relay operation. Monitoring and troubleshooting Frame Relay problems may be categorized into four steps:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Verify the physical connection between the router and the CSU/DSU. Verify the LMI exchange between the DTE and DCE. Verify that the state of the virtual circuit is set to “active.” Verify that encapsulation types are identical between routers.

The following are the most commonly used commands when monitoring and troubleshooting Frame Relay networks: ✦ show interface serial: Lists information on the physical status, line protocol status, and encapsulation type of an interface or subinterface. The show interface serial command allows an administrator to view the type of encapsulation and LMI used, keepalive value, and if the interface is configured as a DCE or DTE device. The show interface serial command provides functionality verification of the physical connection between the DTE and the CSU/DSU and should be used as the first step when troubleshooting Frame Relay networks. If the serial interface status is down, it could be caused by a faulty cable or interface connector on the router. The following is sample output from the show interface serial command for the serial1 interface with LMI enabled: Router#show interface serial 1 Serial1 is up, line protocol is down Hardware is MCI Serial Internet address is 192.168.200.4, subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 MTU 1500 bytes, BW 1544 Kbit, DLY 20000 usec, rely 246/255, load 1/255 Encapsulation FRAME-RELAY, loopback not set, keepalive set (10 sec) LMI enq sent 2, LMI stat recvd 0, LMI upd recvd 0, DTE LMI down LMI enq recvd 266, LMI stat sent 264, LMI upd sent 0 LMI DLCI 200 LMI type is CISCO frame relay DTE Last input 0:00:05, output 0:00:03, output hang never Last clearing of “show interface” counters 0:32:31 Output queue 0/40, 0 drops; input queue 0/75, 0 drops Five minute input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec Five minute output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec 327 packets input, 8648 bytes, 0 no buffer Received 0 broadcasts, 0 runts, 0 giants 0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 ignored, 0 abort 0 input packets with dribble condition detected 282 packets output, 4502 bytes, 0 underruns 0 output errors, 0 collisions, 5 interface resets, 0 restarts 180 carrier transitions

www.it-ebooks.info

Monitoring and Troubleshooting Frame Relay

875

✦ show frame-relay lmi: Displays statistics about the Local Management Interface (LMI) for interfaces configured to use LMI. The show frame relay lmi command shows the configured LMI type and the LMI traffic statistics. The following is sample output from the show frame-relay lmi command for a DTE-configured interface: Router#show frame-relay lmi LMI Statistics for interface Serial1 (Frame Relay DTE) LMI TYPE = ANSI Invalid Unnumbered info 0 Invalid Prot Disc 0 Invalid dummy Call Ref 0 Invalid Msg Type 0 Invalid Status Message 0 Invalid Lock Shift 0 Invalid Information ID 0 Invalid Report IE Len 0 Invalid Report Request 0 Invalid Keep IE Len 0 Num Status Enq. Sent 4 Num Status msgs Rcvd 0 Num Update Status Rcvd 0 Num Status Timeouts 4

✦ show frame-relay map: Shows current Frame Relay DLCI map entries and specific configuration information for each entry. The show frame relay map command lists mappings between DLCIs and next-hop addresses. Mappings created by both dynamic Inverse ARP and static assignment (using the frame-relay map command) are shown. This command is not available on point-to-point connections. The following is an example of the show frame-relay map command output for a static entry: Router#show frame-relay map Serial1 (up): IP 192.168.2.2 dlci 200(0x15,0x0444), static CISCO, BW= 56000, status defined, active

Router#show frame-relay map Serial1/2 (up): ip 204.218.210.2 dlci 500(0x182,0x4110), dynamic, broadcast,, status defined, active Serial1/2 (up): ip 204.218.210.3 dlci 700(0x2C4,0x3B42), dynamic, broadcast,, status defined, active

✦ show frame-relay pvc: Displays Frame Relay interface statistics regarding permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) and the state of the connection. The connection may be active, inactive, or deleted. The show frame-relay pvc command also shows dropped packets and network congestion from FECN and BECN notifiers. The following is sample output from the show frame-relay pvc command: Router#show frame-relay pvc PVC Statistics for interface Serial1 (Frame Relay DCE) DLCI = 100, DLCI USAGE = SWITCHED, PVC STATUS = ACTIVE input pkts 1210 output pkts 824 in bytes 202402112 out bytes 18012123 dropped pkts 21 in FECN pkts 120 in BECN pkts 141 out FECN pkts 214 out BECN pkts 145 in DE pkts 0 out DE pkts 0 pvc create time 0:03:03 last time pvc status changed 0:03:03

www.it-ebooks.info

Frame Relay

Here is an example of a dynamic entry:

Book VII Chapter 4

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

Appendix A: About the CD On the CD-ROM ✓ System requirements ✓ Using the CD with Windows and Mac ✓ Prep Test with hundreds of sample questions to make sure you’re

ready for the CCNA exam ✓ Troubleshooting

T

his appendix is designed to give you an overview of the system requirements for your system in order to run the software found on the accompanying CD. I also include a description of what you can find on the CD that will help you prepare for your exam.

System Requirements Make sure that your computer meets the minimum system requirements shown in the following list. If your computer does not meet most of these requirements, you might have problems using the software and files on the CD. For the latest and greatest information, please refer to the ReadMe file located at the root of the CD-ROM. ✦ A PC running Microsoft Windows 2000 or later ✦ A Macintosh running Apple OS X or later ✦ An Internet connection ✦ A CD-ROM drive If you need more information on the basics, check out these books published by Wiley: PCs For Dummies, 11th Edition, by Dan Gookin; Macs For Dummies, 10th Edition, by Edward C. Baig; Windows XP For Dummies, 2nd Edition, Windows 7 For Dummies, and Windows Vista For Dummies, all by Andy Rathbone.

Using the CD To install the items from the CD to your hard drive, follow these steps.

www.it-ebooks.info

882

What You Will Find on the CD

1. Insert the CD into your computer’s CD-ROM drive to bring up the license agreement. Note to Windows users: The interface won’t launch if you have AutoRun disabled. In that case, choose Start➪Run. In the dialog box that appears, type D:\start.exe. Replace D with the proper letter if your CD-ROM drive uses a different letter. If you don’t know the letter, see how your CD-ROM drive is listed under My Computer (XP and earlier) or Computer (Vista and 7).

2. Click OK. Note for Mac Users: The CD icon will appear on your desktop. Just double-click the icon to open the CD and then double-click the Start icon.

3. Read through the license agreement and then click the Accept button to use the CD. The CD interface appears, from which you can install the programs and run the demos with just a click of a button (or two).

What You Will Find on the CD The following sections are a summary of the software on the CD-ROM included with this book.

Prep Test The Prep Test is designed to simulate the actual CCNA test — a question with multiple choice answers. The Prep Test on the CD-ROM is not adaptive, though, and it is not timed, so you might want to time yourself to gauge your speed. After you answer each question, you find out whether you answered the question correctly. And if you answered correctly, you are on your way to A+ success! If you answered incorrectly, you are told the correct answer with a brief explanation of why it is the correct answer. The Prep Test includes all the Prep Test questions from the end of each chapter in the book as well as hundreds of additional questions. If you perform well on the Prep Test, you’re probably ready to tackle the real thing.

www.it-ebooks.info

Troubleshooting

883

Troubleshooting I tried my best to compile programs that work on most computers with the minimum system requirements. Alas, your computer may differ, and some programs might not work properly for some reason. The two likeliest problems are that you don’t have enough memory (RAM) for the programs you want to use or you have other programs running that are affecting installation or running of a program. If you get an error message such as Not enough memory or Setup cannot continue, try one or more of the following suggestions and then try using the software again: ✦ Turn off any antivirus software running on your computer. Installation programs sometimes mimic virus activity and might make your computer incorrectly believe that it is being infected by a virus. ✦ Close all running programs. The more programs you have running, the less memory is available to other programs. Installation programs typically update files and programs; so if you keep other programs running, installation might not work properly. ✦ Have your local computer store add more RAM to your computer. This is, admittedly, a drastic and somewhat expensive step. However, adding more memory can really help the speed of your computer and allow more programs to run at the same time. If you have trouble with the CD-ROM, please call the Wiley Product Technical Support phone number at 1-800-762-2974. Outside the United States, call 1-317-572-3994. You can also contact Wiley Product Technical Support at http://support.wiley.com. Wiley Publishing will provide technical support only for installation and other general quality control items. For technical support on the applications themselves, consult the program’s vendor or author. To place additional orders or to request information about other Wiley products, please call 1-877-762-2974.

www.it-ebooks.info

884


www.it-ebooks.info

Appendix B: Cisco CCNA Exam Preparation

C

isco certification is unique in the high tech industry since Cisco networks are at the heart of the Internet and they interconnect a variety of different types of computer systems. Whereas host operating system certifications attest your knowledge about a specific operating system, Cisco certification attests your knowledge about networking concepts and networking devices that interconnect all computer devices, thereby opening many doors for you. The benefit of the Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) Certification is proof that you know and have validated the ability to install, configure, operate, and troubleshoot medium-size routed and switched networks, including implementation and verification of connections to remote sites in a WAN. The CCNA Certification can be presented to employers and clients alike as proof of competency and skill in this area.

CCNA: Foundation of Cisco Certification Pyramid Cisco created several certification paths. All start with the CCNA certification. In other words, whether you would like to work on the networks that power the internet, or you would like to work on Voice over IP (VOIP) internet telephony, or you would like to work on storage networks, or on wireless networks, the CCNA certification ensures that you have a common core networking knowledge that can be applied to several networking applications.

CCNA Skills Once you obtain the CCNA certification, Cisco attests that: ✦ At a high level • You can install, configure, operate and troubleshoot medium-sized local area networks, wide area networks, as well as wireless networks. This includes switched and routed networks. • You can tune parameters on Cisco devices to improve network performance, reliability, and security.

www.it-ebooks.info

886

CCNA Adaptive Testing ✦ Specifically • You have a sound knowledge of routed protocols (IP, IPv6) and routing protocols (RIP, RIP v2, EIGRP, OSPF) • You are comfortable with LAN switching, VLANs, Ethernet, Access Control Lists (ACLs) and network security. • You can configure Serial Line Interface Protocol, Frame Relay, Cable/ DSL, PPP, HLDC These topics are tested in the CCNA exam. Hence, you need to master these skills before you take the exam. Read this book to acquire these skills. Keep in mind that exam preparation questions at the end of each chapter are extremely important to consolidate your knowledge. Make sure you review all Prep Test sections at the end of each chapter in this book.

CCNA Adaptive Testing You can become CCNA either by taking one composite exam or by taking two exams: ✦ 640-802 CCNA Composite: This is a single exam that combines testing objectives of the ICND1 and ICND2 exams in a single package. It contains 45 to 55 questions. You have 90 minutes to complete it. Passing mark is 85%. This exam costs $250. ✦ 640-822 ICND1 and 640-816 ICND2: These are the Interconnecting Cisco Networking Devices Part 1 and Part 2 exams. You get a CCENT certification (Cisco Certified Entry Networking Technician) once you pass ICND1. However, you still need to pass ICND2 to get the CCNA certification. 640822 ICND1 asks between 50 and 60 questions. You have 90 minutes to complete it. 640-816 ICND2 contains between 45 and 55 questions. You have 75 minutes to complete it. The ICND exams cost $125 each, for a total of $250. Keep in mind that the duration of the exam and the number of questions vary for each exam. CCNA exams are adaptive computer based tests. The questions asked, and the number of questions asked, depend on how well you are doing on each topic. The answers you give to questions asked early in the exam determine which questions you will be asked next. The CCNA exams include several types of questions: ✦ Multiple choices with one correct answer ✦ Multiple choices with more than one correct answer ✦ Fill in the blank ✦ Switch and router simulation ✦ Drag and drop

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

888

Making Arrangements to Take the Exams

Making Arrangements to Take the Exams The CCNA exam can be scheduled at Pearson VUE testing centers. For more information about scheduling your exam, check http://www.vue.com/cisco/schedule/ The cost to take the CCNA exam is $250 (US).

The Day the Earth Stood Still: Exam Day Knowing what to expect on the day of the exam can take some of the pressure off of you. The following sections look at the testing process. Before you leave for the test center, make sure you have the necessary credentials and payment: ✦ Government-issued ID with your legal name ✦ Cisco Certification ID (like CSCO00000001) or Test ID number If you have taken a Cisco exam before, using the same Cisco Certification ID avoids duplicate records and delays in receiving proper credit for your exams. ✦ Company name ✦ Valid email address ✦ Method of payment

Arriving at the exam location Get to the exam location early on the day of the exam. You should arrive at the testing center 15 to 30 minutes before the exam starts. This keeps you from being rushed and gives you some temporal elbow room in case there are any delays. It is also not so long that you will have time to sit and stew about the exam. Get there, get into a relaxed frame of mind, and get into the exam. When you get to the test site, before you sign in, take a few minutes to get accustomed to the testing center. Get a small drink of water. Use the restroom if you need to. The test will be 90 minutes, so you should be able to last that long before another break. You might want to check the center’s policy for bringing a beverage with you; some centers will allow it, and others will not.

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

www.it-ebooks.info

891

2009 Examination Objectives The exams covered in the matrix and their column key identifiers are: ✦ 640-802 CCNA Exam (C) ✦ 640-822 ICND1 (1) ✦ 640-816 ICND2 (2)

2009 Examination Objectives Domain/Objective/Description

C

1

2

BookChapter

Describe the purpose and functions of various network devices

X

X

1-1

Select the components required to meet a network specification

X

X

1-6

Use the OSI and TCP/IP models and their associated protocols to explain how data flows in a network

X

X

1-2, 1-3

Describe common networked applications including web applications

X

X

1-1

Describe the purpose and basic operation of the protocols in the OSI and TCP models

X

X

1-2, 1-3

Describe the impact of applications (Voice Over IP and Video Over IP) on a network

X

X

3-6

Interpret network diagrams

X

X

Determine the path between two hosts across a network

X

X

1-7

Describe the components required for network and Internet communications

X

X

1-1, 1-3

Identify and correct common network problems at layers 1, 2, 3 and 7 using a layered model approach

X

X

1-2

Differentiate between LAN/WAN operation and features

X

X

1-6, 1-7

Select the appropriate media, cables, ports, and connectors to connect switches to other network devices and hosts

X

X

1-6

Explain the technology and media access control method for Ethernet networks

X

X

1-6

Describe how a network works

Configure, verify and troubleshoot a switch with VLANs and interswitch communications

(continued)

www.it-ebooks.info

892

2009 Examination Objectives

Domain/Objective/Description

C

1

2

BookChapter

Explain network segmentation and basic traffic management concepts

X

X

Explain basic switching concepts and the operation of Cisco switches

X

X

Perform and verify initial switch configuration tasks including remote access management

X

X

3-2

Verify network status and switch operation using basic utilities (including: ping, traceroute, telnet, SSH, arp, ipconfig), SHOW & DEBUG commands

X

X

3-7

Identify, prescribe, and resolve common switched network media issues, configuration issues, auto negotiation, and switch hardware failures

X

X

3-7

Describe enhanced switching technologies (including: VTP, RSTP, VLAN, PVSTP, 802.1q)

X

X

3-5

Describe how VLANs create logically separate networks and the need for routing between them

X

X

3-5

Configure, verify, and troubleshoot VLANs

X

X

3-5

Configure, verify, and troubleshoot trunking on Cisco switches

X

X

3-5

Configure, verify, and troubleshoot interVLAN routing

X

X

3-5

Configure, verify, and troubleshoot VTP

X

X

3-5

Configure, verify, and troubleshoot RSTP operation

X

X

3-4

Interpret the output of various show and debug commands to verify the operational status of a Cisco switched network.

X

X

3-7

Implement and verify basic switch security (including: port security, trunk access, management vlan other than vlan1, port security, deactivate ports, etc.)

X

X

X

3-1, 3-4, 3-5

Describe the operation and benefits of using private and public IP addressing

X

X

2-3

Explain the operation and benefits of using DHCP and DNS

X

X

2-2

Configure, verify and troubleshoot DHCP and DNS operation on a router.(including: CLI/SDM)

X

X

Implement static and dynamic addressing services for hosts in a LAN environment

X

X

Calculate and apply an addressing scheme including VLSM IP addressing design to a network

X

X

1-6

Implement an IP addressing scheme and IP Services to meet network requirements in a medium-size Enterprise branch office network

www.it-ebooks.info

X

2-4

893



C

Determine the appropriate classless addressing scheme using VLSM and summarization to satisfy addressing requirements in a LAN/WAN environment

1

2

BookChapter

X

X

2-4

Describe the technological requirements for running IPv6 in conjunction with IPv4 (including: protocols, dual stack, tunneling, etc).

X

X

2-5

Describe IPv6 addresses

X

X

2-5

Identify and correct common problems associated with IP addressing and host configurations

X

X

X

2-3

Describe basic routing concepts (including: packet forwarding, router lookup process)

X

X

4-1

Describe the operation of Cisco routers (including: router bootup process, POST, router components)

X

X

4-2

Select the appropriate media, cables, ports, and connectors to connect routers to other network devices and hosts

X

X

1-6

Configure, verify, and troubleshoot RIPv2

X

X

4-4

Access and utilize the router to set basic parameters.(including: CLI/SDM)

X

X

4-2

Connect, configure, and verify operation status of a device interface

X

X

4-2

Verify device configuration and network connectivity using ping, traceroute, telnet, SSH or other utilities

X

X

3-7

Perform and verify routing configuration tasks for a static or default route given specific routing requirements

X

X

4-3

Manage IOS configuration files. (including: save, edit, upgrade, restore)

X

X

4-2

Manage Cisco IOS

X

X

4-2

Compare and contrast methods of routing and routing protocols

X

X

4-3, 4-4, 4-5, 46

Configure, verify, and troubleshoot OSPF

X

X

4-6

Configure, verify, and troubleshoot EIGRP

X

Verify network connectivity (including: using ping, traceroute, and telnet or SSH)

X

Troubleshoot routing issues

X

Configure, verify, and troubleshoot basic router operation and routing on Cisco devices

X

X

4-5

X

3-7

X

4-2, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6 (continued)

www.it-ebooks.info

894



C

1

2

BookChapter

Verify router hardware and software operation using SHOW & DEBUG commands.

X

X

X

4-2, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6

Implement basic router security (including password and physical security)

X

X

X

4-2

Describe standards associated with wireless media (including: IEEE WI-FI Alliance, ITU/FCC)

X

X

5-1

Identify and describe the purpose of the components in a small wireless network. (Including: SSID, BSS, ESS)

X

X

5-1

Identify the basic parameters to configure on a wireless network to ensure that devices connect to the correct access point

X

X

5-3

Compare and contrast wireless security features and capabilities of WPA security (including: open, WEP, WPA-1/2)

X

X

5-2

Identify common issues with implementing wireless networks. (Including: Interface, misconfiguration)

X

X

5-1, 5-2, 5-3

Describe today’s increasing network security threats and explain the need to implement a comprehensive security policy to mitigate the threats

X

X

6-1

Explain general methods to mitigate common security threats to network devices, hosts, and applications

X

X

6-1

Describe the functions of common security appliances and applications

X

X

6-1

Describe security recommended practices including initial steps to secure network devices

X

X

6-1

Explain and select the appropriate administrative tasks required for a WLAN

Identify security threats to a network and describe general methods to mitigate those threats

Implement, verify, and troubleshoot NAT and ACLs in a medium-size Enterprise branch office network Describe the purpose and types of ACLs

X

X

6-2

Configure and apply ACLs based on network filtering requirements.(including: CLI/SDM)

X

X

6-2

Configure and apply an ACLs to limit telnet and SSH access to the router using (including: SDM/CLI)

X

X

4-2, 6-2

www.it-ebooks.info


1

895


C

2

BookChapter

Verify and monitor ACLs in a network environment

X

X

6-2

Troubleshoot ACL issues

X

X

6-2

Explain the basic operation of NAT

X

X

X

6-3

Configure NAT for given network requirements using (including: CLI/SDM)

X

X

X

6-3

Troubleshoot NAT issues

X

X

6-3

Implement and verify WAN links Describe different methods for connecting to a WAN

X

X

Configure and verify a basic WAN serial connection

X

X

Configure and verify Frame Relay on Cisco routers

X

X

7-4

Troubleshoot WAN implementation issues

X

X

7-2, 7-3, 7-4

Describe VPN technology (including: importance, benefits, role, impact, components)

X

X

6-4

Configure and verify a PPP connection between Cisco routers

X

X

7-3

www.it-ebooks.info

7-1 7-1

Index Symbols & Numerics - (delimiting character), 337, 539 ? command. See help (?) command {} notation, 569 | (pipe) sign, 569 2.4-GHz band overview, 653–654 WLAN standards, 657–661 2-based numbering system. See binary system 2n (binary powers of two) numbering system, 239–240 3DES (Triple DES), 788 5-GHz band defined, 653 overview, 655 WLAN standards, 660–661 6to4 tunneling, 282 8 Position 8 Contact connector. See RJ-45 connector 8P8C connector. See RJ-45 connector 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GigE) 10GBASE-T, 191 implementing on LANs, 78 over fiber-optic cabling, 73–75 over twisted-pair cabling, 73 overview, 75 STP path cost, 393

10/100 PC connection. See PC (10/100 PC) connection, Cisco IP phone 10/100 SW (uplink) connection, Cisco IP phone, 447–449 10BASE2 (Thinnet), 67, 75 10BASE5 (Thicknet), 66–67, 75 10-based numbering system. See decimal system 10BASE-T, 67, 75, 191 10GBASE-ER (IEEE 802.3 C49 64B/66B), 74–75 10GBASE-LR (IEEE 802.3 C49 64B/66B), 74 10GBASE-SR (IEEE 802.3 C49 64B/66B), 73–74 10GBASE-T, 75, 191 10GigE. See 10 Gigabit Ethernet 10-Mbps Ethernet 10BASE2, 67, 75 10BASE5, 66–67, 75 10BASE-T, 67, 191 overview, 75 STP path cost, 393 16-based numbering system. See hexadecimal system 60-pin serial connection, 810 64-bit encryption, WEP, 95 64-bit Extended Unique Identifier. See EUI-64 100BASE-FX (IEEE 802.3u), 69, 75 100BASE-SX (IEEE 802.3u), 70

www.it-ebooks.info

100BASE-T full-duplex transmission, 66 half-duplex transmission, 65 overview, 191 100BASE-T2 (IEEE 802.3y), 68 100BASE-T4 (IEEE 802.3u), 68, 75 100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3u), 69, 75 100-Mbps Fast Ethernet. See Fast Ethernet 128-bit encryption, WEP, 95 1000BASE-LH (IEEE 802.3z), 72 1000BASE-LX (IEEE 802.3z), 71–72, 75 1000BASE-SX (IEEE 802.3z), 72, 75 1000BASE-T (IEEE 802.3ab), 70–71, 75, 191 1000BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3ab), 71 1000BASE-ZX (IEEE 802.3z), 72–73 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet (GigE). See Gigabit Ethernet 10000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet. See 10 Gigabit Ethernet

A AAA. See authentication, authorization, and accounting ABM (asynchronous balanced mode), HDLC, 825

898


absorption, defined, 685 access (desktop) layer (Cisco hierarchical model) overview, 103, 105, 392 routers best suited for, 518 scalability, 106 specialization, 105 switches best suited for, 313 access attack, 723–724 access control entry (ACE), 739, 746, 752–753 access control list (ACL) commands, 749, 750 creating, 742–755 distribution layer, 104 keywords, 748 managing, 740–742, 756–758 overview, 726–727 purpose of, 735–738 rules for, 758 troubleshooting, 755–758 types of, 738–740 access layer switch core layer, 102–103 Ethernet LANs, 78 access mode, DTP, 430 Access Mode VLAN field, 477 access point (AP). See also LWAPP automatic tuning, 688 autonomous mode wireless networking, 681 Cisco Aironet, 695 Cisco GUI, 709–710 functions of, 696

infrastructure mode wireless networking, 679–680 layout of, 685–688 lightweight mode wireless networking, 681–683 management access, 672 SSIDs, 671–672 VPNs, 669 WEP, 668 WLANs, configuring, 705–707 access port DTP, 426, 430 overview, 427–428 VoIP, 446, 451–452 access rate, reserving bandwidth using, 858–859 access-class command, 750 ACE (access control entry), 739, 746, 752–753 acknowledgment (ACK) connection-oriented transport, 29 EIGRP, 612 flow control, 30–31 IP spoofing, 725 positive acknowledgment and retransmission process, 31 TCP, 203 three-way handshake process, 30 WLANs, 659 ACL. See access control list ACL number, defined, 750 active destination network, defined, 619 AD. See administrative distance

www.it-ebooks.info

ad hoc mode defined, 675 WLANs, 675–679 Adaptive Security Appliance (ASA) firewall ASDM, 709 GUI, 711 Adaptive Security Device Manager (ASDM), 709 Adaptive Wireless Path Protocol (AWPP), 697 Address field Frame Relay frames, 860–861 HDLC frames, 824 PPP frames, 833 address learning, defined, 305 Address Resolution Protocol. See ARP; RARP Address-Family Identifier (AFI) field RIPv1, 595 RIPv2, 596 administrative distance (AD) EIGRP, 609 overview, 573–574 weighting protocols by, 589 administrative VLAN. See VLAN 1 ADSL (asymmetric digital subscriber line) circuit-switched connections, 87 overview, 818 ADSL transceiver unit (ATU), defined, 818

Index

Advanced Encryption Standard. See AES Advanced Firewall Configuration Wizard screen, SDM, 757 Advanced Research Projects Agency (ARPA), 168–169 AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption, 668 IPsec, 788 WLAN security, 705 AFI field. See AddressFamily Identifier field AfriNIC (African Network Information Centre), 266 agent (zombie), 724 AH. See Authentication Header all-nodes multicast group, IPv6, 271 all-routers multicast group, IPv6, 271 alternate port, 406 %Ambiguous command error message, 123 American Registry for Internet Numbers (ARIN), 266 American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) table, 56 amplitude defined, 651–652 modulating, 653 analog telephone lines, 87 ANDing binary numbers, 256 ANSI LMIs, 860

antispyware, 723 any keyword ACLs, 748 function of, 750 anycasting, 269, 271 AP. See access point; LWAPP (Lightweight Access Point Protocol) APIPA (Automatic Private IP Addressing), 677 AP-Manager Interface, WLCs, 693 APNIC (Asian Pacific Network Information Centre), 266 AppleTalk, 609 application layer (DoD model), 179–180 application layer (OSI reference model) encapsulation process, 180–182 information exchange between layers, 175–177, 188 overview, 16–17, 177–178, 205–207 PDUs, 43–44 placement in stack, 174–176 SSL, 791 TCP/IP applications at, 27 TCP/IP protocols at, 26 application layer (TCP/IP), 208 archive keyword, 347, 549 ARIN (American Registry for Internet Numbers), 266 ARM (asynchronous response mode), HDLC, 825

www.it-ebooks.info

899

ARP (Address Resolution Protocol). See also RARP command-line screen shot, 196 compared to Inverse ARP, 863 data link layer, 37, 196 determining MAC addresses, 308 function of, 196 overview, 173, 225 proxy, 226 purpose of, 226 sending frames to remote network, 370, 372–374 sending frames within LAN, 369–371 ARP -a command, 196 ARP -s command, 196 ARPA (Advanced Research Projects Agency), 168–169 ARPANET origin of, 168–169 RIP, 587 AS. See autonomous system as_id (routing domain ID), 615 ASA firewall. See Adaptive Security Appliance firewall ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) table, 56 ASDM (Adaptive Security Device Manager), 709 Asian Pacific Network Information Centre (APNIC), 266

900


ASN (Autonomous System Number). See BGP asymmetric cryptography, defined, 788 asymmetric digital subscriber line. See ADSL asynchronous balanced mode (ABM), HDLC, 825 asynchronous response mode (ARM), HDLC, 825 ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell-switched connections, 90 overview, 813–814 ATU (ADSL transceiver unit), defined, 818 Authenticate-ACK message, PAP, 839 Authenticate-NAK message, PAP, 839 authentication. See also IPsec; password ACLs, 737 asymmetric cryptography, 788 CHAP, 840–841, 844–845 data origin, 786 LCP, 838 PAP, 839–840, 844–845 PPP, 833, 843 router, 554–562 switch, 352–365 VPNs, 728 Web authentication process, 708–709 WEP, 667–668 WLANs, 667–670

authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) enabling on routers, 799 MAC address filtering, 670 Authentication Header (AH) overview, 794 transport mode, 795 tunnel mode, 796 Authentication-Request message, PAP, 839 autoconfiguration, address, 263, 272–273 auto-cost referencebandwidth command, 628 Autoinstall feature, IOS, 328–329 automatic boot process defined, 339, 541 interrupting, 341–345, 361 Automatic Private IP Addressing (APIPA), 677 autonegotiating duplex mode, 379 autonomous mode, WLANs, 681 autonomous system (AS; single routing domain) defined, 275 IGPs, 625 RIP, 588–589 routing domain ID, 615 Autonomous System Number (ASN). See BGP autonomous system number command, 278 aux keyword, line ? command, 130

www.it-ebooks.info

auxiliary password defined, 333, 352, 535, 555 routers, 557–558 switches, 354–355 auxiliary port. See also auxiliary password routers, 521–522 switches, 317–318 avoiding loops. See also STP defined, 305 overview, 304–307 with STP, 379–380, 388 AWPP (Adaptive Wireless Path Protocol), 697

B backbone. See core layer (backbone) (Cisco hierarchical model) BackboneFast option, 405 back-end firewall, 721 backing up router running configuration, 550–552 switch running configuration, 348–349 backplane, defined, 101 backup controllers, configuring, 707–708 backup designated router (BDR), OSPF configuring, 637–638 OSPF priority, 638 overview, 629–630, 634 summarization, 631–632 backup port, 406 backward explicit congestion notification (BECN), 861–862

Index

bandwidth broadcast loops, 303, 386 cell-switched connections, 90 circuit-switching technology, 169 core layer, 101, 106 CSMA/CD, 293 defined, 9 distribution layer, 106 EtherChannel, 408, 424 Fast Ethernet, 324 IGRP, 200 LANs, 67–75, 78 overview, 575 PPPoE, 818 reserving using access rate and CIR guarantee, 858–859 static routing, 276 STP path cost, 393 summarization, 253 WANs, 85, 86, 88 banner command, 336 banner motd - command, 337, 539 banners configuring for routers, 538–539 configuring for switches, 336–337 base 2 numbering system. See binary system base 10 numbering system. See decimal system base 16 numbering system. See hexadecimal system base numbers, 50 Basic configuration form, SDM Express, 154–155 basic input-output system (BIOS), WPA-1, 96

Basic NAT Wizard welcome screen, SDM, 779 Basic Rate Interface (BRI), 846 basic service set (BSS), 684 basic service set identifier (BSSID), 684 Bc (Committed Burst) rate, 859 BDR. See backup designated router, OSPF Be (Bursts), 859 BECN (backward explicit congestion notification), 861–862 Bellman-Ford algorithm. See RIP best practices for access control lists, 740–742 for debug command, 497–498 to decrease STP convergence duration, 401 for duplex modes, 378 for router configuration backup and recovery, 550–551 for router passwords, 536 for routers, 517–519 for switch configuration backup and recovery, 348 for switch passwords, 334 for switches, 313–314 for VTP operating modes, 436 BGP (Border Gateway Protocol) administrative distance, 589

www.it-ebooks.info

901

autonomous systems, 588, 625 network layer, 199–200 bidirectional TCP connections, 30–32 binary powers of two (2n) numbering system, 239–240 binary system compared to hexadecimal system, 55 configuration register, 545 converting hexidecimal to, 58, 250 converting to hexidecimal, 57–58 notation, 56 overview, 51–53 BIOS (basic input-output system), WPA-1, 96 bit mask, defined, 635 bits configuration register, 545–547 defined, 56–57 SDUs, 189 blade, defined, 101 blocking frames. See blocking port blocking port assigning, 389 defined, 393, 395 overview, 399–400 setting, 398 boot command functions of, 339–341 routers, 541–544 boot enable-break command function of, 362 interrupting automatic boot process, 344–345

902


boot host option, 542 boot loader software. See bootstrap program boot manual command (manual boot option), 342–343, 361 boot network option, 543 boot process obtaining IOS version from output, 456 router, 541, 544–548 switch, 338–339, 341–345, 361–362 (boot)> (Rx-boot) prompt accessing Rx-boot image, 113 booting from, 544 function of, 321, 525 boothlpr option, 340 BOOTP, 33 bootstrap option, 542 bootstrap program (boot loader software) defined, 113 routers, 525–526, 541 switches, 321, 339 Border Gateway Protocol. See BGP border router. See perimeter router BPDU (bridge protocol data unit) overview, 398–399 STP recalculation process, 405 structure of, 399 TCN, 399 BPDUFilter option, 403 BPDUGuard option, 402 BRI (Basic Rate Interface), 846

bridge ID electing root bridge, 389 setting designated ports according to, 395–398 bridge protocol data unit. See BPDU bridges compared to hubs, 294 compared to switches, 295 defined, 9 purpose of, 294–295 segmenting with, 197 broadcast command, 873 broadcast domain broadcast query noise, 8 defined, 417 limiting size of, 10, 418 VLANs, 417–418 broadcast IP address data link layer, 223 network layer, 223–225 overview, 223–225 subnetting, 236 broadcast storm cause of, 380 defined, 8, 306, 388 example of, 303–305, 386–387 broadcast transmission, 308–311 brute-force attack, 723 BSS (basic service set), 684 BSSID (basic service set identifier), 684 Buffer logging field, 471 buffersize option, 340 Bursts (Be), 859 bus topology defined, 10 figure of, 11 first-generation LANs, 292–293

www.it-ebooks.info

business partner VPN, 787 bytes, defined, 56–57

C C (Check Sequence; Frame Check Sequence [FCS]) field, data link frames, 78 cabling, verifying connectivity of, 473–474. See also names of specific types of cabling Cain and Able software, 679 call setup. See three-way handshake call setup state, SVCs, 857 call termination state, SVCs, 857 callback service ISDN DDR, 845–846 LCP, 838 PPP, 833 carrier protocol, 792 carrier sense, defined, 658 carrier sense multiple access collision detect protocol. See CSMA/CD protocol carrier signal, defined, 651 Cat1 (Category 1) cabling, 192 Cat2 (Category 2) cabling, 192 Cat3 (Category 3) cabling 10-Mbps Ethernet, 67, 75 Fast Ethernet, 68–69, 75 full-duplex transmission, 65 half-duplex transmission, 65

Index

number of hosts, 78 overview, 192 T568B and T568A UTP termination standards, 79 Cat4 (Category 4) cabling, 192 Cat5 (Category 5) cabling 10-Mbps Ethernet, 67, 75 Fast Ethernet, 68–69, 75 Gigabit Ethernet, 70–71, 75 number of hosts, 78 overview, 192 T568B and T568A UTP termination standards, 79 Cat5e (Category 5e) cabling 10-Mbps Ethernet, 67 Fast Ethernet, 69 Gigabit Ethernet, 70–71, 75 number of hosts, 78 overview, 192 T568B and T568A UTP termination standards, 79 verifying connectivity of, 474 Cat6 (Category 6) cabling 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 73 Gigabit Ethernet, 70–71, 75 number of hosts, 78 overview, 192 T568B and T568A UTP termination standards, 79 Cat6a (Category 6a) cabling 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 73 Gigabit Ethernet, 75 overview, 193

Cat7 (Category 7) cabling Gigabit Ethernet, 70–71 overview, 193 T568B and T568A UTP termination standards, 79 Cat7a (Category 7a) cabling, 193 Catalyst switch. See Cisco Catalyst switch; switch CBAC (Context-Based Access Control), 729 CCK. See Complementary Code Keying CCKM (Cisco Centralized Key Management), 705 CCMP (Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code Protocol) encryption algorithm, 96 cd command, 351, 465–466, 553 CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) Cisco IP phone PC port, 450–451 CoS, 450 gathering network information, 491–494 VLANs, 450 cdp enable command, 492 cdp run command, 492 Cell Loss Priority (CLP) field, 814 cell-switched connection advantages of, 89–90 defined, 811 disadvantages of, 90 protocols, 90 central processing unit (CPU) register, 321

www.it-ebooks.info

903

certificate (key), IPsec, 788, 790 Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. See CHAP challenge text message, CHAP, 840 channel (inherent) attenuation, defined, 79 channel service unit/data service unit. See CSU/ DSU channel-group <#> mode command, 426 channel-group mode active command, 410, 432 channel-group mode auto command, 409, 432 channel-group mode desirable command, 410, 432 channel-group mode off command, 409, 432 channel-group mode on command, 409, 432 channel-group mode passive command, 410, 432 channel-group 1 mode on command, 409, 432 channel-group mode command, 409, 432 CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) overview, 840–841, 844–845 PPP, 835

904


chassis, defined, 101 cHDLC (Cisco HDLC). See also HDLC data framing, 824 overview, 823 SLARP, 825 Check Sequence (C; Frame Check Sequence [FCS]) field, data link frames, 78 Choose a Wireless Network dialog box, Windows XP ad hoc mode wireless networking, 678 infrastructure mode wireless networking, 680–681 CIDR (classless interdomain routing) addressing table, 238 overview, 237–238 RIPv2, 595 subnet zero, 240 subnetting, 236–238 CIR (committed information rate) guarantee, 858–859 circuit-switched connection advantages of, 87 defined, 811 disadvantages of, 87–88 packet switching networks versus, 169 protocols, 88 Cisco Aironet access points, 695 Cisco Catalyst switch. See also switch accessory items, 325 auxiliary modem connection, 317–318 boot loader output, 456

Cisco ISL frame-tagging method, 422 console connection, 316 Device Manager dashboard view, 131–132 displaying free space available in flash memory, 461 electing root bridge, 390–391 Express Setup utility, 326–331 front and rear panels of, 314 inspecting logs and system messages, 468 inter-VLAN routing, 440 running configuration, 462–463 starting up, 322 startup configuration, 463–464 STP priority, 392–393 VMPS, 421 Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM), 705 Cisco Device Manager (DM) GUI, 131–138 obtaining IOS version through, 458–459 overview, 112 verifying port status, 479 Cisco Discovery Protocol. See CDP Cisco HDLC (cHDLC). See cHDLC; HDLC Cisco hierarchical design model access layer, 105 benefits of, 105–107 core layer, 99–103

www.it-ebooks.info

distribution layer, 103–104 overview, 99 STP priority, 391–393 Cisco Internetwork Operating System (IOS) command-line interface, 116–130 GUI, 130–160 loading, 321–322, 339, 525, 541 overview, 112 router setup, 533–539 switch setup, 331–337 verifying port status, 474–479 version of, obtaining, 456–460 Cisco IOS File System (IFS) inspecting memory contents, 464–466 managing router configurations, 552–554 managing switch configurations, 349–352 NVRAM buffer size, 340 Cisco IOS Firewall, 728–730. See also firewall Cisco IOS software image (tar file) downloading, 357–358, 459, 560–561 lightweight mode wireless networking, 681 obtaining IOS version from name, 457 testing, 339, 541 verifying presence of, 461–462 Cisco IP phone CDP, 450–451 overview, 447–450 picture of, 448

Index

Cisco ISL frame tagging overview, 421–422 trunk ports, 429 Cisco LMIs, 860 Cisco Network Assistant (CNA) gathering network information, 490–491 GUI, 139–144 inspecting switch logs and system messages with, 472–473 obtaining IOS version through, 459–460 overview, 112–113, 540 verifying port status, 480–482 Cisco router. See also router accessory items, 518–519, 529 console connection, 520 front and rear panels of, 518–519 Cisco SDM client installation package, 145 launching, 149 purpose of, 145 Cisco SDM Express Webbased client, 151–152 Cisco SDM Installation Wizard, 145–148 Cisco SDM item, SDM Express, 159–160 Cisco SDM server, 145, 151 Cisco Security Device Manager (SDM) access control lists, 757–758 creating administrators, 527–528 firewalls, configuring, 757–758

Frame Relay, 873 installing client, 145–149 IPsec VPNs, 799–801 launching, 709 launching client, 149–151 NAT, 776, 779–780 overview, 113, 144–145, 540 PPP, 846 Cisco Security Device Manager (SDM) Express GUI, 151–160 overview, 540 Cisco serial interfaces, 809–810 Cisco Unified Wireless Networks Architecture (CUWN) Cisco WCS, 695 Cisco WLAN AP devices, 695 Cisco WLC, 692–694 overview, 691–692 Cisco Wireless Control System (WCS), 695 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller. See WLC Cisco WLAN Access Point (AP) devices, 695 Class A IP address address range and number of possible hosts, 219 binary ranges of, 217 disadvantages of, 237, 261 overview, 215–216 Class A network determining host addresses, 247–248 determining subnet addresses, 245–247

www.it-ebooks.info

905

private IP addressing, 222 subnet mask for, 221, 234 subnet table, 249 Class A subnet, 245–250 Class B IP address address range and number of possible hosts, 219 binary ranges of, 217 overview, 215–217 Class B network determining host addresses, 244–245 determining subnet addresses, 243–244 private IP addressing, 222 subnet mask for, 221, 234 subnet table, 246 Class B subnet, 243–245 Class C IP address address range and number of possible hosts, 219 binary ranges of, 217 overview, 215–217 Class C network determining host addresses, 241–242 determining subnet addresses, 240–241 private IP addressing, 222 subnet mask for, 221, 234 subnet table, 243 VLSM, 251, 253 Class C subnet, 240 Class D IP address address range and number of possible hosts, 219 binary ranges of, 218 overview, 215, 218

906


Class E IP address address range and number of possible hosts, 219 binary ranges of, 218 overview, 215, 218 class of service (CoS), VoIP, 447, 449–452 classful addressing, 236–237 classful routing protocols. See also EIGRP EIGRP, 614–615 features of, 614 RIPv1, 593–595 classless interdomain routing. See CIDR classless routing, 614–615. See also EIGRP clear access-list counter [list#] command, 749 clear ip nat statistics command, 777–778 clear ip nat translation command, 777, 780 CLI. See command-line interface client mode, VTP switches, 435 client roaming support, WLCs, 694 clock rate, 855–856 clock rate command, 826 CLP (Cell Loss Priority) field, 814 CNA. See Cisco Network Assistant coaxial cabling 10-Mbps Ethernet, 66–67 effect of number of hosts, 78

as example of bus topology, 10 half-duplex transmission, 65 codec (coder/decoder), 90 Code-Reject frame, LCP, 836 collision detection. See CSMA/CD protocol collision domain bridged networks, 294, 296 defined, 9–10, 417 effect of number of hosts, 78 Ethernet, 65 hub networks, 294, 296 LANs, 63, 293 switched networks, 295, 296 colon hexadecimal notation. See also hexadecimal system configuring IPv6, 271 defined, 264 Command field RIPng, 597 RIPv1, 594 RIPv2, 596 command-line interface (CLI) command shortcuts, 122–123 context-sensitive help, 124–130 default answers, 123–124 enabling and disabling components and services, 124 error messages, 123 NAT, 776–779 operation modes, 116–121 PPP, 841–842

www.it-ebooks.info

selecting component range to work with, 122 selecting components to work with, 121 Command/Response (C/R) bit, Frame Relay frames, 860–861 commands. See also names of specific commands listing, 125–129 listing arguments, 129–130 shortcuts, 122–123 Committed Burst (Bc) rate, 859 committed information rate (CIR) guarantee, 858–859 Committed Rate Measurement Interval (Tc), 859 CompactFlash cards, accessing, 114 Complementary Code Keying (CCK) IEEE 802.11b, 659–660 IEEE 802.11g, 660 compression HDLC, 826 LCP, 838 PPP, 833, 843 compression stac command, 826 computer cluster, defined, 7 computer host device. See host device (config) prompt, 333, 535 config t command. See configure terminal (config t) command config-file option, 340 (config-if) prompt, 333, 535

Index

(config-if-range) prompt, 333, 535 config-register command, 548 config.text file. See startup configuration file config.text.renamed file, 461–462 Configuration Archive option, CNA, 144 configuration register changing value, 113 managing router boot process with, 544–548 purpose of, 115 Configure button, SDM, 150–151 Configure menu, CNA, 141–142 configure terminal (config t) command function of, 119–120, 307, 332, 410, 534 short forms of, 123 Configure-ACK frame, LCP, 836–837 configured VLAN, defined, 427 Configure-NAK frame, LCP, 836–837 Configure-Reject frame, LCP, 836–837 Configure-Request frame, LCP, 836–837 Congestion Control fields, Frame Relay frames, 860–861 Connect Web form, CNA, 140 connectionless transport protocols transport layer, 29, 203 UDP as example of, 169–170

connection-oriented transport protocols TCP as example of, 169–170 transport layer, 29, 203 connectors, verifying connectivity of, 473– 474. See also names of specific connectors console Cisco Catalyst switch, 316 Cisco router, 520 logging system events and alerts to, 469, 471 UTP cabling, 816 console facility, 315, 519–520, 522 console keyword, line ? command, 130 Console logging field, 471 console password configuring, 334 defined, 333, 352, 535, 555 routers, 536–537, 555–556 switches, 334, 353 console port. See also console password routers, 519–521 switches, 315–317 Console Terminal Server connecting remotely to routers, 523–524 connecting remotely to switches, 318, 320 contact lid, verifying connectivity of, 473 content encryption, defined, 728. See also encryption Context-Based Access Control (CBAC), 729

www.it-ebooks.info

907

context-sensitive help listing command arguments, 129–130 listing commands, 125–129 overview, 124–125 Control field HDLC frames, 824 PPP frames, 833 controller link aggregation (LAG), WLCs, 694 controller port mirroring, WLCs, 694 converged network, defined, 398 convergence distance vector routing, 577 EIGRP, 612–613 hybrid routing, 582 link-state routing, 581 OSPF, 627 RIP, 587–588, 592–593 STP, 389, 398–401, 403, 405 copy command, 349, 351–352 copy running-config startup-config (copy run start) command function of, 115–116, 345–346, 548–549, 846 short forms of, 123 copy running-config tftp command, 348, 551 copy tftp running-config command, 551–552, 554 core layer (backbone) (Cisco hierarchical model) defined, 391 high availability, 100–103 overview, 99–100, 103 routers best suited for, 517–518

908


core layer (backbone) (Cisco hierarchical model) (continued) scalability, 106 specialization, 106 speed, 101–103 switches best suited for, 313 CoS (class of service), VoIP, 447, 449–452 cost metric OSPF, 628, 639 overview, 576 Count and timestamp logging field, 471 Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code Protocol (CCMP) encryption algorithm, 96 “counting to infinity”, 590 coverage hole detection and correction, WLCs, 694 CPE (customer premises equipment), defined, 809 CPU (central processing unit) register, 321 C/R (Command/Response) bit, Frame Relay frames, 860–861 CRC. See cyclic redundancy check CRC (Cyclic redundancy check) field, HDLC frames, 825 crossover cable connecting routers, 817 full-duplex transmission, 66

overview, 80, 815 trunk ports, 428 VTP, 437 crosstalk defined, 79 effect on full-duplex transmission, 66 crypto key generate rsa command %Invalid input error, 357, 560 SSH encryption keys, 359 crypto map command, 799 crypto map, VPNs, 797–798 CSMA/CD (carrier sense multiple access collision detect) protocol data link layer (TCP/IP), 37 Ethernet, 293 half-duplex transmission, 378 IEEE 802.11 standards, 658–659 IEEE 802.3 standards, 191 overview, 64–65, 194–195 CSU/DSU (channel service unit/data service unit) connecting routers, 817 as example of DCE, 809, 826 Ctrl+Break key combination disabling, 547 interrupting switch boot process with, 343–345, 361–362 overview, 113, 115 custom queuing, defined, 736 customer premises equipment (CPE), defined, 809

www.it-ebooks.info

cut-through switching mode, 376–377 CUWN. See Cisco Unified Wireless Networks Architecture cyclic redundancy check (CRC) Cisco ISL frame-tagging method, 421 data link layer, 196 overview, 78 WLANs, 659 Cyclic redundancy check (CRC) field, HDLC frames, 825

D dashboard view, Device Manager, 131–132, 458 data communications equipment (DCE; data circuit terminating equipment) connectors, 809–810 Frame Relay, 855–856, 865 keepalive frames, 825 LMIs, 860 overview, 808–809 serial interfaces, 810 X.25, 815 data encapsulation. See encapsulation Data Encryption Standard (DES), 788, 789 Data field data link frames, 76–78, 195 Frame Relay frames, 861 HDLC frames, 824 PPP frames, 833

Index

data frame. See frame (data frame) data integrity, VPNs, 786 Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) value, Frame Relay frames, 860–861 data link layer (OSI reference model) address resolution, 37 ARP and RARP, 196 broadcast IP addresses, 223 compared to network layer, 505 cyclic redundancy check, 196 encapsulation, 16, 180–182 Ethernet in, 75–78 frames, 195 function of, 506 information exchange between layers, 175–177, 188 overview, 18–19, 36–37, 178–179, 193–194, 291–292 PDUs, 43–45 placement in stack, 174–176 segmenting with bridges, 197 TCP/IP protocols at, 37 data segment. See segment data terminal equipment (DTE) connectors, 809 Frame Relay, 855–856, 862, 865–866 keepalive frames, 825

LMIs, 860 overview, 808–809 X.25, 814 data transfer state PVCs, 857 SVCs, 857 datagram. See access control list; packet (datagram); UDP data-link connection identifier (DLCI), 857–858 DB9 serial-to-USB converter, 521 DB-25 cabling and adapters, 816–817 DCE. See data communications equipment DDoS (distributed denial of service) attack, 724 DDR (Dial on Demand Routing) callback, 845–846 show dialer command, 851 traffic control, 737 DE (discard eligible), 861–862 debug commands disadvantage of, 828 function of, 497 PPP, 848–851 troubleshooting switch running configuration, 497–498 debug dialer command, 851 debug eigrp command, 620 debug frame-relay events command, 876–877

www.it-ebooks.info

909

debug frame-relay lmi command, 877 debug frame-relay packet command, 877 debug ip nat command, 776, 779, 780 debug ip nat detailed command, 779 debug ip ospf command, 641 debug ip rip command, 603 debug ip rip database command, 603 debug ip rip events command, 603 debug ip rip trigger command, 603 debug mode EIGRP, 620 OSPF, 641 overview, 497 debug ppp authentication command, 848–849, 851 debug ppp chap command, 849 debug ppp command, 851 debug ppp compression command, 851 debug ppp error command, 849–850, 851 debug ppp multilink events command, 851 debug ppp negotiation command, 850, 851 debug ppp packet command, 850, 851 debug ppp pap command, 851 debug serial interface command, 828, 851

910


decentralized network, defined, 168 decimal system compared to hexadecimal system, 55 notation, 56 overview, 50–51 dedicated leased line connection advantages of, 86 compared to VPNs, 786 defined, 86, 811 disadvantages of, 86 protocols, 87 deencapsulation, 189 default route defined, 219 overview, 570 delay, 575 deleting startup configuration routers, 540, 550 switches, 325, 338, 347–348 delimiting character (-), 337, 539 Deliver Configuration to Router screen, SDM, 779 demarc (demarcation point), defined, 809 demilitarized zone (DMZ), 719–721 demodulating, defined, 652 denial of service (DoS) attack Cisco IOS Firewall, 729 overview, 724 deny any statement, 750 deny ip any any command, 741 deny statement, 750

Department of Defense (DoD) model compared to OSI and TCP/ IP models, 207–208 layers of, 180 TCP/IP in, 179 DES (Data Encryption Standard), 788, 789 Description column Port Settings Web form, Device Manager, 133 Port Status Web form, Device Manager, 136 Description: field, CNA, 472–473 designated port, 393, 395 designated router (DR), OSPF configuring, 636–638 loopback interfaces, creating, 633–634 OSPF priority, 638 overview, 629–630, 632–633 router ID, 633 selecting, 633 summarization, 631–632 desktop layer. See access layer (Cisco hierarchical model) dest_ip syntax, ip route command, 569 destination IP address, defined, 750 destination MAC address (D-MAC; D-M) field broadcast transmission, 308 MAC address of Layer 2 switches, 374 MAC address table thrashing, 306, 387 overview, 76–77

www.it-ebooks.info

destination mask, defined, 750 destination service access point (DSAP) LLC layer, 194 overview, 77 Device column, CNA, 472–473 Device Manager. See Cisco Device Manager Device Properties screen, CNA, 459–460 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) access point discovery, 706 address autoconfiguration, 272–273 application layer, 207 compared to DHCPv6, 274 function of, 26 NAT, 764 overview, 171–172 TCP/IP port, 33 Web authentication process, 708 WLCs, 694, 702 DHCP client, defined, 155 DHCP configuration form, SDM Express, 157 DHCP item, SDM Express, 155 dhcp pool command, 274 DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6) compared to DHCP, 274 stateful addressing assignment, 273–274 DHPC Proxy, WLCs, 694 Dial on Demand Routing. See DDR

Index

dialer callback-secure command, 846 dialer callback-server command, 846 dialer enable-timeout command, 846 dialer group command, 846 dialer map command, 846 dialup modem, 87 dictionary attack, 723 Diffie-Hellman key exchange, 788 Diffusing Update Algorithm. See DUAL DIFS (distributed interframe space), 659 digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM), 818 Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections, 817–819 digital telephone lines, 87 Dijkstra shortest path first (SPF) routing algorithm, 628–629 dir all-filesystems command displaying available IFS directories through, 465 function of, 350, 553 dir command, 350–351, 465–466, 552–553 direct broadcast, 223–225 direct-sequence spread spectrum. See DSSS disable command, 118 disabled port, defined, 400 discard eligible (DE), 861–862 Discard-Request frame, LCP, 836

discontiguous network, defined, 615 distance command, 589 distance vector routing (rumor routing). See also BGP (Border Gateway Protocol); EIGRP (Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol); IGRP (Interior Gateway Routing Protocol); RIP (Routing Information Protocol) convergence, 577 overview, 576 protocols, 199–200, 577 route updates, 577 routing loops, 577–580 distribute list, defined, 736 distributed denial of service (DDoS) attack, 724 distributed interframe space (DIFS), 659 distribute-list prefixlist command, 277 distribution (workgroup) layer (Cisco hierarchical model) overview, 103–104, 391 routers best suited for, 517–518 scalability, 106 specialization, 106 switches best suited for, 313 Distribution System Port, WLCs, 693 DLCI (Data Link Connection Identifier) value, Frame Relay frames, 860–861

www.it-ebooks.info

911

DLCI (data-link connection identifier), 857–858 DM. See Cisco Device Manager (DM) D-M field. See destination MAC address (D-MAC; D-M) field D-MAC field. See destination MAC address (D-MAC; D-M) field DMZ (demilitarized zone), 719–721 DNS (Domain Name System) access point discovery, 706 application layer, 207 function of, 26 lookup queries, 723 overview, 171–172 purpose of, 7–8 TCP/IP port, 33 dns-server command, 274 do prefix, 119, 359 DoD model. See Department of Defense (DoD) model domain name, defined, 207 Domain Name System. See DNS (Domain Name System) domain-name command, 274 DoS attack. See denial of service (DoS) attack dot1q encapsulation method (IEEE 802.1q frame-tagging standard), 422, 429, 447 dotted-decimal notation, defined, 214–215

912


DR. See designated router (DR), OSPF DRS (dynamic rate shifting), 659 DSAP. See destination service access point (DSAP) DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) connections, 817–819 DSLAM (digital subscriber line access multiplexer), 818 DSSS (direct-sequence spread spectrum) IEEE 802.11, 658 IEEE 802.11b, 660 overview, 656 DTE. See data terminal equipment (DTE) DTP (Dynamic Trunking Protocol) overview, 429–430 port operation modes, 430–431 setting switch port operation mode, 426, 429 DUAL (Diffusing Update Algorithm) EIGRP, 609, 610, 613–614 EIGRPv6, 277 dual firewall, 720 dual-stack protocols migrating to IPv6, 280–281 NAT-PT, 284 Duplex column Port Settings Web form, Device Manager, 133 Port Status Web form, Device Manager, 136 duplex command, 379

duplex modes. See also fullduplex transmission; half-duplex transmission best practice, 378 configuring, 378–379 full-duplex, 65–66, 378 half-duplex, 65, 378 port speed, 379 selecting port, 379 dynamic auto port mode, DTP, 431 dynamic channel assignment, WLCs, 694 dynamic desirable port mode, DTP, 431 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. See DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6. See DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6) Dynamic Interface, WLCs, 693 dynamic map set reverseroute command, 798–799 dynamic NAT configuring, 772–775 operational flow, 768–769 overview, 765–766 dynamic rate shifting (DRS), 659 dynamic routes advantages of, 571 configuring, 571 defined, 157 disadvantages of, 571

www.it-ebooks.info

IPv6, 275 overview, 198 dynamic transmit power control, WLCs, 694 Dynamic Trunking Protocol. See DTP (Dynamic Trunking Protocol) dynamic VLAN membership overview, 420–421 VLAN trunking, 423

E EA (Extended Address) marker, Frame Relay frames, 860–861 Easy VPN Server Wizard, SDM, 799 Echo-Reply frame, LCP, 836 Echo-Request frame, LCP, 836 ECL (emitter-coupled logic), defined, 810 edge port, defined, 405 EGP (Exterior Gateway Protocol). See also BGP (Border Gateway Protocol) administrative distance, 589 IPv6, 275 EIA-310-D data center rack configuring routers, 529 configuring switches, 325 EIA/TIA (Electronic Industries Alliance and the Telecommunications Industry Association), 79, 192–193 EIA/TIA-232 connector, 810

Index

EIA/TIA-449 connector, 810 EIA/TIA-530 connector, 810 EIA/TIA-568-B cabling standard, 79 EIGRP (Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol) administrative distance, 573, 589 benefits of, 608–609 characteristics of, 609 classful and classless routing, 614–615 components of, 610 configuring, 615–617 convergence, 612–613 DUAL, 613–614 IGRP, 608 maximum hop count, 578 metrics, 575–576 monitoring, 617–619 network layer, 199–200 next-hop routers, 612 overview, 607 packet types, 612 route updates, 613 routing tables, 610–611 split horizon, 592 troubleshooting, 620 EIGRPv6 (Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol version 6), 277–278 Electronic Industries Alliance and the Telecommunications Industry Association (EIA/TIA), 79, 192–193 e-mail (electronic mail). See also SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) application layer, 27 defined, 6 IMAP, 174

Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) protocol, 27 POP3, 33, 173, 207 presentation layer, 27–28 emitter-coupled logic (ECL), defined, 810 enable (en) command, 118, 332, 350, 534, 552 Enable column, Port Settings Web form, Device Manager, 133 enable password my_priv_ password command, 355–356, 558–559 enable secret my_priv_ encrypt_password command, 355–357, 558–559 enable-break option, 340 Encapsulating Security Payload. See ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) encapsulation defined, 16 HDLC, 826 overview, 16, 41–45, 180–182, 189 PPP, 832, 843, 847 tunneling, 281 VPNs, 786–787 WANs, 811–815 encapsulation frame-relay command, 870 encapsulation frame-relay ietf command, 870 encapsulation hdlc command, 826 encrypted privileged mode password configuring, 356, 559 routers, 531–532 switches, 329–330

www.it-ebooks.info

913

encryption. See also IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) Cisco IOS image, 561 content, 728 password, 330, 532 router passwords, 559 SSH, 357, 559, 669 switch password, 356–357 VPNs, 786–787 WEP, 95, 667–668 WLANs, 667–670 Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol. See EIGRP (Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol) Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol version 6 (EIGRPv6), 277–278 enterprise-class router, 100 erase startup-config command, 347–348, 461, 540, 550 error detection HDLC, 823 PPP, 827 transport layer, 18, 28 error messages CLI, 123 ICMPv6, 275 ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) overview, 794 transport mode, 795 tunnel mode, 796 ESS (extended service set), 684 EtherChannel bandwidth, increasing, 424 displaying data regarding, 467

914


EtherChannel (continued) enabling, 409–410, 431–432 fault tolerance, 424 LACP, 408, 424 load balancing, 424 overview, 407–408, 423–424 PAgP, 408, 424 trunking, 425–427 versions of, 408, 424 Ethernet. See also 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GigE); 10-Mbps Ethernet; Fast Ethernet; Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) cabling standards, 191 CSMA/CD protocol, 64–65 duplex communication, 65–66 in OSI reference model, 75–80 overview, 63–64 wiring standards, 192–193 Ethernet_II data-link frame standard, 76–78 ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute), 650 EUI-64 (64-bit Extended Unique Identifier) defined, 266 IPv6, configuring, 271 MAC-to-EUI64 conversion, 273 European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI), 650 Event Description column, CNA, 472–473 Exception logging field, 471 EXEC process creation banner, 337, 539

exit command, 334, 353, 355, 537, 556, 558 expansion module slot, 107 Explanation: field, CNA, 472–473 Express Setup menu, Device Manager, 133–134 Express Setup utility, Cisco switch, 326–331 Express Setup Web form Device Manager, 133–134 IOS, 326–327 extended ACL configuring, 755 creating, 747–749 naming, 748 overview, 726–727, 738–739 placing, 740, 748 Extended Address (EA) marker, Frame Relay frames, 860–861 extended service set (ESS), 684 Exterior Gateway Protocol. See also BGP (Border Gateway Protocol) external attack, 722

F false synchronization packet, 739 Fast Ethernet 100BASE-T, 191 implementing on LANs, 78 over fiber-optic cabling, 69–70 over twisted-pair cabling, 68–69 overview, 75 STP path cost, 393 fastethernet command, 123

www.it-ebooks.info

fault tolerance, EtherChannel, 408, 424 FCC (Federal Communications Commission), 649–650 FCS. See frame check sequence (FCS) FCS field. See Frame check sequence (FCS) field feasible successor route EIGRP, 612, 614 topology table, 611, 618 FECN (forward explicit congestion notification), 861–862 Federal Communications Commission (FCC), 649–650 FHSS (frequency-hopping spread spectrum), 655–656, 658 fiber-optic cabling 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 73–75 Fast Ethernet, 69–70 Gigabit Ethernet, 71–73 File logging field, 471 File Management option, CNA, 143–144 file sharing, defined, 6 file transfer, defined, 6 File Transfer Protocol. See FTP (File Transfer Protocol) filtering frames action triggered by filter, 308 based on MAC address, 307 based on number of devices connected, 308 based on sticky MAC address, 308 defined, 305 overview, 301–304

Index

firewall ASA, 709, 711 Cisco IOS Firewall, 728–730 configuring with Cisco SDM, 757–758 demilitarized zone, 719–721 distribution layer, 104 ICMP, 486–487 infrastructure mode wireless networking, 680 IPsec, 790 SSL, 791 static routes, 568 VPNs, 669 Firewall Configuration Summary box, SDM, 758 Firewall item, SDM Express, 155 firewall router ACLs, 736 overview, 719 Flag field Frame Relay frames, 860–861 HDLC frames, 825 PPP frames, 832 flash: directory, 351, 465, 553 flash keyword, 346, 549 flash memory booting from, 544 displaying contents of, 552–553 displaying free space available in, 461 inspecting contents with Cisco IFS, 464–466 logging system events and alerts to, 469, 471

purpose of, 114 router startup process, 525–526 switch startup process, 321–323 flooded (limited) broadcast, 223–225 flooding frames defined, 305 fragment-free switching mode, 377 overview, 300–301 store-and-forward switching mode, 376 flow control TCP/IP, 29–32 UDP, 32 flush timer default setting, 600 error mitigation, 591 forward delay timer convergence duration, 401 defined, 400 forward explicit congestion notification (FECN), 861–862 forwarding frames. See also forwarding port defined, 305 fragment-free switching mode, 377 overview, 301 store-and-forward switching mode, 375 forwarding port assigning, 389, 400 transitioning edge ports to, 406–407 forwarding table, 197 fragment-free switching mode, 376–377

www.it-ebooks.info

915

frame (data frame) data link layer, 19, 36, 76–78, 193, 195, 291–292, 506 encapsulation process, 44–45, 181–182 filtering, 301–305, 307–308 flooding, 300–301, 305, 376–377 forwarding, 301, 305, 375, 377 Frame Relay, 860–861 HDLC, 824–825 LANs, 369–370, 659 physical layer, 19, 506 remote networks, sending to, 370–375 SDUs, 189 STP, 386 tagging with VLAN ID, 421–422 WLANs, 659 frame (message) collision. See also collision domain; CSMA/CD (carrier sense multiple access collision detect) protocol defined, 8–9 Ethernet, 64–66 full-duplex transmission, 378 half-duplex transmission, 378 hub networks, 293 overview, 194–195 frame check sequence (FCS) cut-through switching mode, 376 fragment-free switching mode, 377

916


frame check sequence (FCS) (continued) network access layer, 208 store-and-forward switching mode, 375 Frame check sequence (FCS) field data link frames, 78, 195 Frame Relay frames, 861 HDLC frames, 825 PPP frames, 833 Frame Relay flow and congestion control, 861–862 frame structure, 860–861 Inverse ARP, 862–863 link status control, 859–860 managing, 863–873 monitoring, 873–877 overview, 89, 812–813 purpose of, 855–856 reserving bandwidth, 858–859 troubleshooting, 873–877 virtual circuits, 856–858 frame-relay interface dlci command, 870 frame-relay lmi-type cisco command, 870 frame-relay map command, 863, 873 frequency defined, 652 modulating, 653 frequency-hopping spread spectrum (FHSS), 655–656, 658 front-end firewall, 721 FTP (File Transfer Protocol) application layer, 206 function of, 26 overview, 171

port for, 206 TCP/IP port, 33 ftp keyword, 347, 549 full-duplex transmission 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 73–74 defined, 191 Ethernet, 64 Fast Ethernet, 68–69 Gigabit Ethernet, 70–73 overview, 65–66, 378 setting switch transmission mode, 378 full-mesh topology, 12, 864–865 fully qualified domain name, defined, 207

G G. See giga (G) gateway defined, 16, 507–508 encapsulation process, 44 routing, 35 gateway address, 214 Generic Flow Control (GFC) field, ATM, 813 generic routing encapsulation (GRE), 282, 792 giga (G) binary system, 52–53 decimal system, 53 Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) 1000BASE-T, 191 implementing on LANs, 78 over fiber-optic cabling, 71–73 over twisted-pair cabling, 70–71 overview, 75 STP path cost, 393

www.it-ebooks.info

gigabytes, defined, 56 GigE. See Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) G/L (Global/Local) bit, data link frames, 76 global address defined, 766–767 LMI, 859 global configuration mode boot command, 340–341 function of, 332–333 overview, 118–119 global configuration prompt, 119 global NAT addresses, 766–767 Global/Local (G/L) bit, data link frames, 76 GRE (generic routing encapsulation), 282, 792 Group Authorization and Group Policy Lookup screen, SDM, 799–800 Group Authorization and User Group Policies window, SDM, 800

H half-duplex transmission 10-Mbps Ethernet, 66–67 defined, 191 Fast Ethernet, 68–69 overview, 65, 378 setting switch transmission mode, 379 handler, 724 hardware best practices for, 114 defined, 111 differentiating, 114

Index

hardware (MAC) broadcast, defined, 223 Hash Message Authentication Code (HMAC), 788–789 HCC (horizontal crossconnect), 79 HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control) authentication, 843 configuring, 826 frames, 824–825 links, 823–824 monitoring, 827–828 overview, 812 SLARP, 825 header ATM, 813 Cisco ISL frame-tagging method, 421 encapsulation process, 181–182 information exchange between layers, 189 MAC layer, 194 Header Error Control (HEC) field, ATM, 814 hello packets EIGRP, 609–610, 612–613 hybrid routing, 582 link-state routing, 581 OSPF, 626–627 hello timer defined, 619 EIGRP, 613 OSPF, 627 help (?) command function of, 124–127, 129–130, 347 switch: boot prompt, 345, 362 helper option, 340

helper-config-file option, 340 hexadecimal system. See also colon hexadecimal notation bits, 56–57 bytes, 56–57 compared to binary and decimal systems, 55 configuration register, 545 converting binary to, 57–58 converting to binary, 58, 250 nibbles, 56–57 notation, 56 overview, 53–55 hierarchical logical (IP) addressing, 34–36, 506–507, 512 high availability, defined, 7 High-Level Data Link Control. See HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control) high-modal-bandwidth fiber-optic cabling, 72 high-order bits, defined, 215 High-Speed Serial Interface (HSSI), 810 HMAC (Hash Message Authentication Code), 788–789 hold-down timer default setting, 600 distance vector routing, 580 error mitigation, 591 preventing reactivation of failed links, 593 holdtime parameter, cdp run command, 492

www.it-ebooks.info

917

Home screen, SDM, 149–150 hop count defined, 36, 198 distance vector routing, 578 EIGRP, 608 overview, 574 RIP, 590 horizontal cross-connect (HCC), 79 host address IPv6, 266 overview, 214–215 subnetting, 241–243 host configuration file, 542 host device (computer host device) backing up and recovering router configuration, 551–552 backing up and recovering switch running configuration, 348–349 CSMA/CD, 64 defined, 5–6 effect on size of collision domain, 78 hub networks, 293 IP addresses, 35, 507 MAC addresses, 75 host ID defined, 220 overview, 220–221 subnetting, 231, 233, 235, 236 host keyword ACLs, 746, 748 function of, 750 host name, defined, 207 Host Unreachable message, 737

918


hostname command, 331, 533 hosts file, 8 host-to-host transport layer (TCP/IP), 208 HSSI (High-Speed Serial Interface), 810 HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) application layer, 16, 206 function of, 26 overview, 170 port for, 206 TCP/IP port, 33 Web authentication process, 708 HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) TCP/IP port, 33 WLAN security, 669–670 hub compared to bridges, 294 compared to switches, 665–666 defined, 9 LANs, 63 purpose of, 7, 293–294 hybrid routing. See also EIGRP (Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol) convergence, 582 protocols, 582 route updates, 582 HyperTerminal terminal emulation application, 80 Hypertext Transfer Protocol. See HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol)

Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure. See HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure)

I IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) ASNs, 589 function of, 214 IPv6 address assignment, 266 port definitions, 33 ICANN (Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers), 214, 266 ICC (intermediate crossconnect), 79 ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) ACLs, 727, 737 gathering network information, 486–490 network layer, 34, 202 overview, 173 Ping of Death, 724 ICMPv6 (Internet Control Message Protocol version 6), 275 icons used in book, 2 ID. See interface identifier (ID) idle state PVCs, 857 SVCs, 857 IDS. See intrusion detection system (IDS)

www.it-ebooks.info

IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) LAN technology standards, 191 wireless standards, 649 IEEE 802.1d standard, 386. See also STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) IEEE 802.1p standard. See CoS (class of service), VoIP IEEE 802.1q frame-tagging standard (dot1q encapsulation method), 422, 429, 447 IEEE 802.1w standard, 405. See also RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) IEEE 802.3 standards. See also EtherChannel; LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) 802.3ab, 70–71, 75, 191 802.3ad, 408 802.3an, 75 802.3u, 68, 69, 70, 75 802.3y, 68 802.3z, 71–73, 75 cabling standards, 191 overview, 63, 74–75 IEEE 802.11 standards 2.4-GHz band, 657–661 5-GHz band, 660–661 802.11a, 655–656, 660 802.11b, 654, 659–660 802.11g, 654, 656, 660 802.11i, 96 802.11n, 654–657, 660–661 configuring for WLANs, 703

Index

overview, 657–659 wireless bands, 649 IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force), 262 IFS. See Cisco IOS File System (IFS) I/G (Individual/Group) bit, data link frames, 76 IGPs (interior gateway protocols), 275. See also OSPF (Open Shortest Path First); RIP (Routing Information Protocol) IGRP (Interior Gateway Routing Protocol) administrative distance, 589 EIGRP, 608 limitations of, 608 network layer, 199–200 split horizon, 592 IKE. See Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE Proposals screen, SDM, 799 IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol), 174 implicit deny statement, ACLs, 726 inbound ACL multiple, 741 overview, 739 inbound mapping, NAT, 764 | include boot suffix, 543 incoming terminal connection banner, 336, 538 %Incomplete command error message, 123 independence of layer functionality, 41, 43

Individual/Group (I/G) bit, data link frames, 76 Industrial, Scientific, Medical (ISM) radio bands, 650 informational messages, ICMPv6, 275 InfraRed, 658 infrastructure mode defined, 675 WLANs, 679–688 inherent (channel) attenuation, defined, 79 initial configuration dialog, IOS function of, 324 routers, 527, 530–533 switches, 326–331 Initial Sequence Number (ISN), 725 initialization vector (IV) WEP, 667 WPA, 668 inside global address defined, 766 NAT operational flow, 767 inside local address defined, 766 NAT operational flow, 767 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. See IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) int loopback command, 634 Integrated Services Digital Network. See ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) Integrated Services Router (ISR), 709

www.it-ebooks.info

919

interface (int ) command, 307 interface (int ) command, 307, 379 interface command function of, 120, 333 short forms of, 122 interface configuration mode, 332–333 interface fastethernet0/0 command, 534 interface identifier (ID) address autoconfiguration, 273 defined, 263 IPv6, 266 interface port-channel 1 command, 409, 431 interface port-channel command, 409, 425–426, 431 interface range command, 333, 426, 535 interface range configuration mode, 333 interface range fastethernet 0/3 - 4 command, 409, 432 Interface Selection screen, SDM, 800 interface vlan1 command, 332 interior gateway protocols (IGPs), 275. See also OSPF (Open Shortest Path First); RIP (Routing Information Protocol)

920


Interior Gateway Routing Protocol. See IGRP (Interior Gateway Routing Protocol) intermediate cross-connect (ICC), 79 Intermediate System–to– Intermediate System. See IS-IS (Intermediate System–to– Intermediate System) internal attack, 722 internal connection, Cisco IP phone, 447–448 internal log buffer displaying size of, 471 logging system events and alerts to, 469, 471 internal router, 719 International Organization for Standardization. See ISO (International Organization for Standardization) International Telecommunication Union, Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R), 650 International Telecommunication Union, Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T), 814 International Telecommunications Union (ITU), 860 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority. See IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority)

Internet Connection Sharing, Windows, 679 Internet Control Message Protocol. See ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Internet Control Message Protocol version 6 (ICMPv6), 275 Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN), 214, 266 Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF), 262 Internet Key Exchange (IKE) best practices for, 790 overview, 794 Internet layer (DoD model), 179–180 Internet layer (TCP/IP), 208 Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP), 174 Internet Protocol. See IP (Internet Protocol); IP (logical) address; TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol) Internet Protocol Security. See IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) Internet Protocol version 4. See IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4); NAT (Network Address Translation) Internet Protocol version 6. See IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6); NAT (Network Address Translation)

www.it-ebooks.info

Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol (ISAKMP), 796 Internet service provider (ISP), 214 Internet Small Computer Systems Interface. See iSCSI (Internet Small Computer Systems Interface) Internet Stream Protocol, 262 Internetwork Operating System. See Cisco Internetwork Operating System (IOS) Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX). See IPX (Novell Netware Internetwork Packet Exchange) interrupting switch boot process with Ctrl+Break, 343–345, 361–362 by enabling manual boot option, 342–343, 361 with Mode button, 342–345, 361 overview, 341–342 inter-VLAN routing advantages of, 418 network switch, 440–441 one large router with one port per VLAN, 439–440 one router per VLAN, 438–439 one subinterface per VLAN, 440 overview, 417, 438–439

Index

Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol (ISATAP), 283 intrusion detection system (IDS) Cisco IOS Firewall, 729 defined, 730 WLAN security, 671 WLCs, 694 intrusion prevention system (IPS) defined, 730 WLAN security, 671 WLCs, 694 %Invalid input error message, 123, 357, 560 invalid timer, 600 Inventory menu, CNA, 141–142 Inverse ARP (Inverse Address Resolution Protocol), 862–863 inverse subnet mask. See wildcard (inverse subnet) mask IOS. See Cisco Internetwork Operating System (IOS) IOS File System. See Cisco IOS File System (IFS) IP (Internet Protocol). See also IP (logical) address; TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) EIGRP, 609 network layer, 34, 202, 506 overview, 169 packet header, 170 transport layer, 29

IP (logical) address. See also ARP (Address Resolution Protocol); CIDR (classless interdomain routing); DNS (Domain Name System); NAT (Network Address Translation); RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol); subnet mask ACLs, 726–727 broadcast, 223–225 configuring default routes, 570 configuring for routers, 534–535 configuring for switches, 332–333 defined, 18 disabling validation, 601 format of, 197 function of, 213, 226 hierarchy of, 34–36, 214–221 IPv6, 263, 264–273 logging system events and alerts to more than one Syslog server, 469 network layer, 33–34, 198, 505–506 optimizing with VLSMs, 253 private, 222 purpose of, 7–8, 213–214 remote router connections, 522–523 wildcards, 635–636, 743–744 IP access control list (ACL). See access control list (ACL)

www.it-ebooks.info

921

ip access-group command editing ACLs, 742 function of, 746, 749, 752 ip access-list command, 751–752 IP ACL. See access control list (ACL) ip address command, 332, 534 IP Address field RIPv1, 595 RIPv2, 596 IP Addresses screen, CNA, 481–482 IP Cisco IOS image, 561 ip default-gateway command, 332, 534–535 ip domain-name silange. com command, 358 IP header manipulation, 724 IP masquerading, 727–728 ip nat allow-static-host command, 780 ip nat create command, 780 ip nat enable command, 780 ip nat inside command, 772, 773, 780 ip nat inside source static command, 771 ip nat log command, 780 ip nat outside command, 773, 780 ip nat outside source static command, 771 ip nat piggyback-support command, 780 ip nat pool command, 772–773, 780 ip nat portmap command, 780

922


ip nat service command, 780 ip nat sip-sbc command, 780 ip nat source command, 780 ip nat stateful id command, 780 ip nat syslog command, 780 ip nat translation command, 780 ip nat translation tcptimeout command, 773 ip nat translation timeout command, 773 ip nat translation udptimeout command, 773 ip nat translations command, 780 ip ospf cost value command, 639 ip ospf priority value command, 633, 638 IP packet sniffing (man-inmiddle attack), 679, 725 ip rip receive version command, 600 ip rip send version command, 600 ip route command, 569–570, 774 ip split horizon command, 867 IP spoofing, 724–725 ip ssh authenticationretries 2 command, 359 ip ssh time-out 60 command, 359 ip subnet-zero command line syntax, 241 IP-EIGRP, 610

IP/IPX/APPLETALK Cisco IOS image, 560 IPng (“Next Generation Internet Protocol”), 262 IPS. See intrusion prevention system (IPS) IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) best practices for, 790 IPv4 versus IPv6, 263 network layer, 34 overview, 173 RIPng, 597 VPNs, 787–790, 793–801 IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4). See also NAT (Network Address Translation) compared to IPv6, 262–263 migrating to IPv6, 279–285 number of allowable IP addresses, 214 IPv4-compatible IPv6 address, 283 IPv4-mapped IPv6 address, 283 IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6). See also NAT (Network Address Translation) addresses, 264–270 benefits of, 263–264 configuring, 270–275 migrating to, 279–285 overview, 261–262 routing with, 275–279 ipv6 enable command, 271 IPv6 prefix field, RIPng, 598 ipv6 route command, 276 ipv6 unicast-routing command, 270

www.it-ebooks.info

IPX (Novell Netware Internetwork Packet Exchange) EIGRP, 609 network layer, 202 IRC, 33 ISAKMP (Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol), 796 isakmp policy command, 797 ISATAP (Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol), 283 iSCSI (Internet Small Computer Systems Interface) application layer, 207 session layer, 28 ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) circuit-switched connections, 87 Dial on Demand Routing, 845–846 LREs, 819 UTP cabling, 816 ISDN Dial on Demand Routing. See DDR (Dial on Demand Routing) IS-IS (Intermediate System– to–Intermediate System) administrative distance, 589 network layer, 199–200 OSPF, 625 ISM (Industrial, Scientific, Medical) radio bands, 650

Index

ISN (Initial Sequence Number), 725 ISO (International Organization for Standardization) HDLC, 823 OSI reference model, 174 ISP (Internet service provider), 214 ISR (Integrated Services Router), 709 ITU (International Telecommunications Union), 860 ITU-R (International Telecommunication Union, Radiocommunication Sector), 650 ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union, Telecommunication Standardization Sector), 814 IV. See initialization vector (IV)

J jitter reduction, 813

K K. See kilo (K) keepalive message, SLARP, 825 keepalive value, LMI, 859 key (certificate), IPsec, 788, 790 keylogger, 723

kilo (K) binary system, 52–53 decimal system, 53

L L (Length) field, data link frames, 76–77 L2F (Layer 2 Forwarding), 792 L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), 792 LACNIC (Latin American and Caribbean Internet Addresses Registry), 266 LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) overview, 408, 424 selecting, 409–410, 432 LAG (controller link aggregation), WLCs, 694 LAN (local-area network). See also VLAN (virtual local-area network); WLAN (wireless localarea network) defined, 807 Ethernet, 63–80 first-generation, 292–293 NAT, 727–728 overview, 63 sending frames within, 369–371, 374 setting up and verifying for WLAN connection, 701, 703 STP priority, 392 zoning, 718–722 LAN configuration form, SDM Express, 156

www.it-ebooks.info

923

LAN item, SDM Express, 155 LAN LITE package, 358 LAN LITE W/O Crypto package, 358 LAN LITE W/O CRYPTO with Web-Based DEV MGR package, 358 latency, inter-VLAN routing, 439–440 Latin American and Caribbean Internet Addresses Registry (LACNIC), 266 Launch Telnet Console link, Device Manager, 137 Layer 1. See network access layer (TCP/ IP); physical layer (OSI reference model) Layer 2. See data link layer (OSI reference model); Internet layer (TCP/IP) Layer 2 Forwarding (L2F), 792 Layer 2 switch. See switch Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP), 792 Layer 3. See host-to-host transport layer (TCP/ IP); network (routing) layer (OSI reference model) Layer 3 (network) switch. See switch Layer 3 router. See router Layer 3 Trace Route screen, CNA, 485–486 Layer 4. See application layer (TCP/IP); transport layer (OSI reference model)

924


Layer 5. See session layer (OSI reference model) Layer 6. See presentation (syntax) layer (OSI reference model) Layer 7. See application layer (OSI reference model) LCP (Link Control Protocol) options, 837–838 overview, 836 PPP, 812, 833, 834–836 purpose of, 837 learning port, defined, 400 LED, access point, 706–707 Length (L) field, data link frames, 76–77 Length or Type field, data link frames, 195 licensed radio bands, 649–650 Lightweight Access Point Protocol. See LWAPP (Lightweight Access Point Protocol) lightweight access points (LWAP), 705–706 lightweight mode, WLANs, 681–683 limited (flooded) broadcast, 223–225 line ? command, 130 line ? command, 130 line command, 121 line configuration mode, 127–128, 129 line console 0 command, 334, 353, 355, 536, 556, 558

line vty 0 ? command, 335, 354, 537, 556 line vty 0-15 command, 335, 354, 359–360 line vty 0-4 command, 537–538 link aggregation, 407, 423. See also EtherChannel; trunking; VLAN (virtual local-area network) Link Aggregation Control Protocol. See LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) link authentication phase, PPP, 835 link configuration frames, LCP, 836 Link Control Protocol. See LCP (Link Control Protocol) link dead phase, PPP, 834 link establishment phase, PPP, 834 link maintenance frames, LCP, 836 link negotiator, 837. See also LCP (Link Control Protocol) Link Network Layer Protocol phase. See NLP (Link Network Layer Protocol) phase link quality determination phase, PPP, 835 link quality monitoring (LQM), PPP, 848 link termination frames, LCP, 836 link termination phase, PPP, 835

www.it-ebooks.info

link-local address address autoconfiguration, 273 IPv6, 269–271 link-state advertisement (LSA) OSPF, 626–627, 630, 632, 634 OSPFv3, 279 link-state routing. See also IS-IS (Intermediate System–to– Intermediate System); OSPF (Open Shortest Path First); RIP (Routing Information Protocol) convergence, 581 overview, 580–581 protocols, 582 route updates, 581 link-state table EIGRP, 613 OSPF, 626–627 LIR (Local Internet Registry), 214 listening port, defined, 400 LLC (Logical Link Control) header, 77 LLC (Logical Link Control) layer, 179, 193–194 LMI (Local Management Interface) configuring interfaces for Frame Relay, 868–870 defined, 859 link status control using, 859–860 load, 575–576

Index

load balancing EtherChannel, 408, 424 WLCs, 694 local address, defined, 766–767 local connection routers, 519–522 switches, 315–318 Local Internet Registry (LIR), 214 Local Management Interface. See LMI (Local Management Interface) local-area network. See LAN (local-area network); WLAN (wireless localarea network) Log buffer field, 471 log keyword, 756–757 logging [] command, 469 logging buffer, 756 logging buffered [] command, 469 logging command, 468–469 logging console [] command, 469 logging console command, 756–757 logging file [flash:] command, 469 logging level defined, 469 description of, 470, 756 logging monitor [] command, 469 logging on command, 468 logging trap [] command, 469

logical address. See ARP (Address Resolution Protocol); CIDR (classless interdomain routing); DNS (Domain Name System); IP (logical) address; NAT (Network Address Translation); RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol); subnet mask logical communication channels (sessions), 17 Logical Link Control (LLC) header, 77 Logical Link Control (LLC) layer, 179, 193–194 login, Device Manager, 131 login banner, 336, 538 login command, 124, 333–334, 352–355, 535–536, 538, 555, 557 login local command, 359 login page, Web authentication, 709–710 login tacacs command, 359 login Web form, CNA, 140 logs ACL, 750, 756–757 switch, 467–473, 496 traffic, 764 Long Range Ethernet (LRE), 819 long-wavelength fiber-optic cabling Fast Ethernet, 69–70 Gigabit Ethernet, 71 loopback address defined, 219 IPv6, 269–270 zero compression, 267

www.it-ebooks.info

925

loopback interfaces, creating, 633–634 loops. See routing loops low-modal-bandwidth fiberoptic cabling, 72 LQM (link quality monitoring), PPP, 848 LRE (Long Range Ethernet), 819 LSA. See link-state advertisement (LSA) LWAP (lightweight access points), 705–706 LWAPP (Lightweight Access Point Protocol) access point discovery, 705–706 lightweight mode wireless networking, 681–682 overview, 695–696 WLCs, 702

M M. See mega (M) MAC (hardware) broadcast, defined, 223 MAC (Media Access Control) layer, 179, 193–194 MAC (Media Access Control; physical) address. See also ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) data link layer, 36–37, 75–76, 291–292 electing root bridge, 389 filtering, 96 filtering based on, 307 format of, 197

926


MAC (Media Access Control; physical) (continued)

function of, 226, 291 learning, 296–300 MAC-to-EUI64 conversion, 273 network layer, 197–198 purpose of, 7–8 sending frames to remote networks, 370–375 sending frames within LAN, 369–370 sticky, 308 switches, 296–303 VLANs, 416 VMPS, 420–421 MAC address filtering, 96, 670, 694 MAC address table displaying data regarding, 467 Layer 2 switches, 297–303 MAC address table thrashing cause of, 380 defined, 306, 388 example of, 305, 387 MAC-to-EUI64 conversion, 273 Magic-Number option, LCP, 838 main cross-connect (MCC), 79 main distribution frame (MDF), defined, 818 Maintenance menu, CNA, 143–144 MAN (metropolitan-area network) defined, 807 relation to WANs, 85 wireless, 648

management access, WLAN security, 672 Management Interface, WLCs, 693 man-in-middle attack (IP packet sniffing), 679, 725 manual boot option (boot manual command), 342–343, 361 manual option, 340 manual tunneling, 282–283 MAP (Mesh Access Point), 697 map-class dialer command, 846 max age timer convergence duration, 401 defined, 400 overview, 405–406 maximum transmission unit (MTU), 78, 576 Maximum-Receive-Unit (MRU), LCP, 838 MCC (main cross-connect), 79 MD5 (message digest algorithm 5) CHAP, 840–841 IPsec, 789 RIPv2, 595 MDF (main distribution frame), defined, 818 Media Access Control (MAC) address. See MAC (Media Access Control; physical) address Media Access Control (MAC) layer, 179, 193–194

www.it-ebooks.info

mega (M) binary system, 52–53 decimal system, 53 megabytes, defined, 56 merge mode, PACLs, 754–755 Mesh Access Point (MAP), 697 mesh topology defined, 12 figure of, 12 Frame Relay, 864 message collision. See collision domain; CSMA/CD (carrier sense multiple access collision detect) protocol; frame (message) collision message digest algorithm 5. See MD5 (message digest algorithm 5) message of the day banner. See MOTD (message of the day) banner Metric field RIPng, 598 RIPv1, 595 RIPv2, 596–597 metrics. See also hop count; reliability bandwidth, 575 cost, 576, 628, 639 delay, 575 EIGRP, 609, 613 IGRP, 608 load, 575–576 MTU, 78, 576 offsets, 599 routing protocol, 572–573, 574–576 routing tables, 513

Index

metropolitan-area network. See MAN (metropolitan-area network) MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions), 27 MIMO (multiple-in, multiple-out), 656–657, 661 MLD (Multicast Listener Discovery) Protocol, 275 mls command, 451 MMF optic cabling. See multimode fiber-optic cabling (MMF optic cabling) Mode button, Cisco switch interrupting switch boot process with, 342–345, 361 resetting switches, 338 modulating, defined, 652 modulus number, number of bits in, 359 Monitor button, SDM, 150–151 Monitor logging field, 471 Monitor menu, CNA, 141–142 MOTD (message of the day) banner configuring, 337, 539 defined, 336, 538 MRU (Maximum-ReceiveUnit), LCP, 838 MTU (maximum transmission unit), 78, 576 Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Protocol, 275

multicast transmission compared to broadcasting, 223 defined, 309 EIGRP, 612 IPv4 versus IPv6, 263 IPv6 addresses, 269, 270 LMI, 859 overview, 308–311 multilinking LCP, 838 PPP, 833 multimode fiber-optic cabling (MMF optic cabling) 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 73–74 Fast Ethernet, 69–70, 75 Gigabit Ethernet, 71–73, 75 multiple access, defined, 658 multiple-in, multiple-out (MIMO), 656–657, 661 multiplexing defined, 203 port, 765, 769 multipoint topology Frame Relay, 868, 870–873 HDLC, 824 Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME), 27 multitasking, RIPv2, 595

N NACL (named access control list) mode, 751 name resolution, 207. See also DNS (Domain Name System) name server. See DNS (Domain Name System)

www.it-ebooks.info

927

named access control list (NACL) mode, 751 named ACL configuring, 755 creating, 751–753 overview, 739 nameif command, 797 naming routers, 533–534 switches, 331 NAT (Network Address Translation) commands, 780 configuring, 770–776 distribution layer, 104 local and global addresses, 766–767 managing, 776–780 migrating to IPv6, 283–285 operational flow of, 767–770 overview, 727–728 private IP addressing, 222 purpose of, 763–767 SSL, 791 traffic control, 737 types of, 764–766 NAT configuration summary screen, SDM, 779 NAT Configuration Wizard, SDM, 779 NAT item, SDM Express, 157 NAT overload. See PAT (Port Address Translation; overloading) NAT-PT (Network Address Translation–Protocol Translation), 283–285 NBAR (NetworkBased Application Recognition), 801

928


NBMA (nonbroadcast multiple access), 867 NCP (Network Control Protocol) overview, 838–839 PPP, 812, 833 NDP (Neighbor Discovery Protocol) address autoconfiguration, 273 ICMPv6, 275 neighbor discovery/ recovery, EIGRP, 610 neighbor solicitation message, 273 neighbor table EIGRP, 611, 613 OSPF, 626–627 nesting PDUs, 43 netmask parameter, ip nat pool command, 773 network (Layer 3) switch. See switch network (routing) layer (OSI reference model) broadcast IP addresses, 223–225 compared to data link layer, 505 distance vector and linkstate routing protocols, 198–202 encapsulation process, 16, 180–182 hierarchical IP addresses, 34–36 information exchange between layers, 175–177, 188 overview, 18, 33, 178, 197–198, 505–508

placement in stack, 174–176 routing versus routed protocols, 198 TCP/IP protocols at, 34 network access layer (DoD model), 179–180 network access layer (TCP/ IP), 208 network address IPv6, 266 overview, 214–215 Network Address Translation. See NAT (Network Address Translation) Network Address Translation–Protocol Translation (NAT-PT), 283–285 network command function of, 598 wildcards, 635–636 network configuration file, 542 Network Control Protocol. See NCP (Network Control Protocol) network devices defined, 5–6 physical addresses, 75 Network File System. See NFS (Network File System) network ID defined, 220 overview, 220–221 subnetting, 236 network int_IP command, 616

www.it-ebooks.info

network int_IP wildcard_ mask area area_id command, 635 network interface card. See NIC (network interface card) network layer protocols. See NLPs (network layer protocols) network routes. See also router default, 570 defined, 567 dynamic, 571 overview, 567–568 static, 568–570 Network Service Provider (NSP), 818 Network Stumbler, 670–671 Network Time Protocol. See NTP (Network Time Protocol) network zoning, 718–722 Network-Based Application Recognition (NBAR), 801 networks. See also names of specific types of networks applications using, 6–7 Cisco hierarchical design model, 99–107 operation flow of, 7–10 purpose of, 5–7 “Next Generation Internet Protocol” (IPng), 262 Next Hop field, RIPv2, 595, 597 {next-hop | interface} syntax, ip route command, 569

Index

next-hop router EIGRP, 612, 619 OSPF, 640 NFS (Network File System) application layer, 206 function of, 26 overview, 173 nibble configuration register, 545 defined, 56–57 NIC (network interface card) 10BASE2, 67 MAC address filtering, 306 physical addresses, 75 WEP, 95 WPA, 96 NLP (Link Network Layer Protocol) phase NCP, 838 PPP, 835 NLPs (network layer protocols) NCP, 839 PPP, 835 NNI interface, ATM, 813 no access-list command, 741 no auto-summary command, 614–615 no boot enable-break command, 344, 362 no boot manual option, 361 no cdp enable command, 492 no debug eigrp command, 620 no debug ip ospf command, 641 no encapsulation hdlc command, 826 no ip access-group command, 741

no ip nat inside source static command, 771 no ip route command, 569 no ip split horizon command, 867 no ip subnet-zero command line syntax, 241 no logging [] command, 469 no logging buffered command, 469 no logging console command, 469 no logging file command, 469 no logging monitor command, 469 no logging on command, 468 no logging trap command, 469 no login command, 334, 353, 536, 556–558 no prefix, 124 no service passwordrecovery command, 362 no shutdown command EIGRPv6, 277–278 function of, 332, 534, 797, 817 PPP, 842 short forms of, 123 noise effect on full-duplex transmission, 66 radio frequency signal, 685 nonbroadcast multiple access (NBMA), 867 noncontiguous port assignment, 739

www.it-ebooks.info

929

nonegotiate port mode, DTP, 430 nonroot bridge, 380, 388 nontrusting PC port, Cisco IP phone, 451 nonvolatile random-access memory. See NVRAM (nonvolatile randomaccess memory) normal response mode (NRM), HDLC, 825 Novell Netware Internetwork Packet Exchange. See IPX (Novell Netware Internetwork Packet Exchange) NRM (normal response mode), HDLC, 825 NSP (Network Service Provider), 818 NTP (Network Time Protocol) overview, 173 TCP/IP port, 33 time-oriented ACLs, 753 numbered ACL compared to named ACLs, 751 editing, 753 numbering systems binary, 51–53 converting, 57–58, 250 decimal, 50–51 hexadecimal, 53–57 overview, 49 NVRAM (nonvolatile random-access memory) amount of, 324 inspecting contents of with Cisco IFS, 464–466 purpose of, 114

930


NVRAM (nonvolatile random-access memory) (continued) router running configuration, 549–550 router startup configuration, 548 specifying size of, 340 switch running configuration, 346–347 switch startup configuration, 325–328, 331, 336–337, 345–347 VLAN configuration, 435 nvram: directory, 351, 465, 553

O octet, defined, 214–215 OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing), 656, 660–661 on demand routing, 589 Open Shortest Path First version 3. See OSPFv3 (Open Shortest Path First version 3) Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) reference model, 15 advantages of, 175 application layer, 16–17, 205–207 benefits of, 19–20 communication between layers, 175 compared to DoD and TCP/IP models, 207–208 data link layer, 18–19, 75–78, 193–197, 223

figure of, 174 information exchange through, 188–190 mnemonic for remembering layers, 175 network layer, 18, 197–202, 223–225 overview, 15–16, 174–179 physical layer, 19, 78–80, 190–193 PPP, 832 presentation layer, 17, 205 session layer, 17, 204–205 TCP/IP implementation of, 26, 168 transport layer, 17–18, 202–204 operation flow of computer networks, 7–10 STP, 393–401 operational flow Frame Relay, 865–866 NAT, 767–770 PPP, 834–836 Operational mode field, 477 Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI), 76 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM), 656, 660–661 OSI reference model. See Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) reference model OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) administrative distance, 573–574, 589 characteristics of, 626–627 configuring, 634–639 convergence, 627

www.it-ebooks.info

cost metric, 576, 628 maximum hop count, 578 monitoring, 639–640 network layer, 199–200 overview, 173, 625–626 route updates, 627–628 routing hierarchy, 628–634 routing tables, 626 troubleshooting, 641 OSPF cost, 639 OSPF priority defined, 633 overview, 638 selecting designated router, 633 OSPFv3 (Open Shortest Path First version 3) IPv6, 279 overview, 279 OTAP (over-the-air provisioning), 706 OUI (Organizational Unique Identifier), 76 outbound ACL overview, 740 placing, 750 outbound gateway, 510 outside global address defined, 766 NAT operational flow, 767 outside local address defined, 766 NAT operational flow, 767 overhead cell-switched connections, 90 defined, 90 HDLC frames, 825 PPPoE, 818 UDP, 32 overloading. See PAT (Port Address Translation; overloading)

Index

over-the-air provisioning (OTAP), 706 Overview screen, SDM Express, 154

P packet (datagram). See also access control list (ACL); UDP (User Datagram Protocol) defined, 169 EIGRP, 612 encapsulation process, 181 filtering, 104, 728–729, 736 network layer, 16, 18, 505 PDUs, 44–45 processing by routers, 509 processing by switches, 509 purpose of IP addressing, 213 RIPng, 597 RIPv1, 594–595 RIPv2, 595–597 routed protocols, 36, 511 routing, 513 SDUs, 189 VoIP, 446 packet header, 262–263 packet sniffer, defined, 94 packet-switched connection advantages of, 88 defined, 811 disadvantages of, 89 origin of, 168–169 protocols, 89 packet-switching exchange (PSE), 815

PACL (port ACL), creating, 754–755 PAgP (Port Aggregation Protocol) overview, 408, 424 selecting, 409–410, 432 PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) overview, 839–840, 844–845 PPP, 835 PAR (positive acknowledgment and retransmission) process, 31 parallel processing, defined, 7 partial mesh topology defined, 12 Frame Relay, 864, 866, 871–872 passenger protocol, 792 passive destination network, defined, 618–619 password access points, 671–672 console, 121 encrypting, 330 forgotten, 322, 341, 546 PAP, 839–840 PPP, 842–843 privileged EXEC mode, 117–118 router, 522–523, 531, 535–538, 555–559, 562 switch, 317, 319, 329, 333–336, 352–357, 360, 362–365 Telnet, 122

www.it-ebooks.info

931

types of, 333, 535, 555 VTP, 437 WLAN security, 671–672 password attack, 723 Password Authentication Protocol. See PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) password command, 333, 535 password guessing, 723 password my_password command, 334, 353, 355, 536, 556, 558 password my_telnet_ password command, 335, 354, 537, 557 PAT (Port Address Translation; overloading) configuring, 775–776 defined, 222 operational flow, 769–770 overview, 765 patch panel, 473–485 path MTU discovery, 275 Payload Type (PT) field, ATM, 814 Payment Card Industry (PCI), 667 PBX (private branch exchange), 819 PC (10/100 PC) connection, Cisco IP phone CDP, 450–451 purpose of, 447–450 PCI (Payment Card Industry), 667 PCMCIA card, 114

932


PDU (protocol data unit) defined, 42 encapsulation process, 42–43 information exchange between layers, 189 perimeter (border) router ACLs, 736 overview, 718 period, defined, 651–652 permanent virtual circuit (PVC) overview, 856–857 purpose of, 814 permission level_15_ access, CNA, 140 permit any any statement, 740–741 permit statement ACLs, 726–727, 740 defined, 750 phase, defined, 651–652 physical address. See ARP (Address Resolution Protocol); MAC (Media Access Control; physical) address physical layer (OSI reference model) cabling standards, 191 encapsulation process, 180–182 Ethernet in, 78–80 information exchange between layers, 175–177, 188 overview, 19, 37, 178–179, 190 PDUs, 45 placement in stack, 174–176 wiring standards, 192–193

piggybacking, WLANs, 94–95 ping command example of, 484, 487 ICMP, 173, 202, 486–487 PPP, 848 testing connectivity with, 482–484 using in CNA, 484, 490 Ping item, SDM Express, 159 Ping of Death, The, 724 Ping screen, CNA, 484 ping sweep, 723 pipe (|) sign, 569 PKI (public key infrastructure), 790 PoE (Power over Ethernet) port lightweight mode wireless networking, 682 WLCs, 693 Point-to-Point Protocol. See PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE), 818 point-to-point topology dedicated leased line connections, 86 defined, 10 Frame Relay, 867–870 HDLC, 823 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP), 792 poison reverse distance vector routing, 580 error mitigation, 592 POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) application layer, 207 overview, 173

www.it-ebooks.info

port for, 207 TCP/IP port, 33 port. See also names of specific ports; static (port-based) VLAN membership assigning STP, 389, 393–396 configuring speed, 379 DTP, 430–431 FTP, 206 HTTP, 32, 206 IANA definitions, 33 monitoring configuration, 410–411 POP3, 207 RSTP, 405 security, 307–308, 317, 319, 352, 522–523 SMTP, 32, 206 SNMP, 206 STP, 393–400 switch, selecting, 379 TCP/IP, 32–33 Telnet, 206 verifying status of, 474–482 VLANs, 416, 420, 434 port ACL (PACL), creating, 754–755 Port Address Translation. See PAT (Port Address Translation; overloading) Port Aggregation Protocol. See PAgP (Port Aggregation Protocol) port multiplexing, 765, 769 port number, setting designated ports according to, 396–398 port scans, 723

Index

Port Settings item, Device Manager, 132 Port Settings screen, CNA, 480 Port Settings Web form, Device Manager, 133 Port Statistics menu, CNA, 141–142 Port Statistics screen, CNA, 482–483 Port Status menu, Device Manager, 135–136 Port Status screen, Device Manager, 479 Port Status Web form, Device Manager, 136 port trunking. See also EtherChannel; trunking; VLAN (virtual local-area network) defined, 407, 423 displaying data regarding, 467 port-based (static) VLAN membership, 420, 434 PortFast option. See also RTF (Rapid Transitioning to Forwarding) overview, 401–402 using with BPDUFilter option, 403 using with BPDUGuard option, 402 positive acknowledgment and retransmission (PAR) process, 31 POST (power-on self test) defined, 113 routers, 525, 541 switches, 321–322, 324, 339

Post Office Protocol 3. See POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) Power over Ethernet port. See PoE (Power over Ethernet) port power-on self test. See POST (power-on self test) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) CHAP, 840–841 configuring, 841–846 dedicated leased line connections, 86–87 LCP, 836–838 monitoring, 847–851 NCP, 838–839 operational flow of, 834–836 overview, 812, 831–834 PAP, 839–840 troubleshooting, 847–851 ppp callback accept command, 846, 851 ppp callback request command, 851 ppp chap hostname command, 844 ppp compress command, 851 ppp multilink command, 851 ppp pap sent-username command, 844 ppp quality command, 851 PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet), 818 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), 792

www.it-ebooks.info

933

Pre field, data link frames, 76–77 preamble (synchronization bit), data link frames, 195 prefer port mode, PACLs, 754–755 prefix delegation, DHCPv6, 274 prefix length, defined, 237 Prefix Length field, RIPng, 598 prefix-length /24 syntax, ip nat pool command, 773 presentation (syntax) layer (OSI reference model) encapsulation process, 180–182 information exchange between layers, 175–177, 188 overview, 17, 177–178, 205 PDUs, 43–44 placement in stack, 174–176 TCP/IP applications at, 28 TCP/IP protocols at, 27–28 presentation layer (TCP/ IP), 27 Pre-Shared Key (PSK) WLAN security, 705 WPA, 668 priming access points, 706 priority queuing, 736 private branch exchange (PBX), 819 private configuration files, 340 private IP address ACLs, 742 overview, 222 private TCP/IP ports, 33

934


private-config-file option, 340 private-config.text file, 461–462, 465 private-config.text.renamed file, 461–462 privileged EXEC mode boot command, 341 CDP configuration commands, 492 defined, 116 interrupting automatic boot process, 342–343, 345, 361 listing commands in, 126–127, 129 overview, 117–118 security, 352, 555 privileged EXEC prompt, 118 privileged password defined, 333, 352, 535, 555 routers, 558–559 switches, 355–356 process_id value, 634 processing delay, defined, 575 propagation delay, defined, 575 protocol data unit. See PDU (protocol data unit) Protocol field HDLC frames, 824 PPP frames, 833 protocol parameter, show cdp entry * command, 494 protocol-dependent modules, 610

Protocol-Reject frame, LCP, 836 proxy ARP, 226 proxy server, 222 PSE (packet-switching exchange), 815 PSK. See Pre-Shared Key (PSK) PT (Payload Type) field, ATM, 814 public key cryptography, 788 public key infrastructure (PKI), 790 PVC. See permanent virtual circuit (PVC)

Q Q Cnt (Queue Count), 619 Q933A LMIs, 860 QoS (quality of service) enabling in IPsec VPNs, 800–801 enabling on upstream switch, 451 IPv6, 263 packet-switched connections, 88 VoIP, 446–447 QoS Policy Generation screen, SDM, 801 QoS Wizard, SDM, 800 quality of service. See QoS (quality of service) Quality-Protocol option, LCP, 838 queries, EIGRP, 612 Queue Count (Q Cnt), 619 queuing delay, 575

www.it-ebooks.info

R RA. See router advertisement (RA) radio frequency channels. See RF (radio frequency) channels Radio Resource Management (RRM), 703 RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) MAC address filtering, 670 WLCs, 703 RAM (random-access memory). See also NVRAM (nonvolatile random-access memory) inspecting contents with Cisco IFS, 464–466 purpose of, 115 random-access memory. See NVRAM (nonvolatile randomaccess memory); RAM (random-access memory) RAP (Rooftop Mesh Access Points), 697 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. See RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) Rapid Transitioning to Forwarding (RTF), 406–407

Index

RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol) data link layer, 37, 196 function of, 196 overview, 173, 226 RC4 (Rivest Cipher 4) stream cipher, 667 RCP (remote copy) protocol, 737 read-only connection, 140 read-only memory. See ROM (read-only memory) read/write connection, 140 receiving host encapsulation process, 42–44 TCP connections, 30–31 Recommended Action: field, CNA, 472–473 reconnaissance attack, 722–723 recovering passwords routers, 562 switches, 360–365 redundant link disadvantages of, 386 utilizing to send data, 407 reflection, defined, 685 reflexive access list, 739 regional Internet registry. See RIR (regional Internet registry) registered TCP/IP port, 33 reliability core layer, 100 dedicated leased line connections, 86 frame collisions, 64 full-duplex transmission, 66 full-mesh topologies, 12

IGRP, 200 overview, 575 packet-switched connections, 88–89 parallel processing, 7 WLANs, 94 Reliable Transport Protocol (RTP), 610 reload command function of, 341, 544 interrupting automatic boot process, 342–343, 361 REM statement, 746 remark command, 742 Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service. See RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) remote connection routers, 522–524 switches, 318–320 remote control, defined, 6 remote copy (RCP) protocol, 737 remote management computer host connecting to routers, 524 connecting to switches, 318–319 remote network sending frames to, 370–375 sending frames within LAN, 369–370 remote shell (RSH), 737 remote-access VPN, 787 remote-procedure call (RPC) protocol, 28 repeater, defined, 9 replay protection, IPsec, 789–790

www.it-ebooks.info

935

replies, EIGRP, 612 requests, EIGRP, 612 Réseaux IP Européens Network Coordination Centre (RIPE NCC), 266 reserved IP address IPv6, 269–270 overview, 219 Reset to Factory Default form, SDM Express, 159 Reset to Factory Default item, SDM Express, 159 resetting routers, 539–540 switches, 337–338 response message, CHAP, 840 Restart the switch radio button, Device Manager, 135 Restart/Reset menu, Device Manager, 134–135 Restart/Reset option, CNA, 144 Restart/Reset Web form, Device Manager, 135 Retransmission Timeout (RTO), 619 Reverse Address Resolution Protocol. See RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol) reverse routing, 797 RF (radio frequency) channels 2.4-GHz band, 653–654, 657–661 5-GHz band, 655, 660–661 modulating, 655–657 WLANs, 685 RID (router ID), 633

936


ring topology defined, 10 figure of, 11 RIP (Routing Information Protocol) administrative distance, 573–574 configuring, 598–601 convergence, 592–593 core layer speed, 102 hop count, 574, 578, 590 as interior gateway protocol, 588–589 limitations of, 608 network layer, 199 overview, 587–588 packets, 513 routing error mitigation methods, 590–592 routing tables, 590 routing updates, 590 split horizon, 592 TCP/IP port, 33 timers, 592–593 verifying, 601–603 RIPE NCC (Réseaux IP Européens Network Coordination Centre), 266 RIPng (Routing Information Protocol Next Generation), 276–277, 597–598 RIPv1 (Routing Information Protocol version 1), 593–595 RIPv2 (Routing Information Protocol version 2), 573, 595–597 RIR (regional Internet registry) ASNs, 589

function of, 214 IPv6 address assignment, 266 Rivest Cipher 4 (RC4) stream cipher, 667 RJ-45 (8 Position 8 Contact [8P8C]) connector 10BASE-T, 67 Ethernet standards, 191 T568B and T568A UTP termination standards, 79 RJ-45 cabling, 815–816 RJ-45–to–DB-9 adapter, 816 RJ-45–to–DB-9 cable, 815 RJ-45–to–DB-25 adapter, 816 rlqr failure message, 850 rogue AP detection, 694 rollover cable connecting to routers, 520–521 connecting to switches, 315–317 defined, 324 overview, 80, 815 ROM (read-only memory) Cisco software in, 113 purpose of, 114 ROMMON (ROM monitor), 113 rommon > (ROMMON) prompt accessing ROM Monitor, 113, 115 configuration register, 115, 544, 546–547 Rooftop Mesh Access Points (RAP), 697 root bridge defined, 380, 388 electing, 389–393

www.it-ebooks.info

root port defined, 393 setting, 394–395 route aggregation. See summarization (route aggregation; supernetting) route metrics, 567 route poisoning, 579–580 route summarization. See summarization (route aggregation; supernetting) Route Table Entries field, RIPng, 598 Route Tag field RIPng, 598 RIPv2, 595, 596 route update packets, 36, 511 route updates distance vector routing, 577 EIGRP, 609, 612, 613 error mitigation, 590–591 hybrid routing, 582 link-state routing, 581 OSPF, 627–628 permitting, 599 preventing, 599 reducing, 736 RIP, 587, 590 triggered, 593 routed protocols. See also names of specific routed protocols function of, 36, 511 ICMP, 202 IP, 202 IPX, 202 overview, 572 routing tables, 572

Index

router. See also EIGRP (Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol); OSPF (Open Shortest Path First); RIP (Routing Information Protocol) authentication, 554–562 best practices for, 114, 517–519 compared to switches, 295, 508–509 configuring, 528–554 connecting to, 519–524 functions of, 511–513 host names, 842 network layer, 505–508 network routes, 567–571 purpose of, 508–511 routed protocols, 572 routing decision criteria, 572–576 routing methods, 576–582 routing protocols, 571–572, 582 startup process, 525–528 router advertisement (RA) address autoconfiguration, 273 ICMPv6, 275 IPv6, 263 router eigrp as_id command, 615 router ID (RID), 633 router ospf process_id command, 634 router rip command, 598 Router> prompt, 527 router-id command, 277, 633 router-on-stick, 440

routing, defined, 33, 505 Routing configuration form, SDM Express, 157–158 routing domain ID (as_id), 615 Routing Information Protocol. See RIP (Routing Information Protocol) Routing Information Protocol Next Generation (RIPng), 276–277, 597–598 Routing Information Protocol version 1 (RIPv1), 593–595 Routing Information Protocol version 2 (RIPv2), 573, 595–597 Routing item, SDM Express, 157 routing layer. See network (routing) layer (OSI reference model) routing loops. See also STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) avoiding, 304–307, 379–380, 388 distance vector routing, 577–580 RIP, 591–592, 601 routing protocols. See also metrics; names of specific routing protocols configuring, 582 distance vector, 198–200 function of, 36, 511 link-state, 198–200 managing, 512 overview, 571–572

www.it-ebooks.info

937

routing table. See also route updates BGP, 200 building, 513 EIGRP, 610–611, 617–618 OSPF, 626, 639 overview, 35, 510–511 purpose of, 571–572 RIP, 587–588, 590 RPC (remote-procedure call) protocol, 28 RRM (Radio Resource Management), 703 RS232 parameters. See serial communications (RS232) parameters RS-232 straight-through cable, 816 RSH (remote shell), 737 RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) alternate port, 406 backup port, 406 enabling on switches, 407 max age timer, 405–406 RTF, 406–407 RTF (Rapid Transitioning to Forwarding), 406–407 RTO (Retransmission Timeout), 619 RTP (Reliable Transport Protocol), 610 rumor routing. See BGP (Border Gateway Protocol); distance vector routing (rumor routing); EIGRP (Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol); IGRP (Interior Gateway Routing Protocol); RIP (Routing Information Protocol)

938


running configuration defined, 321, 339, 525, 541 overview, 115–116 RAM, 115 routers, 549–552 switches, 346–349 troubleshooting, 496–498 running-config file, 351 Rx-boot image, 113, 321, 525 Rx-boot prompt. See (boot)> (Rx-boot) prompt

S SA (security association), 790 SAN (storage area network), 207 SAP. See service access point (SAP) Save Running Config to Router’s Startup Config check box, SDM, 779 scalability Cisco hierarchical design model, 106–107 dynamic routes, 571 IGRP, 200 IPsec, 789 static routes, 569 scattering, defined, 685 SDM. See Cisco Security Device Manager (SDM); Cisco Security Device Manager (SDM) Express SDU (service data unit), 189 Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA-1), 789 Secure Shell. See SSH (Secure Shell)

Secure Shell (SSH) ACL, creating, 749–750 Secure Socket Layer. See SSL (Secure Socket Layer) security. See also access control list (ACL); IPsec (Internet Protocol Security); NAT (Network Address Translation); SSH (Secure Shell); VPN (virtual private network) access ports, 427 console port and auxiliary port connections, 317, 319, 352, 522–523, 555 IPv4 versus IPv6, 263, 280 network zoning, 718–722 overview, 717 packet-switched connections, 89 port filtering, 307–308 RIP, 600–601 RIPv2, 595 risk mitigation methods, 725–730 risks, 722–725 static routing, 276, 568 VLANs, 418 wireless network, 94–96 WLANs, 704–705 WLCs, 694 security association (SA), 790 Security configuration form, SDM Express, 157–158 Security Device Manager. See Cisco Security Device Manager (SDM); Cisco Security Device Manager (SDM) Express

www.it-ebooks.info

Security item, SDM Express, 157 security zone, defined, 718 segment (data segment) access layer, 99, 105 broadcasting, 223 cell-switched connections, 90 defined, 16, 28 encapsulation process, 181 PDUs, 44–45 router before and after segmentation, 200–201 SDUs, 189 sequencing, 29, 30–31 segmenting data link layer, 197 defined, 417 overview, 9 SEM (system error message), 471 sending host encapsulation process, 42–44 TCP connections, 30–31 SEQ (TCP “Sequence”) message, 30 sequencing, 29–31 serial communications (RS232) parameters connecting to routers, 521 connecting to switches, 316 serial interfaces Cisco, 809–810 DCE, 810 Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP), 812 Serial Link Address Resolution Protocol (SLARP), 823, 825

Index

serial/USB port adapter connecting to routers, 521 connecting to switches, 317 Server Message Block (SMB), 33 server mode, VTP switches, 435 service access point (SAP) defined, 188–189 LLC layer, 194 service data unit (SDU), 189 service passwordencryption command, 357, 559, 843 service password-recovery command, 362 Service Port, WLCs, 693 service provider class device, 100 service provider (layer), 188 service set basic, 684 extended, 684 overview, 683–684 service set identifier. See SSID (service set identifier) service user (layer), 188 service-config command, 542–543 Service-Port Interface, WLCs, 693 session layer (OSI reference model) communications, 204–205 encapsulation process, 180–182 information exchange between layers, 175–177, 188

overview, 17, 28, 177–178, 204–205 PDUs, 43–44 placement in stack, 174–176 sessions (logical communication channels), 17 setup mode defined, 116 overview, 117 routers, 530 switches, 325 setup mode commands, IOS configuring routers, 533–539 configuring switches, 331–338 Severity column, CNA, 472–473 SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm), 789 shared key authentication, 668 shared network storage, defined, 7 shared secret, 668 shielded twisted-pair (STP) cabling, 79 “ships in the night” integrated parallel routing, 279 short-wavelength fiberoptic cabling, 70 show access-list [list #] command, 749 show access-list ACL_name detail command, 756 show access-list command, 741, 752–753, 755

www.it-ebooks.info

939

show access-lists command, 749 show boot command, 341 show cdp command, 491–493 show cdp entry * command, 494 show cdp interface command, 494 show cdp neighbors command, 493 show cdp neighbors detail command, 494 show clock command, 466 show command configuration mode, 345 function of, 272 short forms of, 122 show controllers command compared to show interfaces command, 466 function of, 817, 827–828, 851 show dialer command, 851 show env all command, 467 show etherchannel summary command, 467 show flash command, 461–462, 465 show frame-relay lmi command, 874 show frame-relay map command, 875 show frame-relay pvc command, 875–876 show frame-relay route command, 876 show frame-relay traffic command, 876

940


show interface command, 827 show interface serial command, 874 show interfaces command, 466, 847, 851 show interfaces serial command, 851 show interfaces status command, 467, 474, 476 show interfaces status err-disabled command, 467, 474 show interfaces switchport command, 467, 474–475, 476–478 show interfaces trunk command, 467, 475 show ip access-list command, 749, 756 show ip eigrp neighbors command, 619 show ip eigrp topology command, 618 show IP interface command, 214 show ip interface command, 475, 478–479, 749, 756 show ip nat statistics command, 777–778, 780 show ip nat translations command, 777, 780 show ip ospf database command, 640 show ip ospf interface command, 640 show ip ospf neighbor command, 640 show ip protocols command, 602, 618, 640

show ip rip database command, 603 show ip route command, 602–603, 617, 639, 777, 780, 851 show ip ssh command, 359, 360 show logging command function of, 467, 756 inspecting switch logs and system messages, 468 output of, 470–472 verifying port status, 475 show mac-address-table command, 467 show ppp multilink command, 851 show process cpu command, 843 show resource usage command, 756 show running-config access-list command, 756 show running-config command editing ACLs, 741 function of, 356, 559, 749, 843, 851 global configuration mode, 119 inspecting current switch configuration, 462–463 interface configuration mode, 121 show running-configuration command, 543 show spanning-tree backbonefast command, 410

www.it-ebooks.info

show spanning-tree command, 410, 467 show spanning-tree interface fastethernet 0/1 bpdufilter command, 411 show spanning-tree interface fastethernet 0/1 bpduguard command, 411 show spanning-tree interface fastethernet 0/1 portfast command, 411 show spanning-tree uplinkfast command, 410 show ssh command, 360 show startup-config command function of, 356, 559 inspecting switch startup configuration, 463–464 show tech-support command function of, 497 inspecting switch technical parameters, 466–467 show time-range command, 754 show version command, 457–458 show vlan command function of, 467 verifying port status, 475, 478 show vtp command, 438 show vtp status command, 438

Index

shutdown command, 332, 534 signals. See also wireless network modulating, 652–653 overview, 651–652 SIIT (Stateless IP/ICMP Translation) Algorithm, 284 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. See SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Simple Network Management Protocol. See SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) single routing domain. See autonomous system (AS; single routing domain) single-mode fiber-optic cabling (SMF optic cabling) 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 74 Fast Ethernet, 69 Gigabit Ethernet, 71–73, 75 site survey, 685 site-to-site VPN, 787 SLARP (Serial Link Address Resolution Protocol), 823, 825 sleeptime timer, 600 sliding window protocol, 31–32, 203 SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol), 812 S-M, 387 S-MAC. See source MAC address (S-MAC; S-M)

SmartPort feature interswitch connectivity, 437 overview, 428 Smartports item, Device Manager, 131–132 SMB (Server Message Block), 33 SMF optic cabling. See single-mode fiber-optic cabling (SMF optic cabling) Smooth Round-Trip Timer (SRTT), 619 SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) application layer, 206 Cisco IOS Firewall, 729 e-mail, 27 function of, 26 overview, 174 port for, 206 TCP/IP port, 33 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) application layer, 206 function of, 26 ports for, 206 TCP/IP port, 33 software, defined, 111 Software Update item, SDM Express, 159–160 Software Upgrade menu, Device Manager, 137–138 Software Upgrade option, CNA, 143–144 Software Upgrade screen, Device Manager, 458–459

www.it-ebooks.info

941

Software Upgrade Web form, Device Manager, 138 solicited-node multicast group, 270 source IP address, defined, 750 source MAC address (S-MAC; S-M) MAC address table thrashing, 306, 387 overview, 76–77 source mask, defined, 750 Source Service Access Point (SSAP) LLC layer, 194 overview, 77 Spanning Tree Protocol. See STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) specific configuration mode, 119–120 specific configuration prompt, 120–121 speed bridges, 295–296 cell-switched connections, 89 circuit-switched connections, 87 console line, 547 core layer, 100, 101–102 determination by physical layer, 190 full-duplex transmission, 65 hubs, 296 inter-VLAN routing, 439–441 packet-switched connections, 88

942


speed (continued) parallel processing, 7 port, configuring, 379 switches, 295–296 Speed column Port Settings Web form, Device Manager, 133 Port Status Web form, Device Manager, 136 speed command, 379 SPF (Dijkstra shortest path first) routing algorithm, 628–629 split horizon distance vector routing, 579 Frame Relay, 866–868 RIP, 592, 601 Split MAC function, 696 split tunneling, 793 splitter, 818 SQNs (TCP sequence numbers) Cisco IOS Firewall, 729 IP spoofing, 725 SRTT (Smooth Round-Trip Timer), 619 SSAP. See Source Service Access Point (SSAP) SSH (Secure Shell) enabling for routers, 560–562 enabling for switches, 357–360 logging to sessions, 469, 471 purpose of, 722 as replacement for Telnet, 171 TCP/IP port, 33 WLAN security, 669–670

SSH (Secure Shell) ACL, creating, 749–750 SSID (service set identifier) basic, 684 configuring, 704 extended, 684 hiding, 670–671 overview, 95, 683–684 SSL (Secure Socket Layer) VPNs, 787, 790–791 WLAN security, 669–670 standard ACL creating, 745–747 naming, 748 overview, 726–727, 738 placing, 740, 748 star topology defined, 10 EIA/TIA-568-B cabling standard, 79 figure of, 11 Frame Relay, 863 Start of Frame Delimiter, data link frames, 195 starting sequence number, 30 startup configuration NVRAM, 114 OSPF, 634 overview, 115 routers backing up, 540, 550 creating, 529–539 deleting, 540, 550 loading, 525, 541 monitoring, 550 overview, 548 switches backing up, 338, 347 creating, 325–331 deleting, 325, 338, 347–348

www.it-ebooks.info

loading, 321, 339 monitoring, 347 overview, 345–346 troubleshooting, 494–496 startup configuration (config.text) file copying configurations to, 352, 554 erasing, 461 hiding, 495 saving configurations to, 352 verifying presence of, 461, 465 startup process routers, 525–528 switches, 321–324 Startup Wizard, WLC, 702 startup-config keyword, 346, 549 stateful packet inspection, 728–729 stateless autoconfiguration, IPv6, 263, 272–273 Stateless IP/ICMP Translation (SIIT) Algorithm, 284 stateless packet inspection, 728–729 static (port-based) VLAN membership, 420, 434 static IP address, 702 static NAT configuring, 770–772 operational flow, 767–768 overview, 764–765 static packet filtering, 728–729 static routes administrative distance, 573–574, 589 advantages of, 568

Index

Cisco SDM Express, 157 configuring, 569–570 defined, 275 disadvantages of, 569 IPv6, 275–276 overview, 198 Status column, Port Status Web form, Device Manager, 136 sticky MAC address, 308 storage area network (SAN), 207 store-and-forward switching mode, 375–377 STP (shielded twisted-pair) cabling, 79 STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) avoiding loops with, 379–380 Cisco options for, 401–405 debugging, 497–498 displaying data regarding, 467 EtherChannel, 407–410 fault tolerance, 424 function of, 305, 388 monitoring, 410–411 operation flow, 389–401 overview, 197, 385–388 RSTP, 405–407 STP path cost overview, 393 setting designated ports according to, 395–396 STP priority Cisco hierarchical design model, 391–393 decreasing convergence duration, 401 default, 389

overview, 389–391 setting, 389–390 straight-through cable overview, 80 RJ-45, 815 RS-232, 816 structured attack, 722 stub domain defined, 764 dynamic NAT, 768–769 PAT, 769 static NAT, 767–768 subinterface, Frame Relay, 867, 870–873 subnet (subnetwork) broadcast IP addresses, 236 broadcasting, 223 CIDR, 236–238 Class A, 245–250 Class B, 243–245 Class C, 240 creating, 235–236 defined, 232 determining number of, 220 host addresses, 241–243 host IDs, 236 network IDs, 236 overview, 220–221, 231–232 planning, 239–250 purpose of, 232–234 subnet zero, 240–241 summarization, 253–256 VLSMs, 250–253 wildcard masks, 744 subnet ID, 232–233 subnet mask. See also VLSM (variable-length subnet mask) bit positions, 234–235

www.it-ebooks.info

943

compared to inverted subnet masks, 743 function of, 214, 221 IGRP, 608 OSPF route summarization, 631–632, 636–637 overview, 220–221, 234–236 Subnet Mask field, RIPv2, 596–597 subnet syntax, ip route command, 569 subnet zero, 240–241 subnetwork. See subnet (subnetwork) successor route EIGRP, 612, 614 topology table, 611, 618 summarization (route aggregation; supernetting) classful routing protocols, 614–615 disabling, 601 EIGRP, 200 OSPF, 630–632, 636–637 overview, 253–255 VLSMs, 255–256 supernetting. See summarization (route aggregation; supernetting) SVC. See switched virtual circuit (SVC) switch. See also STP (Spanning Tree Protocol); VLAN (virtual local-area network) authentication, 352–365 best practices for, 114, 313–314

944


switch (continued) broadcast transmission, 308–311 compared to bridges, 295 compared to hubs, 665–666 compared to routers, 295, 508–510 configuring, 324–352 connecting to, 315–320 data link layer, 291–292 defined, 9 duplex modes, 378–379 functions of, 296–307, 379–380 LANs, 63 monitoring configuration, 410 multicast transmission, 308–311 overview, 9 physical addresses, 10 purpose of, 295–296 remote networks, 369–375 security, 307–308 startup process, 321–324 switching modes, 375–377 troubleshooting, 455–498 unicast transmission, 308–311 VoIP, 445–452 Switch Information frame, Device Manager, 458 switch: manual boot prompt, 340, 345, 362, 495 switch port ACL. See port ACL (PACL), creating switched virtual circuit (SVC) overview, 857 purpose of, 814

switchport access vlan command, 434 switchport access vlan command, 420 switchport mode access command, 430 switchport mode command, 426, 428 switchport mode dynamic auto command, 431 switchport mode dynamic desirable command, 431 switchport mode trunk command, 426, 430, 433 switchport nonegotiate command, 430, 433 .switchport port-security mac-address command, 306 switchport portsecurity mac-address sticky command, 307 switchport port-security maximum command, 307 switchport port-security violation command, 307 switchport portsecurity violation shutdown command, 307 switchport trunk encap dot1q command, 422, 433 switchport trunk encapsulation command, 429 symmetric cryptography, 788 SYN flooding Cisco IOS Firewall, 729 IP spoofing, 725

www.it-ebooks.info

synchronization bit (preamble), data link frames, 195 syntax layer. See presentation (syntax) layer (OSI reference model) Syslog (System Logging Process) server, 33, 469, 471 Syslog logging field, 471 SYSLOG protocol configuring, 469 defined, 471 SYST (System LED), 342, 344, 361 system: directory, 351, 465, 553–554 system error message (SEM), 471 System LED (SYST), 342, 344, 361 System Logging Process (Syslog) server, 33, 469, 471 System Messages Monitoring tool, CNA, 472 system messages, switch inspecting, 468, 470–473, 496 managing logging system, 468–470 overview, 467–468 system option, 340, 543

T T (Type) field, data link frames, 76–78 T adapter, 67

Index

T568A UTP termination standard, 79 T568B UTP termination standard, 79 TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System) server login tacacs command, 359 storing privileged password on, 356, 558–559 tagging frames, 421–422 TA/NT1 (terminal adapter/ network termination 1), 808 tar file. See Cisco IOS software image (tar file) Tc (Committed Rate Measurement Interval), 859 TCN (topology change notification) BPDU, 399 TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) Cisco IOS Firewall, 729–730 compared to UDP, 32 overview, 169 packet header, 170 TCP/IP ports, 32–33 transport layer, 18, 29, 203 UDP versus, 170, 203–204 TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) Intercept feature, ACLs, 737 TCP flag, ACLs, 739 TCP sequence numbers. See SQNs (TCP sequence numbers) TCP “Sequence” (SEQ) message, 30

TCP session hijacking (man-in-the-middle attack), 679, 725 TCP sliding window, 31–32 TCP socket, defined, 204 TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol) applications, 27–28 ARP, 37 communication, 167–169 compared to DoD and OSI models, 207–208 components of, 169–182 connectionless transport, 29 connection-oriented transport, 29 flow control, 29–32 hierarchical IP addresses, 34–36 layers of, 207–208 origin of, 168–169 overview, 25–26 ports, 32–33 protocols, 26–29, 34, 37 UDP, 32 WLANs and security, 94 TCP/IP ports, 32–33 telecom (telecommunication company; service provider), 85 Telnet (Terminal Emulation Protocol) ACLs, 736 application layer, 206 logging to sessions, 469, 471 overview, 171 port for, 206 remote router connections, 523

www.it-ebooks.info

945

session layer, 28 TCP/IP port, 33 Telnet ACL, creating, 749–750 Telnet item, SDM Express, 159–160 Telnet menu, Device Manager, 136–137 Telnet option, CNA, 144 Telnet password configuring, 335–336 routers, 537–538, 556–557 switches, 353–354 Telnet Web form, Device Manager, 137 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol. See TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) terabytes, defined, 56 Terminal Access Controller Access Control System server. See TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System) server terminal adapter/network termination 1 (TA/ NT1), 808 terminal emulation application rollover cables, 80 Telnet applications supporting, 315–316, 521 Terminal Emulation Protocol. See Telnet (Terminal Emulation Protocol) terminal monitor command, 877 Terminate-ACKs frame, LCP, 835–836

946


Terminate-Request frame, LCP, 835–836 TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server, 113 Thicknet (10BASE5), 66–67, 75 Thinnet (10BASE2), 67, 75 three-legged firewall, 720 three-way handshake (call setup; virtual circuit setup) CHAP, 840–841 flow control, 30 TCP connections, 30–31 time range, defined, 753 time-oriented ACL, creating, 753–754 timeout value, NAT table entries, 772–773 timer parameter, cdp run command, 492 time-range command, 754 timers. See also names of specific timers adjustments to, 600 backup controller, 707 RIP, 592–593 timers basic command, 600 Timestamp column, CNA, 472–473 Time-To-Live value. See TTL (Time-To-Live) value TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) WLAN security, 705 WPA, 668 WPA-1, 96 TLS (Transport Layer Security), 669–670 topologies Frame Relay, 863–865, 868–873 overview, 10–12

topology change notification (TCN) BPDU, 399 topology table, 611, 618–619 Topology View, CNA, 141, 490–491 trace route (traceroute) tool, 485 example of, 488–489 ICMP, 486–487 testing connectivity with, 482 using in CNA, 485, 490 traceroute mac tool, 485 traceroute tool. See trace route (traceroute) tool tracert command, 489–490 traffic control, switches avoiding loops with STP, 379–380 duplex modes, 378–379 remote networks, 369–375 switching modes, 375–377 traffic logging, NAT, 764 trailer Cisco ISL frame-tagging method, 421 information exchange between layers, 189 MAC layer, 194 Transform Set screen, SDM, 799 Transmission Control Protocol. See TCP (Transmission Control Protocol); TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Intercept feature, ACLs, 737

www.it-ebooks.info

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. See TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) transmission delay, defined, 575 transparent mode, VTP switches, 435 transport input ssh telnet command, 360 transport layer (DoD model), 179–180 transport layer (OSI reference model) connectionless transport, 29 connection-oriented transport, 29 encapsulation process, 16, 180–182 flow control, 29–32 information exchange between layers, 175–177, 188 overview, 17–18, 28–29, 178, 202–204 PDUs, 43–44 placement in stack, 174–176 TCP/IP ports, 32–33 TCP/IP protocols at, 29 UDP, 32 Transport Layer Security (TLS), 669–670 transport mode, IPsec, 794–796 transport protocol, 792 Trap logging field, 471 triggered update, 580 Triple DES (3DES), 788

Index

Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server, 113 Trojan horse attack, 723 Troubleshoot menu, CNA, 143 troubleshooting access control lists, 755–758 Cisco hierarchical design model, 107 EIGRP, 620 Frame Relay, 873–877 NAT, 776–777 OSPF, 641 PPP, 851 switches connectivity, 473–485 gathering network information, 485–494 gathering switch information, 456–473 overview, 455 running configuration, 496–498 startup configuration, 494–496 VTP, 438 trunk mode, DTP, 430 trunk port DTP, 426 managing, 429–434 overview, 428–429 PACLs, 755 trunking EtherChannel, 423–432 overview, 422–423 port types, 426–429 VLAN, 425–426, 429–432 VTP, 434–438 trust exploitation attack, 724

trusting PC port, Cisco IP phone, 451 TTL (Time-To-Live) value extended ACLs, 739 ICMP, 202 limiting hop count, 590 poison reverse, 592 tty keyword, line ? command, 130 tunnel mode, IPsec, 794–796 tunnel mode ipv6ip command, 283 tunnel-group command, 798 tunneling defined, 728, 786 migrating to IPv6, 281–283 PPPoE, 818 VPNs, 792–793 twisted-pair cabling. See also UTP (unshielded twisted-pair) cabling 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 73 Fast Ethernet, 68–69 full-duplex transmission, 65 Gigabit Ethernet, 70–71 half-duplex transmission, 65 star topology, 10 Type (T) field, data link frames, 76–78

U UDP (User Datagram Protocol) Cisco IOS Firewall, 729–730 compared to TCP, 32, 170, 203–204

www.it-ebooks.info

947

overview, 169 TCP/IP ports, 32–33 transport layer, 29, 32, 203 unencrypted privileged mode password routers, 531 switches, 329 UNI interface, 813 unicast transmission compared to broadcast, 223 defined, 309 EIGRP, 610, 612 IPv6 addresses, 268 overview, 308–311 RIP, 599 Unicode, 28 U-NII (Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure), 650 Unlicensed Personal Communications Services (UPCS), 650 unlicensed radio bands, 649–650 Unrecognized command error, 730 unshielded twisted-pair cabling. See crossover cable; rollover cable; straight-through cable; twisted-pair cabling; UTP (unshielded twisted-pair) cabling unspecified address, IPv6, 269–270 unstructured attack, 722 UPCS (Unlicensed Personal Communications Services), 650 update timer, 600

948


updates, VTP, 436. See also route updates Upgrade button, Device Manager, 459 uplink (10/100 SW) connection, Cisco IP phone, 447–449 UplinkFast option, 403–405 Use a Custom Application Security Policy button, SDM, 757 User Datagram Protocol. See UDP (User Datagram Protocol) user EXEC mode defined, 116 listing commands in, 125–126, 129 overview, 117 user EXEC prompt, 117 username command, 528 UTP (unshielded twistedpair) cabling. See also crossover cable; rollover cable; straightthrough cable; twistedpair cabling 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 73, 75, 191 10-Mbps Ethernet, 66–67, 75, 191 common uses for, 816 difference between categories of, 79, 192–193 effect of number of hosts, 78 Fast Ethernet, 68–69, 75, 191 Gigabit Ethernet, 70–71, 75, 191

overview, 815 T568A and T568B termination standard, 79 verifying connectivity of, 474

V V.35 connector, 810 variable-length subnet mask. See VLSM (variable-length subnet mask) VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) field, ATM, 813 vendor-assigned part, MAC address, 76 Version Number field RIPng, 597 RIPv1, 595 RIPv2, 596 version parameter, show cdp entry * command, 494 video over IP, 6 Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) field, ATM, 813 virtual circuit Frame Relay, 856–859 permanent, 814, 856–857 switched, 814, 857 virtual circuit setup. See three-way handshake (call setup; virtual circuit setup) Virtual Interface, WLCs, 693 virtual local-area network. See VLAN (virtual localarea network)

www.it-ebooks.info

Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) field, ATM, 813 virtual private network. See VPN (virtual private network) virtual type terminal line. See VTY (virtual type terminal) line; VTY (virtual type terminal) line password VLAN (virtual local-area network) benefits of, 418 displaying data regarding, 467 identifying, 419 managing, 418–421 overview, 415–418 routing traffic between, 104, 438–441 STP priority, 390 tagging frames with VLAN ID, 421–422 trunking, 422–433 VoIP, 450, 452 VTP, 434–438 VLAN 1 (administrative VLAN) access ports, 427 configuring switches, 330, 332 overview, 419 VLAN column, Port Status Web form, Device Manager, 136 vlan command, 419 VLAN ID access ports, 427 defined, 421 ranges of, 436–437 tagging frames with, 421–422

Index

VLAN Membership Policy Server. See VMPS (VLAN Membership Policy Server) VLAN Trunking Protocol. See VTP (VLAN Trunking Protocol) vlan.dat file, 461 VLANs screen, CNA, 481 VLSM (variable-length subnet mask) design guidelines, 252 DUAL, 614 EIGRP, 200 optimizing IP addressing with, 253 OSPF, 200, 626 purpose of, 250–251 RIPv2, 595 VMPS (VLAN Membership Policy Server) automatic port membership assignment, 434 function of, 420 VoIP (Voice over IP) access ports, 427 CDP, 450–451 Cisco IP phone, 447–450 configuring, 451–452 CoS, 447 defined, 6 overview, 445–446 QoS, 446–447 VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) field, ATM, 813 VPN (virtual private network) defined, 785 implementation methods, 787–793

IPsec VPNs, 793–801 overview, 728 purpose of, 785–787 static routes, 568 types of, 787 WLAN security, 668–669 VTP (VLAN Trunking Protocol) benefits of, 434 client, 434–435 domain, 434–435, 437 dynamic membership, 420–421, 423 enabling, 437–438 functions of, 434 monitoring, 438 operating modes, 435–436, 438 pruning, 436 requirements for, 437 server, 435–437 static membership, 420, 434 troubleshooting, 438 updates, 436 VLAN ID range, 436–437 VTP client, 435–436 VTP domain, 434–435, 437 VTP domain controller (VTP server), 435–437 vtp mode client command, 435 vtp mode server command, 435 vtp mode transparent command, 435 VTP pruning, 436 VTP revision number, 436 VTP server (VTP domain controller), 435–437

www.it-ebooks.info

949

VTY (virtual type terminal) line ACLs, 736 defined, 333–334, 352, 535, 555 logging to sessions, 469, 471 number of, 335, 354, 537, 556–557 VTY (virtual type terminal) line password overview, 122 routers, 531, 535, 555 switches, 329, 333, 335–336, 352 vty keyword, line ? command, 130

W WAN (wide area network). See also Frame Relay; PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) cable connections, 815–817 cell-switched connections, 89–90 circuit-switched connections, 87–88 Cisco serial interfaces, 809–810 connection types, 811 connectors, 809–810 DCE, 808–810 dedicated leased line connections, 86–87 defined, 807 DSL connections, 817–819 DTE, 808–809

950


WAN (wide area network) (continued) encapsulation, 811–815 HDLC, 823–828 layers, 179 overview, 85–86, 807–808 packet-switched connections, 88–89 purpose of, 808 wireless, 93, 648–649 WAN configuration form, SDM Express, 156 WAN item, SDM Express, 155–156 WAN Wizard, SDM configuring Frame Relay, 873 configuring PPP, 846 WAP (wireless access point) device MAC address filtering, 96 WEP, 95 WPA, 96 WCS (Wireless Control System), 695 Web authentication process, 708–709 Web browsers application layer, 27 presentation layer, 27–28 well-known TCP/IP ports examples of, 33 range, 33 WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) ad hoc mode wireless networking, 677 overview, 95 WLAN security, 667–668, 704

wide area network. See WAN (wide area network) Wi-Fi. See IEEE 802.11 standards Wi-Fi Alliance defined, 95–96 wireless standards, 650 Wi-Fi Protected Access. See WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) wildcard (inverse subnet) mask compared to subnet masks, 743 defined, 726 OSPF, 635–636 overview, 742–745 Wired Equivalent Privacy, WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) wireless access point device. See WAP (wireless access point) device Wireless Control System (WCS), 695 Wireless LAN Controller. See WLC (Wireless LAN Controller) wireless local-area network. See WLAN (wireless local-area network) wireless mesh device ad hoc mode, 676 AWPP, 697 wireless metropolitan-area network (WMAN), 648

www.it-ebooks.info

wireless network, 93–96. See also WLAN (wireless local-area network) benefits of, 94 classes of, 648–649 costs of, 94 purpose of, 647 RF channels, 653–657 security, 94–96 sharing airwaves, 649–650 signals, 651–653 wireless WANs, 93, 648–649 Wireless Network Connection Properties dialog box, Windows XP, 676–678 wireless personal-area network (WPAN), 648 wireless wide-area network (WWAN), 93, 648–649 wiring standards, 192–193 WLAN (wireless local-area network) configuring, 701–711 managing, 691–697 operation modes, 675–683 overview, 93, 648 planning, 685–688 security, 665–672 service set, 683–684 standards, 657–661 WLANA (WLAN Association), 650 WLC (Wireless LAN Controller) configuring, 702–704 functions of, 696

Index

GUI, 709–710 lightweight mode wireless networking, 682–683 overview, 692–694 purpose of, 692–693 tuning access points, 688 WMAN (wireless metropolitan-area network), 648 workgroup layer. See distribution (workgroup) layer (Cisco hierarchical model) World Wide Web, defined, 6 WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) overview, 95–96 WLAN security, 667–668, 704 WPA-1, 96 WPA-2, 96, 667–668

WPAN (wireless personalarea network), 648 wrapping/unwrapping PDUs, 43–44 WWAN (wireless wide-area network), 93, 648–649

X X Windows, 207 X.25, 89, 814–815. See also Frame Relay

Z zero compression, defined, 267–268 Zero/Unused field RIPng, 597 RIPv1, 595 RIPv2, 596 zombie (agent), 724

www.it-ebooks.info

951

www.it-ebooks.info

CCNA Certification All In One For Dummies

Recommend Documents